SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

(Always read these instructions before using this product.)

Before using this product, thoroughly read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual
and pay careful attention to safety and handle the products properly.
The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product. For the safety precautions of the
programmable controller system, refer to the User's Manual for the CPU module.
In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as "

WARNING" and "

CAUTION".

WARNING

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

death or severe injury.

CAUTION

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

minor or moderate injury or property damage.

Note that the

CAUTION level may lead to serious consequences according to the circumstances.
Always follow the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal safety.
Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.

[Design Instructions]

WARNING
When data change, program change, or status control is performed from a personal computer to a running
programmable controller, create an interlock circuit outside the programmable controller to ensure that the whole
system always operates safely.
Furthermore, for the online operations performed from a personal computer to a programmable controller CPU, the
corrective actions against a communication error due to such as a cable connection fault should be predetermined as
a system.

[Startup/Maintenance Instructions]

CAUTION
The online operations performed from a personal computer to a running programmable controller CPU (Program
change when a programmable controller CPU is RUN, operating status changes such as forced input/output
operation and RUN-STOP switching, and remote control operation) must be executed after the manual has been
carefully read and the safety has been ensured.
When changing a program while a programmable controller CPU is RUN, it may cause a program corruption in some
operating conditions. Fully understand the precautions described in Section 12.9 before use.
The positioning test functions of OPR, JOG, inching or positioning data for QD75/LD75 positioning module must be
executed with the programmable controller set to STOP after the manual has been carefully read and the safety has
been ensured. Specially when executing the function on the network system, ensure the safety thoroughly since the
machinery whose operation cannot be checked by an operator may be activated. The operation failure may cause the
injury or machine damage.

A -1

CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT

(1) Mitsubishi programmable controller ("the PRODUCT") shall be used in conditions;
i) where any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT, if any, shall not lead to any major or
serious accident; and
ii) where the backup and fail-safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the
PRODUCT for the case of any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT.
(2) The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general
industries.
MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT,
PRODUCT LIABILITY) FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO
PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT
INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS, PRECAUTIONS, OR WARNING CONTAINED IN
MITSUBISHI'S USER, INSTRUCTION AND/OR SAFETY MANUALS, TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND
GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT.
("Prohibited Application")
Prohibited Applications include, but not limited to, the use of the PRODUCT in;
Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies, and/or any other
cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT.
Railway companies or Public service purposes, and/or any other cases in which establishment of a
special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User.
Aircraft or Aerospace, Medical applications, Train equipment, transport equipment such as Elevator
and Escalator, Incineration and Fuel devices, Vehicles, Manned transportation, Equipment for
Recreation and Amusement, and Safety devices, handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or
Chemicals, Mining and Drilling, and/or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to
the public or property.
Notwithstanding the above, restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion, authorize use of the
PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications, provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is
limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special
quality assurance or fail-safe, redundant or other safety features which exceed the general
specifications of the PRODUCTs are required. For details, please contact the Mitsubishi representative
in your region.

A -2

REVISIONS
The manual number is written at the bottom left of the back cover.

Print date

Manual number

Revision

Jul., 2008

SH(NA)-080779ENG-A

First edition

Jan., 2009

SH(NA)-080779ENG-B

Model Addition
Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q20UDH, Q20UDEH, FX series
Addition
MANUALS, Section 2.1, Section 2.1.2, Section 2.1.3, Section 2.1.5, Section 2.1.6,
Section 2.1.7, Section 2.1.8, Section 2.3, Section 3.2.8, Section 5.2, Section 12.8,
Section 13.2, Section 14.5, Section 14.6, Section 14.7, Section 15.2.2, Section 15.3,
Section 15.4, Section 17.1.2, Section 17.4.3, Section 17.4.4, Appendix 6
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3,
Section 2.1.4, Section 2.3, Section 2.5, Section 3.2.1, Section 3.2.2, Section 3.2.3,
Section 3.2.4, Section 3.2.6, Section 3.3.1, Section 3.3.4, Section 4.1.6, Section 4.1.7,
Section 4.2.1, Section 4.3, Section 4.3.1, Section 4.3.5, Section 4.4, Section 4.4.1,
Section 4.5.2, Section 4.5.3, Section 4.6, Section 4.6.1, Section 4.7, Section 6.1,
Section 6.1.1, Section 6.2, Section 6.2.1, Section 7.1.2, Section 7.2.2, Section 7.2.4,
Section 8.1.2, Section 9.1.1, Section 9.1.2, Section 10.1.2, Section 10.2, Section 10.3,
Section 11.1.1, Section 11.2.3, Section 11.3, Section 11.8.1, Section 12.2,
Section 12.5, Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.5, Section 13.1.1, Section 14.1,
Section 14.3, Section 15.5.4, Section 16.1, Section 16.3, Section 16.5, Section 17.4.1,
Section 17.4.2, Section 18.3.2, Chapter 19, Appendix 1, Appendix 2, Appendix 3,
Appendix 4, Appendix 5, Appendix 7, Appendix 8, Appendix 9.3

A -3

Print date

Manual number

Jul., 2009

SH(NA)-080779ENG-C

Revision
Model Addition
Q00J, Q00, Q01
Addition
Section 4.1.4, Section 7.2.4, Section 10.3.2, Section 10.3.3,
Section 10.3.4, Section 10.3.5, Section 11.1.2, Section 12.9.3, Section 12.10,
Section 15.2.1, Section 15.2.2, Section 15.2.3, Section 16.5, Section 18.6.1,
Chapter 19
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL,
Section 1.3, Section 2.3, Section 2.5, Section 3.2.1, Section 3.2.8, Section 4.1.1,
Section 4.1.8, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.3.1, Section 4.3.5, Section 4.4, Section 4.6,
Section 4.8, Section 5.2, Section 6.1.1, Section 7.1.2, Section 7.2.2, Section 7.2.3,
Section 7.3, Section 7.4.2, Section 8.2, Section 9.1.1, Section 9.2.1, Section 9.2.2,
Section 10.3.1, Section 10.3.6, Section 11.1, Section 11.2.3, Section 11.4,
Section 11.9, Section 12.1, Section 12.1.5, Section 12.5, Section 12.9.1,
Section 12.9.4, Section 12.9.6, Section 12.11, Section 14.2.2, Section 14.7,
Section 15.1, Section 15.2, Section 16.2, Section 16.4, Section 17.2, Section 18.3,
Section 18.4, Section 18.6, Section 20.2, Section 20.3, Section 21.2, Section 22.2.2,
Appendix 1, Appendix 2, Appendix 4, Appendix 5, Appendix 6, Appendix 7,
Appendix 8, Appendix 9, Appendix 10,
Section 4.1.4 to 4.1.7 are changed to Section 4.1.5 to 4.1.8,
Section 4.6.4 is changed to Section 4.7,
Section 4.7 to 4.8 are changed to Section 4.8 to 4.9,
Section 7.2.4 to 7.2.5 are change to Section 7.2.5 to 7.2.6,
Section 10.2 to 10.3 are changed to Section 10.1 to 10.2,
Section 11.1.2 is changed to Section 11.2.3,
Section 11.9.3 to 11.9.5 are changed to Section 11.9.4 to 11.9.6,
Section 12.10 is changed to Section 12.11,
Section 14.2.3 to 14.2.4 are changed to Section 14.2.2 to 14.2.3,
Section 15.1.1 is changed to Section 15.2, Section 15.1.2 is changed to Section 15.4,
Section 15.2 to 15.5 are changed to Section 16.1 to 16.4,
Chapter 16 to 17 are changed to Chapter 17 to 18,
Chapter 18 to 19 are changed to Chapter 20 to 21,
Appendix 7 is changed to Appendix 6, Appendix 10 is changed to Appendix 8
Deletion
Section 3.3.5, Section 4.4.1

Oct., 2009

SH(NA)-080779ENG-D

Addition
Appendix 13
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.1,
Section 1.3.6, Section 2.1, Section 4.1.7, Section 6.1, Section 10.1.1, Section 10.3,
Section 11.8.1, Section 11.8.2, Section 12.2, Section 20.3.2, Section 21.1,
Section 21.2, Appendix 1.2, Appendix 1.6, Appendix 4.2, Appendix 4.3, Appendix 4.4,
Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.9, Appendix 4.10, Appendix 4.14, Appendix 7, Appendix 8,
Appendix 10.1, Appendix 12

A -4

Print date

Manual number

Jan., 2010

SH(NA)-080779ENG-E

Revision
Model Addition
L02, L26-BT
Addition
CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT, Section 3.3.4, Section 13.2,
Section 16.6, Section 18.4.5, Section 18.6.1, Section 18.7, Appendix 10.7,
Appendix 14
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL,
Section 1.3, Section 2.1, Section 2.2, Section 2.3, Section 2.4, Section 3.2.7,
Section 4.1.1, Section 4.1.3, Section 4.1.7, Section 4.1.8, Section 4.3, Section 4.5.1,
Section 4.5.5, Section 4.6, Section 6.1, Section 6.2, Section 6.3, Section 6.4,
Section 7.1.2, Section 7.2.6, Section 7.3, Section 9.1.2, Section 9.4.2, Section 10.1,
Section 10.2, Section 10.3, Section 11.2.1, Section 11.2.3, Section 11.3, Section 11.5,
Section 11.7, Section 11.8.1, Section 11.8.2, Section 12.1, Section 12.1.2,
Section 12.1.4, Section 12.2, Section 12.3, Section 12.5, Section 12.6, Section 12.8,
Section 12.8.2, Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.2, Section 12.9.4, Section 12.9.5,
Section 12.9.6, Section 12.10.2, Section 12.10.3, Section 12.10.4, Section 12.11,
Section 12.11.1, Section 12.11.2, Section 13.3.1, Section 13.3.2, Section 13.3.3,
Section 14.1.2, Section 14.5, Section 14.7, Section 15.1, Section 15.2, Section 15.2.1,
Section 15.2.3, Section 16.1, Section 16.4.1, Section 16.4.2, Section 16.4.3,
Section 16.4.4, Section 17.1, Section 17.2, Section 17.3, Section 17.4, Section 17.5,
Section 18.1.1, Section 18.1.2, Section 18.1.3, Section 18.1.4, Section 18.4.1,
Section 18.4.3, Section 18.5, Section 18.5.2, Section 18.5.3, Section 18.6,
Section 19.3, Section 19.4.1, Section 19.4.2, Section 19.5.3, Section 19.6,
Section 19.8, Section 21.1, Section 21.2, Appendix 1, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.3,
Appendix 1.4, Appendix 1.5, Appendix 1.6, Appendix 1.7.1, Appendix 1.8,
Appendix 2.1, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 4.2,
Appendix 4.9, Appendix 4.13, Appendix 5, Appendix 6, Appendix 7, Appendix 8.1,
Appendix 9, Appendix 10, Appendix 10.1, Appendix 10.2, Appendix 10.3,
Appendix 10.4, Appendix 10.5, Appendix 10.6, Appendix 10.7, Appendix 12

Apr., 2010

SH(NA)-080779ENG-F

Model Addition
Q50UDEH, Q100UDEH, LJ72GF15-T2
Addition
Section 4.1.8, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.1.2, Section 6.2.1, Section 12.12,
Section 18.1.4, Section 18.4, Appendix 4.13, Appendix 10.8
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL,
Section 1.1, Section 1.2, Section 1.3.1, Section 2.1.1, Section 2.1.2, Section 2.1.3,
Section 2.1.8, Section 2.3, Section 2.5, Section 3.2, Section 3.4, Section 3.5,
Section 4.1.2, Section 4.6, Section 4.6.3, Section 4.8, Section 4.8.5, Section 6.1,
Section 6.1.1, Section 6.4, Section 10.1.1, Section 11.1.1, Section 11.2.3, Section 11.3,
Section 11.4, Section 11.5, Section 11.6, Section 11.7, Section 12.4.1, Section 12.6,
Section 12.8, Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.2, Section 12.9.6, Section 11.2.3,
Section 14.1.2, Section 14.2.2, Section 16.1, Section 16.4.2, Section 16.4.3,
Section 17.1, Section 17.2, Section 17.3, Section 17.6, Section 18.1, Section 18.3,
Section 18.4, Section 18.5.3, Section 18.7, Section 18.7.2, Section 20.1,
Section 20.3.2, Section 21.1, Section 21.2, Chapter 22, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.6,
Appendix 2, Appendix 4.1, Appendix 4.2, Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.9, Appendix 4.13,
Appendix 5, Appendix 6, Appendix 7, Appendix 10, Appendix 12, Appendix 13
Section 18.4 to 18.6 are changed to Section 18.5 to 18.7
Appendix 4.13 to 4.14 are changed to Appendix 4.14 to 4.15

A -5

Print date

Manual number

Sep., 2010

SH(NA)-080779ENG-G

Revision
Model Addition
QJ72LP25, QJ72BR15
Addition
Section 16.2.2, Section 17.7, Section 18.8, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 15
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.2,
Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.2, Section 1.3.4, Section 1.3.5, Section 1.3.8, Section 2.1,
Section 2.1.2, Section 2.1.4, Section 2.1.6, Section 2.1.7, Section 2.2, Section 2.2.1,
Section 2.3, Section 3.2.1, Section 3.2.2, Section 3.2.3, Section 3.2.4, Section 3.2.6,
Section 3.3, Section 3.3.4, Section 3.3.5, Section 4.1.1, Section 4.1.2, Section 4.1.3,
Section 4.1.7, Section 4.1.8, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.5, Section 4.5.3, Section 4.5.5,
Section 4.6, Section 4.6.1, Section 4.7, Section 4.8, Section 4.8.5, Section 4.9,
Section 6.1.1, Section 6.2, Section 6.2.1, Section 9.1.2, Section 9.2.1, Section 9.2.2,
Section 10.1, Section 10.1.1, Section 10.2, Section 10.3, Section 10.3.1,
Section 10.3.2, Section 10.3.3, Section 10.3.4, Section 10.3.5, Section 11.1,
Section 11.1.1, Section 11.2, Section 11.2.1, Section 11.2.2, Section 11.2.3,
Section 11.3, Section 11.4, Section 11.5, Section 11.6, Section 11.7.1, Section 11.7.2,
Section 11.8.1, Section 11.8.2, Section 11.9, Section 12.1, Section 12.1.3,
Section 12.1.4, Section 12.1.5, Section 12.2, Section 12.3, Section 12.4, Section 12.8,
Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.5, Section 12.12, Section 13.1, Section 13.1.1,
Section 13.2, Section 13.2.1, Section 14.1.1, Section 14.1.2, Section 14.2.1,
Section 14.2.2, Section 14.3, Section 15.1.2, Section 15.2, Section 17.1, Section 17.2,
Section 17.3, Section 17.4, Section 17.7, Section 18.1.1, Section 18.1.4,
Section 18.2.5, Section 18.2.7, Section 18.2.8, Section 18.3, Section 18.4,
Section 18.4.4, Section 18.4.5, Section 18.4.6, Section 18.5.1, Section 18.5.3,
Section 18.6.2, Section 18.6.3, Section 18.6.4, Section 18.7, Section 21.2,
Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.2, Appendix 1.6, Appendix 2.1, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.4,
Appendix 2.5, Appendix 4.2, Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.12, Appendix 4.14,
Appendix 4.15, Appendix 6.1, Appendix 6.2, Appendix 7, Appendix 8, Appendix 9,
Appendix 10.1, Appendix 10.2, Appendix 10.3, Appendix 10.4, Appendix 10.5,
Appendix 10.6, Appendix 10.7, Appendix 10.9, Appendix 12, Appendix 15,
Appendix 4.6.3 is changed to Appendix 4.6.2, Appendix 2.3 is changed to Appendix 2.4

Jan., 2011

SH(NA)-080779ENG-H

Addition
TERMS, Section 3.3, Section 4.1, Section 12.5, Section 14.1, Section 14.3.4,
Section 20.4, Appendix 16
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL,
Section 1.3, Section 2.1.1, Section 2.1.3, Section 2.2, Section 2.3, Section 3.2.5,
Section 3.2.6, Section 4.1.2, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.2, Section 4.2.3, Section 4.2.4,
Section 4.2.5, Section 4.2.7, Section 4.2.8, Section 4.3.1, Section 4.3.5, Section 4.7.1,
Section 4.8, Section 6.1.2, Section 8.2, Section 9.4.1, Section 9.4.2, Section 10.1.1,
Section 10.2, Section 11.8, Section 12.1.5, Section 12.1.6, Section 12.2, Chapter 14,
Section 16.3, Section 18.1.1, Section 18.7, Section 19.1.1, Section 19.1.3,
Section 20.2, Section 20.3.1, Section 20.3.2, Section 21.2, Appendix 1.1,
Appendix 1.4, Appendix 1.8, Appendix 4, Appendix 7, Appendix 12, Appendix 15,
Appendix 16
Section 4.1 to 4.9 are changed to Section 4.2 to 4.10
Section 12.5 is changed to Section 12.6
Section 14.1 to 14.7 are changed to Section 14.2 to 14.8

A -6

Print date

Manual number

Mar., 2011

SH(NA)-080779ENG-I

Revision
Addition
Section 4.9, Section 16.6, Section 20.1, Section 20.3, Section 20.4, Section 20.5,
Section 20.6, Section 20.11,
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL,
Section 1.1, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.3, Section 2.2, Section 2.3, Section 3.3,
Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.2, Section 4.2.3, Section 4.2.4, Section 4.3.2, Section 4.6.1,
Section 4.7.1, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.2, Section 6.4, Section 10.1, Section 10.2,
Section 10.3, Section 11.1.1, Section 12.1.5, Section 12.7.1, Section 12.9.1,
Section 14.1.2, Section 14.6.2, Section 15.1.2, Section 15.3, Section 16.6.3,
Section 18.4, Section 18.6.3, Section 20.5.7, Section 20.8.1, Section 21.2,
Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.6, Appendix 4, Appendix 7, Appendix 10, Appendix 12,
Appendix 13, Appendix 16, Appendix 17,
Section 20.1 is changed to Section 20.2
Section 20.2 is changed to Section 20.9
Section 20.3.1 is changed to Section 20.7
Section 20.3.2 is changed to Section 20.10
Section 20.4 is changed to Section 20.8
Appendix 15 and 16 are changed to Appendix 16 and 17

Jul., 2011

SH(NA)-080779ENG-J

Model Addition
L02-P, L26-PBT
Addition
Section 2.1.9, Section 3.4.1, Section 4.1.2, Section 5.2, Section 5.3, Section 10.1.2,
Section 12.10.4, Section 20.5.1, Section 20.5.2, Section 20.5.3, Section 20.5.8,
Section 20.5.12, Section 20.5.13, Section 20.5.14, Section 20.5.15, Section 20.5.16,
Section 20.5.18, Appendix 1.2
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, TERMS,
Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.2, Section 1.3.3, Section 1.3.6, Section 2.1, Section 2.2,
Section 2.3, Section 2.5, Section 3.1, Section 3.3, Section 3.4, Section 4.1,
Section 4.1.1, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.2, Section 4.2.3, Section 4.2.7, Section 4.2.8,
Section 4.3.1, Section 4.11, Section 4.11.2, Section 6.1.1, Section 9.1.1, Section 9.2.2,
Section 9.4.2, Section 10.1, Section 10.1.1, Section 10.1.3, Section 10.2,
Section 10.3.1, Section 10.3.2, Section 10.3.3, Section 10.3.4, Section 11.6,
Section 12.1, Section 12.1.5, Section 12.1.6, Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.6,
Section 12.10.1, Section 12.10.2, Section 12.10.3, Section 13.3, Section 16.6,
Section 16.6.1, Section 16.6.2, Section 16.6.3, Section 16.6.4, Section 16.6.5,
Section 16.6.8, Section 17.1, Section 17.5, Section 18.1.1, Section 18.4,
Section 18.5.1, Section 18.6.2, Section 20.1, Section 20.3, Section 20.4,
Section 20.5.2, Section 20.5.3, Section 20.5.13, Section 20.5.18, Section 20.5.4,
Section 20.5.5, Section 20.5.6, Section 20.5.9, Section 20.5.11, Section 20.10,
Section 20.11, Section 21.1, Section 21.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.7, Appendix 4.2,
Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.10, Appendix 4.13, Appendix 4.16, Appendix 4.18,
Appendix 6.1, Appendix 6.2, Appendix 7, Appendix 10.9, Appendix 12
Section 2.1.9 is changed to Section 2.1.10
Section 3.4.6 and Section 3.4.7 are changed to Section 3.4.3 and Section 3.4.4
Section 4.1.2 is changed to Section 4.1.3
Section 5.2 is changed to Section 5.4
Section 10.1.2 is changed to Section 10.1.3
Section 12.10.4 is changed to Section 12.10.5
Section 20.5.1 to Section 20.5.4 are changed to Section 20.5.4 to Section 20.5.7
Section 20.5.5 to Section 20.5.7 are changed to Section 20.5.9 to Section 20.5.11
Section 20.5.8 is changed to Section 20.5.17
Appendix 1.2 to Appendix 1.8 are changed to Appendix 1.3 to Appendix 1.9
Deletion
Section 3.4.2, Section 3.4.3, Section 3.4.5, Section 3.4.6

A -7

Print date

Manual number

Sep., 2011

SH(NA)-080779ENG-K

Revision
Addition
Section 2.1.10, Section 9.5, Section 11.9, Section 20.3.1
Correction
TERMS, Section 1.3.1, Section 2.1, Section 3.2.6, Section 3.4, Section 4.2.7,
Section 4.2.8, Section 4.6.5, Section 6.2, Section 9.1.2, Section 9.2.1, Section 9.4.2,
Section 11.1.1, Section 12.1.3, Section 12.2, Section 18.1.1, Section 20.2,
Section 20.3, Section 20.4, Section 20.5.4, Section 20.5.5, Section 20.5.6,
Section 20.5.9, Section 20.5.11, Section 20.5.12, Section 20.5.14, Section 20.11,
Appendix 4.3, Appendix 4.6, Appendix 4.16, Appendix 5.1, Appendix 6.1, Appendix 7,
Appendix 8, Appendix 10, Appendix 12, Appendix 13.1, Appendix 13.2
Section 2.1.10 is changed to Section 2.1.11
Section 11.9 is changed to Section 11.10
Deletion
Section 6.2.2

Japanese Manual Version SH-080730-S

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses.
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur
as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

2008 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

A -8

INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi integrated FA software, MELSOFT series.
Before using the product, thoroughly read this manual to develop full familiarity with the functions and
performance to ensure correct use.

CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ...................................................................................................................... A - 1
CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT ..................................................................................... A - 2
REVISIONS ........................................................................................................................................... A - 3
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................... A - 9
CONTENTS ........................................................................................................................................... A - 9
MANUALS............................................................................................................................................ A - 22
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL........................................................... A - 31
TERMS ................................................................................................................................................ A - 33
1

OVERVIEW

1 - 1 to 1 - 30

1.1

Product Overview

1-2

1.2

Features

1-4

1.3

List of Functions

1-9

1.3.1

List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project.............................................. 1 - 9

1.3.2

List of functions for editing in ladder language ........................................................................... 1 - 20

1.3.3

List of functions for editing SFC diagrams.................................................................................. 1 - 23

1.3.4

List of functions for editing SFC block list................................................................................... 1 - 24

1.3.5

List of functions for editing in ST language................................................................................. 1 - 25

1.3.6

List of functions for editing in structured ladder/FBD language .................................................. 1 - 26

1.3.7

List of functions for GX Simulator2 screen ................................................................................. 1 - 28

1.3.8

List of functions for I/O system setting screen............................................................................ 1 - 28

1.3.9

List of functions for predefined protocol support function ........................................................... 1 - 29

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.1

Connection from USB/Serial Port

2 - 1 to 2 - 20
2-2

2.1.1
2.1.2

USB cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and communication head module) ........ 2 - 4
USB cables and function expansion boards (compatible with FX3U/FX3UC)............................... 2 - 5

2.1.3

USB cables (compatible with FX3G)............................................................................................. 2 - 5

2.1.4
2.1.5

RS-232 cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and remote I/O module).................... 2 - 6
Converters/cables for RS-232 connection (compatible with FXCPU) .......................................... 2 - 6

2.1.6

Connection using function expansion boards (compatible with FXCPU) ..................................... 2 - 7

2.1.7

Connection using RS-232 cables and function expansion boards (special adapters)
(compatible with FXCPU) ............................................................................................................. 2 - 9

2.1.8

Converters/cables for USB connection (compatible with FXCPU) ............................................. 2 - 10

2.1.9

Connection via AJ65BT-R2N...................................................................................................... 2 - 11

2.1.10

Function expansion board (special adapter) .............................................................................. 2 - 11

A -9

2.1.11
2.2

Connection from I/F Boards

2.2.1

Connection via GOT................................................................................................................... 2 - 11

2 - 12

I/F boards ................................................................................................................................... 2 - 13

2.3

Interfaces and Connectable Modules

2 - 14

2.4

System Configuration with Memory Card in Personal Computer

2 - 18

2.5

Supported Programming Languages

2 - 19

SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

3 - 1 to 3 - 32

3.1

Starting and Exiting GX Works2

3-2

3.2

Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

3-3

3.2.1

Main frame configuration.............................................................................................................. 3 - 3

3.2.2

Toolbars ....................................................................................................................................... 3 - 5

3.2.3

Work windows .............................................................................................................................. 3 - 9

3.2.4

Docking windows ....................................................................................................................... 3 - 15

3.2.5

Navigation window ..................................................................................................................... 3 - 18

3.2.6

Status bar................................................................................................................................... 3 - 21

3.2.7

Changing colors and fonts ......................................................................................................... 3 - 22

3.2.8

Customizing shortcut keys ......................................................................................................... 3 - 24

3.3

Selecting Language

3 - 27

3.4

Help Function

3 - 28

3.4.1
3.4.2

Displaying GX Works help ......................................................................................................... 3 - 28

Displaying operating manuals .................................................................................................... 3 - 30

3.4.3

Checking version of GX Works2 ................................................................................................ 3 - 31

PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.1

4.2

4.3

GX Works2 Project Management

4-2

4.1.1

Workspace format ........................................................................................................................ 4 - 2

4.1.2

Single file format .......................................................................................................................... 4 - 4

4.1.3

Project .......................................................................................................................................... 4 - 5

Project Operations

4-8

4.2.1

Creating projects .......................................................................................................................... 4 - 8

4.2.2

Opening existing projects........................................................................................................... 4 - 11

4.2.3

Saving projects........................................................................................................................... 4 - 13

4.2.4

Saving projects with compression and unpacking projects........................................................ 4 - 15

4.2.5

Deleting projects ........................................................................................................................ 4 - 17

4.2.6

Closing projects.......................................................................................................................... 4 - 18

4.2.7

Verifying project data ................................................................................................................. 4 - 18

4.2.8

Changing programmable controller type of projects .................................................................. 4 - 26

Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data

4.3.1

A - 10

4 - 1 to 4 - 68

4 - 31

Adding new data to the project................................................................................................... 4 - 31

4.3.2

Copying/pasting data in projects ................................................................................................ 4 - 33

4.3.3

Changing project data names .................................................................................................... 4 - 34

4.3.4

Deleting project data .................................................................................................................. 4 - 34

4.3.5
4.4

Operations of Intelligent Function Module Data

4 - 37

4.5

Changing Project Types

4 - 38

4.6

Managing Project Revisions

4 - 39

4.7

4.6.1

Registering revision information (creating backup) .................................................................... 4 - 39

4.6.2

Displaying revision list ................................................................................................................ 4 - 40

4.6.3

Restoring backup projects .......................................................................................................... 4 - 41

4.6.4

Deleting revision information ...................................................................................................... 4 - 43

4.6.5

Verifying revisions ...................................................................................................................... 4 - 43

Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats

4.7.1

Opening projects in other formats .............................................................................................. 4 - 48

4.7.2

Reading ASC format data........................................................................................................... 4 - 50

4.7.3

Reading project files created with GX Configurator-QP ............................................................. 4 - 51

Saving projects in other formats

4 - 52

4.9

Starting GX Developer from GX Works2

4 - 53

4.10

Setting Security for Projects

4 - 54

4.10.1

Setting/resetting security of projects........................................................................................... 4 - 57

4.10.2

Managing (adding/deleting/changing) users............................................................................... 4 - 58

4.10.3

Logging in projects ..................................................................................................................... 4 - 61

4.10.4

Changing access authority of access level................................................................................. 4 - 62

4.10.5

Precautions on using the security function ................................................................................. 4 - 63

Protecting POUs in Projects

4 - 64

4.11.1

Managing (setting/unlocking/deleting) block passwords ............................................................ 4 - 65

4.11.2

Setting/changing block passwords ............................................................................................. 4 - 66

4.11.3

Unlocking block passwords ........................................................................................................ 4 - 67

EDITING PROGRAMS

5 - 1 to 5 - 10

5.1

Programming

5-2

5.2

Label Programming

5-2

5.3

Precautions on Using Label Projects

5-4

5.3.1

5.4

4 - 45

4.8

4.11

Displaying/editing properties ...................................................................................................... 4 - 35

Editing programs .......................................................................................................................... 5 - 4

5.3.2

Writing programs to programmable controller CPU (Write to PLC/Online program change) ....... 5 - 6

5.3.3

Reading programs from programmable controller CPU (Read from PLC) ................................... 5 - 7

5.3.4

Verifying programs ....................................................................................................................... 5 - 8

5.3.5

Monitoring programs..................................................................................................................... 5 - 8

Converting/Compiling Projects

SETTING PARAMETERS
6.1

6.2

Setting PLC Parameter

5-9

6 - 1 to 6 - 26
6-2

6.1.1

PLC parameter item list ................................................................................................................ 6 - 4

6.1.2

Checking duplication of X/Y assignment among parameters ..................................................... 6 - 14

Setting Network Parameter

6 - 16

A - 11

6.2.1

6.3

Setting Remote Password

6 - 24

6.4

Checking Parameters

6 - 26

SETTING DEVICE MEMORY

7.1

7.2

Device Memory

7 - 1 to 7 - 16
7-2

7.1.1

Features of device memory.......................................................................................................... 7 - 2

7.1.2

List of devices selectable on the Input Devices screen................................................................ 7 - 3

Setting Device Memory

7-5

7.2.1

Setting device values in units of points ........................................................................................ 7 - 7

7.2.2

Setting device values by setting device range ............................................................................. 7 - 8

7.2.3

Setting character strings ............................................................................................................ 7 - 10

7.2.4

Setting same value simultaneously............................................................................................ 7 - 11

7.2.5

Changing display format ............................................................................................................ 7 - 12

7.2.6

Changing the number of rows/columns on device memory editor ............................................. 7 - 13

7.3

Searching Devices

7 - 14

7.4

Writing/Reading Device Memory Data

7 - 15

7.4.1

Writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPUs .................................................... 7 - 15

7.4.2

Writing/reading data to/from Excel files...................................................................................... 7 - 16

SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES

8.1

8.2

Network parameter item list ....................................................................................................... 6 - 19

Device Initial Values

8 - 1 to 8 - 6
8-2

8.1.1

Feature of device initial values..................................................................................................... 8 - 2

8.1.2

List of applicable devices for device initial values ........................................................................ 8 - 3

8.1.3

Procedure for setting device initial values.................................................................................... 8 - 4

Setting Device Initial Values

8-5

SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS

9 - 1 to 9 - 18

9.1

9.2

9.3

9.4

9.5

A - 12

Device Comments

9-2

9.1.1

Global device comments/local device comments ........................................................................ 9 - 2

9.1.2

List of device comment applicable devices .................................................................................. 9 - 6

Creating Device Comments

9-8

9.2.1

Creating comments on the device comment editor...................................................................... 9 - 8

9.2.2

Creating comments on the ladder editor .................................................................................... 9 - 10

Deleting Device Comments

9 - 12

9.3.1

Deleting comment data of all devices ........................................................................................ 9 - 12

9.3.2

Deleting comment data of device being displayed..................................................................... 9 - 12

Utilizing Sample Comments

9 - 13

9.4.1

Utilizing sample comments of special relays/special registers................................................... 9 - 13

9.4.2

Utilizing sample comments of intelligent function modules ........................................................ 9 - 14

Writing/Reading Device Comments to CSV Files

9 - 15

10 SEARCH/REPLACE
10.1

Cross Reference

10 - 1 to 10 - 32
10 - 2

10.1.1

Creating/displaying cross reference information ........................................................................ 10 - 2

10.1.2

Setting conditions ....................................................................................................................... 10 - 9

10.1.3

Filtering display......................................................................................................................... 10 - 11

10.2

Displaying Device List

10 - 13

10.3

Search/Replacement

10 - 15

10.3.1

Searching/replacing devices/labels .......................................................................................... 10 - 16

10.3.2

Searching/replacing instructions............................................................................................... 10 - 21

10.3.3

Searching/replacing character strings ...................................................................................... 10 - 23

10.3.4

Changing contacts between open contact and closed contact................................................. 10 - 25

10.3.5

Batch replacing devices............................................................................................................ 10 - 27

10.3.6

Displaying results and error logs .............................................................................................. 10 - 29

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

11.1

11.2

Setting Connection Destinations

11 - 1 to 11 - 54
11 - 2

11.1.1
11.1.2

Transfer setup screen................................................................................................................. 11 - 3

Creating connections.................................................................................................................. 11 - 5

11.1.3

Specifying connection destination for regular use ...................................................................... 11 - 6

Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Directly Coupled

11 - 7

11.2.1

Connecting with serial/USB cable .............................................................................................. 11 - 7

11.2.2

Accessing by Ethernet.............................................................................................................. 11 - 10

11.3

Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Via Networks

11 - 12

11.4

Accessing Programmable Controller CPU in Multiple CPU System

11 - 18

11.5

Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Ethernet Board

11 - 20

11.6

Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via G4 Module

11 - 22

11.7

Setting for Access via Serial Communication Module

11 - 23

11.8

11.9

11.7.1

Connection on a 1:1 basis ........................................................................................................ 11 - 23

11.7.2

Connection on a 1:n basis ........................................................................................................ 11 - 24

Setting for Access via GOT (GOT Transparent Function)

11.8.1

Accessing programmable controller CPU via GOT .................................................................. 11 - 26

11.8.2

Accessing programmable controller CPU via serial communication module ........................... 11 - 29

Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line

11 - 31

11.9.1

Setting TEL data....................................................................................................................... 11 - 38

11.9.2

Connecting/disconnecting line.................................................................................................. 11 - 44

11.9.3

Setting options.......................................................................................................................... 11 - 51

11.10 Precautions on Communication with Programmable Controller CPU

12 WRITING/READING DATA
12.1

11 - 26

Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU

12.1.1

11 - 52

12 - 1 to 12 - 62
12 - 2

Setting write/read range of program (program file)..................................................................... 12 - 6

A - 13

12.1.2

Setting write/read range of device data...................................................................................... 12 - 7

12.1.3

Setting range of device comment to be written/read................................................................ 12 - 10

12.1.4

Writing/reading intelligent function module data ...................................................................... 12 - 11

12.1.5

Symbolic information................................................................................................................ 12 - 15

12.1.6

Precautions on writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPU ............................ 12 - 17

12.2

Verifying Data at Programmable Controller CPU against Data at Personal Computer

12 - 20

12.3

Deleting Programmable Controller CPU Data

12 - 25

12.4

Copying Program Memory Data to ROM

12 - 26

12.5

Writing/Reading/Deleting PLC User Data

12 - 27

12.6

Transferring Data to Program Memory in Batch

12 - 29

12.7

Latch Data Backup

12 - 31

12.8

12.9

12.7.1

Backing up latch data............................................................................................................... 12 - 31

12.7.2

Deleting backup data ............................................................................................................... 12 - 32

Backing up/Restoring Data

12.8.1

Backing up data to memory card ............................................................................................. 12 - 33

12.8.2

Restoring backup data ............................................................................................................. 12 - 35

Online Program Change

12.9.1

Performing Online program change during conversion/compile .............................................. 12 - 37

Performing Online program change in units of files ................................................................. 12 - 42

12.9.3

Online program change starting from pointer........................................................................... 12 - 44

12.9.4

Precautions on Online program change of rise, fall, or SCJ instruction................................... 12 - 45

12.9.5

Precautions on Online program change of SFC programs ...................................................... 12 - 48

12.9.6

Precautions on each programmable controller series.............................................................. 12 - 49

Offline calculation and Online calculation ................................................................................ 12 - 53

12.10.2

Setting target data for memory size calculation (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)............................... 12 - 53

12.10.3

Confirming result of memory size calculation (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU) .................................. 12 - 54

12.10.4

Confirming result of memory size calculation (FXCPU) ........................................................... 12 - 57

12.10.5

Precautions on calculating memory size.................................................................................. 12 - 58

12.11.1

13 PROTECTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Registering/Changing Password (QCPU (Q mode))

12 - 61

13 - 1 to 13 - 16
13 - 2

13.1.1

Registering/changing password ................................................................................................. 13 - 2

13.1.2

Canceling password................................................................................................................... 13 - 4

13.1.3

Unlocking password temporarily ................................................................................................ 13 - 5

Registering/Changing Password (LCPU)

13.2.1

13 - 6

Registering/changing password ................................................................................................. 13 - 6

13.2.2

Canceling password................................................................................................................... 13 - 9

13.2.3

Unlocking password temporarily .............................................................................................. 13 - 10

Registering/Changing Keyword (FXCPU)

13.3.1

A - 14

12 - 59

Writing/reading data to/from ATA/SRAM/SD memory cards.................................................... 12 - 60

12.12 Reading Data of Local Devices

13.3

12 - 53

12.10.1

12.11 Writing/Reading Data to/from Memory Cards

13.2

12 - 36

12.9.2

12.10 Calculating Memory Size

13.1

12 - 33

13 - 12

Registering/changing keyword ................................................................................................. 13 - 12

13.3.2

Canceling keyword ................................................................................................................... 13 - 14

13.3.3

Unlocking keyword temporarily................................................................................................. 13 - 15

14 MONITORING
14.1

14 - 1 to 14 - 22

Monitoring Function

14 - 2

14.1.1

Starting/stopping monitoring....................................................................................................... 14 - 2

14.1.2

Monitoring status ........................................................................................................................ 14 - 3

14.2

Monitoring Programs

14 - 5

14.3

Batch Monitor of Devices/Buffer Memory

14 - 6

14.4

Monitoring Program List

14 - 10

14.5

Monitoring Interrupt Program List

14 - 13

14.6

Registering and Monitoring Devices

14 - 14

14.6.1

Registering and monitoring devices ......................................................................................... 14 - 14

14.6.2

Registering devices .................................................................................................................. 14 - 16

14.6.3

Changing display format (decimal/hexadecimal) of current values .......................................... 14 - 18

14.6.4

Writing/reading data to/from CSV file ....................................................................................... 14 - 19

14.7

Monitoring Intelligent Function Modules

14 - 20

14.8

Starting/Stopping Monitor of All Windows

14 - 21

15 SIMULATING PROGRAMS
15.1

15.2

15.3

Simulation Function

16.2

16.3

Safety and handling precautions of the simulation function ....................................................... 15 - 2

15.1.2

Functions available for simulation function................................................................................. 15 - 2

Starting Simulation

15 - 4

15.2.1

Saving device memory/buffer memory ....................................................................................... 15 - 6

15.2.2

Reading device memory/buffer memory..................................................................................... 15 - 6

15.2.3

List of device memory/buffer memory that can be saved/read................................................... 15 - 7

Checking unsupported instructions/devices

Changing Current Values

15 - 9

16 - 1 to 16 - 46
16 - 2

16.1.1

Changing current value of devices/labels................................................................................... 16 - 2

16.1.2

Changing current value of buffer memory .................................................................................. 16 - 4

Registering/Canceling Forced Input/Output

16 - 6

16.2.1

Registering/canceling forced input to/output from QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU ................................ 16 - 6

16.2.2

Registering/canceling forced input to/output from remote I/O module ....................................... 16 - 8

Device Test with Execution Condition

16.3.1

16.4

15 - 2

15.1.1

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
16.1

15 - 1 to 15 - 10

16 - 9

Registering device test with execution condition ........................................................................ 16 - 9

16.3.2

Checking/disabling registration of device test with execution condition ................................... 16 - 11

16.3.3

Batch disabling device test with execution condition................................................................ 16 - 12

Sampling Trace

16 - 13

A - 15

16.4.1

Opening sampling trace screen ............................................................................................... 16 - 13

16.4.2

Setting executing condition of sampling trace.......................................................................... 16 - 14

16.4.3

Registering devices/labels ....................................................................................................... 16 - 17

16.4.4

Executing sampling trace ......................................................................................................... 16 - 20

16.4.5

Saving trace data ..................................................................................................................... 16 - 24

16.4.6

Applicable devices/labels for sampling trace ........................................................................... 16 - 26

16.4.7

Precautions when performing sampling trace .......................................................................... 16 - 28

16.4.8

Compatibility with sampling trace data in GX Developer ......................................................... 16 - 28

16.5

Measuring Scan Time

16 - 29

16.6

Debugging Programs with Simulation Function

16 - 30

16.7

16.6.1

Debugging procedure............................................................................................................... 16 - 33

16.6.2

Setting break points ................................................................................................................. 16 - 34

16.6.3

Setting break devices............................................................................................................... 16 - 38

16.6.4

Setting skip ranges................................................................................................................... 16 - 40

16.6.5

Executing program one step at a time ..................................................................................... 16 - 42

16.6.6

Executing program until condition is satisfied .......................................................................... 16 - 42

16.6.7

Canceling step execution ......................................................................................................... 16 - 43

16.6.8

Setting options for step execution ............................................................................................ 16 - 44

16.6.9

Stopping step execution........................................................................................................... 16 - 45

Using LCPU Logging Configuration Tool

17 OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU

16 - 46

17 - 1 to 17 - 14

17.1

Remote Operation of Programmable Controller CPU

17 - 2

17.2

Formatting Programmable Controller CPU Memory

17 - 4

17.3

Clearing Programmable Controller Memory

17 - 6

17.4

Arranging Programmable Controller Memory

17 - 9

17.5

Setting Clock in Programmable Controller CPU

17 - 10

17.6

Registering/Canceling Display Module Menu

17 - 12

17.7

Start Ethernet Adapter Module Configuration Tool

17 - 14

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

18.1

18.2

A - 16

Diagnosing Programmable Controller CPU

18 - 1 to 18 - 98
18 - 2

18.1.1

Diagnosing QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, communication head module, and remote I/O module ... 18 - 2

18.1.2

Diagnosing FXCPU .................................................................................................................... 18 - 7

18.1.3

Error icons.................................................................................................................................. 18 - 8

18.1.4

Online operations ....................................................................................................................... 18 - 9

Diagnosing MELSECNET

18 - 11

18.2.1

Network test ............................................................................................................................. 18 - 13

18.2.2

Loop test .................................................................................................................................. 18 - 15

18.2.3

Setting verification test ............................................................................................................. 18 - 16

18.2.4

Station order check test ........................................................................................................... 18 - 18

18.2.5

Communication test ................................................................................................................. 18 - 19

18.2.6

Error history monitoring............................................................................................................ 18 - 21

18.3

18.4

18.5

18.6

18.2.7

Network monitor details ............................................................................................................ 18 - 22

18.2.8

Monitoring other station information ......................................................................................... 18 - 23

Diagnosing CC-Link IE Controller Network

18.3.1

Communication test.................................................................................................................. 18 - 28

18.3.2

Link start/stop ........................................................................................................................... 18 - 29

18.3.3

Logging..................................................................................................................................... 18 - 31

Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network

18 - 33

18.4.1

Communication test.................................................................................................................. 18 - 37

18.4.2

Cable test ................................................................................................................................. 18 - 38

18.4.3

Link start/stop ........................................................................................................................... 18 - 39

18.4.4

Network event history ............................................................................................................... 18 - 40

18.4.5

Reserved station function enable ............................................................................................. 18 - 42

18.4.6

Temporary error invalid station setting/restore ......................................................................... 18 - 43

Diagnosing CC-Link and CC-Link/LT

18 - 44

18.5.1

Monitoring line (host station/other stations).............................................................................. 18 - 44

18.5.2

Loop test/transmission speed test ............................................................................................ 18 - 50

18.5.3

Displaying logs of station information (status logging) ............................................................. 18 - 52

18.5.4

Creating check sheets .............................................................................................................. 18 - 54

18.5.5

Starting/stopping data link ........................................................................................................ 18 - 56

Diagnosing Ethernet
18.6.1

18.7

18 - 24

18 - 57

Q series-compatible E71 module ............................................................................................. 18 - 57

18.6.2

Built-in Ethernet port QCPU/LCPU connection ........................................................................ 18 - 63

18.6.3

PING test .................................................................................................................................. 18 - 69

18.6.4

Loopback test ........................................................................................................................... 18 - 74

System Monitor

18 - 78

18.7.1

Checking module's detailed information................................................................................... 18 - 88

18.7.2

Checking details of error history ............................................................................................... 18 - 91

18.8

Changing Modules Online

18 - 94

18.9

Built-in I/O Module Tools

18 - 96

18.9.1

Positioning monitor ................................................................................................................... 18 - 96

18.9.2

High-speed counter monitor ..................................................................................................... 18 - 97

18.9.3

I/O monitor................................................................................................................................ 18 - 98

19 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES

19.1

I/O System Setting Function

19 - 1 to 19 - 30
19 - 2

19.1.1

Differences between conventional debugging and debugging with I/O system setting
function ....................................................................................................................................... 19 - 2

19.1.2

Conditions and sequence actions for simulation ........................................................................ 19 - 4

19.1.3

Timing chart input and device value input .................................................................................. 19 - 6

19.2

Operating Procedure of I/O System Setting Function

19 - 7

19.3

Screen Configuration of I/O System Setting Function

19 - 8

19.4

Setting by Inputting Device Values

19 - 10

19.4.1

Setting conditions ..................................................................................................................... 19 - 11

19.4.2

Setting sequence actions ......................................................................................................... 19 - 12

A - 17

19.5

19.6

19.7

19.8

Setting Using Timing Charts

19 - 14

19.5.1

Setting in timing chart format ................................................................................................... 19 - 15

19.5.2

Screen configuration of Edit Timing Chart Format screen ....................................................... 19 - 16

19.5.3

Registering devices.................................................................................................................. 19 - 17

19.5.4

Setting timing ........................................................................................................................... 19 - 18

19.5.5

Setting number of scans of timing chart................................................................................... 19 - 21

19.5.6

Utilizing timing chart data of existing applications.................................................................... 19 - 22

19.5.7

Displaying list of registered devices ......................................................................................... 19 - 23

19.5.8

Exchanging display positions of devices.................................................................................. 19 - 24

19.5.9

Changing display format of devices ......................................................................................... 19 - 25

Performing I/O System Setting Function

19 - 26

19.6.1

Executing simulation ................................................................................................................ 19 - 26

19.6.2

Disabling simulation ................................................................................................................. 19 - 26

Monitoring I/O System Setting

19 - 27

19.7.1

Starting/stopping monitoring .................................................................................................... 19 - 27

19.7.2

Changing current value of devices........................................................................................... 19 - 28

Operating I/O System Setting Files

19 - 29

19.8.1

Creating I/O system setting files .............................................................................................. 19 - 29

19.8.2

Opening existing I/O system setting files ................................................................................. 19 - 29

19.8.3

Saving I/O system setting files ................................................................................................. 19 - 29

20 PRINTING

20 - 1 to 20 - 56

20.1

Print Function

20 - 2

20.2

Setting Printer

20 - 4

20.3

Batch Printing Project Data

20 - 5

20.3.1

Setting printer for batch print...................................................................................................... 20 - 7

20.4

Page Set Up for Batch Print

20 - 8

20.5

Setting Details of Batch Print

20 - 10

A - 18

20.5.1

Setting batch print for cover ..................................................................................................... 20 - 10

20.5.2

Setting batch print for PLC parameter...................................................................................... 20 - 12

20.5.3

Setting batch print for network parameter ................................................................................ 20 - 13

20.5.4

Setting batch print for ladder programs.................................................................................... 20 - 14

20.5.5

Setting batch print for MELSAP3 programs ............................................................................. 20 - 18

20.5.6

Setting batch print for MELSAP-L programs ............................................................................ 20 - 20

20.5.7

Setting batch print for ST programs ......................................................................................... 20 - 22

20.5.8

Setting batch print for structured ladder/FBD programs........................................................... 20 - 23

20.5.9

Setting batch print for FB/FUN programs................................................................................. 20 - 24

20.5.10

Setting batch print for labels..................................................................................................... 20 - 26

20.5.11

Setting batch print for device comments .................................................................................. 20 - 27

20.5.12

Setting batch print for device memory data.............................................................................. 20 - 29

20.5.13

Setting batch print for device initial values ............................................................................... 20 - 30

20.5.14

Setting batch print for TC setting values .................................................................................. 20 - 31

20.5.15

Setting batch print for device list .............................................................................................. 20 - 33

20.5.16

Setting batch print for cross reference information .................................................................. 20 - 35

20.5.17

Setting batch print for statements/notes................................................................................... 20 - 36

20.5.18

Setting batch print for product information list .......................................................................... 20 - 37

20.6

Displaying Batch Print Preview

20 - 38

20.7

Printing Data Displayed on Screen

20 - 39

20.8

Setting Print Details for Data Displayed on Screen

20 - 40

20.9

20.8.1

Setting print details for ladder programs................................................................................... 20 - 40

20.8.2

Setting print details for device initial values.............................................................................. 20 - 42

Previewing Print Images

20 - 43

20.10 Printing Examples

20 - 44

20.11 Precautions on Printing

20 - 52

21 SETTING OPTIONS

21 - 1 to 21 - 10

21.1

Basic Operations

21 - 2

21.2

Option Setting List

21 - 3

APPENDIX

App - 1 to App - 138

Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys

App - 2

Appendix 1.1

Common toolbars and shortcut keys ...............................................................................App - 2

Appendix 1.2

"Navigation Window" toolbar icons..................................................................................App - 6

Appendix 1.3

Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting labels ..........................................................App - 7

Appendix 1.4

Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting device memory ...........................................App - 8

Appendix 1.5

Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for verification result ....................................................App - 9

Appendix 1.6

Toolbar icons for executing sampling trace .....................................................................App - 9

Appendix 1.7

Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors ....................................................App - 10

Appendix 1.8

Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for I/O system setting function ...................................App - 19

Appendix 1.9

Shortcut keys for operating intelligent function module.................................................App - 20

Appendix 2 Simulation Function

App - 21

Appendix 2.1

Supported devices.........................................................................................................App - 21

Appendix 2.2

Supported instructions...................................................................................................App - 37

Appendix 2.3

Supported CPU functions..............................................................................................App - 43

Appendix 2.4

Enable/disable setting of parameter items ....................................................................App - 46

Appendix 2.5

Restrictions and precautions .........................................................................................App - 50

Appendix 3 ASCII Code Table

App - 55

Appendix 4 Precautions on GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer

App - 56

Appendix 4.1

Before using GX Works2 ...............................................................................................App - 56

Appendix 4.2

Supported CPU modules...............................................................................................App - 57

Appendix 4.3

Unsupported features....................................................................................................App - 58

Appendix 4.4

Supported project types ................................................................................................App - 59

Appendix 4.5

Programming languages supported by each project type .............................................App - 60

Appendix 4.6

Using device comments ................................................................................................App - 64

Appendix 4.7

Using device memory....................................................................................................App - 64

Appendix 4.8

Using device initial values .............................................................................................App - 64

Appendix 4.9

Using search/replace function .......................................................................................App - 65

A - 19

Appendix 4.10 Using online function..................................................................................................... App - 66

Appendix 4.11 Using monitor/debug function ....................................................................................... App - 67
Appendix 4.12 Using printing function................................................................................................... App - 67
Appendix 4.13 Copying saved project data........................................................................................... App - 67
Appendix 4.14 Using PLC type change function................................................................................... App - 68
Appendix 4.15 Using program check function....................................................................................... App - 68
Appendix 4.16 Compatibility with GX Developer................................................................................... App - 69
Appendix 4.17 Compatibility with GX IEC Developer............................................................................ App - 70
Appendix 4.18 Key operation ................................................................................................................ App - 70

Appendix 5 Compatibility with Projects Created with Existing Applications

Appendix 5.1

App - 71

Application compatibility................................................................................................ App - 71

Appendix 6 Compatibility of Data Read from Programmable Controller CPU

App - 73

Appendix 6.1

Application compatibility................................................................................................ App - 73

Appendix 6.2

Data compatibility.......................................................................................................... App - 75

Appendix 7 Compatibility with Existing Applications

App - 79

Appendix 8 Restrictions When Saving Projects in GX Developer Format

App - 85

Appendix 8.1

ST instruction table for GX Works2 and GX Developer ................................................ App - 86

Appendix 9 Character Strings that cannot be Used for Label Names and Data Names

App - 87

Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller

App - 90

Appendix 10.1 Common restrictions when changing programmable controller series/types................ App - 91
Appendix 10.2 Restrictions when changing to QnUD(H)CPU............................................................... App - 92
Appendix 10.3 Restrictions when changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U................................... App - 94
Appendix 10.4 Restrictions when changing to built-in Ethernet port QCPU ......................................... App - 98
Appendix 10.5 Restrictions when changing to High Performance model QCPU ................................ App - 100
Appendix 10.6 Restrictions when changing to Basic model QCPU .................................................... App - 102
Appendix 10.7 Restrictions when changing to LCPU.......................................................................... App - 105
Appendix 10.8 Restrictions when changing between QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU and communication
head module ............................................................................................................... App - 108
Appendix 10.9 Restrictions when changing to FXCPU (FXCPU FXCPU) ..................................... App - 109

Appendix 11 Instruction Conversion Lists

App - 110

Appendix 12 Functions Added Since Previous Versions

App - 112

Appendix 13 Procedure to Use GX Works2 Unsupported Programmable Controller Type App - 121
Appendix 13.1 Installing GX Developer .............................................................................................. App - 121
Appendix 13.2 Installing GX Developer separately............................................................................. App - 122
Appendix 13.3 Utilizing programs of GX Works2 unsupported programmable controller type in
GX Works2.................................................................................................................. App - 122

Appendix 14 Precautions on Installation

App - 123

Appendix 15 USB driver installation

App - 126

Appendix 16 Precautions When Using English Version of GX Works2

App - 130

Appendix 16.1 Data to which double byte character and half-width Japanese kana character are
applicable .................................................................................................................... App - 130
Appendix 16.2 Precautions ................................................................................................................. App - 134

Appendix 17 Precautions for Selecting Project Language

A - 20

App - 136

INDEX

Index - 1 to Index - 5

A - 21

MANUALS

Related manuals are separately issued according to the purpose of their functions in GX Works2.
Related manuals
The manuals related to this product are shown below.
Refer to the following tables when ordering required manuals.
1)

Operation of GX Works2
Manual name

Manual number
(Model code)

GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)

Explains operation methods such as creating and monitoring programs in Simple project of GX Works2.
(Sold separately)

SH-080780ENG
(13JU64)

GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)

Explains operation methods such as creating and monitoring programs in Structured project of GX
Works2.
(Sold separately)

SH-080781ENG
(13JU65)

GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)

Explains operation methods of intelligent function module such as parameter setting, monitoring
programs, and predefined protocol support function in GX Works2.
(Sold separately)

SH-080921ENG
(13JU69)

GX Works2 Beginner's Manual (Simple Project)

Explains fundamental operation methods such as creating, editing, and monitoring programs in Simple
project for users inexperienced with GX Works2.
(Sold separately)

SH-080787ENG
(13JZ22)

GX Works2 Beginner's Manual (Structured Project)

Explains fundamental operation methods such as creating, editing, and monitoring programs in
Structured project for users inexperienced with GX Works2.
(Sold separately)

SH-080788ENG
(13JZ23)

2)

Structured programming
Manual name

Manual number
(Model code)

MELSEC-Q/L/F Structured Programming Manual (Fundamentals)

Explains the programming methods, types of programming languages, and other information required to
create structured programs.
(Sold separately)

SH-080782ENG
(13JW06)

MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Common Instructions)

Explains the specifications and functions of common instructions such as sequence instructions, basic
instructions, and application instructions, that can be used in structured programs.
(Sold separately)

SH-080783ENG
(13JW07)

MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Application Functions)

Explains the specifications and functions of application functions that can be used in structured
programs.
(Sold separately)

SH-080784ENG
(13JW08)

MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Special Instructions)

Explains the specifications and functions of special instructions such as module dedicated instruction,
PID control instruction, and built-in I/O function dedicated instruction, that can be used in structured
programs.
(Sold separately)

SH-080785ENG
(13JW09)

FXCPU Structured Programming Manual (Device & Common)

Explains the devices and parameters provided in GX Works2 for structured programming.
(Sold separately)

JY997D26001
(09R925)

FXCPU Structured Programming Manual (Basic & Applied Instruction)

Explains the sequence instructions provided in GX Works2 for structured programming.
(Sold separately)

JY997D34701
(09R926)

FXCPU Structured Programming Manual (Application Functions)

Explains the application functions provided in GX Works2 for structured programming.
(Sold separately)

A - 22

JY997D34801
(09R927)

3)

Operation of iQ Works
Manual name

Manual number
(Model code)

iQ Works Beginners Manual

Explains fundamental operation methods such as managing the system using MELSOFT Navigator and
using system labels for users inexperienced with GX Works2.
(Sold separately)

SH-080902ENG
(13JZ44)

The Operating Manuals are included on the CD-ROM of the software package in a PDF file format.
Manuals in printed form are sold separately for single purchase. Order a manual by quoting the manual
number (model code) listed in the table above.

A - 23

 Purpose of this manual

This manual explains the functions that are common to Simple project and Structured project,
including system configuration, parameter settings, and operation methods for online functions of GX
Works2. Manuals for reference are listed in the following table according to their purpose.
For information such as the contents and number of each manual, refer to the list of 'Related
manuals'.
1)

Operation of GX Works2

Purpose

Installation

Learning the operating

environment and
installation method

GX Works2
Installation
Instructions

GX Works2
Beginner's Manual
Simple
Project

Structured
Project

Learning the operations

of available functions
regardless of project
type.
Learning the functions
and operation methods
for programming
Learning data setting
methods for intelligent
function module

A - 24

Structured
Project

Details

Details

Intelligent
Function
Module

Outline

Learning the project

types and available
languages in GX Works2

Learning the basic

operations and operating
procedures when
creating a structured
project for the first time

Simple
Project

Details

Learning all functions of

GX Works2

Operation of
GX Works2

Common

Details

Learning a USB driver

installation method

Learning the basic

operations and operating
procedures when
creating a simple project
for the first time

GX Works2 Version 1
Operating Manual

Outline

Details

Details

Details

Outline

Details

2)

Operations in each programming language

For details of instructions used in each programming language, refer to the section 3 on the next
page.

Purpose

GX Works2
Beginner's Manual
Simple
Project

GX Works2 Version 1
Operating Manual

Structured
Project

Ladder

Simple
Project

Structured
Project

Details

Outline

Simple
Project

SFC

*1
Details

Outline

ST

Details

Outline

Ladder

Details

Outline

SFC
Structured
Project

*1
Details

Outline

Structured ladder
/FBD

Details

Outline

ST

Details

Outline

*1: MELSAP3 and FX series SFC only

A - 25

3)

Details of instructions in each programming language (for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)

Purpose

MELSECQ/L/F
Structured
Programming
Manual
Fundamentals

All
languages

MELSEC-Q/L Structured
Programming Manual
Common
Instructions

Special
Instructions

Application
Functions

Learning details
of programmable
controller CPU
error codes,
special relays,
and special
registers

SFC

Learning the
types and details
of instructions for
intelligent
function modules

Details

Details

Learning details
of specifications,
functions, and
instructions of
SFC (MELSAP3)

Learning the
types and details
of common
instructions
Learning the
types and details
Using
of instructions for
structured intelligent
ladder/FBD function modules
or ST
Learning the
types and details
language
of instructions for
network modules
Learning the
types and details
of instructions for
the PID control
function
Learning the
types and details
of application
functions

Details

Learning the
types and details
of instructions for
network modules

Learning the
fundamentals for
creating a
structured
program

A - 26

PID Control
Instructions

Manual for
module to
be used

Details

Learning the
types and details
of instructions for
the PID control
function
Using SFC
language

Common
Instructions

MELSEC-Q/L/QnA
Programming Manual

Details

Learning the
types and details
of common
instructions

Using
ladder
language

MELSECQ/L
Programming
Manual

Details

Details

Details

Details

Outline

Details

Outline

Details

Outline

Details

4)

Details of instructions in each programming language (for FXCPU)

Purpose

MELSECQ/L/F
Structured
Programming
Manual
Fundamentals

Using
ladder
language

Learning the
types and details
of basic/
application
instructions,
descriptions of
devices and
parameters

Using SFC
language

Learning details of
specifications,
functions, and
instructions of
SFC
Learning the
fundamentals for
creating a
structured
program

Using
structured
ladder/FBD
or ST
language

Learning the
descriptions of
devices,
parameters, and
error codes
Learning the
types and details
of sequence
instructions
Learning the
types and details
of application
instructions

FXCPU Structured Programming Manual

Device &
Common

Basic &
Applied
Instruction

Application
Functions

FXCPU Programming Manual

FX0, FX0S,
FX0N, FX1,
FXU, FX2C

FX1S, FX1N,
FX2N, FX1NC,
FX2NC

FX3G, FX3U,
FX3UC

Details

Details

Details

Details

Details

Details

Details

Details

Details

Details

A - 27

 How to read this manual

Supported CPU
Supported programmable
controller CPUs are shown in
icons under the section title.

Screen display
Describes the screen display
procedure.
Follow the
and select
[(menu)] to open the screen.
*Screen display may depend on
the CPU.
In that case, typical example is
described.

Display contents
Describes the display contents
on the screen.

Reference location
leads to the reference
location and reference manual.

Section title
Clarifies the section of currently
open page.

Chapter heading
Index on the right of the page
number clarifies the chapter of
currently open page.

Screen button
Describes the buttons in the
screen.

Operating procedure
Describes the operating
procedure of the function.

A - 28

6.1 Setting PLC Parameter

The following table explains the CPU module icons that indicate the function availability.
Icon
QCPU
(Q mode)

Q CPU

LCPU

L CPU

*1

*1

Q CPU

L CPU

Q CPU

L CPU

Remote

Communication

I/O

head module

Remote

Head

FX

Remote

Head

FX

FXCPU

Description

Normal icons indicate that the corresponding function

is available.
Icons with * (asterisk) symbol indicate that the
corresponding function is available with restrictions
such as CPU types.
Icons with
symbol indicate that the corresponding
function is not available.

This manual also uses the following columns:

This explains notes requiring attention or useful functions relating to the information given on the
same page.

Restrictions
This explains restrictions relating to the information given on the same page.

A - 29

 Symbols used in this manual

The following shows the symbols used in this manual with descriptions and examples.
1
2
3
4

No.
1

Symbol
[

(Underline)

4
5

A - 30

Menu name on a menu bar

Example
[Project]

Toolbar icon

2
3

Description

"

"

Screen name

Q Parameter Setting screen

Tab name in a screen

<<PLC System>>

Item name in a screen

"Timer Limit Setting"

Button on a screen

Keyboard key

button

GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL

This manual uses the generic terms and abbreviations listed in the following table to discuss the
software packages and programmable controller CPUs. Corresponding module models are also listed if
needed.
Generic term and
abbreviation
GX Works2
Existing application

Description
Generic product name for SWnDNC-GXW2-E (n: version)

GX Developer

Generic product name for SWnD5C-GPPW-E, SWnD5C-GPPW-EA, SWnD5C-GPPW-EV, and

SWnD5C-GPPW-EVA
(n: version)

GX IEC Developer

Generic product name for SWnD5C-MEDOC3

(n: version)

GX Simulator

Generic product name for SWnD5C-LLT-E, SWnD5C-LLT-EA, SWnD5C-LLT-EV, and SWnD5C-LLTEVA

(n: version)

GX Configurator

Generic product name for GX Configurator-AD/DA/SC/CT/TC/TI/FL/PT/AS/QP

MELSOFT Navigator

Product name for the integrated development environment included in SWnDNC-IQWK (iQ Platform
compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works)
(n: version)

iQ Works

Abbreviation for iQ platform supporting engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works

GX Simulator2

Abbreviation for GX Works2 simulation function

Personal computer

Generic term for personal computer on which Windows operates

Q series

Abbreviation for Mitsubishi programmable controller MELSEC-Q series

L series

Abbreviation for Mitsubishi programmable controller MELSEC-L series

FX series

Abbreviation for Mitsubishi programmable controller MELSEC-F series

Basic model QCPU

Generic term for Q00J, Q00, and Q01

High Performance
model QCPU

Generic term for Q02, Q02H, Q06H, Q12H, and Q25H

Process CPU

Generic term for Q02PH, Q06PH, Q12PH, and Q25PH

Redundant CPU

Generic term for Q12PRH and Q25PRH

Universal model QCPU

Generic term for Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q02U, Q03UD, Q03UDE, Q04UDH, Q04UDEH, Q06UDH,
Q06UDEH, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q13UDH, Q13UDEH, Q20UDH, Q20UDEH, Q26UDH,
Q26UDEH, Q50UDEH, and Q100UDEH

QnUD(H)CPU

Generic term for Q03UD, Q04UDH, Q06UDH, Q10UDH, Q13UDH, Q20UDH, and Q26UDH

Built-in Ethernet port

QCPU

Generic term for Q03UDE, Q04UDEH, Q06UDEH, Q10UDEH, Q13UDEH, Q20UDEH, Q26UDEH,
Q50UDEH, and Q100UDEH

QCPU (Q mode)

Generic term for Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU, and Universal model QCPU

LCPU

Generic term for L02, L02-P, L26-BT, and L26-PBT

FXCPU

Generic term for FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FXU, FX2C, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3U,
and FX3UC

CPU module

Generic term for QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and FXCPU

Display module

A module with LCD to be mounted to LCPU

FXGP(WIN)

Abbreviation for SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E

C24

Generic term for QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4, LJ71C24,

and LJ71C24-R2

ACPU

Generic term for A2A, A2A-S1, A3A, A2AP21/R21, A2AP21/R21-S1, A3AP21/R21, A2U,
A2U-S1, A3U, A4U, A2US, A2US-S1, A2USH-S1, Q02(H)-A, and Q06H-A

QnACPU

Generic term for Q2AS, Q2AS-S1, Q2ASH, Q2ASH-S1, Q2A, Q3A, and Q4A

Q series C24

Generic term for QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, and QJ71C24N-R4

CC-Link IE Controller
Network module

Generic term for QJ71GP21-SX and QJ71GP21S-SX

CC-Link IE Field
Network master/local
module

Generic term for QJ71GF11-T2, LJ71GF11-T2

Communication head
module

Generic term for LJ72GF15-T2

A - 31

Generic term and

abbreviation
CC-Link IE

Description
Generic term for CC-Link IE Controller Network and CC-Link IE Field Network

MELSECNET/H network Generic term for QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25, QJ71LP21G, QJ71BR11,
module
QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QJ72BR15, and QJ71NT11B
QJ72LP25

Generic term for QJ72LP25-25 and QJ72LP25G

Remote I/O module

Generic term for QJ72LP25 and QJ72BR15

Ethernet adapter module Generic term for NZ2GF-ETB

Q series-compatible E71 Generic term for QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, and QJ71E71
Generic term for AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71-B2, A1SJ71QE71-B5, AJ71QE71N-T,
A1SJ71QE71N-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N-B5, AJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-B2,
AJ71QE71N-B5T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T, AJ71QE71N3-T, and A1SJ71QE71N3-T

QE71

Generic term for AJ71E71-S3, A1SJ71E71-B2-S3, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, AJ71E71N-B2, AJ71E71NA series-compatible E71 B5T, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-T, AJ71E71N-B5,
A1SJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N3-T, and A1SJ71E71N3-T
Ethernet module

Generic term for Q series-compatible E71, QE71, and A series-compatible E71

CC-Link module

Generic term for QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N, and LJ61BT11

Q series CC-Link

Generic term for QJ61BT11 and QJ61BT11N

CC-Link bridge module

Abbreviation for AJ65SBT-CLB CC-Link - CC-Link/LT bridge module

G4 module

Generic term for AJ65BT-G4(-S3) peripheral connection module and AJ65BT-R2N CC-Link system
RS-232 interface module

QA extension base unit

Generic term for QA1S65B, QA1S68B, QA65, and QA68B

CC-Link IE Field
Network communication
unit

Generic term for GT15-J71GF13-T2

MELSECNET/H board

Generic term for Q80BD-J71BR11, Q80BD-J71LP21-25, and Q80BD-J71LP21G

CC-Link IE Controller
Network board

Generic term for Q80BD-J71GP21-SX and Q80BD-J71GP21S-SX

Abbreviation for CC-Link IE Controller Network interface board

CC-Link IE Field
Network board

Abbreviation for Q81BD-J71GF11-T2 CC-Link IE Field Network interface board

Ethernet board

Generic term for Ethernet cards for personal computer and Ethernet interface boards

CC-Link board

Generic term for CC-Link Ver.1 board and CC-Link Ver.2 board

CC-Link Ver.1 board

Generic term for A80BD-J61BT11 and A80BD-J61BT13

CC-Link Ver.2 board

Generic term for Q80BD-J61BT11N

GOT

Generic term for Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal GOT1000 series, GOT-A900 series, and
GOT-F900 series
Generic term for Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System

Windows XP

and Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System

Generic term for Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System,
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System,

Windows Vista

Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System,

Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System,
and Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System
Generic term for Microsoft Windows 7 Starter Operating System,
Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium Operating System,

Windows

Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Operating System,

Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate Operating System,
and Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise Operating System

A - 32

MELSAP3

Abbreviation for the SFC function in MELSAP3 display format

MELSAP-L

Generic term for the SFC function in MELSAP-L (instruction format) and MELSAP-L (start conditions
format)

SFC

Generic term for MELSAP3, MELSAP-L, and FX series SFC

TERMS

The following are the terms used in this manual.

Term

Description

Execution program

A compiled program created in a project with labels

A program that can be executed in a programmable controller CPU

Actual device

An actual device assigned to label after compiling a project with labels, or a device that is not
described using a label

Common instruction

Generic term for sequence instructions, basic instructions, application instructions, data link
instructions, multiple CPU dedicated instructions, and multiple CPU high-speed transmission
dedicated instructions

Special instruction

Generic term for module dedicated instructions, PID control instructions, socket communication
function instructions, built-in I/O function instructions, and data logging function instructions

Simple project

Generic term for projects created using the ladder/SFC/ST language

Without labels
With labels

Generic term for projects created without selecting "Use Label" when creating new projects
Generic term for projects created with selecting "Use Label" when creating new projects

Structured project

Generic term for projects created using the ladder/SFC/ST/structured ladder/FBD language

Project without labels

Generic term for Simple projects that do not use labels

Project with labels

Generic term for Simple projects that use labels and Structured projects

Project with security

Generic term for projects whose securities are set

New project creation with

A function to create a new project with data read from a programmable controller CPU without
data read from
programmable controller opening a project.
CPU
Slave station

Local stations, standby master stations, remote I/O stations, remote device stations, and intelligent
device stations which are connected to a master station in the CC-Link network configuration.

A - 33

MEMO

A - 34

OVERVIEW

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

OVERVIEW

This chapter explains an overview of GX Works2.

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
List of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.1
1.2
1.3

1 -1

GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

1.1

Product Overview

GX Works2 is a programming tool for designing, debugging, and maintaining programs on Windows.
GX Works2 has improved functionality and operability, with easier-to-use features compared to existing GX
Developer.

Main functions of GX Works2

GX Works2 can manage programs and parameters in units of projects for each programmable
controller CPU.
The following explains the main functions.
Programming
Programs can be created in a Simple project in a similar way with existing GX Developer.
Structured programming in a Structured project is also available with GX Works2.

Setting parameters
Programmable controller CPU parameter and Network parameter can be set with GX Works2.
Intelligent function module parameter can be set as well.
(For FXCPU, Network parameter setting is not available.)

Writing/reading data to/from a programmable controller CPU

Created sequence programs can be written to/read from a programmable controller CPU using the
Read from PLC/Write to PLC function. Also, using the Online program change function, the
sequence programs can be changed even when the programmable controller CPU is in RUN.
Reading data

Writing data

1 -2

1.1 Product Overview

Monitoring/debugging

OVERVIEW

Created sequence programs can be written to the programmable controller CPU and device value
at operation can be monitored online/offline.

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

2
Programs can be monitored and debugged.

The current error status and error history of the programmable controller CPU can be diagnosed.
Using the diagnostics function, the recovery work is completed in a short time.
Using the System monitor function (for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU), detailed information on such as
intelligent function modules can be obtained. This helps to shorten the recovery work time at error
occurrence.
Diagnosing the programmable controller
CPU status (PLC diagnostics screen)

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Diagnostics

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

5
EDITING
PROGRAMS

Diagnosing the
programmable controller
CPU status

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1 -3

GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

1.2

Features

This section explains the features of GX Works2.

Project types in GX Works2

In GX Works2, the project type can be selected from either of Simple project or Structured project.
Simple project
The Simple project creates sequence programs using instructions for Mitsubishi programmable
controller CPU.
Programs in a Simple project can be created in a similar way to existing GX Developer.
Programming without labels and label programming are supported as in GX Developer.
Program file
Program MAIN

Program SUB1
Program SUB2

Programs are created using programmable controller

CPU instructions.
Created programs can be operated as sequence
programs.

Programming in a similar way with existing

GX Developer is possible.

Structured project
In a Structured project, programs can be created by structured programming.
By segmenting a whole control process program into common program parts, highly manageable
and usable programming (structured programming) is possible.
Only label programming is supported.
POU

Function block 1
Function block 2

Program file

Program block A

Program MAIN

Program block B
Program block C

Function 1

Program block D

Function 2

Program block E

Program SUB1

Sequence programs are created

by combining POU (Program
Organization Unit) s.

1 -4

1.2 Features

Programming using labels

Using the label programming, programs can be created without regard for the device numbers.
By compiling a program created with the label programming, devices are automatically assigned and
the program becomes available as an actual program.
Created global labels can be utilized for other programs.

OVERVIEW

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

3
Created labels can be
utilized for other programs.

In addition, global labels can be registered as system labels and be shared within iQ Works compliant
products (GX Works2, MT Developer2, and GT Designer3).
For details of system labels, refer to the following manual.
iQ Works Beginner's Manual)

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

1 -5

GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

Enhanced use of program assets

Projects created with existing GX Developer can be utilized in a Simple project. Utilizing the past assets
improves the efficiency of program design.
<GX Developer>

<GX Works2>
Project created
with GX Developer

Can be used in
GX Works2.

Sharing Program Organization Unit (POU) registered as libraries

In a Structured project, programs, global labels, and structures frequently used can be registered as
user libraries. Utilizing these user libraries reduces time required for creating programs.
Project A
Project B
Project C

Library file

1 -6

Project D

1.2 Features

Wide variety of programming languages

The wide variety of programming languages available with GX Works2 enables to select the optimum
programming language depending on control.
<SFC>
Programming to clarify the procedure

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

<Ladder>
Programming similar to existing GX Developer

OVERVIEW

<ST>
Programming in a text language similar to
C language

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

<Structured ladder>
Programming a ladder program graphically

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

ST programs can be used on the ladder editor of GX Works2 using the Inline structured text function.

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1 -7

GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

Other features
Offline debugging
Offline debugging using the simulation function is possible with GX Works2. This enables
debugging to ensure the normal operation of created sequence programs without connecting GX
Works2 to the programmable controller CPU.

Simulation function

Connecting to the
programmable
controller is unnecessary.

Without connecting to the programmable controller CPU, programs can

be monitored and debugged in the same way with debugging by the
programmable controller CPU.

The screen layout can be customized to the user's preference

The docking windows enable to change the screen layout of GX Works2 without restriction.

Screen layout can be

changed without restriction.

1 -8

1.3 List of Functions

List of common functions

The following tables show functions that are available regardless of the type of editing or setting target.
Project (common function)

Reference

New

Create a new project.

Section 4.2.1

Open

Open an existing project.

Section 4.2.2

Close

Close an open project.

Section 4.2.6

Save

Save a project.

Section 4.2.3

Save As

Name and save a project.

Section 4.2.3

Compress/Unpack
Compress

Compress and save a project.

Unpack

Unpack a compressed project.

Section 4.2.4

Delete

Delete an existing project.

Section 4.2.5

Verify

Verify between two project data.

Section 4.2.7

Project Revision
Revision Entry

Register the project change history.

Section 4.6.1

Revision List

Display the list of project change history.

Section 4.6.2

Change PLC Type

Change the programmable controller CPU type.

Section 4.2.8

Change Project Type

Change the project type from Simple project (without labels)

to Simple project (with labels), or from Simple project (with
labels) to Structured project.

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Section 4.5

Object

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

This section explains the functions common to Simple project and Structured project.

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project

New

Add data to a project.

Section 4.3.1

Rename

Rename the selected data.

Section 4.3.3

Delete

Delete the selected data.

Section 4.3.4

Copy

Copy the selected data.

Paste

Paste the copied data.

Set as Default Connection

Specify data in selected connection target as a connection

target for regular use.

Section 11.1.3

Property

Display the selected data properties.

Section 4.3.5

Section 4.3.2

SETTING
PARAMETERS

1.3.1

EDITING
PROGRAMS

This section shows the list of functions of GX Works2.

The functions are divided into common functions available (Project, Online, Debug, Diagnostics, Tool,
Window, and Help) and functions used for each editing or setting target (Edit, Find/Replace, Compile, and
View).
For (Simple), (Structured), and (Intelligent) indicated in the Reference column, refer to the following manuals
respectively:
(Simple).................GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
(Structured) ...........GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
(Intelligent) ............GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)

OVERVIEW

List of Functions

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

1.3

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project

1 -9

GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

Project (common function)

New Module

Add new intelligent function module data.

Delete Module

Delete intelligent function module data.

Property

Display properties of an intelligent function module data.

Save the Positioning Module Data

Save data of the positioning module selected on the Project

view to a file.

Read from the Positioning Module

Data

Read data from the positioning module and reflect it to the

positioning module selected on the Project view.

Intelligent Function Module Parameter

List

Display a list of set/unset parameters of an intelligent

function module.
Open a project created with GX Developer.

Section 4.7.1

Read ASC Format File

Read an ASC format file.

Section 4.7.2

Import GX Configurator-QP Data

Read a project created with GX Configurator-QP.

(Intelligent)

Save an open project in GX Developer format.

Section 4.8

Export to GX Developer Format File

Library
Create

Create a new library.

Install

Import a created library to the project.

Deinstall

Delete a library from the project.

Reload

Update the library imported to the project.

Rename

Rename a library.

Open

Enable editing of a library.

Close

Disable editing of a library.

Change Password

Set a password for a library.

Save As

Name and save a project.

Save

Save a library file.

Help

Display help information of the library.

(Structured)

Security
Change Password

Change the password of the current login user.

Section 4.10.2

User Management

Manage user information of the project.

Add/delete a user or change the user information.

Section 4.10.1
Section 4.10.2

Data Security Setting

Set the access authorization of each user related to reading/

writing data.

Section 4.10.4

Print

Batch print multiple data in the project.

Section 20.3

Print Preview

Display a print preview of data to be batch printed.

Section 20.6

Print Window

Print the open screen.

Section 20.7

Print Window Preview

Display the print preview of the open screen.

Section 20.9

Printer Setup

Change the printer settings.

Section 20.2

(Recently used files 1 to 4)

Display the recently used GX Works2 project paths and open

the selected project.

Start GX Developer

Start GX Developer from GX Works2.

Section 4.9

Exit

Exit GX Works2.

Section 3.1

Edit (common function)

Undo

1 - 10

(Intelligent)

Open Other Data

Open Other Project

Reference

Intelligent Function Module

Reference

Restore the previous processing status.

Redo

Restore the processing deleted with [Undo].

Cut

Cut the selected data.

Copy

Copy the selected data.

Paste

Paste the cut or copied data at the cursor position.

1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project

1.3 List of Functions

1
Display the usage of devices.

Find Device

Search a device/label in the program.

Section 10.1
Section 10.2
Section 10.3.1

Find Instruction

Search an instruction.

Find Contact or Coil

Search a contact or coil corresponding to the specified

device.

Section 10.3.2

Find String

Search a string.

Section 10.3.3

Replace Device

Replace a device/label in the program.

Section 10.3.1

Replace Instruction

Replace an instruction.

Section 10.3.2

Replace String

Replace a string.

Section 10.3.3

Change Open/Close Contact

Change an open contact to a closed contact, or change a

closed contact to an open contact.

Section 10.3.4

Device Batch Replace

Batch-replace devices with the specified device.

Register to Device Batch Replace

Register selected devices on the Device Batch Replace

screen.

Compile (common function)

Convert/compile a program being edited.

Online Program Change

Write sequence programs to a programmable controller CPU

after the conversion/compilation.

Rebuild All

Convert/compile all programs in the project.

Reference

Section 5.4

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Build

Section 10.3.5

OVERVIEW

Display the usage of selected device or label.

Device List

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Cross Reference

Reference

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Find/Replace (common function)

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project

1 - 11

GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

View (common function)

Toolbar name

Display/hide each toolbar.

Section 3.2.2

Statusbar

Display/hide the status bar.

Section 3.2.6

Color and Font

Set the display color for characters such as labels, device

comments on the work window.

Section 3.2.7

Docking Window
Navigation Window

Display/hide the Navigation window.

Function Block Selection Window

Display/hide the Function Block Selection window.

Select a part such as FB or function on the window for
utilizing it to a program.

Output Window

Display/hide the Output window.

In the Output window, the conversion (compilation) result is
displayed.

Cross Reference

Display/hide the Cross Reference window.

In the Cross Reference window, devices/labels used in the
project are displayed.

Section 10.1

Device List

Display/hide the Device List window.

In the Device List window, the usage of selected device is
displayed.

Section 10.2

Watch 1 to 4

Display/hide the Watch window.

In the Watch window, the monitoring result is displayed.

Section 14.6

Intelligent Function Module Monitor

Display/hide the Intelligent Function Module Monitor window.
1 to 10
Intelligent Function Module Guidance

Display/hide the Intelligent Function Module Guidance

window.

Find/Replace

Display/hide the Find/Replace window.

In the Find/Replace window, the search/replace result is
displayed.

(Simple)
(Structured)

(Intelligent)

Section 10.3

Debug Window
Break Point Window

Section 3.2.5

Intelligent Function Module Monitor

1 - 12

Reference

Toolbar

Display/hide the Break Point window.

Section 16.6.2

Break Device Window

Display/hide the Break Device window.

Section 16.6.3

Skip Range Window

Display/hide the Skip Range window.

Section 16.6.4

1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project

1.3 List of Functions

1
Reference

Read from PLC

Read data from the programmable controller CPU.

Write to PLC

Write data to the programmable controller CPU.

Verify with PLC

Verify a project being edited against the data in the

programmable controller CPU.

Section 12.2

Remote Operation

Remotely control RUN/PAUSE/STOP of the programmable

controller CPU from GX Works2.

Section 17.1

Set a password/keyword to the programmable controller

CPU.

Section 13.1.1
Section 13.2.1
Section 13.3.1

Delete

Cancel the password/keyword set to the programmable

controller CPU.

Section 13.1.2
Section 13.2.2
Section 13.3.2

Disable

Temporarily unlock the password/keyword set to the

programmable controller CPU.

Section 13.1.3
Section 13.2.3
Section 13.3.3

Format PLC Memory

Format the programmable controller CPU memory.

Section 17.2

Clear PLC Memory

Clear the programmable controller CPU memory.

Section 17.3

Arrange PLC Memory

Arrange the programmable controller CPU memory.

Section 17.4

Delete data in the programmable controller CPU.

Section 12.3

Delete PLC Data

PLC User Data

Read the programmable controller CPU user data.

Write PLC User Data

Write the programmable controller CPU user data.

Delete PLC User Data

Delete the programmable controller CPU user data.

Section 12.5

Export to ROM Format

Copy the program memory data in the programmable

controller CPU to ROM.

Section 12.4

Program Memory Batch Download

Transfer the content of program cache memory to program

memory in batch.

Section 12.6

Latch Data Backup

Backup

Back up device memory/file register/error history data to the

standard ROM.

Section 12.7.1

Delete Backup Data

Delete the backup data in the programmable controller CPU.

Section 12.7.2

PLC Module Change

OVERVIEW

Read PLC User Data

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

PLC Memory Operation

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

New

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Create Backup Data

Back up data in the programmable controller CPU to the

memory card.

Section 12.8.1

Restore

Restore the backup data to another programmable controller

CPU.

Section 12.8.2

Set Clock

Set the clock in the programmable controller CPU.

Section 17.5

Register/Cancel Display Module Menu

Register/cancel menus to operate intelligent function module

using the LCPU display module menu.

Section 17.6

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Password/Keyword

Section 12.1

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

Online (common function)

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project

1 - 13

GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

Online (common function)

Monitor Mode

Switch the mode of the open window to "Monitor Mode"

during monitoring.

Monitor (Write Mode)

Switch the mode of the open window to "Monitor (Write

Mode)" during monitoring.

Start Monitoring (All Windows)

Start monitoring of all open windows.

Stop Monitoring (All Windows)

Stop monitoring of all open windows.

(Simple)

Section 14.8

Start Monitoring

Start monitoring of the open window.

Section 14.2

Stop Monitoring

Stop monitoring of the open window.

Section 14.1

Change Value Format (Decimal)

Display the current device value in decimal in program

monitoring.

Change Value Format (Hexadecimal)

Display the current device value in hexadecimal in program

monitoring.

Device/Buffer Memory Batch

Monitor device/buffer memory in batch.

Section 14.3

Program List

Monitor the processing time of programs being executed.

Section 14.4

Interrupt Program List

Monitor the number executions of interrupt programs.

Section 14.5

Change Instance (Function Block)

Select an instance of the function block to be monitored.

(Simple)
(Structured)

SFC All Block Batch Monitoring

Batch monitor all blocks in the SFC program.

SFC Auto Scroll

Scroll the screen to display active steps automatically when

they are out of the screen during monitoring.

(Simple)
(Structured)

(Simple)

Watch
Start Watching

Start monitoring the current values of registered devices/

labels and intelligent function module.

Stop Watching

Stop monitoring the current values of registered devices/

labels and intelligent function module.

Register Watch

Register the selected devices/labels to the Watch window.

Read local device data from the programmable controller
CPU and saves them to a personal computer in CSV format.

Local Device Batch Read + Save CSV

Debug (common function)

Section 14.6

Section 12.12

Reference

Start/Stop Simulation

Start/stop simulation.

Section 15.2

Instructions Unsupported by Simulation

Display a list of the instructions and devices used in the

program unsupported by the simulation function.

Section 15.3

Modify Value

For ladder and SFC (Zoom) programs, change the ON/OFF

status and values of devices and labels used in the program.

Section 16.1

Forced Input Output Registration/

Cancellation

Register/cancel the forced input/output of the device 'X'/'Y'.

Section 16.2

Device Test with Execution Condition

Register Device Test with Execution
Condition

Register the device test with execution condition.

Section 16.3.1

Check/Disable Register Device Test

with Execution Condition

Check/disable the registration of device test with execution

condition.

Section 16.3.2

Batch Disable Device Test with

Execution Condition

Batch disable the device test with execution condition in

batch.

Section 16.3.3

Display the Sampling Trace screen.

Section 16.4.1

Sampling Trace
Open Sampling Trace
Scan Time Measurement

Measure the scan time of a desired section.

Section 16.5

Step Execution

1 - 14

Reference

Monitor

Stop

Stop the step execution.

Cancel

Cancel the step execution.

Section 16.6.7

Break Execution

Execute the break execution.

Section 16.6.6

Step Execution

Execute the step execution.

Section 16.6.5

Execution Option

Display the "Execution Option" screen of the step execution.

Section 16.6.8

1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project

Section 16.6.9

1.3 List of Functions

Enable/Disable Break Point

Enable/disable the break point at the cursor position.

Cancel All Break Points

Cancel all break points.

Break Point Window

Display the Break Point window.

Cancel All Break Devices

Cancel all break devices.

Break Device Window

Display the Break Device window.

Section 16.6.2

2
Section 16.6.3

Skip Setting
Set/Cancel Skip Range

Set a skip range, or cancel the set skip range.

Enable/Disable Skip Range

Enable/disable the skip range at the cursor position.

Cancel All Skip Ranges

Cancel all skip ranges.

Skip Range Window

Display the Skip Range window.

Diagnostics (common function)

Section 16.6.4

Reference

PLC Diagnostics

Diagnose the operating status of the programmable

controller CPU.

Section 18.1

Ethernet Diagnostics

Diagnose the Ethernet.

Section 18.6

CC IE Control Diagnostics

Diagnose the CC-Link IE Controller Network.

Section 18.3

CC IE Field Diagnostics

Diagnose the CC-Link IE Field Network.

Section 18.4

MELSECNET Diagnostics

Diagnose the MELSECNET/10(H).

Section 18.2

CC-Link Diagnostics

Diagnose the CC-Link and CC-Link/LT.

Section 18.5

System Monitor

Monitor the system status of the programmable controller

CPU.

Section 18.7

Online Module Change

Change modules online.

Section 18.8

Tool (common function)

Reference

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Set a break point at the cursor position, or cancel the set

break point.

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Set/Cancel Break Point

OVERVIEW

Reference

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Debug (common function)

Break Setting

Check programs of the project without labels and display

errors.

Check Program

Section 12.11.1
(Simple)

Check Parameter

Check parameters and display errors.

Options

Set various options.

Section 6.4

Key Customize

Change the settings of the shortcut keys.

Section 3.2.8

Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting

Set device range to be automatically assigned to a label.

(Simple)
(Structured)

Block Password

Set a block password to data.

Section 4.11

Confirm Memory Size

Calculate the size of files to be written to the programmable

controller CPU.

Chapter 21

Section 12.10

Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem

Line Connection

Connect the line.

Line Disconnection

Disconnect the line.

AT Command Registration

Register a modem between a personal computer and a

serial communication module, or a personal computer and
an FXCPU.

Phone Book

Set phone numbers of targets such as remote access

targets.

Options

Set options for TEL data.

Section 11.9.2

Section 11.9.1

Section 11.9.3

LCPU Logging Configuration Tool

Start the LCPU logging configuration tool.

Section 16.7

Ethernet Adapter Module Configuration Tool

Start the Ethernet adapter module configuration tool.

Section 17.7

1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

Write data to the IC memory card.

1 - 15

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Read data from the IC memory card.

Write IC Memory Card

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

Read IC Memory Card

EDITING
PROGRAMS

IC Memory Card

GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

Tool (common function)

Reference

Built-in I/O Module Tool

Positioning Monitor

Display the Positioning Monitor screen.

High-Speed Counter Monitor

Display the High-Speed Counter Monitor screen.

I/O Monitor

Display the I/O Monitor screen.

Section 18.9

Check Intelligent Function Module Parameter

Check the duplication of devices set in the Auto refresh
function and display the result.

Check Auto Refresh Duplication

(Intelligent)

Intelligent Function Module Tool

Analog Module
Offset/Gain Setting

Configure the offset/gain setting of the analog module.

Q61LD Two-Point Calibration

Setting

Configure the Q61LD two-point calibration setting.

Q61LD Default Setting

Configure the Q61LD default setting.

Temperature Input Module

Configure the offset/gain setting of the temperature input

module.

Offset/Gain Setting

Temperature Control Module

Auto Tuning

Execute the auto tuning function of the temperature control

module.

Sensor Correction Function

Execute the sensor correction function of the temperature

control module.

(Intelligent)

Counter Module
Preset

Execute the preset function of the counter module.

QD75/LD75 Positioning Module

Positioning Monitor

Execute the positioning monitor.

Positioning Test

Execute the positioning test.

Wave Trace

Execute the wave trace.

Location Trace

Execute the location trace.

Serial Communication Module

Circuit Trace

Execute the circuit trace.

Predefined Protocol Support

Function

Start the predefined protocol support function.

Language Selection

Select a language used in a project.

Window (common function)

Cascade

(Intelligent)
Section 3.3
Reference

Tile windows in overlapping display.

Tile Vertically

Tile windows vertically.

Tile Horizontally

Tile windows horizontally.

Arrange Icons

Arrange the icons at the bottom of the window.

Close All

Close all open windows.

(Switch to other window)

Display the open window.

Window

Display a list of open windows.

Also open or arrange specified windows.
Help (common function)

GX Works2 Help

Display the GX Works2 Help screen.

Section 3.2.3

Reference
Section 3.4.1

Operating Manual
GX Works2 Beginner's Manual
(Simple Project)
GX Works2 Beginner's Manual
(Structured Project)
Operating Manual Common

Display the operating manuals.

Section 3.4.2

Display product information such as the version.

Section 3.4.3

Operating Manual (Simple Project)

Operating Manual (Structured Project)
Operating Manual (Intelligent Function
Module)
About

1 - 16

1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project

1.3 List of Functions

List of functions for setting labels

Select all items.

New Declaration (Before)

Add a row above the cursor position.

New Declaration (After)

Add a row below the cursor position.

Delete Row

Delete a row at the cursor position.

Read from CSV File

Read label settings from the CSV file.

Write to CSV File

Write label settings to the CSV file.

(Simple)
(Structured)

System Label
Confirm Update of System Label
Database

Reflect system label information changed in another project

on global labels.

Import System Label

Import system label information and reflect it on global

labels.

Register Device Name of System

Label

Register a selected global label as a system label.

Disable System Label Relation

Disable the relation between a selected global label and a

system label.

Execute Verification Synchronous with

System Label

Resolve a mismatch when system label information contains

it.

3
(Simple)
(Structured)

List of functions for editing device comments

The following table shows functions for editing device comments.

Edit (function for editing device comments)

Reference

Delete

Delete the selected data.

Select All

Select all data being displayed.

Special Relay/Special Register

Utilize sample comments of SM/SD.

Section 9.4.1

Intelligent Function Module

Utilize sample comments of intelligent function module

device.

Section 9.4.2

Delete all device comment data.

Section 9.3.1

Read from CSV File

Read device comments from the CSV file.

Write to CSV File

Write device comments to the CSV file.

Hide Bit Specification Information

Hide the bit-specified word device comment of the selected

row.

Show Bit Specification Information

Display the bit-specified word device comment of the

selected row.

Cut The Range including Hidden Bit

Specification Information

Cut data including hidden bit-specified comment.

Copy The Range including Hidden Bit

Specification Information

Copy data including hidden bit-specified comment.

Paste The Range including Hidden Bit

Specification Information

Paste data including hidden bit-specified comment.

Section 9.5

Section 9.2.1

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Clear All

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Import from Sample Comment

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Select All

Reference

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Delete the selected data.

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Edit (function for label setting)

Delete

OVERVIEW

The following table shows the functions for setting and editing labels.

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project

1 - 17

GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

List of functions for setting device memory

The following tables show the functions for setting device memory.
Edit (function for setting device memory)

Reference

Delete

Delete the selected data.

Insert Row

Insert a row at the cursor position.

Input Device

Enter a device.

Paste Text

Enter a character string.

Section 7.2.3

FILL

Set the same value to continuous devices simultaneously.

Section 7.2.4

Find/Replace (function for setting device memory)

Find Device Cell

Search for a device.

View (function for setting device memory)

Section 7.2.2

Reference
Section 7.3

Reference

Display Mode
Binary

Display data in binary.

Octal

Display data in octal.

Decimal

Display data in decimal.

Hexadecimal

Display data in hexadecimal.

Float

Display data in real number.

String

Display data in character string.

String (ASCII only)

Display data in ASCII string.

Section 7.2.5

Register
16-bit

Display data in units of words.

32-bit

Display data in units of double words.

64-bit

Section 7.2.5

Display data in units of 64 bits.

Setup

Change the editor size.

Tool (function for setting device memory)

Read Device Memory from PLC

Read device memory data from the programmable controller

CPU.

Write Device Memory to PLC

Write device memory data to the programmable controller CPU.

Read from Excel File

Read data from an Excel file.

Write to Excel File

Write data to an Excel file.

Section 7.2

Section 7.2.6

Reference
Section 7.4.1

Section 7.4.2

List of functions for verification result

The following tables show the functions for verification result.

Edit (function for verification result)
Write to CSV File

Write verification result to a CSV file.

Find/Replace (function for verification result)

Next Unmatch

Move to the next mismatched data.

Previous Unmatch

Move to the previous mismatched data.

View (function for verification result)

1 - 18

Return to Result List

Return to the <<Verify Result List>> tab from the <<Detail

Verify Result>> tab.

Close Detail Result

Close the <<Detail Verify Result>> tab being displayed.

Close All Detail Result

Close all <<Detail Verify Result>> tabs being displayed.

1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project

Reference
Section 4.2.7

Reference
Section 4.2.7

Reference

Section 4.2.7

1.3 List of Functions

List of functions for executing sampling trace

Reference

Switching Display Items

Device
Address
Comment

Display/hide the display item titles.

Section 16.4.3

Data Types
Radix

Timing Chart Scale

Narrow Scale

Change the display width of the timing chart scale.

Wide Scale

Section 16.4.4

Trend Graph Scale

Narrow Scale
Wide Scale

Change the display width of the trend graph scale.

Section 16.4.4

Additional Information

Past Time

Display/hide the additional information.

Section 16.4.2
Section 16.4.4

Initial Display

Program Name

Debug (function for executing sampling trace)

Reference

Sampling Trace
Display the Sampling Trace screen.

Section 16.4.1

Trace Setting

Display the screen on which the sampling trace conditions

are set.

Section 16.4.2

Start Trace

Start sampling trace.

Section 16.4.4

Stop Trace

Suspend sampling trace.

Execute Manual Trigger

Generate a trigger at any given timing.

Register Trace

Write trace settings to the programmable controller CPU.

Execute this to control the sampling trace start by a
sequence program.
Sampling trace starts when the Trace start command
(SM801) is executed after executing "Register Trace".

Forced Execution Registration

Effective

5
EDITING
PROGRAMS

Open Sampling Trace

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Display the trigger position.

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Move to Trigger Point

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

View (function for executing sampling trace)

Result Position

OVERVIEW

The following tables show the functions for executing sampling trace.

Section 16.4.4

Display trace data storage status.

Export CSV Data

Save the trace data (trace settings + results) to a personal

computer in CSV file format.

Read from PLC

Read the sampling trace data (trace settings + results) from

the programmable controller CPU.

Write to PLC

Write the trace data (trace settings + results) to the

programmable controller CPU.

Delete All Data

Delete all information including the device data registered

and the sampling trace result displayed on the Sampling
Trace screen.

Section 16.4.5

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Display Trace Buffer Condition

SETTING
PARAMETERS

Enable to execute the sampling trace from the peripherals.

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project

1 - 19

GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

1.3.2

List of functions for editing in ladder language

The following tables show the functions for the ladder editor.
Edit (function for editing in ladder language)
Delete
Restore After Ladder Conversion

Return a ladder being edited to the last converted status.

Insert Row

Insert a row at the cursor position.

Delete Row

Delete a row at the cursor position.

Insert Column

Insert a column at the cursor position.

Delete Column

Delete a column at the cursor position.

NOP Batch Insert

Insert an NOP in front of the ladder block at the cursor

position.

NOP Batch Delete

Batch-delete NOPs in the program being edited.

Edit Line

Enter a line at the cursor position.

Delete Line

Delete a line at the cursor position.

Change TC Setting

Batch-change timer/counter setting values used in the

program.

(Simple)

Ladder Edit Mode

Read Mode

Switch the mode of the open window to "Read Mode".

Write Mode

Switch the mode of the open window to "Write Mode".

(Simple)

Ladder Symbol
Open Contact

Insert

at the cursor position.

Close Contact

Insert

at the cursor position.

Open Branch

Insert

at the cursor position.

Close Branch

Insert

at the cursor position.

Coil

Insert

at the cursor position.

Application Instruction

Insert

at the cursor position.

Vertical Line

Insert

at the cursor position.

Horizontal Line

Insert

at the cursor position.

Delete Vertical Line

Insert

at the cursor position.

Delete Horizontal Line

Insert

at the cursor position.

(Simple)

Pulse Contact Symbol

1 - 20

Reference

Delete the selected data.

Rising Pulse

Insert

at the cursor position.

Falling Pulse

Insert

at the cursor position.

Rising Pulse Branch

Insert

at the cursor position.

Falling Pulse Branch

Insert

at the cursor position.

Rising Pulse Close

Insert

at the cursor position.

Falling Pulse Close

Insert

at the cursor position.

Rising Pulse Close Branch

Insert

at the cursor position.

Falling Pulse Close Branch

Insert

at the cursor position.

Invert Operation Results

Insert

at the cursor position.

Operation Result Rising Pulse

Insert

at the cursor position.

Operation Result Falling Pulse

Insert

at the cursor position.

1.3.2 List of functions for editing in ladder language

(Simple)

1.3 List of Functions

Edit (function for editing in ladder language)

Reference

Mark Template (Left)

Set an argument of the template in the selected status from

the left by selecting the menu each time.

Mark Template (Right)

Set an argument of the template in the selected status from

the right by selecting the menu each time.

Edit FB Instance

Rename an FB instance name.

(Structured)

2
(Simple)

Documentation
Device Comment

Edit device comments.

Statement

Edit statements.

Note

Edit notes.

Statement/Note Batch Edit

Batch-edit the statements/notes in the program.

Chapter 9
(Simple)

Easy Edit
Connect Line to Right-Side Symbol

Connect a horizontal line to the instruction or the line at the

right of the cursor position.

Connect Line to Left-Side Symbol

Connect a horizontal line to the instruction or the line at the

left of the cursor position.

Enter/Delete HLine Rightward

Enter/delete a line at the right of the cursor position.

Enter/Delete HLine Leftward

Enter/delete a line at the left of the cursor position.

Enter/Delete VLine Downward

Enter/delete a line at the downward of the cursor position.

Enter/Delete VLine Upward

Enter/delete a line at the upward of the cursor position.

Switch Open/Close Contact

Switch between an open contact and a closed contact.

Switch Statement/Note Type

Change the type of a statement/note.

Instruction Partial Edit

Display the Enter Symbol screen in which the first argument

is in the selected status.

Find/Replace (function for editing in ladder language)

Change Module I/O No.

Replace the start module I/O number of the buffer memory

address instruction.

Switch Statement/Note Type

Change the type (PLC/Peripheral) of a statement/note.

Display a list of line statements used in the program.

Jump

Move the cursor to the specified step position.

Jump to Next Ladder Block Start

Move the cursor from the current position to the start of the
next ladder block.

Jump to Previous Ladder Block Start

Move the cursor from the current position to the start of the
previous ladder block.

(Simple)

4
Section 10.3.4
(Simple)

Reference

(Simple)

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

Line Statement List

OVERVIEW

Insert a template corresponds to the instruction, function, or

control syntax.

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Display Template

(Simple)

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Insert an inline structured text box.

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Insert Inline Structured Text Box

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Inline Structured Text

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.3.2 List of functions for editing in ladder language

1 - 21

GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

View (function for editing in ladder language)

Comment

Display device comments.

Statement

Display statements.

Note

Display notes.

Display Lines of Monitored Current Value

Open the Options screen and display/hide the lines of

monitored current value.

Display Format for Device Comment

Open the Options screen and set the display format for
device comment.

Non-Display Ladder Block

Hide a ladder block at the cursor position.

Display Ladder Block

Display a hidden ladder block at the cursor position.

Non-Display All Ladder Block

Hide all ladder blocks.

Display All Ladder Block

Display all hidden ladder blocks.

Device Display

Display the device assigned by compilation.

All Device Display

Batch-change the label display on the program editors to the

device display.

Cancel All Device Display

Cancel the device display on the program editors, and

display data in the format at the time of data entry.

Display Compile Result

Display the compilation result of the program on the inline

structured text box in a list form.

Zoom

Change the display magnification of the ladder.

Bigger

Enlarge the text display size on the editing screen.

Smaller

Reduce the text display size on the editing screen.

Tile FB Horizontally

Tile the ladder editor and the function block program editor
horizontally.

Open Header

Open the setting screen for the label set for a program being
edited.

Back to Zoom SFC Block

Display the SFC diagram of the Zoom editor window.

(Simple)

(Simple)

Move SFC Cursor

1 - 22

Chapter 9

Text Size

Up

Move the cursor on the SFC diagram upward.

Down

Move the cursor on the SFC diagram downward.

Left

Move the cursor on the SFC diagram to the left.

Right

Move the cursor on the SFC diagram to the right.

Open Instruction Help

Reference

Display the Instruction Help screen.

1.3.2 List of functions for editing in ladder language

(Simple)

1.3 List of Functions

The following tables show the functions for editing SFC diagrams.

Insert a row at the cursor position.

Delete Row

Delete a row at the cursor position.

Insert Column

Insert a column at the cursor position.

Delete Column

Delete a column at the cursor position.

Vertical Line Segment

Insert

at the cursor position.

Selection Divergence

Insert

at the cursor position.

Simultaneous Divergence

Insert

at the cursor position.

Selection Convergence

Insert

at the cursor position.

Simultaneous Convergence

Insert

at the cursor position.

Delete Line

Delete a line at the cursor position.

Change TC Setting

Batch-change timer/counter setting values used in the

program.

3
(Simple)

Ladder Edit Mode

Read Mode

Switch the mode of the open window to "Read Mode".

Write Mode

Switch the mode of the open window to "Write Mode".

(Simple)

No Attribute

Set the step attribute to No Attribute.

Stored Coil

Set the step attribute to Stored Coil.

Stored Operation (without Transition

Check)

Set the step attribute to Stored Operation (SE).

Stored Operation (with Transition

Check)

Set the step attribute to Stored Operation (ST).

Reset

Reset the step attribute.

(Simple)

[STEP] Step

Insert

at the cursor position.

[B] Block Start Step (with END Check)

Insert

at the cursor position.

[BS] Block Start Step (without END

Check)

Insert

at the cursor position.

[JUMP] Jump

Insert

at the cursor position.

[END] END Step

Insert

at the cursor position.

[DUMMY] Dummy Step

Insert

at the cursor position.

[TR] Transition

Insert

at the cursor position.

[--D] Selection Divergence

Insert

at the cursor position.

[==D] Simultaneous Divergence

Insert

at the cursor position.

[--C] Selection Convergence

Insert

at the cursor position.

[==C] Simultaneous Convergence

Insert

at the cursor position.

[ | ] Vertical Line

Insert

at the cursor position.

(Simple)

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SFC Symbol

Sort the SFC step/transition numbers in ascending/

descending order.

(Simple)

Change to the SFC step/transition comment editing mode.

(Simple)

Documentation

1.3.3 List of functions for editing SFC diagrams

5
EDITING
PROGRAMS

SFC Step Attribute

SFC Step/Transition Comment

(Simple)

Edit Line

Sort SFC Step No.

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Redisplay the SFC diagram.

Insert Row

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Arrange SFC

Reference

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Delete the selected data.

SETTING
PARAMETERS

Edit (function for editing SFC diagrams)

Delete

OVERVIEW

List of functions for editing SFC diagrams

1 - 23

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.3.3

GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

Find/Replace (function for editing SFC diagrams)

Jump

Move the cursor to the specified position.

Find Jump Step

Move to the jump source step.

Change SFC Step No.

Replace the SFC step number.

View (function for editing SFC diagrams)

Program Display

Reference
(Simple)

Reference

Display MELSAP-L programs.

SFC Step/Transition Comment

Display the SFC step/transition comments.

Zoom

Change the display magnification ratio of the SFC diagram.

SFC Row Setting

Set the number of rows of SFC diagram.

Open SFC Blocklist

Display the SFC block list screen.

MELSAP3 Display

Display SFC in MELSAP3 format.

MELSAP-L (Instruction Format) Display

Display SFC in MELASP-L (instruction format).

(Simple)

MELSAP-L (Start Conditions Format) Display Display SFC in MELSAP-L (start conditions format).
Open Zoom/Start Destination Block

Display the Zoom editor window or the start destination

block.

Back to Start SFC Block

Display the SFC block of the start source.

Open Header

Open the setting screen of labels set for the program being
edited.

1.3.4

List of functions for editing SFC block list

The following tables show the functions for editing SFC block list.
Find/Replace (function for editing SFC block list)
Jump

Move the cursor to the specified block number.

Block Information Find Device

Search for a device.

View (function for editing SFC block list)

1 - 24

SFC Block List Comment

Display comments of the SFC block list.

Device Display

Display devices.

Open SFC Body

Open the SFC diagram.

Open Header

Display the label setting screen.

1.3.4 List of functions for editing SFC block list

Reference
(Simple)

Reference

(Simple)

1.3 List of Functions

The following tables show the functions for the ST editor.

Edit (function for editing in ST language)
Delete

Delete the selected data.

List Operands

Display the screen for inserting a label by selecting an

existing label.

Display Template

Insert a template corresponds to the instruction, function, or

control syntax.

Mark Template (Left)

Set an argument of the template in the selected status from

the left by selecting the menu each time.

Mark Template (Right)

Set an argument of the template in the selected status from

the right by selecting the menu each time.

Reference

OVERVIEW

List of functions for editing in ST language

2
(Structured)

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

1.3.5

Find/Replace (function for editing in ST language)

Jump

Jump to the specified row.

Reference
(Structured)

Toggle Bookmark

Set a bookmark at the cursor row. The bookmark is deleted

when one is already set at the cursor row.

Bookmark List

Jump to the specified bookmark from the bookmark list.

Next Bookmark

Display the next bookmark position.

Previous Bookmark

Display the previous bookmark position.

Delete All Bookmarks

Cancel all bookmarks.

View (function for editing in ST language)

Display Compile Result

Display the compilation result in a list form.

(Structured)

Reference

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Bookmark

(Structured)

Zoom

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Set Zoom Factor

(Structured)
EDITING
PROGRAMS

Change the display size of the program.

Decrease Zoom

Zoom Header/Body
Header

Open the label setting screen in the selected POU.

Body

Open the program editor in the selected POU.

Open Header

(Structured)

Open the label setting screen for the program being edited.

Online (function for editing in ST language)

Reference

Monitor

Start Monitoring (Bit Type only)

Start monitoring only bit type devices/labels.

(Structured)

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Start Monitoring

Start monitoring with the split window format that displays

monitor data of numeric value and character strings.

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

Increase Zoom

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.3.5 List of functions for editing in ST language

1 - 25

GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

1.3.6

List of functions for editing in structured ladder/FBD

language

The following tables show the functions for the structured ladder/FBD editor.
Edit (function for editing in structured ladder/FBD language)
Delete

Delete the selected data.

Select Mode

Change to the contact and coil input mode.

Interconnect Mode

Change to the line drawing mode.

Auto Connect

Specify and connect the start and end points to draw a line.

Guided Editing

Change to the keyboard input mode.

Overwrite Mode

Overwrite the ladder symbol entered in Guided editing at the

cursor position.

Insert Mode

Insert the ladder symbol entered in Guided editing at the

cursor position.

Line Mode

Change the input format to draw lines in Guided editing.

Auto Comment

Add a comment entry field at the start of the ladder block

added in Guided editing.

Recalculate Line

Arrange a line automatically to redraw it.

Insert Row

Insert a row in a ladder being edited.

Insert Column

Insert a column in a ladder being edited.

(Structured)

(Structured)

New Ladder Block List

Top

Insert a new ladder block at the start of all ladder blocks.

Before

Insert a new ladder block in front of a ladder block being

edited.

After

Insert a new ladder block after a ladder block being edited.

Bottom

Insert a new ladder block at the end of all ladder blocks.

(Structured)

Open a Input Instruction screen.

Ladder Symbol

1 - 26

Guided Mode

Input Instruction

Reference

Open Contact

Insert

at the cursor position.

Close Contact

Insert

at the cursor position.

Coil

Insert

at the cursor position.

Jump

Insert

at the cursor position.

Return

Insert

at the cursor position.

Open Branch

Insert

at the cursor position.

Close Branch

Insert

at the cursor position.

Input Label

Insert

at the cursor position.

Output Label

Insert

at the cursor position.

Horizontal Line Segment

Insert

at the cursor position.

Vertical Line Segment

Insert

at the cursor position.

Rising Pulse

Insert

at the cursor position.

Falling Pulse

Insert

at the cursor position.

Rising Pulse Close

Insert

at the cursor position.

Falling Pulse Close

Insert

at the cursor position.

Comment

Insert a comment entry field at the cursor position.

Ladder Block Label

Display the Ladder Block screen.

Left Power Rail

Display/hide the left power rail.

1.3.6 List of functions for editing in structured ladder/FBD language

(Structured)

1.3 List of Functions

1
OVERVIEW

(Structured)

Number of Pins
Increment

Increase the number of arguments of functions and function

blocks.

Delete

Decrease the number of arguments of functions and function

blocks.

Ladder Block List

(Structured)

Display a list of ladder blocks in a program.

Signal Configuration
Configure

Set the type of a contact and a coil.

Toggle

Change the contact and coil type per execution in the

following order.
Contact: Open Contact Close Contact
Coil: Normal Negation Set Reset

Find/Replace (function for editing in structured ladder/FBD language)

Jump

Jump to the specified ladder block number.

View (function for editing in structured ladder/FBD language)

(Structured)

3
Reference
(Structured)

Reference

Display a variable by its entered format.

Device

Display a device/address in device format. The variable is

displayed as an assigned device in device format.

Address

Display a device/address in address format. The variable is

displayed as an assigned device in address format.

Comment

Display a label comment.

Change Label-Device-Address Mode

Switch the display format in order (label, device, address).

Change Label-Comment Mode

Switch the display between label and comment.

All Device Display

Batch-change all labels on the program editors to the device

display.

Cancel All Device Display

Cancel the device display on the program editors, and

display data in the format at the time of data entry.

Grid

Show a grid on the screen being edited to display the start/

end positions of a line.

Print Wrap Position

Display the wrapping position for printing.

Display Compile Result

Display the compilation result in a list form.

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Label

(Structured)

5
EDITING
PROGRAMS

View Mode

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Display the screen for inserting a label by selecting an

existing label.

List Operands

Reference

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Edit (function for editing in structured ladder/FBD language)

Set Zoom Factor

Increase Zoom

Change the display size of the program.

(Structured)

Decrease Zoom

Zoom Header/Body
Header

Open the label setting screen in the selected POU.

Body

Open the program editor in the selected POU.

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Open the label setting screen for a program being edited.

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

Open Header

(Structured)

SETTING
PARAMETERS

Zoom

1.3.6 List of functions for editing in structured ladder/FBD language

1 - 27

GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

1.3.7

List of functions for GX Simulator2 screen

The following tables show the functions for the GX Simulator2 screen.
Tool (function in the GX Simulator2 screen)

Save
Read
I/O System Setting

Save device memory/buffer memory in simulation

temporarily.

Section 15.2.1

Read device memory/buffer memory saved temporarily.

Section 15.2.2

Execute simulation with the I/O system setting.

Options (function in the GX Simulator2 screen)

Start in minimized status

Start the GX Simulator2 screen in the minimized status at

starting simulation.

Save device memory at stop

Save device memory/buffer memory in simulation

automatically at stopping simulation.

1.3.8

Reference

Backup Device Memory in Simulation

Section 19.1

Reference
Section 15.2
Section 15.2.1

List of functions for I/O system setting screen

The following tables show the functions for the I/O System Setting screen.
File (function for the I/O system setting)
New

Section 19.8.1

Open

Open an existing I/O system setting.

Section 19.8.2

Save

Save an I/O system setting.

Save As

Name and saves an I/O system setting.

Display the recently used I/O system setting file names and
(Recently used I/O system setting files 1 to 4)
open the selected I/O system setting file.

Section 19.8.3

Execute I/O System Setting

Execute the I/O system setting and start simulation.

Section 19.6.1

Disable I/O System Setting

Disable execution of the I/O system setting.

Section 19.6.2

Exit I/O System Settings

Exit the I/O system setting.

Edit (function for the I/O system setting)

Cut

Reference

Cut the selected data.

Copy

Copy the selected data.

Paste

Paste the cut or copied data at the cursor position.

Delete

Delete the selected data.

Section 19.4.2

Enable/Disable Setting
Enable All

Enable all I/O system settings.

Disable All

Disable all I/O system settings.

View (function for the I/O system setting)

1 - 28

Reference

Create a new I/O system setting.

Toolbar

Display/hide the toolbar.

Statusbar

Display/hide the status bar.

1.3.7 List of functions for GX Simulator2 screen

Section 19.4

Reference

1.3 List of Functions

Window (function for the I/O system setting)

Reference

Tile Vertically

Tile windows on the I/O System Setting screen vertically.

Tile Horizontally

Tile windows on the I/O System Setting screen horizontally.

Arrange Icons

Arrange the icons at the bottom of the I/O System Setting

screen.

The following tables show the functions for the predefined protocol support function.
File (function of the predefined protocol support function)

Reference

Create a new protocol setting file.

Open

Open an existing protocol setting file.

Close

Close an open protocol setting file.

Save

Save a protocol setting file.

Save As

Name and saves a protocol setting file.

Print

Print a protocol setting etc.

Exit

Exit the predefined protocol support function.

Edit (function of the predefined protocol support function)

Add Protocol

Add a protocol.

Change to Editable Protocol

Change a protocol selected from the predefined protocol

library to an editable one.

Protocol Detailed Setting

Configure the number of retries of a protocol and whether to

clear OS area (receive data area) before protocol execution
etc.

Add Receive Packet

Add a receive packet.

Delete

Delete a protocol.

Copy

Copy a protocol.

Paste

Paste a protocol.

Delete Multiple Protocols

Batch-delete multiple protocols.

Copy Multiple Protocols

Batch-copy multiple protocols.

Paste Multiple Protocols

Batch-paste multiple protocols.

Device Batch Setting

Batch-set devices used in a protocol

Save User Protocol Library

Save a set protocol as a user protocol library.

Module Read/Write (function of the predefined protocol support function)

Read from Module

Read protocol settings from a module.

Write to Module

Write registered protocol settings to a module.

Module Verification

Compare protocol settings being opened with those written

in a module.

1.3.9 List of functions for predefined protocol support function

OVERVIEW

List of functions for predefined protocol support function

New

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Tile windows on the I/O System Setting screen in

overlapping display.

Cascade

1.3.9

Section 19.7.1

(Intelligent)

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Stop monitoring the I/O System Setting screen.

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Start monitoring the I/O System Setting screen.

Stop Monitoring

5
Reference

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Start Monitoring

Section 19.3

6
(Intelligent)

SETTING
PARAMETERS

Set the target simulation with which the I/O system setting is
executed.

Reference

(Intelligent)

1 - 29

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Target Simulator Setting

Reference

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

Online (function for the I/O system setting)

GX Works2

1 OVERVIEW

Tool (function of the predefined protocol support function)

Setting Device List

Display the list of devices used in protocols.

Register Predefined Protocol Library

Import predefined protocol library provided by Mitsubishi

Electric Corporation.

Debugging Support Function (function of the predefined protocol support function)

Module Selection

Select a module to be debugged.

Protocol Execution Log

Display the protocol execution logs and the protocol

execution results.

State Monitor

Monitor signals, communication error information, operation

setting switches, and protocol execution status of the Q
series C24N/L series C24 module.

Window (function of the predefined protocol support function)

1 - 30

Cascade

Tile windows in overlapping display.

Tile Horizontally

Tile windows horizontally.

(Switch to other window)

Display the open window.

1.3.9 List of functions for predefined protocol support function

Reference
(Intelligent)

Reference

(Intelligent)

Reference
(Intelligent)

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

OVERVIEW

This chapter explains the system configuration, configuration devices, and supported languages of GX
Works2.

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Connection from USB/Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Connection from I/F Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Interfaces and Connectable Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
System Configuration with Memory Card in Personal Computer. . . . 2-18
Supported Programming Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5

2 -1

GX Works2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.1

Connection from USB/Serial Port

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

The following shows the possible system configuration for connecting to the programmable controller CPU
using the USB/serial port of a personal computer.
For ACPU, use GX Developer. For details of the use of ACPU, refer to Appendix 13.
Programmable controller
direct coupled
(USB communication)

Section 2.1.1

QCPU (Q mode)/
Remote I/O module

USB Cable

GX Works2
(SW1DNC-GXW2-E)

Section 2.1.2

Section 2.1.2

LCPU/
Communication
head module
FXCPU
(FX3U/FX3UC)

USB Cable
Section 2.1.3

Programmable controller
direct coupled
(Serial port communication)

FXCPU
(FX3G)

USB Cable
Section 2.1.4

QC30R2
Section 2.1.4
Section 2.1.4

LCPU/
Communication
head module

QC30R2
Section 2.1.5

RS-232 adapter
FXCPU

Converter/Cable
Section 2.1.5

Section 2.1.6

Converter/Cable
Section 2.1.7

Section 2.1.7

Section 2.1.8

Converter/Cable

Converter/Cable

2 -2

FXCPU
(FX1S/FX1N/FX2N/FX3G/
FX3U/FX3UC)
FXCPU
(FX1S/FX1N/FX2N/FX1NC/
FX2NC/FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC)

Cable

Section 2.1.8

QCPU (Q mode)/
Remote I/O module

Section 2.1.6

FXCPU
(FX0/FX0S/FX1S/FX0N/
FX1N/FX2N/FX1NC/FX2NC/
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC)
FXCPU
(FX1S/FX1N/FX2N/FX3G/
FX3U/FX3UC)

2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port

Via Serial communication

QCPU (Q mode)/
Remote I/O module

RS-232

OVERVIEW

C24
LCPU/
Communication
head module

GX Works2
(SW1DNC-GXW2-E)

Via CC-Link(G4)

Section 2.1.9

Converter/Cable

QCPU (Q mode)/
Remote I/O module

CC-Link

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

G4 module
LCPU/
Communication
head module
Via MELSECNET/H
Converter/Cable
Remote station

Control station

Remote module

Via modem

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Modem
Cable included in modem package

Modem
Cable included in modem package

QCPU (Q mode)

C24
LCPU

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Section 2.1.10

FXCPU
(FX1S/FX1N/FX2N/FX1NC/
FX2NC/FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC)
Section 2.1.11

QCPU (Q mode)/
Remote I/O module

5
EDITING
PROGRAMS

LCPU/
Communication
head module
FXCPU

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

GOT

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Cable

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

Via GOT

2 -3

GX Works2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.1.1

USB cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and

communication head module)

The following table shows USB cables and USB adapters whose operations have been confirmed by
Mitsubishi Electric.
Product name

Model name

USB cable
(USB A type - USB B type)*1
USB cable
*2

(USB A type - USB miniB type)

Maker name

AU230

BUFFALO KOKUYO SUPPLY INC.

KU-AMB530

SANWA SUPPLY INC.

U2C-M30BK

ELECOM Co., Ltd.

MR-J3USBCBL3M

Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

GT09-C30USB-5P

Mitsubishi Electric System & Service Co., Ltd.

*1 :

QCPU (Q mode) only

*2 :

Universal model QCPU/LCPU/communication head module only

Using a USB cable for the first time

Install the USB driver. (
Appendix 15)
Precautions and restrictions
For the precautions and restrictions when accessing a programmable controller CPU, refer to Section 11.10.
Using a USB/RS-232 conversion cable
For checking the COM port number as connecting a personal computer to a programmable controller CPU using a
USB/RS-232 conversion cable etc, refer to the user's manual of each cable.

Configurations for USB connection

Only one programmable controller CPU can be connected to a personal computer using a USB cable.
Connection to a programmable controller CPU is not applicable in the configuration examples below.
<Not applicable configurations>
Connection to several programmable controller CPUs from the personal
computer with several USB ports
Programmable controller CPU
USB cable
USB

cab

le

Programmable controller CPU

Connection to several programmable controller CPUs via USB hub

Programmable controller CPU
USB cable

USB cable
USB hub

USB

2 -4

cab

le

Programmable controller CPU

2.1.1 USB cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and communication head module)

2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port

USB cables and function expansion boards (compatible with

FX3U/FX3UC)
FX3U-USB-BD

1
OVERVIEW

2.1.2

USB cable (included)

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Using a USB cable for the first time

Install the driver from the CD-ROM included with FX-USB-AW and FX3U-USB-BD.
GX Works2 selects data from the Connection Destination view in the Navigation window and assigns a serial
COM port number.
Precautions and restrictions
For the precautions and restrictions relating to FX3U-USB-BD, refer to the user's manual included.
When the "Operate communication setting" check box is checked on the <<PLC System (2)>> tab of PLC
parameter, the corresponding port cannot communicate with the programmable controller CPU. Write the setting
that the "Operate communication setting" check box is cleared from the built-in programming port of the
programmable controller CPU.
When the programmable controller type of the project is FX3U(C), the channel setting (CH1/CH2) combo box is
displayed. Select 'CH1' to confirm the setting.

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

USB cables (compatible with FX3G)

For details of cables, refer to FX3G Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
Only one programmable controller CPU can be connected to a personal computer using a USB cable.
Section 2.1.1 " Configurations for USB connection")

Using a USB cable for the first time

Install the USB driver. (
Appendix 15)
GX Works2 selects data from the Connection Destination view in the Navigation window and configures a USB.

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

2.1.3

EDITING
PROGRAMS

2.1.2 USB cables and function expansion boards (compatible with FX3U/FX3UC)

2 -5

GX Works2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.1.4

RS-232 cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and

remote I/O module)

The following table shows RS-232 cables whose operations have been confirmed at Mitsubishi Electric.
LCPU can be connected with an RS-232 adapters (L6ADP-R2).
Model name
QC30R2
(Personal computer connector: 9-pin D-sub
connector)

Maker name

Mitsubishi Electric Corporation RS-232 cable

High-speed communication
For high-speed communication (transmission speed: 115.2/57.6kbps), use a personal computer compatible with
high-speed communication.
When a communication error occurs, retry the communication after reducing the transmission speed setting.

2.1.5

Converters/cables for RS-232 connection (compatible with

FXCPU)

Personal computer side (RS-232 cable)

RS-232/RS-422
converter

Programmable controller CPU side

(RS-422 cable)
For FX1/FXU/FX2C

F2-232CAB
(25-pin D-subQ25-pin D-sub)
FX-232AW
F2-232CAB-1
(9-pin D-subQ25-pin D-sub)

F2-232CAB-2
(Half pitchQ25-pin D-sub)

FX-422CAB (0.3 m)
FX-422CAB-150 (1.5 m)
For FX0/FX0S/FX0N/FX1S/FX1N/FX1NC/FX2N/
FX2NC/FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC

FX-232AWC

FX-422CAB0 (1.5 m)

AC30N2A(25-pinQ25-pin)
FX-232AWC-H

2 -6

2.1.4 RS-232 cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and remote I/O module)

2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port

Operation
1. Turn OFF the personal computer.
2. Turn OFF the conversion cable/converter. Ground the FG terminal if provided.
3. Connect/disconnect the conversion cable/converter to/from the personal computer and the
programmable controller CPU.

4. Turn ON the conversion cable/converter.

5. Turn ON the personal computer.
6. Start up the software package.

Connection using function expansion boards (compatible

with FXCPU)

FX3U,
FX3UC (FX3UC-32MT-LT,
FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 only)

FX3U-422-BD

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

2.1.6

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Connecting/disconnecting the conversion cable/converter

When connecting/disconnecting a peripheral device, conversion cable or converter to/from the RS422 interface, be sure to touch a grounding strap or grounded metal to discharge static electricity
stored in the cable or in your body before the operation, regardless of whether electricity is being
supplied or not. After doing this, follow the procedure below.
Turn the programmable controller CPU OFF before connecting/disconnecting a conversion cable/
converter that receives 5VDC power supply from the RS-422 interface.

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

For the specifications of an RS-422 interface conversion cable/converter and the precautions on using
them, please read the following instructions as well as the manuals of each product for correct
handling.

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Precautions on using RS-422 interface cables/converters

SETTING
PARAMETERS

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Transmission speed
When connecting to FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC using FX-232AWC-H, select any of 9.6kbps, 19.2kbps, 38.4kbps, 57.6kbps,
or 115.2kbps for the transmission speed.
When connecting using FX-232AWC or FX-232AW, select either 9.6kbps or 19.2kbps for the transmission speed.
Connecting to FXCPU
Be sure to use equipment shown in the table when connecting to FXCPU.

OVERVIEW

The following table shows the compatibility of FXCPU with function expansion boards.
Function expansion board

FX3G

FX3G-422-BD

FX2N

FX2N-422-BD

FX1S,FX1N

FX1N-422-BD

2.1.6 Connection using function expansion boards (compatible with FXCPU)

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

Series

2 -7

GX Works2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

PLC parameter
When the "Operate communication setting" check box is checked on the <<PLC System (2)>> tab of PLC
parameter, the corresponding port cannot communicate with the programmable controller CPU. Write the setting
that the "Operate communication setting" check box is cleared from the built-in programming port of the
programmable controller CPU.
When the programmable controller type of the project is FX3G or FX3U(C), the channel setting (CH1/CH2) combo
box is displayed.
Select 'CH1' to confirm the setting.

2 -8

2.1.6 Connection using function expansion boards (compatible with FXCPU)

2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port

Connection using RS-232 cables and function expansion

boards (special adapters) (compatible with FXCPU)

The following table shows the compatibility of RS-232 cables with function expansion boards and
special adapters according to the shape and pin configuration of the serial port of the personal
computer.
Series

Function expansion board and special adapter

RS-232 cable

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Serial port shape of

the personal
computer

FX3U-232-BD

FX3G

Function expansion board (FX3U-***-BD)*2 + FX3U232ADP

FX3G-232-BD
FX3G-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP
FX0N-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD

9-pin D-sub

FX2N

FX2N-232-BD
FX2NC-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD

FX1NC,FX2NC

FX1S,FX1N

FX-232CAB-1

F2-232CAB-1
FX-232CAB-1

FX0N-232ADP

F2-232CAB-1

FX2NC-232ADP

FX-232CAB-1

FX0N-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD

F2-232CAB-1

FX1N-232-BD
FX2NC-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD

FX-232CAB-1

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

FX3U,FX3UC*1

FX-232CAB-1

FX3G-232-BD
FX3G-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP
FX0N-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD

Half pitch 14-pin

FX2N

FX2N-232-BD
FX2NC-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD

FX1NC,FX2NC

FX1S,FX1N

FX-232CAB-2
F2-232CAB-2

FX-232CAB-2

FX-232CAB-2

FX0N-232ADP

F2-232CAB-2

FX2NC-232ADP

FX-232CAB-2

FX0N-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD

F2-232CAB-2

FX1N-232-BD
FX2NC-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD

EDITING
PROGRAMS

FX3G

Function expansion board (FX3U-***-BD)*2 + FX3U232ADP

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

FX3U-232-BD
FX3U,FX3UC*1

1
OVERVIEW

2.1.7

FX-232CAB-2

FX3U-232-BD

FX0N-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD
25-pin D-sub

FX2N

FX2N-232-BD
FX2NC-232ADP+FX2N-CNV-BD

FX1NC,FX2NC

FX1S,FX1N

F2-232CAB-1
F2-232CAB

F2-232CAB

FX2NC-232ADP

F2-232CAB-1

FX0N-232ADP+FX1N-CNV-BD

F2-232CAB

FX2NC-232ADP+FX1N-CNV-BD

F2-232CAB-1

FX0N-232ADP

FX1N-232-BD

SETTING
PARAMETERS

FX3G-232-BD
FX3G-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP

F2-232CAB-1

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

FX3G

Function expansion board (FX3U-***-BD)*2 + FX3U232ADP

F2-232CAB-1

*1 :

For FX3UC series, only FX3UC-32MT-LT and FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 are connectable.

*2 :

'***' of function expansion boards (FX3U-***-BD) indicates 232, 485, 422, USB, or CNV.

2.1.7 Connection using RS-232 cables and function expansion boards (special adapters) (compatible with FXCPU)

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

FX3U,FX3UC*1

2 -9

GX Works2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

PLC parameter
When the "Operate communication setting" check box is checked on the <<PLC System (2)>> tab of PLC
parameter, the corresponding port cannot communicate with the programmable controller CPU. Write the setting
that the "Operate communication setting" check box is cleared from the built-in programming port of the
programmable controller CPU.
When the programmable controller type of the project is FX3G or FX3U(C), the channel setting (CH1/CH2) combo
box is displayed.
FX3U/FX3UC series
When using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3U-232-BD or FX3U-CNV-BD, specify
'CH1' and check the setting.
When using FX3U-232ADP which is connected to a board other than FX3U-CNV-BD, or when using the second
adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3U-CNV-BD, specify 'CH2' and check the setting.
FX3G series (14-/24-point type)
When using FX3G-232-BD, or when using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3G-CNVADP, check the setting of 'CH1'.
FX3G series (40-/60-point type)
When using FX3G-232-BD, or when using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3G-CNVADP, check the setting of 'CH1'. In this case, when using the second adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is
connected to FX3G-CNV-ADP, check the setting of 'CH2'.
When using FX3G-232-BD and FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3G-CNV-ADP, check the setting of FX3U232ADP with 'CH1', and check the setting of FX3G-232-BD with 'CH2'.

2.1.8

Converters/cables for USB connection (compatible with

FXCPU)
FX-USB-AW

USB cable (included)

Using a USB cable for the first time

Install the driver from the CD-ROM included with FX-USB-AW and FX3U-USB-BD.
GX Works2 selects data from the Connection Destination view in the Navigation window and assigns a serial
COM port number.
Precautions and restrictions
For the precautions and restrictions relating to FX-USB-AW, refer to the user's manual included.

2 - 10

2.1.8 Converters/cables for USB connection (compatible with FXCPU)

2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port

2.1.9

Connection via AJ65BT-R2N

OVERVIEW

Use an RS-232 cable complies with the RS-232 standard within 15m.
For details, refer to the following manual.
CC-Link System RS-232 Interface Module User's Manual (MELSOFT Connection Mode)

Programmable controller side

connector shape of cable
included in modem package

Series

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Function expansion board (special adapter)

Function expansion board and special adapter

FX3U-232-BD

FX3G
9-pin D-sub
FX2N
FX1NC, FX2NC
FX1S, FX1N

25-pin D-sub

Function expansion board (FX3U-***-BD)*2 + FX3U232ADP

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

FX3U, FX3UC

FX3G-232-BD
FX3G-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP
FX2N-232-BD
FX2NC-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD

FX2NC-232ADP
FX1N-232-BD
FX2NC-232ADP + FX1N-CN

FX2N

FX0N-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD

FX1NC, FX2NC

FX0N-232ADP

FX1S, FX1N

FX0N-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD

*1 :

For FX3UC series, only FX3UC-32MT-LT and FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 are connectable.

*2 :

'***' of function expansion boards (FX3U-***-BD) indicates 232, 485, 422, USB, or CNV.

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

*1

Set the "MODEM Initialized" item on the <<PLC System (1)>> tab of PLC parameter according to the
modem. For details, refer to Section 11.9.

EDITING
PROGRAMS

2.1.10

SETTING
PARAMETERS

2.1.11

Connection via GOT

The use of the transparent function of GOT enables the access to a programmable controller CPU via
Section 11.8)

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

GOT. (

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

2.1.9 Connection via AJ65BT-R2N

2 - 11

GX Works2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.2

Connection from I/F Boards

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

The following shows the system configuration for connecting to a programmable controller CPU using an I/F
board mounted on the personal computer.
For the methods for mounting an I/F board and installing the driver, refer to the manual of each I/F board.
Note that I/F boards other than Ethernet boards do not support 64-bit version of Windows 7.
MELSECNET/H board
Driver
Q80BD-J71BR11 (Coaxial loop)
Q80BD-J71LP21-25 (Optical loop)
Q80BD-J71LP21G (Optical loop)

QCPU

SW0DNC-MNETH-B

Programmable controller
on another station

CC-Link IE Controller Network board

Driver

QCPU

SW1DNC-MNETG-B

A80BDE-J61BT13 (Optical loop)

A80BDE-J61BT11 (Optical loop)

GX Works2
(SW1DNC-GXW2-E)

Programmable controller
on another station

CC-Link IE Field Network board

Driver

QCPU

SW1DNC-CCIEF-J

Programmable controller
on another station
LCPU/
Communication
head module
Programmable controller
on another station

Q81BD-J71GF11-T2

Section 2.2.1

CC-Link Ver.1 board

Driver

QCPU

SW4DNF-CCLINK-B
A80BD-J61BT11
A80BD-J61BT13

Programmable controller
on another station
LCPU
Programmable controller
on another station

Section 2.2.1

CC-Link Ver.2 board

Driver

QCPU

SW1DNC-CCBD2-B
Q80BD-J61BT11N

Programmable controller
on another station
LCPU
Programmable controller
on another station

Ethernet board

Ethernet board built-in a personal

computer/commercially available

Driver
Driver supplied
with commercially
available
Ethernet board

QCPU
Programmable controller
on host/another station
LCPU
Programmable controller
on host/another station
FXCPU
Programmable controller
on another station

2 - 12

2.2 Connection from I/F Boards

I/F boards

CC-Link Ver.1 board (A80BD-J61BT11, A80BD-J61BT13)

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

OVERVIEW

This section explains applications of I/F boards.

For details, refer to the manual of each I/F board.

A80BD-J61BT11 can be used as a master or local station.

A80BD-J61BT13 can be used as a local station.

CC-Link Ver.2 board (Q80BD-J61BT11N)

Q80BD-J61BT11N can be used as a master or local station.

Use the communication driver SW1DNC-CCBD2-B version 1.04E or later for Windows Vista, and
version 1.08J or later for Windows 7.

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

2.2.1

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

2.2.1 I/F boards

2 - 13

GX Works2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.3

Interfaces and Connectable Modules

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains details of the modules that can be connected from the USB port, serial port, and each I/F
board.

Modules connectable from USB port

The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the USB port.
Programmable controller series
Q series
L series

L02, L02-P, L26-BT, L26-PBT, and LJ72GF15-T2

FX series*1,*2

2 - 14

Module model
Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q02H, Q02U, Q03UD, Q03UDE, Q04UDH,
Q04UDEH, Q06H, Q06UDH, Q06UDEH, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q12H,
Q13UDH, Q13UDEH, Q20UDH, Q20UDEH, Q25H, Q26UDH, Q26UDEH,
Q50UDEH, and Q100UDEH
FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3U, and FX3UC
FX3U-USB-BD

*1 :

Connectable only with the USB RS-422 conversion adapter.

*2 :

As FXCPU (excluding FX3G) uses the serial USB conversion driver software, specify the COM port
number of the RS-232 in the connection destination setting.

2.3 Interfaces and Connectable Modules

Modules connectable from serial port

L series*2

Module model

Programmable controller CPU

module

Q00J, Q00UJ, Q00, Q00U, Q01, Q01U, Q02(H), Q02U, Q03UD,

Q04UDH, Q06H, Q06UDH, Q10UDH, Q12H, Q13UDH,
Q20UDH, Q25H, and Q26UDH

Serial communication module*1

QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, and

QJ71C24N-R4

MELSECNET/H network remote

I/O module

QJ72LP25 and QJ72BR15

G4 module

AJ65BT-G4-S3 and AJ65BT-R2N

Programmable controller CPU

module

L02, L02-P, L26-BT, and L26-PBT

Serial communication module*1

G4 module

FX series*3

*1 :

Programmable controller CPU

module

LJ71C24 and LJ71C24-R2

AJ65BT-G4-S3 and AJ65BT-R2N
FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FXU, FX2C, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N,
FX2NC, FX3G, FX3U, and FX3UC

When accessing the programmable controller CPU from a personal computer via serial communication
modules, note that modules that can be connected to the personal computer are limited.
Even if a module cannot be directly connected to the personal computer, it may be usable as the nth
module in multi-dropped connection.
For details of the multi-dropped connection, refer to the following manuals.
MELSEC-L Serial Communication Module Users Manual (Basic)
<Q series>

: Applicable : Not applicable

QJ71C24N-R2
QJ71C24-R2

QJ71C24N-R4

CH1

RS-232

CH2

RS-422/485

CH1

RS-232

CH2

RS-232

CH1
CH2

1st module

nth module

EDITING
PROGRAMS

QJ71C24N
QJ71C24

Interface

Multi-dropped connection

(Function version B
or later)

RS-422/485

RS-422/485

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

Model

<L series>
: Applicable : Not applicable

LJ71C24-R2

CH1

1:1 system
configuration

Multi-dropped connection
1st module

nth module

RS-232

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

LJ71C24

Interface

CH2

RS-422/485

CH1

RS-232

CH2

RS-232

*2 :

Connectable only with an RS-232 adapter (L6ADP-R2).

*3 :

Connectable only with an RS-232 RS-422 conversion board/adapter.

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

Model

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module Users Manual (Basic)

1:1 system
configuration

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Q series

Module name

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Programmable
controller series

OVERVIEW

The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the serial port.

2 - 15

GX Works2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Modules connectable from MELSECNET/H board

The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the MELSECNET/H board.
I/F board model
Q80BD-J71LP21-25
Q80BD-J71LP21G
Q80BD-J71BR11

Programmable
controller series
Q series

Module model
QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21G, QJ71BR11, QJ71LP21-25 and
QJ71LP21S-25

Modules connectable from CC-Link IE Controller Network board

The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the CC-Link IE Controller Network
board.
I/F board model
Q80BD-J71GP21-SX
Q80BD-J71GP21S-SX

Programmable
controller series
Q series

Module model
QJ71GP21-SX and QJ71GP21S-SX

Modules connectable from CC-Link IE Field Network board

The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the CC-Link IE Field Network
board.
I/F board model
Q81BD-J71GF11-T2

Programmable
controller series

Module model

Q series

QJ71GF11-T2

L series

LJ72GF15-T2 and LJ71GF11-T2

Modules connectable from CC-Link Ver.1 board

The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the CC-Link Ver.1 board.
I/F board model
A80BD-J61BT11
A80BD-J61BT13

Programmable
controller series
Q series

Module model
QJ61BT11 and QJ61BT11N

Modules connectable from the CC-Link Ver.2 board

The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the CC-Link Ver.2 board.
I/F board model
Q80BD-J61BT11N

2 - 16

Programmable
controller series

Module model

Q series

QJ61BT11 and QJ61BT11N

L series

L26-BT and LJ61BT11

2.3 Interfaces and Connectable Modules

Modules connectable from Ethernet board

QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5,

Q03UDE, Q04UDEH, Q06UDEH, Q10UDEH, Q13UDEH,
Q20UDEH, Q26UDEH, Q50UDEH, and Q100UDEH

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

FX-ENET series

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

L02, L02-P, L26-BT, and L26-PBT

FX series

5
EDITING
PROGRAMS

L series

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

Q series

Module model

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Ethernet board built-in a personal

computer or commercially available

Programmable
controller series

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

I/F board model

OVERVIEW

The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the Ethernet board.

2 - 17

GX Works2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.4

System Configuration with Memory Card in Personal Computer

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains the system configuration when accessing from the personal computer with the memory
card in the personal computer.
Loading memory card into PC card slot
When loading a Q series memory card into the PC card slot, the following adapter is required.
Product name
PC card adapter

Model name
Q2MEM-ADP

Manufacture name
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

Writing/reading data to/from memory card

Using the following function, even if a memory card cannot be loaded into the programmable
controller CPU, data can be written or read by loading the memory card to personal computer.
: Applicable : Not applicable
Function

PLC series

Memory card
SRAM card

IC memory
card data write/
read

Q series

*1 :

2 - 18

WindowsXP

Windows Vista

ATA card
Flash card

L series

*1

Windows2000

Reference

Section
12.11.1

SD card
memory

When using a SRAM card, set the driver to CONFIG.NT.

(For details, refer to HELP of Windows)
When using an ATA card, Windows recognizes it automatically.
If the ATA card cannot be recognized, select [Control Panel] [System] to set the personal
computer.
If the driver for SRAM card is set to CONFIG.NT, cancel the setting.

2.5 Supported Programming Languages

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains details of the programming languages supported by GX Works2.

: Supported : Not supported
Description

Simple project
without labels

with labels

Ladder

A graphic language using ladders composed of contacts and

coils. Can be operated in a similar way to existing GX Developer.
In projects with labels, the Inline structured text function can be
used to edit ST programs on the ladder editor.

ST

A text language with grammatical structure similar to C language.

SFC*2

A graphic language which defines the executing order or

condition of a program

Structured ladder

A graphic language using ladders composed of contacts and

coils.

A graphic language using ladders by connecting functions and/or

function blocks with lines.

FBD

Structured
project
*1

*1
*1

*1

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Programming
language

OVERVIEW

Supported Programming Languages

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

2.5

Not supported by FXCPU.

*2 :

For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, the display format of SFC can be selected from "MELSAP3", "MELSAP-L (Instruction
Format)", and "MELSAP-L (Start Conditions Format)".

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

*1 :

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

2 - 19

GX Works2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

MEMO

2 - 20

SCREEN CONFIGURATION
AND BASIC OPERATIONS

This chapter explains the screen configuration and basic operations of GX Works2.

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

OVERVIEW

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Starting and Exiting GX Works2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Screen Configuration and Basic Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Selecting Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Help Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4

3 -1

GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

3.1

Starting and Exiting GX Works2

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

This section explains the operation methods for starting and exiting GX Works2.

Starting up

Starting up GX Works2

Operating procedure
Select [Start] [All Programs] [MELSOFT Application] [GX Works2] [GX Works2].

Exiting

Exiting GX Works2

Operating procedure
Select [Project] [Exit].

3 -2

FX

3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains the main frame (basic screen) of GX Works2 that is displayed when it is started up.

OVERVIEW

3.2

Main frame configuration

The following screen shows a main frame configuration in which a work window and docking windows
are displayed.

Screen display
Title bar
Menu bar
Toolbar
Function Block
Selection window

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Navigation
window

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

3.2.1

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Work window

5
EDITING
PROGRAMS

Docking window

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

Status bar

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.2.1 Main frame configuration

3 -3

GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

Display contents
Name

Description

Reference

Title bar

Display a project name.

Menu bar

Display menu options for executing each function.

Toolbar

Display tool buttons for executing each function.

Section 3.2.2

Work window

A main screen used for operations such as

programming, parameter setting, and monitoring

Section 3.2.3

Docking window

A sub screen to support operations performed on a

work window

Section 3.2.4

Navigation window

Display contents of a project in tree format.

Section 3.2.5

Function Block Selection window

Display a list of functions (such as function blocks)

used for programming.

Output window

Display compilation and check results (errors and

warnings).

GX Works2 Version 1
Operating Manual
(Simple Project)
(Structured Project)

Cross Reference window

Display cross reference results.

Section 10.1

Device List window

Display the device list.

Section 10.2

Watch window 1 to 4

A screen used for monitoring and changing current

device values.

Section 14.6

Intelligent Function Module

Monitor 1 to 10

Screens used for monitoring intelligent function

modules.

Find/Replace window

A screen used for searching and replacing character

strings in the project.

Section 10.3

Display information about a project being edited.

Section 3.2.6

Status bar

GX Works2 Version 1
Operating Manual
(Intelligent Function Module)

Focus point indication in Windows Vista or Windows 7

When using Windows Vista or Windows 7, the focus point may not be indicated on the screen.
To display the focus point, set the following setting.
1) For Windows Vista, select [Start] [Control Panel] [Ease of Access] [Ease of Access Center].
For Windows 7, select [Start] [Control Panel] [Ease of Access Center].
2) Select "Make the keyboard easier to use".
3) Select "Underline keyboard shortcuts and access keys".

3 -4

3.2.1 Main frame configuration

3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

Toolbars

A toolbar is a block of on-screen buttons for executing frequently-used functions included in a menu.
(
Appendix 1)
The toolbars to be displayed and their display positions on the screen can be set by the user.

OVERVIEW

3.2.2

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Displaying/hiding toolbars

Select a toolbar to be displayed.

Operating procedure

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Select [View] [Toolbar] [(toolbar name)].

The selected toolbar is displayed on the screen.

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.

3.2.2 Toolbars

3 -5

GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

Docking/floating toolbars

Switch the display format (docking/floating) of a toolbar.

Floating a toolbar
Display a toolbar floating from the main frame.

Operation
Drag a docked toolbar to the desired position for floating display.

Drag and drop

3 -6

3.2.2 Toolbars

3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

Docking a toolbar
Display a toolbar docked to the main frame.

OVERVIEW

Operation
Drag the title bar of a floating toolbar and drop it in the main frame.

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Drag and drop

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Method for docking a toolbar at the original position

To dock a floating toolbar back at the original position, double-click on the title bar of the toolbar.

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.2.2 Toolbars

3 -7

GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

Customizing toolbars

Set the types of tool buttons to be displayed on each toolbar.

Operating procedure

1.

Select the Toolbar options button ( ) [Add or Remove Buttons].

A list of tool buttons is displayed.

2.

Check the check box in front of the tool button to be displayed on the screen.
The checked tool buttons are displayed on the screen.

The toolbar configuration returns to the default when [Reset Toolbar] is selected.

3 -8

3.2.2 Toolbars

3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

Work windows

A work window is a main screen used for operations such as programming, parameter setting, and
monitoring in GX Works2.

Screen display
Tool hint

Scroll button

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Tab

OVERVIEW

3.2.3

Switching button

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Display contents
Item

Description
Become active when selected.
The tab order can be changed by dragging and dropping tabs.
The window(s) can be closed from the menu displayed by right-clicking the tab. In the other way, the
active window can be closed by clicking

on the tab.

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Tab
EDITING
PROGRAMS

Right-click

Display a brief explanation when the cursor is placed on the selected tab.

Scroll button

Scroll the tab display to the left and right.

Display hidden tabs.

Switching button

Display the list of windows being displayed.

Select a data name displayed on the list to display its corresponding window on the top.

Display windows

Display screens such as the program editing screen, label setting screen, and monitoring screen.

SETTING
PARAMETERS

Tool hint

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.2.3 Work windows

3 -9

GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

Maximizing/minimizing screens

Maximize/minimize the screen size in the work window.

Maximizing the screen

Operation
Click the Maximize button (

).

Click

3 - 10

3.2.3 Work windows

3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

Minimizing the screen

Operation
).

OVERVIEW

Click the Minimize button (

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Click

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

7
Restoring the screen size
to return the maximized/minimized screen to its previous size.

Click

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

Click

3.2.3 Work windows

3 - 11

GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

Arranging screens

Arrange screens to display on the work window.

Cascading screens

Operation
Select [Window] [Cascade].

Tiling screens vertically

Operation
Select [Window] [Tile Vertically].

3 - 12

3.2.3 Work windows

3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

Tiling screens horizontally

Operation
OVERVIEW

Select [Window] [Tile Horizontally].

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

4
Arranging icons (minimized windows) at the bottom of the work window

Operation
Select [Window] [Arrange Icons].

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.2.3 Work windows

3 - 13

GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

Arranging/displaying windows

Display a list of open windows, and also opens and arranges specified windows.
This function is useful to display the desired window efficiently when multiple windows are open.

Screen display
Select [Window] [Window].

3 - 14

3.2.3 Work windows

3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

3.2.4

Docking windows

OVERVIEW

This section explains the operations common to docking windows.

Displaying/Hiding docking windows

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Display/hide a docking window.

Operating procedure

Select [View] [Docking Window] [(target item)].

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Docking/floating docking windows

Switch the display format of a docking window.

Docking display
Display a docking window docked to the main frame.

Floating display
Display a docking window floating from the main frame.

Operation
Drag the title bar of a floating docking window and drop it to the guidance in the main frame.

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Drag and drop

6
Drag the docking window to the guidance.

A new tab appears after the window is docked.

SETTING
PARAMETERS

The docked window is floated by dragging the title bar to the desired position.

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.2.4 Docking windows

3 - 15

GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

Operation of docking windows

Docked windows can be switched from docking to floating or vice versa by double-clicking the title bar.
Docking display

Double-click

Double-click

Floating display

Changing the tab order

The tab order can be changed by dragging and dropping the desired tab to the left or right when multiple docking
windows are docked.

Drag and drop

3 - 16

3.2.4 Docking windows

The tab order is changed.

3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

Window minimized mode

OVERVIEW

Minimize a docking window as a tab.

The window minimized mode can be set and disabled by the following procedure.

Operating procedure
/

).

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Click the window minimized mode switching icon (

Window minimized switching icon
Window minimized mode

Placing the cursor

on the tab displays
the window.

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Only the tab is

displayed in
window
minimized
mode.

Docking window display in

window minimized mode

The window is displayed normally

after disabling window minimized
mode.

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Normal display

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.2.4 Docking windows

3 - 17

GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

3.2.5

Navigation window

This section explains the Navigation window that displays the contents of a project in tree format.
Operations such as creating new data or displaying editing screens can be performed in the Navigation
window. (

Chapter 4)

Screen display
Select [View] [Docking Window] [Navigation Window].
Title bar

Toolbar

View
selection
area

Display contents
Name

Description

Reference

Title bar

Display a title of a view being displayed.

Toolbar

Display tool buttons of functions to be executed in

each view.

View selection area

Area for selecting a view to display.

Appendix 1

Project

Display the Project view.

Section 4.2.1

User Library

Display the User Library view.

Connection Destination

Display the Connection Destination view.

GX Works2 Version 1
Operating Manual
(Structured Project)
Section 11.1.1

Color of characters on title bar when uncompiled data exist

The color of characters on the title bar becomes red when an uncompiled data exists in the Project view or User
Library view.

Project with uncompiled data

3 - 18

3.2.5 Navigation window

Project without uncompiled data

3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

Sorting data

OVERVIEW

Sort data displayed in tree format.

Operating procedure

Right-click and select [Sort] [(sort type)] from the shortcut menu.
The data displayed in tree format are sorted in the ascending order.
When the same operation is performed after sort execution, the sort order is switched between
ascending and descending.
The following table shows the sort types.
Type
Execution Order
Name

Sort the data in the selected folder according to the name.

*1

Date

Sort the data in the selected folder according to the update date.

Language

Sort the data in the selected folder according to the programming language
type.

POU Type*2

Sort the data in the selected folder according to the POU type.

*1 :

Tasks of Structured project only

*2 :

FB/FUN of Structured project only

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Description
Sort the data in the Task folder in the Program setting according to the
execution order.

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

2.

Open a folder in the Navigation window and select the data for sorting.

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

1.

Expanding all uncompiled data

Expand all uncompiled data exist in the Project view and User Library view.

Operating procedure

1.

Click

2.

Select [Expand All Uncompiled Data].

EDITING
PROGRAMS

on the toolbar.

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

All uncompiled data are expanded and become selectable status.

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.2.5 Navigation window

3 - 19

GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

Collapsing folder tree

Collapse folder tree in the Project view and User Library view.

Operating procedure

1.

Click

2.

Select [Collapse All].

on the toolbar.

The folder tree is collapsed.

3 - 20

3.2.5 Navigation window

3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

Status bar

The status bar displays information about the current project at the bottom of the screen.
Connection
time

Project
language

Project
type

Security information

Programmable
controller type

Connection
destination

Cursor position

Insert/
Caps Num
Overwrite Lock Lock

OVERVIEW

3.2.6

Description

Connection time

Display the connection duration of the phone line.

Project language

Display the language set for the language selection.

Project type

Display the project type.

Unlabeled
: Simple project (without labels)
Simple
: Simple project (with labels)
Structured
: Structured project

Security information

Display the login user name when security is set for the project.

Programmable controller type

Display the programmable controller type of the project.

Display the set content of the Transfer setup screen.
Display the cursor position in the editing screen.

Insert/Overwrite

Display the current mode (insert or overwrite).

Caps Lock

Display the effective status of the Caps Lock.

Num Lock

Display the effective status of the Num Lock.

Displaying/hiding status bar

Display/hide the status bar.

Operating procedure
Select [View] [Statusbar].
A check mark is appended in front of the menu option and the status bar is displayed on the
screen.

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

EDITING
PROGRAMS

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Connection destination
Cursor position

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Item

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

The following shows the information to be displayed.

3.2.6 Status bar

3 - 21

GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

3.2.7

Changing colors and fonts

Change the color and font settings on program editors and label editors.

Screen display
Select [View] [Color and Font].

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description

Target

Select the change target work window.

Font Setting

Change font settings.

Auto (Based on system settings) Select this to use the font settings in Windows.
Select this to customize the font settings.

User settings

Click the

Color Setting
Color Setting

2.

3 - 22

Click the

button to select the desired font.

Select the change target item and color.

button.

3.2.7 Changing colors and fonts

3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

Screen button

OVERVIEW

Displays the Font screen.

The font type, style, and size can be customized.
Some font styles and sizes, however, cannot be set depending on target work windows.

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Displays the Color screen.

The color can be customized. The created color is added as "Custom" in the color selection field of
the Color and Font screen. Only one color can be added as "Custom".

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

Resets the color and font settings to default.

Applies the changed color and font settings.

Font setting
Some fonts may be displayed as garbled characters.
Change the setting to another font if this happens.

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.2.7 Changing colors and fonts

3 - 23

GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

3.2.8

Customizing shortcut keys

Customize a shortcut key of each function.

Customized shortcut keys can be registered as a template and utilized.

Screen display
Select [Tool] [Key Customize].

Setting shortcut keys

This function creates/changes/deletes a shortcut key.

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description

Shortcut Key

Category

Select a category from the group list categorized by window.

Command

Select a function name whose shortcut key to be changed.

Current Key

Display the shortcut key assigned to the selected command.

Press the keys to assign

Specify a new shortcut key to be assigned. Input it by pressing a key(s)

on the keyboard.
Example)

Current Assignment

2.

Click the

Display the menu name to which the entered shortcut key is assigned.
When the key is already assigned to another function, the function
name is displayed.

button.

Assign the shortcut key.

The assigned shortcut key is displayed in "Current Key".

3 - 24

3.2.8 Customizing shortcut keys

3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations

3.

Click the

button.

The shortcut keys are created/changed.

OVERVIEW

Screen button

Deletes the shortcut key selected in "Current Key".

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

The Enter Template Name screen is displayed.

Register the assigned shortcut keys as a template with a desired name.
The registered template is displayed in "Template".

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Assigning shortcut keys

Up to three shortcut keys can be assigned to one function. The shortcut key displayed on the top in "Current Key"
is displayed on the menu.
Templates
The maximum file name length for a template is 24 characters.

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3.2.8 Customizing shortcut keys

3 - 25

GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

Registering templates

This function registers/deletes a template of shortcut keys.

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description
Select a template of shortcut keys from
.
Default Setting
Changes to the default setting.
GPPA Format Setting
Simultaneously changes the shortcut key setting at ladder
programming to the same setting as one at GPPA.

Template

2.

Click the

button.

The selected template of shortcut keys is applied.

Screen button

Deletes a template selected in "Template".

Imports a pre-saved template file (*.gks) and adds it to "Template".

Saves a template selected in "Template" as a template file (*.gks).

3 - 26

3.2.8 Customizing shortcut keys

3.3 Selecting Language

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to select a language used for project data (such as device comments, statements,
notes).
By selecting a language of the project, data can be created in a language other than English.
Data created in another language can be displayed without character corruption.
For restrictions when selecting a project language, refer to Appendix 17.

Screen display
Select [Tool] [Language Selection].

3
< When editing a project >

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

< Before creating a new project >

OVERVIEW

Selecting Language

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

3.3

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Operating procedure
Set the items on the screen.
Select the language of the project.

Save the project (Overwrite save)

Check this to save the project before changing the project language.

Click the

button.

SETTING
PARAMETERS

2.

Description

Project Language

The project data are displayed in the selected project language.

Precautions when project language change is canceled

If characters other than alphanumeric characters are used for data names and label names, the project language
change will be canceled. In such case, change data names or label names according to the error message
displayed on the Output window.
For data names which causes the cancellation of project language change when characters other than
alphanumeric characters are used, refer to Appendix 16.1.
Precautions when changing project language
The project language change function does not change the characters on setting menus and screens.
To display characters on setting menus and screens in another language, use the specific version of GX Works2
that supports the language.

3 - 27

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Item

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.

GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

3.4

Help Function
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains the help function of GX Works2.

3.4.1

Displaying GX Works help

Use the GX Works2 help function to learn GX Works2 operations, understand functions, and check
error codes of programmable controller CPU.
The following items can be checked with the GX Works2 help function.
Help for operations

Help for instructions*1

Help for special relays/special registers
Help for CPU errors
Error codes for CPU module communication
Changes from GX Developer
List of shortcut keys
*1 :

Not supported by FXCPU.

For details, refer to FXCPU programming manuals.

Screen display
Select [Help] [GX Works2 Help] (
Tab

3 - 28

3.4.1 Displaying GX Works help

).

3.4 Help Function

Displaying GX Works2 help

Enter a keyword in the keyword entry field on the standard toolbar of GX Works2, and press the
display the help items searched by the keyword.

key to

OVERVIEW

editor, and Function Block Selection window of GX Works2 is displayed by pressing the
key.
Instruction help
Instructions which are supported by the instruction help function are common instructions and application
functions.
The SFC editor is not supported by the instruction help function.
Operators and ST control syntax are not supported by the instruction help function.
When the selected instruction is corresponded by multiple items, the Result screen is displayed. Double-click the
item to display the help.

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Keyword entry field

The help item corresponds to the item at the cursor position on the screen such as Navigation window, program

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

When the selected instruction contains a special relay or special register, the Help References screen is displayed.
button.

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

Select a keyword displayed and click the

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

3.4.1 Displaying GX Works help

3 - 29

GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

Setting options for GX Works2 help function

Set options for "Startup", "Window", and "Tab" items of the GX Works2 help function.

Display contents
Select the GX Works2 help menu [Operation] [Options].

Operating procedure

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description

Startup

Restore the previous status at the start Check this to activate the GX Works2 help function with the state of
of Help
previous operation.
Window

Add help icon to the System Tray

when window is minimized

Check this to set the GX Works2 help function in the task tray when the
GX Works2 help window is minimized.
When this item is selected and the GX Works2 help window is
minimized, the GX Works2 help function can be activated from the task
tray.

Set maximum number of window

Check this to set a maximum number of windows to be displayed with

the GX Works2 help function.
Enter a maximum number of windows.

Tab

3.4.2

Switch tab by rolling mouse wheel on

tab

Check this to switch tabs with the mouse wheel when the cursor is on
the tab.

Specify tab size

Check this to specify the tab size.

Enter a width and a height of the tab.

Displaying operating manuals

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Display the operating manuals of GX Works2 Version 1.

Screen display
Select [Help] [Operating Manual] [(manual name)].

3 - 30

3.4.2 Displaying operating manuals

Head

FX

3.4 Help Function

Checking version of GX Works2

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

Display information such as the software version of GX Works2.

Operating procedure

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Select [Help] [About].

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

OVERVIEW

3.4.3

3.4.3 Checking version of GX Works2

3 - 31

GX Works2

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS

MEMO

3 - 32

3.4.3 Checking version of GX Works2

PROJECT MANAGEMENT

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

OVERVIEW

This chapter explains basic operations and management of projects.

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION
AND BASIC

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

GX Works2 Project Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Project Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data . . . . . . . 4-31
Operations of Intelligent Function Module Data. . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Changing Project Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Managing Project Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Saving projects in other formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Starting GX Developer from GX Works2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Setting Security for Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Protecting POUs in Projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11

4 -1

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.1

GX Works2 Project Management

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains the management of GX Works2 projects.

In GX Works2, created projects are saved in the workspace format or the single file format.

4.1.1

Workspace format

A workspace manages multiple projects at once.

When configuring a system containing multiple programmable controller CPUs, a project needs to be
created for each programmable controller CPU. However, projects in the same system can be
managed by saving projects created in a single workspace in the workspace format.
When using MELSOFT Navigator, save projects in the workspace format.
< System configuration example >
First stage construction for company A
< ABC alarm processing >

Ethernet

< XYZ control >

MELSECNET/10(H)

< Conveyor control >

< Additional processing >

Batch-manage projects in the workspace format

< GX Works2 project management >

First stage construction for company A

Workspace

ABC alarm processing

XYZ control
Conveyor control
Additional processing

4 -2

4.1.1 Workspace format

Project

4.1 GX Works2 Project Management

Configuration of workspace and project

OVERVIEW

The following explains the configuration of GX Works2 workspace and project.

<Data in the GX Works2 data folder>

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

<Data in the Workspace 1 folder>

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

A folder corresponds to the project name specified when the project is saved.

workspacelist.xml

A file created automatically when the project is saved.

projectlist.xml

A file created automatically when the project is saved.

Do not change or delete workspace configuration or project using an application such as Windows
Explorer.
If a data name is changed or deleted using an application such as Windows Explorer, projects without
containing actual data may remain in a project list of the function such as opening a project. Those
faulty projects can be deleted from the project list by selecting [Project] [Delete].
For copying GX Works2 project on the Windows Explorer, select either following operation to copy the
project without breaking the configuration of workspace and project.
Copy the entire save destination folder ( 1 above).
Copy the workspace name folder and "workspacelist.xml".
When "workspacelist.xml" ( 4 above) or "projectlist.xml" ( 5 above) does not exist in the folder by
performing the copy operation other than above, the copied workspaces/projects are not displayed in
the "Workspace/Project List" on the Open screen.
However, note that the project can be opened forcibly by selecting "All Folders" for "Display" on the
Open screen and displaying all folders.
When a file other than "workspacelist.xml" or "projectlist.xml" is missing, the project may not be
opened.

Restrictions
Opening a project forcibly by checking the "Display all folders" item
The following operations cannot be performed.
Register, Restore, and Verify functions of project revision history
Security user management
Automatic project save
However, the above restrictions are invalidated by selecting [Project] [Save As], and saving the project.

4.1.1 Workspace format

5
EDITING
PROGRAMS

Project name folder

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

A folder corresponds to the workspace name specified when the project is saved.

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

A folder specified for the save folder path when the project is saved.

Workspace name folder

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Save destination folder

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4 -3

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.1.2

Single file format

The single file format is a format to handle project files as a single file.
Projects are managed without being aware of the folder configuration and the file configuration by
saving projects in the single file format. Operations such as: changing project names, copying and
pasting projects, and sending and receiving data, can easily be performed on Explorer.
<Single file format project (*.gxw)>

When using MELSOFT Navigator

Projects saved in the single file format cannot be used in MELSOFT Navigator.
Save projects in the workspace format.

4 -4

4.1.2 Single file format

4.1 GX Works2 Project Management

Project contents displayed in the Project view in tree format are as follows.
Contents displayed in the view may vary depending on programmable controller types and project
types.
For (Simple), (Structured), and (Intelligent) indicated in the reference destinations, refer to the following
manuals respectively:
(Simple) ................GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
(Structured) ...........GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
(Intelligent) ............GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
The following are examples for QCPU (Q mode).
<Simple project (without labels)>

Set global device comments.

3
(Intelligent)

Chapter 9

*2

Set an execution type of each program.

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Set various parameters.

Chapter 6
*1 Make settings for the intelligent function modules.

OVERVIEW

Project

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

4.1.3

Section 6.1.1

Create programs.*3

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

4
(Simple)

Set local device comments.

Chapter 9

Make settings for device memory.

Chapter 7
*1
Set device initial values.
Chapter 8

For FXCPU, this item is not displayed.

*2 :

For FXCPU, execution types are not categorized. The only one category 'Execution Program' is
displayed.

*3 :

For FXCPU, a single execution program can be created in either ladder or SFC language.

EDITING
PROGRAMS

*1 :

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.1.3 Project

4 -5

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

<Simple project (with labels)>

Set various parameters.
Chapter 6
*1Make settings for the intelligent function modules.
Set global device comments.
Set global labels.

(Intelligent)

Chapter 9

(Simple)

*2 *3

Set an execution type of each program.

Create programs.*4

Section 6.1.1

(Simple)

Set local device comments.

Chapter 9

Make settings for device memory.

Chapter 7
*1 Set device initial values.
Chapter 8

*1 :

For FXCPU, this item is not displayed.

*2 :

For FXCPU, execution types are not categorized. The only one category 'Execution Program' is
displayed.

*3 :

For FXCPU, Simple project (with labels), the 'Execution Program' can be divided into multiple
programs.

*4 :

For FXCPU, the program is created in the ladder language only.

<Structured project>
Set various parameters.
Chapter 6
Make
settings
for
the
intelligent
function modules.
*1
Set global device comments.
Chapter 9
Set global labels.

(Intelligent)

(Structured)

*2

Set an execution type of each program.

Create programs.

Section 6.1.1

(Structured)

Set local device comments.

Chapter 9
Make settings for device memory.
Chapter 7
*1Set device initial values.
Chapter 8

4 -6

*1 :

For FXCPU, this item is not displayed.

*2 :

For FXCPU, execution types are not categorized. The only one category 'Execution Program' is
displayed.

4.1.3 Project

4.1 GX Works2 Project Management

<Project view>

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Program Setting
In the Project view, an execution type of a program can be set by right-clicking the name of the program whose
execution type is to be changed and selecting [Register Program] [Initial]/[Scan]/[Standby]/[Fixed Scan]/[Low
Speed] from the shortcut menu, or dragging and dropping it. The execution type set in the Project view is reflected
to the program setting of the PLC Parameter.
(Program setting in PLC Parameter
Section 6.1.1)
Example) Set the execution type of MAIN to 'Scan Program' using drag and drop.

OVERVIEW

<Setting screen for PLC parameter>

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

3
Drag & drop
The setting made in the Project view is reflected.

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.1.3 Project

4 -7

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.2

Project Operations

This section explains basic operations of GX Works2 such as creating, opening, and saving projects.

4.2.1

Creating projects
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

Configure the settings to create a new project.

Screen display
Select [Project] [New] (

).

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Project Type
Use Label

4 -8

Description
Select the type of the project to be created.
Select "Simple Project" or "Structured Project".
Check this to create a project using labels when "Simple Project" is selected.

PLC Series

Select the programmable controller series for the project.

PLC Type

Select the programmable controller type (programmable controller CPU model) used
for the project.
When a programmable controller type which is not supported by GX Works2 but is
supported by GX Developer is selected, start GX Developer and create a new
project. For a procedure to use unsupported programmable controller type, refer to
Appendix 13.

Language

Select the language for the program data to be created when creating a new project.

4.2.1 Creating projects

FX

4.2 Project Operations

5
EDITING
PROGRAMS

such as Windows Explorer.

For details of workspace/project configuration, refer to Section 4.1.1.
Common pointer number setting for projects with labels
When a project with labels is created, the last half of the device range of pointer (P) is set for "Common Pointer
No." on the <<PLC System>> tab of the PLC parameter. This range is set as a pointer range in the device/label
automatic-assign setting.
For details of the device/label automatic-assign setting, refer to the following manuals.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
Connection destination
When creating a new project, the connection destination is set to the route set for "Current Connection" in the
previously-edited project. Review the connection destination setting to change the previously-edited project and
the connection destination.
When creating a new project after installing GX Works2 for the first time, the setting is set to access the
programmable controller CPU directly.
Creating a new SFC project with FXCPU
When 'SFC' is selected in "Language" with FXCPU, the Block Information Setting screen is displayed.
When an SFC project is created with FXCPU, a ladder needs to be created using ladder blocks to start up an initial
step of the SFC program. Select 'Ladder Block' in "Block Type", and create a startup ladder using ladder blocks.

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

If the access authority cannot be changed, right-click the GX Works2 program and select [Run as administrator].
To activate the program from the shortcut menu, open the property of the shortcut menu and select "Run this
program as an administrator" under "Privilege Level" on the <<Compatibility>> tab.
Changing data such as workspace name after creating a new project
Do not change the storage location and names of folders/files of a created workspace/project using an application

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

A new GX Works2 project may not be able to be created when using Windows Vista or Windows 7.
Set the access authority for a login user to the following folders to which the access authority has not been set.
The folder to which GX Works2 is installed.
Example) C:\Program Files\MELSOFT
C:\Documents and Settings\(login user name)\Local Settings\Application Data\MITSUBISHI\SWnDNGPPW2
The TEMP folder set by environment variable.
Example) C:\Documents and Settings\(login user name)\Local Settings\Temp

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Precautions when using Windows Vista or Windows 7

OVERVIEW

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.2.1 Creating projects

4 -9

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Creating new projects with data read from programmable controller CPU or
intelligent function module (New project creation with data read from
programmable controller CPU)

A new project can be created with data read from a programmable controller CPU or an intelligent
function module when the Read from PLC function is executed without creating a new project.
When a programmable controller type which is not supported by GX Works2 but is supported by GX
Developer is selected, start GX Developer and create a new project. For a procedure to use
unsupported programmable controller types, refer to Appendix 13.

Operating procedure

1.

Start GX Works2 and select [Online] [Read from PLC].

The PLC Series Selection screen is displayed.

2.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description

PLC Series

Select the programmable controller series from which data are read.

Process CPU (PH) or

redundant CPU (PRH)

Check this to read data from Process CPU or Redundant CPU.

This item is validated only when "QCPU (Q mode)" is selected for "PLC Series".

3.

Click the

button.

The Transfer Setup screen is displayed.

4.

Set a communication route to access to the programmable controller CPU.

For the method for setting a connection destination, refer to Chapter 11.
The Online Data Operation screen is displayed when the setting of connection destination is
completed.

5.

Execute the Read from PLC function on the Online Data Operation screen.
For the method for executing the Read from PLC function on the Online Data Operation screen,
refer to Section 12.1.

Precautions when creating a new project with data read from programmable controller CPU
When parameters are not read from the programmable controller CPU with data to create a new project, default
parameters are set.
Check the parameter setting.

4 - 10

4.2.1 Creating projects

4.2 Project Operations

Opening existing projects

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

Read a project saved in a hard disk or other memory media of a personal computer.

Screen display

).

< Opening a project in the workspace format >

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Select [Project] [Open] (

OVERVIEW

4.2.2

< Opening a project in the single file format >

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

4
Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Workspace Location

Description

Enter the folder (drive/path) where the workspace is saved.

The folder can be selected in the Browse For Folder screen by clicking the

Display

Select the workspace or project.

The display is switched to the project list by double-clicking "Workspace".
Select this to display folders for GX Works2 projects only, folders for GX Developer
projects only, or all folders.
By selecting "Display all folders" also displays workspace folders and project folders

Workspace Name

Display the selected workspace name.

Project Name

Display the selected project name.

Title

Display the title of the selected project.

Click the

button.

The specified project is displayed.

When the GX Developer project is specified, GX Developer starts automatically and the project is
displayed.

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

2.

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

copied/moved by the application such as Windows Explorer.

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Workspace/Project List

EDITING
PROGRAMS

button.

4.2.2 Opening existing projects

4 - 11

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Screen button

Displays the Browse For Folder screen.

Switches to the Open screen in the single file format.

Switches to the Open screen in the workspace format.

Changing data such as workspace name

Do not change the storage location and names of folders/files of a created workspace/project using an application
such as Windows Explorer.
For details of workspace/project configuration, refer to Section 4.1.1.
Opening Structured projects
When a Structured project is opened in later version of GX Works2
than the one used for saving the project, the Library Update
Confirmation screen may be displayed.
To modify the project and update the new instructions and/or
application functions, check the corresponding check box(es).
All programs need to be compiled when instructions or application
functions are updated.
Compiling all programs changes the device assignment to labels.
Therefore, device values set before the program change remain on the
device-assigned labels.
For a precautionary measure, reset the programmable controller CPU,
clear all device memories including latches, clear all file registers, then
switch the programmable controller to RUN. (
Section 17.3)
For the precautions on compiling all programs, refer to the following
manuals.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)/(Structured Project)
Opening projects being edited by other users
The project being edited can be opened by other users as a read-only project. Note that the following functions
cannot be used.
Saving projects
Project revision history
Succeeding project revision when saving projects with a specific name
Change PLC type function
Security function
Opening projects created in other languages
Characters in a project created in other languages may get garbled when it is opened.
Open screen
The Open screen with the initial setting opens a project in the single file format.
Switch the screen by clicking the
button to open the existing project in the
workspace format.
A programmable controller type and a title are not displayed on the Open screen in the single file format.
If the file save destination path is long, the "Look in" field may be left blank when opening a project in the single
file format. Even with the blank field, the selected folder/file can be opened normally.

4 - 12

4.2.2 Opening existing projects

4.2 Project Operations

Saving projects
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

Save a project in a hard disk or other memory media of a personal computer.

OVERVIEW

4.2.3

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Saving projects under the specified name

Save the open project under the specified name.

Screen display
Select [Project] [Save As].
< Saving a project in the workspace format >

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

3
< Saving a project in the single file format >

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

1.

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Operating procedure
Set the items on the screen.
Item

Description

Enter the folder (drive/path) where the workspace is saved.

The folder can be selected in the Browse For Folder screen by clicking the

Save Location

Workspace Name

Enter the workspace name.

Project Name

Enter the project name.

Enter the title of the project.
*1

Include revisions

Check this to succeed and save the project revision information. (

Include security*1

Check this to succeed and save the security information of the project.
(
Section 4.10)

*1 :

2.

Section 4.6)

This setting can be set only when saving the already existing project with another name.

Click the

button.

The project is saved in the specified folder under the specified workspace name, project name, and
title.

4.2.3 Saving projects

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Title

4 - 13

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

Workspace/Project List

SETTING
PARAMETERS

button.
Select the workspace or project.
The display is switched to the project list by double-clicking "Workspace".

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Screen button

Displays the Browse For Folder screen.

Switches to the Save As screen in the single file format.

Switches to the Save As screen in the workspace format.

When saved workspace exists

When the saved workspace or project exists, a folder to which the workspace is saved can be specified from the
"Workspace/Project List".
Number of characters used for workspace name, project name, and title
The total number of characters used for the path name of the folder to which the project is saved, workspace
name, and project name should not exceed 200 characters.
A title can be entered within 128 characters.
Saving a project contains structured ladder programs
If multiple structured ladder editors are opened, the project may not be able to be saved.
In this case, start another GX Works2 and save the project by copying all data to the newly-created project.
(
Section 4.3.2 Copying/pasting data in projects)
Save As screen
The Save As screen with the initial setting saves a project in the single file format.
Switch the screen by clicking the
button to save the project in the workspace format.
If the file save destination path is long, the "Save in" field may be left blank when saving a project in the single
file format. Even with the blank field, the selected folder/file can be saved normally.

Saving projects

Overwrite and save the project being edited.

Operating procedure

Select [Project] [Save] (

).

The data to be saved is overwritten on the existing project data.

Registering project revision when overwriting

According to the option setting, the Revision Registration screen for registering the project revision is displayed
when overwriting the project.
To display the Revision Registration screen when overwriting the project, select [Tool] [Options] "Project" and
then select "Revision is Registered when Save Project" in "Change History". In addition, the revision title can be
automatically set when overwriting by checking "Automatically set revision titles".
(For details of project revision history
Section 4.6)
Compilation status is not saved by overwriting data
Performing compilation only and overwriting the project, and then opening the project again may cause the project
to be in an uncompiled status.
In this case, overwrite the uncompiled project without performing compilation to save the compilation status
normally.

4 - 14

4.2.3 Saving projects

4.2 Project Operations

Saving projects with compression and unpacking projects

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Save projects with compression, and unpack projects saved with compression.
Files can be saved with their sizes reduced by compressing the project. Files can also be saved by
separating them in specific sizes. These functions produce easier project data passing.
This function is not compatible with commercially available file compression and decompression tools.

1
OVERVIEW

4.2.4

Saving projects with compression

Save a desired project with compression.

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Screen display
Select [Project] [Compress/Unpack] [Compress].

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description

Choose a Workspace to Compress

The folder can be selected in the Browse For Folder screen by clicking the
button.

Workspace/Project List

Select the workspace and project.

Workspace Name

Display the selected workspace name.

Project Name

Display the selected project name.

SETTING
PARAMETERS

Enter the folder (drive/path) where the workspace is saved.

Workspace Location

Enter the folder where the compressed file is saved, and the compressed file name.
The compressed file name can be specified in the Compressed File Name screen by

Compressed File Name

clicking the
Include revisions

Check this to succeed and save the project revision information. (

Split into volumes of the following

size

Check this to save data in multiple compressed files. Specify the split size in the range
from 1 to 999MB.

Click the

Section 4.6)

button.

The compressed project file (*.gwz) is saved in the specified folder.

4.2.4 Saving projects with compression and unpacking projects

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

2.

button.

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Choose a Destination Folder

4 - 15

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Unpacking projects saved with compression

Unpack a project saved with compression.

Screen display
Select [Project] [Compress/Unpack] [Unpack].

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description

Choose a File to Unpack

Compressed File Name

Enter the folder (drive/path) in which the compressed file to be unpacked is saved, and
the compressed file name.
The compressed file name can be specified in the Compressed File Name screen by
clicking the

button.

Choose a Destination Folder

Enter the folder (drive/path) to which the project to be unpacked is saved.
Workspace Location

The folder can be selected in the Browse For Folder screen by clicking the
button.

Workspace/Project List

Select the workspace and project.

Workspace Name

Enter the name of the workspace to which the unpacked project is saved.

Project Name

Enter the name of the project to which the unpacked project is saved.

2.

Click the

button.

The compressed project file is unpacked and saved in the specified folder.

Screen button

Unpacks a compressed project file and opens the project.

4 - 16

4.2.4 Saving projects with compression and unpacking projects

4.2 Project Operations

compressed file (*.gwz) on Windows Explorer.

Names of divided compressed files
When a project is saved into divided compressed files, a number is automatically added after the extension in each
name of the second or later compressed files as follows.
Name of the first file
Name of the second file
Name of the third file
Name of the fourth file

4.2.5

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Unpacking divided compressed files

Select the first file (*.gwz) when unpacking a series of divided compressed files. To be unpacked, all of a series of
divided files must be in the same folder.

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Unpacking compressed files

A compressed file can also be unpacked on the Unpack screen which is displayed by double-clicking the

OVERVIEW

Deleting projects
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Delete a project saved in a hard disk or other memory media of a personal computer.

Operating procedure

1.

Select [Project] [Delete].

The Delete Project screen is displayed.

Select the project to be deleted.

3.

Click the

EDITING
PROGRAMS

2.

button.

The selected project is deleted.

SETTING
PARAMETERS

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Deleting projects
Once a project is deleted, it cannot be restored again.
The open project cannot be deleted. Delete the project after closing it.

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.2.5 Deleting projects

4 - 17

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.2.6

Closing projects
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

Close an open project.

Operating procedure

Select [Project] [Close].

4.2.7

Verifying project data

Verify data of an open project against data of another project.

Verification can be performed only when the programmable controller type and project type of the two
projects are the same.
This function is used to compare the contents of two projects or to locate program changes made in
projects.
To verify data against data in the programmable controller CPU, use the Verify with PLC function.
(
Section 12.2)
The following data can be selected as verification targets for the project verification.
Programs
Parameters
Intelligent function module parameters (initial setting/auto refresh)
Device comments
Device memory data
QD75/LD75 positioning module
For FXCPU, only programs and parameters are the verification targets.

Screen display
Select [Project] [Verify].

4 - 18

4.2.6 Closing projects

4.2 Project Operations

Operating procedure
Item

Verify Destination
Project

2.

Description

Workspace Location

Display the path to the workspace of the verify destination.

Workspace Name

Display the workspace name of the verify destination.

This field will be blank when a project in the single file format is
specified for the verify destination project.

Project Name

Display the project name of the verify destination.

Title

Display the project title of the verify destination.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description

Verify Source

Display project data of verify source (data being edited).

Selects the data in the project data list.

Verify Destination

Display project data of verify destination (saved project data).

Selects the data in the project data list.

<<File Selection>>

OVERVIEW

button to set the verify destination project.

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Click the

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

1.

Select SFC blocks in the SFC Block list.

<<SFC Block Selection>>*1, *2

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

4
Select the parameter verification level.
Verifying parameters

<<Parameter>>*2

3.

*1 :

Simple projects only

*2 :

Not supported by FXCPU.

Click the

EDITING
PROGRAMS

button.

The verification result is displayed on the Verify Result screen.

Checking verification result details

SETTING
PARAMETERS

Screen button

Selects all the data displayed in the project data list.

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Cancels the selection status of all the data selected in the project data list.

Updates the data displayed in the project data list.

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.2.7 Verifying project data

4 - 19

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Security status of project

Projects to which the security is set can be verified when both verify source data and verify destination data are not
read-protected.
Verifying intelligent function module parameters (initial setting/auto refresh)
Among modules without initial setting such as: QD75/LD75 positioning modules, serial communication/modem
interface modules, AS-i master modules, only modules in which the auto refresh is set are the verification targets.
Verifying QD75/LD75 positioning modules
One module each for verify source and verify destination can be selected.
The following data can be selected as verification targets.
Parameter
Servo parameter (For QD75M/MH only)
Positioning data (Except for positioning comments and M code comments)
Block start data

4 - 20

4.2.7 Verifying project data

4.2 Project Operations

Verifying parameters

OVERVIEW

The verification level can be selected when verifying parameters.

User Setting Area Only

Verify only the parameter area set by the user.

All Area

Verify all the area including the parameter area set by the system.

Mismatch in the system setting area

When a mismatch is detected in the parameter area set by the system in the verification set to "All
Area", either of the following messages is displayed.
Take corrective action according to the message.
Message
The header information of the
parameter blocks is inconsistent.

Corrective action
A mismatch is detected in other than user setting area.
Write the parameters, having been written to the programmable controller CPU, to
the programmable controller again.

Versions of GX Works2, GX Developer, or GX IEC Developer used to create the

This parameter block can't analyze. projects differ between the verify source and the verify destination.
The programmable controller CPU operation is not affected.

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Description

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Item

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

The following table shows the verification details for each setting item.

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.2.7 Verifying project data

4 - 21

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Checking verification result details

Details of mismatched data can be checked on the <<Verify Result List>> tab on the Verify Result
screen.
Details of program verification result can be checked for ladder programs only.
For FXCPU, when a block password with the validated setting for "Read-protect the execution
program" exists, matches and mismatches of the program file verification are displayed, however, a
jump to the detailed verify result cannot be performed.

Operating procedure

4 - 22

Double-click the row of the data to display the details of the Verify Result screen.

4.2.7 Verifying project data

4.2 Project Operations

Detail Verify Result tabs

The tab order can be changed by drugging and dropping <<Detail Verify Result>> tabs.
The screen returns from the <<Detail Verify Result>> tab to the <<Verify Result List>> tab by selecting [View]
).

The selected <<Detail Verify Result>> tab can be closed by selecting [View] [Close Detail Result] (

)/[Close

All Detail Result] ( ).

Verifying programs
The verification function verifies the data created by the compilation. If the program is edited after the compilation,
compile the program again before performing the verification.
Verifying device memory data
Device memory data are verified with the actual values.
Even when the display formats of data are different on the device memory editor, the result of verification on the
same value will be a match.
Devices to which a value is not set on the device memory editor
Devices to which a value is not set on the device memory editor are verified as a value 0.
Therefore, if 'device memory data to which devices are not set' and 'device memory data to which devices are
entered without setting device values' are verified, the verification result will be a match.

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

< Device memory data without setting device values >

Verify
< Verification result >

Direct input (DX) and direct output (DY)

When verifying device comments or device memory data, check the verification result with input (X)/output (Y) for
direct input (DX)/direct output (DY).
Data names of verification target data
When multiple data are selected for verification, verification is performed between the source and destination data
with the same name. However, device comments are verified only when their data names are same.
When only one source program is verified against one destination program, verification can be performed even
with different names.
Number of verification results displayed
If the number of mismatches exceeds 1,000, up to 1,000 mismatch results are displayed and verification is
suspended after that. The remaining part needs to be verified again after modifying the mismatched data.
Copying verification results
Verification results can be copied and pasted to a text file. Select rows of verification result to be copied, and select
[Edit] [Copy].
The copied data are pasted on a text file as data separated by tabs.
Jumping from verification result
When "Enable to Call Function Block from Ladder to ST, or from ST to Ladder" is selected under [Tool] [Options]
"Compile" "Basic Setting", function block program items with no difference may be indicated as a mismatch on
the Verify Result screen.
In this case, check the mismatch part by any of the following methods.
Checking labels/devices set to input/output variables of function block
Open the source program from which function blocks are called, and check labels/devices.
Checking mismatch parts with the program verification result
Select items as shown below to verify programs.

5
EDITING
PROGRAMS

< Device memory data to which devices are not set >

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

[Return to Result List] (

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

) / [Previous Unmatch]

).

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Displaying mismatched parts

The cursor moves on mismatched parts by selecting [Find/Replace] [Next Unmatch] (

OVERVIEW

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.2.7 Verifying project data

4 - 23

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Checking method when verify source data are modified

Updated verify source data are displayed in the verification result.

Therefore, the verification result of updated verify source data can be checked without executing the
verification function again when mismatched data is modified.
Even when a data name of verify source is changed, the changed data name is displayed in the
verification result.

Operating procedure

1.

Modify the verify source data.

2.

Open the <<Verify Result List>> tab or the <<Detail Verify Result>> tab on the Verify
Result screen.

3.

Double-click the modified data on the <<Verify Result List>> tab or the <<Detail
Verify Result>> tab.
The updated data is displayed in the verification result.

4 - 24

4.2.7 Verifying project data

4.2 Project Operations

Writing verification results to CSV files

OVERVIEW

Output data displayed on the Verify Result screen to a CSV file.

Operating procedure

1.

Select [Edit] [Write to CSV File] (

).

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

The Write to CSV File screen is displayed.

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

2.

Enter a file name.

3.

Click the

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

button.

The verification results are saved in a personal computer.

Formatting CSV file

EDITING
PROGRAMS

The saved CSV file is displayed as shown below when it is opened by Excel.
< Display of the Verification Result screen >

SETTING
PARAMETERS

< CSV file >

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.2.7 Verifying project data

4 - 25

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.2.8

Changing programmable controller type of projects

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

Change the programmable controller type of a project being edited.

Screen display
Select [Project] [Change PLC Type].

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

2.

Description

PLC Series

Select the programmable controller series after change.

PLC Type

Select the programmable controller type after change.

Click the

button.

The following confirmation message is displayed. Click the

function.

4 - 26

4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects

button to execute the

FX

4.2 Project Operations

To change the model of an intelligent function module, select a module name in "Module name after change" on
the following screen displayed at changing the programmable controller type.
To delete all intelligent function modules, check "Delete all after changing intelligent function module".

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Changing programmable controller type of projects which contain intelligent function modules (For QCPU
(Q mode)/LCPU/communication head module)
Basically intelligent function modules are deleted after the programmable controller series is changed, but certain
intelligent modules can be changed to those which are applicable with the programmable controller series after
change.
For details of the shift of models of intelligent function modules associated with change of programmable controller
series, refer to the following section.
Changing intelligent function modules between programmable controller series

OVERVIEW

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

List of modifications (For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU/communication head module)

After the Change PLC Type function is completed, the following List of Modifications screen is displayed, and the
changes of the program and parameters can be checked.
The items in the following screen can be copied and pasted to the text file using the

and

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

+
EDITING
PROGRAMS

key

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects

4 - 27

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Restrictions on the Change PLC Type function execution

For the restrictions on the Change PLC Type function execution for each programmable controller series, refer to
Appendix 10.
Interruption of processing
If the project of change source includes the data which is neither supported nor able to be modified by any editing
operations with the project of the programmable controller type after change, the processing is interrupted. If this
happens, modify the data first to correspond with the programmable controller type after change, and then execute
the Change PLC Type function.
Inexecution of function
The Change PLC Type function cannot be executed in the following cases:
During the execution of the monitoring function such as ladder monitor and device/buffer memory batch monitor.
Security is set for the open project and the user does not belong to the 'Administrators' group.
During the execution of the simulation function.
Data before changing the programmable controller type
Restoring the data, after executing the Change PLC Type function, to the data before change is not possible.
Execute the function after saving the project data. In addition, note that the project is in the unsaved status after the
function execution.

4 - 28

4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects

4.2 Project Operations

Basically intelligent function modules are deleted after changing the programmable controller series,
but a part of intelligent modules can be changed to those which are applicable with the programmable
controller series after change.
The following table shows modules which can be changed.

Module name

Serial communication/
Modem interface

L60DA4
L60TCTT4
L60TCTT4BW

Q64TCRTN

L60TCRT4

Q64TCRTBWN

L60TCRT4BW

QD62
QD62D

LD62
LD62D

QD75P1
QD75P2
QD75P4
QD75P1N
QD75P2N
QD75P4N
QD75D1
QD75D2
QD75D4
QD75D1N
QD75D2N
QD75D4N

LD75P4
LD75D4

QJ71C24N
QJ71C24N-R2

LJ71C24
LJ71C24-R2

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Q64TCTTN
Q64TCTTBWN

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

QD75/LD75 positioning

Q62DAN
Q64DAN
Q68DAVN
Q68DAIN

5
EDITING
PROGRAMS

Counter

L60AD4

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

Temperature control

Q64AD
Q68ADV
Q68ADI

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Analog

QCPU (Q mode)

LCPU/Communication head
module

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

Module type

1
OVERVIEW

Changing intelligent function modules between programmable controller series

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects

4 - 29

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Detailed replacement method screen for changing CPU to Universal model

QCPU

In GX Works2 with the installed QnH -> QnU Conversion Support Tool, the
button is
displayed on the List of Modifications screen when the programmable controller type is changed from
Basic model QCPU or High Performance model QCPU to Universal model QCPU.
The Detailed replacement method screen is displayed by clicking the
button. The
overview of replacement method regarding instructions and parameters which are changed by the PLC
type change function can be checked on the Detailed replacement method screen.
Furthermore, the Web browser is activated by clicking the links on the Detailed replacement method
screen to check details of settings. Adobe Reader is required to view the details.

4 - 30

4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects

4.3 Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data

Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data

4.3.1

OVERVIEW

This section explains how to operate each data in a project.

Adding new data to the project

2
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

Add new data to a project.

The data that can be added depend on the programmable controller type or project type.

Screen display

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

4.3

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Select [Project] [Object] [New].

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Set the items on the screen.

Description
Select the type of the data to be added.

Data Name

Enter the name of the data to be created.

Program Language

Select the programming language for creating programs.

Selection is allowed only when the data type is either of the following:

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

Item
Data Type

Program (program block), Function*1 or Function block*2

Set the data type of return value of the function.

Inherent Property

This item can be set when a function or function block is selected.

For details of check box items, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)

*1 :

Structured projects only

*2 :

Simple projects (with labels) and Structured projects only

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Result Type*1

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Operating procedure

4.3.1 Adding new data to the project

4 - 31

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

2.

Click the

button.

The editing screen for the created data is displayed.

Number of characters for a data name

Depending on the selectable data type, the numbers of characters shown in the following table can be used for
data names.
However, some operators such as "-" and "*", and some instruction names such as "MOV", cannot be used. For
details of the characters which cannot be use for data names, refer to Appendix 9.
Data type name

Number of characters

Program (program file), local device comment, device

memory, and device initial value

8 characters

Other data types

32 characters

Maximum numbers of data types that can be created

The maximum numbers of data types that can be created are as follows.
Data type name

Maximum number

Connection destination

128

SFC block in Simple project*1

320 (128 for Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02U, 25 for FXCPU)

Program in FXCPU Simple project (with labels)

64

Other data (structures, global labels, etc.)

800

*1 :

SFC of Simple projects (with labels) is not supported by FXCPU.

FXCPU
For FXCPU, the data of device initial values cannot be created.

4 - 32

4.3.1 Adding new data to the project

4.3 Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data

Copying/pasting data in projects

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

Utilize data of a project being edited or other projects.

Operating procedure

OVERVIEW

4.3.2

Select a data name to be copied in the Project view.

2.

Select [Project] [Object] [Copy].

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

1.

The selected data name is copied.

Select a folder to paste the data name in the Project view.

4.

Select [Project] [Object] [Paste].

If the same data name exists in the paste destination
or when the data name cannot be used for the project
in the paste destination because the project language
is different, the Data Paste screen is displayed.

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

3.

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Select a folder

Enter a new name in the "Data Name After Paste" field, and click the
button.

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

The data name is pasted.

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

5.

EDITING
PROGRAMS

4.3.2 Copying/pasting data in projects

4 - 33

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Copying/pasting data
Data can be pasted only to the data whose type is the same as the copy source. Data between different projects
can be copied/pasted only when their project types or programmable controller types are the same.
Multiple data can be copied by holding the
or
key and selecting the data.
Data can be copied/pasted by right-clicking the copy source data/paste destination folder and selecting [Copy]/
[Paste] from the shortcut menu, or by dragging and dropping the data from the copy source data to the paste
destination folder.
The program is in an uncompiled status after data are pasted. Compile the program again.
For projects with security, only users whose access level is 'Administrators' can copy/paste data.
Copying and pasting PLC parameter or Network parameter only is not possible. If they are copied individually, the
whole parameter files are copied and the files in the pasted destination are overwritten.

4.3.3

Changing project data names

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

Head
FX

FX

Change the data name of an open project.

Operating procedure

1.

Select the data name to be changed in the Project view.

2.

Select [Project] [Object] [Rename].

3.

Change the data name.

4.

Press the

key.

The selected data name is changed.

4.3.4

Deleting project data

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Delete data in an open project.

Operating procedure

1.

Select the data name to be deleted in the Project view.

2.

Select [Project] [Object] [Delete].

The selected data is deleted.

Deleting data
Multiple data can be selected and deleted.
When data under the POU are deleted, data under the Program Setting are deleted simultaneously.

4 - 34

4.3.3 Changing project data names

4.3 Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data

Displaying/editing properties
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

Display data properties of folders, parameters, and programs. A title and/or comment can be set to
each data.

Screen display

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

For property of project

Click

OVERVIEW

4.3.5

in the Project view.

For property of each data

).

<<Comment>>

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Select [Project] [Object] [Property] (

<<Detail>>

Set the items on the screen.

Description
Display the data name.

Title*1

Set a title for the data.

(The number of applicable characters is 128 for a project and 32 for other data.)

Last Change*1

Display the date when the data was updated.

5
EDITING
PROGRAMS

Item
Data Name

Set a comment for the data.

Comment*1

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

For FXCPU Simple project (with labels), "Title", "Last Change", and <<Comment>> tab are not
supported in the property of "MAIN" under Project view "Program Setting" 'execution program'.

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

*1 :

Press the
and
keys for a line feed.
(The number of applicable characters is 5,120.)

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Operating procedure

4.3.5 Displaying/editing properties

4 - 35

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Titles
Set titles are displayed on each view with a corresponding data name.
For SFC project without labels, a device comment of BL device corresponds to the SFC block becomes a title.
When the device comment of the reference target is read-protected by the security setting, the title is not displayed
on the view.
Properties of Structured projects
Properties of the following data can be set for Structured projects in addition to those indicated above.
Data

Setting

Task

Priority and executing condition of a task

Function/Function block

Whether to use EN/ENO, or MC/MCR for EN control

Library

Path to a Help file

For details, refer to the explanations of each function.

(
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project))
Destinations for saving properties
The 'titles' and 'comments' set to the data properties can be saved as symbolic information.
(
Section 12.1.5)
When reading data from the programmable controller CPU, the symbolic information must be written to/read from
the programmable controller CPU in order to restore the settings of the properties.
When data are read without the symbolic information from the programmable controller CPU, the settings of the
properties are not restored.

4 - 36

4.3.5 Displaying/editing properties

4.4 Operations of Intelligent Function Module Data

Operations of Intelligent Function Module Data

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

For the method for setting the intelligent function module data, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)

OVERVIEW

4.4

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4 - 37

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.5

Changing Project Types

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to change the type of an open project.

Using the method explained below, the type of a Simple project is changed from 'without labels' to 'with
labels'. In addition, a Simple project 'with labels' can be changed to a Structured project.
Changing from a Simple project 'with labels' to a Simple project 'without labels' or changing a Structured
project to a Simple project is not supported.

*1

*1 :

Simple project

Simple project

'without labels'

'with labels'

Structured project

Not supported by FXCPU.

Operating procedure

Select [Project] [Change Project Type].

Changing project types

When a Simple project (with labels) is changed to a Structured project, project data are changed as follows:
SFC: Created under the Program folder.
Function block: Created under the FB/FUN folder.
<Simple project (with labels)>

<Structured project>

Change the type of the project

Created under
the Program folder

Created under
the FB/FUN folder

Operation after changing project type

When the project type is changed, programs are in the uncompiled status.
Compile all programs again after changing the project type. (
Section 5.4)

4 - 38

4.6 Managing Project Revisions

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to register a backup of the project with added revision information, and restoring the
registered backup data (content of the past project).

4.6.1

Registering revision information (creating backup)

Create a backup of the project at the point of registration, and register it with the revision information.

OVERVIEW

Managing Project Revisions

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

4.6

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Screen display
Select [Project] [Project Revision] [Revision Entry].

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Set the items on the screen.

Description
Display the revision number to be registered.

Date

Display "----/--/-- --:--:--" (year/month/date hour:minute:second).

User

Display the user name when using the project with security.

Title

Enter a title of the revision.

Comment

Enter comments for the revision.

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

Item
Revision No.

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Operating procedure

4.6.1 Registering revision information (creating backup)

4 - 39

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Revision number and the allowable number of revisions that can be registered
A revision number for the registered revision is automatically assigned from 1 to 9999.
The maximum number of revisions that can be registered is 100. If the number of the registered revisions is to be
exceeded 100, delete unnecessary revisions. The deleted revision numbers are unused.
If the revision number is to be exceeded 9999, delete all the revision data, or save the project with a different name
without succeeding the revision information. (
Section 4.2.3)
The allowable number of characters that can be entered for a title
The maximum number of characters that can be entered for a title is 32.
The allowable number of characters that can be entered for a comment
The maximum number of characters that can be entered for a comment is 256.
A line feed is handled as 2 characters.
Registration of project revisions when overwriting and saving projects
According to the option setting, the Revision Registration screen for the project revision is displayed when
overwriting and saving the project.
Select [Tool] [Options] "Project", and then select "Revision is Registered when Save Project" in "Change
History". In addition, the revision title can be automatically set when overwriting by checking "Automatically set
revision titles".
Registration of project revisions for projects with security
For the projects with security, the revisions can be registered only when the user's access level is 'Administrators'.

4.6.2

Displaying revision list

Display registered revision information in the order of the revision number.

The revision list is used for registering, restoring, deleting, and verifying backups.

Screen display
Select [Project] [Project Revision] [Revision List].

Display contents
Item

4 - 40

Description

No.

Display the revision numbers.

Date

Display the dates of revision registration.

User

For the projects with security, display the user names who have registered the revisions.

Title

Display the titles of the revisions.

4.6.2 Displaying revision list

4.6 Managing Project Revisions

Screen button
Displays the detailed information of the revision which is selected in the list. "Title" and "Comment"
can be edited.

OVERVIEW

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Registers the project being edited as a revision. (

Section 4.6.1)

Restores the backup data. (

Section 4.6.3)

Section 4.6.4)

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Deletes the revision information. (

Verifies the revision with other revisions or the projects being edited. (

Section 4.6.5)

Restoring backup projects

Restore the backup revision information.

After restoring the backup, the project is in the status at the time of registering the revision information.

Operating procedure
Section 4.6.2).

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Select the revision to be restored on the Revision List screen (

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.

SETTING
PARAMETERS

4.6.3

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Revision List screen

Each column can be sorted in ascending/descending order by clicking on the column header.

4.6.3 Restoring backup projects

4 - 41

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

2.

Click the

button.

The revision information to be restored is displayed.

3.

Confirm the revision information to be

restored. Click the

button.

The message as shown on the right is

displayed.

4.

Click the

button.

The backup of the selected revision information is restored.

The revision number and title of the restored project are displayed on the title bar.
Revision number and title
of the restored project.

The Revision List screen after restoring a project

After project restoration,
is displayed on the row of the restored project on the Revision List screen.

Access level to be able to use the restoring function when using the projects with security
For the projects with security, the revisions can be restored only when the user's access level is 'Administrators'.
Revisions for the project with security
If the project being edited is the project with security, the registered security in the revision is deactivated when the
security is deactivated. When the revision is restored in such situation, all users can read the project including the
revision data because the project is restored without security.
To protect the revision data after deactivating the security, delete the revision data in advance.
Precautions on restoring projects
Register the revision of the project being edited before restoring a project.
When the other revision is restored and overwritten without registering the revision of the project being edited, the
project before restoration is overwritten.

4 - 42

4.6.3 Restoring backup projects

4.6 Managing Project Revisions

4.6.4

Deleting revision information

OVERVIEW

Delete the registered revision information.

Operating procedure

1.

Select the revision information to be deleted on the Revision List screen

Section 4.6.2).

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Click the

button.

The message on the right is displayed.

3.

Click the

button.

The selected revision information is

deleted.

4.6.5

5
EDITING
PROGRAMS

Revision number
The deleted revision numbers are unused.
Revisions being restored
The revision of the project which has been restored from the revision cannot be deleted. To delete the revision,
overwrite and save the project after restoring it.

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

2.

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Verifying revisions

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

Verify the revision information with other revision information or the project being edited.
The following data can be selected as verification targets for the revision verification.
Programs
Parameters
Intelligent function module parameters (initial setting/auto refresh)
Device comments
Device memory data
QD75/LD75 positioning module
For FXCPU, only programs and parameters are the verification targets.

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.6.4 Deleting revision information

4 - 43

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Operating procedure

1.

Select the revision to be verified on the Revision List screen (

Section 4.6.2).

When the verification function is performed selecting only one revision, the selected revision
information is verified with the project being edited.
To verify two revisions, select two revisions with pressing the

2.

Click the

key or

button.

The message as shown on the right is

displayed. This message is displayed
when verifying the selected revision
information with the project being edited.

3.

Click the

button.

The Revision Verification screen is

displayed.

4.

Select the data to be verified.

For details of setting items, refer to the
project verification. (
Section 4.2.7)

5.

Click the

button.

The verification result is displayed on the

Verify Result screen.
For details of the Verify Result screen, refer to the project verification.
(

4 - 44

Section 4.2.7)

4.6.5 Verifying revisions

key.

4.7 Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats

Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats

This section explains how to utilize projects created with GX Developer or GX IEC Developer, and files (ASCII
files) created using the Export function of GX IEC Developer in GX Works2. Projects edited with GX Works2
can also be utilized in GX Developer.

OVERVIEW

4.7

Utilizing projects and data created with GX Developer or GX IEC Developer in GX

Works2
Projects created with GX Developer or GX IEC Developer can be utilized in GX Works2 by using
Section 4.7.1)

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

the 'Open Other Project' function. (

Open Other Project function.

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Project created with

GX Developer

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Opened as a GX Works2 project.

Open Other Project function.
Project created with GX
IEC Developer

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

4 - 45

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Utilizing files created using the Export function of GX IEC Developer

ASCII files created using the Export function of GX IEC Developer can be added as projects in GX
Works2 by using the 'Read ASC Format File' function. (

Section 4.7.2)

Read ASC
Format File

Utilizing projects and data created with GX Works2 in GX Developer

Files created/edited in Simple project with GX Works2 can be utilized in GX Developer by using the
'Export to GX Developer Format File' function. (

Section 4.8)

[Export to GX Developer
Format File]

4 - 46

4.7 Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats

Each project and data created with GX Developer or GX IEC Developer are stored in the areas shown
in the table below with GX Works2.
GX Developer projects are opened as Simple projects and GX IEC Developer projects, as Structured
projects.

GX Works2
(Simple project)

GX Works2
(Structured project)

Parameter

Parameter

Device Comment

Global Device Comment

Parameter
Global Device Comment

Global variables

Global Label

Global Label

Program

Program

POU

FB

FB_Pool

FB/FUN

Structure

Structured Data Types

Structured Data Types

Device memory

Device Memory

Device Memory

Device initial value

Device Initial Value

Device Initial Value

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

GX Developer

Comparison of projects and data storage locations between GX IEC Developer and GX Works2

User Library

User Library

Parameter (Programmable controller parameter)

Parameter

DUT_Pool (Structure)

Structured Data Types

Global_Vars (Global variable)

Global Label

Task_Pool

POU

POU_Pool

POU

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

GX Works2
(Structured project)

GX IEC Developer

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Comparison of projects and data storage locations between GX Developer and GX Works2

OVERVIEW

Storage of utilized data in GX Works2

Security level of GX IEC Developer

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

The security level in the GX IEC Developer project is cleared after reading the project.
When the GX IEC Developer project is read using GX Works2, the following Enter Password
screen is displayed.

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Compatible applications
For 'Open Other Project' and 'Export to GX Developer Format File', the supported versions may
differ depending on the CPU type.
For the application compatibility, refer to Appendix 5.

4 - 47

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.7.1

Opening projects in other formats

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

Open a project created with GX Developer or GX IEC Developer in GX Works2.

Screen display
Select [Project] [Open Other Data] [Open Other Project].

Operating procedure

Specify the project, and click the

button.

Select '*.gpj' for a GX Developer project and '*.pro' for a GX IEC Developer project.
The selected project is opened.

Precautions for opening projects in other formats

Status after opening a different format project with labels

When a different format project with labels is opened, the project is in the uncompiled status. Compile
all programs in the project before executing online operations such as writing data and monitoring.
When a compile error occurs, correct the corresponding program according to the programming
manual.
When programmable controller type of project which is created in GX Developer is not supported by
GX Works2
Open the project by starting GX Developer.
Opening different format projects that contain SFC programs
Block information data such as: block information devices, block titles and block statements, are set
in the block data property.
Opening different format projects that contain ST programs
An error may occur at compilation because the argument type or the number of arguments in some
ST instruction is different between GX Developer and GX Works2. When a compilation error occurs,
correct the instruction according to the structured programming manuals.

4 - 48

4.7.1 Opening projects in other formats

4.7 Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats

Utilizing option settings

GX Developer option setting "Copy source/display source of reference during comment edit" is
utilized to GX Works2 option setting "Program Editor" "Ladder/SFC" "Comment" "Reference of
Device Comment".
Opening a GX IEC Developer project
When a GX IEC Developer project that contains user library is opened, the following message may
be displayed and the user library may not be read. If the following message is displayed, select
[Project] [Library] [Install] in GX Works2 to obtain the user library.

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Values set in GX Developer are utilized to the secured steps for Online program change (
Section
12.1.1) and the writing range of device comment (
Section 12.1.3) which are set when writing data
to programmable controller CPU.
Note that "PLC comment write format (CPU Format)" which is set along with the writing range of
device comment in GX Developer is not utilized, because GX Works2 does not support this function.
For a project in which the comment capacity is restricted by setting "PLC comment write format (CPU
Format)" in GX Developer, the comment capacity may be exceeded when data are written to a
programmable controller CPU using GX Works2.
In such a case, reduce the writing range of device comment.

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Utilizing detailed settings for Write to PLC function

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

When the common pointer number is not set in the PLC parameter setting of GX Developer, a
compilation error may occur at the compilation after opening the project in other format. In such case,
change "Common Pointer No." on the <<PLC System>> tab of PLC parameter or change the pointer
device range in the device/label automatic-assign setting.

OVERVIEW

Setting common pointer number

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.7.1 Opening projects in other formats

4 - 49

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.7.2

Reading ASC format data

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

Add ASC format data created in GX IEC Developer to a GX Works2 project being edited.
Data can be added only when a new project is created or a project is opened in Structured project.

Screen display
Select [Project] [Open Other Data] [Read ASC Format File].

Operating procedure

Specify the file, and click the

button.

Select '*.asc' for the file.

The specified data is added to the project.

Importing project data of different programmable controller type

Project data having a different programmable controller type can be imported to a project being edited.
The programmable controller type of the project being edited is not changed even when data with the different
programmable controller type are imported.
In this case, compile the programs to check and correct errors after importing data because instructions and
devices not supported by the open project are also imported.
Importing data whose name already exists in the project
A number is appended in serial order (starting from one) to the end of the data name to be imported, and then the
data is added to the project.
Importing global labels
When the global labels are imported, the "Device" column of the global label may be blank. If the "Device" column
is blank, check the items on the <<Device>> tab of PLC parameter.
Importing FBD programs of GX IEC Developer
Imported FBD programs are converted to structured ladder programs.

4 - 50

4.7.2 Reading ASC format data

4.7 Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats

Reading project files created with GX Configurator-QP

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

For the method for utilizing a project file created with GX Configurator-QP to add an intelligent function
module, refer to the following manual.

OVERVIEW

4.7.3

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.7.3 Reading project files created with GX Configurator-QP

4 - 51

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.8

Saving projects in other formats

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to save a Simple project of GX Works2 in the GX Developer format.

Screen display
Select [Project] [Export to GX Developer Format File].

Operating procedure

1.

Select the save destination of the GX Developer format project.

2.

Enter the project name, and click the

button.

Precautions for saving projects

For the restrictions other than the ones described below, refer to Appendix 8.
Programs are saved in the uncompiled status.
Data cannot be saved when the security access level is set to other than 'Administrators'. Change the access
level before saving the data. (
Section 4.10.4)
The data with a block password cannot be saved. Unlock the block password before saving the data.
(
Section 4.11.3)
Projects in which labels are used for FXCPU cannot be saved in the GX Developer format.
When a GX Developer format project is saved to the folder in which a GX Developer format project with the
same name exists, the previously saved project is overwritten.
If the saving of the project failed, all data except for the data created by user will be deleted.
Precautions for handling projects in GX Developer
Since the program is saved uncompiled, the program needs to be compiled when it is opened in GX Developer.
For projects with labels, the compilation results and device assignment may be different from those of GX
Works2.
For a maintenance work on the same programmable controller CPU using both GX Developer and GX Works2,
programming with actual devices is recommended.

4 - 52

4.9 Starting GX Developer from GX Works2

Starting GX Developer from GX Works2

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

Start a new GX Developer project from GX Works2.

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

GX Developer needs to be installed in advance to perform this function.

For details of GX Developer installation, refer to Appendix 13.
For details of GX Developer operation, refer to the following manual.
GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual

Screen display

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Select [Project] [Start GX Developer].

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

OVERVIEW

4.9

4 - 53

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.10

Setting Security for Projects

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to set security for projects to protect the projects themselves and the data in
projects.
Setting security not only restricts an access to projects but also prevents the data, such as POUs, device
comments, and parameters, that are created by the user from erroneous modification and/or disclosure to
unauthorized users.
This function cannot restrict writing/reading of data to/from a programmable controller CPU. Use the online
password function to protect the data in a programmable controller CPU. (

Chapter 13)

Access levels and access authority

An access to data can be restricted by setting an access level to the individual user.
An access level is an operating authority given to a login user of the project.
There are five access levels as shown below. The data that can be edited by a user having lower
access level can also be edited by a user who has higher access level.
Access level
Higher

Administrators
Developers(Level3)
Developers(Level2)
Developers(Level1)

Users
Lower

Operating authority
<Administrator level>
All operations are possible.
<Developer level>
Security setting, data access, and a part of operations are restricted.
<Operator level>
Only access to project data is possible.
Data cannot be read from the programmable controller CPU.

<Example>
The data with access authority of Developers(Level2) can be edited by a login user whose access level
is Developers(Level2) or higher (Administrators, Developers(Level3) or Developers(Level2)).

4 - 54

4.10 Setting Security for Projects

Access authority applicable data

OVERVIEW

The following tables show the data to which access authority can be applied.
Simple project
Items in Project view

: Applicable : Not applicable

Read
Write

*1

Intelligent Function Module

Intelligent function module data

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Parameter

Global Device Comment

Global label data
Program Setting
Program File Data
POU
Ladder program data

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Global Label

Program
*1

ST program data
Program

Local Label
SFC program data
SFC block

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Local Label

Program
Local label*1
FB_Pool
Program

Structured data
Local Device Comment

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Local label
Structured Data Types

Comment data
Device Memory

Device memory data

Device Initial Value*1
Device initial value data

SETTING
PARAMETERS

Not supported by FXCPU.

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

*1 :

4 - 55

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Structured project
Items in Project view

: Applicable : Not applicable

Read
Write

Parameter
Intelligent Function Module*1
Intelligent function module data

Global Device Comment

Global Label
Global label data
Program Setting

Program file data

POU
Program
Ladder program data*1
Program
Local Label
ST program data
Program
Local Label
data*1

SFC program
Program

Local Label
structured ladder/FBD program data
Program
Local Label
FB/FUN
Program
Local label
Structured Data Types
Structured data
Local Device Comment

Comment data
Device Memory

Device memory data

Device Initial Value*1
Device initial value data

*1 :

4 - 56

Not supported by FXCPU.

4.10 Setting Security for Projects

Setting/resetting security of projects

OVERVIEW

Set security for an open project and reset the security.

Setting security for projects

Set security for a project.

Once security is set for a project, user authentication is required when the project is opened once
again. (

Section 4.10.3)

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

4.10.1

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Screen display
Select [Project] [Security] [User Management].

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Operating procedure
Item

Description
Enter a user name in 1 to 20 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and/or symbols
corresponding to the ASCII codes (Appendix 3) of 20H to 26H and 28H to 7EH. (Alphabets are
case-sensitive.)

Access Level

Display 'Administrators'. (Fixed)

Password

Enter a password in 6 to 32 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and/or symbols

corresponding to the ASCII codes (Appendix 3) of 20H to 7EH. (Alphabets are case-sensitive.)

Re-enter Password

Set the same password again for confirmation.

2.

Click the

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

User Name

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Set the items on the screen.

button.

Security is set for the project.

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

Setting security
When security is set for a project, the project is in the status logged in by the set user (Administrators). The current
login user can be checked in the status bar. (
Section 3.2.6)
Loss of login password
If a user forgets the login password, logging in to the project is disabled. Remember the password securely. If the
user whose access level is Developers(Level3) or lower forgets the password, log in the project using the access
level 'Administrators' and set the password again.

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

1.

4.10.1 Setting/resetting security of projects

4 - 57

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Resetting security of projects

Reset the set security of a project by deleting all users, and returns the project to the status without
security. (

4.10.2

Section 4.10.2)

Managing (adding/deleting/changing) users

Manage the registered status of users for a project with security. This function also adds/deletes/
changes users.
This function is available only when a project is logged in by the user whose access level is
'Administrators' or 'Developers'.

Screen display
Select [Project] [Security] [User Management].

Display contents
Item

4 - 58

Description

Number of User
Registrations

Display the number of registered users and the number of registrable users.

User Name

Display the registered user names.

Access Level

Display the access level of each registered user.

4.10.2 Managing (adding/deleting/changing) users

4.10 Setting Security for Projects

Screen button
Adding users')

Deletes a user selected in the list.

The current login user cannot be deleted. If registered users are only 'Administrators' and there are
no other users to be deleted, deletion of the current login user is possible.
If 'Administrators' level users are deleted, security is reset.

Changes the information of the user selected in the list. (

'

Changing user information')

Changes the password of the user selected in the list. (

'
Changing passwords')
The password of the current login user cannot be changed using this function. To change it, select
[Project] [Security] [Change Password].

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Adding users

Add a user to a project with security.

A user whose access level is higher than that of the login user cannot be added.

Operating procedure

1.

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

'

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Adds a user. (

OVERVIEW

Click the
button on the
User Management screen.

EDITING
PROGRAMS

The User Addition screen is displayed.

Set the items on the screen.

3.

Description

User Name

Enter a user name in 1 to 20 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and/or symbols

corresponding to the ASCII codes (Appendix 3) of 20H to 26H and 28H to 7EH. (Alphabets are
case-sensitive.)

Access Level

Select the access level.

Password

Enter a password in 6 to 32 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and/or symbols

corresponding to the ASCII codes (Appendix 3) of 20H to 7EH. (Alphabets are case-sensitive.)

Re-enter Password

Set the same password again for confirmation.

Click the

button.

The user is added.

The added user is displayed in the User Management screen.

4.10.2 Managing (adding/deleting/changing) users

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Item

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

2.

SETTING
PARAMETERS

4 - 59

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

Changing user information

Change the user information (user name and access level) of registered users.
The information of the login user and the user whose access level is higher than that of login user
cannot be changed.

Operating procedure

1.

Click the
button on the
User Management screen.
The Change User Data screen is displayed.

2.

Set the items on the screen.

Setting items

3.

Click the

Section 4.10.1

button.

The user information is changed.

Changing passwords

Change the password of the user selected in the list on the User Management screen.
The password of the login user and the user whose access level is higher than that of the login user
cannot be changed. To change the password of the login user, use the Change password function by
selecting [Project] [Security] [Change Password].

Operating procedure

1.

Click the
button on the User
Management screen.
The Change Password screen is displayed.

2.

Set the "New Password" and the "Reenter Password".

3.

Click the

button.

The password is changed.

4 - 60

4.10.2 Managing (adding/deleting/changing) users

4.10 Setting Security for Projects

4.10.3

Logging in projects

OVERVIEW

A user authentication procedure is required when opening a project with security.

Screen display
Screen display when a project with security is opened.

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Operating procedure
Item

2.

Set the items on the screen.

Description

User Name

Enter the user name registered to the project to be logged in.

Password

Enter the password.

Click the

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

1.

button.

Section 3.2.6)

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

Checking login status

The current login user can be checked in the status bar. (

5
EDITING
PROGRAMS

Login authentication is performed with the entered user name and password. The project is
opened when the entry is confirmed to be correct.

4.10.3 Logging in projects

4 - 61

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.10.4

Changing access authority of access level

Set an authorization of displaying/saving data for each access level.

The access authority of access levels higher than that of the login user cannot be changed.
If the access level of the current login user is 'Users', changing the access authority is not allowed.

Screen display
Select [Project] [Security] [Data Security Setting].

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

2.

Description

Access Object

Select the data for which access authority is changed.

Access Authority

Set 'enable/disable' of reading/writing data for each access level by moving the
slider.

Click the

button.

Setting access authorities

Access authorities can also be set by right-clicking data of which access authorities are to be changed on the
Project view and selecting [Data Security Setting] from the shortcut menu.

4 - 62

4.10.4 Changing access authority of access level

4.10 Setting Security for Projects

1)

Precautions on using the security function

Read protected data

<Project view>

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

A name of read protected data is displayed in gray and cannot be opened. On the screens of
project verification and programmable controller verification, a lock mark icon is appended.
The following figures are an example for the case that "Parameter", programs and local labels of
"MAIN1", and programs of "MAIN2" are read protected.

OVERVIEW

4.10.5

<Project verification>

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

<Programmable controller verification>

5
EDITING
PROGRAMS

Write protected data

The write protected data can be opened as the read only data.
Properties of data

The properties of the read/write protected data can be displayed, but cannot be edited.
4)

Device comment display on ladder editor and the Sampling Trace screen
If the data of the device comment is set as read protected, the device comment is not displayed on
ladder editor or the Sampling Trace screen.
Reading symbolic information from programmable controller CPU using project with security
When symbolic information*1 is read from a programmable controller CPU, the security settings
(settings on the Setup Access Authority screen) of the data, which are not included in the symbolic
information, are set to their default.
If the settings on the Setup Access Authority screen are changed, make settings again after
reading data from the programmable controller CPU.
Note that the block password*2 is not set to default even when the symbolic information is read.
Therefore, setting a block password to each POU is recommended.
*1 :

Symbolic information (

*2 :

Block password (

Section 12.1.5)
Section 4.11)

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

5)

SETTING
PARAMETERS

3)

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

2)

4.10.5 Precautions on using the security function

4 - 63

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.11

Protecting POUs in Projects

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to set a block password to a POU in a project with labels.
Setting a block password to a POU*1 disables browsing of program contents. To browse program contents,
the block password must be unlocked.
The following table shows the POUs to which a block password can be set.
Project type
Simple project (without labels)

POU to which a block password

can be set
None

Simple project (with labels)

Function block

Structured project

Program block
Function block
Function

Effective range of block passwords

A block password is the function that protects POUs, not execution programs.
To protect execution programs, use the security function or online password function.
For FXCPU, however, whether to protect execution programs with a block password can be selected. (Setting
block passwords
Section 4.11.2)
Precautions on project with security
To set/unlock/delete a block password in a project with security, a user who has a security access authority to read/
write the program needs to log in. (Security
Section 4.10)
Reading symbolic information from programmable controller CPU
Even when the symbolic information is read from a programmable controller CPU, the set status of block password
does not change.
Precautions when using FXCPU
A memory cassette to which the execution program with a block password is written can be used on FX3U/FX3UC
version 3.00 or later only.

4 - 64

4.11 Protecting POUs in Projects

Managing (setting/unlocking/deleting) block passwords

Manage the block password setting status of a POU. In addition, this function sets/unlocks/deletes a
block password.

Screen display

OVERVIEW

4.11.1

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Select [Tool] [Block Password].

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Item

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Display contents
Description

POU Name

Display POUs.

Registration Status

Display the status of block password for each POU.

Screen button

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Section 4.11.2)

Unlocks the block password set to the POU. (

Section 4.11.3)

Deletes the registered block password. The block password of the POU must be unlocked before
deleting it.

SETTING
PARAMETERS

Sets a block password to a POU. (

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.11.1 Managing (setting/unlocking/deleting) block passwords

4 - 65

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

4.11.2

Setting/changing block passwords

Set a block password to a POU.

Operating procedure

1.

Select a POU to set a block

password on the Set Block
Password screen and click the

<QCPU (Q Mode)/LCPU>

button.
The Change Block Password screen is
displayed.

<FXCPU>

2.

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Password
Re-enter Password

Set the same password again for confirmation.

Read-protect the execution

Check this to disable reading execution programs.

Whenever this item is selected or cleared, the program must be compiled.

program*1

*1 :

3.

Description
Enter a password in 6 to 32 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and/or symbols
corresponding to the ASCII codes (
Appendix 3) of 20H to 7EH. (Alphabets are casesensitive.)

Supported by FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later only.

Click the

button.

The block password is set to the selected POU.

Lock of the POU by the block password becomes effective when the project is opened once again.

Display in the Project view

A POU with a block password is displayed in the Project view as follows.

A lock mark is appended to the icon of

POU to which a block password is set.

Changing block passwords

To change a block password, simply set a new password for the POU to which a block password has already been
set. However, the block password must be unlocked before changing it.

4 - 66

4.11.2 Setting/changing block passwords

4.11 Protecting POUs in Projects

4.11.3

Unlocking block passwords

OVERVIEW

Unlock the block password set to a POU.

Browsing of POUs is enabled by unlocking block passwords.

Operating procedure

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Select a POU to unlock the block

password on the Set Block Password
screen and click the
button.
The Unlock Block Password screen is
displayed.

Item
Password

Description
Enter the block password to be unlocked.

4
Click the

button.

The block password of the selected POU is unlocked.

The unlock of the POU by the block password is valid while the project is being opened. To lock the
POU again, reopen the project.

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

3.

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Set the items on the screen.

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

2.

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

1.

4.11.3 Unlocking block passwords

4 - 67

GX Works2

4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

MEMO

4 - 68

4.11.3 Unlocking block passwords

EDITING PROGRAMS

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

OVERVIEW

This chapter explains the functions of the program editors used to edit sequence programs.

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Label Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Precautions on Using Label Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Converting/Compiling Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4

5 -1

GX Works2

5 EDITING PROGRAMS

5.1

Programming
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

For programming in each project, refer to the following manuals:

GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)

5.2

Label Programming

Programs can be standardized by using the label programming.

This function is available when a new program is created with the selection of the "Use Label" item.
For projects without labels, the programming can be changed to the label programming by changing the
project type. (

Section 4.5)

Features of label programming

General-purpose programs created with the label programming can be utilized for other programs,
because device assignment can be changed according to the equipment configuration.
Programs can be created using labels without knowing the equipment configuration.
Labels and actual devices are associated as the equipment configuration is determined. This function
allows easier creation of execution programs.
By simply specifying a label assignment method, devices are assigned automatically with the
program compilation function without being aware of device names/device numbers.
Debugging can be performed effectively by monitoring/debugging programs without changing label
names.

5 -2

5.2 Label Programming

Terms used in label programming

New Project screen. (

Section 4.2.1)

Data of information such as programs, global labels, and local labels,

Symbolic information

required for label programming. (

Section 12.1.5)
These data are restored by writing/reading symbolic information to/
from a programmable controller CPU.

Program

Program data written with applicable programming languages.

For label projects, these are data included in symbolic information even
when a program is created using devices only.

Execution program

Programs executed in programmable controller CPUs.

Devices are assigned to labels with compilation, and execution
programs are created.

Actual device

Devices assigned to labels after compilation, or devices not written with

labels.

Global label

Labels available for all program data when multiple program data are
created in a project.

Local label

Labels available for each program data only.

Labels and each program data are set one to one.

Device/label automaticassign setting

Compilation

A setting of types and ranges of devices assigned to labels.

GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
An operation in which programs are converted to execution programs.

The following is an image of writing/reading label project data to/from a programmable controller CPU
in GX Works2.
< Writing data to programmable controller CPU >
GX Works2 (Label project)

Program
Local label

Write to PLC

Global label

SETTING
PARAMETERS

Program
Local label

Write to PLC

Programmable
controller CPU
Execution program

< Reading data from programmable controller CPU >

Symbolic information

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Execution program

Symbolic information

Write to PLC

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

New projects created with the selection of the "Use Label" item on the

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Label project

Description

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Term

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Project view

OVERVIEW

The following are the terms used in the label programming.

Read from PLC

GX Works2 (Label project)

Symbolic information
Program

Local label

Local label

Global label

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

Program

5 -3

GX Works2

5 EDITING PROGRAMS

5.3

Precautions on Using Label Projects

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains the precautions on using label projects.

5.3.1
1)

Editing programs
Label comments set on the label setting editor are displayed as comments to labels. Comments
created on the device comment editor are not displayed.
Up to 1024 characters can be set for label comments, however, the number of characters that can
be displayed is 32.

2)

When the same label is set for global label/local label, the label comment set for local label setting
is displayed.

3)

The index setting cannot be set when labels are used. Use actual devices to set the index setting.

Precautions when editing programs

1)

When an instruction in which data are stored to multiple word devices is used as shown below,
specify an array for the label in the storage destination of operation result.
Division (Storing values such as quotient and remainder of division)
Instructions such as the block data transfer instruction (BMOV)
[ Storage example when division is specified with array ]
a Setting

Label name
Device type
Number of elements
Program

: Value_A
: Array (word)
:2
: [/ D0 D1 Value_A]
2 words required

b Operation result

Operation result of [/ D0 D1 Value_A]

2)

Value_A[0]

Value_A[1]

(Quotient)

(Remainder)

When setting arrays, be aware of device types and the number of elements in the data storage
destination.
If the setting is incorrect, the content of devices assigned to other labels may be overwritten.
[ Example of incorrect device type setting ]
a Setting

Label name
Device type
Program

: Value_A
: Double word
: [D* D0 D2 Value_A]

4 words required
b Operation result

Data register
Device range assigned
to Value_A

d [1]
d [2]

Device range used

by other labels

d [3]

Device range for storing operation result

Overwritten device range

d [4]
d [5]

For the above example, assign 4 words to the label (Value_A) in the storage destination of
operation result.
To assign 4 words, set the following setting on the label setting editor.
Device type: Array (double word) Number of elements: 2
After compilation, the consecutive device ranges for 4 words are secured.

5 -4

5.3.1 Editing programs

5.3 Precautions on Using Label Projects

Do not overlap the device ranges which are stored as execution result of instruction when
assigning devices with global labels.

OVERVIEW

If the setting is incorrect, the content of devices assigned to other labels may be overwritten.
[ Example of incorrect device setting ]
a Setting
Label name
Device type
Number of elements
Device
Program

: Value_A
: Array (Double word)
:2
: D100
: [D* D0 D2 Value_A]

Label name
Device type
Device
Program

: Value_B
: Double word
: D102
: [* D10 D11 Value_B]

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

4 words required

2 words required

b Operation result

Data register

Device set for

Value_B

D100
D101
D102
D103
D104

Device range for storing operation result

Overwritten device range

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Device set for

Value_A

For the above example, assign the device of label (Value_B) to D104.

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

3)

5.3.1 Editing programs

5 -5

GX Works2

5 EDITING PROGRAMS

5.3.2

Writing programs to programmable controller CPU (Write to

PLC/Online program change)

Writing symbolic information

1)

In order to restore programs by reading symbolic information from the programmable controller
CPU, write symbolic information.
Symbolic information can be written by selecting the following item on the execution screen of
Write to PLC/Online program change.
Write to PLC: Symbolic Information
Online program change: Write Symbolic Information to PLC
Note that symbolic information and execution programs can be written to separate memories.
Specify the write destination memory for "Target Memory". The default setting of write destination
memory for symbolic information can be changed in the option setting. Set "Setting for Save
Destination of Symbolic Information to PLC" under [Tool] [Options] "Symbolic Information".
< Write to PLC >
Symbolic information and all execution programs
are selected when "Symbolic Information" is selected.
The program which is consistent with the symbolic
information can be written to the programmable
controller CPU.

GX Works2
Symbolic information
Program 1

Program 2

Local label

Local label

Perform the Write to

PLC/Online program
change operation on
label program
Programmable
controller CPU

< Online program change >

Execution program 1

Execution program 2

Symbolic information

When the Write to PLC/Online program change operation is performed on execution programs
only, program inconsistency occurs. This operation must be performed on both symbolic
information and execution programs.
2)

When writing data to a programmable controller CPU, the confirmation message asking "Do you
want to overwrite?" may be displayed as corresponding to the execution programs. The symbolic
information will not be written normally if "No" was selected. Perform the data write operation
again, and complete the operation normally.

Writing execution programs only

1)

When an area to store symbolic information cannot be secured on the programmable controller
CPU, write execution programs only.
Projects contain symbolic information must be kept securely on a personal computer.

2)

Write execution programs without selecting the following item.

Write to PLC: Symbolic Information
Online program change: Write Symbolic Information to PLC

5 -6

5.3.2 Writing programs to programmable controller CPU (Write to PLC/Online program change)

5.3 Precautions on Using Label Projects

1
OVERVIEW

Reading programs from programmable controller CPU (Read

from PLC)

Reading symbolic information

1)

Execute the Read from PLC operation with a label project.

2)

When reading data from a programmable controller CPU, specify the memory to which the
symbolic information is stored for "Target Memory" of symbolic information.

3)

Do not perform the Read from PLC operation on the symbolic information when the symbolic
information and the execution programs on the programmable controller CPU are not consistent.

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

When the symbolic information is read with program inconsistency, the execution programs which
are running on the programmable controller CPU cannot be restored. Check the date of the Write
to PLC operation which was performed on the symbolic information and the execution programs,
and prevent from performing the Read form PLC operation with program inconsistency. Date of the
data write operation can be checked with the column of "Last Change" on the Online Data
Operation screen for "Delete PLC Data".

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

The following are the precautions when symbolic information needs to be read with program
inconsistency.
Create backup data of symbolic information on a personal computer before performing the Read
from PLC operation.
Symbolic information on a personal computer will be overwritten with symbolic information on a
programmable controller CPU. To prevent from erasing the latest symbolic information, save the
project and create backup data of symbolic information.
The following message is displayed when the Read from PLC operation is performed with
program inconsistency.
Follow the instruction described in the message.

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

EDITING
PROGRAMS

5.3.3

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

5.3.3 Reading programs from programmable controller CPU (Read from PLC)

5 -7

GX Works2

5 EDITING PROGRAMS

Reading execution programs only

1)

Do not read execution programs only.

When only the execution programs needs to be read, read them with a project without labels.
The following warning message is displayed when the execution programs created from the
symbolic information are read with a project without labels.

5.3.4

Verifying programs

Symbolic information cannot be verified. The program verification operation can be performed on
execution programs only.

5.3.5

Monitoring programs

Programs created with labels can be monitored.

Programs with labels registered to the Watch window can be monitored.

5 -8

5.3.4 Verifying programs

5.4 Converting/Compiling Projects

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to convert/compile an edited project to convert it into the code executable on the
programmable controller CPU.
The following table shows the conversion/compilation types depending on project types.
Project type

Simple project
(without labels)

Simple project (with

labels)/
Structured project

Conversion/compilation type

Description

Build

Fix changes.

Online Program Change

Fix changes, and simultaneously, write the difference

between the fixed programs and the programs stored in the
programmable controller CPU to the programmable
controller CPU.

Rebuild All

Convert all programs.

Build

Convert and compile uncompiled data (programs,

structured data, labels and functions/function blocks).

Online Program Change

Convert and compile data, and simultaneously, write the

difference between the fixed programs and the programs
stored in the programmable controller CPU to the
programmable controller CPU.

Rebuild All

Convert and compile all data (programs, structured data,

labels and functions/function blocks).

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

For details, refer to the following manuals:

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

OVERVIEW

Converting/Compiling Projects

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

5.4

Section 12.9 Online Program Change

GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

5 -9

GX Works2

5 EDITING PROGRAMS

MEMO

5 - 10

SETTING PARAMETERS

This chapter explains the setting items, operations on the setting screens, and common notes on parameter
settings.
For necessary information and details of settings, refer to the manuals of each module to be used.

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

OVERVIEW

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Setting PLC Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Setting Network Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Setting Remote Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Checking Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4

6 -1

GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

6.1

Setting PLC Parameter

Q CPU L CPU Remote

This section explains how to set PLC parameter.

Screen display
Select Project view "Parameter" "PLC Parameter".

Display contents
Item

Description
The setting items are categorized under tabs according to their purpose.
The parameter setting status is displayed by different font colors of the tab names.
Font color

Tab

Setting status

Red

Status that data is not set under the tab

(Data must be set under the tab for operation.)

Blue

Status that data is set under the tab

(A red tab name changes to blue after data is set.)

Magenta

Default values
(The user has not made settings under the tab.)

Dark blue

Values other than default values

(A magenta tab name changes to dark blue after data is set.)

Details of the setting items

6 -2

Section 6.1.1

Head

FX

6.1 Setting PLC Parameter

Screen button
Section 20.7)

(Not supported by FXCPU)

Checks the X/Y setting made on the <<I/O Assignment>> tab of PLC Parameter or in Network
Parameter.

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Section 20.9)

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Resets all setting items on the screen being open to their defaults.

Checks whether the user-set parameters on the screen being open are correct.

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

Precautions when changing PLC parameters

For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, all programs need to be compiled when the following PLC parameters are changed.
"Common Pointer No." and "Timer Limit Setting" on the <<PLC System>> tab
"File Register" and "File for Local Device" on the <<PLC File>> tab
Settings on the <<Device>> tab
Compiling all programs changes the device assignment to labels. Therefore, device values set before the
program change remain on the device-assigned labels.
For a precautionary measure, reset the programmable controller CPU, clear all device memories including
latches, clear all file registers, then switch the programmable controller to RUN. (
Section 17.3)
For the precautions on compiling all programs, refer to the following manuals.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)/(Structured Project)
Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator
When GX Works2 is started up from MELSOFT Navigator, parameters that can be set by MELSOFT Navigator
are displayed with green background.
A parameter set by the parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator becomes not editable.
To edit it, select [Tool] [Options] "iQ Works Interaction" and check "Enable an editing of parameters set in
MELSOFT Navigator".

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Executes print preview. (

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Executes printing. (

OVERVIEW

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6 -3

GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

6.1.1

PLC parameter item list

The following table shows the applicable PLC parameter items for each programmable controller type.
For details of each item, refer to the following manuals.
(

User's manuals and programming manuals of each CPU)

: Applicable : Not applicable
Q series
Setting tab name

Basic model
QCPU

High Performance
model QCPU /
Universal model
QCPU

Communication Head Setting

L series
Remote
I/O
module

LCPU

FX series

Communication
head module

PLC Name
PLC System

*1

SFC

Device

PLC File

PLC RAS
*2

Boot File

Program

I/O Assignment
Multiple CPU Setting

*3

Built-in Ethernet Port Setting

Built-in I/O Function Setting

*3

*4

Memory Capacity

Special Function Block

Positioning

Operation Setting

Serial Communication

6 -4

FXCPU

*5

*6

*1 :

For FXCPU, PLC System is separated into PLC System (1) and PLC System (2).

*2 :

Not supported by Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U.

*3 :

Not supported by Q00J/Q00UJ.

*4 :

Built-in Ethernet port QCPU only

*5 :

Q00/Q01 only

*6 :

Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02U/QnUD(H)CPU only

6.1.1 PLC parameter item list

6.1 Setting PLC Parameter

Label

Comment

Set a comment for the label of the programmable controller CPU.

Description

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

PLC System
Item

Remarks

Timer Limit Setting

Set the time limit of the low-speed/high-speed timer.

RUN-PAUSE Contacts

Set the contacts for controlling RUN/PAUSE of the programmable

controller CPU.
PAUSE contact only setting is not available. (RUN contact only or RUN
contact + PAUSE contact setting is available.)

Latch Data Backup

Set the contact device for executing a latch data backup operation.
Operation Valid Contact

Universal model
QCPU/LCPU only

Remote Reset

Set whether to allow a remote reset operation from GX Works2.

Output Mode at STOP

to RUN

Set the status of output (Y) when the programmable controller is

switched from STOP to RUN.

Floating Point
Arithmetic Processing

Set whether to perform floating-point processing in double precision.

Intelligent Function
Module Setting

Set the interrupt pointer assignment of the module.

Set the start I/O number and start SI number of the module.

Module Synchronization

Set whether to synchronize the start-up of the programmable controller

CPU with that of the intelligent function module.

Built-in CC-Link Setting

Set whether to set the built-in CC-Link.

Common Pointer No.

Set the start number of the common pointers used in the program.

Not applicable to
Basic model QCPU

Points Occupied by
Empty Slot

Set the number of points occupied by empty slots for the main base
unit/extension base unit.

Set the start number of the interrupt counters.

Set the execution interval for the interrupt pointers.

System Interrupt
Settings

High Performance
model QCPU only

Set the fixed scan interval for high-speed interrupt pointers, high-speed
I/O refresh, and high-speed buffer transfer.

A-PLC Compatibility
Setting

Set whether to use the MELSEC-A series special relays/special

registers (SM1000/SD1000 to SM1299/SD1299).

Service Processing
Setting

Set the processing time and the number of times of service processing.

PLC Module Change

Setting

Set this to replace the CPU module using a memory card.

High Performance
model QCPU only

Not applicable to
Basic model QCPU
Universal model
QCPU/LCPU only

PLC File
Item

Description

Remarks

File Register

Set whether to transfer data to the standard ROM when executing a

latch data backup operation.

Comment File Used in a

Set the device comment file to be used in the program.
Command
Initial Device Value

Set the device initial value file to be used in the programmable

controller CPU.

File for Local Device

Set the local device file to be used in the program.

File used for

SP.DEVST/S.DEVLD
Instruction

Set the device data ROM write/read instruction file to be used in the
program.

Universal model
QCPU/LCPU only
Not applicable to
Basic model QCPU

Not applicable to
Basic model QCPU
Universal model
QCPU/LCPU only

6.1.1 PLC parameter item list

Set the file register file to be used in the program.

L26-BT/L26-PBT only

Interrupt Program/Fixed
Set whether to perform high-speed execution of an interrupt program.
Scan Program Setting

3)

OVERVIEW

Remarks

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

2)

Description
Set a label (name and application) of the programmable controller
CPU.

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Item

EDITING
PROGRAMS

PLC Name

SETTING
PARAMETERS

1)

6 -5

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

PLC parameter setting items for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

4)

PLC RAS
Item

Description
Set the WDT of the programmable controller CPU.

WDT (Watchdog Timer)

Setting

5)

Set the WDT for an initial execution type program.

Set the WDT for a low-speed execution type program.
Set whether to detect specified errors.

Set the programmable controller CPU operation mode when an error is

detected.

Constant Scanning

Set the constant scan time.

Breakdown History

Set the storage destination for error histories of the programmable

controller CPU.

High Performance
model QCPU only

Low Speed Program

Execution Time

Set the execution time of a low-speed program in every scan.

High Performance
model QCPU only

Module Error History

Collection (Intelligent
Function Module)

Set whether to collect the error history of the intelligent function

module.

Universal model
QCPU/LCPU only

Boot File

Boot File Setting

Description

Remarks

Set whether to clear the program memory when booting up.

Not applicable to
Basic model QCPU

Set whether to write data in the memory card automatically to the

standard ROM when booting up.

Not applicable to
Basic model QCPU

Set the type, data name, transfer source drive, and transfer destination
drive of the boot file.

Not applicable to
Basic model QCPU

Set whether to boot up with the standard ROM.

Basic model QCPU

only

Program
Item

Description

Remarks

Program

Set the file name and execution type (executing condition) for
programs when several programs are written to the programmable
controller CPU.
Set the fixed scan interval (the execution interval of a fixed scan
execution type program).

Not applicable to
Basic model QCPU

File Usability Setting

button

Display the File Usability Setting screen.

Not applicable to
Basic model QCPU

I/O Refresh Setting

button

Display the I/O Refresh Setting screen.

High Performance
model QCPU only

SFC
Item

6 -6

High Performance
model QCPU only

Operating Mode When

There is an Error

Boot Option

7)

Error Check

Item

6)

Remarks

Description

Remarks

SFC Program Start

Mode

Set the start-up mode of an SFC program.

Start Conditions

Set the start-up condition of an SFC program.

Output Mode When the

Block is Stopped

Set the SFC program output mode at block stop.

6.1.1 PLC parameter item list

6.1 Setting PLC Parameter

Device
Remarks

Latch (1) Start/End

Set the latch range (start device number/end device number) clearable
with the RESET/L.CLR switch or a remote latch clear operation.

Latch (2) Start/End

Set the latch range (start device number/end device number) not
clearable with the RESET/L.CLR switch or a remote latch clear
operation.

Local Device Start/End

Set the range (start device number/end device number) of devices

used as a local device.

File Register Extended

Setting

Set the extended data register and extended link register.

Universal model
QCPU/LCPU only

Index Setting for ZR

Device

Set the start number of Z to be 32-bit indexed, or use the index register
ZZ for 32-bit index setting.

Universal model
QCPU/LCPU only

Description

Remarks

Item

Set the type, model, number of occupied I/O points, and start I/O
number of each module mounted on the base unit.
I/O Assignment

Set the switch settings of the programmable controller CPU.

Universal model
QCPU/LCPU only

Set the switch settings of the intelligent function module.

Base Setting

Set the model and the number of slots of the base unit, the model of
the power supply module, and the model of the extension cable.

Not applicable to
LCPU

Item

Description

Remarks

No. of PLC

Set the number of programmable controller CPUs used in the multiple

CPU system.

Operation Mode

Set the operation mode of the multiple CPU system when a stop error
occurs in any of the programmable controller CPU No.2 to No.4.
The multiple CPU system stops when a stop error occurs in the CPU
No.1 module.

Host Station

Set the CPU number for the host CPU.

Multiple CPU
Synchronous Startup
Setting

Select the CPU modules to be started up synchronously.

Online Module Change

Set whether to allow Online module change in the multiple CPU

system.

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

10) Multiple CPU Setting

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

I/O Assignment

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Device Points

Universal model
QCPU (excluding
Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/
Q02U) only
Not applicable to
Q00U/Q01U/Q02U

Communication Area
Setting (Refresh
Setting)

Set the CPU shared memory to enable data sharing among multiple
CPUs.
(Usable devices: B, M, Y, D, W, R, and ZR)

Multiple CPU High

Speed Transmission
Area Setting

Set the user setting area, auto refresh, assignment confirmation, and
system area.

Universal model
QCPU (excluding
Q00U/Q01U/Q02U)
only

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

I/O Sharing When Using Set whether to retrieve the I/O status of the I/O module or intelligent
Multiple CPUs
function module controlled by other programmable controller CPUs.

EDITING
PROGRAMS

9)

Description
Set the number of points used for each device of the programmable
controller CPU.

OVERVIEW

Item

SETTING
PARAMETERS

8)

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.1.1 PLC parameter item list

6 -7

GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

11) Built-in Ethernet Port Setting

Item

Description

IP Address Setting

Set the IP address and the input format of the IP address.

Communication Data
Code

Select the Binary code or ASCII code for communication.

Open Setting button

Set the protocol, open system, and host station port number.

FTP Setting button

Select whether to use the FTP function.

Time Setting button

Set whether to use the SNTP function, and set the timing of setting the
time.

Simple PLC
Communication Setting

Set the communication pattern and the communication settings.

Remarks

Built-in Ethernet port

QCPU/LCPU only

LCPU only

12) Built-in I/O Function Setting

Item

Description

Positioning

Set the parameters of the positioning axis 1 setting and positioning

axis 2 setting.

High-speed Counter

Set the operation mode of high-speed counter CH1 setting and highspeed counter CH2 setting.

Input Signal

Set the input signal function, input response time, and interrupt
processing condition.

Output Signal

Select the output signal function and error time output mode.

Remarks

LCPU only

13) Serial Communication

Item

Description

Transmission Speed

Set the transmission speed.

Sum Check

Set the sum check.

Transmission Wait Time Set the transmission wait time.

Online Change

6 -8

Set whether to allow Online program change.

6.1.1 PLC parameter item list

Remarks

6.1 Setting PLC Parameter

PLC parameter setting items for communication head module

1)

Communication Head Setting

Item

Description

1
OVERVIEW

Remarks

Set the operation mode of the network.

CC-Link IE Field
Network Setting

Set the network number of the module.

Set the station number of the module.

PLC Name

Label

Set a label (name and application) of the programmable controller

CPU.

Comment

Set a comment for the label of the programmable controller CPU.

Item

Description

Remarks

Set whether to allow a remote reset operation from GX Works2.

Description

Remarks

Set whether to collect the error history of the intelligent function

module.

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Item

Operation Setting
Item

Description

Remarks

Assignment Method

Select the assignment method of devices to be transferred.

Forwarding Parameter
between Devices

Set transmission source devices and transmission destination

devices.

Item

I/O Assignment

Description

EDITING
PROGRAMS

I/O Assignment
Remarks

Set the type, model, number of occupied I/O points, and start I/O
number of each module mounted on the base unit.
Set the switch settings of the programmable controller CPU.

Set the switch settings of the intelligent function module.

SETTING
PARAMETERS

6)

PLC RAS
Module Error History
Collection (Intelligent
Function Module)

5)

PLC System
Remote Reset

4)

Remarks

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

3)

Description

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Item

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

2)

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Set whether to hold (store) the error history and system error history
in a flash ROM at power off or reset.

6.1.1 PLC parameter item list

6 -9

GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

PLC parameter setting items for remote I/O module

1)

PLC system
Item

2)

Description

Points Occupied by
Empty Slot

Set the number of points occupied by empty slots for the main base
unit/extension base unit.

Description

Remarks

PLC RAS
Item

3)

Error Check

Set whether to detect specified errors.

Operating Mode When

There is an Error

Set the programmable controller CPU operation mode when an error

is detected.

Description

Remarks

Operation Setting
Item

4)

Remarks

Set whether to synchronize the start-up of the programmable

Module Synchronization
controller CPU with that of the intelligent function module.

Assignment Method

Select the assignment method of devices to be transferred.

Forwarding Parameter
between Devices

Set transmission source devices and transmission destination

devices.

I/O Assignment
Item

I/O Assignment

Description
Set the type, model, number of occupied I/O points, and start I/O
number of each module mounted on the base unit.
Set the switch settings of the programmable controller CPU.

Remarks

Set the switch settings of the intelligent function module.

Base Setting

6 - 10

Set the model and the number of slots of the base unit, the model of
the power supply module, and the model of the extension cable.

6.1.1 PLC parameter item list

6.1 Setting PLC Parameter

Utilizing existing data to set parameters of multiple CPU

Parameters for multiple CPU can be set utilizing existing data by clicking the
Assignment>>/<<Multiple CPU Setting>> tab.
Specify the project to be utilized, read the message, and then execute the function.

button on the <<I/O

OVERVIEW

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

by clicking the
function.

button on the <<I/O Assignment>> tab. Read the message and execute the

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Reading mounting status of programmable controller CPU

The mounting status of the programmable controller CPU can be read and overwritten to the current parameters

"Index Setting for ZR Device" on the <<Device>> tab.

When "Use ZZ" is set for the 32-bit index setting, the ZZ device cannot be used or monitored independently in the
program.
X0
[DMOV K0

ZR10ZZ0 ]

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Usable

ZZ0

]
Not usable

To confirm the current value of the ZZ device, specify Z and set the display format to 32-bit integer, on the Device/
Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screen.
Program settings
Executing conditions set in the program setting of the PLC parameter are reflected to "Program Setting" in the
Project view. Program settings can also be set in the Project view.
Program Setting in the Project view
Section 4.2.1
<Setting screen for PLC parameter>

<Project view>

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

[DMOV K0

EDITING
PROGRAMS

X1

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

Execution types set in the Program

can be confirmed.

6.1.1 PLC parameter item list

6 - 11

GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

PLC parameter setting items for FXCPU

For FXCPU, PLC parameter setting items are different depending on the programmable controller type.
1)

PLC Name
Item

Title

2)

Description

Set a program title to be stored in the programmable controller CPU.

PLC System (1)

Item

3)

Description

Remarks

Battery Less Mode

Set this to operate the programmable controller CPU without the

memory backup battery.

FX2N, FX3U, FX2NC,

and FX3UC only

Battery Mode

Set this to operate the programmable controller CPU with the memory
backup battery.

FX3G only

MODEM Initialized

Select the modem initialization command for the remote access to the
programmable controller CPU.

FX1S, FX1N, FX2N,

FX3G, FX3U, FX1NC,
FX2NC, and FX3UC
only

RUN Terminal Input

Select the input number to use the input (X) of the programmable
controller CPU as the external RUN/STOP terminal.

FX1S, FX1N, FX2N,

FX3G, FX3U, FX1NC,
FX2NC, and FX3UC
only

PLC System (2)

Item

Description

Channel selection

Select a channel to be the connection target.

Applicable to FX3G, FX3U, and FX3UC only

Operate
Communication Setting

Set whether to enable the communication setting.

Protocol*1

Select the communication protocol.

Data Length

*1

*1

Select the parity.

Stop Bit*1

Select the stop bit.

Transmission Speed*1

Select the transmission speed.

*1

Set the header.

Terminator*1
Control Line

Set this to enable the terminator.

*1

H/W Type*1
Control Mode
*1

Sum Check

Transmission Control
Procedure*1
Station Number
Setting*1
Time Out Judge Time*1

*1 :

Set this to enable the control line.

Select the cable type used in the communication.

*1

Remarks

Select the data length.

Parity

Header

6 - 12

Remarks
FX1, FX0N, FXU, FX2C,
FX1S, FX1N, FX2N,
FX3G, FX3U, FX1NC,
FX2NC, and FX3UC
only

Display the control mode.

Set this to add the sum check.
Select the transmission control procedure.
Set the station number.
Set the timeout period.

Not applicable when "Operate communication setting" is OFF.

6.1.1 PLC parameter item list

FX1S, FX1N, FX2N,

FX3G, FX3U, FX1NC,
FX2NC, and FX3UC
only

6.1 Setting PLC Parameter

Device

Item

Description

Memory Capacity*1

Select the memory capacity of the programmable controller CPU.

Not applicable to FX0, FX0S, FX0N, and FX1S.

Symbolic Information

Display the symbolic information capacity of a built-in memory based

on the setting value of the memory capacity.
Display the symbolic information capacity of a memory cassette by FX3U and FX3UC only

Capacity*2

clicking the

button.

Comments Capacity

Set the comment capacity.

Not applicable to FX0 and FX0S.

File Register Capacity

Set the file register capacity.

Not applicable to FX0, FX0S, and FX1.

Program Capacity

Set the capacity for sequence programs.

Special Function
Memory Capacity

Set whether to use the Special Function Block Settings, Positioning

Instruction Settings, and Built-in CC-Link/LT.
Applicable to FX3G, FX3U, and FX3UC only.

FX0, FX0S, FX1, FX0N,

FXU, FX2C, FX1S,
FX1N, FX2N, FX3G,
FX3U, FX1NC, FX2NC,
and FX3UC only

*1 :

When the symbolic information is saved in a built-in memory or a memory cassette, the symbolic
information is deleted by changing the memory capacity and writing the parameters. In this case, write
the symbolic information again.

*2 :

This item is not printed with the batch print function or the print window function.

Special Function Memory Capacity

Item

Special Function Block

Description
Set the initial value of special extension modules/blocks.
Set the Built-in CC-Link/LT Setting.
Special Function Block Settings

Positioning

Remarks

FX3U and FX3UC only

Set the initial value of BFM.

Set the bias speed, max. speed, creep speed, zero return speed,
acceleration time, deceleration time, and interruption input of DVIT
instruction for each axis.
Set the details of the positioning table for each axis.

FX3G, FX3U, and

FX3UC only

OVERVIEW

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

3)

Remarks
FX0, FX0S, FX1, FX0N,
FXU, FX2C, FX1S,
FX1N, FX2N, FX3G,
FX3U, FX1NC, FX2NC,
and FX3UC only

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Memory Capacity

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Set the latch range.

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

5)

Remarks
FX1, FXU, FX2C,
FX2N, FX3U, FX2NC,
and FX3UC only

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Device

Description

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Item

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4)

6.1.1 PLC parameter item list

6 - 13

GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

6.1.2

Checking duplication of X/Y assignment among parameters

Check the duplication of X/Y assignment among parameters.

Screen display
Select Project view "Parameter" "PLC Parameter"

Display contents
Item
XY No.

Description
Display the I/O number.
Display the content set in the Network parameter.
Display in Network column
PLC network/CC IE (Slot n)

Network

Remote I/O Net (Slot n)

CC-Link (Slot n)

MELSECNET/H (Remote Master)

CC-Link

Blank

Type

Description
MELSECNET. CC-Link IE

Not set.
n: Slot number of the module (excluding Ethernet)

Display whether the I/O assignment setting is set in the PLC parameter.
I/O
Assignment

Display in I/O Assignment column

I/O Assignment
Blank

Slot
Module Type
Points

Description
I/O assignment is set.
I/O assignment is not set.

Display the slot, module type, number of occupied I/O points, and model name when
the I/O assignment setting is set in the PLC parameter.
Display the I/O assignment status as follows when the I/O assignment setting in the
PLC parameter is not set and X/Y devices are assigned in the Network parameter.
Item

Model Name

Description

"Slot" to "Points"

Assignment of X devices

"Model Name"

Assignment of Y devices

Display the module in which the first duplication is detected by parameter check.
Display in Duplication column
Duplication

MNET/CC IE (Slot 1)
to
MNET/CC IE (Slot 16)
CC-Link

6 - 14

Description
Network parameter of MELSECNET or
CC-Link IE (slot 1 to slot 16)
CC-Link remote I/O

6.1.2 Checking duplication of X/Y assignment among parameters

6.1 Setting PLC Parameter

When a setting screen other than PLC parameter setting screen is being opened
When the MELSECNET/CC IE/Ethernet Module Configuration screen or the Setting for the CC-Link List screen
is displayed, set data of the previous setting are checked for duplication because the setting is not completed.
Priority in the parameter check
The following table shows the priority in when GX Works2 checks the parameter settings.

Display

I/O assignment

MELSECNET or CC-Link IE Controller Network (slot 16) network refresh parameter

MELSECNET or CC-Link IE Controller Network (slot 15) network refresh parameter

17

MELSECNET or CC-Link IE Controller Network (slot 1) network refresh parameter

18

CC-Link remote I/O

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Priority

OVERVIEW

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.1.2 Checking duplication of X/Y assignment among parameters

6 - 15

GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

6.2

Setting Network Parameter

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

This section explains how to set Network parameter.

For LCPU, only the parameter settings of CC-Link IE Field Network and CC-Link are supported.

Ethernet/CC-Link IE/MELSECNET parameter setting

Screen display
Select Project view "Parameter" "Network Parameter" "Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET" /
"CC IE Field" .
The screen below is a screen for MELSECNET/CC-Link IE/Ethernet module configuration.

Screen button

(Not supported by LCPU)

Displays the Interlink Transmission Parameters screen.

(Not supported by FXCPU)

Checks the I/O assignment setting set in the PLC parameter and the status of X/Y devices
assigned in the Network parameter. (

Section 6.1.2)

Displays the Routing Information screen.

Displays the Assignment Image screen of the refresh parameters.

6 - 16

FX

6.2 Setting Network Parameter

OVERVIEW

Displays the Help - Network Setting screen for network range assignment.

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Deletes the set parameters.

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Checks whether the set parameters are correct.

Executes printing. (

Section 20.7)

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Section 20.9)

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

Executes print preview. (

6 - 17

GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

CC-Link parameter setting

Screen display
Select Project view "Parameter" "Network Parameter" "CC-Link".
The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.

Screen button

Executes printing. (

Section 20.7)

Executes print preview. (

Section 20.9)

Displays the details of the I/O assignment settings. (

Section 6.1)

Deletes the set parameters.

Checks whether the set parameters are correct.

Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator

Parameter items which can be set from MELSOFT Navigator are displayed in green when GX Works2 is
started from MELSOFT Navigator.
Parameters which are set by using the parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator cannot be edited.
To edit, check "Enable an editing of parameters set in MELSOFT Navigator" under [Tool] [Options] "iQ
Works Interaction".

6 - 18

6.2 Setting Network Parameter

Network parameter item list

The following table shows the applicable network parameter types for each programmable controller
type.
For details of each item, refer to the following manuals.
(

User's manuals and reference manuals of each module)

OVERVIEW

6.2.1

2
Basic model
QCPU

High Performance
model QCPU

CC-Link IE Controller
Network*1
CC-Link IE Field Network

L series

Universal model
QCPU

Remote I/O
module

LCPU

Communication
head module

MELSECNET/10

MELSECNET/H

MELSECNET/H
Remote I/O
Ethernet

CC-Link

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

CC-Link IE Controller Network modules with the function version D and a serial number whose first 5 digits
are '10041' or higher are supported.

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

*1 :

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Network type

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

: Applicable : Not applicable

Q series

6.2.1 Network parameter item list

6 - 19

GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

CC-Link IE setting
Item

Description

Network Type

Specify the network type (CC-Link IE) whose parameters are to be set.

Start I/O No.

Set the start I/O number.

Network No.

Set the network number.

Total Stations

Set the total number of (slave) stations.

Group No.

Set the group number.

Station No.

Set the station number of a module.

Mode

Set the mode.

Specify I/O
Master Station*1

Network Range
Assignment/
Network
Configuration
Settings
(Common
parameters)

Specify
Reserved

Specify the reserved station.

Station*1
Equal
Assignment

Assign the number of link device points of all stations equally.

Identical Point
Assignment

Assign the same number of link device points based on the total number of set
stations.

Shared Group
Setting*2
Supplementary
Setting

Set the shared group of the group cyclic function.

Set the link scan mode setting, loopback function setting, and block data
assurance per station.

Network Operation Settings*3

Set the parameter name, data link faulty station setting, output setting during CPU
STOP, and other settings.

Refresh Parameters

Set refresh parameters.

Interrupt Settings

Set the device code, detection method, interrupting condition, interrupt (SI)
number, and other settings.

Specification method for station

*1

number

6 - 20

Set the I/O master station.

Set whether to set a station number by program or by parameter.

The station number can be specified by program only when the normal station is
selected in a project for Universal model QCPU.

*1 :

CC-Link IE Controller Network only

*2 :

Applicable only when the control station of the CC-Link IE Controller Network is selected in a project for
Universal model QCPU.

*3 :

CC-Link IE Field Network only

6.2.1 Network parameter item list

6.2 Setting Network Parameter

MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H setting

Description
Specify the network type (MELSECNET/10 mode or MELSECNET/H mode) whose
parameters are to be set.

Network Type
Start I/O No.

Set the start I/O number.

Network No.

Set the network number.

Total Stations

Set the total number of (slave) stations.

Group No.

Set the group number.

Set the mode.

Network Range
Assignment
(Common
parameters)

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Mode
Specify I/O
Master Station

Set the I/O master station.

Specify
Reserved
Station

Specify the reserved station.

Equal
Assignment

Assign the number of link device points of all stations equally.

Identical Point
Assignment

Assign the same number of link device points based on the total number of set
stations.

Supplementary
Setting

Set the transient setting, low-speed cyclic setting, and other settings.

Station Inherent
Set station inherent parameters.
Parameters
Set refresh parameters.

Interrupt Settings

Set the device code, detection method, interrupting condition, interrupt (SI)
number, and other settings.

Baud Rate Setting*1

Set the baud rate on modules that support the twist bus.

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Refresh Parameters

MELSECNET/H (control station) and MELSECNET/H extended mode (control station) only

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

*1 :

OVERVIEW

Item

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

6.2.1 Network parameter item list

6 - 21

GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

MELSECNET/H Remote I/O setting

Item

Description

Network Type

Set "MELSECNET/H (remote master)".

Start I/O No.

Set the start I/O number.

Network No.

Set the network number.

Total Stations

Set the total number of (slave) stations.

Mode

Set the mode.

Network Range
Assignment
(Common
parameters)

Specify
Reserved
Station

Specify the reserved station.

Equal
Assignment

Assign the number of link device points of all stations equally.

Supplementar Sets the constant scan time and the maximum number of return stations in one link
scan.
y Setting

Refresh Parameters

Set refresh parameters.

Interrupt Settings

Set the device code, detection method, interrupting condition, interrupt (SI)
number, and other settings.

Ethernet setting
Item

Description

Network Type

Specify "Ethernet".

Start I/O No.

Set the start I/O number.

Network No.

Set the network number.

Group No.

Set the group number.

Station No.

Set the station number.

Mode

Set the mode.

Operation Setting

Set the common items for the module.

Initial Setting

Set data communication timer values.

Set IP addresses for DNS servers.

Open Setting

Set parameters required for the open processing.

Router Relay Parameter

Set parameters for the router relay function of Ethernet.

Station No.IP Information

Set information to link network number and station number with IP address for
communication target station or relay station when communicating with another
station programmable controller CPU via Ethernet.

FTP Parameters*1

Set FTP parameters such as the login name, password, command input monitoring
timer, and PLC monitoring timer.

E-mail
Setting

*1

General Setting

Set the password, e-mail address, and inquiry interval for receiving mails.

Mail Server Name

Set the SMTP server, POP server, and IP addresses for both servers.

Send Mail Address

Setting

Set addresses of send mail.

News Setting

Set the notifying condition.

Interrupt Settings*1

*1 :

Set the device code, detection method, interrupting condition, interrupt (SI)
number, and other settings.

Not supported by remote I/O module

Connecting MELSOFT products via Ethernet

When connecting a MELSOFT product (such as GX Works2) via Ethernet, select "MELSOFT Connection" for
"Open System" on the Ethernet Open Setting screen. For details of the setting, refer to Ethernet Interface
Module User's Manual.
'MELSOFT Connection' is supported by Q series-compatible E71 function version B modules with a serial
number whose first 5 digits are '02122' or higher.

6 - 22

6.2.1 Network parameter item list

6.2 Setting Network Parameter

CC-Link setting

Start I/O No.

Set the start I/O number.

Operation Setting

Set the Parameter Name, Data Link Disorder Station, Case of CPU Stop Setting,
Number of Exclusive Station, Expanded Cyclic Setting, and Block Data Assurance
per Station.

Type

Set the station type such as a master/local/standby master station.

Station No.*1

Set the station number.

Master Station Data Link Type

The setting is fixed to "PLC Parameter Auto Start" for the master station.

Mode

Set the mode.

Total Module Connected

Set the transmission speed.

Set the total number of remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations,
and/or standby master stations connected to the master station.

Remote Output (RY)

refresh device
Remote Register (RWr) refresh
device

Set the devices to refresh the data of RX, RY, RWr, and RWw.

Remote Register (RWw) refresh

device

Ver.2 Remote Register (RWr)

refresh device

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Ver.2 Remote Input (RX) refresh

device
Ver.2 Remote Output (RY) refresh
device

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Remote Input [RX] refresh device

Set the devices to refresh the data of RX, RY, RWr, and RWw for the remote
network additional mode.

Ver.2 Remote Register (RWw)

refresh device

Special Relay (SB) refresh device

Special Register (SW) refresh
device

Set the devices to refresh the data of SB and SW.

Retry Count

Set the number of retries in case a communication error occurs.

Automatic Reconnection Station

Count

Set the number of remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations, and/or
standby master stations can be returned to the system in one link scan.

Standby Master Station No.

Specify the station number of the standby master station.

PLC Down Select

Specify the data link status when an error occurs in the programmable controller
CPU on the master station.

Scan Mode Setting

Specify whether to synchronize the link scan with the sequence scan.

Set the link scan interval delay time.

Station Information Setting

Set the station type, exclusive counts, and other settings.

Remote Device Station Initial Setting

Set the target station number and procedure registration (such as operating
condition and executing condition).

Interrupt Settings*2

Set the device code, detection method, interrupt condition, interrupt (SI) number,
and other settings.

LCPU and communication head module only

*2 :

Not supported by communication head module and remote I/O module

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Delay Information Setting

*1 :

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Transmission

Speed*1

OVERVIEW

Description
Set the number of CC-Link modules.

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Item
Number of Modules

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6.2.1 Network parameter item list

6 - 23

GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

6.3

Setting Remote Password

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to set a password to prevent illegal access from remote users to the QCPU (Q
mode)/LCPU via a Q series-compatible E71 module, C24 module, Built-in Ethernet port QCPU or LCPU.

Screen display
Select Project view "Parameter" "Remote Password".
The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description

Password

Set the password.

Model Name

Password Active
Module Setting

2.

Click the

Set the model of the routing CPU or module.

Start XY

Set the start I/O number.

Condition

Set the details when selecting QJ71E71, QnUDE(H)CPU or LCPU.

User connection No. valid setting
Set whether to enable the remote password for the user connection No. 1 to No.
16.
System connection valid setting
Set whether to enable the remote password for the system connections.

button.

The Password Confirmation screen is displayed.

3.

6 - 24

Enter the set password again.

6.3 Setting Remote Password

Click the

button.

The remote password setting ends.

To set the password in the programmable controller CPU, write the parameter to the programmable
controller CPU using the Write to PLC function.
(

Section 12.1)

OVERVIEW

4.

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Modules that support remote password setting

For the modules that support the remote password setting and the details of the remote password setting, refer to
the user's manual of the programmable controller CPU, Q series-compatible E71 module or C24 module to be
used.
Characters for password
Enter the password in 4 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and symbols corresponding to ASCII codes 20H to
Appendix 3).
7EH (

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

6 - 25

GX Works2

6 SETTING PARAMETERS

6.4

Checking Parameters
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to check errors in the PLC parameter and Network parameter which are set in the
project.
The result of the parameter check is displayed in the Output window.

Screen display
Select [Tool] [Check Parameter].
<QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU>

<FXCPU>

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description

Check Object/Check Target

2.

Click the

Check the items for the check parameter.

button.

The check parameter is performed, and the result is displayed in the Output window.

6 - 26

SETTING DEVICE MEMORY

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

OVERVIEW

This chapter explains the settings of the device memory.

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Device Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Setting Device Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Searching Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Writing/Reading Device Memory Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4

7 -1

GX Works2

7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY

7.1

Device Memory
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains the features of the device memory.

7.1.1

Features of device memory

Device memory is the function that reads/writes data from/to the device memory in a programmable
controller CPU.
Read
The function batch-reads device memory data from a programmable controller CPU to GX Works2.
The read data can be used to check the status of the device memory in a programmable controller
CPU as well as for offline debugging.
Write
The function batch-writes device memory data from GX Works2 to a programmable controller
CPU.
The current values of the device memory in a programmable controller CPU can be batch
changed.

7 -2

7.1.1 Features of device memory

7.1 Device Memory

QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
: Can be edited U: Display only : Not supported
U

Internal relay

Latch relay

Annunciator

Edge relay

V
S

Link relay

B
SB

Retentive timer

Contact

TS

Coil

TC

Current value

Contact

CS

Coil

CC

Current value

ST

Contact

STS

Coil

STC

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Counter

Data register

Link register

W
SW

Direct input

DX

Direct output

DY

Special relay

SM

Special register

SD

Link input

\X

Link output

\Y

Link register

\W

Link special register

\SW

Link relay

\B

Link special relay

\SB

*1

File register

File register

Index register

Index register

Intelligent function module

device

Intelligent function module device

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Link special register

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Timer
Internal user device

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Step relay

Current value

Link direct device

Display/edit

Output

Link special relay

Internal system device

Symbol
X

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Device type
Input

SETTING
PARAMETERS

Category

ZR*1,*2

\G

*1 :

Not supported by Q00J/Q00UJ.

*2 :

For Universal model QCPU/LCPU, the device cannot be used when '0k' is set for the "Device points"
of file register (ZR(R)) under "File Register Extended Setting" on the <<Device>> tab of PLC
parameter.

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

List of devices selectable on the Input Devices screen

OVERVIEW

7.1.2

7.1.2 List of devices selectable on the Input Devices screen

7 -3

GX Works2

7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY

FXCPU
: Can be edited U: Display only : Not supported
Display/edit

Category

Device type

FX0N

FX1

FX1S

FX1N
FX1NC

FXU
FX2C

FX2N
FX2NC

FX3G

FX3U
FX3UC

Input

Internal relay

State

Counter

T
*1

Data register

C
D

File register

Special relay

Special data register

Extended register

Extended file register

ER

*1 :

7 -4

FX0
FX0S

Output

Internal
user device Timer

Internal
system
device

Symbol

32-bit counter (C200 and later) is not supported.

7.1.2 List of devices selectable on the Input Devices screen

7.2 Setting Device Memory

Setting Device Memory

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to set a device and device value.

OVERVIEW

7.2

Screen display

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Select Project view "Device Memory" "(data name)".

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Device value
display area

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

Device number
display area

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

7 -5

GX Works2

7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY

Inserting rows
Select [Edit] [Insert Row] to insert a blank row at the cursor position.
[Edit] [Insert Row]

Cutting/copying/pasting character strings in units of rows

To paste a character string in units of rows, select the desired cell(s) and paste the character string. If a row is
selected, pasting is not possible.
Cutting/copying/pasting character strings in units of cells
To paste a character string in units of cells, if the selected cell(s) is in the row where a device is not entered,
pasting is not possible.
Copying device memory
Device memory data of the selected range can be copied and pasted to Excel. Data can also be copied and pasted
to device memory from Excel.
When a value other than 0 is pasted to device memory, it is replaced to 1.
Deleting devices
If a deletion is executed after selecting a cell, the device value clears to '0'.
If a deletion is executed after selecting a row, the selected row (device) is deleted.
<Deletion in units of cells>
[Edit] [Delete]

The device values are set to 0.

<Deletion in units of rows>

[Edit] [Delete]

The selected rows are deleted.

7 -6

7.2 Setting Device Memory

7.2.1

Setting device values in units of points

Create a new device memory in advance. (

<Example> Setting value:
'Device: D0, Device value: 12'

OVERVIEW

Set a device and device value in units of points.

Section 4.3.1)

1.

Select the cell to which a device value is set.

2.

Enter 'D0' for a device.

3.

Press the

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Operating procedure

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

key.

The entered device is set in the device number display

area.
In this example, 'D0' is set in the device number display
area and the current value is displayed in the device
value display area.

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Enter '12' for a device value.

5
EDITING
PROGRAMS

'12' is set as the device value of device 'D0'.

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

4.

7.2.1 Setting device values in units of points

7 -7

GX Works2

7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY

7.2.2

Setting device values by setting device range

Set device values by specifying a device range.

<Example> Setting values:
'Device: D, Range: 0 to 50, Display Mode: Decimal number'

Operating procedure

1.

Select the cell to which a device value is set.

2.

Select [Edit] [Input Device] (

).

The Input Device screen is displayed.

3.

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Device
Module Start*1

Displayed when U \G or J \ is selected in the "Device" field.

Enter the start XY address or network number.

Network No.*1
Range

Select the range of devices to be set.

All

Select this to target all of the selected devices.

Address

Select this to target the devices in the specified range.

Display Mode

Select the display format of device values.

BIN

Select this to display device values in binary numbers.

OCT

Select this to display device values in octal numbers.

DEC

Select this to display device values in decimal numbers.

HEX

Select this to display device values in hexadecimal numbers.

FLOAT

Select this to display device values in real numbers.

String

Select this to display device values in character strings.

String
(ASCII only)

Select this to display device values in ASCII strings.

Register

Device value

*1 :

7 -8

Description
Select the device name.
For devices that can be edited, refer to Section 7.1.2.

Select the display size of device values.

16-bit

Select this to display the display size of device values in words.

32-bit

Select this to display the display size of device values in double words.
Specify the device range in multiples of two.

64-bit

Select this to display the display size of device values in double-precision real numbers.
Specify the device range in multiples of four.
Enter a value to set device values simultaneously.

Not supported by FXCPU.

7.2.2 Setting device values by setting device range

7.2 Setting Device Memory

4.

Click the

button.

OVERVIEW

Devices in the range from D0 to D50 are registered to cells and the current values are displayed.

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Enter a device value to each cell.

The entered values are set.

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

5.

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

7.2.2 Setting device values by setting device range

7 -9

GX Works2

7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY

7.2.3

Setting character strings

Set a character string to a device.

Set "Display Mode" to 'String' in advance. (

Section 7.2.5)

Operating procedure

1.

Select a range of cells to which a character string is set.

2.

Select [Edit] [Paste Text].

The Paste Text screen is displayed.

3.

Enter a character string, and click the

button.

The entered character string is set to the selected cells or row.

Entering character strings

The number of characters can be entered to one cell is as follows:
"Register" is '16-bit': 2, "Register" is '32-bit': 4, "Register" is '64-bit': 8

7 - 10

7.2.3 Setting character strings

7.2 Setting Device Memory

7.2.4

Setting same value simultaneously

OVERVIEW

Set the same value to continuous devices.

Operating procedure
Select devices to which a value is to be set.

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

1.

2.

Select [Edit] [Fill] (

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

3
).

The FILL screen is displayed.

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Item
BIN

Select this to set device values in binary numbers.

OCT

Select this to set device values in octal numbers.

DEC

Select this to set device values in decimal numbers.

HEX
Device value

Click the

Description
Select the data format of device values.
EDITING
PROGRAMS

Data format

4.

Set the items on the screen.

Select this to set device values in hexadecimal numbers.

Enter a value set to devices simultaneously.

button.

SETTING
PARAMETERS

3.

The specified device value is set to devices simultaneously.

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Setting the same value simultaneously

Device values can also be set simultaneously by selecting a range, right-clicking it on the device memory editor,
and selecting [FILL] from the shortcut menu.

7.2.4 Setting same value simultaneously

7 - 11

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

GX Works2

7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY

7.2.5

Changing display format

Switching display format

Switch the device value display format for each cell on the device memory editor.

Operating procedure

Select [View] [Display Mode] [Binary/Octal/Decimal/Hexadecimal/Float/String/

String(ASCII)].
Device values are displayed in the selected display format.

Switching display size in 16-bit/32-bit/64-bit

Switch the device value display size in 16-bit/32-bit/64-bit for each cell on the device memory editor.

Operating procedure

Select [View] [Register] [16-bit/32-bit/64-bit].

Device values are displayed in the selected display size (16 bits, 32 bits or 64 bits).

7 - 12

7.2.5 Changing display format

7.2 Setting Device Memory

Changing the number of rows/columns on device memory

editor

1
OVERVIEW

7.2.6

Change the number of rows/columns on the device memory editor.

Screen display

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Select [View] [Setup].

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Operating procedure
Set the items on the screen.
Item

Set the number of columns on the editor.

Auto

Select this to set the number of columns to 16.

Specify the number of

columns (1 to 255)

Select this to set the desired number of columns on the editor.

Setting range: 1 to 255

Number of Rows

2.

Set the number of rows on the editor.

4096 Rows

Select this to set the number of rows to 4096.

Specify the number of

rows (16 to 655360)

Select this to set the desired number of rows on the editor.

Setting range: 16 to 655360

Click the

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Number of Columns

Additional Safety Inquiry

Description

Check this to display the confirmation message when device deletion is executed.

EDITING
PROGRAMS

1.

button.

7
SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

Number of columns
When the "Number of Columns" is set to "Auto", the device values are displayed in 10 columns or 16 columns
according to the specified devices.
For FXCPU, the device values of X and Y are displayed in 8 columns.
Precautions on changing rows and columns
When a value smaller than the current value is set for "Number of Columns" or "Number of Rows", a confirmation
message is displayed and the data on the device memory editor is discarded.
When a value larger than the current value is set for "Number of Columns", the sequence of devices registered to
the device memory editor do not change by the setting of "Number of Columns".

SETTING
PARAMETERS

The set number of rows/columns are displayed.

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

7.2.6 Changing the number of rows/columns on device memory editor

7 - 13

GX Works2

7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY

7.3

Searching Devices
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to search for a device set in the device memory.

Screen display
Select [Find/Replace] [Find Device Cell].

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Find what
Direction

2.

Click the

Description
Enter the device to be searched for.

Up

Select this to perform searching in the upward direction from the cursor position.

Down

Select this to perform searching in the downward direction from the cursor position.

button.

The cursor moves to the found device.

7 - 14

7.4 Writing/Reading Device Memory Data

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to write/read device memory data being edited to/from a programmable controller
CPU or Excel file.

7.4.1

Writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPUs

Write/read device memory data to/from a programmable controller CPU.

To write/read device memory data in units of files, refer to the online Write to PLC/Read from PLC
Section 12.1)

3
SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

function. (

OVERVIEW

Writing/Reading Device Memory Data

SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

7.4

Screen display
Select [Tool] [Write Device Memory to PLC]/[Read Device Memory from PLC].
<Writing device memory>
<Reading device memory>

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Operating procedure
Item
Range

Description
Select the write/read range.
Select this to write/read data in the specified range to/from a programmable controller
CPU.

All Devices

Select this to write/read all data in the device memory being edited to/from a programmable
controller CPU.

6
SETTING
PARAMETERS

Selected Devices

EDITING
PROGRAMS

Set the items on the screen.

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

1.

7.4.1 Writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPUs

7 - 15

GX Works2

7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY

7.4.2

Writing/reading data to/from Excel files

Write/read device memory data to/from an Excel file.

Screen display
Select [Tool] [Write to Excel File]/[Read from Excel File].

Operating procedure

1.

Enter a file name or select the file to be opened.

The Save As screen or Open screen is displayed.

2.

Click the

or

button.

Data are saved to the specified destination, or the file is opened from the specified location.

Compatible Excel version

Microsoft Office Excel 97 or later version is compatible with the data write/read operations.
Reading data
When data are read from an Excel file, they are read with the saved setting of "Number of Columns".
The following are regarded as errors and processed as explained.
Unsupported devices Deleted
Invalid value Set to '0'.
Invalid display mode Displayed in decimal numbers.

7 - 16

7.4.2 Writing/reading data to/from Excel files

SETTING DEVICE INITIAL

VALUES

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

OVERVIEW

This chapter explains how to set, edit, and delete device initial values.

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

4
PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

Device Initial Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Setting Device Initial Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

8.1
8.2

8 -1

GX Works2

8 SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES

8.1

Device Initial Values

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

This section explains the device initial values.

8.1.1

Feature of device initial values

The device initial values are device values used for the sequence program operation when the
programmable controller turns RUN.
When the device initial values are set, the initial setting program is unnecessary.
When device initial values are not set
The initial setting program is necessary.
<Example>

When device initial values are set

<Example>

The initial setting program is unnecessary.

8 -2

8.1.1 Feature of device initial values

FX

8.1 Device Initial Values

8.1.2

List of applicable devices for device initial values

Internal system device

Retentive timer

ST

Counter

Data register

Link register

Link special register

SW

Special register

File register

File register

Intelligent function
module device

Intelligent function module device

Link direct device

Device

Timer

Link register
Link special register

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Internal user device

Device name

SD
*1,*2,

U
J
J

ZR*2

\G

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

Category

OVERVIEW

The following table shows the list of devices which can be used as device initial values.

\W
\SW

*1 :

When the R device is specified to utilize the device memory data, the ZR device value is utilized for
the R device.

*2 :

Not applicable to Q00UJ.

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

EDITING
PROGRAMS

SETTING
PARAMETERS

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

8.1.2 List of applicable devices for device initial values

8 -3

GX Works2

8 SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES

8.1.3

Procedure for setting device initial values

The following flow chart shows the procedure for setting the device initial values.
Start

Select [Project] [Object] [New] to add

the device initial value data.

Set the device range to be

used for device initial values.

Select [Project] [Object] [New] to

create the device memory data.

Set the device values within the

range of the device initial value.

Click the
button
to set the device values
of the device memory as
device initial values.

Operations on the Device Initial Value screen

Operations on the Device Memory screen

Perform settings on the <<PLC File>>
tab of PLC parameter to use the
device initial values.

Select [Online] [Write to PLC]

to write the device initial values and the
parameter to the programmable controller CPU.

Completed

8 -4

8.1.3 Procedure for setting device initial values

8.2 Setting Device Initial Values

Setting Device Initial Values

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to set device values set in the device memory as device initial values.
Create a new device initial value data in advance. (

Section 4.3.1)

OVERVIEW

8.2

2
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION

Operating procedure
Select Project view "Device Initial Value" "(data name)".

SCREEN
CONFIGURATION AND
BASIC OPERATIONS

3
Range setting

PROJECT
MANAGEMENT

EDITING
PROGRAMS

5
Operating procedure
Set the following items on the screen.
Item
Range setting

Setting
Method

2.

Description
Set the range for device initial values.
Set the number of points of each device. Up to 8,000 points of devices can be set
within a range.

Start

Specify the start device of the range to be set.

End

Specify the end device of the range to be set.

Comment

Enter a comment in the set device range. (Up to 32 characters)

Start/End

Select this to set the range for device initial values by start or end device.

Points/Start

Select this to set the range for device initial values by device points or start device.

Select the data name to be utilized from

the

SETTING
PARAMETERS

Points

in "Device Memory Diversion", and click

button.

3.

Click the

8
SETTING DEVICE
INITIAL VALUES

The device value in the set range is set as a device initial value.

SETTING DEVICE
MEMORY

1.

button.

8 -5

GX Works2

8 SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES

Screen button

Executes printing. (

Section 20.7)

Executes print preview. (

Section 20.9)

Displays the Print Setting (Device Initial Value) screen. (

Section 20.8.2)

Using device initial values

If the device values with set ranges are used as the initial values when activating the programmable controller
CPU, specify the file name to be used for the initial values on the <<PLC File>> tab of PLC parameter.
Device range
The device range that can be set for device initial values is the range set on the <<Device>> tab of PLC parameter.

8 -6

SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

This chapter explains the operation methods for setting, editing, and deleting device comments.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Device Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Creating Device Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Deleting Device Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Utilizing Sample Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Writing/Reading Device Comments to CSV Files. . . . . . . . . 9-15

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5

9 -1

GX Works2

9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS

9.1

Device Comments
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains the general concept of device comments and the setting availability.

9.1.1

Global device comments/local device comments

Device comment is categorized into global device comment and local device comment.

Global device comments

A global device comment is a device comment created automatically when a new project is created.
Global device comments are set to use common device comment data among multiple programs.
Global device comments can be set even when there is only one program.

A global device comment name

is fixed to COMMENT.
Global device comments can
be changed to local device
comments.

<Image that is created with only global device comments>

Sequence program MAIN
COMMENT Global device comment

Sequence program SUB1

Sequence program SUB2

9 -2

9.1.1 Global device comments/local device comments

9.1 Device Comments

Local device comments

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

A local device comment is a device comment created by the user.

No local device comment exists when a new project is created.
Create a local device comment if necessary. (
Section 4.3.1)
Local device comments are used in association with each program.
Device comments are set under the same name as sequence programs.
For Structured projects, device comments are set under the same data name as the program file name.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11
Display example when local device comments are set.

12

MAIN Local device comment

Sequence program MAIN

SUB1 Local device comment

Sequence program SUB1

SUB2 Local device comment

Sequence program SUB2

WRITING/READING
DATA

<Image of a project created with only local device comments>

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

9.1.1 Global device comments/local device comments

9 -3

GX Works2

9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS

Data name of global device comments

A global device comment is displayed as "COMMENT" in the screen for Write to PLC/Read from PLC.
Setting local device comments with data names different from the sequence program name
Multiple local device comments can be created with data names different from the sequence program name. In this
case, however, the comments are not related to the sequence program.
To make the comments relate to the sequence program, the comments should have the same data names as the
program name.
This is useful for cases, such as when switching comments between Japanese and English in the same program.

MAIN Local device comment

Sequence program MAIN

MAIN-J Local device comment

MAIN-E Local device comment

Not related to the sequence program.

If data names are changed to 'MAIN',
comments are reflected.

Global device comments/local device comments

Global device comments/local device comments correspond respectively to common comments/comments by
program in GX Developer.
Device comments for Basic model QCPU
Global device comments are not supported by Basic model QCPU.
A local device comment for Basic model QCPU is fixed to "MAIN".
When an SFC program is created, the SFC program "MAIN-SFC" also refers to a local device comment "MAIN".
<Image of an SFC program for Basic model QCPU>
MAIN-SFC program
MAIN Local device comment
MAIN program

Local device comments for FXCPU

For FXCPU, local device comments cannot be written to a programmable controller CPU. If local device comments
needs to be written, create comments as global device comments, or change local device comments to global
device comments. When changing a local device comment to a global device comment, change its data name to
"COMMENT". (
Section 4.3.3)

9 -4

9.1.1 Global device comments/local device comments

9.1 Device Comments

Device comments can be displayed on the ladder editor or Zoom editor window. Select [View]
[Comment] to display device comments.
When both global and local device comments are set, specify the comment to be displayed by the
following method.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Specifying device comments to be displayed in program

10

Operation
Set the device comment to be referenced by selecting [Tool] [Options] "Program Editor"
"Ladder/SFC" "Comment".
<Example> When different device comments are set for the same device (X)
Global device comment (COMMENT)

Local device comment (MAIN)

SEARCH/REPLACE

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

Display differs as shown below depending

on the option setting.

12

When the reference of the device X in the

sequence program MAIN is set to the local
device comment
<Option>

WRITING/READING
DATA

When the reference of the device X in the

sequence program MAIN is set to the global
device comment
<Option>

<Sequence program MAIN>

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

<Sequence program MAIN>

14
The local device comment, 'Safety Device', is
displayed as a device comment for X1.

MONITORING

The global device comment, 'Initial Start

Instruction', is displayed as a device comment
for X1.

Device comment to be referenced is not set

If a comment does not exist in the device comment set for "Select Reference", the other device comment can be
displayed by setting the option. Select [Tool] [Options] "Ladder/SFC" "Comment", and check the
"Reference/reflect the other, when device comment is not set." item.

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

9.1.1 Global device comments/local device comments

9 -5

GX Works2

9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS

9.1.2

List of device comment applicable devices

The following table shows device types and comment setting availability.
: Applicable / : Not applicable
Category

Internal user device

Symbol

Input

Output

Internal relay

Latch relay

Annunciator

Edge relay

Step relay

Link relay

Link special relay

SB

State

Timer

Retentive timer

ST

Counter

D
W

Link special register

SW

Direct input

DX

Direct output

DY

SM

\X

Link input

Link output

\Y

\W

Link special register

Link special relay

SD

Link register
Link relay

\SW

J
J

File register

\B

\SB

*2

ZR

*2

(RAM) File register

Z, ZZ

Index register

Index register

Intelligent function
module device

Intelligent function module

device

Nesting

Nesting

Pointer

Interrupt pointer

Pointer

FXCPU

Link register

Special register

9 -6

specification*1

Data register

Internal system device

File register

QCPU (Q mode)/
LCPU

Device name

Special relay

Link direct device

Bit

9.1.2 List of device comment applicable devices

*3

*4

\G

9.1 Device Comments

Symbol

Network No. specification

device

SFC block device

BL*5

Step relay (Step relay with

a block specification)

BL\S

SFC transition device

BL\TR

I/O number specifying

device

specification*1

*1 :

Bit-specified word device comment is applicable to Universal model QCPU/LCPU only.

*2 :

Not applicable to Q00J/Q00UJ.

*3 :

R (extended register) is applicable to FX3G or FX3U(C) only

*4 :

Applicable to FX3U/FX3UC only

*5 :

For projects with labels, comments of the BL device are not reflected to the block titles.

FXCPU

10

*4

11

Device comment creation supported range in the multiple CPU system configuration for QCPU
(Q mode)
Device comments can be created in the following ranges, corresponding to the buffer memory of the
programmable controller CPU (3E00H to 3E30H) in a multiple CPU system.

WRITING/READING
DATA

Non-supported range
U200(\G0) to U3DF(\G65535)

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

U0(\G0) to U1FF(\G65535)
U3E0(\G0) to U3FF(\G65535)

12

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

Supported range

SEARCH/REPLACE

Other

Device name

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Category

QCPU (Q mode)/
LCPU

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

9
Bit

9.1.2 List of device comment applicable devices

9 -7

GX Works2

9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS

9.2

Creating Device Comments

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to create device comments, which make it easy to understand content of program
processing.

9.2.1

Creating comments on the device comment editor

Create device comments for each device on the same screen.

When creating local device comments, create a new device comment in advance. (

Screen display
Creating global device comments
Select Project view "Global Device Comment".
Creating local device comments
Select Project view "Local Device Comment" "(data name)".

Operating procedure

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Specify the device to be edited.

Comment*1

Enter a device comment for each device.

*1 :

9 -8

Description

Device Name

For Universal model QCPU/LCPU, the entry field for bit-specified word device
comment can be expanded/collapsed by clicking a column of "Device Name".

9.2.1 Creating comments on the device comment editor

Section 4.3.1)

9.2 Creating Device Comments

9
(Universal model QCPU/LCPU only)

Displays all entry fields for bit-specified word device comment.

(Universal model QCPU/LCPU only)

Limit for the number of characters to be entered

Enter each device comment within 32 characters.
The limit for the number of characters to be entered can be switched between 16 characters and 32 characters.
(
Section 21.2)
Cutting/copying/pasting device comments for word devices which support bit-specified word device
comments
For Universal model QCPU/LCPU, select the following menu when cutting/copying/pasting device comments
including bit-specified word device comments.
[Edit] [Cut The Range including Hidden Bit Specification Information]
[Edit] [Copy The Range including Hidden Bit Specification Information]
[Edit] [Paste The Range including Hidden Bit Specification Information]

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

Hides all entry fields for bit-specified word device comment.

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

12

Restrictions
Range selection of entry fields for bit-specified word device comment
When a range is selected with entry fields for bit-specified word device comment are collapsed, the last entry field
for bit-specified word device comment becomes out of the range selection.
To select the last entry field for bit-specified word device comment, expand the entry fields and select the range.

WRITING/READING
DATA

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Screen button

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

9.2.1 Creating comments on the device comment editor

9 -9

GX Works2

9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS

9.2.2

Creating comments on the ladder editor

Modify and add device comments.

Creating device comments in device comment editing mode

Example) Set 'Result of module A' to D1 and 'Initial setting is completed to D2.

Operating procedure

1.

Select [Edit] [Documentation] [Device Comment] (

).

The mode changes to the device comment editing mode.

2.

Move the cursor to the device comment

entry position.

3.

Press the

key.

The Input Device Comment screen is displayed.

4.

Enter a device comment.

The line wrapping of the device comment for display
can be checked when the comment is entered.

5.

Click the

button.

The entered device comment is displayed as shown

at the right.
(Device comment displaying method,
Section
21.2)

Disabling the device comment editing mode

Select the same menu option again and remove the check mark from the item displayed on the screen.
Reflection target of device comments
Device comments changed or added on the ladder editor are reflected to global device comments.
To reflect changes to local device comments, specify the reflection target for "Reference/Reflection Target for
Device Comment" under [Tool] [Options] "Program Editor" "Ladder/SFC" "Comment".

9 - 10

9.2.2 Creating comments on the ladder editor

9.2 Creating Device Comments

9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Creating device comments in the ladder editing mode

Device comments can be added/modified on the created ladder of the ladder editing screen.
Example) Set the comment 'Indication of initial start.' for X1.

Operating procedure
Enter ';;X1=Indication of initial start.'
on the ladder editor.

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

1.

The entered comment is added as a device

comment.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Reflection target of device comments

Device comments changed or added on the ladder editor are reflected to global device comments.
To reflect changes to local device comments, specify the reflection target for "Reference/Reflection Target for
Device Comment" under [Tool] [Options] "Program Editor" "Ladder/SFC" "Comment".
Precautions when entering device comments in the ladder editing mode
When entering device comments in the ladder editing mode, do not enter device comments to devices which are
out of the range of device points set on the <<Device>> tab of PLC parameter because they cannot be deleted.

13

14
MONITORING

Entering comments following ladder symbol entry

Using the method explained below, a comment can be entered following a ladder symbol entry in ladder editing
mode.
Click
in the Enter Symbol screen, or select [Tool] [Options] "Program Editor" "Ladder/SFC" "Device"
and check "Enter label comment and device comment".

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

9.2.2 Creating comments on the ladder editor

9 - 11

GX Works2

9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS

9.3

Deleting Device Comments

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

This section explains how to delete data of a device comment.

9.3.1

Deleting comment data of all devices

Delete comment data of all devices in a device comment.

Operating procedure

1.

Select device comment editor [Edit] [Clear All].

All comment data set in the device comment are deleted.

9.3.2

Deleting comment data of device being displayed

Delete comment data of devices being displayed in a device comment.

Operating procedure

1.

Select device comment editor [Edit] [Select All].

All comment data of devices being displayed are selected.

2.

Select [Edit] [Delete].

The selected comment data are deleted.

9 - 12

9.3.1 Deleting comment data of all devices

Head
FX

FX

9.4 Utilizing Sample Comments

Utilizing Sample Comments

This section explains how to set a sample comment of special relays/special registers and intelligent function
modules automatically.
Open the device comment editor in advance.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

9.4

Utilizing sample comments of special relays/special registers

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

11

Utilize sample comments of special relays/special registers.

Operating procedure

Select [Edit] [Import from Sample Comment] [Special Relay/Special Register].

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

The sample comments of special relays/special registers are set on the device comment editor
being edited.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

9.4.1

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

Project language and sample comments to be utilized

When the project language is changed, sample comments with the language selected for the project language are
utilized.

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

9.4.1 Utilizing sample comments of special relays/special registers

9 - 13

GX Works2

9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS

9.4.2

Utilizing sample comments of intelligent function modules

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

Utilize sample comments of intelligent function module devices and input/output signals.

Operating procedure

1.

Select [Edit] [Import from Sample

Comment] [Intelligent Function
Module].

2.

Select modules whose sample comments are utilized.

3.

Click the

button.

The sample comments of intelligent function module devices are set on the device comment editor
being edited.
For Universal model QCPU/LCPU, bit-specified word device comments can also be utilized.

Utilizing sample comments

The sample comments can also be utilized by right-clicking any position on the device comment editor, and
selecting [Import from Sample Comment] from the shortcut menu.
For the data protected by security, the device comments cannot be utilized.
Number of characters displayed on device comment editor
The sample comments are displayed with the number of characters set in "Device Comment Editor" under [Tool]
[Options].

9 - 14

9.4.2 Utilizing sample comments of intelligent function modules

9.5 Writing/Reading Device Comments to CSV Files

Writing/Reading Device Comments to CSV Files

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to write/read device comment data to a CSV file.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

9.5

10

SEARCH/REPLACE

Writing device comment data

Write device comment data to a CSV file.

Operating procedure

1.

11

Select [Edit] [Write to CSV File].

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

The confirmation message for writing data is displayed.

2.

Click the

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

button.

The Write to CSV File screen is displayed.

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

3.

Enter a file name of the data to be saved.

4.

Click the

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15
button.

Device comment data is saved in the CSV file.

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

9 - 15

GX Works2

9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS

Reading device comment data

Read device comment data from a CSV file.

Operating procedure

1.

Select [Edit] [Read from CSV File].

The Read from CSV File screen is displayed.

2.

Select a file to be read.

3.

Click the

button.

The confirmation message for reading data is displayed.

4.

Click the

button.

Device comment data is read from the CSV file.

Device comment data for which an error message is displayed when reading data
An error message is displayed on the Output window if the following data is included when reading device
comment data.
Reading of device comment data is suspended when the number of error messages exceeds 100.
Device comment data of devices which are not supported by the programmable controller type of the project.
Bit-specified device comments (For programmable controller type whose project does not support bit-specified
comments.)
Reading device comment data whose number of characters exceeds the applicable amount
When a device comment whose number of characters exceeds applicable amount is set on the device comment
editor, a warning message is displayed on the Output window and characters exceeded the applicable amount are
deleted.

9 - 16

9.5 Writing/Reading Device Comments to CSV Files

9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Setting extended settings

Set settings such as selecting target devices for writing/reading device comment data.

Screen display
Select the

button on the confirmation message for writing/reading data.

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

< When reading device comment data >

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

Operating procedure
Item

Description

Target Device Selection

Display all devices to which device comments can be set in a program.

Non-target

Display devices which are not to be written/read.

Target

Display devices which are to be written/read.

Read after deleting comment data of

target device type*1

*1 :

2.

WRITING/READING
DATA

Set the items on the screen.

13

Check this to read devices after deleting set device comments.

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

1.

12

This item can be selected only when reading data.

Click the

button.

Return to the confirmation message for writing/reading data.

14

Screen button

MONITORING

Moves devices selected for "Non-target" to "Target".

Moves all devices displayed on "Non-target" to "Target".

15

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Moves devices selected for "Target" to "Non-target".

Moves all devices displayed on "Target" to "Non-target".

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

Sets the setting items to the default.

9 - 17

GX Works2

9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS

CSV file format

A title name of device comment editor and a title name of CSV file are linked.
Data of the column whose title matches with the title of the device comment editor are read to the
device comment editor.
Data of the column whose title does not match with the title of the device comment editor are not
read.
Data can be read even when the sorted order of CSV file does not match with the sorted order of
the device comment editor.
The following is an image of the saved CSV file opened with Excel.
< Device comment editor >

< CSV file >

Details of CSV file

The following explains the details of CSV file format.
The file format is Unicode (including UTF-16, Little Endian, and BOM).
The delimiter of items is a tab (\t).
Each item is enclosed in double quotation marks (").
If the item contains double quotation marks ("), the double quotation marks in the item are
expressed as two double quotation marks ("").
A line feed is set at the end of the line.
The line feed code is CR+LF.
A blank space is handled as a regular character.
< Image of device comments in CSV file >

9 - 18

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

10 SEARCH/REPLACE

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

This chapter explains the operation methods for searching for/replacing the character strings used in
programs.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Cross Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Displaying Device List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Search/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

10.1
10.2
10.3

10 - 1

GX Works2

10 SEARCH/REPLACE

10.1

Cross Reference
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to create and display the cross reference information, which shows a list of
locations where devices/labels selected on the program editor/label setting editor are used.
The Cross Reference window is displayed horizontally when it is docked on top or bottom of the main frame,
and displayed vertically when it is docked on left or right of the main frame.

Target data for creating cross reference information

Cross reference information is created based on devices used in the following editors/parameters.
Ladder
SFC
ST
Structured ladder/FBD
Global label
Local label
Structure
Multiple CPU refresh setting of PLC parameter
Refresh parameter of Network parameter
Auto refresh setting of intelligent function module parameter

10.1.1

Creating/displaying cross reference information

Create and display cross reference information of the label/device selected on the program editor/label
setting editor.

Screen display
Select [View] [Docking Window] [Cross Reference] (
<<Cross Reference Information>>

10 - 2

10.1.1 Creating/displaying cross reference information

).

10.1 Cross Reference

Specify the conditions to create cross reference information as necessary.

2.

Select a device/label on the program editor/label setting editor.

3.

Click the

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

By setting the conditions, the operation such as: searching for a label definition on the label setting
editor, displaying hierarchy of structure/array/FB, and displaying a start device and end device of
the instruction such as the DMOV instruction which uses two or more points of device, can be
performed. (
Section 10.1.2)

button.

The cross reference information is created and the result is displayed.

By pressing the
key after selecting a row in the result list, or by double-clicking or rightclicking the selected row and selecting [Jump] from the shortcut menu, the editor in which the
device/label is used opens and the corresponding device/label becomes in the selected status.
The following screen is a result of a structured project in which the "Display all items" and "Display
hierarchically" items are selected on the <<Condition Setting>> tab.

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

1.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Operating procedure

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

Attributes

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

10.1.1 Creating/displaying cross reference information

10 - 3

GX Works2

10 SEARCH/REPLACE

Display contents
Item

Description

<<Cross Reference Information>>

Attributes

Display icons which indicate attributes of devices/labels.

(
'Icons to indicate attribute' in this section)

Device/Label

Display the device/label name.

*1,*2

Display the class of the device/label.

Class

*1,*2

Label Data Type

Display the data type of the device/label.

Constant*1,*2

Display the constant value set for VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT or

VAR_CONSTANT.

Device*1

Display the device assigned to the label (automatically assigned device).

Address*2,*3

Display the address of the device/label.

Read/Write

Display whether Read or Write the device/label is.

Instruction*2,*4

Display the name of the instruction in which the device/label is used.

Ladder Symbol

For ladder programs, display ladder symbols of instruction in which devices are
used.

Position

Display the position which identifies the location of the device/label.

(
'Position information' on the next page)

Project*3

Display the project name or the library name in which the device/label is used.
*3

10 - 4

Display the cross reference information in view format.

Program File Name

Display the program file name in which the device/label is used.

Task*3

Display the task name of the program registration destination in which the
device/label is used.

Data Type

Display the type of data in which the device/label is used.

Data Name

Display the program or the data name registered in the program in which the
device/label is used.
Display the block name for SFC program.

Comment*2

Display the comments of the device/label.

System Label Name*1,*2

Display the system label name which corresponds to the global label.

*1 :

These items are not displayed in Simple project (without labels).

*2 :

Only when the "Display all items" item is selected on the <<Condition Setting>> tab.

*3 :

Structured projects only

*4 :

Ladder and SFC (Zoom) only

10.1.1 Creating/displaying cross reference information

10.1 Cross Reference

9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Screen button

Prints the selected row. (

Section 20.7)
Prints all lists when a row is not selected.

) moves the focus between the editor and the Cross Reference window.

(
+
)/
+
(
+
+
) moves the cursor to the previous/next row.
Displaying comments
In a ladder/SFC project, comments specified in [Tool] [Options] "Program Editor" "Ladder/SFC"
"Comment" "Reference/Reflection Target for Device Comment" are displayed as device comments.
(
Section 9.1.1)

Restrictions
When "Build cross reference information after completion compile" is checked in the option setting
When timer device (T) is specified as a search condition, devices of contact (TS), coil (TC), and current value
(TN) also become search targets. When any of the timer devices: contact (TS), coil (TC), or current value (TN),
is specified, timer device (T) is also searched along with the specified device.
The same operation as above applies when specifying retentive timer device or counter device.
When device/label which is not indexed is specified as a search condition, only devices/labels which are not
indexed are searched.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Cross reference information can also be created based on all devices/labels by clicking the
button
without specifying devices/labels after the Cross Reference window is displayed.
The maximum number of results that can be created in the cross reference information is 80,000. However,
since the internal data that are not displayed are included to the results, the number of results to be displayed in
the cross reference information may not reach 80,000.
When the "Auto Tracking" item is selected on the <<Condition Setting>> tab in a project with labels, the
maximum number of results that can be created in the cross reference information is 500.
Jump function
The jump function cannot be used for the cross reference information of a parameter.
Moving the focus

11

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Creating cross reference information

Cross reference information can also be created by right-clicking a device/label on the program editor, and
selecting [Cross Reference] from the shortcut menu.

14
MONITORING

Displays a print preview of the selected row. (

Section 20.9)
Displays a print preview of all lists when a row is not selected.

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

10.1.1 Creating/displaying cross reference information

10 - 5

GX Works2

10 SEARCH/REPLACE

Icons to indicate attribute

The following table shows icons displayed according to the attribute of device/label.
When the attribute is label, an icon is displayed with a combination of class and data type as
shown in the display example.
Attribute

Icon

Device

Display
example

Description
Displayed when the attribute is device.

Label

Displayed when the label class is VAR_GLOBAL.

Displayed when the label class is VAR_INPUT.
Class
Displayed when the label class is VAR_OUTPUT.
Displayed when the label class is VAR_IN_OUT.
Displayed when the label data type is simple data type.
Data type

Displayed when the label data type is function block.

Displayed when the label data type is structure.

Label usage

Displayed when labels are used in a program.

Position information
The following position information is displayed according to the editor.
Type

Example

Step number

Step No. 5

ST editor

Number of lines

Row No. 2

*1

SFC symbol and step number

SFC Step No. 3, Step No. 4

Structured ladder/FBD editor

Ladder block number and grid position

2. (10. 2)

Label Setting screen,

Structure Setting screen

Row number

Parameter

Name of parameter item to which

devices are set

Auto Refresh

SFC editor

*1 :

10 - 6

Display contents

Ladder editor

For the SFC block number, check the property of block (program) displayed in "Data Name".
(For details of properties
Section 4.3.5)

10.1.1 Creating/displaying cross reference information

10.1 Cross Reference

After the creation of cross reference information is completed correctly, the icon
shown in the
lower left corner of the screen is changed to the icon
which indicates the most recent information.
The data protected by security cannot be displayed.
If the program or the option setting is changed, the cross reference information does not
correspond with the program. In order to update the cross reference information, create it again.
Each column can be sorted in ascending/descending order by clicking on the column header.
However, the sort cannot be performed if the structure/array/FB is displayed in the tree. To cancel
the display in the tree, clear the "Display hierarchically" and "Display the last device of multiple
points device" check boxes on the <<Condition Setting>> tab.
Searching for refresh device of CC-Link parameter
For refresh devices (RX/RY) set in a local station or standby station of the CC-Link parameter, the
target of search is only the first 16 points of devices.
When the same name is used for label and device
The Auto Tracking function of cross reference gives devices a priority to be searched.
To display cross reference information of label whose name is the same as that of device, search for
"All Device/Label" in "Device/Label". Then, enter a label name in the "Device/Label" column of
filtering condition, and execute the filtering display.

SEARCH/REPLACE

Display after creation of cross reference information is completed

10

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

For a project with labels, cross reference information can be created based on the compilation result,
and it can be displayed even in an uncompiled state.
To display cross reference information in an uncompiled state, perform the following operation.
Select [Tool] [Options] "Compile" "Basic Setting", check "Build cross reference information
after completion compile", and execute the compilation.
By setting this item, the cross reference information can be displayed quicker while the compilation
time gets longer.

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Displaying cross reference information in uncompiled state

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Displaying cross reference information

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

10.1.1 Creating/displaying cross reference information

10 - 7

GX Works2

10 SEARCH/REPLACE

Displaying/hiding columns

Columns in the screen can be displayed or hidden by right-clicking a column header of the cross
reference information and selecting the items to be displayed or hidden from the shortcut menu.

Displaying devices/labels that use FB instance

To create the cross reference information from the devices/labels used in the function block, select the
FB instance to create the cross reference information.

10 - 8

10.1.1 Creating/displaying cross reference information

10.1 Cross Reference

Setting conditions

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

10.1.2

Conditions are set on the <<Condition Setting>> tab on the Cross Reference window.
Whenever the condition is changed, the cross reference information needs to be recreated.

Screen display

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Select the <<Condition Setting>> tab on the Cross Reference window.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

Operating procedure

12

Search Condition
Find label definition
Display Condition

Set the conditions of the cross reference.

Check this to search each label setting editor.

13

Display all items

Check this to display all items that can be created in the cross reference
information.

Display hierarchically

Check this to display a structure/array/FB hierarchically.

Display the last device of

Check this to display the start and end devices when a device which uses more
than two points in a instruction is specified.

multiple points device*1

Operation Mode
Auto Tracking*2
Explanation

Check this to create cross reference information of devices/labels selected on the

editor automatically.
Display the explanation of the condition item.

*1 :

Ladder and SFC (Zoom) only

*2 :

For projects with labels, this item can be selected only when "Build cross reference information after
completion compile" is checked under [Tool] [Options] [Compile] [Basic Setting].

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

<<Condition Setting>>

Description

14
MONITORING

Item

WRITING/READING
DATA

Set the items on the screen.

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

10.1.2 Setting conditions

10 - 9

GX Works2

10 SEARCH/REPLACE

"Display the end device of multiple points device" on the <<Condition Setting>> tab
The end device of the device which uses multiple device points in an instruction or refresh parameter can be
displayed. Check "Display the last device of multiple points device" on the <<Condition Setting>> tab to display the
end device.
The start and end devices are displayed in a tree format as shown below.

"Auto Tracking" on the <<Condition Setting>> tab

For ladder program, devices/labels of second and the following arguments of the instruction are also automatically
tracked.
To display cross reference information of second and the following arguments of the instruction during the Auto
Tracking mode, perform the following operations.
For a project without labels, select from the "Device/Label" input column.
To search devices in a project with labels, select from the "Device" column of filtering condition.
To search labels, select from the "Device/Label" column of filtering condition.

10 - 10

10.1.2 Setting conditions

10.1 Cross Reference

Filtering display

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

10.1.3

Filter the created cross reference information.

Ladder symbols cannot be filtered.
The following is an example of display by filtering devices/labels with the condition 'D*'.

10

1.

SEARCH/REPLACE

Operating procedure
Enter 'D*' in the filtering condition column under "Device/Label".

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

Press the

key.

The data matching with the set filtering condition are displayed in the Cross Reference window.

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

2.

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

10.1.3 Filtering display

10 - 11

GX Works2

10 SEARCH/REPLACE

Filtering condition
Clicking
enables to select a keyword from the list of previously entered keywords.
Tree display of filtering condition
Only data whose components match with the filtering conditions are displayed in the tree format when filtering
display is executed for the structure data names or the instance names of the function block.
Deleting filtering condition
Filtering display of the column can be canceled by deleting keywords entered in each filtering condition column.
Keywords for filtering condition
The wild card characters can be used in a filtering condition shown as below.
Example) When the filtering condition is set for the device/label column.
Wildcard

Example

Search Result

*30*

ready301, K4X30, K1Y30, K4Y30

Specifies any one character.

K4?30

K4X30, K4Y30

[]

Specifies any one of those characters.

[XY]8

X8, Y8

[! ]

Specifies any one of characters except for the

characters in the bracket.

K4X[!3]0

K4X40, K4Y50

[-]

Specifies character strings within the range in the

bracket.

D[0-2]

D0, D1, D2

Local200#

Local2001, Local2003

Specifies any character string.

10 - 12

Search target

Specifies any one-digit number.

10.1.3 Filtering display

10.2 Displaying Device List

Displaying Device List

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to display the usage of the specified devices.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

10.2

10

Screen display

SEARCH/REPLACE

Select [Find/Replace] [Device List].

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

Operating procedure
Item
Device

Find In

Select a location to search for.

Click
to select a location to search for. Click
from the list of previously searched locations.
The location cannot be entered directly.

Click the

All devices

Display all devices.

Used devices

Display devices used in the program.

Unused devices

Display devices not used in the program.

to select a location

button.

14

Search result is displayed.

Item

MONITORING

Display contents
Find Range

Description
Display the range of the devices searched.
The display can be switched by clicking the

button.

Device

Display the device name.

Contact

Display '*' when the device is in use as a contact.

Coil (counts)

Display '*' and the number of uses when the device is in use as a coil.

Parameter*1

Display the '*' when the device is in use as an intelligent function module
parameter.

Comment

Display the device comment set for reference/reflection target in the option
setting.
(
Section 9.1.1 Specifying device comments to be displayed in
program')
Specify a program for "Find In" to enter device comments.

15

16

Not supported by FXCPU.

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

*1 :

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Display Option

2.

Description
Enter a device to be searched for.
Click
to select a device from the list of previously searched devices.

WRITING/READING
DATA

Set the items on the screen.

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

1.

12

10 - 13

GX Works2

10 SEARCH/REPLACE

Screen button

Prints the selected row. (

Section 20.7)
Prints all lists when a row is not selected.

Displays a print preview of the selected row. (

Section 20.9)
Displays a print preview of all lists when a row is not selected.

Deletes device comments which are not used in a program.

Device comments can be deleted when a program is specified for "Find In".

Precaution on search in device list

The following shows the precaution on search in the device list.

Handling of coil instructions
As output instructions, the following application instructions can also be the target of search.
SET, RST, PLS, PLF, FF, SFT, SFTP, and MC
Searching for R devices and ZR devices
R devices and ZR devices are distinguished in the device list. Specify them separately when
searching for R devices or ZR devices.

Confirming locations of devices

The Cross Reference window can be opened from a used device displayed in the device list, and the location of
the device can be confirmed.
To open the Cross Reference window, select a desired row in the device list and follow any of the following
operations.
Press the
+
keys or press the
key.
Double-click the row.
Right-click the row and select [Cross Reference] from the shortcut menu.
For the cross reference function, refer to Section 10.1.
Displaying comments
In a ladder/SFC project, comments specified in [Tool] [Options] "Program Editor" "Ladder/SFC"
"Comment" "Reference/Reflection Target for Device Comment" are displayed as device comments.
(
Section 9.1.1)

10 - 14

10.3 Search/Replacement

Head
FX

FX

Purposes of each search/replacement

The following table shows the purposes of each search/replacement.
Purpose

11

Find Device/
Replace Device

Used for searching for/replacing a device or label in a program.

Find Instruction/
Replace Instruction

Used for searching for/replacing an instruction in a program.

Find String/
Replace String

Used for searching for/replacing a character string used in a program, label. and device
comment.

Change Open/Close
Contact

Used for switching the contact type of a specified device in a program from normal to
negation, or from negation to normal.

Device Batch Replace

Used for searching for/replacing devices or labels in a program in batch.

12

13

14
MONITORING

Displaying the Find/Replace screen

The Find/Replace screen can also be displayed by selecting [View] [Docking Window] [Find/Replace].
Replace function
The programs are in the uncompiled status after the Replace function is executed. Compile all the programs
again.
The Replace function cannot be executed during monitoring. Execute the function after monitoring is finished.
The Replace function cannot be executed when a program is opened with the read-only mode. Execute the
function after setting the data in editable mode by the setting such as resetting the security.
Searching/replacing labels
One point of device can be replaced when searching/replacing labels.
Searching/replacing data in inline structured text box
The search starts from the top of the program in the inline structured text box regardless of the cursor position.
Replacement of items corresponding to system labels
The following items that correspond to system labels cannot be replaced.
Relation with system label
System label name
Attribute

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Function

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

This section explains how to search for and replacing character strings, devices, labels, instructions, etc. in
project data.
If the Find All/Replace All function is executed, the details of the execution result are displayed.

WRITING/READING
DATA

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Search/Replacement

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

10.3

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

10 - 15

GX Works2

10 SEARCH/REPLACE

10.3.1

Searching/replacing devices/labels

Search/replace devices/labels in the program.

Screen display
Select [Find/Replace] [Find Device]/[Replace Device] (

).

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Find In

Find Device

Enter a device/label to be searched for or a replacing device/label.

Click
to select from the list of devices or labels entered
previously.

Replace Device

Enter the number of points to be searched/replaced, counted from

the device entered in the "Find Device" field. When a label is entered
for "Find Device" or "Replace Device", enter 1.
Click
to select either hexadecimal or decimal for the value to be
used.
Example) When X50 for "Find Device", X100 for "Replace Device", 3
for "Device Point", and "DEC" for entered value are set, the devices
are replaced as shown below.
X50X100, X51X101, X52X102

Device Point

Find Direction

Option

Device
Comment*2

10 - 16

Description
Click the
button to select a location to search for.
Click
to select a location from the list of previously searched
locations.
The location cannot be entered directly.

From Top

Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the

start of the program.

Down

Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the

cursor position.

Up

Select this to execute a search in the upward direction from the

cursor position.

Digit*1

Check this to execute a search for the entered device and digit
specification for bit devices that include the entered device.

Multiple word*2

Check this to execute a search for the entered device and the
double-word format (double word/real number/indirect specification)
word devices that include the entered device.

Consecutive search with Enter key

Check this not to move the focus to the editor after the search/
replace function.
The searched/replaced position may not be highlighted.

Move

Select this to move a device comment of "Find Device" to "Replace

Device".

Do not move

Select this not to move a device comment of "Find Device" to

"Replace Device".

*1 :

Ladder and structured ladder/FBD only

*2 :

Ladder only

10.3.1 Searching/replacing devices/labels

10.3 Search/Replacement

button.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Click the

The cursor moves to the searched device.

Screen button

Searches for the character string entered in "Find String".

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Batch searches for the character string entered in "Find String".

The search result is also displayed. (
Section 10.3.6)

Replaces the character string entered in "Find String" with the character string entered in "Replace
String".

Batch replaces the character string entered in "Find String" with the character string entered in
"Replace String".
The replace result is also displayed. (
Section 10.3.6)

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

2.

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

10.3.1 Searching/replacing devices/labels

10 - 17

GX Works2

10 SEARCH/REPLACE

Examples of device search

The following tables show examples of specification for device search operations.
Example of device search (Option: None)
Device specification

Search result

M0

M0, K4M0, M0Z0, K4M0Z0

K4M0

K4M0, K4M0Z0

D0

D0, D0Z0, D0.1*1

D0.1

D0.1

J1\B0*1

J1\B0, J1\B0Z0, J1Z0\B0, J1Z0\B0Z0, J1\K4B0, J1\K4B0Z0, J1Z0\K4B0,

J1Z0\K4B0Z0

*1 :

Not supported by FXCPU.

Example of device search (Option: Digit)

Device specification

Search result

X0 to X3

K1X0

X0 to X0F

K4X0

X0 to X1F

K8X0

X0Z0

X0Z0, K1X0Z0, K4X0Z0, K8X0Z0

Example of device search (Option: Double word)

Device specification

DMOV K1 D0, EMOV E1 D0, MOV K1 @D0

D0 to D9

BMOV D0 D100 K10

D0Z0 to D1Z0

DMOV K1 D0Z0
*1

ZR0ZZ0 to ZR1ZZ0

DMOV K1 ZR0ZZ0

J1\W0 to J1\W1*1

DMOV K1 J1\W0

@D0 to

@D1*1

DMOV K1 @D0

K1X0 to K8X0

DMOV K1 K8X0

T0 to T1

DMOV K1 T0

T0Z0 to T1Z0

DMOV K1 T0Z0

*1 :

10 - 18

Search result

D0 to D1

Not supported by FXCPU.

10.3.1 Searching/replacing devices/labels

10.3 Search/Replacement

The following table shows the devices/labels that can be replaced or batch replaced.
: Replaceable : Not replaceable
New device/label

Device
(X0, D0)

Bitspecified
word
device
(D0.1*1)

Word device
indirect
specification*2
(@D0)

Digitspecified
bit device
(K1X1)

Index
setting
(X0Z0)

Device
(X0, D0)
Bit-specified
word device

Label/
String
(g_bool1)

Digit-specified
bit device
(K1X1)

Index setting
(X0Z0)

Digit-specified
bit device
+
Index setting
(K4X0Z0j

Index setting
+
Bit-specified
word device

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

specification*2
(@D0)

10

11

Word device
indirect

Old device/label

(J1Z0\W0.1*2)

Index setting
+
Bit-specified
word device

13

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

(D0.1*1

Digitspecified
bit device
+
Index setting
(K4X0Z0j

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Devices/labels that can be replaced or batch replaced

SEARCH/REPLACE

(J1Z0\W0.1*2)
Label/String
(g_bool1)

14
MONITORING

*1: Supported by FX3U and FX3UC only.

*2: Not supported by FXCPU.

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

10.3.1 Searching/replacing devices/labels

10 - 19

GX Works2

10 SEARCH/REPLACE

Searching/replacing devices/labels in inline structured text program

The following explains the precautions when searching/replacing devices/labels in the inline structured
text program.
Searching/replacing devices
Devices in the range specified for the parameter are searched. Devices out of the specified range
are not searched.
Searching/replacing labels
Both registered and unregistered labels are searched. All unregistered labels which are used at the
label positions in the inline structured text program are searched.
The following table shows the examples of label positions.
Label position
Applicable label position
Inapplicable label position

Example

Description

label1

Labels exist independently.

MOV (label1, D0, D1);

Labels used at label positions in functions.

label1 (m1, m2)

Labels used at instruction positions.

Comments in inline structured text program

Strings which are recognized as comments are not searched.
The following table shows the examples of comments.
String

Example
(* D1 *)

Strings between the comment start symbol and the end

symbol.

(* D1...

Strings following the comment start symbol when the

comment does not end with the end symbol.

D1 *)

Strings in front of the comment end symbol when the

comment start symbol is not used.

String recognized as comment

String not recognized as comment

Device/label names
Device/label names are not case-sensitive.

10 - 20

Description

10.3.1 Searching/replacing devices/labels

10.3 Search/Replacement

Searching/replacing instructions

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

10.3.2

Search/replace instructions.

Screen display
) /[Replace Instruction]/[Find Contact or Coil] (

).

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Select [Find/Replace] [Find Instruction] (

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

Device instruction
input area

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description
Click the
button to select a location to search for.
Click
to select a location from the list of previously searched locations.
The location cannot be entered directly.

Find In

Find Instruction

Replace With

Find Direction

Option

2.

Ladder symbol selection area

Click

Device instruction input area

Enter an instruction, device, or label to be searched for.

Click
to select from the list of instructions, devices, or labels entered
previously.

Ladder symbol selection area

Click

Device instruction input area

Enter a replacing instruction, device, or label.

Click
to select from the list of instructions, devices, or labels entered
previously.

From Top

Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the start of
the program.

Down

Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the cursor
position.

Up

Select this to execute a search in the upward direction from the cursor
position.

Consecutive search with Enter

key

Check this not to move the focus to the editor after the search/replace
function.
The searched/replaced position may not be highlighted.

Click the

to select a ladder symbol to be searched for from the list.

to select a replacing ladder symbol from the list.

button.

The cursor moves to the searched instruction.

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

1.

14
MONITORING

Operating procedure

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Ladder symbol
selection area

16

Screen button

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

For the screen buttons, refer to Section 10.3.1.

10.3.2 Searching/replacing instructions

10 - 21

GX Works2

10 SEARCH/REPLACE

Examples of instruction search

The following table shows the examples of instruction search.

Instruction
specification

Search result

MOV

MOV, MOVP

MOVP

MOVP

MOV D0 K4Y0

MOV D0 K4Y0, MOVP D0Z1 K4Y0,

MOV D0 K4Y0Z1, MOVP D0Z1 K4Y0Z1

MOVP D0 J1\W0*1

MOVP D0 J1\W0, MOVP D0Z1 J1\W0,

MOVP D0 J1Z1\W0Z1, MOVP D0Z1 J1Z1\W0Z1

*1: Not supported by FXCPU.

Precautions on searching for/replacing instructions

The following explains the precautions on searching for/replacing instructions.

Instruction search specifying a coil instruction
As output instructions, the following application instructions can also be the target of search.
SET, RST, PLS, PLF, FF, SFT, SFTP, and MC
Instruction replacement between a 16-bit (word) instruction and a 32-bit (double word) instruction
When a 16-bit (word) instruction is replaced with a 32-bit (double word) instruction, and if a
constant is set for the device, the constant value is not sign-extended to a value in 32 bits.

Example)
[MOV H0FFFF D0]

Replace MOV to DMOV

(-1)

[MOV H0FFFF D0]

(+32767)
The value is not sign-extended
to -1(H0FFFFFFFF).

When a 32-bit instruction is replaced with a 16-bit instruction, and if a constant is set for the device,
upper 16 bits are discarded.

Example)
[DMOV K150000 D0]
[DMOV H0FFFFFFFF D0]

Replace DMOV to MOV

[MOV K18928 D0]

[MOV H0FFFF D0]

Searching for NOP instructions and TRAN instructions

The NOP instructions used in the ladder programs and the TRAN instructions used in the transition condition of
SFC programs cannot be searched.

10 - 22

10.3.2 Searching/replacing instructions

10.3 Search/Replacement

Searching/replacing character strings

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

10.3.3

Search/replace character strings.

Screen display
Select [Find/Replace] [Find String]/[Replace String].

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

Description
Click the
button to select a location to search for.
Click
to select a location from the list of previously searched locations.
The location cannot be entered directly.

Find In

Enter a character string to be searched for or a replacing character string.

Click
to select a character string from the list of character strings
entered previously.

Find String
Replace String

Find
Direction

Option

2.

From Top

Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the start of
the program.

Down

Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the cursor
position.

Up

Select this to execute a search in the upward direction from the cursor
position.

Match Case

Check this to execute a case-sensitive search.

Match Whole Word Only

Check this to execute a search by matching whole word only.

For details of the whole word, refer to the Point in this section.

Do not search comments in

program

Check this to exclude line statements, PI statements, notes, and comments

in programs from the search target.

Consecutive search with

Enter key

Check this not to move the focus to the editor after the search/replace
function.
The searched/replaced position may not be highlighted.

Click the

button.

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Item

14
MONITORING

Set the items on the screen.

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

1.

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

Operating procedure

The cursor moves to the searched character string.

Screen button

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

For the screen buttons, refer to Section 10.3.1.

10.3.3 Searching/replacing character strings

10 - 23

GX Works2

10 SEARCH/REPLACE

Searching for NOP instructions and TRAN instructions

The NOP instructions used in the ladder programs and the TRAN instructions used in the transition condition of
SFC programs cannot be searched.
Searching/replacing data by matching whole word only
The whole word means a string separated by the break characters. The search/replace by matching whole word
searches for only the character strings which are completely match with the character string entered in "Find
String". Break characters are shown as below.
Space, tab, line feed
Example) Searching for a device comment 'abc ; def' by the following character strings.
String to be
searched for

10 - 24

Search result
Not selected

Selected

abc ; def

Nothing is found.

abc

abc ; def

abc ; def

bc

abc ; def

Nothing is found.

abc ; def

abc ; def

abc ; def

10.3.3 Searching/replacing character strings

10.3 Search/Replacement

Changing contacts between open contact and closed

contact

Change contact types from open contact to closed contact, and conversely, from closed contact to open
contact.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

10.3.4

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Screen display
Select [Find/Replace] [Change Open/Close Contact].

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

Item

Description

Find In

Click the
button to select a location to search for.
Click
to select a location from the list of previously searched locations.
The location cannot be entered directly.

Replace Device

Enter a device/label of which the contact type is to be changed between open

contact and closed contact.
Click
to select from the list of devices/labels entered previously.
Enter the number of points to be searched/replaced, counted from the device
entered in the "Replace Device" field. When a label is entered for "Replace Device",
enter 1.
Click
to select either decimal or hexadecimal for the value to be entered.

Device Point

Example) When X100 for "Replace Device", 3 for "Device Point" and "DEC" for
entered value are set, the contact type is replaced between open contact and
closed contact at X100, X101 and X102.

Option

2.

Click the

From Top

Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the start of the
program.

Down

Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the cursor position.

Up

Select this to execute a search in the upward direction from the cursor position.

Consecutive search
with Enter key

Check this not to move the focus to the editor after the search/replace function.
The searched/replaced position may not be highlighted.

button.

The cursor moves to the searched device.

3.

Click the

or

14

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Find
Direction

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Set the items on the screen.

16

button to change the contact type.

The contact types are changed from open to closed contact and from close to open contact, and
the search for the next target devices continues.
If the
button is clicked, all contact types of searched devices are batch changed from
open to closed contact and from close to open contact.
10.3.4 Changing contacts between open contact and closed contact

10 - 25

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

1.

MONITORING

Operating procedure

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

GX Works2

10 SEARCH/REPLACE

Change open/closed contact function

For the ladder editor, the contact type at the cursor position can also be changed by selecting [Edit] [Easy Edit]
[Switch Open/Close Contact] or pressing the
+
keys. Convert the program when this function is
performed as the program becomes unconverted status.
Operation applicability of the change open/closed contact function
The following table shows the contacts whose contact types can be changed.
Replace Example

10 - 26

10.3.4 Changing contacts between open contact and closed contact

10.3 Search/Replacement

Batch replacing devices

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

10.3.5

Batch replace devices with the specified device/label.

Screen display
Select [Find/Replace] [Device Batch Replace].

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

Operating procedure

Find In

Click the
button to select a location to search for.
Click
to select a location from the list of previously searched
locations.
The location cannot be entered directly.

Find Device

Enter a device/label to be replaced.

Replace Device

Enter a replacing device/label.

Points

Points: Enter the number of points to be replaced, counted from the

device specified for the "Find Device". When a label is entered for
"Find Device" or "Replace Device", enter 1.
Point format: Click
to select either decimal or hexadecimal for the
value entered for the "Points".

Point Format

Example) When X0 for "Find Device", X10 for "Replace Device", 5

for "Points", and "Decimal" for "Point Format" are set, the devices are
replaced as shown below:
X0X10, X1X11, X2X12, X3X13, X4X14
Move

Select this to move a device comment of "Find Device" to "Replace

Device".

Do not move

Select this not to move a device comment of "Find Device" to

"Replace Device".

*1

Device comment

*1 :

2.

14

15

Ladder projects only

Click the

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Description

MONITORING

Item

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

Set the items on the screen.

button.

The devices/labels entered in "Find Device" are batch replaced with the devices/labels entered in
"Replace Device".

Screen button

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

1.

16

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

Resets all setting items to default.

10.3.5 Batch replacing devices

10 - 27

GX Works2

10 SEARCH/REPLACE

Registering devices/labels in batch

Multiple devices can also be registered at once by selecting a range and dragging and dropping it from the ladder
editor.
Replacing devices in batch
Batch replacement between 16-bit counter devices and 32-bit counter devices is not supported by FXCPU.
Devices that can be batch replaced
For devices that can be replaced in batch, refer to Section 10.3.1.

10 - 28

10.3.5 Batch replacing devices

10.3 Search/Replacement

9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Displaying results and error logs

After the Find All/Replace All function is executed, results and error logs are displayed.

Displaying results

10

Screen display
Click the

button in the respective Find/Replace windows <<Result>>.

SEARCH/REPLACE

10.3.6

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Status

Search/replace
results

WRITING/READING
DATA

12
Sub status bar

Display contents
Item

Display the character strings, locations, and positions which have been
searched for or replaced.

Target List

Display the character strings which match with the one in "Find/Replace
String".

Place

Display the locations where the Search/Replace function is executed.

Position

Display the position information to specify the location where the

Search/Replace function is executed. (
'Position information' on

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Search/replace results

Description

the next page)

Display the details of the search/replace results.
Find/Replace Result

Display the number of character strings which have been searched for
or replaced.

Error Logs

Display the number of error logs.

Find String

Display the character strings specified in "Find String".

Replace String

Display the character strings specified in "Replace String".

Find In

Display the location specified in the relevant Find/Replace window.

Display the search/replace results.

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

Sub status bar

14
MONITORING

Status

10.3.6 Displaying results and error logs

10 - 29

GX Works2

10 SEARCH/REPLACE

Position information
The following position information is displayed according to the editor.
Type

Example

Step number

2 Step

ST editor

Number of lines

(6)

*1

SFC editor

SFC symbol and step number

Transition No. 0

Structured ladder/FBD editor

Ladder block number and grid position

2. (10. 2)

Device comment editor

Device name, start position

X1, 0 Column

Label Setting screen,

Structure Setting screen,
Device memory editor

Row, column

8 Row 1 Column

*1 :

10 - 30

Display contents

Ladder editor

For project with labels and SFC (Zoom), parentheses are appended to the step number.
(Example: (2) Step)

10.3.6 Displaying results and error logs

10.3 Search/Replacement

Displaying error logs

Screen display
Click the

button in the respective Find/Replace windows <<Error Log>>.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

SEARCH/REPLACE

10
Status

Error logs

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

Display contents
Description

Error Logs

Display the errors in search/replace results.

12

Jump function
The jump function is used to jump from any row of search/replace results or logs to the corresponding character
strings.
To execute a jump, right-click on the selected row and select [Jump] from the shortcut menu, or double-click the
selected line.

WRITING/READING
DATA

Display the number of error logs, and the search location.

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Item
Status

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

10.3.6 Displaying results and error logs

10 - 31

GX Works2

10 SEARCH/REPLACE

MEMO

10 - 32

10.3.6 Displaying results and error logs

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

This chapter explains how to set a connection destination for accessing a programmable controller CPU from
GX Works2.

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER

CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Setting Connection Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Directly Coupled . . . 11-7
Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Via Networks . . . 11-12
Accessing Programmable Controller CPU in Multiple CPU System . . . 11-18
Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Ethernet Board . . . 11-20
Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via G4 Module . . 11-22
Setting for Access via Serial Communication Module. . . 11-23
Setting for Access via GOT (GOT Transparent Function) . . . . . 11-26
Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line . . . . 11-31
Precautions on Communication with Programmable Controller CPU . . . 11-52

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
11.10

11 - 1

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

11.1

Setting Connection Destinations

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to set communication routes, including the interfaces both on the personal
computer and programmable controller CPU and the routing networks, for accessing a programmable
controller CPU.
Multiple connection destinations can be set with GX Works2. To set multiple connection destinations, create
data for each connection destination on the New Data screen. (

Section 11.1.2)

Screen display
Select Navigation window Connection Destination view "(connection destination data name)".

11 - 2

11.1 Setting Connection Destinations

Transfer setup screen

Interfaces are displayed on the Transfer Setup screen as shown below and detailed settings of each
interface can be configured.

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

PLC side I/F

MELSECNET/10(H)

PC side I/F

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

11.1.1

Network route

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

Detailed setting display fields

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

Other Station Setting

No Specification

Specify this to access the programmable controller CPU directly connected to a personal
computer.

Other Station (Single

Network)

Specify this to access the programmable controller CPU on another station via only one kind
of network (including a multi-tier system) such as CC-Link only, MELSECNET/10(H) only, CCLink IE only, C24 module only or Ethernet only.
Since Ethernet is regarded as equivalent to CC-Link IE and MELSECNET/10(H), specify
"Single Network" for a mixed system in which Ethernet, CC-Link IE, and MELSECNET/
10(H) are configured.

Other Station (Co-existence

Network)*1

*1 :

Specify this to access the programmable controller CPU on another station via two kinds of
network.
This means the system that is configured with two different networks, such that from
MELSECNET/10(H) to CC-Link module or from Q series C24 module to MELSECNET/
10(H).

Not supported by FXCPU.

11.1.1 Transfer setup screen

11 - 3

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

Description

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

Item

14
MONITORING

Detailed settings can be set for underlined items on the screen. Double-click these items to set the details.
The items whose icons are displayed in yellow are items that have been already set.
PC side I/F
Set the interface of the personal computer.
PLC side I/F
Set the interface of the programmable controller CPU connected to the personal computer.

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

Network Communication Route

Select the network type, network number, station number, and start I/O number of the network that
is routed for accessing the programmable controller CPU on another station. The setting items
depend on the selected network type.
Co-existence Network Route*2
Select the network type, network number, station number, and start I/O number of the network to
access. The setting items depend on the selected network type.
Target system*2,*3
In the multiple CPU system, specify the CPU number of the access target.
*2 :

Not supported by FXCPU.

*3 :

Not supported by LCPU.

Screen button

The Connection Channel List screen is displayed.

The connection destination can be set while checking network routes on the Connection Channel
List screen.
Since the route selected in the Connection Channel List screen is set automatically on the Transfer
Setup screen, the setting is easy even for a complex system.
The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.

Operation
1. Select a route on the Connection Channel List
screen.

2. Click the

button.

The selected route is displayed on the Transfer

Setup screen. Set the network number, station
number, and other settings depending on the
access target.
"List mode"
List mode

Description

Display All Routes

Display all routes supported by

GX Works2.

Display Selected
Routes

Display only accessible routes for

"Other Station Setting" and
"Network Communication Route"
setting.
Specify the interfaces for "PC side
I/F" and "PLC side I/F" on the
Transfer Setup screen and select
"Display Selected Routes" to
display the routes.

Changes the connection destination setting for the setting that connects a personal computer
directly to the programmable controller CPU to be accessed.
This function is useful to change the station specification from another station to host station.

11 - 4

11.1.1 Transfer setup screen

11.1 Setting Connection Destinations

Tests if the target programmable controller CPU set on the Transfer Setup screen can be accessed
normally.
If accessed normally, the model of the target programmable controller CPU module is displayed in
the "PLC Type" field, one of the detailed setting display fields. In addition, for the multiple CPU
system, the CPU number of the connection destination is displayed in the "Detail" field.

Shows the set connection channel in an illustration.

/
Displays the Line Connection screen.
The screen is used to set the communication using a phone line.
For details of the Line Connection screen setting, refer to Section 11.9.2.

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11.1.2

Creating connections

Create a new connection.

Select Navigation window Connection Destination view, and perform the following operation.

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

Screen display
Select [Project] [Object] [New] (

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

Operating procedure
Set the items on the screen.
Enter the name of the connection to be created.

Set as Default Connection

Select this to specify the connection destination to be created for regular

use.

Click the

button.

The created connection target is added to "All Connections" in the Connection Destination view.

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

2.

Description

Data Name

MONITORING

Item

14

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

1.

11.1.2 Creating connections

11 - 5

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

11.1.3

Specifying connection destination for regular use

Specify a connection destination for regular use when multiple connection destinations are set.

Operating procedure

1.

Select the connection destination data to be specified as for regular use from the
"All Connections" in the Connection Destination view.

2.

Select [Project] [Object] [Set as Default Connection].

The name of the selected connection destination data is set as the connection destination for
regular use, and displayed in "Current Connection".

is appended to the icon of data

specified as the connection destination
for regular use.

Connection destination setting

The connection destination data can also be specified for regular use by dragging and dropping it from "All
Connections" to "Current Connection".

11 - 6

11.1.3 Specifying connection destination for regular use

11.2 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Directly Coupled

This section explains the setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU directly connected to
a personal computer.

11.2.1

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Directly Coupled

10

Connecting with serial/USB cable

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

The following explains the setting for accessing the host programmable controller CPU from GX
Works2 with serial/USB cable.

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Host programmable controller CPU

SEARCH/REPLACE

11.2

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

When connecting
directly to the
programmable
controller CPU.

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

11.2.1 Connecting with serial/USB cable

11 - 7

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

Connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU

The following explains the setting for accessing the QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU on the host station.

Operation
1. Set "PC side I/F".
Section 11.1.1

2. Set "PLC side I/F".

Select the series of the programmable controller
CPU to be connected.

3. Set "No Specification" for "Other Station Setting".

Set "Check at communication time" and "Retry
times" as needed.

Connecting to FXCPU

The following explains the setting for accessing the FXCPU on the host station.

Operation
1. Set "PC side I/F".
Section 11.1.1

2. Set "PLC side I/F".

This setting is not required for the series other than
FX3G, FX3U, and FX3UC.

11 - 8

11.2.1 Connecting with serial/USB cable

11.2 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Directly Coupled

3. Set "No Specification" for "Other Station Setting".

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Set "Check at communication time" and "Retry

times" as needed.

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

Select this item when connecting the GOT1000 series USB to the USB of
a personal computer directly using the transparent function or when
connecting to the USB of a personal computer directly.

USB

Communication speed with FXCPU

The following table shows communication speed that FXCPU support.
Communication
speed

FX0
FX0S

FX1

FXU
FX2C

FX0N

19.2kbps

38.4kbps
57.6kbps
115.2kbps

FX1N
FX1NC

FX2N
FX2NC

FX1S

FX3G

FX3U
FX3UC

9.6kbps

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Description

Select this item when connecting using the RS-232 of a personal computer
RS-232
or when connecting to the USB of a personal computer with FX-USB-AW/
(Including FX-USB-AW and FX3U-USB-BD)
FX3U-USB-BD.

12

13

For connecting to FX3G, FX3U, or FX3UC and communicating at 38.4kbps/57.6kbps/115.2kbps, FX-232AWC-H or

FX-USB-AW is required.

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Item

WRITING/READING
DATA

"PC side I/F" of FXCPU

For FXCPU, the selection of the RS-232/USB must be as follows.

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

11.2.1 Connecting with serial/USB cable

11 - 9

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

11.2.2

Accessing by Ethernet
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

*1: Built-in Ethernet port CPU only

Access the Built-in Ethernet port QCPU/LCPU from GX Works2 by Ethernet.

Operation
Set the connection destination setting.

Built-in Ethernet port QCPU/LCPU

(192.168.0.2)

Item

11 - 10

Description

PC side I/F

Select a protocol.
Network number and station number do not need to be set since they are not used.

PLC side I/F

Select the access method. (

11.2.2 Accessing by Ethernet

Detailed settings of PLC side I/F)

11.2 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Directly Coupled

Detailed settings of PLC side I/F

The following is a setting example when searching for a Built-in Ethernet port QCPU/LCPU on the
same network connected via hub and utilizing the IP address.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

Connection destination
CPU information list

button.
The IP addresses, CPU types, labels, and comments of the Built-in Ethernet port QCPUs/
LCPUs on the same network are displayed in the 'connection destination CPU information
list'.

4. Select a Built-in Ethernet port QCPU/LCPU to be connected in the 'connection destination

CPU information list', and click the
button.
The selected IP address is displayed in "IP Address".

WRITING/READING
DATA

3. Click the

12

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Operation
1. Select a programmable controller type connected to a personal computer in "PLC Mode".
2. Check "Connection via HUB".

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

14
or

Windows

On Windows Vista or Windows 7, the following message may be displayed when the
button is clicked.
Click the

button for Windows Vista and click the

button for Windows 7 to unblock the

program (permit the access) and continue the operation. (The screen shown below is from Windows Vista.)

MONITORING

Precautions when using Windows

Vista

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16

When the same IP addresses are displayed

If the same IP address is displayed in the 'connection destination CPU information list' when the

11.2.2 Accessing by Ethernet

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

button is clicked, multiple IP addresses may be set in the Windows Network Connections setting.
In such case, reset the IP addresses not to overlap in the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties screen.

11 - 11

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

11.3

Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Via Networks

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to access the programmable controller CPU on another station from a personal
computer via networks.

MELSECNET/10(H)

When accessing other

stations via a single
network.

When accessing other

stations via co-existence
networks.

Operation
1. Set "PC side I/F".
Section 11.1.1

2. Set "PLC side I/F".

Section 11.1.1

3. Set "Other Station Setting"

Section 11.1.1

4. Set "Network Communication Route" / "Co-existence Network Route".

Select the network type, network number, station number, and start I/O number of the network
that is routed for accessing the programmable controller CPU on another station. The setting
items depend on the selected network type.

11 - 12

11.3 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Via Networks

The following is the setting example for accessing the programmable controller CPU via single network.
Screen settings for the mixed system in which MELSECNET/10(H), CC-Link IE, and Ethernet are
configured (single network)
For the mixed system in which MELSECNET/10(H), CC-Link IE, and Ethernet are configured,
specify "Single Network" when accessing the programmable controller CPU on another station.
(Since Ethernet is regarded as equivalent to CC-Link IE and MELSECNET/10(H), specify "Single
Network".)
The following shows the connection destination detail setting screen example for the mixed system
configuration (Q series only).
Request target (Station number 1)

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Setting example of "Other Station (Single Network)"

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Ethernet
Network number 3
MELSECNET/10(H)
Network number 1

Ethernet
Network number 2

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

11 - 13

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

Accessing programmable controller CPUs on another station

Routing parameters need to be set when accessing a programmable controller CPU on another station with a
different network number, or when accessing a programmable controller CPU on another station via network
system mixed with MELSECNET/10(H), CC-Link IE and Ethernet.
Accessing a programmable controller CPU on another station is possible within the network system specifications
by setting routing parameters.
For details of routing parameters, refer to the manual of each network module.
Mixed system consisting of MELSECNET/10(H), CC-Link IE, and Ethernet
Ethernet parameter "Station No. IP Information" must be set. For details, refer to the following manual.
Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Application)

11 - 14

11.3 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Via Networks

The following shows the connection destination detail setting screen example for the CC-Link
system configuration (Q series/L series only).

Station number 1

Station number 2

Request target
(Station number 3)

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Master station

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Screen settings for the CC-Link system (single network)

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

Station number of route

target CC-Link module (

14

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Accessible station numbers when accessing the programmable controller CPU on another station via CCLink
When the programmable controller CPU is connected directly or via a serial communication module, accessible
station numbers when accessing the programmable controller CPU on another station via CC-Link are 0 (master)
to 63.

MONITORING

Start I/O number of route

source CC-Link module (

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

11 - 15

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

Setting procedure for accessing FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC via QCPU (Q mode)

QCPU (Q mode)

QCPU
(Q mode)

FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G
CC-Link

Programmable controller series

FX3U(C) or FX3G is selected.

Operation
1. Open a project for FX3G/FX3U(C).
2. Select 'QCPU (Q mode)' for "PLC mode" in the PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of PLC Module
screen.

3. Set the communication setting in the PC side I/F Serial Setting screen.
4. Set the detailed other station setting.
5. Set the start I/O of the CC-Link module of QCPU (Q mode), and the station number of the
FX3G/FX3U(C) in the network communication route detailed CC-Link setting.

11 - 16

11.3 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Via Networks

Screen settings for the mixed system in which MELSECNET/10(H) and Q series C24 modules are
configured (co-existence network)
The following shows the connection destination detail setting screen example for the mixed system
configuration (Q series only).

Set the routing parameters.

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

The following is the setting example for accessing the programmable controller CPU via co-existence
network.
This setting is not supported by LCPU and FXCPU.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Setting example of "Other Station (Co-existence Network)"

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

MNET/
10(H)

CPU

MNET/
10(H)

C24

MNET/
10(H)

CPU

11
Station No.0

Multi-dropped connection

Station number 22

12

C24

CPU

C24

Request target (Station number 2)

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

Start I/O number of

route source C24 module ( )

16

Station number of
route target C24 module ( )

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

CPU

MELSECNET/10 (H)
Network number 2

MNET/
10(H)

MELSECNET/10 (H)
Network number 1

WRITING/READING
DATA

11 - 17

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

11.4

Accessing Programmable Controller CPU in Multiple CPU System

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

*1:Not supported by Q00J/Q00UJ.

This section explains the setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU (host CPU) directly
connected to the personal computer or other programmable controller CPUs (other CPUs) in the multiple CPU
system. The setting method for accessing the multiple CPU system on another station via a network is also
explained.

Accessing host CPU

The setting for accessing the host CPU is the same as that for accessing the programmable controller
CPU on the host station. (

Section 11.2)

Accessing other CPUs

In the multiple CPU system, specify the CPU number of the access target at "Multiple CPU Setting"
when accessing a programmable controller CPU that is not directly connected to the personal
computer.
For Basic model QCPU and Universal model QCPU (Q00U/Q01U/Q02U), the CPU No. 1 to 3 can be
specified.
For High Performance model QCPU and Universal model QCPU (excluding Q00U/Q01U/Q02U), the
CPU No. 1 to 4 can be specified.
The following shows a setting example when accessing the CPU No.4 by connecting the personal
computer to the CPU No.1.
CPU No.1 (connected to the personal computer)
CPU No.2
CPU No.3

CPU No.4 (access target)

Operation
1. Set "PC side I/F" to "Co-existence
Network Route".
Section 11.1.1

2. Set the access target CPU number at

"Multiple CPU Setting" in "Target
System".

Specify the
CPU No. 4.

11 - 18

11.4 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU in Multiple CPU System

Relay station
Set the parameters so that the network module mounted on the relay station is controlled by the
same programmable controller CPU. (In the figure below, CPU No.2 is the control CPU.)
Access target station
Set the CPU number in the "Multiple CPU Setting" on the Transfer Setup screen if the access
target station has the multiple CPU system.
The following shows a setting example when accessing the CPU No.4 in the multiple CPU system on
the access target station via a network.

1
1
2
3
4

QCPU No.1
QCPU No.2
QCPU No.3
QCPU No.4
1 Module controlled by the QCPU No.1
(MELSECNET/10(H), CC-Link IE)
2 Module controlled by the QCPU No.2
(MELSECNET/10(H), CC-Link IE)
2' Module controlled by the QCPU No.2
(MELSECNET/10(H), CC-Link IE)

Network number 1

The CPU No.4 4 on the access target station is

accessed via the network module1 by connecting a
cable to the CPU No.1 1 . Note that the cable shall be
connected to the programmable controller CPU that
controls the routed network module.

MELSECNET/H

Relay station
1

Set the network modules of the relay station to be

controlled by the same control CPU. 2 2'

2'

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

12

13

Network number 2 MELSECNET/H

Access target station

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Host station

10

11

Set the connection destination setting.

When accessing one of the CPUs No.1 to 4
on the access target station, change the CPU
number to be accessed in the "Multiple CPU
Setting" on the Transfer setup screen.
Personal computer

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

The following explains the setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU in a multiple
CPU system on another station via a network.

SEARCH/REPLACE

Accessing the programmable controller CPU via network in multiple CPU system

WRITING/READING
DATA

Use modules with function version B or later for all modules on

the host station, relay station, and access target station.
2

MONITORING

14

Section 11.1.1

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

Specify the CPU number.

Access range by network module function versions

To access programmable controller CPUs which are not controlling the network module of the access target
station, use the network module with function version B or later.

11 - 19

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

11.5

Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Ethernet Board

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains the setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU via an Ethernet
board of a personal computer.
The following shows a setting example when accessing the programmable controller CPU from GX Works2
via Q series-compatible E71 modules.
For the setting to access FXCPU, refer to the manual of the Ethernet module or the manual of the setting
software.
Network number 1

(192.167.0.2)
Station number 2

Q series-compatible E71 module (192.168.0.2)

Station number 2

CPU1

Q series-compatible E71 module (192.167.0.1)

Station number 1

CPU2
Network number 2

Q series-compatible E71 module (192.168.0.3)

Station number 3

11 - 20

11.5 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Ethernet Board

9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Operation
Set the connection destination setting.

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

12
PC side I/F

Set the network number, station number*1, and protocol.

PLC side I/F

Set the model, station number, IP address and other items for the module to be
connected to the personal computer.
For "Station No. IP Information", set the method corresponding to the setting for
"Station No. IP Information" of Ethernet parameter.

Network Communication
Route

Set the network number and station number of the access target station.

*1 :

WRITING/READING
DATA

Description

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Item

Set the station number avoiding the same station number already assigned to the existing
system or another Ethernet module.

Communication when multiple GX Works2 are connected

Perform communication using TCP/IP or UDP/IP. (
Section 6.2.1)
Multiple network systems
For a multiple network system, routing parameters must be set.
Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Application)

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

11 - 21

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

11.6

Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via G4 Module

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains the setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU via a G4 module.
For details of AJ65BT-R2N, refer to the following manual.
CC-Link System RS-232 Interface Module User's Manual (MELSOFT Connection Mode)
The following shows a setting example when accessing the programmable controller CPU via AJ65BT-G4-S3
module from GX Works2.
Data link must be correctly established by setting the switch settings and parameters for the AJ65BT-G4-S3
module and the CC-Link master module.
AJ65BT-G4-S3
Station number 1

QJ61BT11N
Station number 0

Operation
Set the connection destination setting.

Item
PC side I/F

11 - 22

Description
Set the COM port and transmission speed.

PLC side I/F

Set the model of the G4 module to be connected.

Other Station Setting

Set "Other Station (Single Network)".

Network Communication
Route

Set the station number of the access target station.

11.7 Setting for Access via Serial Communication Module

Q CPU L CPU Remote

FX

Head

This section explains the setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU on host station or on
another station via a C24 module.

11.7.1

Connection on a 1:1 basis

The following shows a setting example when accessing a programmable controller CPU by connecting
a personal computer and a Q series C24 module.

10

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Q series C24 module

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Setting for Access via Serial Communication Module

SEARCH/REPLACE

11.7

Operation

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Set the connection destination setting.

The following shows a setting example on a screen when accessing a programmable
controller CPU from GX Works2 via a C24 module.
The image below is an example for Q series C24 module.

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

MONITORING

14

15
Description
Set the COM port and transmission speed.

PLC side I/F *1

Set the model and station number of the C24 module to be

connected.

Other Station Setting

Set "No Specification".

16

If a number other than '0' is set in the station number setting of the C24 module, set the
same number for its station number.
The station number setting can be set in "Switch 5" (station number setting) in the
switch setting of the PLC parameter.

11.7.1 Connection on a 1:1 basis

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

*1 :

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Item
PC side I/F

11 - 23

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

11.7.2

Connection on a 1:n basis

Access the programmable controller CPU in another station from GX Works2 in a system composed of
multiple programmable controller CPU stations.

Access via a serial communication module

The following shows a setting example when accessing the programmable controller CPU in another
station via Q series C24 modules.
Station number 0

Station number 1

Operation
Set the connection destination setting.
The following shows a setting example of a screen for accessing C24 modules from GX
Works2.
The image below is an example for Q series C24 module.

Item

11 - 24

Description

PC side I/F

Set the COM port and transmission speed.

PLC side I/F

Set the model and station number of the C24 module to be

connected.

Other Station Setting

Set "Other Station (Single Network)".

Network Communication Route

Specify the start I/O number of the C24 module connected to GX

Works2 and the station number of access target.

11.7.2 Connection on a 1:n basis

11.7 Setting for Access via Serial Communication Module

The following shows a setting example when accessing the programmable controller CPU in another
station via Q series C24 modules by directly connecting the personal computer to the programmable
controller CPU.
Station number 1

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Station number 0

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Direct coupled of a programmable controller CPU

11

Operation
Set the connection destination setting.
The following shows a setting example of a screen for accessing a programmable controller
CPU from GX Works2 via C24 modules.
The image below is an example for Q series C24 module.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

15
Description
Set the interface of the personal computer. (

PLC side I/F

Select the series of the programmable controller CPU to be

connected.

Other Station Setting

Set "Other Station (Single Network)".

Network Communication Route

Specify the start I/O number of the C24 module connected to GX

Works2 and the station number of access target.

Section 11.1.1)
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Item
PC side I/F

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

11.7.2 Connection on a 1:n basis

11 - 25

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

11.8

Setting for Access via GOT (GOT Transparent Function)

This section explains how to access the programmable controller CPU from GX Works2 via GOT using the
GOT transparent function.

Precautions on executing online operations from GX Works2

Do not execute online operations from GT Designer2 to GOT (such as downloading project data) when online
operations are being executed from GX Works2 to the programmable controller CPU using the GOT transparent
function.
When GOT does not monitor normally
The GOT transparent function cannot be used in the following cases.
When GOT dose not monitor normally due to programmable controller CPU errors or communication errors
between the programmable controller CPU and GOT
During the period of time between turning ON or resetting the programmable controller CPU or GOT and the
start of GOT monitoring
Check the following items if GOT does not monitor normally.
Item

Description

Does the programmable controller CPU

operates normally?

Refer to the user's manual of the programmable controller CPU used.

Is the programmable controller CPU

connected to GOT normally?

Refer to the user's manual of the GOT to be used.

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
GOT-A900 Series User's Manual (Connection System Manual)
GOT-F900 SERIES GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL HARDWARE
Manual [Connection]

11.8.1

Accessing programmable controller CPU via GOT

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

Access the programmable controller CPU via GOT.

Personal computer (GX Works2)
GOT

*1

*1:

Programmable controller CPU

*2

The following table shows the connection between the personal computer and GOT.
: Connectable
Connection

GOT
GOT1000 series

GOT-A900 series

GOT-F900 series

USB connection

Ethernet connection

RS-232 connection

*2:

For cables connecting GOT with the programmable controller CPU, GOT settings, and precautions,
refer to the manual of the GOT connected.
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
GOT-A900 Series User's Manual (Connection System Manual)
GOT-F900 SERIES GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL HARDWARE Manual [Connection]

11 - 26

11.8.1 Accessing programmable controller CPU via GOT

11.8 Setting for Access via GOT (GOT Transparent Function)

9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU

The following shows the settings for accessing QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU.

Operation
1. Set "PC side I/F".
Section 11.1.1

10

2. Double-click "GOT" on "PLC side I/F".

The PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen is displayed.

3. Set the following setting on the PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen.
< Detailed setting screen when using the Ethernet
connection between personal computer and GOT>

<GOT (Ethernet) Transparent Setting screen>

SEARCH/REPLACE

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

Detail setting for GOT and PLC

connection

Check "PLC Module/CC IE Field Ethernet Adapter"

Set the following setting according to the setting method between a GOT and a
programmable controller CPU.
Setting method
Bus connection

Setup

Direct coupled
Ethernet
connection

Description
Select "via GOT (Bus) transparent mode". (For QCPU
(Q mode) only)

14

Select "via GOT (direct coupled) transparent mode".

Select "via GOT (Ethernet) transparent mode", and set
the GOT (Ethernet) transparent setting from the
button.

15

4. Set "Other Station Setting" depending on a route to the connection destination.

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Section 11.1.1

Connecting modules via Ethernet adapter module

Modules can be connected via Ethernet adapter using an Ethernet adapter module with the GOT (Ethernet)
transparent function.
Select "via GOT (Ethernet) transparent mode" in the detailed setting and select "NZ2GF-ETB" in the field next to
button.

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

the

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Description
Set settings such as an IP address and a host name when using the Ethernet
connection between a personal computer and a GOT.

MONITORING

Item
Ethernet Detail setting for PC
and GOT connection

11.8.1 Accessing programmable controller CPU via GOT

11 - 27

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

Connecting to FXCPU

The following shows the settings for accessing FXCPU.

Operation
1. Set "PC side I/F".
Section 11.1.1

2. For CPUs other than FX3G, FX3U or FX3UC, click "GOT" on "PLC side I/F".
3. For FX3G, FX3U, or FX3UC, double-click "GOT" on "PLC side I/F".
The PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen is displayed.

4. Set the following setting on the PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen.
< Detailed setting screen >

Item
Detail setting for GOT and PLC
connection
Setup

Description
Check "PLC Module/CC IE Field Ethernet Adapter"
Select "FXCPU" for "CPU Mode".
When using GOT-F900, check "via GOT-F900 transparent mode". However, if
the detailed setting for PC side I/F is USB, this item cannot be selected.

5. Set "Other Station Setting" depending on a route to the connection destination.

Section 11.1.1

11 - 28

11.8.1 Accessing programmable controller CPU via GOT

11.8 Setting for Access via GOT (GOT Transparent Function)

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

QCPU

Serial communication module

Personal computer (GX Works2)

GOT

*1 :

11

*2

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

*1

The following table shows the connection between the personal computer and GOT.
: Applicable
Connection

GOT-A900 series

GOT-F900 series

RS-232 connection

USB connection

Ethernet connection

12

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

For details of cables connecting GOT with the serial communication module, GOT settings, and
precautions, refer to the manual of the GOT to be connected.
GOT1000 series Connection Manual

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

*2 :

GOT
GOT1000 series

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

The following explains the GX Works2 setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU
via a GOT and a serial communication module.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Accessing programmable controller CPU via serial

communication module

WRITING/READING
DATA

11.8.2

11.8.2 Accessing programmable controller CPU via serial communication module

11 - 29

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

Connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU

The following shows the settings for accessing QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU.

Operation
1. Set "PC side I/F".
Section 11.1.1

2. Double-click "GOT" on "PLC side I/F".

The PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen is displayed.

3. Set the following setting on the PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen.
<Detailed setting screen when using
the Ethernet connection
between personal computer and GOT>

Item

Description

Ethernet Detail setting for PC

and GOT connection

Set settings such as an IP address and a host name when using the Ethernet
connection between a personal computer and a GOT.

Detail setting for GOT and PLC

connection

Check "C24".

Setup

Select "QJ71C24", "QJ71CMO", or "LJ71C24" for "Computer Type".

4. Set "Other Station Setting" depending on a route to the connection destination.

Section 11.1.1

11 - 30

11.8.2 Accessing programmable controller CPU via serial communication module

11.9 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line

Head

FX

This section explains how to set functions to access a programmable controller CPU via phone line, and how
to connect/disconnect the line.
Modems described in the system configuration below include an external type, built-in PC modem, PC card
modem (PIMCIA), and TA (terminal adapter).

When accessing a serial communication module from a personal computer

QCPU (Q mode)
/LCPU

11

Serial communication
module * 1

Modem
Modem

Public line

12

Only modules with RS-232C interface can be used.

WRITING/READING
DATA

*1 :

Select [Tool] [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem] [Line Connection] to access the serial
communication module from the personal computer.
For details of setting items on the Line Connection screen, refer to the following section.
Section 11.9.2 " Connecting a line automatically"
The setting of the modem function of serial communication module can be set with the parameter
setting of intelligent function module.
For details of the modem function, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-Q/L Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Application)
Switch settings of serial communication module

Data bit

Parity bit

None

Even/odd parity

Odd

Stop bit
Sum check code
Online change
Setting modifications

Communication rate (transmission speed) setting

Communication protocol (mode setting)

14
MONITORING

Transmission
setting

Description
Independent

1
Exist
Enable

15

Disable/Enable
According to modem specification
5

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Item
Operation setting

13

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

1)

10

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Q CPU L CPU Remote

SEARCH/REPLACE

Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

11.9

11 - 31

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

2)

Initial settings for buffer memories

The initial settings are required for the following buffer memories.
Buffer memory address

Setting

2EH(46)

Modem connection channel

specification

0: None
1: CH1
2: CH2

34H(52)*1

Data number for initialization

specification

0H: Specified initialization data send in user

registration frame area for transmission
From 7D0H: Data number for initialization

36H(54)

MELSOFT connection
specification

0: Not connected
1: Connected

*1 :

Name

The following initialization data are registered as a factory setting for serial communication module.
Q/L series C24: 7D0H(2000) to 7DDH(2013)
If a modem to be used is registered to the initialization data, specify the registration number.
When using an unregistered modem, a user can register initialization data to the following registration
numbers.
9C4H(2500) to 9E1H(2529)
8001H(-32767) to 801FH(-32737)

When accessing an FXCPU from a personal computer

Access an FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3U, or FX3UC through a modem with a phone line,
and remotely-operate the functions such as monitoring, testing, and writing/reading programs.
*1
FXCPU

Modem
Modem
Public line

*1 :

11 - 32

For the combinations of an FXCPU and a function expansion board (special adapter), refer to the Section
2.1.10.

11.9 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line

Operating procedure on programmable

controller CPU side

Operating procedure on GX Works2 side

Start

Start

Set the PLC parameter settings and the

type of the modem to be connected to the
programmable controller CPU.

10

Start GX Works2.

SEARCH/REPLACE

Open the sequence program to be written

to the programmable controller CPU which
is accessed remotely.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Operation flow

Set the type of the modem to be connected

to the personal computer.
*1
Register the data to the telephone directory.

Connect the programmable controller CPU

and the modem, and connect the modem
and the phone line.
Turn ON the power of the programmable
controller CPU.
(A modem initialization command is
automatically sent.)
The programmable controller CPU (modem)
becomes in a standby status as it waits for
data transmission.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Turn OFF the power of the programmable

controller CPU.

11

*2

Set the modem on the personal computer

side.
*1

Connect the phone line.

*1

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Write the set parameters and the program

to the FXCPU.

Perform the operation such as monitoring

in GX Works2.
Disconnect the phone line.
*1

13

*1 :

Section 11.9.2

*2 :

Section 11.9.1

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

End

Power supply procedure

Power should be supplied to the modem first, then to the programmable controller CPU.
If the programmable controller CPU is turned ON before the modem, the initialization command which is sent to
the modem at the power ON of programmable controller CPU is invalidated, and a communication error occurs
when operating the system remotely.
Furthermore, if only the modem is turned OFF after the power supply, the initialization command is cleared and the
same communication error occurs.

14
MONITORING

1)

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

11 - 33

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

2)

Setting PLC parameters

Set the PLC parameters which are required to access an FXCPU through the phone line.
< <<PLC System (1) >> tab >

< <<PLC System (2) >> tab >

Channel specification

Operation
Set the items on the screen.
Item
<<PLC System (1)>>
MODEM Initialized

Set the initialization command of the modem on the programmable controller

side, which is used for the remote access of the programmable controller
CPU.

User Register Mode

Select this when using a modem other than "AIWA (PV-AF288)" or "OMRON
(ME3314B)".
The communication specification for this mode is as follows.
Start bit: 1 bit
Data length: 7 bits
Parity: EVEN
Stop bit: 1 bit

AIWA (PV-AF288)

Select this when using "AIWA (PV-AF288)".

OMRON (ME3314B)*1

Select this when using "OMRON (ME3314B)".

PP Modem Mode (CH1)

PP Modem Mode (CH2)

<<PLC System (2)>>

Select this when using a modem other than "AIWA (PV-AF288)" or "OMRON
(ME3314B)", or when using a modem which cannot set the communication
specification for the user registration mode.
For details, refer to Point in this section.
This item is supported by FX3G, FX3U, and FX3UC only.
The communication specification for this mode is as follows.
Start bit: 1 bit
Data length: 8 bits
Parity: None
Stop bit: 1 bit
-

Channel specification

Specify the channel of programmable controller side to communicate with a

personal computer.
This item is supported by FX3G, FX3U, and FX3UC only.

Operate Communication Setting

Clear this item when setting the programmable controller CPU which is
operated remotely.

*1 :

11 - 34

Description
-

When selecting OMRON (ME3314B) for FX2N, use the module with the version 2.01 or later
(manufacturing number 78**** or later).

11.9 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Setting PP modem mode (CH1) and PP modem mode (CH2)

< FX3U, FX3UC series >
When using the first adaptor of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3U-232-BD or FX3U-CNV-BD, specify
"PP Modem Mode (CH1)".
When using FX3U-232ADP which is connected to a board other than FX3U-CNV-BD, specify "PP Modem Mode
(CH2)".
< FX3G series (14-/24-point type) >
When using FX3G-232-BD, or when using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3G-CNVADP, specify "PP Modem Mode (CH1)".
< FX3G series (40-/60-point type) >
When using FX3G-232-BD, or when using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3G-CNVADP, specify "PP Modem Mode (CH1)".
When using FX3G-232-BD and FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3G-CNV-ADP, specify "PP Modem Mode
(CH1)" for FX3U-232ADP, and specify "PP Modem Mode (CH2)" for FX3G-232-BD.
Precautions for creating sequence programs
To perform a remote access, the special data register D8120 (communication format) of the programmable
controller CPU needs to be "0".
D8120 can be cleared to 0 by clearing the "Operate Communication Setting" item on the <<PLC System (2)>> tab.
Note that if a value other than "0" is specified for D8120 in the sequence program, the remote access cannot be
performed.
Create a sequence program without specifying a specific value for D8120.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

When "User Register Mode", "PP Modem Mode (CH1)", or "PP Modem Mode (CH2)" is selected
for "MODEM Initialized" on the <<PLC System (1)>> tab, set AT commands according to the
following operations.
Register AT commands to programmable controller CPU
Send the following data register data to the modem as a modem initialization command following
the "AT&F" (initialization to the factory setting) command when the programmable controller
CPU is turned ON.
D1000 to D1059 (For FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3U, or FX3UC)
D200 to D255 (For FX1S)
Write a user-registered modem initialization command to above data register in advance using
the Modify Value function or a sequence program.

14

Example) When the initialization command is "ATE0S0=2Q1&D0&M4\Q0\J0&W"

Hexadecimal

Register No.

ASCII

Hexadecimal

D1000

41

D1013

&

26

D1001

54

D1014

4D

D1002

45

D1015

34

D1003

30

D1016

5C

D1004

53

D1017

51

D1005

30

D1018

30

D1006

3D

D1019

5C

D1007

32

D1020

4A

D1008

51

D1021

30

D1009

31

D1022

&

26

D1010

&

26

D1023

57

D1011

44

D1024

CR

0D

D1012

30

D1025

LF

0A

MONITORING

ASCII

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Register No.

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Setting AT commands

16

A user-registered initialization command ends the transmission at the point when "0" is read.
As a precaution, create a sequence program in which the input area of initialization command for
modem and the data register area used by the general sequence program do not overlap.

11 - 35

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

3)

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

Setting content of registered modem

The following table shows the setting items of AT command for the modem registered to the
programmable controller CPU in advance.
The setting items differ according to the modem to be used. For details of the actual setting
items, refer to the manual of the modem.
Setting item
Command echo setting
Number of automatic
incoming calls
Result code display
DTR control
Communication mode
Terminal flow control
Transmission data flow
control
Terminal speed fixed mode
Write to non-volatile
memory

AIWA (PV-AF288)
ATE0S0=2Q1&D0&M5\Q0\JO&W

OMRON (ME3314B)
ATE0S0=2Q1&D0&H0&R1S15=8&W

E0 (None)

E0 (None)

S0=2 (Twice)

S0=2 (Twice)

Q1 (None)

Q1 (None)

&D0 (Always ON)

&D0 (Always ON)

&M5 (V.42bis)

S15=8 (V.42bis)

\Q0 (None)

&R1 (None)

&H0 (None)

\JO (Fixed)

&W

&W

Modem specifications

Select a modem which satisfies the following specifications.

Communication data can be transferred from a built-in modem personal computer or a PC card modem
(PCMCIA) used by connecting it to a personal computer.
1)

When using a subscriber/in-plant phone line

AT commands are supported. (Initialization command)
DR terminal can be turned ON (High) independently.
(Example: A modem, whose CD terminal turns ON as the DR terminal turns ON, cannot be used.)
Communication standard
ITU-T V.90/V.34/V.32bis/V.32/V.22bis/V.22/V.21/V.FC
Bell 212A/103

2)

Manual line connection (when connecting a line through an operator)

Addition to the above specification 1), the "ANS mode" and the "ORG mode" can be switched.
(The above mode switches are available on the specific AIWA modem.)
The communication may not be established with the above specification depending on a line
condition.

Performing communication using a PC internal modem or PC card (PCMCIA)

The COM port setting is required on the Transfer Setup screen to perform communication using a PC internal
modem or PC card (PCMCIA). For the COM port number for the PC internal modem or PC card (PCMCIA), refer to
the manual of the PC internal modem or PC card (PCMCIA).
Performing communication via a modem
When performing communication from GX Works2 via a modem, the standard AT commands cannot be used for
some specific modems. If a line cannot be connected by selecting standard AT commands, a user needs to specify
the AT commands.
For details of specifying AT commands, refer to the following section.
Section 11.9.2 " Connecting a line automatically"

11 - 36

11.9 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line

Connection cables

Use an RS-232 cable included in a modem package, or a specified cable to connect a personal
computer and a modem.
Check the specification of the connector when purchasing a modem because the connectors are
different depending on a personal computer.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Restrictions on phone line

1)

Do not use a line with the call-waiting feature enabled.

Data may be corrupted or the line is disconnected by the incoming call when the line is enabled
with the call-waiting feature.

2)

Do not use an extension phone.

The phone line may be disconnected when the receiver is picked up during the phone line
connection.

3)

An analog two-wire circuit can be used for the phone line.

For a digital line, the line can be connected by using a TA (terminal adaptor).

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Phone line with a four-wire circuit

A phone line with a four-wire circuit may not be used depending on the modular connector type.
For a phone line with a four-wire circuit, perform a connection test in advance.

Modems for wireless communication using a cellular phone

Select a model according to the cellular phone to be used.
For details, contact the company of the cellular phone to be used.

5)

Coexistence with other applications when performing modem communication

When performing modem communication, applications such as GX Works2 and MX Component
cannot perform modem communication simultaneously.
When performing modem communication in GX Works2, set the other applications not to perform
modem communication.
If modem communication is performed simultaneously with GX Works2 and other applications, a
phenomenon such as a communication error or a line disconnection occurs.

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

4)

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

11 - 37

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

11.9.1

Setting TEL data

A personal computer can be connected with a programmable controller CPU using a phone line.
Use a serial communication module for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, and use a function expansion board
(special adapter) for FXCPU, to perform communication using a phone line.

Managing telephone directory and AT commands

The registered telephone directory and AT commands are managed under each user of Windows operating
system. The telephone directory and AT commands registered by another user cannot be used even when the
same personal computer is used.
To use the telephone directory and AT commands registered by another user, use the import/export function.

Creating a telephone directory

Register phone numbers.

Screen display
Select [Tool] [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem] [Phone Book].

List of registered
phone numbers

Item

11 - 38

Description

List of registered phone numbers

Display group names and user names of phone numbers.

Details

Display the registered information of the data selected on the list of registered phone
numbers.

11.9.1 Setting TEL data

11.9 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line

1.

Select a group for which the phone number to be registered on the list of registered
phone numbers.

2.

Click the

button.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Operating procedure

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

The Phone Number Setting screen is displayed.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

Set the items on the screen.

4.

Description
Display the group name to which the information is registered.

Name

Enter the name of the phone number to be set.

The maximum number of characters that can be set is 50.

Phone Number

Enter the phone number.

The maximum number of characters that can be set is 50.

Outside Line Number

Set the outside line number.

The maximum number of characters that can be set is 10.

For only Line Connection

When a password is set for Q/L series-compatible C24, this setting

enables to process the password authorization automatically to
connect the line.

Comments

Enter notes on the registered information.

The maximum number of characters that can be set is 60.

Click the

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Item
Group Name

14

button.

MONITORING

3.

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

The phone number is registered.

Screen button

15

The Group Setting screen is displayed by clicking the

The maximum number of characters that can be set is 50.

button. Enter a group name.

16

Edit the registered data.

Select a registered data to be edited on the list of registered phone numbers.
button. Edit the

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

The Phone Number Setting screen is displayed by clicking the

data.

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Creates a new group.

11.9.1 Setting TEL data

11 - 39

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

Copies a registered phone number to another group.

Select the registered data to be copied on the list of registered phone numbers.
The Group screen is displayed by clicking the
Select the group to which data is copied, and click the

button.
button.

Moves a registered phone number to another group.

Select the registered data to be moved on the list of registered phone numbers.
The Group screen is displayed by clicking the
Select the group to which data is moved, and click the

button.
button.

Deletes a registered group and phone number.

Data cannot be batch deleted in group unit.

Deletes all registered groups and phone numbers.

Searches for a registered phone number. The search condition is a partial match.
Target data is searched from all registered data.
When entering search conditions to both "Name" and "Phone Number", the data which satisfies the
both search conditions is searched.

Performs a selection processing of phone number setting when referring from the Line Connection
screen.

Imports phone number data from the specified file and adds it to the directory.
Execute the file import after deleting all groups and phone numbers to replace the data with the
imported phone number data.

Writes the data set on the Phone Book screen to the specified file.

11 - 40

11.9.1 Setting TEL data

11.9 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line

Registering AT commands

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Register AT commands.

Screen display
Select [Tool] [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem] [AT Command Registration].

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

List of registered
AT
commands
phone
numbers

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

Item

Description

List of registered AT commands

Display titles of AT commands.

Details

Display the registered information of the data selected on the list of registered AT
commands.

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Display contents

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

11.9.1 Setting TEL data

11 - 41

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

Operating procedure

1.

Select "MELSOFT Application Side Connection Modem" or "TEL Side Connection

Modem" on the list of registered AT commands.

2.

Click the

button.

The AT Command Registration screen is displayed.

3.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

4.

Description

Group Name

Display the group name of data to which AT command is registered.

Title

Enter a title for the AT command to be registered.

AT Command

Set the command for modem initialization.

The maximum number of characters that can be entered is 70 in
ASCII code.

Click the

button.

The AT command is registered.

11 - 42

11.9.1 Setting TEL data

11.9 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line

Edit the registered data.

Select the registered data to be edited on the list of registered AT commands.
The AT Command Registration screen is displayed by clicking the
Edit the data.

Copies a registered AT command to another group.

Select the registered data to be copied on the list of registered AT commands.
The Group screen is displayed by clicking the

button.
button.

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Select the group (to which data is copied), and click the

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

button.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Screen button

12

button.

13

Deletes a registered AT command.

Deletes all registered AT commands.

Performs a selection processing of AT command when referring from the Line Connection screen.

Imports AT command from the specified file and adds it to the directory.
Execute the file import after deleting all AT commands to replace the commands with the imported
commands.

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Select the group (to which data is moved), and click the

button.

14
MONITORING

The Group screen is displayed by clicking the

WRITING/READING
DATA

Moves a registered AT command to another group.

Select the registered data to be moved on the list of registered AT commands.

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Writes data set on the AT Command Registration screen to the specified file.

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

11.9.1 Setting TEL data

11 - 43

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

11.9.2

Connecting/disconnecting line

Connect/disconnect a line.

Connecting a line automatically

Connect a personal computer to a programmable controller CPU (with the following method: automatic/
callback/manual) for remote access.

Screen display
Select [Tool] [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem] [Line Connection].
< QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU >

< FXCPU >

Display contents
Item

Connect

Description
Display a line connection status.
The device which is being accessed is displayed flashing.
Devices will be displayed after the connection is established successfully.
When an error occurs during the connection attempt, the failed location is displayed with
, and devices are displayed in gray.
Check the failed location with a displayed message regarding the cause of the failure.

11 - 44

11.9.2 Connecting/disconnecting line

11.9 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line

Line Type

Select a line type: Tone, Pulse, or ISDN.

Outside Line Number

Set the number as necessary when calling through the outside line.

Port

Select the COM port number which is connected to the modem.

Connection Destination

Set the phone number of the target.

The previously-registered phone numbers in the telephone directory can be specified by
clicking the

AT Command

button.

Modem standard

Use the AT command set on the modem.

AT command specification

When a difficulty of line connection arises using the standard AT command, create an AT
command with reference to the manual of the modem and the content displayed by clicking
the

For Windows 2000 and Windows XP

User folder\Application Data\MITSUBISHI\MELSOFT\TEL\Log
For Windows Vista and Windows 7
User folder\AppData\Roaming\MITSUBISHI\MELSOFT\TEL\Log
< Log file name >
year, month, day.dat (Example: 110615.dat)

PP modem mode

Click the

13

This item is supported by FX3G, FX3U, and FX3UC only.

Check this when "PP Modem Mode (CH1)" or "PP Modem Mode (CH2)" is selected in the
PLC parameter.
Do not select this item when the setting other than "PP Modem Mode (CH1)" or "PP
Modem Mode (CH2)" is selected.

14

button.

When the line was not connected, perform the modem initialization.
For the precautions for connecting a line using the callback function, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-Q/L Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Application)

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

2.

11

12

button.

Line connected time, line disconnected time, connection duration, destination, target phone
number, callback, error status, or normal connection can be checked in log files.
The log file at the line connection is saved in the following log file.
< Save location >
Record the logging data

SEARCH/REPLACE

Line

10

WRITING/READING
DATA

Connection Method

Description
Select a method: Automatic, Callback, or Manual (connecting a line through an operator).
The phone number is set when specifying a phone number of the callback target.
For a connection using the callback function, refer to " Connecting a line using the
callback function".
For a manual connection, refer to " Connecting a line through an operator (manual
connection)".

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Item

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Set the items on the screen.

MONITORING

1.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Operating procedure

11.9.2 Connecting/disconnecting line

11 - 45

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

Screen button

Performs a modem initialization when the modem did not respond at the line connection.
The following confirmation message is displayed by clicking the

button.

A modem initialization starts by clicking the

button. "AT&F" is set as a default command
for the modem initialization.
The command for the modem initialization can be changed by the "Modem Initialization AT
Command" item under [Tool] [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem] [Options].
Change the initialization command according to the modem used.
When a failure occurs to the modem initialization, the Options screen is displayed.
Only the settings of items which may become a problem at the line connection can be changed.
For details of the Options screen, refer to Section 11.9.3.

Stops the line connection.

Phone line connection

The phone line connection can also be performed on the Transfer Setup screen.
When the line is disconnected by disturbance
If the line is disconnected by disturbance during the line connection, a confirmation message will be displayed to
select whether to reconnect or disconnect the line.

Connection duration
The connection duration is displayed on the status bar when the line is connected.
When the connection target is changed during the phone line connection
Even when the connection target is changed to another COM port or a communication board (such as
MELSECNET/10) on the Transfer Setup screen during the phone line connection, the communication can be
performed using the communication routes while the phone line is being connected.
When two or more error messages are displayed
Two or more communication error messages are displayed when the modem is turned OFF during the phone line
connection. In this case, set a longer time check period for "Other Station Setting" on the Transfer Setup screen.
Using a serial communication module to communicate through a phone line
The following table shows the items to be set on a programmable controller CPU and GX Works2 when performing
communication using a serial communication module (for Q/L series) through a phone line.
Setting target

11 - 46

Setting item

Programmable
controller CPU

Switch setting
Set the following items in the sequence program.
Write the initialization command (ATS0=1).
Set the initialization request.

GX Works2

AT command registration
Phone number registration

11.9.2 Connecting/disconnecting line

Reference
Section 11.9

Section 11.9.1

11.9 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line

The callback function is a function which enables access from GX Works2 to QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
with the line re-connection (callback) operation performed on the Q/L series C24 module side, after the
line connection operation is performed in GX Works2.
The callback function is not supported by FXCPU.

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

For 1 to 3, and 9, telephone usage is charged on a personal computer side.

For 4 to 8, telephone usage is charged on a Q/L series C24 module side.
For details, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-Q/L Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Application)
Automatic
Select "Automatic" when the callback function is not set on a Q/L series C24 module.
Connect a line without using the callback function when the callback function is set on a Q/L series
C24 module.
A connection operation can be performed on a personal computer whose phone number is
registered to the buffer memory (2101H).
3)

Automatic (Callback Number Specification)

Connect a line without using the callback function when the callback function is set on a Q/L series
C24 module.
A connection operation can be performed on a specific personal computer.

4)

Callback Connect (Fixation)

A callback operation is performed on a personal computer whose phone number is registered to
the buffer memory (2101H) of a Q/L series C24 module.

5)

Callback Connect (Number Specification)

A callback operation is performed on a specified personal computer.

6)

Callback Request (Fixation)

Send a callback request from a specified personal computer, and perform a callback operation on
a personal computer whose phone number is registered to the buffer memory (2101H) of a Q/L
series C24 module. (A callback operation is not performed on the personal computer which is
connected first.)

7)

Callback Reception Waiting

When connecting a line with Callback Request (Fixation or Number Specification), select "Callback
Reception Waiting" for the personal computer on which a callback is to be performed.

13

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Manual

15

This setting is not for the callback function.

Select this item when connecting a line through an operator.

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

9)

12

Callback Request (Number Specification)

Send a callback request from a specified personal computer, and perform a call back operation on
a specified personal computer. (A callback operation is not performed on GX Works2 which is
connected first.)

8)

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

Automatic (Callback Fixation)

WRITING/READING
DATA

2)

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

1)

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Connecting a line using the callback function

MONITORING

11.9.2 Connecting/disconnecting line

11 - 47

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

A line connection with the GX Works2 connection method described in the following table can be
performed when "Callback function specification" is set for the modem function of the intelligent
function module parameter of a Q/L series C24 module.
The following table shows the setting items of "Callback function specification" of the modem function
and corresponding setting items of GX Works2 connection method.
: Connectable
Connection method on GX Works2 side

Q/L series C24 side

callback function specification

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

9)

Auto
Setting 1: Auto/Callback Connection (at Fixation)
Setting 2: Auto/Callback Connection (at Number Specified)
Setting 3: Callback Connection (at Number Specified Max 10)
Setting 4: Callback Connection (at Fixation)
Setting 5: Callback Connection (at Number Specified)
Setting 6: Callback Connection (at Number Specified Max 10)

The following is an example of line connection with "Callback Request (Number Specification)".
:
:

Connect from the personal computer with phone number .

Connect to the personal computer with phone number .

Public line

Set one of the following: Setting 2,

Setting 3, Setting 5, or Setting 6, for
the callback function specification.

Modem

Phone number
Set "Callback Request
(Number Specification)" on
the Line Connection screen.

Modem

Set "Callback Reception Waiting"

on the Line Connection screen. Phone number
Set "ATS0=1" for the modem
initialization command.

11 - 48

11.9.2 Connecting/disconnecting line

11.9 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line

Connect to the in-plant phone line through an operator.

A manual line connection cannot be performed on modems without the ANS/ORG/TEL switch.
System configuration

10

Phone 1

Programmable controller

Phone line

Modem 1
C24

Operation
1. Select [Tool] [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem] [Line Connection].
(Select "Manual" for the line connection method on the Line Connection screen. For details of
operating procedure, refer to " Connecting a line automatically".)

2. Set the mode on Modem 1 on Phone 1 side to the ORG mode, and Modem 2 on Phone 3 side
to the ANS mode.

3. Call Phone 2 (operator) from Phone 1.

4. Phone 1 and Phone 3 are connected through Phone 2 (operator).
5. While Phone 1 and Phone 3 are connected, connect C24.
6. Turn ON the DATA switch on Modem 2 on Phone 3 side.
7. After the modem tone on Modem 1 on Phone 1 side is confirmed, turn the DATA switch ON.
8. When the modem tone on Modem 1 on Phone 1 side is faded, click the
button in GX Works2.
When the line is connected normally, the message "Line connected" is displayed.
Precautions

12

13

14
MONITORING

If the connection cannot be established in step 6 and step 7, repeat the operations and adjust the
timing.
The ANS - ORG switch is required on the modem to connect a line manually.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

Modem 2

WRITING/READING
DATA

Phone 2
(Operator)

SEARCH/REPLACE

Phone 3

Peripheral device

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Connecting a line through an operator (manual connection)

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

11.9.2 Connecting/disconnecting line

11 - 49

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

Disconnecting a line

Disconnect a phone line being connected.

Operating procedure
Select [Tool] [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem] [Line Disconnection].

11 - 50

11.9.2 Connecting/disconnecting line

11.9 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line

Setting options

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

11.9.3

Set options for a line connection.

Screen display

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Select [Tool] [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem] [Options].

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

WRITING/READING
DATA

12
Operating procedure
Set the items on the screen.
Item

Description

Line Connection CD Signal Wait Time

Extend the set period when the CD signal does not turn ON within the
set period depending on the area (example: overseas) to be
connected.

Line Connection Modem Report Wait

Time

Extend the set period when the response speed of the modem is slow.

Line Disconnection CD Signal Wait

Time

Extend the set period when the CD signal does not turn OFF within the
set period depending on the area (example: overseas) to be
connected.

Line Disconnection Delay Time

Data Transmission Delay Time

Extend the set period when the response speed of the modem is slow.

AT Command Response Wait Time

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

14

Increase the number of settings.

Line Callback Cancel Wait Time

Extend the set period when the line of the target (Q/L series C24) is not
disconnected within the set period depending on the area (example:
overseas) to be connected.

Callback Delay Time

Extend the set period when a specific period is required for the device
which relays a connection (example: modem) between the line
disconnection and the reconnection.

Modem Initialization AT Command

Set a command at the modem initialization.

The maximum number of characters that can be entered is 70 in ASCII
code.

Communication Initialization Time-out

period

Set the timeout period at the communication initialization.

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

AT Command/Password Cancellation
Retry Times

MONITORING

Password Cancellation Response Wait

Extend the set period when the quality of line connection is poor.
Time

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

11.9.3 Setting options

11 - 51

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

11.10

Precautions on Communication with Programmable Controller CPU

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains the precautions on communication with the programmable controller CPU
Refer to POINT and Restrictions described in each section as well as the descriptions in this section.

Precautions on communication via multiple network systems

When accessing QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU via multiple network systems, connected station*1 and relay
stations*2 must all be QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU.
*1:

Station directly connected from GX Works2

*2:

Stations to be routed on network system

Precautions on communication with the programmable controller CPU using a USB cable

1)

Connecting and disconnecting a USB cable, resetting the programmable controller CPU, and
turning the power ON/OFF
A communication error may occur and operation may not be recovered if connecting and
disconnecting a USB cable, resetting the programmable controller CPU or turning the power ON/
OFF is performed frequently during communication with the programmable controller CPU.
Be sure to set GX Works2 to offline*1 as much as possible during these operations.
When operation is not recovered from an error, remove a USB cable. Then, connect it again after
five or more seconds. (Even after this operation, an error may occur at initial communication.
However, communication will be successful after that.)
*1:

The offline indicates the status other than indicated below.

Write to PLC, Read from PLC, Monitor, and PLC diagnostics

The following screen appears on the personal computer using Windows 2000 Professional
Operating System.
R

If the screen appears, click the

computer.

2)

button and remove a USB cable from the personal

Combination of personal computers and USB cables

A communication error may occur depending on the combination of personal computers and USB
cables.
If an error occurs, take appropriate actions according to the message displayed on the screen.

11 - 52

11.10 Precautions on Communication with Programmable Controller CPU

High-speed communication using an RS-232 cable

Communication may fail depending on the performance of the personal computer when highspeed communication is attempted by changing the transmission speed at the serial port of the
personal computer (personal computer side interface). Communication speed may also slow down
due to communication retries. Decrease the transmission speed if high-speed communication is
not performed normally.

2)

Resume function, suspend setting, power saving function, and standby mode of the personal
computer
A communication error may occur during communication with the programmable controller CPU
when the resume function, suspend function, power saving function, or standby mode set to the
personal computer. Disable these settings for communication with the programmable controller
CPU.
Switching the connection to GX Works2 during communication through the serial communication
function

12

<PC side I/F Serial Setting screen>

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Select the same transmission speed.

MONITORING

14

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

<PLC parameter setting screen>

11

WRITING/READING
DATA

When using Q00, Q01, Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q02U, or QnUD(H)CPU, the connection can be
switched to GX Works2 during communication to a personal computer, indicator, etc. through the
serial communication function.
If unable to connect to GX Works2, adjust the transmission speed to that specified on the <<Serial
Communication>> tab of PLC parameter.

10

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

3)

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

1)

SEARCH/REPLACE

Other precautions

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11 - 53

GX Works2

11 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION

MEMO

11 - 54

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

12 WRITING/READING DATA
This chapter explains operations to write or read data to/from the programmable controller CPU or a memory
card.

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

12

Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU . . . 12-2

Verifying Data at Programmable Controller CPU against Data
at Personal Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
12.3 Deleting Programmable Controller CPU Data. . . . . . . . . . 12-25
12.4 Copying Program Memory Data to ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
12.5 Writing/Reading/Deleting PLC User Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
12.6 Transferring Data to Program Memory in Batch. . . . . . . . 12-29
12.7 Latch Data Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31
12.8 Backing up/Restoring Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33
12.9 Online Program Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36
12.10 Calculating Memory Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-53
12.11 Writing/Reading Data to/from Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . 12-59
12.12 Reading Data of Local Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-61

WRITING/READING
DATA

12.1
12.2

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

12 - 1

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

12.1

Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU

This function writes project data to the programmable controller CPU or a memory card, or reads data in the
programmable controller CPU or a memory card to the project.
Data for intelligent function module also can be written/read. (
Section 12.1.4)
Symbolic information can be written to/read from a programmable controller CPU for projects with labels of
FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later only.
To boot QCPU (Q mode) using a standard ROM or Flash card, it is recommended to firstly write necessary
data to the program memory using the Write to PLC function and then write the data to the standard ROM or
Flash card using the Export to ROM Format function. (

Section 12.4)

Screen display
Select [Online] [Write to PLC] (

)/[Read from PLC] (

).

The following explains the settings for writing data to a programmable controller CPU. Settings for
reading data from a programmable controller CPU can be made in the same manner.
<Write to PLC screen for the projects without labels.>

Target module tab

File list

Memory capacity

12 - 2

12.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU

9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

<Write to PLC screen for the projects with labels>

For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU/FXCPU (FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later), the symbolic information is
displayed in the file list.

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Target module tab

File list

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

Memory capacity

WRITING/READING
DATA

12
Operating procedure
Set the items on the screen.

13

Description
Display the information of the connection destination setting.

Target module tab

Switch the setting target module.

Characters on the tab are displayed in blue when data to be written/read exist.

PLC Module

Set the settings to write data to the programmable controller CPU.

Intelligent Function Module

Set the settings to write intelligent function module data to the buffer memory or
flash ROM of the intelligent function module.
Section 12.1.4
Display the title of the target memory by clicking the

Option*2
Display Size

button.

Check this to display the "Size" column in the file list and the memory capacity.

File list
Target

Select the data to be written/read.

Target Memory*1

Select the memory from the list ( ) by clicking the cell under "Target Memory".
For details of the memory card application, refer to the following manuals.
QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and
Inspection)

Writing Size

Display the total size of written data checked in "Target".

Free Volume

Display the free space volume of the target memory.

Use Volume

Display the used space volume of the target memory.

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Memory capacity*3

14
MONITORING

Title*1

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Item
Connection Channel List

16

*1 :

Not supported by FXCPU.

*2 :

Displayed only when a project with labels is written to the programmable controller CPU.

*3 :

For FXCPU, the program size and the symbolic information size are displayed when the project is
written to the programmable controller CPU. Symbolic information size is displayed on the screen for
projects with labels of FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later only.

12 - 3

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

1.

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

When a program (program file), device comment, device memory, or file register is selected, the
range can be set by clicking the
/
button.
When reading data from the programmable controller CPU, and the device memory is selected, the
detailed settings are required.
For details, refer to the following sections.
12.1.1 Setting write/read range of program (program file)
12.1.2 Setting write/read range of device data
12.1.3 Setting range of device comment to be written/read

2.

Click the

button.

When the Write to PLC function is executed, the specified data are written to the target memory.
When the Read from PLC function is executed, the specified data are read from the target memory.

Screen button

Displays the illustration of the connection channel.

Selects the parameters and all the programs displayed in the list.

Selects all data displayed in the list.

Cancels the selection status of all data selected in the list.

/
Switches display/hide of the Related functions button.
For details of the related functions, refer to the following sections.
Remote Operation
Set Clock

Section 17.1 Remote Operation of Programmable Controller CPU

Section 17.5 Setting Clock in Programmable Controller CPU

PLC User Data

Section 12.5 Writing/Reading/Deleting PLC User Data
Write Title: Sets a title to the target memory.
Format PLC Memory
Clear PLC Memory
Arrange PLC Memory

Section 17.2 Formatting Programmable Controller CPU Memory

Section 17.3 Clearing Programmable Controller Memory
Section 17.4 Arranging Programmable Controller Memory
(Read from PLC and Delete PLC Data only)

Displays the project name of the symbolic information in the Title/Project Name column.
It is not displayed for projects without labels or by FXCPU.

Updates the file list on the Online Data Operation screen.

For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, the writing size, free volume, and used volume are also updated.
When multiple personal computers are connected to the programmable controller CPU, update the
target memory before reading data from the programmable controller CPU.

12 - 4

12.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU

Section 6.3)

When the number of permissible unmatched remote password entries or the cumulative number of
permissible unmatched password entries has been set and the number of unmatched entries exceeds
the set number, the programmable controller CPU will be in the status as shown in the following table.
For corrective action, refer to MELSEC-Q/L Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Application).
Status
The line is disconnected automatically.

When the cumulative number of

permissible entries is exceeded

Turn ON the ERR. LED on the module.

11

Target memory on the Online Data

Operation screen

PLC type

Drive No.

QCPU
(Q mode)/
LCPU

Program memory/Device memory

Program memory (Drive 0)

Memory card (SRAM)

Memory card (RAM) (Drive 1)

13

Memory card (Flash): Q2MEM-2MBF

2

LCPU
QCPU
(Q mode)/
LCPU

PLC parameter

Memory card (Flash): Q2MEM-4MBF

Memory card (ATA)

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

QCPU
(Q mode)

Memory card (ROM) (Drive 2)

Memory card (SD)

3

Standard RAM

Standard RAM (Drive 3)

Standard ROM

Standard ROM (Drive 4)

Memory capacity
When a project is written to the programmable controller CPU, the target memory capacity may be displayed
smaller than the actual file size.
Writing multiple programs to programmable controller CPU
When more than one program is written to the programmable controller CPU, programs categorized as No
Execution Type will never be executed on the programmable controller CPU.
For saving the memory capacity of the programmable controller CPU, it is recommended to remove them from the
target data of the Write to PLC function.
Reading device memory data from programmable controller CPU
Device memory data are read in the condition in which "Number of Columns" is set to "Auto" on the device memory
editor.
Saving the selection status of the files for the Write to PLC/Read from PLC function
The selection status of the files for the Write to PLC/Read from PLC function can be saved.
To save the file selection status, select [Tool] [Options] "PLC Read/Write" and set "Operational Setting".
However, the file selection status is canceled by any of the following operations.
Changing the connection destination setting
Changing the target memory
Changing the PLC type
Ending the project

14

15

16
<Option setting>

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Target memory
The following table shows the relations between the target memory on the Online Data Operation screen and the
drive of the programmable controller CPU.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Item
When the number of permissible
entries is exceeded

10

MONITORING

(Setting a remote password

SEARCH/REPLACE

The confirmation message for unlocking the remote password is displayed when the programmable
controller CPU for which the remote password is set is accessed via C24 modules or Q seriescompatible E71 modules. Unlock the password by following the message.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Unlocking a remote password

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

12 - 5

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

12.1.1

Setting write/read range of program (program file)

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

Set the range of a program (program file) to be written/read when the program (program file) is selected
on the Online Data Operation screen.

Screen display
Select the program (program file) and click the

button.

Operating procedure

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description

Selected Program (Program File)

Display the program name selected in the 'File list'.

Range

Display write/read range of each program.

Option

Allocate Memory for 'Online Change' (Write to

Enter the number of steps secured for Online program change.
PLC only)
Specify Same Step Count for Online
Change to All Files
(Write to PLC only)

Check this to specify the same number of secured steps for Online program
change to all files.

Reading Left Capacity at the Same Time

(Read from PLC only)

Check this to read the remaining secured steps for Online program change
of the files written in the programmable controller CPU.

Merge Peripheral Statement/Note

(Read from PLC only)

Check this to use an Peripheral statement/note.

If a program is read without selecting this item, the Peripheral statement/
note is lost.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)

Screen button

(Read from PLC only)

Displays the remaining steps for Online program change.

12 - 6

12.1.1 Setting write/read range of program (program file)

12.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU

Setting write/read range of device data

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

Set the type and range of device memory and the range of file register to be written/read when any or
both of them are selected on the Online Data Operation screen.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

12.1.2

Setting type and range of device memory to be written/read

Set the type and range of device memory to be written to/read from a programmable controller CPU.
The following tables show devices that can be written/read.
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU

11

Device
M, L, B, F, SB, V,

*2

*2

Writing

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

: Applicable : Not applicable

S*1

Reading

*2

, T , ST , C , D, W, SW, FX, FY, FD, Z

X, Y, SM, SD, intelligent function module device, link direct device

*1: Not supported by Basic model QCPU.

12

*2: Three types of data (contact, coil, and current value) can be written/read.

WRITING/READING
DATA

FXCPU
: Applicable : Not applicable
Device
M, S, T, C, D,

R*3,

Writing

Reading

ER*3

X, Y, D (Special register), M (Special relay)

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

*3 :Supported by FX3G, FX3U, and FX3UC only.

Screen display
Select the device data and click the
< QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU >

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

button.

MONITORING

14

Device range
list

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

12.1.2 Setting write/read range of device data

12 - 7

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

Operating procedure

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description

Device Data Name (Read from PLC only)

Device Selection
Internal Device
Memory

Check this to write/read device data.

For FXCPU, this setting is fixed as selected status.

Input Column

Set the method for specifying the device range to be written/read.

Points + Start
Device Selection

Start + End
Device range list

Link Memory*1
(Read from PLC only)
Buffer Memory Head I/O No.*1
(last 1 digit is not required)
(Read from PLC only)

*1 :

Enter the data name for data created when the device memory data are
read.

Select this to specify the range with the number of device points and the
start device number.
Select this to specify the range with the start and end device numbers.
Set the device to be written/read and the device range.
The default device range is a range set on the <<Device>> tab of PLC
parameter. Devices to which 0 point is set cannot be set without checking
the check box.
Check this to read the link memory of the data link module or the network
module to the link direct device.*2,*3
Setting range: Slots 1 to 4
Check this to read the intelligent function module buffer memory to the
intelligent function module device.*3
Setting range: 0 to 1FF

Not supported by FXCPU.

*2 :

For the method to number the module to be set, refer to Point in Section 17.1.

*3 :

For specifying devices, refer to MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common Instructions).

Screen button

Changes the device range to the default.

12 - 8

12.1.2 Setting write/read range of device data

12.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU

Setting range of file register to be written/read

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Set the range of file register to be written to/read from a programmable controller CPU.
For Q00JCPU/FXCPU, the range of file register to be written/read cannot be set.

Screen display
/

button.

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Select a file register and click the

<QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU>

Item
Specified Range

Description
Specify the range of file register to be written/read.
If multiple file registers are selected, each file register value is written/read in the same
range.

Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Setting type and range of device memory to be written/read.

Specifying file registers

For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, "Whole Range" cannot be selected.
For Universal model QCPU/LCPU, specify the range of file register assigned on the <<Device>> tab of PLC
parameter when using extended data registers or extended link registers.

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Set the items on the screen.

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

Operating procedure

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

12.1.2 Setting write/read range of device data

12 - 9

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

12.1.3

Setting range of device comment to be written/read

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

Set the device and range of global device comment/local device comment to be written or read when
the global device comment/local device comment is selected on the Online Data Operation screen.
Set this setting to limit the writing range of device comments in cases such as when the programmable
controller CPU has small free capacity. When the range of device comments is not set, all device
comments are written/read.
For FXCPU, this function only supports global device comments being written to the programmable
controller CPU.

Screen display
Select a global device comment/local device comment and click the

button.

Operating procedure

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description

Device Comment Name

Display the selected device comment name.

Device Name

Set the device name whose write/read range is to be specified.

Start

Set the start device number.

End

Set the end device number.

Bit specification information included*1

Select this to specify whether bit-specified word device comments are

included as write target.

*1 :

Universal model QCPU/LCPU only

Restrictions
Specifying bit-specified word device comments as write target
Device comments cannot be read in GX Developer.
When a device comment contains a bit-specified comment of LCPU is read in GX Works2 Version 1.62Q or earlier,
the bit-specified comment is deleted.
When a device comment contains a bit-specified comment of Universal model QCPU is read in GX Works2
Version 1.31H or earlier, the bit-specified comment is deleted.

12 - 10

12.1.3 Setting range of device comment to be written/read

12.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU

FX

Write the data of the intelligent function modules to a programmable controller CPU or intelligent
function module buffer memory/flash ROM.
Intelligent function module data includes intelligent function module parameters to be written to a
programmable controller CPU as a parameter file, and data whose values are written directly to
intelligent function module buffer memory/flash ROM.
For details of data to be written as intelligent function module parameters and data to be written to
intelligent function module buffer memory/flash ROM, refer to the following manuals.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
Users Manual to be used

Writing/reading intelligent function module parameters to/from programmable

controller CPU

Write intelligent function module parameters to a programmable controller CPU, and read the data from
the programmable controller CPU to a project.

Screen display
Select [Online] [Write to PLC] ( )/[Read from PLC] ( ) <<PLC Module>>.
The settings for writing/reading data to/from a programmable controller CPU are explained
together as they are similar operations.
<Write to PLC screen>

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Head

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Q CPU L CPU Remote

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Writing/reading intelligent function module data

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

12.1.4

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

File list

MONITORING

14
Memory capacity

15
Select "Intelligent Function Module (Initial Setting/Auto Refresh)" from the file list.
For the items on the screen, refer to Section 12.1.

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

1.

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Operating procedure

12.1.4 Writing/reading intelligent function module data

12 - 11

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

2.

Click the

button.

In the Write to PLC operation, the intelligent function module parameters are written to the target
memory.
In the Read from PLC operation, the intelligent function module parameters in the programmable
controller CPU are read from the target memory.

Writing/reading data to/from intelligent function module buffer memory/flash ROM

Write the set intelligent function module data to the buffer memory/flash ROM of the intelligent function
module via a programmable controller CPU, and read the intelligent function module data to a project.
Use the operation for changing the data temporarily during debugging.
If a module does not have initial settings for intelligent function module parameters, this function can
directly write data such as initial values to the intelligent function module buffer memory/flash ROM.

Screen display
Select [Online] [Write to PLC] ( )/[Read from PLC] ( ) <<Intelligent Function Module>>.
The following explains the settings for writing data to a programmable controller CPU.
Settings for reading data from a programmable controller CPU can be made in the same
manner.
<Write to PLC screen>

The items in

12 - 12

may differ depending on the module.

12.1.4 Writing/reading intelligent function module data

12.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU

Check the check boxes of "Valid" for write/read target module and "Target" for each
item.
Set details such as a write/read range and write target by clicking the

2.

Click the

button of each item.

10

button.

In the Write to PLC operation, the set data are written to the intelligent function module buffer
memory/flash ROM, and in the Read from PLC operation, the data are read from the intelligent
function module buffer memory/flash ROM.

Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 12.1.

SEARCH/REPLACE

1.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Operating procedure

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

12.1.4 Writing/reading intelligent function module data

12 - 13

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

Writing data to programmable controller CPU

When writing the intelligent function module parameters, match the configuration of the intelligent function module
on the project with the configuration in the intelligent function module parameters stored in the programmable
controller CPU.
Data cannot be written to the programmable controller CPU unless the start XY address and the module name for
the write target match.
Reading data from programmable controller CPU
When the intelligent function module parameter does not exist in the programmable controller CPU, read the
data from the programmable controller CPU after adding the intelligent function module to the Navigation
window in accordance with the actual module configuration.
For the method for adding the intelligent function module, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
If the configuration of the intelligent function module on the project does not match with the mounted status, the
intelligent function module on the project is overwritten with the actual module configuration. Read the data from
the programmable controller CPU after checking the screen contents.

Writing data when the QD75 ready signal (X0) is ON (positioning data only)
Data cannot be written when the QD75 ready signal (X0) of the target intelligent function module is ON.
When the QD75 ready signal (X0) is OFF, the availability of operation varies depending on the option setting*1.
: Applicable : Not applicable
"Confirm PC operation status when writing a data"

Programmable controller
CPU operating status

*1 :

Checked

Not checked

STOP
Other than
STOP

Select [Tool] [Options] "Intelligent Function Module" "QD75/LD75 Type Positioning".

Displaying the confirmation message when writing data to a flash ROM (positioning data only)
The confirmation message can be displayed when data are written to a flash ROM by the following setting.
Select [Tool] [Options] "Intelligent Function Module" "QD75/LD75 Type Positioning" and check "Display a
confirmation message when writing to a flash ROM".

12 - 14

12.1.4 Writing/reading intelligent function module data

12.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU

Head
FX

FX

*1: FX3U/FX3UC (version 3.00 or later) only

Symbolic information is data that store the program configuration such as structures and labels.
To restore these data included in the symbolic information when reading a program from the
programmable controller CPU, write/read the symbolic information to/from the programmable controller
CPU.
Data such as structures and labels included in the symbolic information cannot be restored if only
sequence programs are read. (In case of a Structured project, the programming language is treated as
the ladder language.)
The following table shows the program data included in the symbolic information.
Data included in symbolic information

11

Structures
Local labels
Programs
Function blocks
User libraries
Structures

12

Global labels

Structured project

WRITING/READING
DATA

Program Setting
Tasks
POU
Local labels
Programs
Function blocks

13

Functions

Write target of symbolic information

Symbolic information can also be written to drives other than the program memory (drive 0).
For details of writable drives, refer to the following manual.
Users Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be used
Compile status when the symbolic information is read
When the symbolic information and parameters are read simultaneously, and the data in the symbolic
information match with parameters and programs (program files) in the programmable controller CPU, the read
data are in compiled status.
When only the symbolic information is read, the read data are in uncompiled status.
When the symbolic information of GX Developer or GX IEC Developer is read, the read data are in uncompiled
status. Compile the program again after executing the Read from PLC function.
Precautions for reading symbolic information
For the precautions for reading label programs (symbolic information) of the existing application using GX Works2,
or reading label programs (symbolic information) of GX Works2 using the existing application, refer to the following
section. (
Appendix 6.2 Data compatibility)

14

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

FXCPU
When a memory cassette to which the symbolic information has been written is used on an FXCPU other than
FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later, the memory cassette can be used, however, the symbolic information cannot be
read from the memory cassette.
When the symbolic information is written to a memory cassette on an FXCPU other than FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00
or later, the symbolic information may be corrupted.
Automatic project save after writing to programmable controller CPU
According to the option setting, the project can be saved automatically after writing to the programmable controller
CPU. Select [Tool] [Options] "Project" "Automatic Save" and check "Save project after writing to PLC".

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Simple project

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Global labels

MONITORING

Project type

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

*1

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Symbolic information

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

12.1.5

12.1.5 Symbolic information

12 - 15

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

High speed mode and Compatible mode

'High speed mode' and 'Compatible mode' are added as modes to write symbolic information to a
programmable controller CPU in GX Works2 Version 1.48A.
Use 'High speed mode' when using GX Works2 for the first time.
For FXCPU, only 'High speed mode' is supported.
'High speed mode' or 'Compatible mode' can be selected by the "Setting for Writing Symbolic
Information to PLC" item under [Tool] [Options] "Symbolic Information". 'High speed mode' is
set as a default setting.
High speed mode
Higher speed of writing/reading symbolic information compare to 'Compatible mode'.
Smaller symbolic information data size increases a free space in a programmable controller
CPU.
< Precautions >
Symbolic information written to a programmable controller CPU with 'High speed mode' cannot
be read in GX Works2 Version 1.43V or earlier.
Compatible mode
Symbolic information which does not support 'High speed mode', and it is the same as the one in
GX Works2 Version 1.43V or earlier.
Larger symbolic information data size decreases a free space in a programmable controller
CPU.

'High speed mode' and 'Compatible mode'

'High speed mode' and 'Compatible mode' can be changed any time.
Symbolic information in a programmable controller CPU is always the one written most recently. Thus, the
management of symbolic information is not complicated.
Symbolic information in programmable controller CPU
Symbolic information written to a programmable controller CPU with 'High speed mode' cannot be displayed on the
screen for Read from PLC in GX Works2 Version 1.43V or earlier.
Write to PLC function when symbolic information is set on the <<Boot File>> tab of PLC parameter.
When symbolic information is set on the <<Boot File>> tab of PLC parameter, performing the Write to PLC function
with changing the mode between 'High speed mode' and 'Compatible mode' may cause an improper boot
operation.
When the mode is changed, write symbolic information to a programmable controller CPU after performing the
following operation.
Check if symbolic information is set on the <<Boot File>> tab of PLC parameter, click the
button and
update the boot file setting.
Select symbolic information and parameters on the screen for Write to PLC and write symbolic information to a
programmable controller CPU. Confirm the target memory of symbolic information is the same as that of the
transfer destination set on the <<Boot File>> tab of PLC parameter.

12 - 16

12.1.5 Symbolic information

12.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU

Head

FX

The following explains the precautions on writing/reading data to/from the programmable controller
CPU.
1)

Writing or reading programs with a Peripheral statement/note to or from the programmable

controller CPU
The information of the lines with Peripheral statement/note is written to the programmable
controller CPU, but the content of the statement/note are not written to the programmable
controller CPU.
If a program with the same name as that of the program set with a Peripheral statement/note is
read from the programmable controller CPU, the former overwrites the latter (the one in GX
Works2), so the Peripheral statements/notes of the latter is discarded. To keep the Peripheral
statement/note in GX Works2 when reading data from the programmable controller CPU, merge
the Peripheral statement/note.
(Merging statements/notes

GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project))

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Q CPU L CPU Remote

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Precautions on writing/reading data to/from programmable

controller CPU

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

12.1.6

2)

An uncompiled program exists when writing data to the programmable controller CPU
If the following message is displayed when writing data to the programmable controller CPU, click
the
button and stop writing data. Then, execute [Compile] [Build] again on the
uncompiled program.

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

Compiling all programs changes the device assignment to labels. Therefore, device values set
before the program change remain on the device-assigned labels.
For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, by setting the following option, device values in the range set in the
device/label automatic-assign setting can be automatically cleared to 0 after writing programs to
the programmable controller CPU.
[Tool] [Options] "When writing to PLC after a Rebuild All operation, clear the device ranges
set in the Device/Label Auto-Assign setting to 0."
For not configuring the above setting, as a precautionary measure, after writing programs to the
programmable controller CPU, reset the programmable controller CPU, clear all device memories
including latches, clear all file registers, then switch the programmable controller CPU to RUN.
Section 17.3)

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

14
MONITORING

Writing programs to programmable controller CPU after compiling all programs

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

3)

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

12.1.6 Precautions on writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPU

12 - 17

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

4)

Editing programs after writing symbolic information to the programmable controller CPU
Edit programs in the same project type as the symbolic information if editing them after writing
symbolic information to the programmable controller CPU.
In addition, be sure to write the latest symbolic information to the programmable controller CPU if
writing only execution programs to it using Online program change etc.
If execution programs are read out and edited in GX Works2 projects without labels or GX
Developer and rewritten to the programmable controller CPU, the programs being edited may be
inconsistent with the execution programs in the programmable controller CPU when symbolic
information is read out using GX Works2.
If inconsistency occurs by the operation mentioned above, check the mismatch parts using the
Verify with PLC function and correct them.

5)

Performing the Write to PLC function when symbolic information is not written to the programmable
controller CPU
Program data are not displayed on the screen for Read from PLC in a project with labels.
When reading programs in a project with labels, select symbolic information.
When symbolic information is not written to the programmable controller CPU, create a new project
without labels, and read the programs.
When reading programs in a project without labels, the read programs are displayed in the ladder
format. However, as there are cases where the program cannot be displayed correctly in the ladder
format, be sure to check the program after the symbolic information has been read from the
programmable controller CPU.
The background color of the ladder block in which the program cannot be displayed correctly in a
ladder is displayed in yellow.
The program can be edited by deleting the ladder block or adding new ladder block before or after
it, even when the background color is displayed in yellow.
Be sure to write/read the symbolic information to/from the programmable controller CPU in order to
restore the program to its original state.

6)

Writing data after the device range in PLC parameter is changed

When the device range of PLC parameter has been changed, write the parameter to the
programmable controller CPU. Programs cannot be written to the programmable controller CPU
unless the parameter is written to the programmable controller CPU.

7)

When the date on the personal computer is February 29

When the date on the personal computer is February 29, the Write to PLC, Online program
change, and Change TC setting may not be performed with Basic model QCPU.
In this case, change the date on the personal computer to any date other than February 29.

8)

Basic model QCPU function version A

Basic model QCPU function version A does not support SFC programs, device initial values, and
remote passwords.
For the Write to PLC function, these files cannot be written even though their names are displayed.
For the Read from PLC function, files of SFC programs and device initial values are not displayed
in the file list. Files of remote passwords cannot be read out even though their file names are
displayed.

12 - 18

12.1.6 Precautions on writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPU

12.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU

10) Writing data to FXCPU in batch

11

Set the programmable controller CPU to STOP status.

When it is in RUN status, the message shown below is displayed. Select the

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

For projects with labels, data can be read from a programmable controller CPU, and symbolic
information can be read from/write to a programmable controller CPU in a project of FX3U/FX3UC
version 3.00 or later only. Since these functions cannot be performed on the other FXCPU
projects with labels, store the projects in a safe place.
When a project in which a block password with the validated setting for "Read-protect the
execution program" exists is written, the execution program cannot be read. Write the symbolic
information to recover the program.
When a program with an Peripheral statement/note is written to the programmable controller
CPU, the Peripheral statement/note cannot be written to it. (The information of the lines with
Peripheral statement/note also cannot be written to the programmable controller CPU.)

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

FXCPU

button.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

9)

11) When the program memory of FXCPU is the EPROM cassette

Write programs with the ROM writer. For the EEPROM or flash memory cassette, turn the
PROTECT switch OFF first and write programs.

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

The symbolic information, which has been created and written to the programmable controller CPU
using the Japanese version of GX Works2, cannot be read from the programmable controller CPU
using the English version of GX Works2.
In this case, save again the project created with the Japanese version of GX Works2 using the
English version of GX Works2, and write the symbolic information to the programmable controller
CPU.
By following the operation described above, the symbolic information can be read from the
programmable controller CPU using the English version of GX Works2.
14) Reading projects created in English version of GX Works2 from programmable controller CPU
When reading projects created in the English version of GX Works2 Version 1.31H or earlier from
the programmable controller CPU, select "Japanese" for the language selection.

14
MONITORING

13) Reading the symbolic information, which has been written to the programmable controller CPU
using the Japanese version of GX Works2, using the English version of GX Works2

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Writing/reading data cannot be executed with FX3U/FX3UC unless the memory cassette is installed
to the programmable controller main unit.

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13
12) Writing/reading ER device with FX3U/FX3UC

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

12.1.6 Precautions on writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPU

12 - 19

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

12.2

Verifying Data at Programmable Controller CPU against Data at Personal Computer

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to verify the open project against the data in the programmable controller CPU.
The verification function is used to compare the content of two projects or to locate program changes made in
the programs.
To verify data between two projects, use the Verify with PLC function. (
Section 4.2.7)
The following data can be selected as verification targets for the Verify with PLC function.
Programs
Parameters
Intelligent function module parameters (initial setting/auto refresh)
Device comments
Device memory data
File registers
QD75/LD75 positioning module
For FXCPU, only programs and parameters are the verification targets.

Screen display
Select [Online] [Verify with PLC].
<CPU module>

File list

Comment
verify type
Memory capacity

12 - 20

12.2 Verifying Data at Programmable Controller CPU against Data at Personal Computer

9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

<Intelligent function module>

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

File list

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

Operating procedure

Switch the setting target module.

Characters on the tab are displayed in blue when data to be verified exist.

PLC Module

Set the settings to verify data with data on the programmable controller CPU.

Intelligent Function Module*1

Set the settings to verify data with data on the intelligent function module.
Section 12.1.4

Title*1

Display the title of the target memory by clicking the

File list

button.

Target

Select the data to be verified.

Target Memory*1

Select the memory from the list ( ) by clicking the cell under "Target Memory".
For details of the memory card application, refer to the following manuals.
QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and
Inspection)

Comment Verify Type*1

Set a basis either; data being edited or module data, when verifying device
comments. (
" Comment verify type")

Memory capacity*1

Writing Size

Display the total size of written data checked in "Target".

Free Volume

Display the free space volume of the target memory.

Use Volume

Display the used space volume of the target memory.

13

14

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Not supported by FXCPU.

Click the

WRITING/READING
DATA

Target module tab

*1 :

2.

Description
Display the information of the connection destination setting.

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Item
Connection Channel List

MONITORING

Select data to verify from the file list.

button.

The verification results are displayed on the Verify Result screen.

16

Section 4.2.7 Checking verification result details

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

1.

12

12 - 21

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 12.1.

(Not supported by FXCPU)

Select the SFC block to be verified.

Project security status

Projects to which the security is set can be verified when both verify source data and verify destination data are not
read-protected.
Verifying intelligent function module parameters (initial setting/auto refresh)
Among modules without initial setting such as: QD75/LD75 positioning modules, serial communication/modem
interface modules, AS-i master modules, only modules in which the auto refresh is set are the verification targets.
Verifying QD75/LD75 positioning modules
One module each for verify source and verify destination can be selected.
The following data can be selected as verification targets.
Parameter
Servo parameter (For QD75M/MH only)
Positioning data (Except for positioning comments and M code comments)
Block start data

12 - 22

12.2 Verifying Data at Programmable Controller CPU against Data at Personal Computer

Parameter verification

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Verification levels can be selected for verifying parameters.

This function is not supported by FXCPU.

Screen display
button.

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Select the parameter and click the

The following table shows the setting items for parameter verification.
Verify only the parameter area set by the user.

All Areas

Verify all area including the parameter area set by the system.

Mismatched point in system area

If a mismatched point is detected in the system area by the "All Areas" verification, either of the
following messages is displayed.
Take corrective action depending on the message.
Message
The header information of the
parameter block is inconsistent.

Corrective action
A mismatch exists in area other than the user setting area.*1
Rewrite the parameters having been written to the programmable controller CPU.

Versions of GX Works2, GX Developer, or GX IEC Developer used to create the

project differ between the programmable controller CPU and GX Works2.
The operation of the programmable controller CPU is not affected.
This parameter block can't analyze.
To match the "All Areas" verification, install the latest version of GX Works2, read the
parameters from the programmable controller CPU, and write them again to the
programmable controller CPU.

Data in areas other than the user setting area may be erroneous due to such as noise.

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

*1 :

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

User Setting Area Only

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

Description

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Item

12 - 23

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

Comment verify type

A basis of the range, either 'data being edited' or 'module data', can be set in the Verify with PLC
function of device comment.
The comment verify type can be set when global device comments or local device comments of both
'data being edited' and 'module data' are selected.

The following table shows the items of the comment verify type and their descriptions.
Item

Description

Comment Verify Type

Verify data with the range of device comments in the project as a basis.
When this item is selected, detail setting of the selected device comments can be set by

GX Works2 Data

clicking the

button. (

Section 12.1.3)

Verify data with the range of device comments written to the programmable controller
CPU as a basis.

PLC Data

Verification result differences of comment verification method

The following shows an example of the Verify with PLC function performed on the following device
comments.
Device

Device comments in project

Device comments on programmable controller CPU

M0

Global device comment 1

M1

Global device comment 2

Global device comment 2

M2

Device comment of M2

Global device comment 3

M3
M4

Global device comment 1

Programmable controller CPU only

Project only

M5
M6

Programmable controller CPU only

< When "GX Works2 Data" is selected for verification >

< When "PLC Data" is selected for verification >

12 - 24

12.3 Deleting Programmable Controller CPU Data

Deleting Programmable Controller CPU Data

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to delete data in the programmable controller CPU such as programs and
parameters.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

12.3

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

Screen display
Select [Online] [Delete PLC Data].

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

File list

Memory capacity

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

Operating procedure
Select the data to delete from the file list.
For the items on the screen, refer to Section 12.1.

2.

Click the

14
MONITORING

1.

button.

The specified data are deleted.

15

Screen button

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

Deleting symbolic information

If the symbolic information is deleted, information such as labels cannot be restored.
Deleting programs (program files) only
The content of the symbolic information are not updated, even if a program (program file) is deleted. When the
symbolic information is read, the deleted program is restored.

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

For the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 12.1.

12 - 25

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

12.4

Copying Program Memory Data to ROM

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to copy the program memory data in the programmable controller CPU to a
standard ROM in the programmable controller CPU or a Flash card in batch.
This function is used to boot up using a standard ROM or a Flash card, or save program memory data in a
standard ROM or a Flash card without a battery backup.
Program memory data can be saved without a battery backup for Universal model QCPU and LCPU since the
program memory of those CPUs is a flash ROM.

Screen display
Select [Online] [Export to ROM Format].

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Target

2.

Click the

Description
Select the memory in which the program memory data are to be written.

button.

The message is displayed.

3.

Click the

button.

The program memory data are exported in ROM format and the data are written to the memory set
in "Target".

Precautions on writing
All the write target data are deleted.
Reading data written in ROM format
Use the Read from PLC function to read the data written in ROM format.
Exporting device memory in ROM format
The device memory cannot be written using the Export to ROM format function.

12 - 26

12.5 Writing/Reading/Deleting PLC User Data

*1: Not supported by Basic model QCPU, Q00UJ, Q00U, and Q01U.

This section explains how to write/read/delete PLC user data (CSV format file/binary format file) to/from an
ATA card/SD memory card/standard ROM.
PLC user data written to an ATA card/SD memory card/standard ROM can be used in sequence programs.
For the method for handling the PLC user data in sequence programs, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common Instructions)

Formatting ATA cards

Format the ATA card to be used on the programmable controller CPU by selecting [Online] [PLC Memory
Operation] [Format PLC Memory] in GX Works2.
If a card is formatted using the function such as Windows format functions, it may not be used on the
programmable controller CPU.
Project file attributes
The file attributes (read only, hidden file) set by the application such as Windows Explorer are ignored.
Memory capacity
When PLC user data are written to the programmable controller CPU, the target memory capacity may be
displayed smaller than it really is.
Folders in memory card
When reading/deleting PLC user data, data such as logging data contained in folders are not displayed in PLC
Side File.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

FX

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Head

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

*1

Q CPU L CPU Remote

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Writing/Reading/Deleting PLC User Data

13

Screen display
Select [Online] [PLC User Data] [Write PLC User Data]/[Read PLC User Data]/[Delete PLC User
Data].
The following explains the settings for writing PLC user data. The settings for reading/deleting PLC
user data can be made in the same manner.
<Write PLC User Data>

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

12.5

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

12 - 27

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

Operating procedure

1.

Use the
written.

button to set the storage source for the PLC user data to be

When reading PLC user data, set the save destination for the PLC user data to be read.

2.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

3.

Description

Connection Channel List

Display the information of the connection destination setting.

Target Memory

Select the memory to which the PLC user data are to be written.
For details of the memory card application, refer to the following manuals.
QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance
and Inspection)

Title

Display the title of the target memory by clicking the

Local File
(Write PLC User Data only)

Select the PLC user data to be written.

The maximum file size is 32MB per file.

PLC Side File

(Read/Delete PLC User Data only)

Select the PLC user data to be read.

Select the PLC user data to be deleted.

Click the

button.

button.

When the Write PLC User Data function is executed, the selected PLC user data are written.
When the Read PLC User Data function is executed, the selected PLC user data are read.
When the Delete PLC User Data function is executed, the selected PLC user data are deleted.

Screen button
For the explanation of the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 12.1.

12 - 28

12.6 Transferring Data to Program Memory in Batch

Head
FX

FX

*1: Universal model QCPU only

This section explains how to transfer the content of program cache memory to program memory in batch
using Universal model QCPU/LCPU.
Use this function to transfer data at desired timing, for example, when option setting is made so that a
program is not transferred to the program memory at Online program change.

Operating procedure

Select [Online] [Program Memory Batch Download].

Depending on the programmable controller CPU and its version, either of the following screens is
displayed.
<Universal model QCPU with a serial number whose first five digits are '10012' or higher,
LCPU>

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Transferring Data to Program Memory in Batch

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

12.6

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

<Universal model QCPU with a serial number whose first five digits are '10011' or lower>

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

Click the

14

button.

MONITORING

The content in the program cache memory is transferred to program memory in batch.

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

4.

12 - 29

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

Precautions on program memory batch transfer

The following functions cannot be executed during program memory batch transfer.
Execute these functions only after completing program memory batch transfer.
Online program change (ladder, structured ladder, FBD, ST, FB)*1
Change TC Setting (when "Write changed program to PLC" is checked)*1

*1 :

Write to PLC function (when program memory is the target memory)*1

Program memory batch transfer (this function)
Set as default connection
Change PLC Type function
Check Parameter

For Universal model QCPU with a serial number whose first five digits are '12012' or higher, the following
message is displayed and the process of the program memory batch transfer can be canceled. To
cancel the transfer, click the

button.

When the program cache memory and the program memory match
The batch transfer of the program memory data is not executed.

12 - 30

12.7 Latch Data Backup

*1

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

*1: Universal model QCPU only

12.7.1

Backing up latch data

Back up device memory/file register/error history data.

11

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Operating procedure

1.

10

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

This section explains how to back up data such as device memory, file register, error history to the standard
ROM using Universal model QCPU/LCPU.
The backup content stored using this function is automatically restored to the program memory or other area
when the programmable controller CPU is turned from OFF to ON or when it is reset.
This function allows the system to create backups of the data such as device data and error history data for
those times when the system needs to be shut down for a prolonged time without use of battery.
For details of backup target data, refer to the Users Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
of the CPU module to be used.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Latch Data Backup

SEARCH/REPLACE

12.7

Select [Online] [Latch Data Backup] [Backup].

2.

Click the

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

button.

Device memory/file register/error history data are backed up.

14
MONITORING

Devices
The latch data backup function is available for the following devices.
M, L, B, F, V, T, ST, C, D, W, Z, ZR, R
To back up ZR and R, set the PLC file setting in the PLC parameter in advance.

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

12.7.1 Backing up latch data

12 - 31

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

12.7.2

Deleting backup data

Delete the backup data in programmable controller CPU.

Operating procedure

1.

Select [Online] [Latch Data Backup] [Delete Backup Data].

2.

Click the

button.

Backup data are deleted.

Precautions on deleting backup data

Backup data cannot be deleted when the programmable controller CPU is in RUN status.
To delete the backup data, set the programmable controller CPU to STOP status.

12 - 32

12.7.2 Deleting backup data

12.8 Backing up/Restoring Data

Backing up/Restoring Data

*1

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

*1: Universal model QCPU (Q00UJ, Q00U, and Q01U) only.

12.8.1

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

This section explains how to back up data in the programmable controller CPU to a memory card, and
restoring it to another programmable controller CPU using Universal model QCPU/LCPU.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

12.8

Backing up data to memory card

Back up data in the programmable controller CPU to a memory card.

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Screen display
Select [Online] [PLC Module Change] [Create Backup Data].
The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

Operating procedure

14

Set the items on the screen.

Description
Display information of the connection channel being set.

Status

Display the execution status of backup.

Setting

Select data to be backed up from "Backup Target Data".

"Default Backup Data" settings are fixed as selected status. They cannot be
changed.

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Connection Channel List

MONITORING

Item

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

1.

12.8.1 Backing up data to memory card

12 - 33

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

2.

Click the

button.

Data backup starts.

When data backup is completed normally, the image as shown below is displayed in "Status".

3.

Remove the memory card.

Turn the programmable controller CPU from OFF to ON, or reset it.

Screen button

Refreshes and displays the execution status of backup when the power is turned OFF or reset.

Displays a total size of data checked in "Backup Target Data".

Sets options for creating backup data.

Deleting backup data

Backup data can be deleted by selecting [Online] [Delete PLC Data]. However, backup data in a Flash card
cannot be deleted.

12 - 34

12.8.1 Backing up data to memory card

12.8 Backing up/Restoring Data

Restoring backup data

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

12.8.2

Restore the registration from backup data for the programmable controller CPU replacement.

Screen display

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Select [Online] [PLC Module Change] [Restore].

The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

Click the

button.

Data restoration starts.

When data restoration is completed normally, the image as shown below is displayed in "Status".

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

1.

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Operating procedure

12.8.2 Restoring backup data

12 - 35

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

12.9

Online Program Change

This section explains the operations for changing programs or data while the programmable controller CPU is
in RUN (Online program change).
The Online program change operations include Online program change performed during conversion/
compilation and performed from the Write to PLC screen in units of files.
Be sure to fully understand the descriptions below and in Section 12.9.4 to 12.9.6 for operating with care.

WARNING
When data change, program change, or status control is performed from a personal computer to a running
programmable controller, create an interlock circuit outside the programmable controller to ensure that the whole
system always operates safely.
Furthermore, for the online operations performed from a personal computer to a programmable controller CPU, the
corrective actions against a communication error due to such as a cable connection fault should be predetermined as
a system.

CAUTION
The online operations performed from a personal computer to a running programmable controller CPU (Program
change when a programmable controller CPU is RUN, operating status change such as RUN-STOP switching, and
remote control operation) have to be executed after the manual has been carefully read and the safety has been
ensured.
When changing a program while a programmable controller CPU is RUN, it may cause a program corruption in some
operating conditions. Fully understand the precautions described in this section.

12 - 36

12.9 Online Program Change

Head
FX

FX

Perform Online program change during conversion/compilation after program change.

Before changing a program, check that the program matches the one in the programmable controller
CPU using the Verify with PLC function. Online program change cannot be performed if the programs
do not match.

RUN

Writes data to programmable

controller CPU in units of
changed ladder blocks.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

Projects without labels

12

Operating procedure

1.

Verify a program against a program in programmable controller CPU to ensure that

they match.

2.

Change or modify the program.

3.

Select [Compile] [Online Program Change] to perform Online program change.

13

The message is displayed.

Fully understand the message before performing Online program change.
<When writing/deleting SFC blocks>

14
MONITORING

<When not writing/deleting SFC blocks>

10

WRITING/READING
DATA

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

SEARCH/REPLACE

Performing Online program change during conversion/compile

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

12.9.1

15
button.

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Click the

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

4.

12.9.1 Performing Online program change during conversion/compile

12 - 37

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

Projects with labels

Operating procedure

1.

Verify a program against a program in programmable controller CPU to ensure that

they match.

2.

Change or modify the program.

3.

Select [Compile] [Online Program Change].

The Execution Confirmation for Online Program Change screen is displayed.

4.

Select "Execute compile and online change after conversion" and click the
button.
The program is converted and compiled simultaneously, and Online program change is performed.
The following message is displayed.
<When not writing/deleting SFC blocks>

12 - 38

<When writing/deleting SFC blocks>

12.9.1 Performing Online program change during conversion/compile

12.9 Online Program Change

5.

Click the

button.

Be sure to read and fully understand the message, and click the
<When not writing/deleting SFC blocks>

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

The following message is displayed.

button.

<When writing SFC blocks>

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11
<When deleting SFC blocks>

Set the items on the screen.

Item

13

Description

Online Change

Reflect Changes to Boot Source*2

Check this to update the change to the boot source while the target
memory is booting.

*1 :

For FXCPU, this item is supported by FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later only.

*2 :

Not supported by FXCPU.

Click the

14
MONITORING

Check this to write the symbolic information to the programmable controller

CPU.
Select "Target Memory".

button.

Online program change is completed.

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

7.

Write Symbolic Information to PLC*1

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

6.

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

12.9.1 Performing Online program change during conversion/compile

12 - 39

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

Writing range for Online program change

Perform Online program change with the following writing range which depends on the editing mode.
When a new ladder block is inserted, the inserted program is written together with two steps (one
before and the other after the program) to the programmable controller CPU.
Therefore, the Online program change may not be completed at a time depending on the number of
program steps added and the two steps before and after the program. In this case, reduce the number
of steps written at a time and perform Online program change in several times.
The following table shows the number of steps that can be written at once.
CPU type

Number of steps that

can be written at once

QCPU, LCPU

512

FX3G, FX3U, FX3UC

256

FX0N, FX2, FX2C, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC

127

<Example>

Range of the program

Newly inserted written at Online
program
program change
(including previous
and next steps)

Editing separate ladder blocks

For QCPU (Q mode), when the programmable controller CPU has "Online change area of multiple
blocks" in its memory, multiple blocks can be written in units of blocks.
For High Performance model QCPU, "Online change area of multiple blocks" can be created using
the memory format function. (
Section 17.2)

12 - 40

12.9.1 Performing Online program change during conversion/compile

12.9 Online Program Change

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

When performing Online program change to a programmable controller CPU for the first time, or an error
occurs during Online program change
Make sure that the program before writing matches the program in the programmable controller CPU with the
Verify with PLC function.
When the program part to be written does not match
If the program part to be written does not match with the program in the programmable controller CPU, Online
program change cannot be performed.
Perform Online program change in units of files. (
Section 12.9.2)
When Online program change of multiple blocks cannot be performed
The message is displayed in the following cases when Online program change is performed. Select whether to
perform Online program change in units of files.
There are no "Online change area of multiple blocks".
The number of blocks exceeds the limit of Online program change of multiple blocks.
The programmable controller CPU does not support the Online program change of multiple blocks.
When performing Online program change to a programmable controller CPU in which the symbolic
information has been written
Symbolic information, which contain the program configuration data such as structure data types and labels, are
the data necessary only for restoring the data such as structured data types and labels after reading a program
from the programmable controller CPU. (
Section 12.1.1) Therefore, the write of symbolic information does not
affect the operation of the programmable controller CPU, however, when performing Online program change to a
programmable controller CPU in which the symbolic information has been written, be sure to write the execution
program together with the symbolic information.
However, note that because it may take a few or more minutes to write symbolic information, it is recommended
not to write symbolic information every Online program change but to perform the Write to PLC operation to write
symbolic information after all process of Online program change are completed. (
Section 12.9.2)
Online program change after compiling all programs
All programs need to be compiled when the following operations are performed. Therefore the [Online Program
Change] function cannot be performed.
Write programs to programmable controller CPU after compiling all programs. (
Section 12.1, Section 12.9.2)
Changing the following PLC parameters
"Common Pointer No." and "Timer Limit Setting" on the <<PLC System>> tab
"File Register" and "File for Local Device" on the <<PLC File>> tab
Settings on the <<Device>> tab
Changing the following option settings
"Default Length of String Data Type" in "Label Setting Editor"
Settings in "Compile"
Changing automatically assigned devices
Updating instructions and application functions when opening Structured project.
Changing PLC type
Changing project type
Executing the Write to PLC function when a new project is not created, or a project is not opened
Automatic project save after Online program change
According to the option setting, the project can be saved automatically after Online program change. Select [Tool]
[Options] "Project" "Automatic Save" and check "Save project after online change".
Editing separate ladder blocks with FXCPU
For FXCPU, ladder blocks between the edited ladder blocks are also written to the programmable controller CPU.
Performing Online program change with FXCPU
Symbolic information can be written to a programmable controller CPU with the Online program change function
for projects of FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later only.
The Online program change function does not support SFC programs.
When selecting [Compile] [Online Program Change], Online program change may not be able to be
performed if a restriction of the programmable controller CPU is applied to the compilation result. (
Section
12.9.6)

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

12.9.1 Performing Online program change during conversion/compile

12 - 41

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

12.9.2

Performing Online program change in units of files

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

*1: Not supported by Basic model QCPU.

Write programs or data in units of files while the programmable controller CPU is in RUN.

RUN

Writes data to
programmable
controller CPU in
units of files.

Operating procedure

Select [Online] [Write to PLC] for Online

program change.
The message is displayed.
Fully understand the message before performing
Online program change.
(Writing to programmable controller CPU
Section 12.1)

12 - 42

12.9.2 Performing Online program change in units of files

12.9 Online Program Change

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

14
MONITORING

Data that can be written in units of files with Online program change
Data such as sequence programs and device comments can be written with Online program change.
The data that can be written with Online program change depends on the write target memory.
For details, refer to the following manual.
User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be used
Online program change after compiling all programs
The Online program change cannot be performed after compiling all programs. When the Online program change
function is executed after compiling all programs, the programmable controller CPU is remotely stopped and
programs are written to the programmable controller CPU.
Compiling all programs changes the device assignment to labels. Therefore, device values set before the program
change remain on the device-assigned labels.
By setting the following option, device values in the range set in the device/label automatic-assign setting can be
automatically cleared to 0 after writing programs to the programmable controller CPU.
[Tool] [Options] "When writing to PLC after a Rebuild All operation, clear the device ranges set in the Device/
Label Auto-Assign setting to 0."
For not configuring the above setting, as a precautionary measure, after writing programs to the programmable
controller CPU, reset the programmable controller CPU, clear all device memories including latches, clear all file
registers, then switch the programmable controller CPU to RUN. (
Section 17.3)
For the precautions on compiling all programs, refer to the following manuals.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)/(Structured Project)
Memory shortage of the programmable controller CPU
Increase the free space of the programmable controller CPU with the Memory arrangement function.
(
Section 17.4)
If the capacity is still insufficient after the operation, switch the programmable controller CPU to STOP and delete
unnecessary programs in it. Then, write the programs using the Write to PLC function.
(Delete PLC Data
Section 12.3, Write to PLC
Section 12.1)
When performing Online program change to a programmable controller CPU in which the symbolic
information has been written
Symbolic information, which contains the program configuration data such as structure data types and labels, is
data necessary for restoring the data such as structured data types and labels after reading a program from the
programmable controller CPU. (
Section 12.1.1) Therefore, the symbolic information does not affect the
operation of the programmable controller CPU, however, write the symbolic information when performing Online
program change to a programmable controller CPU to which the symbolic information has been written.
However, note that because it may take a few minutes to write symbolic information, it is recommended not to write
symbolic information every Online program change but to write symbolic information after all Online program
changes are completed.
When performing Online program change to Universal model QCPU
For Universal model QCPU, the following Online program change cannot be performed.
Online program change performed on a program which does not exist in a programmable controller CPU.
Online program change performed on a program which is not registered on the <<Program>> tab of PLC
parameter.
Online program change on an SFC program in unit of file.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

12.9.2 Performing Online program change in units of files

12 - 43

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

12.9.3

Online program change starting from pointer

*1

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

*1: Not supported by Basic model QCPU function version A.

Write data to one file with several GX Works2s while the programmable controller CPU is in RUN, using
relative step numbers starting from a pointer.
A pointer for Online program change needs to be set in advance.
<Example>
A program added with
another GX Works2
GX Works2 side

CPU side

Online program
change

Add a program

Based on relative step numbers starting from the pointer P2,

program mismatching does not occur even if there is
misalignment of step numbers, and Online program change
can be performed successfully.

Screen display
[Tool] [Options] "Online Change"

Operating procedure
Check "Execute online program change based on relative step No.".
When Online program change is performed, data are written with relative step numbers starting from
the pointer.

Ladder blocks including a pointer

When performing Online program change based on relative step numbers starting from the pointer, do not add any
line statements to a ladder block including the pointer.
If Online program change of a program with line statements is performed, program mismatching may occur. In this
case, perform Read from PLC, and executes normal Online program change.

12 - 44

12.9.3 Online program change starting from pointer

12.9 Online Program Change

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

Fall instruction
The fall instruction may be executed even if the executing condition (ONOFF) in the onlinechanged ladder is not satisfied.
For the types and functions of the fall instructions, refer to the Programming Manual for each CPU.
<Fall instruction examples> PLF, LDF, ANDF, ORF, MEF, FCALLP, and EFCALLP
Fall instruction

OFFOFF

Executed*1

OFFON

Not executed

ONOFF

Executed*1

ONON

Not executed

*1 :

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

ON/OFF status of a contact

(conduction state at Online
program change)

For details of disabling the fall instruction execution, refer to the following section.
Disabling the fall instruction in Online program change for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)

Rise instruction
The rise instruction may not be executed even if the executing condition (OFFON) in the onlinechanged ladder is satisfied.
The rise instruction is executed when the executing condition turns OFFON again.
For the types and functions of the rise instructions, refer to the programming manual of each CPU.
<Rise instruction examples> PLS, LDP, ANDP, ORP, and MEP

14

Rise instruction

OFFOFF

Not executed

OFFON

Not executed

ONOFF

Not executed

ONON

Not executed

13

MONITORING

ON/OFF status of a contact

(conduction state at Online
program change)

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

QCPU (Q Mode)/LCPU

SCJ instruction

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

When the executing condition for the SCJ instruction is ON after writing, the instruction jumps to
the specified pointer without waiting for one scan.

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

The following explains the precautions on Online program change of programs containing the rise, fall,
or SCJ instruction.

9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Precautions on Online program change of rise, fall, or SCJ

instruction

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

12.9.4

12.9.4 Precautions on Online program change of rise, fall, or SCJ instruction

12 - 45

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

Disabling the fall instruction in Online program change for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU

The following explains methods for avoiding the fall instruction execution when the executing condition
(ONOFF) of the fall instruction for the online-changed program is not satisfied.
Using the option setting (not supported by Basic model QCPU)
The fall instruction execution can be disabled by selecting [Tool] [Options] "Online Change"
and setting the "Execute fall instruction". However, the fall instruction is not executed even if the
executing condition (ON OFF) is satisfied in the online-changed ladder. The fall instruction is
executed when the execution condition turns ON OFF again.
For information on the QCPU versions that support this function, refer to the User's Manual
(Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be used.
<Example>
The following example shows the difference in the executing status depending on the option
setting.
<Program example>
M0
[INC D0]

INC D0 is executed immediately

after Online program change.
Online program
change execution
Contact
input M0
Falling pulse
instruction
output LDF M0 execution LDF M0 execution
(LDF M0)

INC D0 is not executed immediately

after Online program change.
Online program
change execution
Contact
input M0
Falling pulse
instruction
output No LDF M0 execution LDF M0 execution
(LDF M0)

1 scan
"Execute fall instruction" is selected in the [Options].

1 scan
"Execute fall instruction" is not selected in the [Options].

Universal model QCPU/LCPU

In option setting for Universal model QCPU/LCPU, the item is not selected at default.

Replacing the instruction with the EGF instruction

The fall instruction execution can be disabled with the EGF instruction, which converts the
operation result into a pulse.
For details, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common Instructions)

12 - 46

12.9.4 Precautions on Online program change of rise, fall, or SCJ instruction

12.9 Online Program Change

When Online program change of ladders which include fall instructions (LDF/ANDF/ORF) is
completed, the fall instructions are not executed regardless of the ON/OFF status of their target
devices.
Fall instructions (PLF) are also not executed regardless of the ON/OFF status of their operating
condition devices.
To execute a fall instruction, turn the status of its target device/operating condition device ON
OFF again.
Performing Online program change of a ladder block including fall instructions (LDF/ANDF/ORF)
Target devices are OFF

Contacts of the LDF/ANDF/ORF instructions in the ladder block remain OFF.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

Performing Online program change of a ladder block including the PLF instruction
Operating condition is ON

Operating condition is OFF

Target devices of the PLF instruction in the ladder block do not operate.*1

*1 :

Operate if the operating condition changes ON OFF before/after Online

program change.

12

Rise instruction
When Online program change of ladders which include rise instructions is completed, the rise
instructions are executed if their target devices/operating condition devices are ON.
Target rise instructions: LDP, ANDP, ORP, and Pulse operation type application instructions
(such as MOVP)
Performing Online program change of a ladder block including rise instructions (LDP/ANDP/ORP)
Target devices are OFF

Contacts of the LDP/ANDP/ORP instructions in

the ladder block turn ON for one scan.

Contacts of the LDP/ANDP/ORP instructions in

the ladder block remain OFF.

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Target devices are ON

Performing Online program change of a ladder block including pulse operation type
application instructions (such as MOVP)

14

Operating condition is OFF

The relevant pulse operation type application
instruction in the ladder block does not operate.

MONITORING

Operating condition is ON
The relevant pulse operation type application
instruction in the ladder block operates for one
scan.

Performing Online program change of a ladder block including the PLS instruction
Operating condition is ON

Operating condition is OFF

15

Target devices of the PLS instruction in the ladder block do not operate.*2

Operate if the operating condition changes OFF ON before/after Online

program change.

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

*2 :

WRITING/READING
DATA

Target devices are ON

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Fall instruction

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

FXCPU

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

12.9.4 Precautions on Online program change of rise, fall, or SCJ instruction

12 - 47

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

Operation result falling pulse instruction

When Online program change of ladders which include operation result falling pulse instructions
(MEF) is completed, the operation result falling pulse instructions are not executed regardless of
the satisfied/not satisfied status of their executing condition.
To execute an operation result falling pulse instruction, turn the operation result up to it once ON,
and then OFF.
Performing Online program change of a ladder block including the MEF instruction
Executing condition is satisfied

Executing condition is not satisfied

The operation result of the MEF instruction is OFF.

Operation result rising pulse instruction

When Online program change of ladders which include operation result rising pulse instructions
(MEP) is completed, the operation result of the operation result rising pulse instruction is ON if the
operation result up to it is ON.
Performing Online program change of a ladder block including the MEP instruction
Operation result up to the MEP instruction is Operation result up to the MEP instruction is
ON
OFF
The operation result of the MEP instruction is
ON.

12.9.5

The operation result of the MEP instruction is

OFF.

Precautions on Online program change of SFC programs

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

The following explains the precautions on Online program change of SFC programs.
For LCPU/FXCPU, the Online program change function does not support SFC programs.
Online program change for operation outputs/transition conditions
Online program change cannot be performed after changing programs of multiple operation
outputs/transition conditions.
After correcting the program, perform Online program change for each unit of operation output or
transition condition.
Online program change of SFC diagrams (For CPU modules which do not support Online program
change of SFC blocks)
When a SFC diagram is edited, perform Online program change in unit of file by selecting [Online]
[Write to PLC] (

Section 12.9.2).

Online program change of SFC diagrams (For CPU modules which support Online program
change of SFC blocks)
When a SFC diagram is edited, Online program change can be performed in unit of SFC block by
selecting [Compile] [Online Program Change].

Restrictions
Online program change of SFC blocks
For details of CPU modules which support Online program change of SFC blocks, and restrictions regarding
Online program change of SFC blocks, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-Q/L/QnA Programming Manual (SFC)

12 - 48

12.9.5 Precautions on Online program change of SFC programs

12.9 Online Program Change

Precautions on each programmable controller series

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

The following explains the precautions on Online program change for each programmable controller
series.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

12.9.6

During boot operation

Online program change to
program memory
Write the changed program to the target memory of transfer source.
(Universal model QCPU/
LCPU)
Deleting a corresponding device
from a program

When an instruction is deleted during the OUT instruction execution, or when the device
number has been changed and the corresponding device cannot be found in the
program, the output status is retained. Perform Online program change after ensuring
that sequence programs containing unnecessary coil outputs are OFF.

While a low-speed execution type program is executed, Online program change starts
after the program execution. The program execution is suspended during Online
program change.
Online program change while a lowHowever, if "PRG TIME OVER(5010)" keeps occurring while a low-speed execution type
speed execution type program is
program is executed, Online program change cannot be performed.
executed
In this case, set the programmable controller CPU to STOP, and increase the constant
scan time and low- speed program execution time in PLC parameter, then reattempt
Online program change.
When the number of secured steps exceeds the currently set number during Online
program change, the following message is displayed. In this case, set a new number
of secured steps.
If '0' is set for the number of secured steps on the following message screen, the area
for the exceeding amount from the secured steps is reserved and a sequence program
is written.
The number of secured steps newly set on the following message screen is not
displayed on the Program Detail Setting screen of the Write to PLC function.

12

13

14
MONITORING

Allocating memory for Online

program change

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Online program change to another

station

Description
Online program change to another station can be performed within the accessible range
set in the connection destination setting.
Take extra caution when performing Online program change to another station.

WRITING/READING
DATA

Item

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU

15
The message above is not displayed with Basic model QCPU function version A.

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

12.9.6 Precautions on each programmable controller series

12 - 49

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

Item

Description
The following message may be displayed during Online program change. Take corrective
action by following the message.

Error during Online program

change
If the above error message is displayed, the program in GX Works2 changes back to the
uncompiled status. However, the program in the programmable controller CPU may have
been changed.
In this case, compile the GX Works2 program and verify it against the program in the
programmable controller CPU to confirm that these programs match. If the programs do
not match, write the program to the programmable controller CPU using the Write to PLC
function to match them.
When Online program change is performed to a sequence program for which a password
is set, the Disable Password screen is displayed. Unlock the password to perform Online
Online program change of a
program for which a password is set program change.
Online program change is not possible if a password cannot be unlocked.

Online program change to

Universal model QCPU

Universal model QCPU has option setting of "Transfer program cache memory to
program memory" that allows selection whether to transfer the contents of program
cache memory to program memory after Online program change.
(For option setting,
Section 21.2)
For Universal model QCPU, the contents of the modification are not reflected to the
boot source even when CPU is in the boot operation. Be sure to reflect the contents of
the modification to the boot source by executing the Write to PLC function.
(
Section 12.1)
For Universal model QCPU, when a password is registered/changed while the
programmable controller CPU is running, the program memory batch transfer is
executed. (
Section 12.6)
While program memory is being transferred in Universal model QCPU after Online
program change, the following functions cannot be executed.
Online program change (ladder, SFC, structured ladder, ST, FB)*1
Change TC Setting (when "Write changed program to PLC" is checked)*1

*1 :

12 - 50

Write to PLC (when the target memory is program memory)*1

Program memory batch transfer
Set as default connection
Connection destination setting
Change PLC Type
Check Parameter

For Universal model QCPU with a serial number whose first five digits
are '12012' or higher, the process of the program memory batch transfer
can be canceled. (
Section 12.6)

12.9.6 Precautions on each programmable controller series

12.9 Online Program Change

9
Description

Programmable controller CPUs that support Online program change

FX2C/FXU series (Version No. V2.1 or later)

10

FX3U/FX3UC series

Built-in RAM or optional FLASH cassette

(PROTECT switch OFF)

FX3G series

Built-in EEPROM or optional EEPROM memory cassette

(PROTECT switch OFF)

FX2N series

Built-in RAM, optional RAM cassette or optional EEPROM

cassette (PROTECT switch OFF)

FX2NC series

Built-in RAM or optional memory board

(PROTECT switch OFF)

FX1NC series

Built-in EEPROM

FX1S/FX1N series

Built-in EEPROM or optional memory cassette

(PROTECT switch OFF)

FXU/FX2C series

Built-in RAM or optional RAM cassette

FX0N series

Built-in EEPROM

11

A modified ladder must not contain added/deleted/changed P and I labels.

A target range for Online program change must not contain I labels
If a ladder before or after modification contains the C235 to C255 high-speed counter
output instruction (OUT instruction) and the application instructions (MNET, ANRD,
ANWR, RMST, RMWR, BLK, and MCDE), the ladder cannot be changed.
A new 1ms retentive timer must not be inserted.
When using FX0N, FXU, FX2C,
FX1S, FX1N, FX2N, FX1NC or FX2NC

SEARCH/REPLACE

Memory type

FX0N series (Version No.V1.10 or later) and

FX1S/FX1N/FX2N/FX3G/FX3U/FX1NC/FX2NC/FX3UC series

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Model name

If the number of program steps decrease due to deletion of contacts, coils, and
application instructions etc., the same number of NOPs equivalent to the number of
steps removed are added.
For the application instruction (EXTR) for FX2N and FX2NC, do not perform Online
program change during communication (while the instruction is being activated).
Communication may stop if Online program change is performed during
communication.
If the communication stops, switch the programmable controller CPU from STOP to
RUN.
A modified ladder must not contain added/deleted/changed P and I labels.
A target range for Online program change must not contain I labels.
If a ladder before or after modification contains the C235 to C255 high-speed counter
output instruction (OUT instruction) and the application instructions (SORT2, TBL,
RBFM, WBFM), the ladder cannot be changed.

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Item

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

FXCPU

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

14

For the IVCK, IVDR, IVRD, IVWR, and IVBWR inverter communication instructions, do
not perform Online program change during communication (while the instruction is
being activated). Communication may stop if Online program change is performed
during inverter communication.
If communication stops, switch the programmable controller CPU from STOP to RUN.

15

16

To the next page

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

When using FX3G, FX3U or FX3UC

Do not perform Online program change for positioning instructions (DSZR, DVIT, ZRN,
PLSV, DRVI, DRVA) while the pulse output instruction is being executed. The pulse
output stops if the ladder is online-changed during the pulse output instruction
execution.
PLSV instruction [without acceleration or deceleration] stops immediately.
DSZR, DVIT, ZRN, PLSV [with acceleration and deceleration] DRVI and DRVA
instructions stop after decreasing the speed.
When these instructions are stopped as a result of Online program change, deactivate
the instructions (OFF) and activate them again (ON).

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

If the number of program steps decrease due to deletion of contacts, coils, and
application instructions etc., the same number of NOPs equivalent to the number of
steps removed are added.

MONITORING

A new 1ms retentive timer must not be inserted.

12.9.6 Precautions on each programmable controller series

12 - 51

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

Item

Description
A substitute instruction for a new instruction cannot be inserted or replaced in the
program.
Even a substitute instruction is already written in a program, the function is disabled
due to Online program change.

When using FXU (V3.07 or later) or

FX2C*1

The operations of the CMP, ZCP, MOV, ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, INC, and DEC
instructions can be processed at a high speed when word devices specified by digit or
index modification are not set to the data.
However, the high-speed processing function is disabled when Online program change
or insertion is performed.
The OFF execution time of the application instructions for FXU (V3.07 or later) and
FX2C can be processed at a high speed.
However, the high-speed processing function is disabled when Online program change
or insertion is performed. The processing time is approximately 60% of that for FXU
(V2.30 or earlier).

When using FXU

(V2.1 to V2.30)

When using FX0N (V1.10 or later)

The application instructions and element numbers added to FXU (V3.07 or later) are
written to the programmable controller CPU program memory. The programmable
controller CPU assumes that these instructions are non-processing instructions and
continues its operation.
However, when the programmable controller CPU operating status is changed from
STOP to RUN, a program is checked and, as the result, the 'PROG-E LED' indicator
flashes. If this happens, correct application instructions and element numbers not
supported and batch-transfer the correct program.
If an element number specified as an operand of application instructions is not
supported by FXU (V2.1 to V2.30), the instruction is written to the programmable
controller CPU program memory as it is. In this case, an element number range over
operation error occurs. The programmable controller CPU assumes that these
instructions are non-processing instructions and continues its operation.
However, when the programmable controller CPU operating status is changed from
STOP to RUN, a program is checked and, as the result, the "PROG-E LED" indicator
flashes. If this happens, batch-transfer the program with the correct operand set to
application instructions.
If a written element number is not supported by FX0N, the message "The changed
program contains an instruction or device not supported for Online program change.
Online program change operation is disabled for this program" is displayed, and the
program change is stopped.
The pulse executing type application instruction is not available for FX0N. If this
instruction is written, the message "Write failure" is displayed, and the program change
is stopped.

When using FX0N/FXU/FX2C/FX1S/

FX1N/FX2N/FX3U/FX1NC/FX2NC/
FX3UC (earlier than V2.00)

Ladder change is possible for one ladder block at a time and the number of program
steps after editing (adding/deleting) must be within 127 (including an NOP immediately
after the ladder block and excluding the end ladder).
To change programs with more than 127 steps, use the Batch-transfer function.

When using FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC

(V2.00 or later)

Ladder change of multiple ladder blocks at a time is possible and the changes can be
written with Online program change. However, the number of the program steps from
the start ladder block to the end ladder after editing must be within 256 steps (including
unchanged ladders). To change programs with more than 256 steps, use the Batchtransfer function.

When using FX3U/FX3UC (V3.00 or

later)

Online program change can be performed only when the protection status (validated or
invalidated) of the block password setting for "Read-protect the execution program" is
the same as the programmable controller CPU of the online change target.

*1 :

12 - 52

Each deteriorated function can be recovered by switching the programmable controller CPU from STOP to
RUN after Online program change.

12.9.6 Precautions on each programmable controller series

12.10 Calculating Memory Size

FX

This section explains how to calculate a memory size required when data in a user-created project is written
to the programmable controller CPU.

Offline calculation and Online calculation

There are two ways to calculate the memory size: the offline calculation and the online calculation.

11

(
Section 12.10.3)
For FXCPU, only the offline calculation is supported.
(

Section 12.10.4)
Offline calculation
Displays the size of available memory if data are written to the programmable controller CPU after
its memory is initialized by the PLC memory format function etc.
In the system file memory size entry field, enter the system file size acquired by the online
calculation.
Online calculation
Displays the size of available memory if selected files are actually written to the programmable
controller CPU.
Regarding data written in the programmable controller CPU, the exact size of available memory
can be confirmed.
This function is available when GX Works2 is capable of communicating with the programmable
controller CPU.

12.10.2

Setting target data for memory size calculation

(QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

12.10.1

10

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Head
FX

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

SEARCH/REPLACE

12.10 Calculating Memory Size

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

14
Set the target data for memory size calculation.
MONITORING

Screen display
Select [Tool] [Confirm Memory Size].

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

File list

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

12.10.1 Offline calculation and Online calculation

12 - 53

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description

Target Memory/Memory Card

Type

Set the memory of which the size is to be calculated, and memory card type.
For details of the memory card application, refer to the following manuals.
QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and
Inspection)

File list

Target

2.

Click the

Select data of which the size is to be calculated.

button.

The result of memory size calculation is displayed. (

Section 12.10.3)

Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 12.1.

12.10.3

Confirming result of memory size calculation

(QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)

Display the result of memory size calculation. Additionally, the offline calculation and online calculation
can be switched each other.

Screen display
Select [Tool] [Confirm Memory Size]
<Offline calculation>

Target section
Calculation
result section

Sum total section

Memory status
graph section

System file memory

size entry field

12 - 54

12.10.3 Confirming result of memory size calculation (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)

12.10 Calculating Memory Size

9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

<Online calculation>

Target section

Calculation
result section

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Sum total section

Memory status
graph section

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

Target Memory
Display Option

Select the unit (Byte/Step/%) used for displaying the file size and memory
size.

<<Offline>>/<<Online>>

Switch the result display between the offline calculation and online
calculation.
The result of the offline calculation is displayed just after the execution of
the memory size calculation.
For High Performance model QCPU, the <<Online>> tab is not displayed
when "Target Memory" is 'Memory Card (Flash)/Standard ROM'.
For Universal model CPU, the <<Online>> tab is not displayed when
"Target Memory" is 'Memory Card (Flash)'.

Calculation result section

Display the size of the data selected on the Confirm Memory Size screen in
units of files.

Target section

System file memory size entry field

(Offline calculation only)

Enter the memory size of system files.

The default value is "0" at the offline calculation.
Enter the memory size when using system files.
When the exact memory size is required, it can be confirmed by the online
calculation.
The memory size of system files may differ depending on target memory.

Sum total section

Display the calculation result according to conditions of the target memory,

IC card type, and files specified in the Confirm Memory Size screen.

Memory status graph section

Display the calculation result in a circle graph.

It is displayed in red when there is no available memory.

Detail

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Description
Display the target memory and IC card type selected on the Confirm
Memory Size screen.

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Item

14
MONITORING

Display contents

15

Display the detailed information of the result of the memory size

calculation.

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 12.1.

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

12.10.3 Confirming result of memory size calculation (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)

12 - 55

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

File size of symbolic information

The symbolic information in a project (with labels) is compressed every memory size calculation/Write to PLC
operation. The memory size may vary because date information is added every time, even though the symbolic
information itself is not changed.
File size units for programmable controller CPUs
Memory of a programmable controller CPU is occupied by file size units. Therefore, the required memory size may
be larger than the actual file size.
For details of file size units, refer to the following manuals.
User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be used
Memory size required for parameters and system files
Parameters/system files consist of multiple files.
The memory size required to store parameters/system files is the total of memory areas occupied by each files.
Display example of "System File" (for Q12HCPU with a serial number whose first file digits are "04122")
<Sampling trace>
File size
: 2422 bytes
Memory size : 3072 bytes
<Error history data>
File size
: 5472 bytes
Memory size : 6144 bytes

<Display of "System File">

File size
: 7894 bytes
Memory size : 9216 bytes
The following table shows files included in parameters and system files.
File
Parameters

PLC parameter, Network parameter

Boot file

Created when the boot file setting is configured.

Remote password

Created when the remote password setting is configured.

Sampling trace file

Local device

For details of each file, refer to the following manuals.

Users Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU
module to be used

User setting system

area

An area specified when the programmable controller CPU memory is formatted.

(For formatting programmable controller CPU memory,
Section 17.2)

PLC user data

User-optional data

Graphic data for PX

Developer

User-created graphic data

Error history file

System files

Parameter

Parameter file

Memory capacity
The memory capacity may be displayed smaller than it really is.

12 - 56

12.10.3 Confirming result of memory size calculation (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)

12.10 Calculating Memory Size

Confirming result of memory size calculation (FXCPU)

Display sizes and capacities of program and symbolic information calculated offline.
Displayed values are values when the program and parameters are written to the programmable
controller CPU.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

12.10.4

10

Screen display

SEARCH/REPLACE

Select [Tool] [Confirm Memory Size].

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

Display contents
Description

Display the number of current program steps.

"---" is displayed when the program is uncompiled.

Program Capacity

Display the value set for "Program Capacity" of the project side PLC parameter.

Error Information
Confirm Symbolic Information

*1 :

Display error information regarding the program size and capacity.

*1

Check this to calculate the symbolic information size and capacity.

Memory Type

Select a memory type used on the programmable controller CPU.

The symbolic information capacity increases/decreases according to the memory type.

Symbolic Information Size

Display the current symbolic information size in byte unit.

"---" is displayed when the program is uncompiled.

Symbolic Information Capacity

Display the symbolic information capacity in byte unit.

The symbolic information capacity increases/decreases according to the memory type
used on the programmable controller CPU or the memory capacity set in the PLC
parameter.

Error Information

Display error information regarding the symbolic information size and capacity.

This item is displayed only for FX3U and FX3UC projects with labels.

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

File size of symbolic information

For projects with labels, the symbolic information is compressed each time the memory capacity is calculated or
data is written to the programmable controller CPU. Since date information is included when the symbolic
information is compressed, its memory capacity may change even though the symbolic information has not been
changed.

14
MONITORING

Program Size

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

Status

Display compilation status.

"---" is displayed for simple projects (without labels).

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Item

12.10.4 Confirming result of memory size calculation (FXCPU)

12 - 57

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

12.10.5

Precautions on calculating memory size

The following explains the precautions on calculating memory size.

1)

Memory size calculation using the offline calculation

A memory size of system files may differ depending on the target memory.
Confirm a memory size of system files using the online calculation and enter the value in the
system file memory size entry field.
Without using the value calculated by the online calculation, an accurate result may not be
ensured.

2)

Limit of the number of files

The number of files that can be stored in the programmable controller CPU is limited, however, the
memory size calculation ignores the limit.
Set target data so that the number of files including those stored in the programmable controller
CPU is less or equal to the limit.
QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

3)

Specifying a range of file registers

At the online calculation, when a range smaller than that of file registers written in the
programmable controller CPU is specified for the target data of the memory size calculation, the
difference from the written file registers is displayed as "Use Volume".

4)

Calculating a memory size of a Flash card/SD memory card/standard ROM

For High Performance model QCPU, a memory size of a Flash card/standard ROM can be
confirmed only using the offline calculation.
For Universal model QCPU/LCPU, a memory size of a Flash card/SD memory card can be
confirmed only using the offline calculation. A memory size of a standard ROM can also be
confirmed using the online calculation.
To confirm a memory size required when writing data using the export to ROM function, select
'Program Memory' for "Target Memory".

5)

When data cannot be written to the programmable controller CPU

When data cannot be written to the programmable controller CPU despite enough available
memory, perform Arrange PLC Memory to secure consecutive free memory areas. (Arrange PLC
Memory

6)

Section 17.4)

Calculating a memory size of an ATA card

For Q2MEM-8/16/32MBA, confirm an accurate drive capacity using the online calculation.
Depending on the versions of the Q2MEM-8/16/32MBA and CPU module, the offline calculation
may be based on a drive capacity smaller than it really is.

12 - 58

12.10.5 Precautions on calculating memory size

12.11 Writing/Reading Data to/from Memory Cards

This section explains the functions for writing/reading data to/from a memory card installed to a personal
computer.
If a memory card cannot be installed to a programmable controller CPU, the data can be written to/read from
the memory card on a personal computer by using this function.
For the system configuration and other information to use a memory card on a personal computer, refer to
Section 2.4.
For writing/reading data when the memory card is installed to a programmable controller CPU.
Section 12.1

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

12.11 Writing/Reading Data to/from Memory Cards

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

If a memory card is formatted using the function such as Windows format function it may not be used on the
programmable controller CPU.
PLC user data
The PLC user data in the memory card installed to a personal computer cannot write/read to/from GX Works2
directly.

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Write/read the data using the application such as Windows Explorer.

For writing/reading the PLC user data in the memory card installed to a programmable controller CPU, refer to
Section 12.5.
Reading intelligent function module data
To read intelligent function module data, create the intelligent function module data in the project in advance.
If the intelligent function module data that match the data in the memory card or the image data do not exist, the
data are read as data of an unsupported module.

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Formatting memory cards

Format the memory card to be used on the programmable controller CPU by selecting [Online] [PLC Memory
Operation] [Format PLC Memory] in GX Works2.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

12 - 59

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

12.11.1

Writing/reading data to/from ATA/SRAM/SD memory cards

*1

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

*1: Not supported by Basic model QCPU, Q00UJ, Q00U, and Q01U

Write/read data in a memory card (ATA card, SRAM card or SD memory card) installed to a personal
computer to/from GX Works2.
GX Works2
Data write/read

Insert to card reader or card slot

MITSUBISHI

MELSEC

Writing/reading data

Screen display
Select [Tool] [IC Memory Card] [Write IC Memory Card]/[Read IC Memory Card].
<Screen for writing IC memory card>

Operating procedure

1.

Set the following items on the screen.

Item

2.

Description

IC Memory Card Drive

Select the drive of the personal computer where the memory card is installed.

Title

Enter title of the target memory when writing data to the IC memory card.
Display the title of the target memory when reading data from the IC memory card.

Edit Data
(Write IC Memory Card only)

Select data to be written from the data list.

Display the data list of the open project.
(
Section 12.1)

IC Memory Data
(Read IC Memory Card only)

Select data to be read from the data list.

Display the data list of the project in the memory card.
(
Section 12.1)

Click the

button.

For the Write IC Memory Card function, the specified data are written to the memory card.
For the Read IC Memory Card function, the specified data are read from the memory card.

12 - 60

12.11.1 Writing/reading data to/from ATA/SRAM/SD memory cards

12.12 Reading Data of Local Devices

12.12 Reading Data of Local Devices

*1

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

*1: Universal model QCPU (excluding Q00UJ) with a serial number whose first five digits are "12012" or higher only

This section explains how to read local device data from the programmable controller CPU and save the data
to a personal computer in CSV format.

1.

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Operating procedure

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Select [Online] [Local Device Batch Read + Save CSV].

The Local Device Batch Read + Save CSV screen is displayed.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

Enter a name of the file to be saved.

3.

Click the

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

2.

button.

The data of local devices are saved in the personal computer.

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

12 - 61

GX Works2

12 WRITING/READING DATA

Formatting CSV files

Saved CSV files are displayed as shown below when they are opened by Excel.
(Example) The following tables show the settings of this example.
Setting for programs and file usability
Program name
MAIN

File usability setting

Based on PLC file settings

SUB

Not used

SUB2

Based on PLC file settings

Setting for local devices

Device name
M

Device range
0 to 49

0 to 29

100 to 149

<CSV file>
Program name
File usability setting

Local devices of
program MAIN

For T, ST, and C, contacts,

coils, and current values
are read respectively.
Device names and
local device values

Program name
File usability setting
Program name
File usability setting

Device names and

local device values

12 - 62

Local devices of
program SUB

Local devices of
program SUB2

This chapter explains the function for setting a password (a keyword for FXCPU) to protect the programmable
controller CPU data against such as falsification and leak.

SEARCH/REPLACE

11

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Registering/Changing Password (QCPU (Q mode)). . . . . . 13-2

Registering/Changing Password (LCPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Registering/Changing Keyword (FXCPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

13.1
13.2
13.3

10

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

13 PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

13 - 1

GX Works2

13 PROTECTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13.1

Registering/Changing Password (QCPU (Q mode))

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to register a password to protect data in QCPU (Q mode).
To register a password, connect GX Works2 to a programmable controller CPU in advance.
Project data cannot be protected by using this function. Use the project security function to protect the project
data. (
Section 4.10)

Password management
Keep passwords in a secure place.
If a registered password is lost, initialize the programmable controller CPU using the PLC memory format function
(
Section 17.2) and write the project to the programmable controller CPU.
Registering a password
Set a password with 4 characters. For usable characters, refer to "Explanation of Registration Conditions" on the
Input Password screen.
A password can be set for the following items.
Program
Device comment
Device initial value

13.1.1

Registering/changing password

Register a password to project data in a programmable controller CPU.

Screen display
Select [Online] [Password/Keyword] [New].

Operating procedure

13 - 2

1.

Select the target memory.

2.

Select the target data for registering/changing a password in the data list.

13.1.1 Registering/changing password

13.1 Registering/Changing Password (QCPU (Q mode))

Click the

button.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

3.

The Input Password screen is displayed.

Set the items.

Item

Description

5.

Read/Write Protection

Select this to check a password when data are read in addition to the "Write
Protection".

Write Protection

Select this to check a password when data are written to the programmable
controller CPU.

New Password

Enter a new password or a password after change.

Re-enter Password

Enter the new password again for confirmation.

Click the

11

Select a condition for password check.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Registration Condition

12

button.

WRITING/READING
DATA

4.

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

The screen returns to the Create/Change Password screen.

Symbol

is appended to the data for which a password is registered.

6.

Click the

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13
button.

The password is registered or changed for the data in the programmable controller CPU.

14

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

A password can be set to multiple data by holding the

or
key and selecting the data in the data
list.
A password set to data in the transfer source memory of boot operation remains set in the transfer destination
memory.
Universal model QCPU
For Universal model QCPU, when a password is registered/changed while the programmable controller CPU is
running, the program memory batch transfer is executed. (
Section 12.6)
Changing a password
If a password has been already set for the selected data, the Disable Password screen is displayed. Enter the old
password to unlock the password.

MONITORING

Registering a password

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

13.1.1 Registering/changing password

13 - 3

GX Works2

13 PROTECTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13.1.2

Canceling password

Cancel the password set to the data in the programmable controller CPU.

Screen display
Select [Online] [Password/Keyword] [Delete].

Operating procedure

1.

Select data whose password is to be canceled in the data list.

2.

Click the

button.

The Input Disable Password screen is displayed.

This screen is not displayed when the password has
already been canceled.

3.

Enter the password set to the data.

4.

Click the

button.

The screen returns to the Delete Password screen.

5.

Click the

button.

The password set to the data in the programmable

controller CPU is canceled.

13 - 4

13.1.2 Canceling password

13.1 Registering/Changing Password (QCPU (Q mode))

Unlocking password temporarily

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Unlock a password temporarily, set to the data in the programmable controller CPU, by authenticating
it.
When the password is unlocked, the corresponding data in the programmable controller CPU can be
accessed freely until the project is closed.
This function does not cancel the password set for the data in the programmable controller CPU.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

13.1.3

Screen display
Select [Online] [Password/Keyword] [Disable].

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

Operating procedure
Select data whose password is to be temporarily unlocked in the data list.

2.

Click the

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

1.

button.

The Input Disable Password screen is displayed.

3.

Enter the password set to the data.

4.

Click the

14

button.

Click the

button.

The password set to the data in the programmable

controller CPU is temporarily unlocked.

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

5.

MONITORING

The screen returns to the Disable Password screen.

13.1.3 Unlocking password temporarily

13 - 5

GX Works2

13 PROTECTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13.2

Registering/Changing Password (LCPU)

Q FX
CPU L CPU Remote
FX

Head

FX

This section explains how to register a password to protect data in LCPU.

To register a password, connect GX Works2 to a programmable controller CPU in advance.
Project data cannot be protected by using this function. Use the project security function to protect the project
data. (
Section 4.10)

Password management
Keep passwords in a secure place.
If a registered password is lost, initialize the programmable controller CPU using the PLC memory format function
(
Section 17.2) and write the project to the programmable controller CPU.
Registering a password
Set a password with the number of characters between 4 and 32. For usable characters, refer to "Explanation of
Registration Conditions" on the Input Password screen.
A password can be set for the following items.
Symbolic information
Program
PLC parameter, network parameter
Device comment
Device initial value

13.2.1

Registering/changing password

Register a password to project data in a programmable controller CPU.

Screen display
Select [Online] [Password/Keyword] [New].

Operating procedure

13 - 6

1.

Select the target memory.

2.

Select the target data for registering/changing a password in the data list.

13.2.1 Registering/changing password

13.2 Registering/Changing Password (LCPU)

Click the

button.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

3.

The Input Password screen is displayed.

Set the items.

Select a condition for password check.

Read protection

Select this to check a password when data are read from the programmable
controller CPU.

Write protection

Select this to check a password when data are written to the programmable
controller CPU.

Read protection/Write
protection

Select this to check a password when data are written in addition to the "Read
protection".

Use the same password for read

protection/write protection

Check this to use the same password for the read protection and write protection
when Read protection/Write protection is selected in Registration Condition.

New Password
(Read Protection)

Enter a new password or a password after change.

The password enables the read protection.

Re-enter Password
(Read Protection)

Enter the new password again for confirmation.

New Password
(Write Protection)

Enter a new password or a password after change.

The password enables the write protection.
This item cannot be set when "Use the same password for read protection/write
protection" is checked.

Re-enter Password
(Write Protection)

Enter the new password again for confirmation.

This item cannot be set when "Use the same password for read protection/write
protection" is checked.

Click the

button.

12

13

14

The screen returns to the Create/Change Password screen.

is appended to the data for which a password is registered.

MONITORING

Symbol

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Registration Condition

5.

11

Description

WRITING/READING
DATA

Item

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

4.

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

Click the

button.
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

The password is registered or changed for the data in the programmable controller CPU.

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

6.

15

13.2.1 Registering/changing password

13 - 7

GX Works2

13 PROTECTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Registering a password
A password can be set to multiple data by holding the
or
key and selecting the data in the data
list.
A password set to data in the transfer source memory of boot operation remains set in the transfer destination
memory.
Changing a password
If a password has been already set for the selected data, the Disable Password screen is displayed. Enter the old
password to unlock the password.

13 - 8

13.2.1 Registering/changing password

13.2 Registering/Changing Password (LCPU)

Canceling password

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

13.2.2

Cancel the password set to the data in the programmable controller CPU.

Screen display
Select [Online] [Password/Keyword] [Delete].

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

Operating procedure
Select data whose password is to be canceled in the data list.

2.

Click the

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

1.

button.

The Input Disable Password screen is displayed.

This screen is not displayed when the password has
already been canceled.

Set the items.

Item
Delete Condition
Disable Password
(Read Protection)
Disable Password
(Write Protection)

4.

Click the

Description
Select the condition for password cancellation when the password registration
condition of the data selected is "Read protection/Write protection".

14

Enter the password set to the data.

MONITORING

3.

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

button.

15

The screen returns to the Delete Password screen.

button.

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Click the

The password set to the data in the programmable

controller CPU is canceled.

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

5.

13.2.2 Canceling password

13 - 9

GX Works2

13 PROTECTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13.2.3

Unlocking password temporarily

Unlock a password temporarily, set to the data in the programmable controller CPU, by authenticating
it.
When the password is unlocked, the corresponding data in the programmable controller CPU can be
accessed freely until the project is closed.
This function does not cancel the password set for the data in the programmable controller CPU.

Screen display
Select [Online] [Password/Keyword] [Disable].

Operating procedure

1.

Select data whose password is to be temporarily unlocked in the data list.

2.

Click the

button.

The Input Disable Password screen is displayed.

3.

Set the items.

Item
Disable Condition
Disable Password
(Read Protection)
Disable Password
(Write Protection)

13 - 10

Description
Select the condition for password unlock when the password registration condition
of the data selected is "Read protection/Write protection".

Enter the password set to the data.

13.2.3 Unlocking password temporarily

13.2 Registering/Changing Password (LCPU)

Click the

button.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

4.

The screen returns to the Disable Password screen.

Click the

button.

The password set to the data in the programmable

controller CPU is temporarily unlocked.

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

5.

13.2.3 Unlocking password temporarily

13 - 11

GX Works2

13 PROTECTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13.3

Registering/Changing Keyword (FXCPU)

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to register a keyword to protect data in FX series programmable controller CPU.
To register a keyword, connect GX Works2 to a programmable controller CPU in advance.
Project data cannot be protected using this function. Use the project security function to protect the project
data. (
Section 4.10)
For the FX series versions which support this function, refer to the user's manual of the programmable
controller CPU to be used.

Keyword management
Do not lose the keywords.
If a registered keyword is lost, initialize the programmable controller CPU using the PLC memory clear function
(
Section 17.3) and write the project to the programmable controller CPU.

13.3.1

Registering/changing keyword

Screen display
Select [Online] [Password/Keyword] [New].

13 - 12

13.3.1 Registering/changing keyword

13.3 Registering/Changing Keyword (FXCPU)

Select the function. (FX3G, FX3U, and FX3UC only)

Select either the terminable limitation or permanent limitation.

Keyword Protection
Permanent PLC Lock

Setting the keyword is unnecessary.

Limitation cannot be canceled.

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

For "Keyword Protection", set "Keyword Input".

For FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC, select '16 digits' or '8 digits'.
Item
Keyword (8 digits)

Set 8 digits using characters 0-9 and/or A-F.

This item can be set when "Keyword Protection" is selected and '8 digits' is checked.
The Read/Write Protection is available.

Keyword (16 digits)

Set 16 digits using characters 0-9 and/or A-F.

This item can be set when "Keyword Protection" is selected and '16 digits' is checked.
This item is supported only by FX3G, FX3U, and FX3UC.
The protection level can be selected from "Read/Write Protection", "Write Protection", and
"All Online Operation Protection".

Customer
Keyword*1

*1 :

3.

11

Description

Set 16 digits using characters 0-9 and/or A-F.

This item can be set when "Keyword (16 digits)" is set and "Customer keyword is used (16
digits)" is checked.
This item is supported only by FX3G, FX3U, and FX3UC.
The protection level is the same as that for "Keyword (16 digits)".

Set this item combining with "Keyword (16 digits)" as necessary. The customer keyword can be
disabled temporarily but it cannot be changed or canceled.

Select the protection level.

For the programmable controller CPU other than FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC, "Protection Level" is fixed
to 'Read/Write Protection'.
Item

Description

Read/Write Protection

Limit the write operation.

All Online Operation Protection

Limit the read, write, verify, and device monitor operations.

14

button.

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Click the

13

MONITORING

Write Protection

12

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

4.

Limit the read, write, and verify operations.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

2.

Description
Set the keyword for the limitation.
Limitation can be canceled.

WRITING/READING
DATA

Item

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

1.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Operating procedure

13.3.1 Registering/changing keyword

13 - 13

GX Works2

13 PROTECTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13.3.2

Canceling keyword

Cancel the keyword set to the data in the programmable controller CPU.

Screen display
Select [Online] [Password/Keyword] [Delete].

Operating procedure

1.

Enter the keyword being registered.

Enter only the first 8 digits when 'Keyword Protection (8 digits)' is registered. The customer
keyword cannot be canceled.

2.

Click the

button.

The keyword registered in the programmable controller CPU is canceled.

13 - 14

13.3.2 Canceling keyword

13.3 Registering/Changing Keyword (FXCPU)

Unlocking keyword temporarily

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Unlock a password temporarily, set to the data in the programmable controller CPU, by authenticating
it.
When the keyword is unlocked, the corresponding data in the programmable controller CPU can be
accessed freely until the project is closed.
This function does not cancel the keyword set for the data in the programmable controller CPU.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

13.3.3

Screen display
Select [Online] [Password/Keyword] [Disable].

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description

Keyword Disable

Select this to unlock the keyword temporarily.

Enter the keyword registered to the programmable controller CPU. Enter only
the first 8 digits when 'Keyword Protection (8 digits)' is registered. When the
customer keyword is registered, the keyword can be disabled by entering the

Keyword

customer keyword.*1
*1

Select this to get the keyword unlocked status to the locked status.

Keyword Protect

*1 :

Click the

14

button.

MONITORING

The selected operation (Keyword Disable/Keyword Protect) is executed.

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

2.

FX3G, FX3U, and FX3UC only

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Operating procedure

13.3.3 Unlocking keyword temporarily

13 - 15

GX Works2

13 PROTECTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU DATA

MEMO

13 - 16

13.3.3 Unlocking keyword temporarily

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

14 MONITORING
This chapter explains how to monitor the execution status of the programmable controller CPU connected to
the personal computer.

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Monitoring Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

Monitoring Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Batch Monitor of Devices/Buffer Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Monitoring Program List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Monitoring Interrupt Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Registering and Monitoring Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Monitoring Intelligent Function Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
Starting/Stopping Monitor of All Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
14.8

14 - 1

GX Works2

14 MONITORING

14.1

Monitoring Function
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to monitor programs.

The monitoring function is a function used to check operating status of a programmable controller CPU by
connecting a personal computer and a programmable controller CPU.

14.1.1

Starting/stopping monitoring

The monitoring function can be started/stopped by any of the following menus.

[Online] [Monitor] [Start Monitoring (All Windows)]/[Stop Monitoring (All Windows)]
[Online] [Monitor] [Start Monitoring]/[Stop Monitoring]
[Online] [Watch] [Start Watching]/[Stop Watching]
The menu to start/stop monitoring differs according to the monitoring type.
The following table shows the monitoring type to which the execution is applied by each menu.
For (Simple), (Structured), and (Intelligent) indicated in the Reference column, refer to the following
manuals respectively:
(Simple).......GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
(Structured) .GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
(Intelligent) ..GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
: Applicable : Not applicable
Menu
Monitoring type

Start/Stop
monitoring (All
windows)

Start/stop
monitoring*1

Start/stop watching*1

Reference

Program monitoring

Section 14.2
(Simple)
(Structured)

Device/buffer memory batch monitoring

Section 14.3

Program list monitoring

*2

Section 14.4

Interrupt program monitoring

*2

Section 14.5

(Simple)

SFC all block batch monitoring

Watch

Section 14.6

Intelligent function module monitoring

(Intelligent)

*1 :

Applied to active windows.

*2 :

The monitoring can be started/stopped by the buttons on the screen.

When monitoring multiple GX Works2 projects using one personal computer

When monitoring multiple projects using one personal computer, and if an communication error occurs in one of
the projects, the monitoring speed of the other projects may become slow.
The operation will be back to normal when the error message displayed in the project in which the communication
error occurred is closed.
Monitoring devices that cannot be monitored
When devices that cannot be monitored are specified in the program monitoring or the watch execution, the
monitoring result is displayed as "FFFFH(-1)".

14 - 2

14.1.1 Starting/stopping monitoring

14.1 Monitoring Function

9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Monitoring status

Monitoring status is displayed during monitoring in the work window.

Monitoring status is hidden when monitoring all items is stopped.

10

Screen display
At the start of monitoring
When connected to a programmable controller CPU
Scan time status

Local device monitor target selection field

SEARCH/REPLACE

14.1.2

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11
USER status
ERR. status
RUN/STOP status
Connection status

Scan time status

Local device monitor target selection field

Connection status

Display contents
Item

Description
Display the connection status between a programmable controller
CPU and personal computer in which the simulation function is
started.
When connected to a programmable controller CPU
During simulation
Display the programmable controller CPU status operated by the
key switch on the programmable controller CPU or the remote
operation from GX Works2.

RUN/STOP status

RUN

14
MONITORING

Unsupported instructions

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

USER status
ERR. status
RUN/STOP status

Connection status

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

During simulation

15

STEP-RUN

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

*1

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

STOP

14.1.2 Monitoring status

14 - 3

GX Works2

14 MONITORING

Item
ERR. status

Description
Display the error status of the programmable controller CPU.
The PLC Diagnostics screen is displayed when the icon is clicked.
PLC diagnostics screen (
Section 18.1)
ERR. is OFF.
ERR. is ON.
ERR. is flashing.

USER status*1, 2

Display the error status of the programmable controller CPU.

The PLC diagnostics screen is displayed when the icon is clicked.
PLC diagnostics screen (
Section 18.1)
USER is OFF.
USER is ON.
USER is flashing.

Status of device test with execution condition*1

Display the status of the device test with execution condition.

Flash when data in the programmable controller CPU and one
being edited are not identical. The registered information in the
programmable controller CPU is read out when the monitor is
restarted.
Return to ON when the both data are identical.

Execution program status*3

RAM,EPROM,EEPROM(FX3UC : FLROM)

Scan time status

Display the maximum scan time of the monitor target

programmable controller CPU.
For QCPU (Q mode), the display is given in units of 0.1ms.

Local device monitor target selection field*1, 2

Select the name of the program for which local device monitor is
performed.
If "Auto setting" is selected, the local devices in the program on
the active screen are automatically monitored.
Not displayed by Q00UJ.

Unsupported instructions

Display whether an unsupported instruction exists or not when the

simulation function is executed.
The Instructions Unsupported by Simulation screen is displayed
when the icon is clicked.
Checking unsupported instruction/device (
Section 15.3)
Unsupported instruction exists.
Unsupported instruction does not exist.

*1 :

Not supported by FXCPU.

*2 :

Not supported by communication head module and remote I/O module.

*3 :

Not supported by QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU.

Operation of the PLC Memory Clear function during the monitoring of local devices
When the "Clear device's whole Memory" operation is executed during the monitoring of local devices, local
devices are cleared in the programs selected in 'Local device monitor target selection field'.

14 - 4

14.1.2 Monitoring status

14.2 Monitoring Programs

Monitoring Programs
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to monitor the execution status of the programmable controller CPU.
The monitored items depend on the programming language used.
For details, refer to the following manuals.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

Screen display

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

).

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

Select [Online] [Monitor] [Start Monitoring] (

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

14.2

14 - 5

GX Works2

14 MONITORING

14.3

Batch Monitor of Devices/Buffer Memory

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to monitor devices/buffer memory in batch.

For device batch monitoring, specify the target devices.
For buffer memory batch monitoring, specify the address of the intelligent function module.

Screen display
Select [Online] [Monitor] [Device/Buffer Memory Batch] (

).

Decimal/Hexadecimal selection

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Device
Device Name

Select this to enter the name of a device to be monitored in batch.

T/C Set Value

Specify the program whose setting value is to be displayed when monitoring

timer (T) or counter (C) in batch.

Reference Program*1
Buffer Memory

*1 :

14 - 6

Description
Select this to monitor devices in batch.

Select this to monitor buffer memory in batch.

Module Start

Enter the start I/O number of the intelligent function module in hexadecimal
number.
For FXCPU
Enter the block number of the special extension device. (0 to 7)
FX0N-3A, FX2N-2AD and FX2N-2DA cannot be the target of the buffer
memory monitor.
For Multiple CPU system configuration
Specify the programmable controller CPU to be monitored.
CPU No. 1: 3E00, CPU No. 2: 3E10, CPU No. 3: 3E20, CPU No. 4: 3E30

Address

Enter the address of buffer memory to be monitored in decimal or hexadecimal.

Decimal/Hexadecimal
selection

Select the address input format (decimal or hexadecimal).

Not supported by remote I/O module.

14.3 Batch Monitor of Devices/Buffer Memory

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Screen button
(Not supported by remote I/O module)
Displays the T/C Set Value Reference Program screen.

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Operation
Set the items on the screen.
Description
Set the reference of POU.
In Simple project, selection is fixed at "Project".

Project

Select this to reference a program in the project.

User Library

Select this to reference a POU in the user library by clicking

Program/POU_Pool

13

Select the POU to be referenced.

Projects selected by "POU Reference Selection" or POU in "User Library" is
displayed.
Items to be displayed are as follows:
Simple project: Program file
Structured project: POU

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Item
Program Reference Selection/POU
Reference Selection

14

MONITORING

Section 16.1)

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

Displays the Modify Value screen. (

14 - 7

GX Works2

14 MONITORING

The Display Format screen is displayed.

Set the monitor display format.
The screen displays the set contents as an example. Setting is possible while confirming the
display.

Operation
Set the items on the screen.
Item
Monitor Format

Description
Select the monitor format.

Bit

Select this to monitor bits in unit of one point.

Bit and Word

Select this to monitor both bits and words in unit of one point.

Bit

Select this to monitor bits in unit of multiple points.

Word

Select this to monitor words in unit of multiple points.

Select the data type of the value stored in word device/buffer memory when
"Bit and Word" or "Word" is selected for "Monitor Format".

Display
16bit Integer

Select this to monitor in 16-bit integer.

32bit Integer

Select this to monitor in 32-bit double word (signed) integer.

Real Number (32Bit) Select this to monitor in 32-bit (single precision real number).
Real Number (64Bit) Select this to monitor in 64-bit (double precision real number).
ASCII

Select this to monitor in character string.

Select either decimal or hexadecimal display format for 16-bit or 32-bit
integer.

Value
DEC

Select this to monitor in decimal number.

HEX

Select this to monitor in hexadecimal number.

Select the alignment sequence of bits to be monitored when "Bit and Word"
or "Word" is selected for "Bit".

Bit Order
0-F

Select this to monitor bit information from the left to the right on the screen.
This method is appropriate for monitoring bit devices.

F-0

Select this to monitor bit information from the right to the left on the screen.
This method is appropriate for monitoring word devices or buffer memory.

Switch No. of Points*1

16 Points (8 Points)

Select the number of points to be monitored per row.

Select this to monitor 8 points of word device or 16 points of bit device per row.

10 Points (10 Points) Select this to monitor 10 points per row.

*1 :

14 - 8

For FXCPU, the display can be switched between 8 points and 16 points when an X/Y device is
selected.

14.3 Batch Monitor of Devices/Buffer Memory

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Utilizes the saved display formats.

Saves the current display format in the file.

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

Monitoring time when multiple Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screens are opened
When the multiple Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screens are opened, lead time to start monitoring and
monitoring intervals may become longer.
Accessing multiple CPU shared memory
Multiple CPU shared memory of multiple CPU system can be monitored only by the Device/Buffer Memory Batch
Monitor function.

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Opening multiple Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screens

The maximum number of Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screens that can be opened is 64. A screen
number is appended at the end of the screen title.

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Restrictions
FXCPU that support the buffer memory batch monitor function
FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3U, and FX3UC support the buffer memory batch monitor function.

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

14 - 9

GX Works2

14 MONITORING

14.4

Monitoring Program List

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to monitor the processing time of programs being executed.

Screen display
Select [Online] [Monitor] [Program List].

Display contents
Item
Entire Scan Time

Description
Display the time set in the WDT setting of PLC RAS setting of PLC parameter.

Monitoring Time

Display each monitoring time of the scan program, initial program, and lowspeed program. When the scan time exceeds these time, a programmable
controller CPU error occurs.

Total Scan Time

Display the total time of each item of "Detail of Scan Time for Scan
Execution".

Detail of Scan Time for Scan Execution

Display the processing time of each item. "Constant Wait" displays the waiting
time of the constant scan when the constant scan is set. When the low-speed
program execution time is also set, however, it displays '0.000' ms.

Execution Status of Programs

Display the execution status of programs specified in the program setting of

PLC parameter.

Program

Display the program names in the input order in PLC parameter.

Execution

Display the execution type of the programs specified in PLC parameter.

Scan Time

Display the actual scan time (current value). Display '0.000' ms in the
program stop (standby) status.

Execution Count

Display the number of executions, counted from 0 at the point of turning the
programmable controller CPU to the RUN status. After reaching 65536, it
returns to 0. It is stored even after the program stops.

Screen button

Displays the Start Program screen. (

Starting programs)

Displays the Stop Program screen. (

Stopping programs)

14 - 10

14.4 Monitoring Program List

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

9
Program list monitor
In a simulation, only "Execution Count" in "Execution Status of Programs" is monitored.

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Starting programs

Screen display
Select Program List screen

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

WRITING/READING
DATA

12
Operating procedure
Set the items on the screen.
Description
Select the name of a program to be started from

Start Mode

Select the execution type.

2.

13
.

Scan execution

Set the execution type to the scan execution.

Low speed execution

Set the execution type to the low-speed execution.

Fixed scan execution

Set the execution type to the fixed scan execution. The time input area in "Fixed scan
execution" displays the value set in the program setting of PLC parameter. Change it as
necessary.

Click the

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Item
Program Name

14

button.
MONITORING

1.

The selected program starts.

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Starting programs
This function is supported only by High Performance model QCPU.

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

14 - 11

GX Works2

14 MONITORING

Stopping programs

Screen display
Select Program List screen

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description

Program Name

Select the name of a program to be stopped from

Stop Mode

Select the stop mode.

2.

Stop output after stop

For the scan execution type program, turn outputs OFF (Non-execution processing)
at the next scan. The program is set as the standby status after the subsequent scan.
(The same behavior as the POFF instruction)
For the low-speed execution type program, stop its execution, and turn outputs OFF
at the next scan. The program is set as the standby status after the subsequent scan.

Hold output after stop

Place the scan execution type program in the standby status, and store the output of the
OUT instruction.

Click the

button.

The selected program turns in the stopped status.

Stopping programs
This function is supported only by High Performance model QCPU.
When "Stop output after stop" is selected, outputs may not turn OFF depending on instructions. For details, refer
to the section explains the POFF instruction in the following manuals.
MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common Instructions)
MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Common Instructions)

14 - 12

14.5 Monitoring Interrupt Program List

Monitoring Interrupt Program List

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to display the number of executions of interrupt programs used in a program.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

14.5

10

Screen display

SEARCH/REPLACE

Select [Online] [Monitor] [Interrupt Program List].

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11
Interrupt pointer
monitor list

Input the interrupt pointer number whose execution counts are to be displayed in "Interrupt
Pointer".

Display contents
Interrupt pointer monitor list

Description
-

13

Interrupt Pointer

Display the interrupt pointer entered in "Interrupt Pointer" on the top.

Execution Count

Start counting when the programmable controller CPU turns to the RUN
status and display the execution counts. When reaching 65536, returns to 0.

Comment

Display the device comment.

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Item

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

Operating procedure

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

14 - 13

GX Works2

14 MONITORING

14.6

Registering and Monitoring Devices

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to monitor devices.

14.6.1

Registering and monitoring devices

Register multiple devices/labels in one screen and monitor them simultaneously.

Screen display
Select [View] [Docking Window] [Watch1] to [Watch4].

Display contents
Item
Display the device/label name.

Current Value

Display the current value of the device/label.

Switch the display format (decimal/hexadecimal) of the current value.
(
Section 14.6.3)

Data Type

Display the data type of the device/label.

Class

Display the class of the label. Nothing is displayed for the devices.

Device

Display the device, or device assigned to the label.

For the labels with the class of VAR_CONSTANT or VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT, the initial value set on
the label editor is displayed.

Address*1

Display the address of the device/label.

Comment

Display the comments of the device/label.

*1 :

14 - 14

Description

Device/Label

Structured projects only

14.6.1 Registering and monitoring devices

14.6 Registering and Monitoring Devices

1.

Select a row to be edited, and then click its "Device/Label" column.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

The cell becomes the editing status.

2.

SEARCH/REPLACE

10
Enter a device/label to be registered.
For local labels, enter as 'program (program block) name/label name'.
Example) POU_01/counter

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

Press the

12

key.

The entered device/label is registered.

When the device/label is registered, its relevant information such as data type and class is
registered automatically.

WRITING/READING
DATA

3.

Select [Online] [Monitor] [Start Watching].

Registered devices/labels on watch windows

Once devices/labels are registered and the project is saved, registered devices/labels are displayed in registered
status when the project is opened again.
Deleting registered devices/labels
A device/label can be deleted by right-clicking the specified cell and selecting [Delete] from the shortcut menu or
pressing the
key.
Sorting items in Watch window
Items in the columns can be sorted in the ascending/descending order by clicking each column header. To sort the
"Current Value" column, display all registered devices.

MONITORING

14

The current value of the registered device/label is displayed.

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

4.

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

14.6.1 Registering and monitoring devices

14 - 15

GX Works2

14 MONITORING

14.6.2

Registering devices

Register devices to the Watch window.

Registering devices/labels from program editor/label editor using shortcut menu

Register devices/labels from the program editor/label editor using a shortcut menu. Multiple devices/
labels can be registered in batch by selecting a range.

Operation
1. Select devices/labels to be registered to the Watch window.
2. Right-click and select [Register Watch] from the shortcut menu.
The devices/labels are registered to the Watch window.

Registering devices/labels from the label editor

When registering devices/labels to the Watch window from the label editor, right-click a target row and select
[Register Watch] from the shortcut menu.
Registering device/labels with shortcut menu
With the shortcut menu, devices/labels are registered to the foreground Watch window.
When more than two Watch windows are displayed in the foreground, devices/labels are registered to the Watch
window with the younger Watch window number.
When the Watch window is not displayed, the Watch window 1 is opened and devices/labels are registered to it.

Registering devices/labels from program editor/label editor with drag-and-drop

operation

Register devices/labels from the program editor/label editor with the drag-and-drop operation. Multiple
devices/labels can be registered in batch by selecting a range.

Operation
Select devices/labels to be registered to the Watch window, and drag and drop them on to the
Watch window.

Drag and drop

14 - 16

14.6.2 Registering devices

14.6 Registering and Monitoring Devices

Drag-and-drop operation of devices/labels to Watch window

The drag-and-drop operation of devices/labels to the Watch window can be performed only from the program
editor or the label editor.
Drag-and-drop operation of devices/labels from ladder editor
The drag-and-drop operation of devices/labels from the ladder editor can be performed when the cursor is

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

Register devices/labels in the ladder block at the cursor position to the Watch window automatically by
setting the option.
When this option is set, "(Ladder Automatic Registration)" is displayed on the title bar of Watch window.
The automatic registration to the Watch window can be executed when the program is written in the
ladder format.

Operation
1. Specify the automatic registration destination for the "Setting for Automatic Registration to
Watch Window" item under [Tool] [Options] "Monitor" "Ladder".

2. Open the Watch window which is specified as an automatic registration destination.

3. Select [Online] [Watch] [Start Watching].
4. Move the cursor to the ladder block which is to be registered to the Watch window.
Devices/labels in the ladder block at the cursor position are displayed on the Watch window
which is specified as an automatic registration destination. The displayed devices/labels are
overwritten with the devices/labels in the ladder block to which the cursor is moved.

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Registering devices/labels at cursor position automatically

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

as it is moved to within the selected range.

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

changed to

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

14.6.2 Registering devices

14 - 17

GX Works2

14 MONITORING

14.6.3

Changing display format (decimal/hexadecimal) of current

values

Change the display format (decimal/hexadecimal) of the current values.

Operating procedure

Right-click on the Watch window, and select [Change Value Format (Decimal)]/[Change
Value Format (Hexadecimal)] from the shortcut menu.

Switch to the hexadecimal display

Switch to the decimal display

Changing current values

The current value can be changed by entering a value directly in the "Current Value" column during monitoring. For
bit devices, select a row and press the
row to change the current value.

and

keys or press the

key and double-click the

Displaying Watch window

If a registered device/label is a structure/function block/array label, the detail of the device/label is displayed in tree
format.

14 - 18

14.6.3 Changing display format (decimal/hexadecimal) of current values

14.6 Registering and Monitoring Devices

Writing/reading data to/from CSV file

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

14.6.4

Write/read devices/labels registered to the Watch window to/from the CSV file.

Screen display
Right-click and select [Write to CSV File]/[Read from CSV File] from the shortcut menu.

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

WRITING/READING
DATA

12
Operating procedure
Enter a file name, or select a file to be opened.

2.

Click the

button, or the

13

button.

The devices/labels are saved to the specified save destination, or the devices/labels are read from
the specified location to the Watch window.

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

1.

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

14.6.4 Writing/reading data to/from CSV file

14 - 19

GX Works2

14 MONITORING

14.7

Monitoring Intelligent Function Modules

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

For the method how to monitor input/output signals and buffer memory of intelligent function modules, refer to
the following manual.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)

14 - 20

14.8 Starting/Stopping Monitor of All Windows

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to start/stop monitoring of all open windows.

10

Operating procedure
Select [Online] [Monitor] [Start Monitoring (All Windows)]/[Stop Monitoring (All Windows)].

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Starting/Stopping Monitor of All Windows

SEARCH/REPLACE

14.8

14 - 21

GX Works2

14 MONITORING

MEMO

14 - 22

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

15 SIMULATING PROGRAMS

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

This chapter explains how to debug programs offline using the simulation function.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Simulation Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

Starting Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Checking unsupported instructions/devices . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

15.1
15.2
15.3

15 - 1

GX Works2

15 SIMULATING PROGRAMS

15.1

Simulation Function
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to debug a sequence program offline using the virtual programmable controller,
without connecting to the programmable controller CPU.
This function is useful to test programs before operating them actually on the programmable controller CPU.
For the precautions and restrictions on the simulation function, refer to Appendix 2.

15.1.1

Safety and handling precautions of the simulation function

The following explains the precautions on safety and handling of the simulation function.
1)

The simulation function simulates the actual programmable controller CPU to debug a sequence
program. However, this function does not guarantee the operation of the debugged sequence
program.

2)

The simulation function uses the memory for simulation to input and output data to/from the I/O
module and intelligent function module. Some instructions/functions and device memory are not
supported. Therefore, the operation results obtained with the virtual programmable controller may
differ from those obtained using the actual programmable controller CPU.

After debugging programs using the simulation function, those programs must be debugged online before
operating them actually on the programmable controller CPU.

15.1.2

Functions available for simulation function

The following table shows the GX Works2 functions that are available for the simulation function.
Function

15 - 2

Description

Reference

Write to PLC

Write parameter files and program files to the virtual programmable

controller.

Section 12.1

Online program change*1,*2

Write programs to a virtual programmable controller in RUN status.

Section 12.9

Verify

Verify data in the virtual programmable controller against project data.

Section 12.2

Delete PLC Data

For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, delete data in the virtual programmable

controller.

Section 12.3

Monitor

Monitor the status of operation processing.

Monitor status

Display the monitoring status of the virtual programmable controller.

Device memory/Buffer memory

batch monitor

Batch-monitor the device memory/buffer memory of the virtual

programmable controller.

Section 14.3

Program list monitor

For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, monitor the processing time of programs

being executed on the virtual programmable controller.

Section 14.4

Watch

Register and monitors data such as virtual programmable controller

devices.

Section 14.6

15.1.1 Safety and handling precautions of the simulation function

Section 14.2
Section 14.1.2

15.1 Simulation Function

Description

Reference

Local Device Batch Read + Save

CSV

Read local device data and save them to a personal computer.

Section 12.12

Device memory backup in

simulation

Save and read device memory/buffer memory of the virtual

programmable controller.

Section 15.2.1
Section 15.2.2

Modify value

Modify the current value of the virtual programmable controller.

Section 16.1

Forced input output registration/

cancellation

For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, register/cancel the forced input/output of

X/Y devices of the virtual programmable controller.

Section 16.2

Device Test with Execution

Condition

For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, register devices of the virtual

programmable controller to the device test with execution condition.

Section 16.3

Sampling trace

For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, trace the device value of the virtual

programmable controller.

Section 16.4

Step Execution*3

Debug the program by executing it partially.

Section 16.6

SEARCH/REPLACE

Function

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Remote Operation

Switch the execution status of the virtual programmable controller,

such as STOP or PAUSE.

Section 17.1

11

PLC Memory Operation

Perform memory format, memory clear, memory arrangement for the

virtual programmable controller.

Section 17.2
Section 17.3
Section 17.4

PLC Diagnostics

Check the virtual programmable controller status and errors.

Section 18.1

I/O System Setting

Simulate operations of external devices using the virtual

programmable controller.

Chapter 19

The simulation function is not supported by FXCPU.

*2 :

Online program change of SFC blocks is not supported.

*3 :

Not supported by FXCPU.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

*1 :

10

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

15.1.2 Functions available for simulation function

15 - 3

GX Works2

15 SIMULATING PROGRAMS

15.2

Starting Simulation
FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to start simulation.

Operating procedure

Select [Debug] [Start/Stop Simulation] (

).

The GX Simulator2 screen is displayed, and the simulation starts.

To end the simulation function, select [Debug] [Start/Stop Simulation] again.
<Simulating a single project>
QCPU(Q mode)/LCPU

FXCPU

<Simulating multiple projects>

Display contents
Item
Switch

Description
Display the operating status of the virtual programmable controller.

RESET*1
STOP

Select this to switch the operating status of the virtual programmable controller.

RUN

LED

*1 :

15 - 4

Display the operating status of the virtual programmable controller.

For details of the LED, refer to the following manuals.
For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) of each CPU module
For FXCPU
User's Manual - Hardware Edition of each FXCPU
HARDWARE MANUAL of each FXCPU
For the operating status error, the icon on the upper left corner of the screen is displayed
in red.

Not supported by FXCPU.

15.2 Starting Simulation

/
Switches between display/hide of all project names during the simulation.

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Simulations of multiple projects

The maximum of 4 projects can be simulated simultaneously by starting the simulation of other project during the
simulation.
Simulation of FXCPU
For FXCPU, more than one project cannot be simulated simultaneously.
Precautions when changing project names
If a project name is changed during the simulation, the project name on the GX Simulator2 screen is not changed.
To display the changed project name on the GX Simulator2 screen, exit the simulation, and then start the
simulation again.
Minimized display at start up of simulation
According to the option setting, the GX Simulator2 screen can be started up in minimized mode when the
simulation is activated.
To start up the GX Simulator2 screen in minimized mode, select "Start in minimized status" from [Options] on the
GX Simulator2 screen. From the next start up, the GX Simulatior2 screen is not displayed but becomes in taskbar
icon mode.

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Screen button

15 - 5

GX Works2

15 SIMULATING PROGRAMS

15.2.1

Saving device memory/buffer memory

Save device memory/buffer memory of the virtual programmable controller temporarily.

Operating procedure

1.

Switch the operating status of the GX Simulator2 screen to STOP.

2.

Select [Tool] [Backup Device Memory in Simulation] [Save] on the GX

Simulator2 screen.

Saving device memory/buffer memory when stopping simulation

According to the option setting, device memory/buffer memory in the virtual programmable controller can be saved
when the simulation is stopped.
To save device memory/buffer memory when the virtual programmable controller is stopped, select "Save device
memory at stop" from [Options] on the GX Simulator2 screen.

15.2.2

Reading device memory/buffer memory

Read out the temporarily saved device memory/buffer memory to the virtual programmable controller.

Operating procedure

15 - 6

1.

Switch the operating status of the GX Simulator2 screen to STOP.

2.

Select [Tool] [Backup Device Memory in Simulation] [Read] on the GX

Simulator2 screen.

15.2.1 Saving device memory/buffer memory

15.2 Starting Simulation

List of device memory/buffer memory that can be saved/read

This section explains device memory/buffer memory that can be saved and read with the virtual
programmable controller.

10

Device memory that can be saved/read

SEARCH/REPLACE

The following table shows the list of device memory that can be saved/read.
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
Category

Type

Device
X (DX)

11

Y (DY)

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

M
L
Bit

F
V
S
B

12

SB

Internal user device

WRITING/READING
DATA

T (contact)
ST (contact)
C (contact)
T (current value)
Word

ST (current value)
C (current value)

13

D (including Extended D)

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

W (including Extended W)
SW
FX
Bit

FY
SM

Word
Index register

Word

File register

Word

FD

14

SD
Z (including ZZ)
R

MONITORING

Internal system device

9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

15.2.3

ZR

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

15.2.3 List of device memory/buffer memory that can be saved/read

15 - 7

GX Works2

15 SIMULATING PROGRAMS

FXCPU
Category

Type

Device
X
Y

Bit

M
S
T (contact)

Device

C (contact)*1
T (current value)
Word

C (current value)*1
D

Special device

Bit

M (special M)

Word

D (special D)

Index register

Word

Extended register

Word

V
Z
R*2

*1 :

High-speed counters (C235 and later) are not supported.

*2 :

Supported by FX3G, FX3U, and FX3UC only.

Buffer memory that can be saved/read

Buffer memory that can be saved and read is an memory area of modules to which the I/O assignment
settings are configured in the PLC parameter.
For QCPU (Q mode), the buffer memory [U3E0 to U3E3\G0 to 4095] and the multiple CPU high-speed
transfer area [U3E0 to U3E3\G10000 to 65535] in the programmable controller CPU cannot be saved/
read.
For LCPU/FXCPU, all buffer memory can be saved/read.

15 - 8

15.2.3 List of device memory/buffer memory that can be saved/read

15.3 Checking unsupported instructions/devices

Checking unsupported instructions/devices

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

The following explains how to display a list of instructions and devices used in a program and not
supported by the simulation function.

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Screen display

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

15.3

Select [Debug] [Instructions Unsupported by Simulation].

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Display of unsupported instructions

Unsupported instructions are not displayed when the programmable controller does not become in RUN status
because of the CPU module error at the start of the simulation.
A status without a CPU module error is required for unsupported instructions to be displayed.

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

15 - 9

GX Works2

15 SIMULATING PROGRAMS

MEMO

15 - 10

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

This chapter explains how to debug sequence programs.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Changing Current Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2

Registering/Canceling Forced Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
Device Test with Execution Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
Sampling Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-13
Measuring Scan Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-29
Debugging Programs with Simulation Function . . . . . . . 16-30
Using LCPU Logging Configuration Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-46

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.6
16.7

16 - 1

GX Works2

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

16.1

Changing Current Values

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to change current device values of the programmable controller CPU in ladder and
SFC (Zoom) programs.
The following explains how to turn ON/OFF forcibly the bit device in the programmable controller CPU from
the monitoring screen and also changing the current value of the word device and buffer memory.

16.1.1

Changing current value of devices/labels

Screen display
Select [Debug] [Modify Value] (

).

<For bit device>

16 - 2

16.1.1 Changing current value of devices/labels

<For word device>

16.1 Changing Current Values

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Data Type

10

Display the data type of the device or label.

Also select the data type from

SEARCH/REPLACE

Device/Label

Description
Display the device or label selected on the monitoring screen.
Also enter the device or label.

Enter a new value according to the data type as shown below:

*1 :

2.

Enter a value in decimal or hexadecimal

format.

FLOAT (Single Precision)

Enter a value in decimal or exponential

form.
Example)
Decimal form: -1.23456
Exponential form: -1.23456E + 01

FLOAT (Double Precision)*1

Enter a value in decimal form.

String

Enter a character string.

(Quotation marks (" ") are not necessary.)

Time

Enter a value in the time format.

T#0s
(Applicable to Structured projects only)

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Value
(For word device)

Entry

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Data Type
Word [Signed],
Double Word [Signed],
Word [Unsigned]/Bit String [16-bit],
Double Word [Unsigned]/Bit String [32-bit]

Not supported by FXCPU.

For bit devices, click the

For word devices, click the

button.

button.

The current value of the programmable controller CPU is changed, and the result is displayed in
"Execution Result".

Restrictions

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

1.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Operating procedure

14
MONITORING

Devices whose current values cannot be changed

The current values of indirectly specified devices (@D0) cannot be changed.

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

16.1.1 Changing current value of devices/labels

16 - 3

GX Works2

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

16.1.2

Changing current value of buffer memory

Screen display
Select [Debug] [Modify Value] (

).

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Module Start (HEX)
Address
Data Type

Description
Enter the start I/O number of the intelligent function module.
Enter the address of the intelligent function module.
Display the data type of the buffer memory.
Also select the data type from

Enter a new value according to the data type as shown below.

Data Type

Value

*1 :

2.

Entry

Word [Signed],
Double Word [Signed],
Word [Unsigned]/Bit String [16-bit],
Double Word [Unsigned]/Bit String [32-bit]

Enter a value in decimal or hexadecimal

format.

FLOAT (Single Precision)

Enter a value in decimal or exponential

form.
Example)
Decimal form: -1.23456
Exponential form: -1.23456E + 01

FLOAT (Double Precision)*1

Enter a value in decimal form.

String

Enter a character string.

(Quotation marks (" ") are not necessary.)

Time

Enter a value in the time format.

T#0s
(Applicable to Structured projects only)

Not supported by FXCPU.

Click the

button.

The current value of the buffer memory is changed, and the result is displayed in "Execution
Result".

16 - 4

16.1.2 Changing current value of buffer memory

16.1 Changing Current Values

Selecting devices/labels used in instructions that handle multiple devices

When an instruction that uses multiple devices (such as FROM/TO instruction) is selected, all devices/labels used
in the instruction are displayed in the "Device/Label" combo box.
Select a device from the combo box and then execute the Modify Value function.
Forcibly turning contacts ON/OFF on the ladder monitor
A contact on the ladder monitor can be forcibly switched ON/OFF by double-clicking the contact (or press the

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

key.

11

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

key) while pressing the

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Modify Value screen

When the Modify Value screen is open, a device/label is displayed on the Modify Value screen if it is selected on
the editor.
The Modify Value screen of device/label and buffer memory can be switched by clicking tabs.
Execution result of current value change
Display/hide of the execution result of current value change can be switched by
/
.
A device/label can be displayed in "Device/Label" area by selecting the device/label and clicking the
button or double-clicking it in "Execution Result".

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

16.1.2 Changing current value of buffer memory

16 - 5

GX Works2

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

16.2

Registering/Canceling Forced Input/Output

*1

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

*1: Not supported by Basic model QCPU.

This section explains how to register/cancel the forced input/output of devices.

X/Y device can be forcibly turned ON/OFF without the effect of the input/output to/from external devices while
the programmable controller CPU is in RUN status. This enables program debugs without external devices.

16.2.1

Registering/canceling forced input to/output from QCPU (Q

mode)/LCPU

Screen display
Select [Debug] [Forced Input Output Registration/Cancellation].

Registration status
display area

1.

Enter a device to be turned ON/OFF forcibly.

Clicking

2.

enables to select a device from the list of previously entered ones.

Click the

button.

The forced ON/OFF is registered to the programmable controller CPU.

The current registration status of the forced ON/OFF is displayed in the 'registration status display
area'.

Screen button

Cancels the forced ON/OFF of a device registered to the programmable controller CPU.

Reads the registration status from the programmable controller CPU.

16 - 6

16.2.1 Registering/canceling forced input to/output from QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU

16.2 Registering/Canceling Forced Input/Output

Canceling registration
The device registration can be canceled by placing the cursor on the device area in the registration status display
area and pressing the
key.
Device forced input/output registration
The status of the device forced input/output registration may be changed by GX Works2 or external devices that
can register/cancel the forced input/output etc., for the exclusion control is not executed in the programmable
controller CPU side.
Forced ON/OFF status
The ON/OFF status can be inverted by double-clicking the ON/OFF cell.

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Cancels all forced input/output registered to the programmable controller CPU.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11
Double-click

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

16.2.1 Registering/canceling forced input to/output from QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU

16 - 7

GX Works2

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

16.2.2

Registering/canceling forced input to/output from remote I/O

module

Screen display
Select [Debug] [Forced Input Output Registration/Cancellation].

Registration status
display area

Operating procedure

1.

Click the

button.

A disabled/enabled refresh of X/Y device is registered to the remote I/O module.

The current registration status of disabled/enabled refresh is displayed in the 'registration status
display area'.

Screen button

Reads the current registration status of the remote I/O module.

Cancels all disabled refreshes registered to the remote I/O module.

Connection route in which forced input/output registration/cancellation can be performed

In order to use this function on remote I/O module, the connection route must be set to "Serial Port NET/10(H)
Remote Module Connection".

16 - 8

16.2.2 Registering/canceling forced input to/output from remote I/O module

16.3 Device Test with Execution Condition

Device Test with Execution Condition

*1

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

*1: Universal model QCPU only.

This section explains how to change device value at the execution of programs and steps specified in
advance.
This enables debugs of specific ladder blocks without changing programs.
This function can be executed only in a ladder program of Simple project.

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

16.3.1

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

16.3

Registering device test with execution condition

Register the device test with execution condition.

Screen display
Select [Debug] [Device Test with Execution Condition] [Register Device Test with Execution
Condition].

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

<For word device>

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

<For bit device>

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

16.3.1 Registering device test with execution condition

16 - 9

GX Works2

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description
Display the device or label selected on the monitoring screen.
Also enter the device or label.

Device/Label

Display the data type of the device or label.

Data Type

Also select the data type from

Enter a new value according to the data type as shown below.

Data Type

Enter a value in decimal or

hexadecimal format.

FLOAT (Single Precision)

Enter a value in decimal or

exponential form.
Example)
Decimal form: -1.23456
Exponential form: -1.23456E + 01

Value (For word device)

FLOAT (Double Precision)

Enter a value in decimal form.

String

Enter a value as a character string.

(Quotation marks (" ") are not
necessary.)
Enter a value in the time format.
T#0s
(Applicable to Structured projects
only)

Time

Execute
Condition

2.

Entry

Word [Signed],
Double Word [Signed],
Word [Unsigned]/Bit String [16-bit],
Double Word [Unsigned]/Bit String [32-bit]

Program Name

Specify the program name for the timing of the forced ON/OFF and current value
change.

Step No.

Specify the step number in the program for the timing of the forced ON/OFF and
current value change.

Execution
Timing

Select 'before' or 'after' the instruction in the step number in the program for the timing
of the forced ON/OFF and current value change.

For bit devices, click the

For word devices, click the

button.
button.

The device/label is registered to the device test with execution condition.

Registering devices
Up to 32 devices can be registered.
The registration of the device test with execution condition is canceled by performing the following operations.
Online program change of the program in the range which includes the specified step
Write to PLC
A box with the specified color appears at the instruction of the specified step.
(Changing color
Section 3.2.7)

16 - 10

16.3.1 Registering device test with execution condition

16.3 Device Test with Execution Condition

Check the registration of the device test with execution condition, write it to a file, read it out from a file,
and disable it.

9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Checking/disabling registration of device test with execution

condition

10

Screen display
Select [Debug] [Device Test with Execution Condition] [Check/Disable Register Device Test with
Execution Condition].

SEARCH/REPLACE

16.3.2

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11
Registration
information
list

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

Display contents
Description

Status of Displayed Data

Display whether the data being displayed is read from the programmable
controller CPU or from a file.

Registration information list

Display the registration of the device test with execution condition. Display up to
32 records.

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Item

Screen button

Reads the registration information from the programmable controller CPU.

14

MONITORING

Disables the registration checked in 'registration information list'.

Registers the registration information data to the programmable controller CPU in batch.

15

Disables the registration information data in the programmable controller CPU in batch.

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Reads the registration information list from a file.

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

Saves the registration information data being displayed in 'registration information list' to a file.

16.3.2 Checking/disabling registration of device test with execution condition

16 - 11

GX Works2

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

Checking/disabling the device test with execution condition

The registration of devices specified in the device test with execution condition can be checked/disabled on the
monitor screen of the ladder editor. Right-click on a device and select [Debug] [Check Register Device Test with
Execution Condition]/[Disable Register Device Test with Execution Condition] from the shortcut menu.

16.3.3

Batch disabling device test with execution condition

Batch disable the registered device test with execution condition.

Operating procedure
Select [Debug] [Device Test with Execution Condition] [Batch Disable Device Test with
Execution Condition].

16 - 12

16.3.3 Batch disabling device test with execution condition

16.4 Sampling Trace

*1

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

*1: Not supported by Basic model QCPU and Q00UJ.

This section explains the operation of the sampling trace function.

The sampling trace function acquires the data at the preset timing to find how device values change during
program operation and traces the changes by displaying them in time series.
For details of the sampling trace function, refer to the manual of each CPU module.

16.4.1

Opening sampling trace screen

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Sampling Trace

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

16.4

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11
Operating procedure

Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Open Sampling Trace].

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

Devices displayed with red background

When devices or data types which cannot be used in a new programmable controller CPU type are contained in
the sampling trace data after the Change PLC Type operation, they are displayed with red background.
Modify them to devices appropriate for the new programmable controller CPU type, and execute the sampling
trace again.

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

16.4.1 Opening sampling trace screen

16 - 13

GX Works2

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

16.4.2

Setting executing condition of sampling trace

The following explains the settings required for executing sampling trace and the execution method.

Setting sampling trace execution method and data storage destination

Set the sampling trace execution method and the storage destination of the trace data.

Screen display
Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Trace Setting] (

) <<Setting of Executing and Saving>>.

Operating procedure

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Trace Execution Method

Description
Set the trace execution method.

Execute after overwriting current trace Select this to execute sampling trace after overwriting the current trace
settings in the PLC
setting to the programmable controller CPU.
Execute using existing trace settings
in the PLC
Trace Data (setting+result) Storage

Trace Auto Startup Setting

Select this to execute sampling trace using the trace setting stored in the
programmable controller CPU.
Set the memory and the file name where the trace data set on the
<<Condition Setting>> tab and the trace result after execution are stored.
Place a check mark in the box to perform the sampling trace automatically
when the programmable controller CPU is in RUN. (Universal model QCPU/
LCPU only*1)

*1 :

16 - 14

For the versions of Universal model QCPU that support this function, refer to the User's Manual
(Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be used.

16.4.2 Setting executing condition of sampling trace

16.4 Sampling Trace

Setting sampling trace conditions

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Set the sampling trace conditions such as the number of traces and the trigger condition.

Screen display
Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Trace Setting] (

) <<Condition Setting>>.

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

Operating procedure
Set the items on the screen.

13

Trace Count Setting

Set the number of data acquisitions (samplings) before and after the
trigger.
Select a value using the combo box or enter a value directly.

Additional Information

Set the information to be added to the trace result.

Data Acquisition Timing Setting

Set the trace data acquisition timing.

Setting range: Count Before Trigger

Each Scan

Select this to acquire the data every scan.

Specified Interval

Select this to acquire the data in the set intervals.

Setting range: 1 to 5,000 (can be set in units of 1ms)

8192

Cycle*1

Select this to acquire the data in the Each multiple CPU high-speed transfer
cycle.
Setting range: 1 to 50

Detail Setting

Select this to set the data acquisition timing depending on the device
condition.
Use the

Trigger Condition Setting

14

15

button to set the conditional expression.

Set the trigger (condition) that is taken as the start point (0 point) of
sampling trace execution.

At the Time of Trace

Instruction Execution

Select this to generate a trigger when the TRACE instruction in the

program is executed.
For the TRACE instruction, refer to the following manual.
(
MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common Instructions)

At the Time of Manual

Trigger Execution

Select this to generate a trigger manually with GX Works2. Select [Debug]

[Sampling Trace] [Execute Manual Trigger] to generate a trigger.

Detail Setting

Select this to set a trigger timing depending on the device condition. A

trigger is generated when the conditional expression is satisfied.
Use the

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Each Multiple CPU

High Speed Transfer

*1 :

Total Count

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Description

MONITORING

Item

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

button to set the conditional expression.

Universal model QCPU only

16.4.2 Setting executing condition of sampling trace

16 - 15

GX Works2

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

Screen button

Displays the Detail Setting screen.

Setting of the conditional expression can be changed in the "Data Get Timing screen" or "Trigger
Condition screen".

<Trigger Condition>

<Data Get Timing>

Operation
Set the items on the screen.
Item

Description

Device /Label

Enter a device, address or label.

Device

Display the device corresponds to "Device /Label".

Address

*1

Comment

Section 16.4.6

Display the address corresponds to "Device /Label".

Display the device comment of "Device /Label".
Select the timing condition.
For the data get timing setting
The data are collected at the end processing of one scan or when the condition of the specified
device/label is satisfied.
Device

Condition

Collect data at the rising of the specified device/label.

Collect data at the falling of the specified device/label.

Collect data when the current value of the specified device

becomes the specified condition value.

Change*2

Collect data when the current value of the specified device

changes.

Bit device

Word device
Condition

Description

For the trigger condition setting

Satisfaction of the condition of the specified device/label becomes a trigger.
Device

Condition

Bit device

Consider the rising of the specified device/label as a trigger.

Consider the falling of the specified device/label as a trigger.

Consider the time when the current value of the specified

device becomes the specified condition value as a trigger.

Word device
Write data*2

16 - 16

Description

Consider the time when data are written to the specified

device/label as a trigger.

Radix

Select the radix of the condition value. (Word device only)

Values

Set the condition value. (Word device only)

*1 :

Structured projects only

*2 :

Universal model QCPU/LCPU only

16.4.2 Setting executing condition of sampling trace

16.4 Sampling Trace

9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Registering devices/labels

Register the devices/labels on the Sampling Trace screen.

Operating procedure

Register the devices/labels to which the sampling trace is performed.

Devices/labels can be registered by entering them directly or copying them from the program editor
or label editor by the drag-and-drop operation.
Display title

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

16.4.3

Device/Label

Set the device, address, label, structure, array, and function block to which the sampling
trace is performed.
50 bit devices and 50 word devices can be registered.

Device*1

Display the device corresponds to "Device /Label".

Address

*1,*2

Display the address corresponds to "Device /Label".

Comment*1

Display the device comment for the address or device/label which are entered in "Device /
Label".

Data Type*1

Display the data type of "Device /Label".

The data type of the word device can be changed after registration.

Radix*1

If the device entered in "Device /Label" is the bit device, the radix is fixed as "Binary". If the
device entered in "Device /Label" is the word device, the radix can be selected from
"Binary", "Decimal", "Hexadecimal" or "ASCII". If the device entered in "Device /Label" is
the single-precision/double-precision real number, the radix is fixed as "FLOAT".

Vertical Axis

Display the time axis data of the selected cell as displaying the trace result.

Items can be displayed by selecting [View] [Switching display items].

*2 :

Structured projects only

13

14
MONITORING

*1 :

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Description
-

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Item
Display title

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

16.4.3 Registering devices/labels

16 - 17

GX Works2

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

Changing data types of word devices

For word devices, data type can be changed after registration.

When the data type of a device/label that uses the multiple devices is changed, the necessary devices
are displayed in the tree format.
Example)
Changing data type of D10 from "Word [signed]" to "Double Word [signed]"

Change to double
word (signed)

Restrictions
When 'Double Word'/'FLOAT (Single Precision)'/'FLOAT (Double Precision)' is set to "Data Type"
The data acquired by the sampling trace function may become inconsistent.

16 - 18

16.4.3 Registering devices/labels

16.4 Sampling Trace

Register a device/label from the program editor/label editor with the drag-and-drop operation. Multiple
devices/labels can be registered in batch by selecting a range.
<Ladder editor>

9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Registering devices/labels from program editor/label editor with drag-and-drop

operation

Select the device, instruction

and ladder block.

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

<Structured ladder/FBD editor>

Select the device and

ladder block.

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

<ST editor>

Select the device and line.

13

<Label editor>

Select the device by a unit of row.

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

14
MONITORING

The device is registered at the cursor position.

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

Drag & drop

When the dragged cursor is placed on the sampling

trace tab, the window is activated.

16.4.3 Registering devices/labels

16 - 19

GX Works2

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

16.4.4

Executing sampling trace

Operating procedure

Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Start Trace] (

).

Sampling trace starts.

The Trace Data Storage Status screen is displayed when the sampling trace is started.

Trance data file name

Item

Description

Total Data

Display the current status of data acquisition (sampling) after the start of sampling trace in
percentage in reference to the number of times set for "Trace Setting".
Even after this status reaches 100%, sampling trace is continuously executed and the
data are overwritten from the oldest data.

Data After Trigger

Display the current status of data acquisition (sampling) after the generation of trigger in
percentage in reference to the number of times set for "Trace Setting".
When this status reaches 100%, sampling trace stops.

Trace data file name

Display the trace data file name that is registered for the sampling trace in the
programmable controller CPU.

After the stop or completion of sampling trace, the trace result is displayed on the Sampling Trace
screen.
Display title

Trend graph registration target

16 - 20

16.4.4 Executing sampling trace

Chart

Timing chart scale Trigger position

Vertical axis
information
line
Trend graph

16.4 Sampling Trace

Vertical Axis

Display the device value of the selected cell position, on the 'vertical axis information line'.

Chart

Display the acquired data in chart.

Timing chart scale

One block corresponds to one data acquisition. The number of scale indicates the number
of data acquisitions.
To change the display width, select [View] [Timing Chart Scale] [-: Narrow Scale]

Vertical axis information line

A red mark is displayed at the position corresponding to the trigger generated timing on
the timing chart scale when a trigger is generated.
This line is displayed at the position where a cell is selected on the chart in yellow.
The device value on the vertical axis information line is displayed in cells under "Vertical
Axis".
When the vertical axis information line is double-clicked, the data at the right side of the
line are displayed on the sampling trace (detailed data) screen. (
Switching screen
to the sampling trace (detailed data) screen)

Trend graph registration target

Register the checked word device to the trend graph.

Trend graph

Display the changes of the word device values on the trend graph.
(
Displaying trace results on trend graphs)

11

12

13

14

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Starting sampling trace from sequence program

Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Register Trace].
To start sampling trace, execute the Trace start command (SM801) in a program.
Displaying only the trace result stored in the programmable controller CPU without executing sampling
trace
Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Read from PLC]. (
Section 16.4.5)
Word devices whose data types can be changed after sampling trace results are displayed
The type of a word device can be changed to the double word type or the real type, only when the consecutive
devices with the required points are registered as the trace data.
Example)
If the sampling trace is performed to D0, D1, D2 and D3, the data type of D0 can be changed to the double word
type.
If the data type of D2 is changed to the data type that uses multiple devices, such as the double word or singleprecision real number, the data type of D0 cannot be changed as it has no consecutive 4-words devices.
Performing sampling trace from other peripherals during performing sampling trace
For Universal model QCPU/LCPU, the sampling trace currently being performed can be stopped by other
peripherals and perform another sampling trace. When the sampling trace is performed by other peripherals,
select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Forced Execution Registration Effective] to activate the forced registration.
Trace ready status (SM800) after sampling trace is completed
In GX Developer, the trace ready status (SM800=1) is held until the trace results are read, even if the sampling
trace is completed. In GX Works2, the trace results are automatically read and displayed when the sampling trace
is completed, and then the trace ready status (SM800=0) is canceled.

WRITING/READING
DATA

Trigger position

), or move a scroll wheel on a mouse while pressing the

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

( )/[+: Wide Scale] (

key.

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Description
-

MONITORING

Item
Display title

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Display contents

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

16.4.4 Executing sampling trace

16 - 21

GX Works2

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

Switching screen to the sampling trace (detailed data) screen

Display the device/label value change in numeric values.

Screen display

Click the tool button

(Switch Chart/Detail).

The sampling trace (detailed data) screen is displayed.

Click the tool button

(Switch Chart/Detail) again to switch to the chart.

Additional information

Detailed data

Display contents
Item

16 - 22

Description

Additional information

Display the additional information set for "Additional Information" on the <<Condition
Setting>> tab on the Trace Setting screen.
Select [View] [Additional Information] [Past Time]/[Program Name].

Detailed data

Confirm the device values.

In the case of a bit device, '*' is displayed for ON, nothing is displayed (blank) for OFF.
In the case of a word device, numeric values are displayed.
The registered "Device /Label" are linked with the Sampling Trace screen (chart).

16.4.4 Executing sampling trace

16.4 Sampling Trace

Displaying trace results on trend graphs

Display the changes of the word device values on the trend graph.

Operating procedure

Check the check box for the 'trend graph registration target' on the Sampling Trace
screen.

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

The checked word device is registered on the trend graph.

Clear the check box to cancel the registration on the trend graph.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Trend graph registration target

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

Trend graph line color

Display contents
Item
Trend graph line color

Description
Change the background color of cell under 'trend graph line color' to the line color of the
trend graph. Double-click the cell, and the Color screen is displayed to allow changing of
the trend graph line color.

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

Wide/narrow scales of trend graphs

Place the cursor at the base point to widen/narrow, and select [View] [Trend Graph Scale] [-: Narrow Scale]

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

( )/[+: Wide Scale] ( ) or move a scroll wheel on a mouse while pressing the
key. The widened/narrowed
graph with the specified base point as the center is displayed.
Select [View] [Trend Graph Scale] [Initial Display] to recover the display to the initial state.

MONITORING

14

Wide scale

Narrow scale

16

16.4.4 Executing sampling trace

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

Moving trend graphs

Double-click the trend graph to move the graph up or down with the double-clicked point as the center.

16 - 23

GX Works2

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

16.4.5

Saving trace data

Save the trace data of sampling trace (sampling trace target devices/labels, trace setting, and trace
results) to a personal computer or a programmable controller CPU.

Saving trace data to personal computer

Save the trace data in a personal computer in the CSV file format.
The menu item of the function cannot be selected when a trace result does not exist.

Screen display
Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Export CSV Data].

Screen button

Saves trace setting and trace results in the CSV file format.

16 - 24

16.4.5 Saving trace data

16.4 Sampling Trace

Before trigger execution

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Trace numbers when saving trace data in CSV file

For the trace numbers of the sampling trace when the trace data are output to the CSV file, the number at the time
of the trigger execution is set to 0, and the numbers are displayed with the negative values for the numbers before
the trigger execution and positive values for the numbers after the trigger execution.
Example)
If M0, which was obtained at the fifth time after the trigger execution, is ON, M0 with the trace number '4' is
displayed as 'ON' in the CSV file.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

After trigger execution

To display the CSV file with Excel similar to the display of the sampling trace result, copy the devices and the range
of the result, check "Transpose" in "Paste Special", and then paste them on to Excel.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Writing/reading trace data to/from programmable controller CPU

Write/read the trace data to/from a programmable controller CPU.

Operating procedure

Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Read from PLC]/[Write to PLC].

The Write to PLC function writes the trace data to the target memory set on the <<Setting of
Executing and Saving>> tab on the Trace Setting screen.

14
MONITORING

Reading trace data to programmable controller CPU

The word data, which was read by the Read from PLC function, is read as the word (signed) type regardless of the
data type settings at the time of writing the data.

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

16.4.5 Saving trace data

16 - 25

GX Works2

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

16.4.6

Applicable devices/labels for sampling trace

List of applicable devices for sampling trace

Category

Device type

*1

Output

*1

*1

Internal relay

*1

*1

Latch relay

*1

*1

Annunciator

*1

*1

*1

*1

Link relay

*1

*1

Link special relay

SB

*1

*1

*2

Timer

Current value

Contact

TS

*2

Coil

TC

*2

Current value

Contact

CS

*2

Coil

CC

*2

*2

Trigger
condition

*2

*2

Current value

ST

Contact

STS

*2

Coil

STC

*2

*1

*1

*1

Link register

*1

*1

*1

Link special register

SW

*1

*1

*1

Function input

FX

Function output

FY

Special relay

SM

*1

*1

Function register

FD

*1

*1

*1

Special register

SD

*1

*1

*1

\X

*1

*1

\Y

*1

*1

*1

Retentive
timer
Data register

Link input
Link output

*2

*2

Link register

\W

*1

Link special register

\SW

*1

*1

Link relay

\B

*1

*1

\SB

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

ZR

*1

*1

*1

Link special relay

16 - 26

Step relay

Counter

Link direct device

Data
acquisition
timing

*1

Edge relay

Internal system device

Sampling
trace screen

Input

Internal user device

Device

File register

File register

Index register

Index register

Intelligent function
module device

Intelligent function module device

Cyclic transmission area device

U3E

Nesting

Nesting

16.4.6 Applicable devices/labels for sampling trace

ZZ
U

\G
\G

*1

*1

*1

*1

16.4 Sampling Trace

SFC block device

BL

SFC transition device

TR

Network number specifying

device

I/O number specifying device

Macro instruction argument

device

VD

Decimal constant

Hexadecimal Constant

Single-precision
floating-point data

Double-precision
floating-point data

""

Real constant

String constant

: Applicable : Not applicable

*1 :

Following modification settings are applicable.

Digit-specified bit device (K1 to K8 and K1 to K4 can be used for the Sampling Trace screen and
data acquisition timing respectively.)
Bit-specified word device
Index setting (not available under the trigger condition)

*2 :

Structured projects only

Applicable label types for sampling trace

Label type
Global label*1

Description

Label1

Local label*1

Register and display as 'program/label name'.

POU_01/
Label1

Structure*1

Register and display as 'label name.member name'.

Register all members when the whole structure labels are registered.

G_data.AAA

Function block*1

Register and display as 'instance name.label name in function block'.

Register all labels in the function block when the whole instances (function blocks)
are registered.

FB_01.IN01

Array*1

Register and display as 'label name [one-dimensional element number] [twodimensional element number] [three-dimensional element number]'.
Array[0,0,0]
Register all elements/all members when the whole array type labels are registered.

Structured array*1

Register and display as 'label [one-dimensional element number] [two-dimensional

element number] [three-dimensional element number]. member name'.
Register and display arrays when the structure contains member labels of arrays.
Register all elements/all members when the whole structured array type labels are
registered.

block*1

*1 :

Array2[0,0,0].
AAA

Register and display as 'instance name.label name in function block.label in nested

function block'.
FB1_01.FB2_
Register and display structures when the nest function block contains structure
01.Label1
labels.
Register all labels in the instance when the whole instances (nested function blocks)
are registered.

The following data types are applicable.

Bit, Word [Signed], Word [Unsigned], Word [Unsigned]/Bit String [16-bit], Double Word [Signed],
Double Word [Unsigned]/Bit String [32-bit], FLOAT (Single Precision), FLOAT (Double Precision),
Timer, Counter, Retentive Timer

16.4.6 Applicable devices/labels for sampling trace

10

11

12

13
Example

Register and display as 'label name'.

Nested function

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

SEARCH/REPLACE

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

WRITING/READING
DATA

Interrupt pointer

16 - 27

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Constant

Pointer

14
MONITORING

Others

Device

Trigger
condition

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Pointer

Device type

Data
acquisition
timing

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

Category

Sampling
trace screen

GX Works2

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

16.4.7

Precautions when performing sampling trace

The following explains the precautions when performing the sampling trace.
When files for both local device and trace data exist in standard RAM
Perform the following operation to change the local device when the files for both the local device
and trace data exist in the standard RAM.
If the following operation is not performed, the files for the trace data may be deleted.

Operation
1. Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Read from PLC].
Read the file for trace data from the standard RAM.

2. Change the settings for the local device, and write the changes to the programmable
controller CPU.

3. Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Write to PLC].

Write the file for the trace data, which was read in the procedure 1, to the standard RAM.

16.4.8

Compatibility with sampling trace data in GX Developer

The sampling trace data which are saved by "Trace settings file operation" using GX Developer cannot
be read in GX Works2.
The sampling trace data which are set in GX Works2 cannot be saved as the format that can be read in
GX Developer.
Perform the following operation when utilizing the sampling trace data.
Utilizing GX Developer sampling trace data in GX Works2

Operation
1. Write the sampling trace data, which are set in GX Developer, to the programmable controller
CPU.
Perform the "Write to PLC" function of "Trace settings PLC operation" in GX Developer.

2. Read the sampling trace data from the programmable controller CPU in GX Works2.
Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Read from PLC] in GX Works2.
Utilizing GX Works2 sampling trace data in GX Developer

Operation
1. Write the sampling trace data, which are set in GX Works2, to the programmable controller
CPU.
Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Write to PLC] in GX Works2.

2. Read the sampling trace data from the programmable controller CPU in GX Developer.
Perform the "Read from PLC" function of "Trace settings PLC operation" in GX Developer.

16 - 28

16.4.7 Precautions when performing sampling trace

16.5 Measuring Scan Time

*1

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

*1: Not supported by Basic model QCPU.

This section explains how to measure the initial, current, maximum, and minimum scan time for a userdefined section of a ladder or SFC program.
The processing time can be measured even in subroutines and interrupt programs.
This function can be performed in Simple projects only.

Screen display
Select [Debug] [Scan Time Measurement].

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Measuring Scan Time

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

16.5

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

WRITING/READING
DATA

12
Operating procedure
Set the items on the screen.
Item

*2

Display the name of the program being opened.

Display the SFC block number.

Block No.

*2

Block Name

Display the SFC block name.

Start Step

Set the start step.

For SFC program, set the SFC step number.

End Step

Set the end step.

For SFC program, set the SFC step number.

14

SFC programs only

Click the

MONITORING

2.

Set the measurement range.

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Program Name

*2 :

13

Description

Measurement Limit

button.

The first value, current value, maximum value, and minimum value are measured.
0.000ms is displayed when the measured time is shorter than 0.100ms.
For Universal model QCPU, the scan time 0.001ms or longer can be measured.

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

Scan time measurement range

By selecting a range on the ladder editor/SFC diagram editor and selecting [Debug] [Scan Time
Measurement], the selected range can be set to "Start Step" and "End Step".
For a ladder program, when a step specified as "Start Step" or "End Step" is in the middle of a ladder, the
measurement range is set in units of ladder blocks which include the selected range.

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

1.

16 - 29

GX Works2

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

16.6

Debugging Programs with Simulation Function

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to debug programs with the simulation function.
This function is supported only by ladder and ST programs of Simple project.
The following table shows the main step execution functions.
Item
Break execution

Description
Execute a program until set break conditions are satisfied.
Break conditions are set with break points or break devices.

Step execution

Execute a program one step at a time.

Partial execution

Execute a program partially from the specified point.

A partial execution is executed by executing a break execution with set break points and break
devices.

The following are program editors in a debugging process with the step execution functions.
<Example of step execution in ladder program>

<Example of step execution in ST program>

16 - 30

16.6 Debugging Programs with Simulation Function

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

11

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

The RUN/STOP status of monitor status becomes STEP-RUN ( ) when the step execution is executed.
The following are the Online functions which can be performed when the monitor status is STEP-RUN.
Write to PLC function (SFC file batch online program change is not supported.)
Verify with PLC function
Remote operation
Delete PLC Data function
Editing programs during step execution
For ladder programs, programs can be edited even when the step execution is being executed.
Note that, however, when the step execution is executed in the status in which the program in GX Works2 and the
program in the virtual programmable controller do not match, then the step execution function is executed on the
program in the virtual programmable controller as the basis. Therefore, the cursor position of canceled position
may be displayed at a different position.
Ladder blocks with yellow background
In a ladder program, the step execution may not be executed normally in ladder blocks with yellow background
which indicates a program cannot be displayed as a ladder.
Programs with "Standby" execution type
The step execution cannot be executed on programs in which "Standby" is set for execution type in the program
setting.
However, the step execution can be executed on a program in which the execution start position is set for "From
current cursor position" in the execution option setup (
Section 16.6.8), and the cursor is positioned in a
program in which "Standby" is set.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Online functions which can be performed during step execution

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

16 - 31

GX Works2

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

Restrictions
Restrictions after setting break conditions and skip range
All settings of break condition and skip range are canceled when a data name or a library name is changed/deleted
in a project.
Break in ST control syntax
The following are the precautions when executing the step execution on an ST program contains ST control
syntax.
A break execution may be executed in a line of control syntax which is not calculated.
When the step execution is executed on the following program in which W10=0 is set for the break condition, the
break execution is executed in the 6th line. Note that, however, since a calculation is not processed in the line
where the break execution is executed, this break does not affect the calculation result.
ST line number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

ST program
FOR W10 := 0 TO 3 DO
CASE W10 OF
0:

Operation
-

D0 := D0 + 1;
1..3:

D1 :=D1 +1;
END_CASE;

When W10=0, this line is not processed but the break

execution is executed.
-

END_FOR;

In step execution, a break execution is not executed in a RETURN syntax and an EXIT syntax.
When the step execution is executed on the following program, the break execution is not executed in the 3rd and
4th lines even if the break condition is satisfied.
ST line number

ST program

W0 := 0;

IF X0 THEN

3
4

RETURN;
END_IF;

5
6
7
8

Operation
The break execution is not executed in the RETURN
syntax when X0=ON in the step execution. (The break
execution is executed in the first line.)
-

FOR W0 := 0 TO 4 DO
IF X1 THEN
EXIT;

The break execution is not executed in the EXIT

syntax when X1=ON in the step execution. (The break
execution is executed in the 11th line.)

END_IF;

10

END_FOR;

11

W0 := 0;

Step execution on successive function blocks

When function blocks are used successively in the ST program, even if a step execution is canceled in the process
of the function blocks, the canceled-position cursor may be placed at one step before the next function block
instruction.
The following program is an example when a step execution is canceled in the process of the successive function
blocks.

When using the same function blocks multiple times

When the step execution is executed, a break position may move to the first instance at the timing of entering the
second and the following instances. This phenomenon occurs when the instance created from the same function
block in the program file is used multiple times.

16 - 32

16.6 Debugging Programs with Simulation Function

Debugging procedure

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

16.6.1

The following flow chart explains the procedure to debug programs.

Start

Set break points.

(
*2)

10

*1)

Set break devices.

(
*3)

SEARCH/REPLACE

Start the simulation. (

Set a skip range.

(
*4)

Is the setting of the break

condition completed?

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11
No

Yes

Is break condition satisfied?

12

Cancel the program execution at

a specified timing. (
*6)
Check the settings of break points
and break devices.

WRITING/READING
DATA

Execute the break execution.

(
*5)

No

Yes

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

Execute the step execution.

(
*7)

Was the problem solved?

No

14
MONITORING

Yes
Stop the step execution.
(
*8)
End the simulation.
(
*1)

15

Section 15.2

*2 :

Section 16.6.2

*3 :

Section 16.6.3

*4 :

Section 16.6.4

*5 :

Section 16.6.6

*6 :

Section 16.6.7

*7 :

Section 16.6.5

*8 :

Section 16.6.9

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

*1 :

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

End

16.6.1 Debugging procedure

16 - 33

GX Works2

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

16.6.2

Setting break points

By setting a break point, a step execution can be canceled at a specific position in a program.
Break points are set in: step unit for ladder program, and line unit for ST program.
Break points can be set up to 64 points in an entire project.

Setting/canceling break points

Set/cancel break points.

Operating procedure

1.

Move the cursor to the position to set a break point or cancel the set break point.

2.

Select [Debug] [Break Setting] [Set/Cancel Break Point] (

).

A break point is set at the cursor position. When the break point is already set, it is canceled.
Set break points are registered on the Break Point window.
<Example of break points (for ladder)>

<Example of break points (for ST)>

When break point overlaps with other indications

When a break point overlaps with a canceled-position cursor on the ladder editor, the canceled-position cursor is
displayed as a priority. When a break point overlaps with other indications such as a skip range, mixed color is
displayed at the overlapped position.
The following program is an example of overlapped indications.
A break point which overlaps with a canceled-position cursor

A break point which overlaps with a skip range

16 - 34

16.6.2 Setting break points

16.6 Debugging Programs with Simulation Function

9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Enabling/disabling break points

Enable/disable set break points.

The break point function is executed at the position with enabled break point.
The break point function is not executed when the break point is disabled.

Operating procedure
Move the cursor to the break point to be enabled/disabled.

2.

Select [Debug] [Break Setting] [Enable/Disable Break Point] (

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

1.

).

The break point at the cursor position is enabled/disabled.

<Example of disabled break point (for ladder)>

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11
Disabled break point

<Example of disabled break point (for ST)>

12

WRITING/READING
DATA

Disabled break point

Canceling all break points

Cancel all break points.

13

Select [Debug] [Break Setting] [Cancel All Break Points] (

).

All break points are canceled.

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Operating procedure

16.6.2 Setting break points

16 - 35

GX Works2

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

Setting break conditions on Break Point window

Display a list of set break points.

Set break conditions and the number of execution counts for break points.

Screen display
Select [View] [Docking Window] [Debug Window] [Break Point Window] (

).

Operating procedure

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description
Display enabled/disabled status of break points.

Enable/Disable

: Enabled
: Disabled

Data Name

Display program names to which break point is set.

Position

Display positions of set break points in a program.

For ladder: Step numbers displayed on the editor.
For ST: Line numbers

Program Content

Display program content of set break points.

For ladder: Instructions (list format), pointers (P), or interrupt pointers (I)
For ST: ST text

Break Condition

Set break conditions.

This item can be set for ladder programs only.

Always

Execute the break execution when scans are completed for a set number of
times.

ON

Execute the break execution when the specified step/pointer is ON after scans
are completed for a set number of times.

OFF

Execute the break executions when the specified step/pointer is OFF after scans
are completed for a set number of times.

Rising

Execute the break execution when the specified step/pointer turns ON from OFF
after scans are completed for a set number of times.

Falling

Execute the break execution when the specified step/pointer turns OFF from ON
after scans are completed for a set number of times.

Execution Count

16 - 36

16.6.2 Setting break points

Set the number of scans until break execution is executed.

This item can be set for ladder programs only.

16.6 Debugging Programs with Simulation Function

9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Screen button

Jumps to the selected break point.

Enables/disables the selected break point.

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Cancels the selected break point.

Cancels all break points.

12
WRITING/READING
DATA

Counting and resetting number of execution counts

The number of execution counts is counted/reset according to the following rules.
When more than two break points are passed in one scan, the passed number of times is counted as the
number of execution counts.
Break points which are not passed by an instruction such as the jump instruction are not counted as the number
of execution counts.
The execution count of all break points is reset for each break.
When changing the number of execution counts, the corresponding execution count of break point is reset.

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

11

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

16.6.2 Setting break points

16 - 37

GX Works2

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

16.6.3

Setting break devices

By setting a break device, a step execution can be canceled when the value of device/label satisfies the
specific condition.
Break devices can be set up to 16 points in total of bit devices and word devices.
When a break device is set, a break execution is executed at the instruction which is the one after the
execution of the calculation to satisfy the break condition.
In order to execute the break execution after the break condition is satisfied, disable or cancel the break
devices.

Setting/canceling break devices

Set/cancel break devices, or enable/disable set break devices.

The break device function is executed at the position with enabled break device.
The break device function is not executed when the break device is disabled.

Screen display
Select [View] [Docking Window] [Debug Window] [Break Device Window] (

Break device information list

16 - 38

16.6.3 Setting break devices

).

16.6 Debugging Programs with Simulation Function

button.

A blank row is added to the last row of the break device information list.

Set the items on the screen.

Combination

Description
-

Judge each break device (OR condition)

Select this to execute the break execution when any condition of break devices is
satisfied.

Judge all break devices (AND condition)

Select this to execute the break execution when conditions of all break devices
are satisfied.

Enable/Disable

Enable/disable the break device.

Checked: Enabled
Not checked: Disabled

Comparative Source (Device/Label)

Enter the comparative source device/label.

For a local label, enter data in a 'program name/label name' format.

Condition

Select the comparative condition.

The condition selection changes according to the comparative source device/
label.

11

Rising

Execute the break execution when the comparative device/label rises.

Falling

Execute the break execution when the comparative device/label falls.

Execute the break execution when the value of comparative source device/label
matches with the value of comparative target device/label.

<

Execute the break execution when the value of comparative source device/label
is smaller than the value of comparative target device/label.

>

Execute the break execution when the value of comparative source device/label
is larger than the value of comparative target device/label.

<=

Execute the break execution when the value of comparative source device/label
is the same as or less than the value of comparative target device/label.

>=

Execute the break execution when the value of comparative source device/label
is the same as or more than the value of comparative target device/label.

<>

Execute the break execution when the value of comparative source device/label
does not match with the value of comparative target device/label.

12

Comparative Target (Value/Device/Label)

Enter a comparative target device/label.

Comparative Type

Set the data type to compare comparative source and comparative target.

MONITORING

Cancels the selected break device.

Cancels all break points.

15
SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Canceling all break devices

Cancel all break devices.

Operating procedure
Select [Debug] [Break Setting] [Cancel All Break Devices] (

16

).

All break devices are canceled.

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

13

14

Screen button

SEARCH/REPLACE

10

Item

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

2.

WRITING/READING
DATA

Click the

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

1.

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Operating procedure

16.6.3 Setting break devices

16 - 39

GX Works2

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

16.6.4

Setting skip ranges

A skip range is a range in which a program will not be executed during the step execution. A range can
be set in ladder block unit for ladder programs.
Up to 16 ranges can be set in a project.

Setting/canceling skip ranges

Set a skip range, or cancel the set skip range.

Operating procedure

1.

Select a ladder block to set a skip range.

Multiple ladder blocks can be selected by selecting a range.

2.

Select [Debug] [Skip Setting] [Set/Cancel Skip Range] (

).

The skip range is set. When the skip range is already set, it is canceled.
Multiple skip ranges set within the selected ladder blocks are all canceled.
Set skip ranges are registered on the Skip Range window.
<Example of skip range>

Skip range setting in ST programs

Skip ranges cannot be set in ST programs.
When skip range overlaps with other indications
When a skip range overlaps with other indications such as a break point, mixed color is displayed at the
overlapped position.

Enabling/disabling skip ranges

Enable/disable the skip range at the cursor position.

The program of the ladder block with enabled skip range is not executed.
When the skip range is disabled, the program of the ladder block with set skip range is also executed.

Operating procedure

1.

Move the cursor to the skip range to be enabled/disabled.

2.

Select [Debug] [Skip Setting] [Enable/Disable Skip Range] (

The skip range at the cursor position is enabled/disabled.
<Example of disabled skip range>

16 - 40

16.6.4 Setting skip ranges

).

16.6 Debugging Programs with Simulation Function

9
SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Canceling all skip ranges

Cancel all skip ranges.

Operating procedure

Select [Debug] [Skip Setting] [Cancel All Skip Range] (

).

10

SEARCH/REPLACE

All skip ranges are canceled.

Displaying Skip Range window

Display a list of set skip ranges.

Screen display

11

Select [View] [Docking Window] [Debug Window] [Skip Range Window] (

).

SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

WRITING/READING
DATA

12
Display contents
Item

Description

Enable/Disable

Enable/disable the skip range.

: Enabled

Data Name

Display the program name to which the skip range is set.

13

Start

Display the start position of the skip range with a step number.

End

Display the end position of the skip range with a step number.

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

: Disabled

Screen button

14

Jumps to the start position of the selected skip range.

MONITORING

Enables/disables the selected skip range.

Cancels the selected skip range.

15

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

Cancels all skip ranges.

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

16.6.4 Setting skip ranges

16 - 41

GX Works2

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

16.6.5

Executing program one step at a time

Execute programs one step at a time.

Operating procedure

Select [Debug] [Step Execution] [Step Execution] (

).

One instruction of a program is executed for ladder program, and one line of a program is executed
for ST program.
When the step execution is executed on a function block in the program, the step execution is
executed on the program in the function block.
The canceled-position cursor is displayed on the function block while the step execution is being
executed on the program in the function block.

16.6.6

Executing program until condition is satisfied

Execute a program until the condition is satisfied.

Operating procedure

Select [Debug] [Step Execution] [Break Execution] (

).

When the break condition is satisfied, the break execution is stopped.

When multiple break conditions are satisfied simultaneously

When the conditions of break point and break device are satisfied simultaneously, the Break Point window is
activated and the cursor moves to the break point where the condition is satisfied.

16 - 42

16.6.5 Executing program one step at a time

16.6 Debugging Programs with Simulation Function

Canceling step execution

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

16.6.7

Cancel the step execution.

Operating procedure

Select [Debug] [Step Execution] [Cancel] (

).

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

The step execution is canceled.

The canceled-position cursor is displayed at the canceled position.
<Example of canceled-position cursor (for ladder)>

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Canceled-position cursor

<Example of canceled-position cursor (for ST)>

Canceled-position cursor

13
PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

Canceled-position cursor
The canceled-position cursor is displayed on the program editor in which the step execution is executed as
described below.
The step execution is canceled.
The step execution completed without satisfying the break condition.
The break condition is satisfied and the step execution is canceled.

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16

16.6.7 Canceling step execution

16 - 43

GX Works2

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

16.6.8

Setting options for step execution

Set options for the step execution function.

Set the start position of the step execution and the setting for the automatic step execution.

Screen display
Select [Debug] [Step Execution] [Execution Option] (

).

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description
Set the execution position of the step execution.
The setting will be changed depending on the last operation that is performed.
For details, refer to Point in this section.

Execution Start Position

From start

Execute the step execution from the start of the program according to the setting
set on the <<Program>> tab of PLC parameter.

From canceled position

Execute the step execution from the canceled position.

From current cursor position

Execute the step execution from the current cursor position on the active
program editor.
When the program editor is not active, the operation is the same as that of "From
start".

Automatic Step Execution

2.

16 - 44

Execute step execution automatically

Check this to execute the step execution automatically.

The automatic step execution is executed by executing the step execution after
setting this item.

Repetition Count

Set the number of times the step execution is executed automatically.

When this item is blank, the step execution is executed repeatedly until the break
condition is satisfied or the step execution is canceled.
This item is applicable when the "Execute Step execution automatically" item is
checked.

Execution Interval

Set the cycle of automatic step execution in 100ms unit.

This item is applicable when the "Execute Step execution automatically" item is
checked.

Click the

button.

16.6.8 Setting options for step execution

16.6 Debugging Programs with Simulation Function

Setting execution start position

The setting of the execution start position will be changed depending on the last operation that is performed.
The following table shows the execution start position corresponding to the operation that is performed.
Execution Start Position
From start

Cancellation, break execution, step execution

From canceled position

16.6.9

10
SEARCH/REPLACE

Last-performed operation
Simulation start, step execution stop

SETTING DEVICE
COMMENTS

Stopping step execution

11
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION

Stop the step execution.

Operating procedure
Select [Debug] [Step Execution] [Stop] (

).

The step execution is stopped.

The canceled-position cursor on the program editor is hidden.

WRITING/READING
DATA

12

PROTECTING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU DATA

13

MONITORING

14

SIMULATING
PROGRAMS

15

16
DEBUGGING
PROGRAMS

16.6.9 Stopping step execution

16 - 45

GX Works2

16 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS

16.7

Using LCPU Logging Configuration Tool

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

This section explains how to start the LCPU logging configuration tool from the menu of GX Works2.
To start the LCPU logging configuration tool, install the logging configuration tool in advance.
For the installation and operation methods, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-L CPU Module Users Manual (Data Logging Function)

Screen display
Select [Tool] [LCPU Logging Configuration Tool].

16 - 46

FX

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

17 OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

19

20

PRINTING

Remote Operation of Programmable Controller CPU . . . . 17-2

Formatting Programmable Controller CPU Memory . . . . . 17-4
Clearing Programmable Controller Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Arranging Programmable Controller Memory . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
Setting Clock in Programmable Controller CPU . . . . . . . 17-10
Registering/Canceling Display Module Menu. . . . . . . . . . 17-12
Start Ethernet Adapter Module Configuration Tool . . . . . 17-14

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

17.1
17.2
17.3
17.4
17.5
17.6
17.7

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

This chapter explains how to change the execution status and setting the clock of the programmable
controller CPU from GX Works2.

17 - 1

GX Works2

17 OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU

17.1

Remote Operation of Programmable Controller CPU

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to switch the RUN/STOP status of the programmable controller CPU and allowing
the memory card removal from GX Works2.

Screen display
Select [Online] [Remote Operation].
<QCPU (Q Mode)/LCPU>

<FXCPU>

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description

Connection Channel List

Display the information of the connection destination.

Specify Execution Target*1,*2

Set the target station of remote operation.

Currently Specified Station

Select this to perform the remote operation only upon the station specified in the
connection destination setting.

All Stations

Select this to perform the remote operation to the station specified in the connection
destination setting and all the stations on the same network.
Set a target network with "Specify Module No."*3 or "Specify Network No.".

Specified Group

Select this to perform the remote operation to the station specified in the connection
destination setting and each station of the specific group on the specified network.
Set a target network with "Specify Module No." or "Specify Network No.", and set a
group number with "Specify Group No.".

Operation

Select the operation details.

RUN
STOP
PAUSE*2

Select this to switch the operating status of the programmable controller CPU.
*2

Latch Clear
RESET*2

Remove Memory Card*2,*3

Operation during RUN*2

17 - 2

Select this to remove the memory card while the programmable controller CPU is ON.
Set the status of the device memory and signal flow when the programmable controller
CPU is switched to RUN.

Device Memory

Select whether to clear the device memory.

Signal Flow

Select whether to retain the signal flow.

*1 :

When the target network is CC-Link IE Field Network, the target station can be specified with
"Currently Specified Station" and "All Stations".

*2 :

Not supported by FXCPU.

*3 :

Not supported by LCPU.

17.1 Remote Operation of Programmable Controller CPU

Priority

STOP

PAUSE

RUN

The following table shows the operating status after RUN/STOP switching on the programmable controller CPU or
remote RUN/PAUSE contact operation.
Programmable controller CPU switch

RUN
Remote
operation

RUN

STOP

Remote RUN/STOP contact is ON.

(The programmable controller CPU is in STOP.)

RUN

STOP

STOP

STOP

STOP

STOP

STOP

PAUSE

PAUSE

STOP

STOP

Latch clear

Inoperable*2

Latch clear

Latch clear

RESET*1

Inoperable*2

RESET

RESET

*1 :

The remote reset must be enabled on the <<PLC System>> tab of PLC parameter.

*2 :

Operable when the programmable controller CPU is switched to STOP by remote operation.

20

4th module

21

A
<Terms on the figure>
: Q series-compatible E71
Ethernet
MNET/10(H) : MELSECNET/H network module
CC IE Field : CC-Link IE Field Network module
CC IE Control : CC-Link IE Controller Network module

APPENDIX

MNET/10(H)

CC IE Control

CC IE Field

3rd module

2nd module
MNET/10(H)

MNET/10(H)

Ethernet

1st module

Precautions on removing a memory card

Turn OFF SM605 to allow the memory card removal.
If the memory card is removed when not allowed, the programmable controller CPU becomes in an error status.
Counting modules to set "Specify Module No."
Physically count the module from the programmable controller side, and specify the number.
However, note that the target modules to be counted are MELSECNET/H network modules and CC-Link IE
Controller Network modules only. Do not include other modules such as Ethernet modules, CC-Link modules, and
CC-Link IE Field Network modules.
The following figure shows an example of counting modules.

Programmable
controller CPU

19

PRINTING

Operation to the programmable

controller CPU

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Remote operation and RUN/STOP switch for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU

When operation to the programmable controller CPU differs among controls by the remote operation, RUN/STOP
switch, and remote RUN/PAUSE contact, the programmable controller CPU operates according to the priority
shown below:

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

The operating status of the programmable controller CPU is changed.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

button.

SETTING OPTIONS

Click the

Remote operation of FXCPU

M8035 (forced RUN mode), M8036 (forced RUN command), and M8037 (forced STOP command) are controlled.
The remote operation is possible regardless of the status of the programmable controller CPU side RUN/STOP
switch.
Programmable controller CPUs that support the remote operation are as follows.
FX1S, FX1N, FX2N, FX1NC, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3U, and FX3UC

Restrictions
Performing remote operation on other stations
When performing the remote operation on other stations with "All Stations" or "Specified Group", the remote
operation cannot be performed on the following modules.
ACPU/QnACPU

17 - 3

INDEX

2.

GX Works2

17 OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU

17.2

Formatting Programmable Controller CPU Memory

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to format the programmable controller CPU memory or the memory card.
The function is used when using the programmable controller CPU and the memory card for the first time or
clearing all data stored in them.
However, the Flash card cannot be formatted using this function. (Flash cards do not require formatting.)

Screen display
Select [Online] [PLC Memory Operation] [Format PLC Memory].

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

2.

Description

Connection Channel List

Display the information of the connection destination setting.

Target Memory

Set the memory to be formatted.

Format Type

Select the format type.

Do not create a user setting system area

(the required system area only)

Select this to create the necessary system area only.

Create a user setting system area

Select this to create the necessary system area, the area for highspeed monitoring from another station, and the area for enabling
Online program change of multiple blocks.

Click the

button.

The target memory is formatted.

17 - 4

17.2 Formatting Programmable Controller CPU Memory

The system area is an area created in the programmable controller CPU memory. The system area
consists of the 'Necessary system area' automatically created upon formatting the programmable
controller CPU memory and 'User setting system area' created by the user.
In the necessary system area, data such as local devices are stored.

Area for enabling Online program change of multiple blocks

This area is set to enable Online program change of multiple locations (multiple blocks)
simultaneously.
The following table shows the restrictions on Online program change of multiple blocks according to
the capacity.
This setting is not required for Universal model QCPU and LCPU since 4k steps are secured
automatically other than for the program memory.
Secured system area capacity for Online program change of multiple blocks
Basic model QCPU
Function
version A

The number of blocks for

simultaneous writing
The number of steps per
block for writing

0k steps

1.25k steps

2.5k steps

Online
program
change of
multiple
blocks is
not
possible.

Max. 32
blocks

Max. 64
blocks

Max. 512
steps

Max. 1024
steps

Not limited

High Performance model

QCPU
0k steps

2k steps

4k steps

Online
program
change of
multiple
blocks is
not
possible.

Max. 32
blocks

Max. 64
blocks

Max. 512
steps

Max.
1024
steps

Max. 50

Max. 100

20

21

APPENDIX

The number of used pointers

(P, I) per block for writing

Online program
change of
multiple blocks
is not possible.

Function version B or later

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

The area is set to accelerate monitoring from peripheral such as GX Works2 connected to a serial
communication module or other communication module.
Change the capacity according to the number of device points (capacity) to be monitored through a
serial communication module or other communication module and the volume of other user data to
be stored in the program memory.
The setting range for Basic model QCPU, and Universal model QCPU (Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U) is 0 to
3k steps.
The setting range for High Performance model QCPU, Universal model QCPU (excluding Q00UJ/
Q00U/Q01U), and LCPU is 0 to 15k steps.

PRINTING

Area for enabling high-speed monitoring from another station

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

The user setting system areas are set for the following purposes:

Description

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Format types

SETTING OPTIONS

Formatting a memory card

To format an SRAM card, ATA card or SD memory card to be used in the programmable controller CPU, select
[Online] [PLC Memory Operation] [Format PLC Memory].
If it is formatted using other functions such as the Windows, the card may not be usable when it is installed to a
programmable controller CPU.
Memory in which user setting system areas can be created
The areas can be created only in the program memory.

17 - 5

INDEX

Device memory
The device memory values cannot be cleared with the Memory format function.
To clear the device memory values, execute [Online] [PLC Memory Operation] [Format PLC Memory].
(
Section 17.3)

GX Works2

17 OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU

17.3

Clearing Programmable Controller Memory

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to initialize device memory data in the programmable controller CPU and file
registers stored in the memory card and setting them to '0'.

QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU

Initialize device memory data in the programmable controller CPU and file registers stored in the
memory card and set them to '0'.
However, the memory clear function is not available for standard ROM/Flash cards/SD memory cards.

Screen display
Select [Online] [PLC Memory Operation] [Clear PLC Memory].

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description

Connection Channel List

Display the information of the connection destination setting.

Clear Device's whole Memory

Check this to clear device data in the latch range also.

The device data for which latch clear is disabled is also cleared.

Include Latch
Clear all File Registers

Check this to clear the file register data.

Target Memory*1

Select the memory in which file registers are stored.

*1

*1 :

2.

Check this to clear the device memory data.

All Files

Select this to clear all file registers in the target memory.

Specific File*1

Select this to clear the selected file register memory.

Select a file name of the file register.

QCPU (Q mode) only

Click the

button.

The target memory data is cleared.

17 - 6

17.3 Clearing Programmable Controller Memory

Operation of the PLC Memory Clear function during the monitoring of local devices
When the "Clear device's whole Memory" operation is executed during the monitoring of local devices, local
devices are cleared in the programs selected in 'Local device monitor target selection field'.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18
FXCPU

Initialize device memory data in FXCPU and resetting them to '0'.

Screen display
Select [Online] [PLC Memory Operation] [Clear PLC Memory].

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

21

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Connection Channel List
Target Data

2.

Description
Display the information of the connection destination setting.
Select the device memory to be cleared.

PLC Memory

Check this to clear all data.

(Programs, comments, parameters, file registers, device memory, and extended
file registers)

Data Device

Check this to clear all registers.

(Data registers, file registers, RAM file registers, special registers, extended
registers, and extended file registers)

Bit Device

Check this to clear all bit devices.

(X, Y, M, S, T, and C)
Additionally, the current values of 'T' and 'C' are reset to '0'.

Click the

APPENDIX

1.

SETTING OPTIONS

Operating procedure

button.
INDEX

The target data is cleared.

17 - 7

GX Works2

17 OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU

Executing condition of the memory clear for FXCPU

Item
PLC memory

Memory
Available for the built-in memory, and RAM/EEPROM (PROTECT switch OFF)/FLASH memory
(PROTECT switch OFF) cassette.
Not available for the EEPROM (PROTECT switch ON)/FLASH memory (PROTECT switch ON)
and EPROM cassette.

Data device

Equivalent to executing condition to PLC memory

Bit device

Available for all the memory.

Precautions when using FXCPU

Execute this function when the programmable controller CPU is in STOP status. Memory data cannot be cleared
in RUN status.
When the status of the programmable controller CPU is changed to STOP by the remote operation, bit devices
cannot be cleared. Execute the PLC memory clear function after switching the status of the programmable
controller CPU to STOP.

17 - 8

17.4 Arranging Programmable Controller Memory

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to secure consecutive free memory areas by arranging the data stored in program
memory/standard RAM of the programmable controller CPU or memory card.
Use this function to rearrange files whose arrangement became discontinuous by operations such as Delete
PLC Data.
However, the Memory arrangement function is not available for standard ROM/Flash cards/SD memory cards.
The following figure shows how consecutive free areas are created with the Memory arrangement function
after Delete PLC Data.
Program A
8K

Program A
8K

Program B
6K

Free area
6K

Program C
6K

Program C
6K

Delete PLC data

(Delete program B.)

Program C
6K

Free area
8K
Total free space
8K
Maximum consecutive 8K
free space

19

Memory format

Free area
8K
Total free space
14K
Maximum consecutive 8K
free space

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

28K

Program A
8K

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Arranging Programmable Controller Memory

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

17.4

Free area
14K

20

Total free space

14K
Maximum consecutive 14K
free space

PRINTING

Screen display
Select [Online] [PLC Memory Operation] [Arrange PLC Memory].

SETTING OPTIONS

21

Operating procedure
Item

2.

Description

Connection Channel List

Display the information of the connection destination setting.

Target Memory

Set the memory to be arranged.

Click the

APPENDIX

Set the items on the screen.

button.

The target memory is arranged.

INDEX

1.

17 - 9

GX Works2

17 OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU

17.5

Setting Clock in Programmable Controller CPU

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to set the clock in a programmable controller CPU.
The clock setting function is not supported by FX0S, FX0, and FX1.

Screen display
Select [Online] [Set Clock].

Date and time

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Date and time
Specify Execution
Target*1,*2

2.

Description
Set the date and time.
Set the target station whose clock is to be set.

Currently
Specified Station

Select this to set the clock only upon the station specified in the connection destination
setting.

All Stations

Select this to perform the remote operation to the station specified in the connection
destination setting and all the stations on the specified network.
Set a target network with "Specify Module No."*3 or "Specify Network No.".

Specified Group

Select this to perform the remote operation to the station specified in the connection
destination setting and each station of the specific group on the specified network.
Set a target network with module mounted on the station specified in the connection
destination setting for "Specify Module No." or "Specify Network No.", and set a group
number with "Specify Group No.".

*1 :

Not supported by FXCPU.

*2 :

The target station can be specified with "Currently Specified Station" or "All Stations" when the target
network is CC-Link IE Field Network.

*3 :

Not supported by LCPU.

Click the

button.

The programmable controller CPU clock is set.

Screen button

Sets the time display of personal computer as the 'date and time'.

17 - 10

17.5 Setting Clock in Programmable Controller CPU

Performing clock setting to other stations

When performing the clock setting to other stations with "All Stations" or "Specified Group", the clock setting cannot
be performed to the following modules.
ACPU/QnACPU

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Restrictions

18

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Clock setting for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU

For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, the clock setting can be set regardless of the ON/OFF status of the clock setting
device 'SM1028'.
Note that the ON/OFF status of 'SM1028' does not change upon clock setting.
Precaution on the clock setting
In the clock setting, a time-lag error may appear due to the span of transfer.
Counting modules to set "Specify Module No."
Refer to the Point in Section 17.1.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

PRINTING

20

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

17 - 11

GX Works2

17 OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU

17.6

Registering/Canceling Display Module Menu

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to register/cancel menu items to/from a standard ROM or SD memory card to
operate the intelligent function modules using the LCPU display module.
Use this function to confirm or change each setting of intelligent function module by operating the display
module.
For details of functions and operations of display module, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-L CPU Module Users Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
For details of intelligent function modules which support registration/cancellation of display module menu, and
functions which can be performed on each intelligent function module, refer to the following manual.
Manual of the intelligent function module to be used

Screen display
Select [Online] [Register/Cancel Display Module Menu].

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

2.

Description

Target Memory

Select the target memory to which the display module menu items are to be registered/
canceled.

Register/Cancel Menu

Select registration/cancellation of the menus.

Target Module

Select the target module of the menu items to be registered.

Menu Language

Select the language of the menu items.

Click the

button.

The display module menu items are registered/canceled.

17 - 12

17.6 Registering/Canceling Display Module Menu

Modules and corresponding GX Works2 versions

The following table shows the modules and corresponding GX Works2 versions for registering/canceling the
display module menu.
Version
GX Works2 Version 1.24A

Temperature control

L60TCTT4
L60TCTT4BW
L60TCRT4
L60TCRT4BW

GX Works2 Version 1.62Q

Counter

LD62
LD62D

GX Works2 Version 1.31H

Serial communication

LJ71C24
LJ71C24-R2

CC-Link

LJ61BT11

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Analog

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

GX Works2 Version 1.24A

PRINTING

20

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

Module name
L60AD4
L60DA4

INDEX

Module type

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

17 - 13

GX Works2

17 OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU

17.7

Start Ethernet Adapter Module Configuration Tool

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to start the Ethernet adapter module configuration tool.
For details of Ethernet adapter module configuration tool, refer to the following manual.
CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module Users Manual

Operating procedure

1.

Select [Tool] [Ethernet Adapter Module Configuration Tool].

The Ethernet Adapter Module Configuration Tool screen is displayed.

2.

Enter the IP address or domain name of the Ethernet adapter module to

"Connection Destination", and click the

button.

A default web browser is activated and a start screen of the Ethernet adapter module configuration
tool is displayed.

17 - 14

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

18 DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

20

PRINTING

Diagnosing Programmable Controller CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2

Diagnosing MELSECNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
Diagnosing CC-Link IE Controller Network . . . . . . . . . . . 18-24
Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-33
Diagnosing CC-Link and CC-Link/LT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-44
Diagnosing Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-57
System Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-78
Changing Modules Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-94
Built-in I/O Module Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-96

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

18.1
18.2
18.3
18.4
18.5
18.6
18.7
18.8
18.9

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

This chapter explains how to display system status and error codes of the programmable controller CPU.

18 - 1

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

18.1

Diagnosing Programmable Controller CPU

This section explains how to display system status and error codes of the programmable controller CPU.

18.1.1

Diagnosing QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, communication head

module, and remote I/O module
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Display the programmable controller CPU status.

Screen display
Select [Diagnostics] [PLC Diagnostics].
<QCPU (Q mode)>

CPU operating status

Image of programmable
controller CPU

<LCPU>

CPU operating status

Image of programmable
controller CPU

18 - 2

18.1.1 Diagnosing QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, communication head module, and remote I/O module

Head

FX

18.1 Diagnosing Programmable Controller CPU

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

<Communication head module>

CPU operating status

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

Image of programmable
controller CPU

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

<Remote I/O module>

20

PRINTING

CPU operating status

SETTING OPTIONS

21
Image of programmable
controller CPU

APPENDIX

INDEX

18.1.1 Diagnosing QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, communication head module, and remote I/O module

18 - 3

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Display contents
Item

Description

Monitor Status

Display the current monitor status.

Connection Channel List

Display the connection route which has been set.

CPU operating status

Single CPU system

Display the operating status and switch status of the programmable
controller CPU.
Multiple CPU system (QCPU (Q mode) only)
Display the operating status and the switch status of CPU No. 1 to No. 4.
"Uninstallable/Blank" is displayed for a slot with no module mounted.

Image of programmable controller CPU

Perform online operations of the programmable controller CPU.

(For details,
18.1.4 Online operations.)

Error Information

Select this to display the current error information of the programmable

controller CPU.
Select this to clear user specified errors and minor errors.
To clear errors, select the errors and click the
button.

Continuation Error Information*1

Select this to display the status information of the programmable controller

CPU. Display contents differ depending on the programmable controller CPU.
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU

PLC Status Information

Communication head module/Remote I/O module

Monitor the programmable controller CPU when the serial communication

function is set.
Error information is cleared by clicking the

button.

Serial Communication Error*2

18 - 4

Change the window size and position after

error jump

Check this to downsize the PLC Diagnostics screen and move it to the upper
left of the entire screen when the error jump is executed.

Error History

Display the latest error history by clicking the

Occurrence Order Display

Sorts error history in ascending/descending order.

Status Icon Legend

Display the status icons on the screen.

(
18.1.3 Error icons)

*1 :

LCPU only

*2 :

Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02U/QnUD(H)CPU only

button.

18.1.1 Diagnosing QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, communication head module, and remote I/O module

18.1 Diagnosing Programmable Controller CPU

(Not supported by communication head module and remote I/O module)

Jumps the screen display to the sequence program step number corresponding to the selected
error item/error history item.
However, jump is not applicable in the following cases.
The error is not a program error.
The error step information dose not exist.
The information of the program number and SFC step number of SFC block or the transition
number does not exist.
SFC program error of FXCPU
The label program is not compiled.

Clears the current error information.

/
Displays the explanation screen corresponding to the error number of the selected error item/error
history item.

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Displays the illustration of the connection route which has been set.

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Screen button

20

PRINTING

Displays the latest error history.

Saves the currently displayed error history in a file in the CSV file format.

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

18.1.1 Diagnosing QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, communication head module, and remote I/O module

18 - 5

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Displaying the Error Details screen

The following Error Details screen is displayed by double-clicking the Present Error column or the error item in the
Error History display column.
SD5 to 15 (Common Error Information) and SD16 to 26 (Individual Error Information) of the programmable
controller CPU are displayed on the Error Details screen.
For details, refer to the manual of the programmable controller CPU module.

Double-click

"Change the window size and position after error jump" item
When the "Change the window size and position after error jump" item is checked and the error jump is executed,
the PLC Diagnostics screen is downsized as shown below. This function applies when executing the error jump on
either Present Error column or Error History display column.
The screen returns to the original size by clicking the

button.

When error is not found at error jump destination

In the following conditions, an error may not be found at the error jump destination.
When the program of the open project does not match with the program in the programmable controller CPU.
When diagnosing programmable controller other than the one set as a connection target in the project.
(Example: When a module is selected from the CC IE Control Diagnostics and the System Monitor is activated,
and the PLC Diagnostics is activated from the activated System Monitor.)

18 - 6

18.1.1 Diagnosing QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, communication head module, and remote I/O module

18.1 Diagnosing Programmable Controller CPU

17

Diagnosing FXCPU
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

Display the programmable controller CPU status.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

18.1.2

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Screen display
Select [Diagnostics] [PLC Diagnostics].

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

SETTING OPTIONS

21
Display contents
Description
Display the connection route which has been set.

Error Information

Display errors being occurring.

The corresponding error help is displayed by double-clicking the row of error
information.
(It is also displayed by clicking the

button.)

PLC Panel

Display the status of the connection destination CPU module.

PLC Information

Display the memory type and version of the connection destination CPU
module.

Monitor Status

Display the current monitor status.

APPENDIX

Item
Connection Channel List

Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 18.1.1.
INDEX

Switches the execution status of the programmable controller CPU to RUN.

Not supported by FX0, FX0S, FX1, FXU, and FX2C.

Switches the execution status of the programmable controller CPU to STOP.

Not supported by FX0, FX0S, FX1, FXU, and FX2C.

18.1.2 Diagnosing FXCPU

18 - 7

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Displays the Clear PLC Memory screen.

Displays the Set Clock screen.

Not supported by FX0S, FX0, and FX1.

18.1.3

Error icons
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

The following table shows the details of the error information icons of the programmable controller CPU.
Icon

Programmable controller CPU status

Serious error

RESET and others

Moderate error

STOP due to error in parameter or instruction codes

The error that allow "STOP"/"Continue" to be specified as an "Operating Mode When

User specified error*1 There is an Error" on the <<PLC RAS>> tab of PLC parameter.
Minor error

*1 :

18 - 8

Errors that allow RUN status such as battery low and annunciator ON

Not supported by FXCPU.

18.1.3 Error icons

18.1 Diagnosing Programmable Controller CPU

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

The PLC Memory Operation function and the Remote Operation function can be executed from the
figure of programmable controller CPU.
When the cursor is moved to the figure of programmable controller CPU, the function menu is
expanded. Click the figure of programmable controller CPU to display the items to be set.

Screen display
<QCPU (Q mode)>
<Remote Operation>

<PLC Memory Operation>

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Online operations

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18.1.4

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

20

PRINTING

<Set Clock/Write Title>

<Ethernet Diagnostics>

SETTING OPTIONS

21

<LCPU>
<Remote Operation/
PLC Module Change>

<PLC Memory Operation>

APPENDIX

INDEX

<CC-Link Diagnostics>

<Ethernet Diagnostics>
<Set Clock/Write Title>

18.1.4 Online operations

18 - 9

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

<Communication head module>

<Remote Operation>

<CC IE Field Diagnostics>

<Write Title/Memory Format>

<Remote I/O module>

<MELSEC Diagnostics>

Display contents
Item
PLC Memory Operation

Remote Operation/
PLC Module Change

(Type of memory
operation)
Remote operation

CC-Link Diagnostics

18 - 10

Memory clear
Memory arrangement

Section 17.2
Section 17.3
Section 17.4
Section 17.1

Backup data creation

Section 12.8.1

Data restoration

Section 12.8.2

Ethernet Diagnostics
Set Clock/Write Title

Reference
Memory format

Section 18.6
Set clock
Write title

Section 17.5
Section 12.1
Section 18.5.1

CC-Link IE Field Diagnostics

Section 18.4

MELSECNET Diagnostics

Section 18.2

18.1.4 Online operations

18.2 Diagnosing MELSECNET

17

Diagnosing MELSECNET
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to check the MELSECNET/10(H) status connected to the selected module.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

18.2

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Screen display
Select [Diagnostics] [MELSECNET Diagnostics].
Link module
selection tab

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

20

Display contents

Network Information

Display the network information of the selected module.

Link Information

Display the network status.

Communication Information

Display the communication status of the target network.

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Link module selection tab

Description
Switch the MELSECNET diagnostics result display screen for each link modules from 1 to 4.
The information whether a link module is mounted or not is acquired from the mounted status.

Screen button

Displays the Network Test screen. (

PRINTING

Item

Section 18.2.1)

Displays the Loop Test screen. (

Section 18.2.2)

Displays the Setting Confirmation Test screen. (

Section 18.2.3)

Displays the Station Order Check Test screen. (

Section 18.2.4)

APPENDIX

Displays the Communication Test screen. (

Section 18.2.5)

Displays the Error History Monitor screen. (

Section 18.2.6)

INDEX

Displays the Network Monitor Details screen. (

Section 18.2.7)

18 - 11

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Displays the Other Station Information screen. (

Section 18.2.8)

Network to be diagnosed
To change a network to be diagnosed, change the target station in the connection destination setting.
When another station is set in the connection destination setting
Test functions such as network test cannot be executed when the connection destination setting is set to other than
"No Specification".
MELSECNET/H (bus) connection
The loop test and station order test cannot be executed with the MELSECNET/H (bus) connection with the
coaxial cable.
The loop test, setting verification test, and station order test cannot be executed with the MELSECNET/H (bus)
connection with the twisted pair cable.

18 - 12

18.2 Diagnosing MELSECNET

17

Network test

Perform link start/stop (cyclic transmission stop/restart) on the host station, specified station, and all
stations in MELSECNET/10(H).
Use this function to avoid receiving data from another stations or to avoid sending data from host
station when starting up (debugging) the system.

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Screen display
button on the MELSECNET Diagnostics screen.

Click the

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

18.2.1

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

20

Description
Display the network information on the host station of the selected module.

Monitor Status

Display the current monitor status.

Host Status

Display the operating status of the host station for the selected module.

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Network Information

Operation Status of All Stations Display the link status of all stations on the tested network.

Operating procedure
Set the items on the screen.
Item

Description

Link Start/Stop

Set the test contents to be executed.

Link Start

Select this to start the station that was stopped by the host station.
The station that was stopped by another station cannot be started.

Link Stop

Select this to stop a station from the host/another station.

Select this to forcibly perform the link start on a station stopped by the host station or
another station, or to forcibly perform the link start on a station to which the link stop is
performed by special relay/special register. However, forced start in units of stations is
not possible while all stations are stopped.
Operation
To check whether the station is stopped by stop specification of all stations, check
Forced Link
SW0000.
Start
This function can be executed when "PLC side I/F" in the connection destination setting
is set to "C24".
This function cannot be executed when the MELSECNET/10(H) board is used.
This function cannot be executed via the A series-compatible E71/QE71 module. (The
route via A series-compatible E71/QE71 is not supported by GX Works2.)
Designate Object Station Specify the object station of the network test.
Object Module

2.

Click the

Select the object module of the network test.

button.

The network test is executed according to the set contents.

18.2.1 Network test

18 - 13

APPENDIX

1.

INDEX

Item

PRINTING

Display contents

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

When another station is set in the connection destination setting

The network test function cannot be executed when the connection destination setting is set to other than "No
Specification".

18 - 14

18.2.1 Network test

18.2 Diagnosing MELSECNET

17

Loop test

Check the loop status of MELSECNET/10(H).

Use this function to perform the loop test in the forward loop/reverse loop status with the completion of
the optical loop system wiring.
Wiring status of data link cables (IN/OUT) can be checked.

button on the MELSECNET Diagnostics screen.

Click the

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Screen display

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

18.2.2

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

20

Description
Display the network information on the host station of the selected module.

Execute Results

Display the number of stations and the result (normal/invalid, reserved station: R) of loop test.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description

Loop Test

Test Method

Set the test contents to be executed.

Parameter
Designation

Select this to test all the (slave) stations specified by the network parameter
(excluding reserved stations).
All stations are tested, if network parameter does not exist.

All Stations
Designation

Select this to test all stations.

Object Module

2.

Click the

APPENDIX

1.

SETTING OPTIONS

Operating procedure

21

Select the module for which loop test is executed.

button.

The loop test is executed according to the set contents.

When another station is set in the connection destination setting

The loop test function cannot be executed when the connection destination setting is set to other than "No
Specification".

18.2.2 Loop test

18 - 15

INDEX

Item
Network Information

PRINTING

Display contents

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

18.2.3

Setting verification test

Check the status of the station number, network number, and group number set for each station.
Use this function to check overlaps of control stations or station numbers, or whether the network
number set to the station to which GX Works2 is connected matches with the network number set in the
network parameter of host station.

Screen display
button on the MELSECNET Diagnostics screen.

Click the

Display contents
Item

18 - 16

Description

Network Information

Display the network information on the host station of the selected module.

Execute Results

Display the test result.

Station No.

Display the station number of the stations for which the setting verification test was executed.
Up to 64 stations are displayed.

Control Station No.

Display " " symbol at the target station if control station is set at two or more places.

Duplicated Station No.

Display " " symbol at the target station if the same station number is set at two or more places.

Network No.

Display the network number of the stations for which the setting verification test was executed.
If the network number differs from that of the host station, it is identified by red.

Group No.

Display the group number of the stations for which the setting verification test was executed.
For the remote I/O network, the station in error is blank.

Reserved Station

Display " " symbol for the station reserved by parameter setting.
(When "Parameter Designation" is set in the test execution method.)

Error Station

Display " " symbol for the station when it is reserved by parameter setting or if a module is
faulty in all station specification.

Network Type Error

Station

Display " " symbol for the station where the parameter setting and the actual connection type
disagree.

Duplex R Sub M Station

Duplication

Display " " symbol for the station where multiple sub-master stations exist on the same
network.

Parallel R Sub M Station

Duplication

Display " " symbol for the station where multiple sub-master stations exist on the same
network.

18.2.3 Setting verification test

18.2 Diagnosing MELSECNET

Item

Description

Setting Check Test

Test Method

Set the test contents to be executed.

Parameter
Designation

Select this to test all the (slave) stations specified by the network parameter
(excluding reserved stations).
All stations are tested, if network parameter does not exist.

All Stations
Designation

Select this to test all stations.

Object Module

2.

Click the

Select the module for which setting verification test is executed.

button.

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Set the items on the screen.

19

The setting verification test is executed according to the set contents.

20

PRINTING

Precautions on executing the test

The test cannot be executed to multiple stations simultaneously.
If executed, cyclic transmission stops.
When another station is set in the connection destination setting
The setting verification test cannot be executed when the connection destination setting is set to other than "No
Specification".

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

1.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Operating procedure

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

18.2.3 Setting verification test

18 - 17

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

18.2.4

Station order check test

Check the station number of the connected stations in the optical loop system of MELSECNET/10(H).

Screen display
button on the MELSECNET Diagnostics screen.

Click the

Display contents
Item

Description

Network Information

Display the network information on the host station of the selected module.
The loop status indicates the forward/reverse loop, forward loop, reverse loop or loopback
status.
"No. of Stations" indicates the number of stations that have been checked, including the
reserved station.

Execute Results

Display the station number in "Forward Loop Direction from Host Station" and "Reverse Loop
Destination from Host Station".
In the loopback status, the test is executed only in "Forward Loop Direction from Host Station".
The number for the reserved station is not displayed.

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description

Station Order Check Test

Test Method

Set the test contents to be executed.

Select this to test all the (slave) stations specified by the network parameter
Parameter Designation (excluding reserved stations).
All stations are tested, if network parameter does not exist.
All Stations Designation Select this to test all stations.

Object Module

2.

Click the

Select the module for which station order check test is executed.

button.

The station order check test is executed according to the set contents.

Precautions on executing the test

The test cannot be executed to multiple stations simultaneously.
If executed, cyclic transmission stops.
When another station is set in the connection destination setting
The station order check test cannot be executed when the connection destination setting is set to other than "No
Specification".

18 - 18

18.2.4 Station order check test

18.2 Diagnosing MELSECNET

17

Communication test

Screen display
button on the MELSECNET Diagnostics screen.

Click the

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Perform a communication test between networks on MELSECNET/10(H).

Use this function to check whether communication can be performed between the host station and the
communication target.
Especially, when the communication target is located on another network, the routing parameter setting
can be checked by the relayed network numbers and station numbers displayed on the screen.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

18.2.5

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

Display contents
Description
Display the result of communication test executed between networks.

Operating procedure
Set the items on the screen.
Item
Communication Test

2.

Description
Set the test contents to be executed.

Destination

Set the network number and station number.

Communication Data

Set the data length (1 to 900 bytes), number of communications (1 to 100

times), and monitoring time (1 to 100 seconds) to execute the test.

Click the

button.

The communication test is executed according to the set contents.

When another station is set in the connection destination setting

The communication test cannot be executed when the connection destination setting is set to other than "No
Specification".

18.2.5 Communication test

APPENDIX

1.

18 - 19

INDEX

Execute Results

SETTING OPTIONS

Item

21

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Example of communication test

The following shows an example of the communication test between the host station (network
number 1, station number 1) and the communication target (network number 3, station number 2)
with the network configuration described below.
GX Works2

Host station
Station
number 2

Communication target
Station
number 2

Station
number 1

Network number 1
Station
number 3

Network number 3
(Relay station 1) (Relay station 2)
Station Station
Station Station
number 4 umber 3
number 2 number 1
Network number 2
Station
number 1

Return direction from

communication target
to host station

Direction from host station

to communication target

Relay station number of network No. 1: 4

Relay station number of network No. 2: 3

18 - 20

18.2.5 Communication test

18.2 Diagnosing MELSECNET

17

Error history monitoring

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

18.2.6

Display the error history of MELSECNET/10(H).

Screen display
button on the MELSECNET Diagnostics screen.

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Click the

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

20

Display contents

Loop Switching

Display the number of times that a loop is switched.

PRINTING

Description
Display the network information of the selected host station.

Transient Transmission Errors Display the number of occurrences of transient transmission error.
F.Loop/R.Loop

Display the items during monitoring.

21

Screen button

Displays the Error History Detail Monitoring screen that lists the details of loop switching and
transient transmission error.

SETTING OPTIONS

Item
Network Information

APPENDIX

INDEX

18.2.6 Error history monitoring

18 - 21

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Displays the Clear of Error History screen. Select the items to be cleared and click the
button.

18.2.7

Network monitor details

Display the network line status of MELSECNET/10(H).

Screen display
Click the

button on the MELSECNET Diagnostics screen.

Display contents
Item

Display the network information of the selected host station.

Control Station Information

Display the control station information.

For the remote I/O master station, the information is displayed only for PLC to PLC network.
LX/LY assignment is displayed only for the remote I/O network.

Data Link Information

Display the data link information.

Status of Self Station

Display the host station status.

Parameter setting is displayed only for PLC to PLC network.

*1 :

18 - 22

Description

Network Information

Not supported by remote I/O module.

18.2.7 Network monitor details

18.2 Diagnosing MELSECNET

17

Monitoring other station information

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

18.2.8

Monitor other station connected to MELSECNET/10(H).

Screen display
Click the

button on the MELSECNET Diagnostics screen.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

Error details
display field

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

Display contents
Description

Other Station Information

Display detail information in the error details display field when an item button is clicked.
"ERR" is displayed in the error information display field if a faulty station or a stop station is
detected.
"RSV" is displayed in the error information display field if a reserved station exists.
"PWR" is displayed in the error information display field if a power is supplied to a module
with external power supply.

Error details display field

Display the status of each station for the items selected in "Other Station Information".

The table below shows the items that can be selected in "Other Station Information" of QCPU (Q mode).
Applicable

Not applicable (masked)

MELSECNET/10(H)
PLC to PLC network
Control station
Loop

Bus

Remote I/O network

Normal station
Loop

Bus

Master station
Loop

Bus

Communication Status of each Station

PRINTING

20

Display the network information of the selected host station.

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Item
Network Information

Data-Link Status of each Station

Parameter Status of each Station*2

Loop Status of each Station

Reserved Station Designation of each

Station
Power Operation Status of each
Station External*2

Each Station PLC Operation Mode

Status*1,*2

Each Station Pairing Status*1,*2

Search Status of Local Station Error*2

Each Station PLC System Status

*1,*2

Each Station Network Type Status

*1 :
*2 :

*1,*2

MELSECNET/H network module only

Not supported by remote I/O module.

18.2.8 Monitoring other station information

18 - 23

INDEX

CPU RUN Status of each Station*2

APPENDIX

CPU Operation Status of each Station

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

18.3

Diagnosing CC-Link IE Controller Network

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to check the CC-Link IE Controller Network status of a selected module.

When another station is set in the connection destination setting

When another station is set in the connection destination setting, the function cannot be executed.
Details of CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics
Refer to CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual.

Selecting the diagnostics target

When two or more CC-Link IE Controller Network modules are connected to the connected station, the
Select Diagnostics Destination screen as shown below is displayed before starting diagnostics.
Select a network to be diagnosed and click the

Diagnostics screen

Screen display
Select [Diagnostics] [CC IE Control Diagnostics].

Network information

18 - 24

button.

18.3 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Controller Network

Description
Display the network information of the selected module. The status is displayed by icons shown below.
Station status

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Normally operating station

Focusing (icon enclosed by dotted line)
Selected station
Error (cyclic transmission stopped)
Warning (Although cyclic transmission is executed, an error
occurred with a module and/or a cable)
Module whose shared group is different
Network information
-

Reserved station (gray)

Disconnected station (black)

Current connected station, specified in the connection

destination setting

Number unspecified station (Although "Specify Station No. by

Program" is selected in parameter (normal station only), a
station number is not set in the program.)

20

Clicking an icon sets the corresponding station as the selected station and displays the details
in "Selected Station's Network Equipment Status". The selected station can also be determined
by moving the focus with the right and left arrow keys and pressing the
or
key.
Double-clicking an icon displays the System Monitor screen (
Section 18.7) of the
corresponding station.
Select station network deice
status display

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Board

Display the status of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module in the station selected in the
network information display field and the status of the connecting cable.

PRINTING

Icon
Module

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Item

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Display contents

Displays the Select Diagnostics Destination screen. The diagnostic target module can be changed.

Changes the selected station to the station to which the station number specified in "Select Station"
is assigned. The status of the selected station is displayed in "Selected Stations Network
Equipment Status".

/
Switches the screen display of the network information when the total number of station is 61 or
more.

Displays the Communication Test screen. The communication path from the connected station to
the specified destination station can be confirmed. (
Section 18.3.1)

18 - 25

INDEX

APPENDIX

Screen button

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Displays the Link Start/Stop screen. The data link start/stop can be performed to the specified
station. (
Section 18.3.2)

Displays the Logging screen. The communication path switch information and the transient
transmission error of the connected station can be monitored. The monitor information can be
saved in a file. (
Section 18.3.3)

Displays the System Monitor screen. The system status of the selected station can be confirmed.
(
Section 18.7)

Displays the Remote Operation screen. The remote operation can be performed to the
programmable controller CPU of the selected station. (
Section 17.1)

Connection destination for executing CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics

The communication test and the link start/stop can be executed only when the connected station is selected.
When a non-supported CPU module is specified as the selected station, or a CC-Link IE Controller
Network interface board is specified as the selected station
The System Monitor screen and Remote Operation screen cannot be displayed when a non-supported CPU
module is specified as the selected station. The System Monitor screen cannot be displayed when a CC-Link IE
Controller Network interface board is specified as the selected station.
When the total number of stations is set to 65 or greater
In a case where the total number of stations is set to 65 or more and High Performance model QCPU is specified
as the connected station, an error occurs when a station whose station number is 65 or greater is selected. The
error, however, does not occur where Universal model QCPU is connected with a cable in a multiple CPU
configuration.

Restrictions
Communication test and link start/stop
To execute the communication test or link start/stop, a target station must be connected using a USB/RS-232
cable.

18 - 26

18.3 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Controller Network

17

Select station network device status display at error occurrence

The following explains the display that is given if an error occurs with the CC-Link IE Controller Network
module or in the connection cable. In this case, a button is displayed in the Select station network
device status display field as shown below. The detailed information, error factor, and troubleshooting
can be displayed by clicking the button.
) is displayed as shown below when a destination station is being

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Click the button.

PRINTING

20

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

In addition, the icon (

disconnected.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

18 - 27

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

18.3.1

Communication test

Perform a communication test on CC-Link IE Controller Network.

Screen display
Click the

button on the CC IE Control Network Diagnostics screen.

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description

Communication Test
Parameters

2.

Set the contents of the test to be executed.

Target Station

Set the network number and station number.

Communication Data
Setting

Set the data length (1 to 900 bytes), the number of communications (1 to 100 times),
and monitoring time (1 to 100 seconds) to execute the test.

Click the

button.

The communication test is executed according to the set contents.

Display contents
Item
Communication Test Result

18 - 28

Description
Display the result of inter-network communication test.
Networks and stations routed from the own station (connected station) to the target station are
displayed on the <<Outward>> tab and those routed from the target station to the own station
(connected station) are displayed on the <<Inward>> tab.

18.3.1 Communication test

18.3 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Controller Network

17

Link start/stop

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

18.3.2

Start/stop the data link of individual stations on CC-Link IE Controller Network.

Screen display
button on the CC IE Control Network Diagnostics screen.

Click the

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

Item

2.

Description

Network Information

Display the network information of the connected station.

All Station Status

Display the link status of all stations on the same network which are performing the data link
with the connected station. Target stations of the link start/stop operation can be selected in
"Selective Status".

Link Start/Stop

Link Start

Select this to start the data link.

Link Stop

Select this to stop the data link.

Forced Link Start

Select this to forcibly start the data link of a station which has been stopped by another
station or a special relay/special register.

Click the

APPENDIX

Set the items on the screen.

button.

The link start/stop is executed for all selected stations at once.

INDEX

1.

SETTING OPTIONS

21

Operating procedure

18.3.2 Link start/stop

18 - 29

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Selection of link start/stop

The target stations of the link start/stop operation can also be selected by the following methods.
Selection

Group Selection

Select All

18 - 30

18.3.2 Link start/stop

Operating procedure
Right-click on the "Group" column of a station and select "Group
Selection" from the shortcut menu.
Stations which have the same group number as the selected line
become selected.
When the "Group" column whose value is 0 is right-clicked, this
shortcut menu cannot be selected.
Right-click the "Station No." column of a station and select "Select
All" from the shortcut menu.

18.3 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Controller Network

17

Logging

Display the communication route switch information and transient transmission error information of the
selected station.

Screen display

18

button on the CC IE Control Network Diagnostics screen.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Select the

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

18.3.3

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

SETTING OPTIONS

21
Display contents
Item
Display Station

Description
Display the network information of the currently selected station.

A
Displaying the communication route switch information and transient transmission
error information

The <<Monitor Details>> tab displays the communication route switch information and transient
transmission error information.
Maximum 100 logs can be displayed. If the number of logs exceeds 100, the logs are deleted from the
oldest one.

APPENDIX

Display contents
Description

Switch Transmission Path

Display the loop status of communication route, the number of station where loopback
occurred, and the date when communication route switching occurred.

Transient Transmission Errors

Display the error code, network number and station number of the transient request target, and
the date of error occurrence if transient transmission error occurs.

18.3.3 Logging

18 - 31

INDEX

Item

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Screen button

Displays the Save Error Log screen and the contents displayed on the <<Monitor Details>> tab can
be saved in a CSV file.

Clearing errors

Clear the errors of the currently selected station using the <<Error Clear>> tab.

Screen display

Operating procedure

18 - 32

1.

Select the item to be cleared.

2.

Click the

18.3.3 Logging

button.

18.4 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network

17

Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network

*1

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

*1: Universal model QCPU only

This section explains how to check the CC-Link IE Field Network status of a selected module.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

18.4

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

When another station is set in the connection destination setting

When another station is set in the connection destination setting, the function cannot be executed.
Details of CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics
Refer to the Users Manual of each module.

Selecting the diagnostics target

When two or more CC-Link IE Field Network modules are connected to the connected station, the
Select Diagnostics Destination screen as shown below is displayed before starting diagnostics.
button.

20

PRINTING

Select a network to be diagnosed and click the

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

SETTING OPTIONS

21

Diagnostics screen

Screen display

APPENDIX

Select [Diagnostics] [CC IE Field Diagnostics].

The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.

Network information

INDEX

Network configuration

18 - 33

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Display contents
Item

Description

Select Diagnostics
Destination

Module

Display the module and network number of the diagnostics target.

Select Station*1

Display the station number of the station selected in the network information.
When the connected station is communication head module, this item is fixed to the own
station.

Network Status*1
Network information

Display the total number of slave stations, the link scan time (in units of ms), and the number of
station error detected on the network being displayed.
Display the state of the network. The status of each station is displayed with icons.

Network configuration

Descriptions of displayed icons can be checked by clicking the

button.
Clicking an icon sets the corresponding station as the selected station and displays the details
in "Selected Station Communication Status Monitor". The selected station can also be
determined by moving the focus with the right and left arrow keys and pressing the
or

Selected Station
Communication Status
Monitor

*1 :

key.

Display the communication status of the own station.

Not displayed when the connected station is a communication head module.

Screen button

(Not supported by communication head module)

Displays the Select Diagnostics Destination screen. The diagnostic target module can be changed.
(
Selecting the diagnostics target)

Displays the Communication Test screen. The communication path from the connected station to
the specified destination station can be confirmed. (
Section 18.4.1)

Displays the Cable Test screen. The cable connection status can be tested. (

Section 18.4.2)

(Not supported by communication head module)

Displays the Link Start/Stop screen. The data link start/stop can be performed to the specified
station. (
Section 18.4.3)

(Not supported by communication head module)

Displays the Network Event History screen. Displays the history of events that have occurred on
the own station and the network, and the various network information. (
Section 18.4.4)

(Not supported by communication head module)

Displays the Reserved Station Function Enable screen. The reserved stations can temporarily be
disabled, and the temporarily disabled reserved stations can be enabled. (
Section 18.4.5)

(Not supported by communication head module)

Displays the Enable/Disable Ignore Station Errors screen. The temporary error invalid stations can
be set, and the registered temporary error invalid stations can be canceled.
(
Section 18.4.6)

18 - 34

18.4 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network

Displays the System Monitor screen. The system status of the selected station can be confirmed.
(
Section 18.7)

(Supported by Ethernet adapter module only)

Displays the Error History screen. The system status of the selected station can be confirmed.
(
Section 18.7)

(Not supported by Ethernet adapter module/CC-Link IE Field Network

board/CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit)
Displays the Remote Operation screen. The remote operation can be performed to the
programmable controller CPU of the selected station. (
Section 17.1)

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

(Not supported by Ethernet adapter module/CC-Link IE Field Network board/

CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit)

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

19

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Displays the explanation for icons displayed on the diagnostics screen.

PRINTING

20

SETTING OPTIONS

21

Connection destination for executing CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics

The communication test and the link start/stop can be executed only when the connected station is selected.
When a non-supported CPU module is specified as the selected station
The System Monitor screen and Remote Operation screen cannot be displayed when a non-supported CPU
module is specified as the selected station.

APPENDIX

Restrictions
Communication test and link start/stop
To execute the communication test or link start/stop, a target station must be connected using a USB/RS-232
cable.

18 - 35

INDEX

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Select station network device status display at error occurrence

The following explains the display that is given if an error occurs on a CC-Link IE Field Network master/
local module, communication head module, Ethernet adapter module, or connection cable. In this case,
a button is displayed in "Selected Station Communication Status Monitor" as shown below. The detailed
information, error factor, and troubleshooting can be displayed by clicking the button.
In addition, the icon (
disconnected.

) is displayed as shown below when a destination station is being

Click the button

Setting a station number of communication head module

A station number of communication head module can be set or changed when connecting a communication head
module whose station number is not set.
Specify "Communication Head Module" for "Select Station" on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen for the master
station, and click the
button displayed in "Selected Station Communication Status Monitor".
Station numbers of the following modules used in the master station can be reset.
QJ71GF11-T2 (With a serial number whose first five digits are "12072" or higher)
LJ71GF11-T2
For details of setting station numbers, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual

18 - 36

18.4 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network

17

Communication test

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

18.4.1

Perform a communication test on CC-Link IE Field Network.

Screen display
button on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen.

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Click the

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19
Presence or absence of errors
on the communication test

PRINTING

20

Operating procedure
Description
Set the contents of the test to be executed.

Connected Station (Own)

Display the network number and station number of the connected station.

Target Station

Set the network number and station number.

Communication Data
Setting

Set the data length (1 to 900 bytes), the number of communications (1 to 100 times),
and monitoring time (1 to 100 seconds) to execute the test.

Click the

APPENDIX

Display contents

Communication Test Result

button.

The communication test is executed according to the set contents.

Item

SETTING OPTIONS

Item
Communication Test
Parameters

2.

21

Set the items on the screen.

Description
Display the result of inter-network communication test. Also in 'Presence or absence of errors
on the communication test', display whether the communication test has been executed
normally.
Networks and stations routed from the own station (connected station) to the target station are
displayed on the <<Outward>> tab and those routed from the target station to the own station
(connected station) are displayed on the <<Inward>> tab.

18.4.1 Communication test

18 - 37

INDEX

1.

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

18.4.2

Cable test

Test the status of the cable connections between the testing station and the devices connected to the
ports of the testing station.

Screen display
Click the

button on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen.

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description

Cable Test Contents

Testing Station Setting

2.

Click the

Set the network number and station number of the station which executes the cable
test.

button.

The cable test is executed on the testing station.

Display contents
Item
Cable Test Result

18 - 38

18.4.2 Cable test

Description
Display the cable test result, error factor, and troubleshooting of each port.

18.4 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network

17

Link start/stop

Start/stop the data link of a specified station. This function can be used for debugging purposes to stop
the station from receiving data from other stations and sending its own data.

Screen display

18

button on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Click the

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

18.4.3

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

Operating procedure

SETTING OPTIONS

Item

Description

Network Information
Connected Station
Information

Display the network information of the connected station.

Link Start/Stop Setting

Contents

2.

21

Set the items on the screen.

All Stations Information

Display the link status of all stations on the same network which are performing the
data link with the connected station. Target stations of the link start/stop operation can
be selected in "Selected Status".

Link Start/Stop Executing

Contents

Select "Link Start"/"Link Stop".

To forcibly start the data link of a station which has been stopped by another station or
a special relay/special register, check "Forced Link Start".

Click the

button.

The link start/stop is executed for all selected stations at once.

When the process is completed, "Selected Status" are cleared and the contents of "Link Status" are
updated.

INDEX

Screen button

APPENDIX

1.

Selects all stations displayed in the list.

Cancels the selection status of all stations selected in the list.

18.4.3 Link start/stop

18 - 39

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

18.4.4

Network event history

Display the list of event history occurred on the own station and on the network.

Screen display
Click the

button on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen.

Display contents
Item

18 - 40

Description

Network Event History List

Display the list of network event history.

Each column can be sorted in ascending/descending order by clicking on the column header.

Detailed Information

Display the detailed information of an event selected in "Network Event History List".

18.4.4 Network event history

18.4 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Screen button

Clears the network event history exists in the programmable controller CPU.

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Displays the History Acquisition Setting screen.

Select events to be acquired.

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

All events displayed in the list are selected by clicking the

SETTING OPTIONS

21
button.

The selection status of all events selected in the list are canceled by clicking the
button.

Saves the network event history in CSV file format.

APPENDIX

Updates the "Network Event History List".

INDEX

18.4.4 Network event history

18 - 41

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

18.4.5

Reserved station function enable

Disable the reserved stations temporarily, and enable the temporarily disabled reserved station.
This function cannot be performed when the connected station is a local station.

Screen display
Click the

button on the CC-Link IE Field Diagnostics screen.

Operating procedure

1.

Select reserved stations to be disabled temporarily/enabled from "Reserved Station

List".

2.

Click the

button.

The selected reserved stations are disabled temporarily/enabled.

When the process is completed, the contents of "Reserved Station List" are updated.

18 - 42

18.4.5 Reserved station function enable

18.4 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network

17

Temporary error invalid station setting/restore

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

18.4.6

Set/cancel temporary error invalid stations.

This function cannot be performed when the connected station is a local station.

Screen display

18

button on the CC-Link IE Field Diagnostics screen.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Click the

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

Operating procedure

1.

Select stations to be set/canceled as temporary error invalid stations from "Ignore

Station Error List".

2.

Click the

button.

The temporary error invalid stations are set/canceled.

When the process is completed, the contents of "Ignore Station Error List" are updated.

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

18.4.6 Temporary error invalid station setting/restore

18 - 43

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

18.5

Diagnosing CC-Link and CC-Link/LT

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to monitor the network information of each station, diagnosing the network status,
and testing.

18.5.1

Monitoring line (host station/other stations)

Monitor host station line/another station line in CC-Link or CC-Link/LT.

Screen display
Select [Diagnostics] [CC-Link Diagnostics].

Module list/
diagnostic
target selection

Station list

18 - 44

18.5.1 Monitoring line (host station/other stations)

18.5 Diagnosing CC-Link and CC-Link/LT

Description
Display the number of all errors/warnings being occurring in the modules.

Module list/diagnostic target

selection

Display CC-Link and CC-Link/LT modules exist in the connected station. The number of errors
(errors and warnings) is also displayed.
The diagnostic target can be changed by clicking a desired module.

18

Display the icons of stations configuring the CC-Link network.

In the detail display, the 33rd station and later are displayed by clicking the
button.

Station list

The display can be switched by the

/
button. The information of all stations
are displayed on the screen at once in the all-station display.
Click the

<<Connecting Station
Information>>

button to check the description of each icon.

Display the data link status etc. of the connecting station (host station).

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Display the data link status etc. of the station (another station) selected in the station list.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Item
Diagnostics Result

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Display contents

<<Selected Station
Information>>

Display the error information of the station selected in the station list.

20

PRINTING

<<Selected Station Error

Information>>

Screen button

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Updates the module list/diagnostic target list.

/
Switches modules to be displayed in units of eight modules.

/
Switches the screen of the station list.
When an error or warning exists on each screen, the icon indicating the error information is
displayed on the button.

/
Switches the all-station display and detail display.
INDEX

APPENDIX

Reset the icon layout in the station list to the station number order.
For the layout edit of the station list, refer to the Point in this section.

18.5.1 Monitoring line (host station/other stations)

18 - 45

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

/
Displays/hides the related function buttons.
For details of related functions, refer to the following sections.
Section 18.5.2 Loop test/transmission speed test
Loop Test*1
Status Logging
Section 18.5.3 Displaying logs of station information (status logging)
Create Check Sheet
Section 18.5.4 Creating check sheets
Start Data Link/Stop Data Link*1

Section 18.5.5 Starting/stopping data link

*1 : Not supported by remote I/O module.

Displays the explanation for icons displayed on the diagnostics screen.

18 - 46

18.5.1 Monitoring line (host station/other stations)

18.5 Diagnosing CC-Link and CC-Link/LT

Update of the number of errors and warnings displayed in "Diagnostics Result"

During the monitoring, the number of errors/warnings being occurring on the network of a module selected in
"Module list/diagnostic target selection" is only updated.
.

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

To also update the number of errors/warnings on other modules, update the module list using
Editing layout of station list
Icons in the station list can be moved and allocated freely by drag and drop.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

20

PRINTING

Diagnostic target modules

In the CC-Link system configuration, only QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N, and LJ61BT11 are diagnosed.
In the CC-Link/LT system configuration, only QJ61CL12 and LJ61CL12 is diagnosed.
Diagnosing CC-Link bridge modules
When a CC-Link bridge module is selected in the station list, the bridge diagnostics can be executed by rightclicking it and selecting [Bridge Diagnostics] from the shortcut menu.

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

Move icons by drug

and drop.

SETTING OPTIONS

21

A
Precautions on executing each function
Do not execute the following functions by a sequence program and peripheral at the same time. If executed, they
may not be executed correctly.
Start data link/stop data link
Set/cancel temporary error invalid station
Loop test
Obtain transmission speed setting (including the acquisition of the transmission speed setting in the Check
Sheet Creation Wizard)

Restrictions
Restrictions on bridge diagnostics, loop test, and check sheet creation
Bridge diagnostics, loop test, and check sheet creation can be performed only when the connected station is a
master station.

18.5.1 Monitoring line (host station/other stations)

18 - 47

APPENDIX

button.

INDEX

To return to the CC-Link Diagnostics screen, click the

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Setting/canceling temporary error invalid station

Replacing a module in online is possible without detecting an error in the corresponding remote station.
To set the temporary error invalid station, select the desired station in the station list and right-click it,
and select [Enable/Disable Ignore Station Errors] from the shortcut menu.
If multiple stations are set as occupied stations, specify the start station number of each occupied
station for the temporary error invalid station. If setting is made for a station that is not the start station in
actual assignment, invalid setting is ignored.
In addition, do not set the temporary error invalid station by a sequence program or peripheral at the
same time. If set, the temporary error invalid station may not be set correctly.

18 - 48

18.5.1 Monitoring line (host station/other stations)

18.5 Diagnosing CC-Link and CC-Link/LT

1)

The field displays the company name or maker code of the device connected in CC-Link.

2)

The field displays the maker code if company name is not entered in the maker code list.

3)

The maker code list (partner_English.dat) is saved in the following folder and can be edited using
text editor available in market.
C:/Program Files/MELSOFT/DnaviZero/DnaviSatellite/CCLink
The company names can be edited on the diagnostics screen, however, changes are not reflected
to partner_English.dat.

For some makers, maker codes are not listed. Edit the file according to the following file format
specifications.
Maker code

19

Company name

Max. number of
characters

255

Usable characters*1

0 to 9

Alphanumeric characters
Symbols

Remarks

Maker code other

than 5 digits is
ignored.

Display varies depending on the screen width.

With small fonts, up to 75 characters are displayed, characters exceeding the
limit are not displayed.

*1 :

If "," is used in a company name, enclose the company name by double quotations (" ").
Example: "xxxxx Co., Ltd"

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

4)

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Company names in other station information

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

20

PRINTING

The following is an example of partner_English.dat displayed using a text editor.

If the maker code list does not exist in the install destination of GX Works2 or if it is corrupted, the
following message is displayed.

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

18.5.1 Monitoring line (host station/other stations)

18 - 49

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

18.5.2

Loop test/transmission speed test

Check operating status of lines for all stations or specified stations, and checking the transmission
speed settings of all stations.

Screen display
Double-click

on the CC-Link Diagnostics screen.

Test result

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Loop Test

Description
Execute the loop test according to the specification of "All Stations" or "Selected Station
No.".
Setting is not possible when CC-Link/LT is selected.
All Stations: Select this to execute the test for all of 64 stations.
Selected Station No.: Select this to execute the test for the specified stations.
To specify a station, specify the start address of an occupied station.
<Example>
When four occupied stations and two occupied stations are connected
4 stations occupied
2 stations occupied

"1" is specified "5" is specified

If 2, 3, 4 or 6 is specified, the station becomes faulty station.
Obtain transmission speed
setting

18 - 50

Obtain the transmission speed settings of all stations.

18.5.2 Loop test/transmission speed test

18.5 Diagnosing CC-Link and CC-Link/LT

17

button.

The loop test/acquisition of the transmission speed setting is executed and the result is displayed
in the 'Test result'.
Check 'Legends' for the descriptions of the icons displayed in the 'Test result'.

Precaution on executing the test

Do not execute the loop test/acquisition of the transmission speed setting by a sequence program or peripheral at
the same time. If executed, the loop test/acquisition of the transmission speed setting may not be executed
correctly.
In addition, when executing the acquisition of the transmission speed setting, do not execute the acquisition of the
transmission speed setting in the Check Sheet Creation Wizard at the same time.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Click the

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

2.

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

18.5.2 Loop test/transmission speed test

18 - 51

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

18.5.3

Displaying logs of station information (status logging)

Collect logs of the station information (the data link status of other stations, date of acquisition).

Screen display
Double-click

on the CC-Link Diagnostics screen.

<Q series CC-Link module whose serial number is lower than 12032>

Log data
display area

<Q series CC-Link module whose serial number is 12032 or higher/LCPU>

Log data
display area

18 - 52

18.5.3 Displaying logs of station information (status logging)

18.5 Diagnosing CC-Link and CC-Link/LT

Item
Logging Sampling Time

Description
Specify the period of time to collect the log on the second time scale.
The log is collected during the time of period between when the logging starts and when
the specified time elapses.

Specify the logging storage destination.

Check "RAM + Flash ROM" to keep the log stored because the log which is stored in a
Logging Storage Area in CCRAM is deleted when the programmable controller CPU is turned from OFF to ON or reset.
Link Module
The log in a flash ROM can remain stored even if the programmable controller CPU is
turned from OFF to ON or reset.

2.

Click the

button.

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Set the item on the screen.

19

The log is collected during the specified log acquisition time and displayed in "Log List".
The log displayed in "Log List" is read out from the RAM.
The log collection stops when the number of log records reaches 5000.
When '0' is specified, the log collection continues until the
button is clicked or the number
of log records reaches 5000.
The status as of the date selected in "Log List" is displayed in the 'Log data display area'.
Check "Legends" for the descriptions of the icons displayed in the 'Log data display area'.

Screen button

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

1.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Operating procedure

20

PRINTING

/
Saves information of the log list in CSV format. Also reads out a log file saved in CSV format and
displays in "Log List".

INDEX

Log collection when "RAM + Flash ROM" is checked

When "RAM + Flash ROM" is checked, the first 45 records of the log are stored in a flash ROM and the following
records are stored in a RAM.
Checking the log stored in a flash ROM
The log stored in a flash ROM is transferred to a RAM when the programmable controller CPU is turned from OFF
to ON or reset. The log stored in the flash ROM can be displayed in "Log List" by reopening the Status Logging
screen.
Log collection
In the case where GX Works2 cannot always be connected, select "RAM + Flash ROM".
The log (up to 45 records) stored in a flash ROM can be displayed when GX Works2 is reconnected after the
logging.
In the case where GX Works2 can always be connected, up to 5000 records of the log can be collected whichever
"RAM" or "RAM + Flash ROM" is selected.

21
SETTING OPTIONS

APPENDIX

Clears the log in the module.

Also clears the log stored in a flash ROM when "RAM + Flash ROM" is checked.

18.5.3 Displaying logs of station information (status logging)

18 - 53

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

18.5.4

Creating check sheets

Create a check sheet for troubleshooting by the wizard.

Operating procedure

1.

Double-click

2.

Set the items in accordance with terms on the screens.

on the CC-Link Diagnostics screen.

For details of setting items, refer to the following guide.

Open Field Network CC-Link Troubleshooting Guide
The created check sheet is saved in Excel format.

Precaution on checking the transmission speed

Do not execute the check (acquisition) of the transmission speed setting by a sequence program or peripheral at
the same time. If executed, the check (acquisition) of the transmission speed setting may not be executed
correctly.
Check sheets
"System Configuration" can be output when Excel 2000 or later is installed.

18 - 54

18.5.4 Creating check sheets

18.5 Diagnosing CC-Link and CC-Link/LT

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Example of a check sheet:

The following shows an example of a check sheet in case where Excel 2000 or later is installed.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

18.5.4 Creating check sheets

18 - 55

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

18.5.5

Starting/stopping data link

Start/stop the data link.

Operating procedure

Double-click

on the CC-Link Diagnostics screen.

The data link is stopped. In addition, the icon is switched to

To start the data link, click

Precautions on data link stop

Performing 'data link stop' disables data transmission from GX Works2 when the personal computer is
connected to a master station via CC-Link as shown in the system configuration below.
To re-establish the connection to send data from GX Works2, reset the programmable controller CPU to
which the data link stop is performed and restart the data link.
Master station,
station number 0

Local station,
station number 1

CC-Link

Reset this programmable

controller CPU.

GX Works2

18 - 56

18.5.5 Starting/stopping data link

18.6 Diagnosing Ethernet

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to check various setting status of Ethernet module and Built-in Ethernet port QCPU/
LCPU.

18.6.1

Q series-compatible E71 module

18

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Check Q series-compatible E71 module parameter status, error history, status of each connection,
status of each protocol, LED status, receive e-mail information, and send e-mail information.
For details of each displayed item, refer to the following manual.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Diagnosing Ethernet

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18.6

Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic)

Screen display
Select [Diagnostics] [Ethernet Diagnostics].

20

PRINTING

Monitoring Information

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

18.6.1 Q series-compatible E71 module

18 - 57

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Display contents
Item

Description

Target Module Setting

Select "Module No.", and specify an Ethernet module to be monitored. Setting range is module
number 1 to 4.

Change IP Address Display

Switch decimal/hexadecimal notation of IP address display.

The following Ethernet module information can be monitored.
Parameter status (
Monitoring the parameter status)
Monitoring the error history)

Error history (
Monitoring information

Monitoring the status of each connection)

Status of each connection (

Monitoring the status of each protocol)

Status of each protocol (

LED status (

Monitoring the LED status)

Monitoring the receive e-mail information)

Receive e-mail information (

Monitoring the send e-mail information)

Send e-mail information (

Screen button

Displays the PING Test screen. (

Section 18.6.3)

(Supported by QCPU (Q mode) only)

Displays the Loopback Test screen. (

Section 18.6.4)

(Supported by QCPU (Q mode) only)

Turns OFF the [COM ERR] LED.

Monitoring the parameter status

Monitor the Ethernet module parameter status.

Screen display
Select the <<Parameter Status>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.

18 - 58

18.6.1 Q series-compatible E71 module

18.6 Diagnosing Ethernet

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Monitoring the error history

Monitor the error history area.

Screen display
Select the <<Error History>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

20

Screen button

PRINTING

Clears the error history.

Monitoring the status of each connection

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Monitor the status of each connection.

Screen display
Select the <<Status of Each Connection>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.

APPENDIX

INDEX

18.6.1 Q series-compatible E71 module

18 - 59

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Monitoring the status of each protocol

Monitor the status of each protocol.

Screen display
Select the <<Status of Each Protocol>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.

Monitoring the LED status

Monitor the status of LED on the front of the Ethernet module.

Screen display
Select the <<LED Status>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.

Precautions on monitoring
If RAM test or ROM test is set with the switch setting of an Ethernet module, programmable controller
communication error occurs.

18 - 60

18.6.1 Q series-compatible E71 module

18.6 Diagnosing Ethernet

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Monitoring the receive e-mail information

Monitor the received e-mail information.

Screen display
Select the <<Received E-mail Information>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

20

Screen button

PRINTING

Clears the number of times set in each item by '0'.

Clears the "Number of Error Log Writes" by '0' and the contents of "Error Log".

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

18.6.1 Q series-compatible E71 module

18 - 61

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Monitoring the send e-mail information

Monitor the send e-mail information.

Screen display
Select the <<Send E-mail Information>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.

Screen button

Clears the number of times set in each item by '0'.

Clears the "Number of Error Log Writes" by '0' and the contents of "Error Log".

18 - 62

18.6.1 Q series-compatible E71 module

18.6 Diagnosing Ethernet

Check Built-in Ethernet port QCPU/LCPU parameter status, error history, status of each connection,
connection status, and time status setting.
For details of displayed items, refer to the following manuals.
QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Built-in Ethernet port QCPU/LCPU connection

18

QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port)

MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-in Ethernet Function)

Screen display
Select [Diagnostics] [Ethernet Diagnostics].

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18.6.2

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19
Monitoring
information

PRINTING

20

Item
Target Module Setting

Description
*1

Change IP Address Display

Select "CPU", and specify the CPU to be monitored. Setting range is CPU number 1 to 4.
Switch decimal/hexadecimal notation of IP address display.
The following built-in Ethernet port information can be monitored.
Parameter status (
Monitoring the parameter status)

Monitoring information

Error history (

Monitoring the error history)

Status of each connection (

Connection status (
Time status setting (

Monitoring the status of each connection)

Monitoring the connection status)

Monitoring the time setting status)

QCPU (Q mode) only

APPENDIX

*1 :

SETTING OPTIONS

21

Display contents

Screen button

INDEX

For the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 18.6.

18.6.2 Built-in Ethernet port QCPU/LCPU connection

18 - 63

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Monitoring the parameter status

Monitor Built-in Ethernet port QCPU/LCPU parameter status.

Screen display
Select the <<Parameter Status>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.

Monitoring the error history

Monitor the error history area.

Screen display
Select the <<Error History>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.

Screen button

Clears the error history.

18 - 64

18.6.2 Built-in Ethernet port QCPU/LCPU connection

18.6 Diagnosing Ethernet

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Monitoring the status of each connection

Monitor the status of each connection.

Screen display
Select the <<Status of Each Connection>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

20

Screen button

PRINTING

Clears the error codes.

Clears the "Unlock Error Count".

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Allows the connection of the selected row.

Cancels the connection of the selected row.

APPENDIX

INDEX

18.6.2 Built-in Ethernet port QCPU/LCPU connection

18 - 65

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Monitoring the connection status

Monitor the connection status.

Screen display
Select the <<Connection Status>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.

Screen button

Clears the number of receive buffer overflows and broadcast information.

18 - 66

18.6.2 Built-in Ethernet port QCPU/LCPU connection

18.6 Diagnosing Ethernet

17

Monitoring the time setting status

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Monitor the time setting status.

Screen display
Select the <<Time Setting Status>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

Screen button

20

Setting time
For Built-in Ethernet port QCPU/LCPU, the time on a programmable controller CPU can be set automatically by
collecting the time information from the time information server (SNTP server) connected to the LAN according to
the time setting on the <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>> tab of PLC parameter.
For details of the time setting, refer to the following manuals.
QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port)
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-in Ethernet Function)

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Set the time according to the time setting on the <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>> tab of PLC
parameter written to the programmable controller CPU.

PRINTING

APPENDIX

INDEX

18.6.2 Built-in Ethernet port QCPU/LCPU connection

18 - 67

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Monitoring simple PLC communication status

Monitor the simple PLC communication status.

This function can be executed only when using LCPU with a serial number whose first five digits are
'13042' or higher.

Screen display
Select the <<Simple PLC Communication Status>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.

Screen button

The Details screen which shows detail information of each setting is displayed.

Displaying simple PLC communication status

Errors may not be confirmed on the display of simple PLC communication status since it displays the current
status. Confirm errors on the <<Error History>> tab.
(
Monitoring the error history)

18 - 68

18.6.2 Built-in Ethernet port QCPU/LCPU connection

18.6 Diagnosing Ethernet

The following checks are performed when the PING test is executed on Ethernet module, Built-in
Ethernet port QCPU or LCPU.
Whether the line is connected correctly between the host station and the target device.
Whether the parameters are set correctly for the Ethernet module on host station.
Whether the initial processing has been completed correctly for the Ethernet module on host station.
(For Ethernet module only)

Required setting items

Make sure to check the following before executing the PING test when using an Ethernet module.
"Station No. IP Information" of Ethernet parameter is set.
RUN LED and INT LED on the Ethernet module are ON.
System configuration where the PING test can be executed
A PING test is valid for the system configured with Ethernet, MELSECNET/10(H), and CC-Link IE Controller
Network. It cannot be executed via CC-Link, CC-Link IE Field Network, and serial communication.
A PING test can only be executed to the Ethernet module on the same segment as the target station. However,
it cannot be executed to a host station.
Administrator authority required to execute the PING test

19

20

as the user having the administrator authority.

PRINTING

To execute the PING test, the user must log on Windows

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

A PING test is a test to check the existence of Ethernet modules to which the initial processing has
been completed, or devices with specified IP address on the same Ethernet line.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

PING test

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

18.6.3

21

PING test overview

A PING test can be executed either by the Ethernet module connection (via Ethernet board) or the
programmable controller CPU direct coupled (via serial/USB or Ethernet board).

SETTING OPTIONS

APPENDIX

INDEX

18.6.3 PING test

18 - 69

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Ethernet module connection (via Ethernet board)

A PING test is executed to the Ethernet module on the same network as the connected station when
accessing the programmable controller CPU via Ethernet module.
For the system configuration described in the following figure, configure the settings of the
connection destination as shown below to execute a PING test for station number 1 from the station
number 2.
Station number: 3

Ethernet

Network number 1

Ethernet
module

Station number: 2
(192.168.0.4)

Ethernet
module

Station number: 1
(192.168.0.3)

(PING test target station)

18 - 70

18.6.3 PING test

18.6 Diagnosing Ethernet

A PING test can be executed only when the Ethernet module (station number 1 on network number 1
in the system shown below) of the connection destination is Q series-compatible E71 module
(function version B or later).

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

A PING test is executed to the Ethernet module on the same network as the connected station when
accessing the programmable controller CPU via serial/USB or Ethernet board.
This function cannot be used when accessing the programmable controller CPU via a built-in
Ethernet port of a Built-In Ethernet port QCPU/LCPU.
For the system configuration described in the following figure, configure the settings of the
connection destination as shown below to execute a PING test for the station number 2 on the
network number 2.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Programmable controller CPU direct coupled (via serial/USB or Ethernet board)

Ethernet
module

Station number: 1
Ethernet

Network number 1
Ethernet
module

Ethernet
module

Station number: 1

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

20

Station number: 2
Ethernet

PRINTING

Network number 2
Ethernet Station number: 2
module
(192.168.0.3)
(PING test target station)

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

18.6.3 PING test

18 - 71

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Screen display
Perform any of the following operations.
Click the

button on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.

Click the
Test screen.

button the Ethernet Diagnostics screen and click the

When "Module No." is selected for "Target Module Setting"

<Programmable controller CPU direct coupled

(via serial/USB, Ethernet board)>

<Ethernet module connection (via Ethernet board)>

PING test
information

Sub statusbar

When "CPU" is selected for "Target Module Setting"

PING test
information

Sub statusbar

18 - 72

18.6.3 PING test

button on the Loop

18.6 Diagnosing Ethernet

17

Item

Input
Item

Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module for PING test.

Transfer Setup

Specify the connection destination of the PING test.

Execution Station
of PING

Set the network number and station number of the Ethernet module which executes the PING
test.

Target of PING

Set the IP address of the Ethernet module which is a target of the PING test.

Setting Options

2.

Description

Address Specification

Click the

Set whether to display a host name in the result. Also set data size (1 to 8,192 bytes),
communication time check (1 to 30 seconds), number of transmissions (1 to 50 times, or until
interrupted).

button.

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

The PING test is executed according to the settings.

Display contents
Item
PING test information

Description
Display the IP address and data size to which the PING test is executed.

When "Module No." is selected for "Target Module Setting" (Ethernet connection (via Ethernet board))
When "CPU" is selected for "Target Module Setting"

20

PRINTING

Transmitting data
When successful
IP address (example: Reply from 10.97.29.75): Data size (example: bytes=32)
Communication speed (example: time<1ms TTL=128)
When unsuccessful
Request timed out.
Completion of data transmission
Packets transmitted
Received
Lost
Minimum packet round-trip time (ms)
Maximum packet round-trip time (ms)
Average packet round-trip time (ms)
"Packets transmitted" and "Received" are updated each time a packet is sent.

21

When "Module No." is selected for "Target Module Setting" (Programmable controller CPU direct coupled (via serial/USB,
Ethernet board))

APPENDIX

Transmitting data
When successful
Success
When unsuccessful
Time Out
Completion of data transmission
Packets transmitted
Received
Lost
"Packets transmitted" and "Received" are updated each time a packet is sent.
Sub statusbar

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Set the items on the screen.

SETTING OPTIONS

1.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Operating procedure

Display the number of send successes and total number of packet transmissions.

Screen button
INDEX

Resets the setting items of option setting to their defaults.

18.6.3 PING test

18 - 73

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

18.6.4

Loopback test

A loopback test is a test to check whether the initial processing of each module has been completed by
sending a loopback test message to the Q series-compatible E71 modules (function version B or later)
of the specified network number or station number.
The following checks are performed when the loopback test is executed.
Whether the line is connected correctly between the host station and the target device.
Whether the parameters are set correctly for the Ethernet module on host station.
Whether the initial processing has been completed correctly for the Ethernet module on host station.

Required setting items

Make sure to check the following before executing the loopback test when using an Ethernet module.
"Station No. IP Information" of Ethernet parameter is set.
RUN LED and INT LED on the Ethernet module are ON.
System configuration where the loopback test can be executed
A loopback test is available only with Q series-compatible E71 modules (function version B or later). Ethernet
modules (function version A) are treated as "No Response" even if connected.
A loopback test is valid for the system configured only with Ethernet.
A loopback test can only be executed to the Ethernet module on the same segment as the target station.
Precautions on executing the loopback test
In a multiple network system, to execute the loopback test by specifying a station number in another network
number, setting the routing parameters is necessary.

18 - 74

18.6.4 Loopback test

18.6 Diagnosing Ethernet

A loopback test can be executed either by the Ethernet module connection (via Ethernet board) or the
programmable controller CPU direct coupled (via serial/USB or Ethernet board).

Ethernet module connection (via Ethernet board)

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 5 Station number 7 Station number 9

Set the confirmation

station numbers from 1
to 5 on the Loopback
Test screen.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Loopback test overview

19

Station number 2 Station number 4 Station number 6 Station number 8

A loopback test is executed to the network number specified on the Loopback Test screen when
accessing the programmable controller CPU via Ethernet module.
In the system as shown below, when the loopback test is executed for station numbers 2 to 4 in
network number 2, the response from the station number 2 (loopback test execution station) is
treated as "No Response".

20

PRINTING

Network number 1

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Station number 4
The response is
treated as "No
Response".

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Network number 2

Station number 3

APPENDIX

INDEX

18.6.4 Loopback test

18 - 75

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Programmable controller CPU direct coupled (via serial/USB or Ethernet board)

Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 5 Station number 7 Station number 9

Set the confirmation

station numbers from 1
to 5 on the Loopback
Test screen.

Station number 2 Station number 4 Station number 6 Station number 8

A loopback test is executed to the network number specified on the Loopback Test screen when
accessing the programmable controller CPU via serial/USB or Ethernet board.
For the system configuration described in the following figure, configure the settings of the
connection destination as shown below to execute a loopback test for the Ethernet module on the
network number 2.

Network number 1
Target station
Station number 1

Target station
Station number 3

Network number 2
Station number 2
Target station
Station number 2

18 - 76

18.6.4 Loopback test

18.6 Diagnosing Ethernet

17

Click the

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Screen display
button on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

Display contents
Item
Network No.

Description

20

Set the network number for which the loopback test is executed.
Setting range: 1 to 239

of Ethernet parameter includes TCP Resend Timer. The communication

time check value of loopback test must be larger than the value set for TCP Resend Timer. If not, the
tested Ethernet module may be judged inexistent even if it is connected correctly.

Result

The loopback test is executed in order from the start station number and whether or not the response
is returned within the set communication time check value is displayed in the order of station
numbers.
If an IP address is duplicated, such IP address is displayed in red.

IP Address Input Style

Switch decimal/hexadecimal notation of IP address display.

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Setting range: 1 to 99 seconds.

Check at
Communication Time

PRINTING

Number of Confirmation Set the station number to be checked.

Nodes
Setting range: 1 to 64

APPENDIX

INDEX

18.6.4 Loopback test

18 - 77

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

18.7

System Monitor
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to display the system status of the programmable controller CPU.

Screen display
Select [Diagnostics] [System Monitor].
Some terms and module images are different but the screen configurations are same between the
screens of QCPU (Q mode) and LCPU. The screen of QCPU (Q mode) is used in this section.
<QCPU (Q mode) (without extension base unit)>

<QCPU (Q mode) (with extension base unit)>

18 - 78

INDEX

APPENDIX

SETTING OPTIONS

PRINTING

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

18.7 System Monitor

<Remote I/O module>

17

18

19

20

21

18 - 79

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Display contents
Item

Description

Monitor Status

Display the current monitor status.

Connection Channel List

Display the information of the route to the connection destination.

Main Base*1

Display the operating status of the module, and I/O address.

Mode*2

Select this to perform either system monitor or online module change function.

System Monitor

Execute the system monitor.

Online Module Change

Execute the online module change. (For details, refer to

mounted.*2

Extension Base*1, *4

Display the extension base unit in every two rows. The third row and later are displayed by
pressing the arrow button on the right. The base unit, operating status of the module and I/O
address are displayed.

Base Information List*1

Display the status of each base unit.

Base

*1

Display the status of the base unit.

Module

Display the error status of each module mounted to the base unit.

Base Model Name*1

Display the base name set to the parameter in the programmable controller CPU.
If the parameter is not set, "Main Base", "Extension Base 1" to "Extension Base 7" are displayed.

Power Supply

Display whether there is power supply.

Base

Type*5

Display the type of the base unit.

*5

Display the slot number.

Slots

Installed Modules

*5

Display the number of modules mounted to the base unit.

Number Of Total Modules

Occupations*6
Module Information List

Display the status of each module.

Base-Slot*1

Display the slot number of each module.

*3

Display the series of each module.

Series

Model Name
Point

*3

Display the model name of each module.

*3

Parameter

Display the number of occupied I/O points of each module.

Type

Display the type/points of each module set to the parameter in the programmable controller CPU.
If the parameter is not set, type/points of the mounted module is displayed.

Point*3

I/O Address*3
Network No. Station No.
Master PLC*5
Number Of Module
Occupied*6
Legend

Display the total number of modules counted for all mounted modules.*7
Display the module information on the base unit where the selected module is mounted.

Status

18 - 80

Section 18.8)

Display the name, slot number, and model name of the base unit to which the selected module is

Operation to Selected
Module

Display the I/O address of each module set to the parameter in the programmable controller CPU.
*3

Display the network number and the station number set to each module.
Display the programmable controller CPU number that controls each module in a multiple CPU
configuration. "-" is displayed for the programmable controller CPU or the blank slot.
Display the number of modules counted for each module.*7
Display the legend of the icon displayed on the screen.

18.7 System Monitor

17

Each item is displayed as shown below according to the programmable controller series.

Extension base

Extension block

Base Information List

Block Information List

Base

Block

Base Model Name

Block Name

Base-Slot

Block-Slot

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

LCPU
Main Block

18

*2 :

"*****", "-", and "**" are displayed if the module is not mounted or the parameter is different with the
mounting status.

*3 :

Displayed only when an extension base unit exists.

*4 :

QCPU (Q mode) only

*5 :

LCPU only

*6 :

A module with width exceeding 28.5mm logically counts as two modules.

Be sure that "Number Of Total Modules Occupations" does not exceed the number of modules that can be
mounted.
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)

*7 :

Remote I/O module only

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

QCPU (Q mode)
Main Base

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

*1 :

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Connection Channel List

In "Connection Channel List", the route information of the connection destination setting is displayed at all times.
QA extension base unit
The following are the precautions when using a QA extension base unit.
High Performance model QCPU and Universal model QCPU with a serial number whose first digits are '12102'
or higher support QA extension base unit, and for those programmable controller CPUs which do not support it,
QA extension base unit is not displayed on the System Monitor screen.
When it is mounted on A series module or QnA series module, the images are common on the system monitor of
both A series and QnA series modules. Furthermore, a module type is displayed for Model Name of Module
Information List.
When A series or QnA series module is selected, the functions under "Operation to Selected Module" cannot be
performed.

PRINTING

20

APPENDIX

INDEX

18 - 81

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Screen button

Displays the illustration of the connection route.

(
Section 11.1.1)

Displays the module information of the selected module.

The following is an example of the Module's Detailed Information screen when QJ71LP21-25 is
selected. (
Section 18.7.1)

18 - 82

18.7 System Monitor

17

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Displays the hardware LED information and the hardware switch information.
The display contents of the H/W Information differ depending on module version.
For details, refer to the User's Manual of each module.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

Displays the diagnostic information of the selected module.

The following is the PLC Diagnostics screen when the programmable controller CPU module is
selected. (
Section 18.1)

PRINTING

20

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

18 - 83

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Displays error history logs of the module selected on the System Monitor screen.
This button is available when GX Works2 is connected to the programmable controller CPU that
supports the module error history collection function. (
Section 18.7.2)

Prints the figure of the system configuration.

18 - 84

18.7 System Monitor

17

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Displays the product information of each module mounted to the base unit.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

button saves the product information data in CSV file format.

Displays all error history logs of the programmable controller and modules.
This button is available when GX Works2 is connected to the programmable controller CPU that
supports the module error history collection function. (
Section 18.7.2)

20

PRINTING

Clicking the

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

18 - 85

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Operation to selected module

The functions of "Operation to Selected Module" can also be executed from the shortcut menu while selecting
modules in "Main Base" or "Extension Base".

Displaying module status

The following screen is displayed if the mounting status of the module cannot be obtained due to the incorrect
parameter settings.
Execute the system monitor function again after adjusting the parameter to the mounting status.

18 - 86

18.7 System Monitor

The following table shows the details of the error status icons of the programmable controller CPU and
the modules.

Module

Programmable controller CPU status

Serious error MAIN CPU down

RESET and others

Moderate
error

Stop error

STOP due to error in parameter or instruction codes

Minor error

Error allowing
operation

Errors that allow RUN status such as battery low and annunciator
ON

Assignment
error

Assignment error

Assignment errors such as multiple CPU setting is not set.

Error

H/W error

H/W errors in the base or the power supply

Serious error

Module system
error

H/W errors in modules

Moderate
error

Module error

No appropriate environment for executing the functions of modules

Minor error

Module warning

Impropriety in programs or user's operations

Assignment
error

Assignment error

The assigning status of the module is different with the mounting

status of the module.
(The status that the module type and points cannot be obtained.)

Illegal
assignment

Illegal assignment

The assigning status of the module is different with the mounting

status of the module.
(The status that the module type and points can be obtained.)

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Error

19

Display when mounted modules do not match with the I/O assignment setting on
PLC parameter

The following shows the "Module Information List" on the System monitor function according to the I/O
assignment on PLC parameter. If module mounting status does not match with the I/O assignment,
change "I/O Assignment" of the I/O assignment setting to match with the mounting status. "*****", "-",
and "**" are displayed if the module is not mounted, or the parameter is different with the mounting
status.

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Programmable
controller CPU

Icon

20

PRINTING

Module

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Error icons

21
SETTING OPTIONS

APPENDIX

INDEX

18 - 87

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

18.7.1

Checking module's detailed information

Display the module information of the module selected.

Modules of QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU

Screen display
Select a module on the System Monitor screen and click the
button.
The following is an example of the Module's Detailed Information screen when QJ71LP21-25 is
selected.

Screen button

Displays the hardware LED information and the hardware switch information. (

Updates the error history of the module.

(Supported by LCPU only)

Deletes the error history of the module.

Clears the error displayed in "Latest Error Code".

18 - 88

18.7.1 Checking module's detailed information

Section 18.7)

18.7 System Monitor

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Built-in I/O module

Screen display
Select a built-in I/O module on the System Monitor screen and click the

button.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Modules of QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU.
/
Displays/hides the built-in function buttons.
For details of the built-in function buttons, refer to the following sections.
Positioning monitor
Section 18.9.1
High-speed counter monitor
Section 18.9.2
I/O monitor
Section 18.9.3

APPENDIX

INDEX

18.7.1 Checking module's detailed information

18 - 89

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Built-in CC-Link module

Screen display
Select a built-in CC-Link module on the System Monitor screen and click the

Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Modules of QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU.

18 - 90

18.7.1 Checking module's detailed information

button.

18.7 System Monitor

17

Checking details of error history

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

18.7.2

Check error history of the programmable controller CPU and modules.

Error history of a specified module can be displayed by using the refine search function.

Screen display

18

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Select [Diagnostics] [System Monitor]

/
<Error history (when programmable controller CPU is selected>

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

SETTING OPTIONS

21
<System error history>

APPENDIX

INDEX

18.7.2 Checking details of error history

18 - 91

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

Display contents
Item

Description

Monitor Status

Display the current monitor status.

Connection Channel List

Display the information of the connection destination setting.

Refine Search

Display the refinement criteria for the error history list.

Not displayed when no refinement criterion is specified.

Error History List

Error Code Notation

Select the display format of error codes (DEC/HEX).

No.

Display the error history number. Errors are numbered in order of occurring.

Error Code

Display the error code that indicates details of the error.

Date and Time

Display date and time of the error occurrence.

Model Name

Display the model name of the module on which the error occurs.

Start I/O

Display the start I/O number of the module on which the error occurs.

Error History Detail

Model Name

Display the model name of the module selected in the error history list.

Start I/O

Display the start I/O number of the module selected in the error history list.
For the module that uses multiple slots, the starting slot is only displayed.

Mount Position

Display the mount position of the module selected in the error history list.

<<Error and Solution>>

Display the explanation and solution of the error on the module being selected in the error
history list.

<<Intelligent Module
Information>>

Display the module information at the error occurrence of the intelligent function module
being selected in the error history list.

Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 18.7.

Clears all refinement criteria.

Displays the Enter Refine Criteria screen.

To start refining the search, click the

button.

Clears the error history saved in the programmable controller CPU.

Updates information displayed in the error history list.

Exports information displayed in the error history list to a file in CSV format.

18 - 92

18.7.2 Checking details of error history

18.7 System Monitor

Programmable controller CPUs and modules that support the function to display detailed error history
Detailed error history can be displayed when a programmable controller CPU and intelligent function module that
support the module error history collection function are used.
For versions of modules that support the function, refer to the Users Manual of each module.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

18.7.2 Checking details of error history

18 - 93

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

18.8

Changing Modules Online

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

This section explains how to change modules online.

Screen display
Select [Diagnostics] [Online Module Change].

Operating procedure

1.

Double-click the module to be exchanged on the System Monitor screen.

The Online Module Change screen is displayed.

2.

18 - 94

Change the module by following the instruction of "Status/Guidance".

FX

18.8 Changing Modules Online

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Online module change can be suspended by clicking the

button during the process of Online module
change to check the system status with monitoring or current value change.
Online module change can be continued from the suspended status by selecting [Diagnostics] [Online
Module Change].
Online module change can also be continued when GX Works2 is terminated during the process of Online
module change by restarting GX Works2 and performing the same operation above.
Executing Online module change on a single programmable controller CPU from two personal computers
The authority to execute Online module change can be transferred to the personal computer which executed the
function later.
Online module change during monitoring
Stop monitoring before executing Online module change.
Online module change can be executed without stopping the monitoring, however, the following message will be
displayed.

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Products compatible with Online module change

Use remote I/O module (function version D or later) to execute Online module change.
For the method for checking the function version, refer to the following manual.
Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/O network)
Canceling Online module change

Restrictions on Online module change

Online module change cannot be executed to multiple modules simultaneously.
Online module change cannot be continued when the programmable controller CPU is reset, or the power is
turned OFF during the process of Online module change.

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Restrictions

PRINTING

20

APPENDIX

INDEX

18 - 95

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

18.9

Built-in I/O Module Tools

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to monitor the operating status of the positioning function, high-speed counter
function, and I/O signals using the built-in I/O module tools.
For the monitoring items and setting values, refer to MELSEC-L CPU Module Users Manual (Built-in I/O
Function).

18.9.1

Positioning monitor

Monitor the operating status of the positioning function.

The methods for executing the error reset and OPR OFF are also explained.

Screen display
Select [Tool] [Built-In I/O Module Tool] [Positioning Monitor].

Display contents
Item
Monitor

Description
Display the current status.

Test
Error Reset

Click

to select an axis to execute the error reset.

OPR OFF

Click

to select an axis to execute the OPR OFF.

Screen button

Executes the error reset of the selected axis.

Executes the OPR OFF of the selected axis.

18 - 96

18.9.1 Positioning monitor

18.9 Built-in I/O Module Tools

17

High-speed counter monitor

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

18.9.2

Monitor the operating status of the high-speed counter function.

The methods for executing the current value preset and error reset are also explained.

Screen display

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Select [Tool] [Built-In I/O Module Tool] [High-Speed Counter Monitor].

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

Display contents

21

Description
Display the current status.

Test

Current Value Preset

Click
to select a channel.
After selecting the channel, enter the preset value.

Error Reset

Click

SETTING OPTIONS

Item
Monitor

to select a channel to execute the error reset.

Screen button

APPENDIX

Reflects the preset value of the selected channel to the programmable controller CPU.

Executes the error reset of the selected channel.

INDEX

18.9.2 High-speed counter monitor

18 - 97

GX Works2

18 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS

18.9.3

I/O monitor

Monitor the I/O signals.

Screen display
Select [Tool] [Built-In I/O Module Tool] [I/O Monitor].

Display contents
Item

18 - 98

Description

Input Signal

Display the status of each input signal.

Output Signal

Display the status of each output signal.

18.9.3 I/O monitor

This chapter explains debugging operations using the I/O system setting function.

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

19 SIMULATING OPERATIONS
OF EXTERNAL DEVICES

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

20

PRINTING

I/O System Setting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2

Operating Procedure of I/O System Setting Function . . . . 19-7
Screen Configuration of I/O System Setting Function. . . . 19-8
Setting by Inputting Device Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-10
Setting Using Timing Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-14
Performing I/O System Setting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-26
Monitoring I/O System Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-27
Operating I/O System Setting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-29

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

19.1
19.2
19.3
19.4
19.5
19.6
19.7
19.8

19 - 1

GX Works2

19 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES

19.1

I/O System Setting Function

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

The I/O system setting function simulates operations of external devices.

Using the I/O system setting function, operations of external devices can be simulated without a special
debugging sequence program. Because input devices (X) can also be turned ON/OFF, devices in programs
do not need to be rewritten during the simulation.

19.1.1

Differences between conventional debugging and

debugging with I/O system setting function

This section explains differences between conventional debugging and debugging with the I/O system
setting function.

Conventional debugging

1)

Devices need to be rewritten

As input devices (X) can be turned ON/OFF only with an external device connected to the I/O
module, the program needs to be modified by changing X0 M0, X1 M1, etc. to conduct
debugging without an external device.

2)

A sequence program for debugging is required

A debugging sequence program needs to be added to simulate operations of external devices.

Debugging with the I/O system setting function

1)

Devices do not need to be rewritten

It is not necessary to rewrite devices (X0 M0) as input devices (X) can be turned ON/OFF with the
I/O system setting function.

2)

A sequence program for debugging is not required

For sequence actions for debugging can be set/changed easily from the setting screen, a sequence
program for debugging is not needed.

19 - 2

19.1.1 Differences between conventional debugging and debugging with I/O system setting function

19.1 I/O System Setting Function

<Debugging using the I/O system setting function>

<Conventional debugging>

X0-M0

X1-M1

Start
Y0

Stop

1) Devices do not need to be rewritten

X0

X1

Start
Y0

Stop

Y0

Run

Run

2) A sequence program for debugging

is not required
<Setting on the I/O System Setting screen>

2) A sequence program for debugging

is required
Y0

18

Y0

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

1) Devices need to be rewritten

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Example) Simulating operations of program when Y0 is turned ON, and 5 seconds later X1 is turned
ON to stop running

19

K50

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

T0

T0
M1

Y0

20

5 sec. timer

PRINTING

<Image of operation>*1
Settings set in the I/O system setting screen are saved
in a file as a sequence program shown below.

SET X1

21
SETTING OPTIONS

5 sec. timer
setting

*1: The program is an image of operation.

APPENDIX

INDEX

19.1.1 Differences between conventional debugging and debugging with I/O system setting function

19 - 3

GX Works2

19 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES

19.1.2

Conditions and sequence actions for simulation

The I/O system setting function simulates operations of external devices according to specified
conditions and sequence actions for debugging.
In "Condition", set a condition for starting up a sequence action for debugging. For settings of
conditions, refer to Table 19.1.2-1.
In "Sequence Action", set devices of which values are to be changed or a timing chart which is to be
started up at timing when the condition is true, using either of two kinds of setting methods: device
value input and timing chat input. For details, refer to Section 19.1.3.
Sequence actions for debugging can be switched easily by checking/clearing "Enable" check boxes in
the I/O system setting screen.
Example) Settings on the I/O system setting screen using the device value input

By checking/clearing check boxes,

sequence actions for debugging can be
switched easily.

19 - 4

19.1.2 Conditions and sequence actions for simulation

19.1 I/O System Setting Function

17

Combinations of conditions and examples of settings on the I/O system setting screen

Combination of conditions

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Table 19.1.2-1 Combination of conditions and setting examples

Condition setting on the I/O system setting screen

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18
2

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

20

PRINTING

SETTING OPTIONS

21
7

APPENDIX

INDEX

19.1.2 Conditions and sequence actions for simulation

19 - 5

GX Works2

19 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES

19.1.3

Timing chart input and device value input

There are two methods to set sequence actions in the I/O system setting function: one is the device
value input to change value of a desired device after a specified amount of time has elapsed when a
condition has been satisfied; the other is the time chart input to execute a timing chart when a condition
has been satisfied.
Device value input
A value of a specified device can be changed after the specified condition is satisfied and the time
specified for the timer is elapsed.
This enables actions such as the following.
Example) "When Y0 is turned ON, 5 seconds later X0 and X3 are turned ON"
Condition

Timer

Sequence action

<Setting of device value input>

Sequence action after timer activation

After the timer is activated, the timer will not be suspended even when the condition changes to unsatisfied status,
and the sequence action is performed to change the value of the specified device.

Timing chart input

When a specified condition has been satisfied, device variation defined in timing chart format can be
performed.
This enables complicated actions such as the following.
Example) "When Y0 is turned ON, D0 is counted up, Y0 is turned OFF when X0 is turned ON"
Condition

Timing chart format

<Setting of timing chart input>

19 - 6

19.1.3 Timing chart input and device value input

19.2 Operating Procedure of I/O System Setting Function

Operating Procedure of I/O System Setting Function

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

The following shows the operating procedure of the I/O system setting function.

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

19.2

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Start simulation
(
Section 15.2)

Start the I/O system setting

from the GX Simulator2 screen
(

Section 19.3)

Do you want to set

the I/O system
using timing
charts?

NO

Enter device values

(
Section 19.4)

20

PRINTING

NO

YES

YES

21

Use timing charts

(
Section 19.5)

SETTING OPTIONS

Do you want to set

the I/O system
by inputting device
values?

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

Save the I/O system setting

(
Section 19.8.3)

Execute the I/O system setting

Section 19.6)
APPENDIX

Do you want to start

monitoring with
the I/O system
setting?

YES

Start monitoring
(

Section 19.7)
INDEX

NO

End simulation
(

Section 15.2)

19 - 7

GX Works2

19 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES

19.3

Screen Configuration of I/O System Setting Function

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to set conditions in the I/O system setting function.

Screen display
Select GX Simulator2 screen [Tool] [I/O System Setting]
Menu bar
Toolbar

I/O system
setting tree

Edit/monitor
screen

Status bar

Display contents
Item

Description

Reference

Menu bar

Display menu options for executing each function.

Toolbar

Display tool buttons for executing each function.

Appendix 1.8

File under Editing

Display the name of a file being edited.

File under Execution

Display the name of a file being executed.

I/O system setting tree

Select a setting method for the I/O system setting.

Timing Chart Input
To set the I/O system setting in timing chart format, double-click the number
to be set.
Device Value Input
To set the I/O system setting by setting device values, double-click the

Section 1.3.8

Section 19.4
Section 19.5

number to be set.*1
Edit/monitor the I/O system setting.
At timing chart input

Edit/monitor screen
At device value input

Status bar

*1 :

19 - 8

Display information about a project being edited.

For FXCPU, the setting range is No. 1 to No. 100.

Section 19.4
Section 19.5

19.3 Screen Configuration of I/O System Setting Function

Target Simulator Setting screen (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)

If simulation has been started from multiple projects at startup of the I/O system setting function, the Target
Simulator Setting screen is displayed to specify a simulator (virtual programmable controller) on which the I/O
system setting is performed.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

Restrictions

20

PRINTING

Startup of the I/O system setting

The I/O system setting of GX Simulator Version 7 and the I/O system setting of GX Works2 cannot be started up
simultaneously.
Startup the I/O system setting of GX Works2 after disabling the I/O system setting of GX Simulator Version 7.

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

19 - 9

GX Works2

19 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES

19.4

Setting by Inputting Device Values

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to configure the I/O system setting by inputting device values.

Operating procedure

1.

Double-click a desired setting number from "Device Value Input" in the I/O system
setting tree.

Doubleclick

2.

Set the items on the screen.

Item
No.

Description
Setting number in the I/O System Setting screen.
Specify the input condition from the virtual programmable controller.
Section 19.4.1)
The Device Specification screen is displayed by clicking . (
Bit devices and word devices can be specified for the input condition. Labels cannot
be specified.
For a bit device, ON/OFF can be set in a designated condition; for a word device,
comparison (=,<>,<,>,<=,>=) with a constant or another word device can be set in a
designated condition.
In addition, a relational condition can be set by specifying AND/OR operation.

AND operation
Condition

OR operation

With an And operation, the condition is satisfied if both designated conditions on the
left and right are achieved. Otherwise, the condition is not satisfied.
With an OR operation, the condition is satisfied if either or both of designated
conditions in upper and lower columns are achieved.

19 - 10

Timer ms

Set a period of time from when the specified condition is satisfied until the sequence
action is issued.
The setting range is 1 to 1000 (10 to 10000ms).

Sequence Action

Set a bit device to be turned ON/OFF or a word device of which the value is to be
changed after the specified condition is satisfied. Labels cannot be set.

Setting

Set whether each setting is to be enabled/disabled. Check this to enable the setting.

19.4 Setting by Inputting Device Values

17

Setting conditions

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

19.4.1

Conditions can be entered directly, or set on the Device Specification screen.

For devices that can be entered for conditions, refer to the following.
Appendix 2.1)

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Data entry method (direct data entry)

Operation
Enter conditional expressions directly.
<Example>
For bit devices: X0=ON, M10=OFF
For word devices: D0=20, D5<20, D15<>5, D25>=10, D0=D50

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

Data entry method (set on the Device Specification screen)

<When a bit device is selected>

<When a word device is selected>

PRINTING

20

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Operation
Set the items on the screen.
Item

Description

Compare Source

<<Device>>
Device
<<Buffer Memory>>

Set a device.

*1

Module Start (HEX)

Enter a start I/O number of the intelligent function module in hexadecimal.

Address

Enter a buffer memory address in decimal/hexadecimal.

Decimal/Hexadecimal

Select an input form (decimal/hexadecimal) of the buffer memory address.

Condition

Select a comparison condition when the compare source is other than a

bit device.

Compare Destination

<<Value>>

Select ON/OFF

Specify ON/OFF when the compare source is a bit device.

Value

Enter a value when the compare source is a word device.

Device
<<Buffer Memory>>

*1

Set a device.

INDEX

<<Device>>

*1 :

APPENDIX

Module Start (HEX)

Enter a start I/O number of the intelligent function module in hexadecimal.

Address

Enter a buffer memory address in decimal/hexadecimal.

Decimal/Hexadecimal

Select an input form (decimal/hexadecimal) of the buffer memory address.

For FXCPU, these items are supported by FX3U and FX3UC only.

19.4.1 Setting conditions

19 - 11

GX Works2

19 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES

19.4.2

Setting sequence actions

Sequence actions can be entered directly, or set on the Bit Device Setting screen or the Word Device
Setting screen.
For devices that can be entered for conditions, refer to the following section.
(

Appendix 2.1)

Data entry method (direct data entry)

Operation
Enter devices directly.
<Example>
For bit devices: X2-4, M5, M7
For word devices: D12=234, D20=10
Data entry method (set on the Bit Device Setting screen)

Operation
Set the items on the screen.
Item

19 - 12

Description

Bit Device List

Display the list of bit devices being set.

Bit Device Setting

Device (from)

Set a bit device.

Device No. (to)

Set an end bit device number for the range specification.

19.4.2 Setting sequence actions

19.4 Setting by Inputting Device Values

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Data entry method (set on the Word Device Setting screen)

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19
Operation
Set the items on the screen.

<<Device>>

Device

Set a word device.

Setting Value/Device

Set a device value or device.

Module Start (HEX)

Enter a start number of the module in hexadecimal.

Address

Enter a buffer memory address in decimal/hexadecimal.

Decimal/Hexadecimal

Select an input form (decimal/hexadecimal) of the buffer memory address.

For FXCPU, these items are supported by FX3U and FX3UC only.

21
SETTING OPTIONS

*1 :

20

PRINTING

<<Buffer memory>>*1

Description
Display the list of word devices being set.

Data entry method for direct data entry

Enter a device of which a value is to be changed when the specified condition is satisfied.
For setting multiple devices, separate each device with ",".
For setting consecutive devices, connect the start device number and end device number with "-".
<Example>
X0, X2, M10-20
D0=100, W0=100

APPENDIX

Item
Word Device List

Number of device points that can be executed simultaneously

Up to 25000 device points can be executed simultaneously in the device input of the I/O system setting.
Setting conditions and sequence operation
Index settings (Example: D0Z0), bit-specified word device (Example: D0.0), and digit-specified bit device
(Example: K4X0) cannot be set in the conditions and sequence operation.
The I/O system setting does not support local devices. When local devices are set, the I/O system setting may
not perform properly.
Cutting/copying/pasting I/O system setting by unit of setting number
The I/O system setting can be cut/copied/pasted by unit of setting number.
To cut/copy/paste the I/O system setting, click a setting number of the I/O system setting and select [Edit] [Cut]/
[Copy]/[Paste].

19.4.2 Setting sequence actions

19 - 13

INDEX

GX Works2

19 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES

19.5

Setting Using Timing Charts

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to set the I/O system setting using timing charts.

Operating procedure

1.

Double-click a desired setting number from "Timing Chart Input" in the I/O system
setting tree.

Doubleclick

2.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description

No.

Setting number in the I/O System Setting screen.

Condition

Specify the input condition from the simulation. (

Timing Chart Format

button.
Keep

Setting

Section 19.4.1)

The Edit Timing Chart Format screen is displayed by clicking the

Check this to execute the timing specified in the timing chart repeatedly.
Set whether each setting is to be enabled/disabled. Check this to enable the setting.

Cutting/copying/pasting I/O system setting by unit of setting number

The I/O system setting can be cut/copied/pasted by unit of setting number.
To cut/copy/paste the I/O system setting, click a setting number of the I/O system setting and select [Edit] [Cut]/
[Copy]/[Paste].

19 - 14

19.5 Setting Using Timing Charts

17

Setting in timing chart format

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

19.5.1

The following shows the setting procedure on the Edit Timing Chart Format screen.
Start setting

Do you want to read

a timing chart data file saved
with GX Simulator?

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

YES

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19
NO

Read a timing chart data file

(

Section 19.5.6)

20

PRINTING

Register devices
(
Section 19.5.3)

21

NO

YES

APPENDIX

Do you want to repeat

scans for the specified
number of times?

SETTING OPTIONS

Set/edit timings
(
Section 19.5.4)

Set the number of scans

(
Section 19.5.5)

INDEX

End setting

19.5.1 Setting in timing chart format

19 - 15

GX Works2

19 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES

19.5.2

Screen configuration of Edit Timing Chart Format screen

The following explains the screen configuration of the Edit Timing Chart Format screen.

Screen display
Select Timing Chart Input screen
Menu bar
Toolbar
Number
of scans

Status

Device name/
device value

Display contents
Item

Description

Reference

Menu bar

Display menu options for executing each function.

Toolbar

Display tool buttons for executing each function.

Device name/device value

Display devices specified in the Enter Device screen.

Bit device
The device name is displayed in yellow when the device is ON at the timing
of the cursor position.
Word device
The device value at timing of the cursor position is displayed in a text box
on the right of the device name.
When a word device is specified as 32-bit integer, (D) is added at the end
of the device name, and when a word device is specified as single
precision real number, (E) is added at the end of the device name.
(Example) D0(D), W6(D), D10(E), W60(E)

Display the number of scans at the timing.

To repeat a scan for the specified number of times, set the number of scans.
(
Section 19.5.5)

Number of scans

When "Keep" below the

button is checked, enabled
scans can be repeated while the condition is satisfied.
(Example: Keep scanning for 6 scans, which is the specified number of
scans)

6 scans of from scan

0 to 5 are only enabled.

Repeat scan 0 to 5 while

the condition is satisfied.

Display status of the timing chart being set.

*2
*1

Status

*4

*3

*1: The target device is turned OFFON.

*2: The target device is turned ONOFF.
*3: There is no change in the device value.
*4: There is a change in the device value.

19 - 16

19.5.2 Screen configuration of Edit Timing Chart Format screen

19.5 Setting Using Timing Charts

17

Registering devices

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

19.5.3

Register devices for setting timing.

Operating procedure
Select [Device] [Enter Device] from the Edit Timing Chart Format screen.
<Bit device>

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

1.

<Word device>

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

<Buffer memory>

PRINTING

20

Set the items on the screen.

Item
<<Device>>

Description
Select this tab to register devices.

Device

Set a device to be registered.

Initial Value

Set the initial value of the device.

For a bit device, select ON/OFF of the bit.
For a word device, set the initial value.

<<Buffer Memory>>*1

Select this tab to register buffer memory.

Set a start address of a module to be registered.

Address

Set the address of the buffer memory to be registered.

Decimal/Hexadecimal

Select the input form of the buffer memory address.

Initial Value

Set the initial value of the buffer memory to be registered.

Display Format

Value

Select the display format of the value.

View

Select the display format of the device.

For FXCPU, this item is supported by FX3U and FX3UC only.

INDEX

*1 :

Module Start (HEX)

APPENDIX

2.

SETTING OPTIONS

21

Deleting registered devices

To delete a registered device, select the device displayed in device name/device value on the Edit Timing Chart
Format screen, and select [Device] [Delete Device].

19.5.3 Registering devices

19 - 17

GX Works2

19 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES

19.5.4

Setting timing

Set/edit the timing.

Move a cursor to the timing to be set, and perform an operation using any of tool buttons, menus, and
shortcut keys.

Operation

19 - 18

Toolbar

Menu

Device ON

Select [Edit] [Bit Device] [Device ON].

Right-click and select [Device ON] from the shortcut menu.
Double-click at the cursor position

Device OFF

Select [Edit] [Bit Device] [Device OFF].

Right-click and select [Device OFF] from the shortcut menu.
Double-click at the cursor position.

Progressive OFF

Select [Edit] [Bit Device] [Progressive OFF].

Right-click and select [Progressive OFF] from the shortcut
menu.

Progressive ON

Select [Edit] [Bit Device] [Progressive ON].

Right-click and select [Progressive ON] from the shortcut
menu.

All OFF

Select [Edit] [Bit Device] [All OFF].

Right-click and select [All OFF] from the shortcut menu.

All ON

Select [Edit] [Bit Device] [All ON].

Right-click and select [All ON] from the shortcut menu.

Change

Select [Edit] [Word Device] [Change].

Right-click and select [Change] from the shortcut menu.
Double-click the cursor position.

No Change

Select [Edit] [Word Device] [No Change].

Right-click and select [No Change] from the shortcut menu.

Insert

Select [Edit] [Insert].

Right-click and select [Insert] from the shortcut menu.

Delete

Select [Edit] [Delete].

Right-click and select [Delete] from the shortcut menu.

19.5.4 Setting timing

Shortcut key

19.5 Setting Using Timing Charts

17

Setting timing of bit devices

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Setting the ON/OFF cycle

Set continuous ON/OFF repeated for the specified period after the specified timing.
<Example> Set the following value to scan 1 (cursor position).
Cycle: 2

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Operation
1.Select a cell corresponding to a scan of a bit device to be changed.

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19
2.Select [Edit] [Timing Setting].

PRINTING

20

3.Set an ON/OFF cycle of the bit device.

4.Click the

button.
ON/OFF of the bit device is cyclically set.

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

19.5.4 Setting timing

19 - 19

GX Works2

19 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES

Setting timing of word devices

Changing the value at the specified timing

Change the value of the specified device at the specified timing.
<Example> Set the following value to scan 3 (cursor position).
Setting Value: 10, Continue, Number of Scans: 4, Increase and Decrease: Increase,
Increase and Decrease Value: 20

Value

Scan

Operation
1.Select a cell corresponding to a word device to be changed.

2.Select [Edit] [Word Device] [Change] (

).

3.Set the items on the screen.

Item
Setting Value
Setting Value

Enter a setting value for the word device.

Continue

Check this to set the setting value continuously.

Scan

Enter the number of scans to be continued.

Increase and Decrease

Set this to increase/decrease the value.

Increase and Decrease

Value

Set the increase/decrease value.

Trigonometric Function

19 - 20

Description
Select this to set a value.

Select this to change the value using trigonometric functions.

SIN curve

Select this to change the value with a SIN curve.

COS curve

Select this to change the value with a COS curve.

Maximum Value

Enter the maximum value.

Cycle Scan

Select the number of scans corresponding to one period of SIN/COS

curves.

19.5.4 Setting timing

19.5 Setting Using Timing Charts

17

4.Click the

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

button.
The value of the word device is set.

19.5.5

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18
Setting number of scans of timing chart

Set the number of scans of a timing chart input from an external device.

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Screen display
Select Edit Timing Chart Format screen [Scan] [Scan Setting]

PRINTING

20

Operating procedure
Enter "No. of Scans".

2.

Click the

21
SETTING OPTIONS

1.

button.

Columns of disabled scans are shaded on the timing chart.

APPENDIX

INDEX

19.5.5 Setting number of scans of timing chart

19 - 21

GX Works2

19 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES

19.5.6

Utilizing timing chart data of existing applications

Read and utilize a timing chart data file (*.DAT) saved with the timing chart of GX Simulator.
Because devices and timings are automatically registered after reading, there is no need to register
them again.

Screen display
Select Edit Timing Chart Format screen [File] [Open File].

Restrictions
Number of device points that can be read from a timing chart data file
Timing chart data for 16 device points from the top in the screen can only be saved with the timing chart function.
Therefore, move necessary devices to within 16 points from the top in the screen and save the data when creating
a timing chart data file.
Number of scans that can be read from a timing chart data file
Scan 0 to 99 are available in the Edit Time Chart Format screen of the I/O system setting function. When a timing
chart data file includes scan 100 and later, they are discarded.
When a double-precision real number is used in a timing chart data file
When a double-precision real number is contained in a timing chart data file created with GX Simulator, the file
cannot be read.

19 - 22

19.5.6 Utilizing timing chart data of existing applications

19.5 Setting Using Timing Charts

17

Displaying list of registered devices

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

19.5.7

Display a list of registered devices.

Screen display
Select Edit Timing Chart Format screen [Device] [Device List].

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

20

Display contents
Item

Description

PRINTING

Display devices registered on the Edit Timing Chart Format screen.

Device List

Screen button

Deletes the device being selected from the Edit Timing Chart Format screen.

Displays the device being selected on the Edit Timing Chart Format screen.

APPENDIX

Moves the display position of a device being selected up/down on the Edit Timing Chart Format
screen.

INDEX

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Displays the Enter Device screen, and adds a device to the Edit Timing Chart Format screen.

19.5.7 Displaying list of registered devices

19 - 23

GX Works2

19 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES

19.5.8

Exchanging display positions of devices

Exchange the display positions of devices by dragging and dropping a device name.

Operating procedure

1.

Drag a device name on the Edit Timing Chart Format screen.

Drag

2.

Place the square frame over a device to be exchanged.

Place the square frame over

19 - 24

19.5.8 Exchanging display positions of devices

19.5 Setting Using Timing Charts

17

Changing display format of devices

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

19.5.9

Change the display format of devices registered in the Edit Timing Chart Format screen.
This function is not applicable to bit devices.

Operating procedure

18

Select the Edit Timing Chart Format screen [Device] [Property].

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

1.

2.

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Description

Select the display format of devices.

PRINTING

Select the display format of values.

View

button.

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

Click the

Value

INDEX

3.

20

Display Format

19.5.9 Changing display format of devices

19 - 25

GX Works2

19 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES

19.6

Performing I/O System Setting Function

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains the operations of simulation using the I/O system setting function.

19.6.1

Executing simulation

Execute simulation with settings configured using the I/O system setting function.

Operating procedure

1.

Select the I/O System Setting screen [File] [Open] (

system setting file (*.IOS).

2.

Select the I/O System Setting screen [File] [Execute I/O System Setting] (

), and open an I/O

).

The confirmation message is displayed.

3.

Click the

button.

I/O system setting files

When the I/O system setting function is executed after an I/O system setting file is changed, the changes are
automatically overwritten to the file.
Simulation with the I/O system setting
Make sure that the simulator (virtual programmable controller) specified as execution target is in the RUN status at
"LED" on the GX Simulator2 screen.
When it is in the STOP status, sequence actions and timing charts are not performed even though conditions of the
device value input or timing chart input are satisfied.

19.6.2

Disabling simulation

Stop simulation of the I/O system setting being executed by disabling the I/O system setting.

Operating procedure
Select the I/O System Setting screen [File] [Disable I/O System Setting] (

19 - 26

19.6.1 Executing simulation

).

19.7 Monitoring I/O System Setting

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to monitor devices on the I/O System Setting screen.
Using this function, status of registered conditions can be confirmed, and values of devices registered in
conditions can be changed.

19.7.1

Starting/stopping monitoring

Start/stop monitoring on the I/O System Setting screen.

19

Start monitoring

Start monitoring on the I/O System Setting screen.

Operating procedure

20

) on the I/O System Setting screen.

PRINTING

Select [Online] [Start Monitoring] (

Monitoring starts.

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Monitoring I/O System Setting

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

19.7

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

Stop monitoring

Stop monitoring on the I/O System Setting screen.

Select [Online] [Stop Monitoring] (

INDEX

Operating procedure
) on the I/O System Setting screen.

19.7.1 Starting/stopping monitoring

19 - 27

GX Works2

19 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES

Screen display during monitoring

When monitoring starts, the I/O System Setting screen is displays as follows.
Conditions that are true are displayed in yellow.

Screen button

Displays the Edit Timing Chart Format screen to confirm the monitoring status.

19.7.2

Changing current value of devices

Change current device value during monitoring.

Operating procedure
Set the items on the screen.
Item
For a bit device

Description
Click a bit device to invert its status.
Click a word device to display the Change Device Value screen below and change
its value.

For a word device

Screen button
For the button on the screen, refer to Section 19.7.1.

19 - 28

19.7.2 Changing current value of devices

19.8 Operating I/O System Setting Files

17

Operating I/O System Setting Files

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to operate an I/O system setting file (*.IOS).

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

19.8

19.8.1

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18
Creating I/O system setting files

Create a new I/O system setting file.

Operating procedure

19.8.2

19

).

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Select [File] [New] (

Opening existing I/O system setting files

Open a saved I/O system setting file.

20

Operating procedure

1.

Select [File] [Open] (

2.

Select a file to be opened and click the

PRINTING

).
button.

SETTING OPTIONS

21
Supported existing applications
I/O system setting files created with GX Simulator Version 6 or later can also be opened.

Restrictions

APPENDIX

'Push Button'/Always ON' set with existing GX Simulator

When an I/O system setting file in which a `Push Button'/'Always ON' is set with GX simulator is read with GX
Works2, a 'Push Button' is converted to a '(blank)' and a 'Always ON' is converted to a 'SM400=ON' by QCPU (Q
mode). A 'Push Button' is converted to a '(blank)' and an 'Always ON' is converted to an 'M8000=ON' by FXCPU.

19.8.3

Saving I/O system setting files

Save an I/O system setting file being open under a specified name.
INDEX

Operating procedure

1.

Select [File] [Save As].

2.

Enter a name of the file to be saved and click the

button.

19.8.1 Creating I/O system setting files

19 - 29

GX Works2

19 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES

MEMO

19 - 30

19.8.3 Saving I/O system setting files

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

20 PRINTING

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

This chapter explains how to print sequence programs and device data created with GX Works2.

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

20

PRINTING

Print Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2

Setting Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4
Batch Printing Project Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5
Page Set Up for Batch Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8
Setting Details of Batch Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
Displaying Batch Print Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-38
Printing Data Displayed on Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-39
Setting Print Details for Data Displayed on Screen . . . . . 20-40
Previewing Print Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-43
Printing Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-44
Precautions on Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-52

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

20.1
20.2
20.3
20.4
20.5
20.6
20.7
20.8
20.9
20.10
20.11

20 - 1

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

20.1

Print Function
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains the overview of print function and printable data.

Batch print and print window functions

The print functions are batch print function and print window function.
Batch print function
A function to batch print multiple data in a project.
Print window function
A function to print data displayed on the active window.

Printable and non-printable data

The following table shows the printable and non-printable data.

:Printable : Non-printable
Data

Batch print

Print window

Cover
PLC parameter
Network parameter*1
Intelligent function module*1

Task registration

Ladder
SFC (MELSAP3)
SFC (MELSAP-L)*1
ST
Structured ladder/FBD
Function/Function block program
Label
Device comment
Device memory
Device initial value*1

Change TC Setting
Device list
Cross reference
Statement/Note

Project content list

Product information list*1

System monitor*1

Verification result

*1: Not supported by FXCPU

20 - 2

20.1 Print Function

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Print items on the batch print screen

Data supported by the batch print function are displayed on the batch print screen in the order shown in the table
on the previous page, and changed data are saved in the project. Therefore, when a project created in the old
version of GX Works2 is opened in the new version, the listed order of the print items may be changed.
Change the order of the print items with "Set Print Order".

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

20 - 3

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

20.2

Setting Printer
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to set a printer.

Print job output can be selected on the Printer Setup screen for batch print. For details, refer to Section 20.3.1.

Screen display
Select [Project] [Printer Setup].

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Name

Select the printer to be used.

Paper

Set the paper size and paper feed method of the printer.
Size

Select the size of paper.

Source

Select the paper feed method.

Orientation

2.

Description

Set the page orientation.

Portrait

Select this to print the page in portrait mode.

Landscape

Select this to print the page in landscape mode.

Click the

button.

Printer settings
Printer settings changed in GX Works2 are not saved.

Restrictions
Printing data using equipment such as other companies' PDF printers
Some lines of a table may not be printed correctly.

20 - 4

20.3 Batch Printing Project Data

17

Batch Printing Project Data

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to batch print project data.

A print preview can be displayed before printing data. For displaying a print preview, refer to Section 20.6.

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Screen display

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

20.3

Select [Project] [Print].

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

SETTING OPTIONS

21

A
Operating procedure

Item

2.

APPENDIX

Set the items on the screen.

Description

Print Item

Check the data to be printed.

is displayed for items without data to be printed or items whose data is readprotected by the security setting.
is displayed for print items to which read-protected is set in the security setting.

Setting by Item

Set details of print settings for each data. (

Click the

Section 20.5)
INDEX

1.

button.

Data of items checked under "Print Item" are printed in the order from the top.

20 - 5

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

Screen button

/
Moves the selected item up/down under "Print Item".

Displays the Print Setup screen.(

Section 20.3.1)

Displays the Page Setup screen. (

Section 20.4)
Set a header/footer of the paper on which data is printed.

Displays a print preview of the item checked under "Print Item". (

Section 20.6)

Using a function to print multiple pages on a single page

When using the function to print multiple pages on a single page, each data is printed separately.
When data ends in the middle of the page, the next data will not be printed on the same page but will be printed on
the new page.
The following figure shows the example of printing two pages on a single page.
First page
Second page
Third page

Ladder program MAIN 1

20 - 6

Ladder program SUB 1

20.3 Batch Printing Project Data

17

Setting printer for batch print

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

20.3.1

For batch print, the printer can also be set on the Print screen.
Print job output can be selected in the printer setting for batch print.
For notes and restrictions on printer setting, refer to Section 20.2.

18

Select the

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Screen display
button on the Print screen.

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

Operating procedure
Set the items on the screen.

Name

Select the printer to be used.

Paper

Set the paper size and paper feed method of the printer.
Size

Select the size of paper.

Source

Select the paper feed method.

Set the page orientation.

Portrait

Select this to print the page in portrait mode.

Landscape

Select this to print the page in landscape mode.

Print Job
Output Method

Click the

APPENDIX

Orientation

2.

Description

SETTING OPTIONS

Item

21

Select a method for print job output.

Select whether to print all print items as one print job or to print each print item separately.

button.

Printing with a PDF output printer

For a PDF output printer which outputs print results to files, files are created for each print job. The size of the files
to be created is depending on the printer driver.

20.3.1 Setting printer for batch print

20 - 7

INDEX

1.

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

20.4

Page Set Up for Batch Print

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to set the page setup for batch print.

Screen display
Select the Print Screen

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Paper

Size

Select the paper size.

Source

Select the paper feed method.

Orientation

Set the page orientation.

Margins (Unit: mm)

Set spaces for top/bottom/right/left of the paper.

Headers/Footers

Page Number Format

Start at:

Header

Footer

20 - 8

Description

Select "Continue from previous page" or "Include chapter number" for the page
numbers printed in header/footer.
Set a page number for the first page to be printed when "Continue from Previous
Page" is selected.
Enter character strings to be printed in header or footer.
Up to 512 characters including string patterns and line feeds can be entered in the
header/footer. Note that a line feed is handled as two characters.
Click to display a list of string pattern.
Selected string pattern is entered at the cursor position.

20.4 Page Set Up for Batch Print

17

button.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Click the

Screen button

Restores the default setting of header/footer.

18

Printing chapter numbers

By selecting "Include chapter number", page numbers are displayed with: the numbered item in "Print Item", the
numbered item in "Print", and the page number of each data. Even when there is no actual data to be printed in
"Print Item" or "Print", the numbers with the chapter number format will be assigned in order.
The following figure shows an example of page number assignment with the chapter number format.

Numbered item in "Print Item"

Page number of each data

1
2
3

20

PRINTING

1
2
3

Numbered item in "Print"

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

3-2-1

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

2.

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

When characters which exceed the maximum number of characters are entered to header/footer
When the project is opened in GX Works2 with a language different from the opened project data, characters
which exceed 512 characters may be displayed.
When characters which exceed 512 characters are entered to the header/footer, characters cannot be entered or
pasted; however, they can be deleted or cut.
Header and footer
String patterns of header/footer may not function when a project created in GX Works2 in other language is
opened, or a project created in GX Works Version 1.64S or later is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.62Q or earlier.
When the string pattern of header and footer do not function, set the setting again.

INDEX

20 - 9

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

20.5

Setting Details of Batch Print

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to set items for the batch print function.

20.5.1

Setting batch print for cover

Set items to print a cover.

Screen display
Select "Cover" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.

Operating procedure

Set the items on the screen.

Item

20 - 10

Description

Print Selection

Select the item(s) to be printed.

Layout

Display print area of the item(s) selected for "Print Selection".

Text

Enter text for each item to be printed.

Text can be entered when "Title", "Comment", "Prepared By", and/or "Date" are selected for
"Print Selection".
A maximum of 200 characters can be set for each item. Note that a line feed is handled as
two characters.
The numbers of characters and lines that can be printed are different according to the size
or font setting of print paper. Check the print image with the print preview function.

Font

Set fonts for each item to be printed.

Fonts can be set when "Title", "Comment", "Prepared By", and/or "Date" are selected for
"Print Selection".

Font

Select a font.

Size

Select a font size.

Font Style

Select a font style.

20.5.1 Setting batch print for cover

20.5 Setting Details of Batch Print

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Displays a print preview of items selected in "Print Item".

Prints items selected in "Print Item".

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

20.5.1 Setting batch print for cover

20 - 11

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

20.5.2

Setting batch print for PLC parameter

Set items to print PLC parameter.

Screen display
Select "PLC Parameter" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
<QCPU(Q mode)/LCPU>

<FXCPU>

Operating procedure

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Print What

Description
Select the item(s) of PLC parameter to be printed.

Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 20.5.1.

Selects all items.

Clears the selection of all items.

20 - 12

20.5.2 Setting batch print for PLC parameter

20.5 Setting Details of Batch Print

17

Setting batch print for network parameter

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

20.5.3

Set items to print the network parameter.

Screen display
Select "Network Parameter" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

Operating procedure

21

Item
Print What

SETTING OPTIONS

Set the items on the screen.

Description
Select the item(s) of network parameter to be printed.

Screen button

APPENDIX

For the screen buttons, refer to Section 20.5.1.

INDEX

20.5.3 Setting batch print for network parameter

20 - 13

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

20.5.4

Setting batch print for ladder programs

Set items to print ladder programs.

Screen display
Select "Ladder" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.

Operating procedure

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Select Program

Description
Display all data names of ladder program.

Do Not Print

Display data names which will not be printed.

Print

Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.

Display Mode of Program*1

Select whether to print data in label display or device display.

Additional Information

Append selected items to the ladder.

Device Comment

Check this to append device comments.

For labels, label comments are appended.
Set the number of comment rows and columns to be printed.

Statement/Note

Check this to append statements and notes.

Check this to append contact usage destination. Set the print position and print range.

Contact

To specify the print range, click the

Device Range Setting (Contact) screen.

button, and set the device range on the

Check this to append coil usage destination. Set a print range.

Coil

20 - 14

To specify the print range, click the

Device Range Setting (Coil) screen.

20.5.4 Setting batch print for ladder programs

button, and set the device range on the

20.5 Setting Details of Batch Print

Ladder Contact

Set the number of ladder contacts to be printed.

Print NOPLF*2

Check this to print the NOPLF instructions.

(Data will be printed on the new page at the NOPLF instruction in the program with or
without this item is selected.)

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Set the conditions for printing ladder programs.

18

Delete blank rows of

contacts and specify the
number of column

Check this to print programs with blank rows of contact usage destination closed up. When
this item is selected, the number of columns of contact usage destination can be selected.

Delete blank rows above

and under coil

Check this to print programs with blank rows of coil usage destination closed up.

Page break by ladder

block

Check this to print data on the new page in ladder block unit.
When this item is not checked, data is printed on the new page in ladder row unit.
Check this to print hidden ladder blocks.

Print blank rows with no

device comment

Check this to print blank rows which do not contain device comments.

Print lines in bold

Check this to print programs with bold lines.

Specify Print Range

Print Range

*1 :

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

include hidden ones*3

19

20

Set the ladder program print range.

To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set a start step and an end step.

For FXCPU simple project (with labels), when a block password with the validated setting for "Readprotect the execution program" exists,
and

cannot be used with the device display.

PRINTING

Print ladder blocks

21

*2 :

Not supported by FXCPU.

*3 :

For projects with labels, this item can be selected only when "Print in Label Display" is selected for
"Display Mode of Program".

Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 20.5.1.

SETTING OPTIONS

Print Conditions

17

Description

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Item

Moves data selected in "Do Not Print" to "Print".

APPENDIX

Moves all data in "Do Not Print" to "Print".

Moves data selected in "Print" to "Do Not Print".

INDEX

Moves all data in "Print" to "Do Not Print".

/
Moves data selected in "Print" up/down.

20.5.4 Setting batch print for ladder programs

20 - 15

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

Displays the Device Range Setting screen.

20 - 16

20.5.4 Setting batch print for ladder programs

20.5 Setting Details of Batch Print

17

Contact/coil usage destination

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Contact usage destination and coil usage destination are output as shown below.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Indicates the number of steps of coil usage destination

Indicates the number of steps of
contact usage destination

The following shows an example of contact usage destination.

Example) Contact usage destination of Y0

20

Open contact
The number of steps of
Y0 used for source

PRINTING

Source

The number of steps of

Y0 used for destination

Printing examples with a setting of "Delete blank rows of contacts and specify the number of column"
The following examples show the difference of printing contact usage destination according to the
setting of the "Delete blank rows of contacts and specify the number of column" item.

APPENDIX

< With the item selected (5 columns) >

INDEX

< Without the item selected (5 columns) >

SETTING OPTIONS

21
Destination
Closed contact

20.5.4 Setting batch print for ladder programs

20 - 17

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

20.5.5

Setting batch print for MELSAP3 programs

Set items to print SFC (MELSAP3) programs.

Screen display
Select "MELSAP3" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.

Operating procedure

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Select Program

Description
Display all data names of SFC (MELSAP3) program.

Do Not Print

Display data names which will not be printed.

Print

Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.

Action/Transition*1

Select whether to print data in label display or device display.

This item can be selected only when "Block List" or "Action/Transition" is checked in
"SFC Diagram Print Item".

SFC Diagram Print Item

Select the item(s) to be printed in SFC diagram.

Display Mode of Block List/

SFC Diagram
Block List*2
Comment List
Check the item(s) to be printed.
Action/Transition
Property (SFC Program)*2,*3
Note List

20 - 18

20.5.5 Setting batch print for MELSAP3 programs

20.5 Setting Details of Batch Print

Item

Block List *3

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Comment

Check this to append SFC steps/transition comments to the SFC diagram.

18

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

SFC Step/Transition

SFC Block List Comment Check this to append SFC block list comments to the block list.
Start Destination Block
Action/Transition
Device Comment
Print Conditions

Check this to append start destination block to the block list.

Check this to append device comments to Action/Transition.
For labels, label comments are appended.
Set the numbers of rows and columns for comments to be printed.

19

Set conditions for printing programs.

Number of Print Column of

SFC Diagram

Specify the number of columns of SFC diagram to be printed on a single page.

The program is printed with reducing the size to fit the specified number of columns on a
single page.

Number of Action/Transition
Contacts

Set the number of contacts to be printed.

Print Range*2

20

Set the SFC (MELSAP3) program print range.

To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set a start block and an end block.

*1 :

For simple projects (without labels), this item is fixed to "Print in Device Display".

*2 :

For structured projects, this item cannot be selected.

*3 :

Not supported by FXCPU.

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Specify Print Range

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

SFC Diagram

Append selected item(s) to "SFC Diagram Print Item".

PRINTING

Additional Information

17

Description

Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 20.5.1 and Section 20.5.4.

APPENDIX

INDEX

20.5.5 Setting batch print for MELSAP3 programs

20 - 19

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

20.5.6

Setting batch print for MELSAP-L programs

Set items to print SFC (MELSAP-L) programs.

This setting is not supported by FXCPU.

Screen display
Select "MELSAP-L" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.

Operating procedure

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Select Program

Description
Display all data names of SFC (MELSAP-L) program.

Do Not Print

Display data names which will not be printed.

Print

Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.

SFC Diagram Print Item

Select the item(s) to be printed in SFC diagram.

SFC Diagram
Block List
Check the item(s) to be printed.
Comment List
Property (SFC Program)
Additional Information
SFC Diagram

Append selected item(s) to "SFC Diagram Print Item".

-

SFC Step/Transition
Comment

Check this to append SFC steps/transition comments to the SFC diagram.

Program

Check this to append programs to the SFC diagram.

Block List

SFC Block List Comment Check this to append SFC block list comments to the block list.
Start Destination Block

20 - 20

Check this to append start destination block to the block list.

20.5.6 Setting batch print for MELSAP-L programs

20.5 Setting Details of Batch Print

Number of Print Column of

SFC Diagram
Specify Print Range
Print Range

Set conditions for printing programs.

Specify the number of columns of SFC diagram to be printed on a single page.
The program is printed with reducing the size to fit the specified number of columns on a
single page.
Set the SFC (MELSAP-L) program print range.
To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set a start step and an end step.

Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 20.5.1 and Section 20.5.4.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Print Conditions

17

Description

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Item

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

20.5.6 Setting batch print for MELSAP-L programs

20 - 21

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

20.5.7

Setting batch print for ST programs

Set items to print ST programs.

Screen display
Select "ST" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.

Operating procedure

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Select Program

Description
Display all data names of ST program.

Do Not Print

Display data names which will not be printed.

Print

Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.

Specify Print Range

Print Range

Set the ST program print range.

To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set a start line and an end line.

Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 20.5.1 and Section 20.5.4.

20 - 22

20.5.7 Setting batch print for ST programs

20.5 Setting Details of Batch Print

Setting batch print for structured ladder/FBD programs

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

20.5.8

Set items to print structured ladder/FBD programs.

Screen display
Select "Structured Ladder/FBD" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

Operating procedure

21

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Select Program

SETTING OPTIONS

Description
Display all data names of structured ladder/FBD program.

Do Not Print

Display data names which will not be printed.

Print

Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.

A
Screen button
APPENDIX

For the screen buttons, refer to Section 20.5.1 and Section 20.5.4.

INDEX

20.5.8 Setting batch print for structured ladder/FBD programs

20 - 23

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

20.5.9

Setting batch print for FB/FUN programs

Set items to print function and function block programs.

Screen display
Select "FB/FUN Program" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.

Operating procedure

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Print Selection

Description
-

Function/FB Label

Check this to print function/function block labels.

Select Program

Display all data names of function/function block program.

Do Not Print

Display data names which will not be printed.

Print

Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.

Additional Information

Append selected items to the ladder.

Device comment

Check this to append device comments.

For labels, label comments are appended.
Set the number of comment rows and columns to be printed.

Statement/Note

Check this to append statements and notes.

Check this to append contact usage destination. Set the print position and print range.

Contact

To specify the print range, click the

Device Range Setting (Contact) screen.

button, and set the device range on the

Check this to append coil usage destination. Set a print range.

Coil

20 - 24

To specify the print range, click the

Device Range Setting (Coil) screen.

20.5.9 Setting batch print for FB/FUN programs

button, and set the device range on the

20.5 Setting Details of Batch Print

Ladder Contact

Set the number of ladder contacts to be printed.

Print NOPLF*1

Check this to print the NOPLF instructions.

(Data will be printed on the new page at the NOPLF instruction in the program with or
without this item is selected.)

Delete blank rows of

contacts and specify the
number of column

Check this to print programs with blank rows of contact usage destination closed up. When
this item is selected, the number of columns to be printed can be selected.

Delete blank rows above

and under coil

Check this to print programs with blank rows of coil usage destination closed up.

Page break by ladder

block

Check this to print data on the new page in ladder block unit.
When this item is not checked, data is printed on the new page in ladder row unit.
Check this to print hidden ladder blocks.

Print blank rows with no

device comment

Check this to print blank rows which do not contain device comments.

Print lines in bold

Check this to print programs with bold lines.

Specify Print Range

Print Range

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

include hidden ones*2

18

20

Set the ladder program print range.

To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set a start step and an end step.

*1 :

Not supported by FXCPU.

*2 :

For projects with labels, this item can be selected only when "Print in Label Display" is selected for
"Display Mode of Program".

PRINTING

Print ladder blocks

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Set the conditions for printing ladder programs.

21

Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 20.5.1 and Section 20.5.4.

APPENDIX

Data to be printed in FB/FUN programs

Data to be printed in FB/FUN programs are function blocks created in ladder programs and functions/function
blocks created in ST programs or structured ladder/FBD programs.
User libraries and display-prohibited programs are not displayed in "Select Program".

SETTING OPTIONS

Print Conditions

17

Description

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Item

INDEX

20.5.9 Setting batch print for FB/FUN programs

20 - 25

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

20.5.10

Setting batch print for labels

Set items to print label data.

Screen display
Select "Label" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.

Operating procedure

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Print Selection

Description
Display all data names of label.

Label List

Check the label type(s) to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
The item is displayed in gray when data to be printed do not exist.

Select Data Name

Display items selected in "Label List".

Do Not Print

Display data names which will not be printed.

Print

Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.

Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 20.5.1 and Section 20.5.4.

20 - 26

20.5.10 Setting batch print for labels

20.5 Setting Details of Batch Print

17

Setting batch print for device comments

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

20.5.11

Set items to print device comment data.

Screen display
Select "Device Comment" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

Operating procedure
Set the items on the screen.

Print Selection

Description
Display all data names of device comment.

Device Comment List

Check the device comment to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
The item is displayed in gray when data to be printed do not exist, or all data are read protected.

Select Data Name

Display items selected in "Device Comment List".

Do Not Print

Display data names which will not be printed.

Print

Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.

APPENDIX

Print Conditions
Print include the device
with no comment.
*Available only when
selecting print range in
Specify Print Range
option.

Check this to print data including devices to which device comments are not registered.

Print title only for the

device comment with no
comment.

Check this to print only titles of data to which device comments are not registered.
When this item is checked, only header, footer, and/or title are printed for each data on one
page.
Set the device comment print range.
To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set the device range by clicking the

Specify Print Range

SETTING OPTIONS

Item

21

button.
Since direct inputs (DX) and direct outputs (DY) are device comments as same as inputs
(X) and outputs (Y), they are not printed when "Whole Range" is selected.
When printing direct inputs (DX) or direct outputs (DY), select "Specify Print Range", and
set the device range.

20.5.11 Setting batch print for device comments

20 - 27

INDEX

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 20.5.1 and Section 20.5.4.

20 - 28

20.5.11 Setting batch print for device comments

20.5 Setting Details of Batch Print

17

Setting batch print for device memory data

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

20.5.12

Set items to print device memory data.

Screen display
Select "Device Memory" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

Operating procedure

21

Do Not Print

Display data names which will not be printed.

Print

Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.

SETTING OPTIONS

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Device Memory Selection

Print Conditions

Description
Display all data names of device memory.

Print rows that all device

value are 0.

Check this to print rows in which device values are all 0.

Print blank rows with no

device set.

Check this to print rows in which devices are not set.

Print title only for the

device memory with no
device set.

Check this to print only titles of device memory data in which devices to be printed are not
set.
When this item is selected, only header/footer/titles are printed on a single page per data.

APPENDIX

Screen button

20.5.12 Setting batch print for device memory data

INDEX

For the screen buttons, refer to Section 20.5.1 and Section 20.5.4.

20 - 29

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

20.5.13

Setting batch print for device initial values

Set items to print device initial values.

This setting is not supported by FXCPU.

Screen display
Select "Device Initial Value" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.

Operating procedure
Set the items on the screen.
Item

Description

Device Initial Value

Selection

Display all data names of device initial values.

Do Not Print

Display data names which will not be printed.

Print

Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.

Print Selection

Device Initial Value

Range

Check this to print specified range of device initial values.

Device Initial Value

Check this to print device initial values (device values).

Print Type

Select a bit unit for handling device initial values for printing.

Print Form

Select a data format of device initial value for printing.

Print Conditions

Print device that value is 0. Check this to print devices whose value is 0.
Print title only for the data Check this to print only titles of data to which the device initial value range is not set, or data
which do not contain devices to be printed.
that is not set device
When this item is selected, only header/footer/titles are printed on a single page per data.
initial value and range.

Specify Print Range

Set the device initial value print range.

To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set the device range by clicking the
button.

Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 20.5.1 and Section 20.5.4.

20 - 30

20.5.13 Setting batch print for device initial values

20.5 Setting Details of Batch Print

17

Setting batch print for TC setting values

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

20.5.14

Set items to print TC setting values.

Screen display
Select "TC Setting" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

Operating procedure

21

Do Not Print

Display data names which will not be printed.

Print

Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.

SETTING OPTIONS

Set the items on the screen.

Select the item to be printed.

Item

Print Target Device

Timer setting value
Retentive timer setting
value*1
Counter setting value
Additional Information
Device comment
Print Conditions
Print title only for the
program with no TC
setting.

*1 :

Display all data names of ladder/MELSAP3/MELSAP-L programs.

Check this to print timer setting values. Labels to which timer is set as a data type are also
printed.
Check this to print retentive timer setting values. Labels to which retentive timer is set as a
data type are also printed.
Check this to print counter setting values. Labels to which counter is set as a data type are
also printed.

APPENDIX

Select Program

Description

Append the selected item to the devices to be printed.

Check this to append device comments.
For labels, label comments are appended.
INDEX

Check this to print only titles of programs which do not contain TC setting values.
When this item is selected, only header/footer/titles are printed on a single page per data.

Not supported by FXCPU.

20.5.14 Setting batch print for TC setting values

20 - 31

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 20.5.1 and Section 20.5.4.

20 - 32

20.5.14 Setting batch print for TC setting values

20.5 Setting Details of Batch Print

17

Setting batch print for device list

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

20.5.15

Set items to print the device list.

Screen display
Select "Device List" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

Operating procedure

21

Item

SETTING OPTIONS

Set the items on the screen.

Description
Set a search location of data to be printed.
Click the
button to select a search location.
A search location cannot be entered directly.

Find What

Set a search target for devices to be printed.

All devices

Select this to search all devices.

Used devices

Select this to search devices used for contacts, coils, and parameters.

Unused devices

Select this to search devices which are not used.

Additional Information
Device Comment
Print Conditions
Print title only when no
find result returns.

APPENDIX

Find In

Append the selected item(s) to the device list.

Check this to append device comments.

Check this to print only titles even when the program does not contain any devices.
When this item is selected, only header/footer/titles are printed on a single page.

INDEX

20.5.15 Setting batch print for device list

20 - 33

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

Item
Specify Print Range
Conditions for Whole
Range Specification

Description
Set the device comment print range.
To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set the device range for "Conditions
for Range Specification".
-

Include ZR device

Check this to include ZR devices in the print target when "Whole Range" is specified for
"Specify Print Range".

Include extension
device (e.g. U0\G0,
J1\X0)

Check this to include extended devices in the print target when "Whole Range" is specified
for "Specify Print Range".
(BLm\Sn and BLm\TRn devices are printed with or without this item is selected.)

Conditions for Range

Specification

Set a range of devices to be printed.

Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 20.5.1 and Section 20.5.4.

20 - 34

20.5.15 Setting batch print for device list

20.5 Setting Details of Batch Print

17

Setting batch print for cross reference information

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

20.5.16

Set items to print cross reference information created on the Cross Reference window.

Screen display
Select "Cross Reference" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

Operating procedure

21

Item
Specify Print Range

Description
-

All

Select this to print all rows.

Selected Rows

Select this to print selected row(s).

Select the row(s) to be printed on the Cross Reference window in advance.

Print Conditions
Print title only when a
cross reference
information is not
created.

SETTING OPTIONS

Set the items on the screen.

Check this to print only titles when the cross reference information is not created.
When this item is selected, only header/footer/table titles are printed on a single page.

APPENDIX

Screen button

INDEX

For the screen buttons, refer to Section 20.5.1.

20.5.16 Setting batch print for cross reference information

20 - 35

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

20.5.17

Setting batch print for statements/notes

Set items to print statement/note data.

Screen display
Select "Statement/Note" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.

Operating procedure

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Select Program

Description
Display all program names of ladder program.

Do Not Print

Display data names which will not be printed.

Print

Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.

Statement/Note Print Item

Selected items are printed.

Line Statement List

Note List
Check the item(s) to be printed.
P Statement List
I Statement List
Print Conditions
Print title only for the
program with no
Statement/Note.

Check this to print only titles of data in which statements/notes do not exist.
When this item is checked, only header, footer, and/or title are printed for each data
on one page.

Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 20.5.1 and Section 20.5.4.

20 - 36

20.5.17 Setting batch print for statements/notes

20.5 Setting Details of Batch Print

17

Setting batch print for product information list

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

20.5.18

Set items to print the product information list created on the System Monitor screen.
This setting is not supported by FXCPU.

Screen display

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Select "Product Information List" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

PRINTING

20

Operating procedure

21

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Setting for Product
Information List

SETTING OPTIONS

Description
Set a product information list file to be printed.

File Name

Click the
button to select a product information list file.
A product information list file cannot be entered directly.

APPENDIX

Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 20.5.1.

INDEX

Printable product information list files

Only the product information list files created on the System Monitor screen in GX Works2 can be printed.
Product information list files created in GX Developer cannot be printed.

20.5.18 Setting batch print for product information list

20 - 37

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

20.6

Displaying Batch Print Preview

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to check the print image of each data.

Operating procedure

1.

Select [Project] [Print Preview].

The Print screen is displayed. (

2.

Click the

Section 20.3)

button.

The Print Preview screen is displayed.

3.

Select items in "Print Item" and "Data Name" to change the data and check the print
image.

4.

Click the

button.

The print image of the selected data is displayed.

Screen button

Prints data.

/
Displays the previous page/next page.

/
Changes the display size of print image.

Displaying previous/next page in print preview

The range in which previous/next pages can be displayed by clicking the
/
button is
within one data.
Use the "Jump Preview to" function to switch from the displayed preview data to another data.
Page numbers displayed in footer
When "Continue form Previous Page" is selected in the page setting, "[Insert page number here]" is displayed at
the position where a page number is to be printed in the print preview.

20 - 38

20.7 Printing Data Displayed on Screen

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to print data displayed on the screen.

The print image can be checked prior to the printing. For checking print images, refer to Section 20.9.

Select [Project] [Print Window].

The Print Window function cannot be executed from the menu for the following data.
Execute the Print Window function as described below for each data.

19

Parameters
Click the
screen.

button on the PLC parameter setting screen or Network parameter setting

Device initial value

Click the

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Screen display

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Printing Data Displayed on Screen

button on the Device Initial Value screen.

Device list or cross reference

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

20.7

20

Select rows to be printed, and click the

button on each screen.

PRINTING

<Intelligent function module>

<Data other than intelligent function module>

SETTING OPTIONS

21

1.

Set the items on the screen.

2.

Click the

APPENDIX

Operating procedure

button.

INDEX

Printing starts.

Printer settings
Click the

or

button to make detailed settings for the printer.

Printing ladder screens

When printing a ladder screen, the Print Window (Ladder) screen is displayed. For SFC (Zoom), the Print Window
(Ladder) screen is not displayed.
For details, refer to Section 20.8.1.

20 - 39

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

20.8

Setting Print Details for Data Displayed on Screen

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

This section explains how to set print details.

Print details can be set using ladder program and device initial setting.

20.8.1

Setting print details for ladder programs

Set print details such as ladder print range and additional information.

Screen display
Select [Project] [Print Window]/[Print Window Preview].
The following explains a setting operation for the Print Window function. Apply the same operation for
the Print Window Preview function.
< Option setting screen for Print Window >

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item
Additional Information

Description
Append selected items to the ladder.

Device comment

Check this to append device comments.

Set the number of comment columns to be printed.
The number of comment rows is fixed.

Statement/Note

Check this to append statements and notes.

Contact

Check this to append contact usage destination. Set the print position and print
range.
To specify the print range, click the
the Device Range Setting (Contact) screen.

button, and set the device range on

Check this to append coil usage destination. Set the print range.
Coil
Specified Print Range
Print Range

20 - 40

To specify the print range, click the

the Device Range Setting (Coil) screen.

button, and set the device range on

Set the ladder print range.

To specify the print range, select "Specified Range" and set a start step and an end
step.

20.8.1 Setting print details for ladder programs

20.8 Setting Print Details for Data Displayed on Screen

2.

Click the

17

button.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

For the Print Window function, the Print Window screen is displayed. (
Section 20.7)
For the Print Window Preview function, the Print Window Preview screen is displayed.
(
Section 20.9)

Screen button

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

For the screen buttons, refer to Section 20.5.4.

Displays a print preview.

Contact/coil usage destination

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

For details of contact/coil usage destination, refer to Section 20.5.4.

PRINTING

20

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

20.8.1 Setting print details for ladder programs

20 - 41

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

20.8.2

Setting print details for device initial values

Set print details such as print items and print range of device initial values.

Screen display
Click the

button on the Device Initial Value screen.

Operating procedure

1.

Set the items on the screen.

Item

Print Item
Device Initial Value Range

Check this to print specified range of device initial values.

Device Initial Value

Check this to print device initial values (device values).

Device Initial Value Output Setting

Whole Range

Select this to print all devices registered as device values

Specified Range

Select this to specify a the print range.

The method to specify a range is the same as that of device initial value
setting. (
Section 8.2)

Print Type

Select a bit unit for handling device initial values at printing.

Print Form

Select a data format of device initial value at printing.

Print Condition

Print device with value of

zero

20 - 42

Set the items to print device initial values (device values).

Print Range

2.

Description

Click

Check this to print devices whose value is 0.

the button.

20.8.2 Setting print details for device initial values

20.9 Previewing Print Images

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains how to check print images of data displayed on the screen.

18

Screen display
Select [Project] [Print Window Preview].
The Print Window Preview function cannot be executed from the menu for the following data.
Execute the Print Window Preview function as described below for each data.
Parameters
button on the PLC parameter setting screen or Network parameter setting

Device initial value

Click the

button on the Device Initial Value screen.

Device list or cross reference

Select rows to be printed, and click the

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Click the
screen.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Previewing Print Images

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

20.9

20

button on each screen.

PRINTING

<For Structured ladder/FBD>

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

20 - 43

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

20.10 Printing Examples

Q CPU L CPU Remote

The following shows examples of printing.

20 - 44

Cover

PLC parameters

Network parameters

Head

FX

 Ladder
PRINTING

SETTING OPTIONS

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

APPENDIX

Tasks
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

INDEX

20.10 Printing Examples

Intelligent function modules

17

18

19

20

Programs

21

20 - 45

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

SFC diagram (MELSAP3)

SFC block list

ST

Structured ladder/FBD

20 - 46

APPENDIX

Structured data
SETTING OPTIONS

PRINTING

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Local labels
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Global labels
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

INDEX

20.10 Printing Examples

Labels

17

18

19

Function/function block labels

20

21

20 - 47

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

Structured data devices

Structured data devices

(Devices are printed automatically after printing labels.)

20 - 48

Device comments

Device memory data

SETTING OPTIONS

PRINTING

APPENDIX

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Device initial values

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Device initial value ranges

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

INDEX

20.10 Printing Examples

Device initial values

17

18

19

20

TC setting values

21

Device list

20 - 49

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

20 - 50

Cross reference

Statements/Notes

Project content list

Product information list

APPENDIX

SETTING OPTIONS

PRINTING

Detail verify result

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Verify result list

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

INDEX

20.10 Printing Examples

Verification result

17

18

19

20

21

20 - 51

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

20.11 Precautions on Printing

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

The following explains the precautions on printing.

Common precautions on Batch Print and Print Window functions

Displaying print previews and printing data

Print preview display and printing cannot be executed in the following situations.
The print target data do not exist.
The print target screen is being monitored.
(Start printing after stopping the monitoring.)
Precautions on printing large volume data
Large volume data may not be printed at all or printed half way due to the limitations of printer driver
or Windows print spooler.
In this case, print data by following the instructions described below.
Separate the data by setting a print range with "Specify Print Range".
Select [start] [Control Panel] [Printers and Faxes], open the property of the printer being used,
and select "Print directly to the printer" in the Advanced tab on the property screen.
Set "Output by Item" for the print job output on the Print Setup screen (Section 20.3.1). (For batch
print only)
Set "Output by Item" for the print job output on the Print screen displayed by clicking the
button or the

button. (For batch print only)

Printing SFC diagrams

When an SFC diagram is printed, the printout may be divided into multiple pages depending on the
number of the branches and couplings, and the number of steps. A number that indicates the position
is printed at top right of each page.
m
n

SFC Block

SFC Block
Data Name : 000 : Block

20 - 52

1/20/2010

Data Name : 000 : Block

SFC Block
(n,m)

1/20/2010

SFC Block
(n,m)

1/20/2010

Data Name : 000 : Block

Data Name : 000 : Block

(n,m)

1/20/2010
(n,m)

20.11 Precautions on Printing

<Cross reference information displayed on screen>

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Cross reference information is printed as shown below when the "Display hierarchically" item is
checked on the <<Condition Setting>> tab.
"+" and "-" are not printed.
Each hierarchy of device/label is displayed with indentation.
When only the lower hierarchy of device/label is selected, the hierarchy above the selected hierarchy
is also printed.
Data in the collapsed rows are not printed.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Printing hierarchically-displayed cross reference information

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

<Printed cross reference information>

PRINTING

20

SETTING OPTIONS

21

When the print result is output with the Print or Print Window function, the Save As screen may not
be displayed in the foreground.

INDEX

Use
+
keys or
+
keys to bring the screen in the foreground.
GX Works2 does not respond when the GX Works2 operation is performed while the Save As
screen is displayed.
When the following screen is displayed, select "Wait for the program to respond".
Do not select "Close the program". Unsaved data will be lost.

APPENDIX

Precautions on using the print function with 64-bit edition Windows operating system

20 - 53

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

Precautions on Batch Print function

Uncompiled ladders in program

Uncompiled ladders in a program are not printed or reflected to the print preview.
Print data or display the print preview after converting the program.
NOPLF instruction
The NOPLF instruction is not supported by SFC (Zoom) programs.
Changing setting of "Ladder Contact"
When the setting of "Ladder Contact", which is set for "Ladder" and "FB/FUN" selected in "Print
Item", is changed to the amount less than the one set at the program creation, the program may not
be displayed normally, the same phenomenon as when changing the setting of "Display Connection
of Ladder Diagram" in the option setting.
For details, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
Number of printable rows
The number of printable rows is limited for the following data. The rows that exceeded the limitation
will not be printed.
For device comments and device list, 100,000 rows can be printed per data.
For device memory data and device initial values, 20,000 rows can be printed per data.
For TC setting values, 20,480 rows can be printed per data.
When character strings in header/footer overlap
Overlapped character strings in header/footer are printed on top of each other in order of priority:
right, center, left. The overlapped character string is overwritten by the character string which is given
the priority.
The following shows an example of overlapped character strings.
<Setting example of overlapped character strings in header>

<Printing example of overlapped character strings in header>

Specifying device comment print range for FXCPU

For FXCPU, an error occurs when the Device Range Setting screen is opened in GX Works2 Version
1.64S or later with a project created in GX Works2 Version 1.62Q or earlier, in which nesting (N)/
index register (V)/index register (Z) is specified for device comment print range.
In this case, delete the device range setting for nesting (N)/index register (V)/index register (Z).

20 - 54

20.11 Precautions on Printing

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Precautions on Print Window function

Uncompiled ladders in a program

Uncompiled ladders in a program are not printed or reflected to the print preview.
Print data or display the print preview after converting the program.
NOPLF instruction
Structured ladder/FBD
If a bend point is created in a structured ladder/FBD program, it will be printed as shown below. If the
bend point is unnecessary to be printed, delete it on the structured ladder/FBD editor.
For details of bend points
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)

19

Bend point

Page feed in ladder program

20

PRINTING

If one block of ladder or function block does not fit in one page, the page is automatically fed and the
ladder block or ladder part is printed from the top of the next page.

<Print result>

21

<Second page>

SETTING OPTIONS

<First page>

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

The NOPLF instruction is not supported.

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

APPENDIX

Because the screen width is adjusted automatically to fit the page size when the structure/label
setting screen is printed, the printing may be difficult to read according to the column width of the
screen.
In order to improve the printing quality, adjust the column width of the structure/label setting screen.
The visibility of the printing is increased by adjusting the column width to narrow. However, if the
words input into the Remark/Comment column are too long, or one cell is divided into multiple pages,
the content in that cell cannot be printed completely.

20 - 55

INDEX

Printing the structure/label setting screen

GX Works2

20 PRINTING

MEMO

20 - 56

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

21 SETTING OPTIONS
Option settings such as screen display format setting and detailed operation settings of each function are
available.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

20

PRINTING

Basic Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2

Option Setting List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

21.1
21.2

21 - 1

GX Works2

21 SETTING OPTIONS

21.1

Basic Operations
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

This section explains how to set options.

Screen display
Select [Tool] [Options].

Operating procedure

Set the items on the screen.

When the cursor is placed on a setting item, an explanation of the item is displayed on the
"Explanation" field.

Screen button

Restores the initial settings.

Restores the user default settings.

Stores the current settings as the user default and applies them to a new project.

Precautions when changing option settings

All programs need to be compiled when the following option settings are changed.
"Default Length of String Data Type" in "Label Setting Editor"
Settings in "Compile"
Compiling all programs changes the device assignment to labels. Therefore, device values set before the
program change remain on the device-assigned labels.
For a precautionary measure, reset the programmable controller CPU, clear all device memories including
latches, clear all file registers, then switch the programmable controller to RUN. (
Section 17.3)
For the precautions on compiling all programs, refer to the following manuals.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)/(Structured Project)

21 - 2

FX

21.2 Option Setting List

The following table shows the option setting items.

For (Simple), (Structured) and (Intelligent) indicated in the Reference column, refer to the following manuals
respectively.
(Simple).................GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
(Structured) ...........GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
(Intelligent) ............GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
Tree item

Item

Automatic
Save

Project

Automatically change
language according to
system*1

Reference

Save project after writing

to PLC

Select whether to save the project

automatically after writing to the
programmable controller CPU.

Save project after online

change

Select whether to save the project

automatically after completing online
change to the programmable controller
CPU.

Section
12.9.1

Save project after

changes in TC setting
values are written to PLC

Select whether to save the project

automatically after changes in TC setting
values have been written to the
programmable controller CPU.

(Simple)

Section 12.1

Revision is not Registered

when Save Project
Select whether to register the revision after
saving a project.
Revision is registered
when Save Project
Change
History

Structured
Ladder/FBD/
ST

Tool Hint

Select whether to display a confirmation

Display confirmation
message of the revision registration after
message showing
whether to register history saving a project.
Automatically set revision
titles

Select whether to automatically set revision

titles at revision registration after saving a
project. Automatically-set titles can be
changed on the Revision List window.

Tool Hint Display Items

Select items displayed on tool hint.

Tool Hint Display Format

Select display lines on tool hint.

Section
4.2.3

Label

Display labels and

devices

Declare new label name

Select whether to display the label

registration/selection dialog when entering
new labels.

21

(Structured)

INDEX

Structured
Ladder/FBD

Select whether to display labels and devices

which are assigned to the labels, when
'Label' is selected from View Mode. Users
can neither edit the displayed devices nor
set them to the Find/Replace target.

20

Display label name/

comment of contact or coil Set display lines and characters per line.
in multiline
Program
Editor

19

PRINTING

Common
Setting

Description
Language setting will be automatically
changed according to system when edit
Ladder/SFC program (Statement and Note)
or device comment.

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER

FX

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL

Head

SETTING OPTIONS

Q CPU L CPU Remote

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Option Setting List

APPENDIX

21.2

21 - 3

GX Works2

21 SETTING OPTIONS

Tree item

Item

FB/FUN

Structured
Ladder/FBD

ST

Ladder/SFC

21 - 4

Wrap instance name for

function block

Select whether to wrap function block

instance name at the function block width.

Specify the number of

enable characters for
label name/comment

Specify the number of display characters of

function or function block label.

Automatic input/output
labels

Select whether to add input/output label

when function block or function is pasted.

Automatic ENO labels

Select whether to add ENO output label

when function block or function is pasted.

Pin overwrites

Select whether to overwrite I/O label with a

grid line when ruling a grid line over function
or function block.

Double clicking opens

header

Select whether a label editor is displayed

when function or function block is double
clicked.

Double clicking opens

body

Select whether a program editor is

displayed when function or function block is
double clicked.

Ladder Wrapping

Select whether to wrap ladder. The edited

ladder shall be object after changing the
setting.

Open Structure Ladder/

FBD Editor in guided
mode

Set the default at opening structured ladder/

FBD editor as guided mode.

Allow hotkey repeater

Select whether to display grid line ruling

dialog at drawing lines.

Enter label names after

contacts and coils

Select whether to input label names or

devices after entering contacts and coils.

Auto Comment Block

Width

Set the width of comment to be added in

ladder block with grid numbers when adding
ladder block.

Auto Indention

Select whether to use the automatic indent

when beginning a new line after entering ST
control syntax such as IF or FOR, and when
displaying template of inline structured text.

Instruction/label name
prediction

Select whether to display listed label names

starting with the input character when a
character is input. (Structured text: label
name, inline structured text: instruction and
label name)

Tabulator Length

Set tab length.

It is not available with inline structured text.

Check duplicated coil

Select whether to check duplicated coils

when entering instruction. Unconverted
ladder is not the object for duplicated coil
check.

Enter label comment and

device comment

Select whether to enter label comment or

device comment continuously after entering
instructions.

Do not display note in

ladder input window when
edit coil instructions.

Select whether to display note in ladder

input window when edit coil instructions.

FB/FUN

Guided

Program
Editor

Device

Description

Reference

(Structured)

(Structured)

(Simple)

21.2 Option Setting List

17

Reference/reflect the
other, when device
comment is not set.

When it is checked, the behavior of each

device will be the one as follows:
(1) Refer the comment (Global/Local)
specified in device comment field.
(2) If device comment does not exist, the
behavior will be the one as follows:
When specified to Global Comment:
Refer Local Comment.
When specified to Local Comment:
Refer Global Comment.

Device comment

Select whether to display the label comment

or the device comment at ladder editor.

Note

Select whether to display the note comment

at ladder editor.

Statement

Select whether to display the statement

comment at ladder editor.

Device Comment Display

Format

Set the display rows and columns for label

comment or device comment.

Display Connection of
Ladder Diagram

Set the number of contacts to be displayed.

Display STL instruction in

contact format
*Only applies to the
FXCPU

Select whether to display STL instruction in

contact format. This is valid for simple
projects (Not using labels) only. Contact
format ladder block display for STL
instruction is not wrap displayed.

Use the Switching Ladder

Edit Mode (Read, Write,
Monitor, Monitor (Write))

Select whether to switch Ladder Edit Mode

(Read, Write, Monitor and Monitor (Write)).
Will be the same operation as the ladder
edit mode of GX Developer.
*Unable to set when security setting is
enabled.

Comment

Ladder
Program
Editor
Ladder
Diagram

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Set a reference/reflection target for device

comment of each program/program file.

Section
9.1.1

19

20

21

Display Instruction Help at Select whether to automatically display

symbol error occurrence
Instruction Help when symbol errors occur.
Open Undefined Label
Registration dialog at
ladder entry

Select whether to open Undefined Label

Registration dialog when labels used at
ladder entry are undefined.

Set initial value to '1' for

Enter HLine/Delete HLine
dialogue.

Select whether to set initial value to '1' when

Enter HLine/Delete HLine dialog is opened.

(Simple)

SFC Diagram

Display device comment on SFC block list.

Step/Transition

Display step/transition comment on SFC

editor.

SFC Edit Area

Set SFC edit area when create SFC. Please

change by "SFC Row Setting" after creating
a SFC.

Tile SFC and Zoom

vertically

Select whether to tile Zoom windows at the

cursor position on SFC when opening SFC
diagram window. Checking this option
changes the "Open Zoom with New
Window" option into unchecked.

Arrange

Select the type of tile for SFC and ZOOM

window.

SFC Display Window

Ratio

Select window display ratio for SFC when

Tile Vertically is selected.

INDEX

SFC

Block List

APPENDIX

Stop at the connection

Select whether to edit line by connection
points (Instruction/Vertical
point (Instruction/Vertical Line) when Enter
Line) when enter or delete
HLine/Delete HLine is executed.
horizontal line.
Comment

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER

Reference/Reflection
Target for Device
Comment

Reference

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL

Comment

Description

PRINTING

Ladder/SFC

Item

SETTING OPTIONS

Tree item

21 - 5

GX Works2

21 SETTING OPTIONS

Tree item

Item

SFC Diagram
Program
Editor

Device Comment Editor

Label Setting Editor

Parameter

Structured Ladder/FBD/ST

Monitor

Ladder

21 - 6

MELSAP-L Label/Device
Display Format

Set display lines for MELSAP-L program.

Jump to start destination

block

Set whether to jump to start destination

block when cursor is moved to block start
step.

Open Zoom with New

Window

Select whether to open a new window for

each Zoom or to change the display in the
fixed window when opening Zoom.
Checking this option changes the "Tile SFC
and Zoom vertically" option into unchecked.

Number of Device
Comment Edit/Display
Characters

Set the number of input and display

characters for device comment.

Automatic copy and

increment when inserting
a row

Select whether to copy the texts in the

upper row after incrementing it when
inserting a row.

Copy data type/comment

items

Select if the data type, comment, and

remark shall be object for auto copy.

Default Length of String

Data Type

Set the default string length for string data

type.

Use user defined

parameter
*Only applies to the
QCPU and LCPU

Display the User Defined Parameter Setting

button and able to set it. Once the user set
parameter is set, it will remain even after
checking off the selection box.

Display Format of
Monitoring Value

Select whether to display monitored value in

Decimal or Hexadecimal.

Monitor buffer memory

and link memory
*Only applies to the
QCPU, LCPU, FX3U(C)

Select whether to monitor buffer memory

and link memory during monitoring. Scan
time of PLC will be lengthened depending
on the setting.

Significant Characters

Set the number of displayable characters to

monitor character-string data.

Display Format of
Monitoring Value

Select the display format of the monitored

value in decimal or hexadecimal.

Monitor buffer memory

and link memory
*Only applies to the
QCPU, LCPU, FX3U(C)

Select whether to monitor buffer memory

and link memory during Ladder-monitoring.
Scan time of PLC will be lengthened
depending on the setting.

FXGP format Ladder

monitor
*Only applies to the
FXCPU

PLS/PLF instruction is displayed in

GP(DOS) and FXGP(WIN) formats. If it is
not checked, it is displayed in GX Developer
form.

Display lines for

monitoring current value

Select whether to display rows of the

current value monitor during Laddermonitoring.

Set automatic registration

destination

Ladder block label or device contained in

cursor will be registered to watch window in
automatic registration destination while
monitoring watch window. (Caution1:Cursor
move will be slow when setting is enabled.
2:Select FB instance for function block.)

SFC
Zoom

Description

Reference

(Simple)

Section 9.1

(Simple)
(Structured)

(Structured)

(Simple)

Section 14.6

21.2 Option Setting List

17

Target All Blocks

Specify watch target block.

Specify the Block

Specify watch target block.

Stop Transition Watch

Monitor when Detected

Select whether to detect other step that

does not transfer while displaying warning
dialog.

Monitor block start with

new window

Select whether to open a corresponding

SFC window to monitor when the active
step transfers to a block start step.

Keep last file selection for

PLC read/write dialog

Select whether to store file selection status

to PLC read/write dialog.

Turn PLC to STOP at time

of PLC write after
executing Rebuild All and
do not execute remote
RUN

Select whether to turn the PLC to STOP at

the time of PLC write and not execute
remote RUN because executing "Rebuild
All" from the menu or icon changes the
device assignment. PLC write cannot be
executed in RUN with this option checked.

When writing to PLC after

a Rebuild All operation,
clear the device ranges
set in the Device/Label
Auto-Assign setting to 0.
*Recommended setting:
checked*3,*4
*Unnecessary for simple
projects (not using labels)
*Only applies to the
QCPU and LCPU

Online Change

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Select watch target program/program file.

(Simple)

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER

Program/Program File
Name

19
Section 12.1

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL

Select whether to display a warning dialog

when detect a step that does not transfer
even if specified time passes while
monitoring.

20
When executing Rebuild All, automatically
assigned devices will be re-evaluated and
devices may change. Previously assigned
devices will retain their values. This setting
automatically clears the device ranges in
the Device/Label Auto-Assign Setting.

Section
12.1.6
(Simple)
(Structured)

PRINTING

PLC Read/Write

Watch Step Not

Transferring within
Watching Time

Reference

21

Execute fall instruction

*Only applies to the
QCPU and LCPU

Select whether to execute fall instruction

(LDF, LDFI, ANDF, ANDFI, ORF, ORFI,
MEF, PLF, FCALLP, EFCALLP) at online
change.

Transfer program cache

memory to program
memory
*Only applies to the
QCPU and LCPU

Select whether to transfer the program

cache memory to program memory when
online change completed.
* Message will be shown to confirm whether
to transfer to or not if it is unchecked.

Execute online change

based on relative step No.
*Ladder Only
*Only applies to the
QCPU and LCPU

Select whether to execute online change

based on relative step No. from pointer.
Even if real step No. is different, online
change is available as long as relative step
No. from the pointer is corresponding.

Execute online change by

Compile
*Enabled when 'Switch
the Ladder Edit Mode' is
set

Select whether to execute Online Program

Change when ladder program or SFC
program is edited and compiled. Will be
enabled when 'Switch Ladder Edit Mode' is
checked. ([Options] -> [Program Editor] ->
[Ladder] -> [Ladder Diagram])

SETTING OPTIONS

SFC*2

Description

A
Section 12.9
APPENDIX

Monitor

Item

INDEX

Tree item

21 - 7

GX Works2

21 SETTING OPTIONS

Tree item

Item

Description

Setting for Writing

Symbolic Information to
PLC
Symbolic Information
Setting for Save
Destination of Symbolic
Information to PLC

Set a PLC drive to store symbolic

information. This setting can be changed
when you connect to PLC. Program
Memory/Device Memory will be selected in
simulation mode if an unusable storage is
specified.

Function Block Call*2

Enables the followings: calling function

block from ladder to ST and from ST to
ladder, using inline ST in ladder and
reducing steps when using function block.
*Value of VAR_IN_OUT type input label
always remains equal to the value of output
label.

Operational Setting

Select whether to use the same label name

in global label and local label. When the
same label is selected, local label will be
given priority.

(Simple)
(Structured)

Build Cross Reference

Information

By creating cross reference information

after compiling, time to search cross
reference can be reduced. Also able to
search cross reference information even
before compiling. In this case, the specified
Find condition will be used as filtering
condition.

Section
10.1.1

Stop Build

Set the number of error and warning to stop

the compile.

Register warning codes to invalidate. The

Disable Warning Message registered warning codes shall not be
displayed in output window.

Compile
Condition

Make sure that the

instruction is not used
beyond the device range
assigned by the

21 - 8

(Simple)
(Structured)

Program Check

Compile

Ladder/SFC

Section
12.9.1

Check when program check is not needed

after Build or Online Program Change. It
can reduce the compile time depending on
the setting.

Basic Setting

Output Result

Set the writing format for symbolic

information. The capacity will be optimized
by high speed mode support version but be
read only by 1.45X or later. The capacity will
not be optimized by compatible mode but be
read by 1.44W or previous.
FXCPU support only high-speed mode.

Reference

label.*2

Select whether to display warnings or not

when ladder/SFC program instruction is
using devices out of device range assigned
by the labels in instruction. Able to detect
instructions that may use devices out of
range and may overwrite other labels value.

(Simple)
(Structured)

(Simple)

21.2 Option Setting List

17
Item
Use lower-case device
Compile
Condition 1

names as labels*5
Function Output Setting

Description

Reference
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Tree item

Select whether to use device names typed

with lower case as labels.
Only the device name outside device range
is valid for Inline Structured Text.
Select whether to connect directly from the
objective function output to other input.

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER

(D)INT_TO_BOOL_E,
(D)WORD_TO_BOOL_E,
TIME_TO_BOOL_E
NOT_E

EQ_E, NE_E, GT_E,

GE_E, LT_E, LE_E

(Structured)

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL

AND_E, OR_E, XOR_E

User Defined Function
with EN/ENO
User Defined Function
Block with EN/ENO

QD75/LD75 Type Positioning

Select whether to assign each system

device to output functions of EN/ENO. Only
functions enabled. (Function block is
disabled.)
Only checked functions at [Generate Code
That Holds the Output of the Following] are
enabled when the output is bit type.

Display Specification of
Positioning Data

Set the range of positioning data to be

displayed.

Select whether to check an operation status

Confirm PLC operation
of programmable controller CPU and allow
status when writing a Data
to be written in the status of STOP.
Display a confirmation
message when writing to
flash ROM

Module*2

Guidance
iQ Works Interaction*2

Select to display a confirmation message

when writing to flash ROM.

20

(Intelligent)

Section
12.1.4

Display intelligent function Select whether to automatically display

module guidance
intelligent function module guidance.

(Intelligent)

Enable an editing of
parameters set in
MELSOFT Navigator

Select whether enabling or not editing

parameters set by MELSOFT Navigator.

Section 6.1

Use MELSOFT Navigator

Option Information

Checking this option enables use of the

option setting of MELSOFT Navigator. The
option setting specified in MELSOFT
Navigator at the time of opening this project
is used.

System Label Setting*6

System Label Name
Setting

Set how to name system labels. When

system labels are entered, system label
names are determined based on this setting
at the time of project save.

PRINTING

Automatically assign each

system device to output of
functions that use EN/
ENO
* Please refer to
appropriate manual if you
want to uncheck the box
because some programs
require caution.

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Compile
Condition 3

Intelligent
Function

19

(Simple)
(Structured)

*1 :

Supported by Japanese version of GX Works2 only.

*2 :

Not supported by FXCPU.

*3 :

This setting is not required when the programmable controller CPU is reset, all device memories including latches
are cleared, all file registers are cleared, and the programmable controller CPU is switched to RUN for writing
programs to programmable controller CPU after compiling programs.

*4 :

0 clear process may take a couple of minutes when a large amount of devices to be cleared exists.

*5 :

Not supported by Simple project.

*6 :

For FXCPU, this item is supported by FX3G, FX3U, and FX3UC only.

21 - 9

APPENDIX

Structured
Ladder/FBD/
ST

Check the box to generate code that holds

the output (SET). When unchecked, the
instruction word output will be treated as a
coil (OUT).

INDEX

Compile

Compile
Condition 2

LIMITAION_E,
MAXIMUM_E,
MINIMUM_E

GX Works2

21 SETTING OPTIONS

Options supported by communication head module and remote I/O module

The following option items are supported by projects for communication head module and remote I/O module.
Project
Parameter
PLC Read/Write
Intelligent Function Module

21 - 10

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

APPENDIX

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

20

PRINTING

List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-2

Simulation Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-21
ASCII Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-55
Precautions on GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer . . . . App-56
Compatibility with Projects Created with Existing Applications . . . . App-71
Compatibility of Data Read from Programmable Controller CPU. . . . App-73
Compatibility with Existing Applications . . . . . . . . . . App-79
Restrictions When Saving Projects in GX Developer Format . . . App-85
Character Strings that cannot be Used for Label Names and Data Names . . . . App-87
Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller . . . . . . . . App-90
Instruction Conversion Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App-110
Functions Added Since Previous Versions . . . . . . .App-112
Procedure to Use GX Works2 Unsupported Programmable Controller Type . App-121
Precautions on Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-123
USB driver installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App-126
Precautions When Using English Version of GX Works2 . . . . App-130
Precautions for Selecting Project Language . . . . . . . . . . . . App-136

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

Appendix 1
Appendix 2
Appendix 3
Appendix 4
Appendix 5
Appendix 6
Appendix 7
Appendix 8
Appendix 9
Appendix 10
Appendix 11
Appendix 12
Appendix 13
Appendix 14
Appendix 15
Appendix 16
Appendix 17

App - 1

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 1

List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section shows the list of toolbars and shortcut keys that can be used for GX Works2.
For (Simple), (Structured), and (Intelligent) indicated in the Reference column, refer to the following manuals
respectively:
(Simple).................GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
(Structured) ...........GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
(Intelligent) ............GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)

Appendix 1.1 Common toolbars and shortcut keys

The following explains the toolbars that are available regardless of the editing target and the
corresponding shortcut keys.

"Standard" toolbar icons

The following table shows the "Standard" toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys.
Toolbar
icon

App - 2

Shortcut key

Corresponding menu

Description

Reference

New

Create a new project.

Section
4.2.1

Open

Open an existing project.

Section
4.2.2

Save

Save the project.

Section
4.2.3

GX Works2 Help

Display the GX Works2 Help screen.

Find Help for GX Works2

Search for help items with an entered

keyword on the GX Works2 Help screen.

Appendix 1.1 Common toolbars and shortcut keys

Section
3.4.1

Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys

Description

Reference

Cut

Cut the selected data.

Copy

Copy the selected data.

Paste

Paste the cut/copied data at the cursor

position.

Undo

Cancel the previous operation.

Redo

Perform the operation canceled by

[Undo].

Find Device

Search for a device.

Find Instruction

Search for an instruction.

Find Contact or Coil

Search for a contact or coil

corresponding to a specified device.

Write to PLC

Write data to the programmable

controller CPU.

Read from PLC

Read data from the programmable

controller CPU.

Start Monitoring (All

Windows)

Start monitoring all windows being

opened.

Stop Monitoring (All

Windows)

Stop monitoring all windows being

opened.

Start Monitoring

Start monitoring the window being

operated.

Stop Monitoring

Stop monitoring the window being

operated.

Device/Buffer Memory
Batch Monitor

Batch monitor device/buffer memories.

Section 14.3

Modify Value

For ladder and SFC (Zoom) programs,

change the ON/OFF and value of a
device/label used in a program.

Section 16.1

Build

Compile/convert a program being edited.

Online Program Change

Compile/convert a program and write it

to the programmable controller CPU.

Rebuild All

Compile/convert all programs in a

project.

Start/Stop Simulation

Start/stop simulation.

+
+

Section
10.3.2

Section 12.1

19

20
Section 14.2

Section 5.4

21

Section 15.2
APPENDIX

Section
10.3.1

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Corresponding menu

PRINTING

Shortcut key

INDEX

Toolbar
icon

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

The following table shows the "Program Common" toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

"Program Common" toolbar icons

SETTING OPTIONS

Appendix 1.1 Common toolbars and shortcut keys

App - 3

GX Works2

APPENDIX

"Docking Window" toolbar icons

The following table shows the "Docking Window" toolbar icons.

Toolbar
icon

Shortcut key

Corresponding menu

Description

Reference
Section
3.2.5

Navigation Window

Display/hide the Navigation window.

Function Block Selection

Window

Display/hide the Function Block

Selection window.

Output window

Display/hide the Output window.

Cross Reference

Display/hide the Cross Reference

window.

Section 10.1

Device List

Display/hide the Device List window.

Section 10.2

Watch

Display/hide the Watch window.

Section 14.6

Intelligent Function Module Display/hide the Intelligent Function

Monitor
Module Monitor window.

Intelligent Function Module Display/hide the Intelligent Function

Guidance
Module Guidance window.

Find/Replace

Display/hide the Find/Replace window.

(Simple)
(Structured)

(Intelligent)

Section 10.3

"Intelligent Function Module" toolbar icons

The following table shows the "Intelligent Function Module" toolbar icons.
Toolbar
icon

App - 4

Shortcut key

Corresponding menu

Description

QD75/LD75 Positioning
Module Wave Trace

Execute a wave trace of the QD75/LD75

positioning module.

QD75/LD75 Positioning
Module Location Trace

Execute a location trace of the QD75/

LD75 positioning module.

Serial Communication
Module Circuit Trace

Execute a circuit trace of the serial

communication module.

QD75/LD75 Positioning
Module Test Monitor

Execute a positioning monitor of the

QD75/LD75 positioning module.

QD75/LD75 Positioning
Module Test

Execute a positioning test of the QD75/

LD75 positioning module.

Offset/Gain Setting of
Temperature Input Module

Execute offset/gain setting of the

temperature input module.

Offset/Gain Setting of
Analog Module

Execute offset/gain setting of the analog

module.

Appendix 1.1 Common toolbars and shortcut keys

Reference

(Intelligent)

Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys

Shortcut key

Corresponding menu

Description

Reference

Stop

Stop the step execution.

Section
16.6.9

Cancel

Cancel the step execution.

Section
16.6.7

Break Execution

Execute the break execution.

Section
16.6.6

Step Execution

Execute the step execution.

Section
16.6.5

Execution Option

Display the "Execution Option" screen of

the step execution.

Section
16.6.8

Set/Cancel Break Point

Set a break point at the cursor position,

or cancel the set break point.

Enable/Disable Break
Point

Enable/disable the break point at the

cursor position.

Cancel All Break Points

Cancel all break points.

Break Point Window

Display the Break Point window.

Cancel All Break Devices

Cancel all break devices.

Break Device Window

Display the Break Device window.

Set/Cancel Skip Range

Set a skip range, or cancel the set skip

range.

Enable/Disable Skip
Range

Enable/disable the skip range at the

cursor position.

Cancel All Skip Ranges

Cancel all skip ranges.

Skip Range Window

Display the Skip Range window.

Section
16.6.2

Section
16.6.3

Section
16.6.4

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Toolbar
icon

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

The following table shows the "Debug Function" toolbar icons.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

"Debug Function" toolbar icons

20

PRINTING

Other shortcut keys

The following table shows other shortcut keys that are available regardless of the editing target.
Toolbar
icon

Shortcut key

Corresponding menu

Description

Reference

Rename

Change the name of the selected data or

library in the Navigation window.

Section
4.3.3

Delete

Delete the selected data.

Section
4.3.4

Copy

Copy data in the project.

Paste

Paste the copied data to a folder.

Add New Module

Add the intelligent function module data

to the project being edited.

(Intelligent)

Exit

Close the project being edited and exits

GX Works2.

Section 3.1

Section
4.3.2

Cross Reference

Create the cross reference information.

Section 10.1

Device List

Display the device list.

Section 10.2

+
+

+
/
+

Move to the next cross reference

information.

Move to the previous cross reference

information.

Move focus between the Cross

Reference window and work windows.

Appendix 1.1 Common toolbars and shortcut keys

INDEX

A
APPENDIX

SETTING OPTIONS

21

Section 10.1

App - 5

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Toolbar
icon

Shortcut key

Corresponding menu

Description

Reference

Find Device

Search for a device/label in the program.

Section
10.3.1

Find String

Search for a string.

Section
10.3.3

Replace Device

Replace a device/label in the program.

Section
10.3.1

Replace String

Replace a string.

Section
10.3.3

Search for an item in the downward

direction.

Search for an item in the upward

direction.

+
+

Start Watching

Start monitoring the current values of

registered devices/labels and intelligent
function module.

Stop Watching

Stop monitoring the current values of

registered devices/labels and intelligent
function module.

Register Device Test with

Execution Condition

Register the device test with execution

condition.

Section 10.3

Section 14.6

Section 16.3

Close the window displayed on the

uppermost position.

Move to the next uppermost window.

Appendix 1.2 "Navigation Window" toolbar icons

The following table shows the "Navigation Window" toolbar icons.
Toolbar
icon

Shortcut key

Description

Reference
Section
4.3.1

Add New Data

Add data to the project.

Copy

Copy selected data.

Paste

Paste copied data.

Property

Display a property of the selected data.

Refresh

Update the display content of the Navigation

window.

Project Property

Display a property of the open project.

Expand All Uncompiled

Data

Expand all uncompiled data in the tree on the

Project view and the User Library view.

Collapse All

Collapse all data in the tree on the Project view

and the User Library view

App - 6

Corresponding menu

Appendix 1.2 "Navigation Window" toolbar icons

Section
4.3.2
Section
4.3.5

Section
3.2.5

Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys

The following explains the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for setting labels.

"Label" toolbar icons

The following table shows the "Label" toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys.
Description

New Declaration (Before)

Add a row above the cursor position.

New Declaration (After)

Add a row below the cursor position.

Delete Row

Delete the row at the cursor position.

Read from CSV File

Read label settings from the CSV file.

Write to CSV File

Write label settings to the CSV file.

Confirm Update of System

Label Database

Reflect system label information

changed in another project on global
labels.

Import System Label

Import system label information and

reflect it on global labels.

Register Device Name of

System Label

Register a selected global label as a

system label.

Disable System Label

Relation

Disable the relation between a selected

global label and a system label.

Corresponding menu

Reference

19

(Simple)
(Structured)

20

21

Other shortcut keys

The following table shows other shortcut keys for setting labels.
Toolbar
icon

Shortcut key
+

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Shortcut key

PRINTING

Toolbar
icon

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

Corresponding menu
Select All

Description

Reference

Select all rows.

Display only the first line of comment and

remark of the selected line.

(Simple)
(Structured)

A
APPENDIX

Display all lines of comment and remark

of the selected line.

SETTING OPTIONS

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Appendix 1.3 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting labels

INDEX

Appendix 1.3 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting labels

App - 7

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 1.4 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting device
memory
The following explains the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for setting device
memory.

"Device Memory" toolbar icons

The following table shows the "Device Memory" toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys.
Toolbar
icon

Shortcut key

Description

Reference

Display Mode/Binary

Change display format to binary.

Display Mode/Octal

Change display format to octal.

Display Mode/Decimal

Change display format to decimal.

Display Mode/
Hexadecimal

Change display format to hexadecimal.

Display Mode/Float

Change display format to real numbers.

Display Mode/String

Change display format to string.

Display Mode/String
(ASCII only)

Change display format to ASCII.

Register/16-bit

Display data in units of words.

Register/32-bit

Display data in units of double words.

Register/64-bit

Display data in units of 64 bits.

Input Device

Enter a device.

Section
7.2.2

FILL

Set the same value to continuous

devices.

Section
7.2.4

Read Device Memory from Read data in device memory from a

PLC
programmable controller CPU.

Write Device Memory to

PLC

Write data in device memory to a

programmable controller CPU.

Read from Excel File

Read data from an Excel file.

Write to Excel File

Write data to an Excel file.

Corresponding menu

Section
7.2.5

Section
7.4.1

Section
7.4.2

Other shortcut key

The following table shows other shortcut key for setting device memory.
Toolbar
icon

App - 8

Shortcut key

Corresponding menu
Insert Row

Description
Insert a row at the cursor position.

Appendix 1.4 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting device memory

Reference
Section 7.2

Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys

Next Unmatch

Move to the next mismatched data.

Previous Unmatch

Move to the previous mismatched data.

Return to Result List

Display the <<Verify Result List>>.

Close Detail Result

Close the <<Detail Verify Result>> being

displayed.

Close All Detail Result

Close all <<Detail Verify Result>>.

Write to CSV File

Write verification result to a CSV file.

+
+
+

Reference

Section
4.2.7
Section 12.2

19

Appendix 1.6 Toolbar icons for executing sampling trace

20

The following table shows the toolbar icons for executing sampling trace.
Shortcut key

Corresponding menu

Description

Trace Setting

Display the Trace Setting screen.

Start Trace

Start sampling trace. To start sampling

trace, the trace ready signal (SM800)
must be ON.

Stop Trace

Stop sampling trace.

Display Trace Buffer

Condition

Display the Trace Data Storage Status

screen.

Monitor Status

Display the current sampling trace status

Execution Failed

Indicate the sampling trace stop status,

or the status sampling trace has not
started.

Before Trigger

Indicate the status sampling trace is

executed but a trigger is not generated.

After Trigger

Indicate the status sampling trace is

executed and a trigger is generated.

Stop

Indicate the status sampling trace is

interrupted.

Completion

Indicate the status sampling trace has

ended normally by acquiring trace data
up to the specified total number of
samplings after generation of a trigger.

Error

Indicate the status a sampling trace error

occurred during sampling trace.

Buffer Status

Displayed when the trace data have

been acquired up to the specified total
number of samplings.

Trigger Occurrence

Displayed when a trigger is generated

during sampling trace.

Appendix 1.5 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for verification result

Reference
Section
16.4.2

Section
16.4.4

21

INDEX

Toolbar
icon

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Description

PRINTING

Corresponding menu

SETTING OPTIONS

Shortcut key

APPENDIX

Toolbar
icon

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

The following table shows the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for the verification
result.

17

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Appendix 1.5 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for verification result

App - 9

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Toolbar
icon

Shortcut key

Corresponding menu

Zoom Out Timing Chart

Zoom In Timing Chart

Zoom Out Trend Graph

Zoom In Trend Graph

Switch Chart/Detail

Description

Reference

Zoom the scale of timing chart

Zoom the scale of trend graph

Section
16.4.4

Switch the trace result display on the

Sampling Trace screen between the
timing chart (graph) and the detailed
data (value).

Appendix 1.7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors
The following explains the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for program editors.

"Ladder" toolbar icons and shortcut keys

The following table shows the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for the ladder editor.
Toolbar
icon

Shortcut key

Description

Open Contact

Insert an open contact at the cursor

position.

Open Branch

Insert an open contact branch at the

cursor position.

Close Contact

Insert a closed contact at the cursor

position.

Close Branch

Insert a closed contact branch at the

cursor position.

Coil

Insert a coil at the cursor position.

Application Instruction

Insert an application instruction at the

cursor position.

Horizontal Line

Insert a horizontal line at the cursor

position.

Vertical Line

Insert a vertical line at the cursor

position.

Delete Horizontal Line

Delete the horizontal line at the cursor

position.

Delete Vertical Line

Delete the vertical line at the cursor

position.

Rising Pulse

Insert a rising pulse at the cursor

position.

Falling Pulse

Insert a falling pulse at the cursor

position.

Rising Pulse Branch

Insert a rising pulse branch at the cursor

position.

Falling Pulse Branch

Insert a falling pulse branch at the cursor

position.

App - 10

Corresponding menu

Rising Pulse Close

Insert a rising pulse close at the cursor

position.

Falling Pulse Close

Insert a falling pulse close at the cursor

position.

Appendix 1.7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors

Reference

(Simple)

Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys

Insert a rising pulse close branch at the

cursor position.

Falling Pulse Close Branch

Insert a falling pulse close branch at the

cursor position.

Operation Result Rising

Pulse

Insert an operation result rising pulse at

the cursor position.

Operation Result Falling

Pulse

Insert an operation result falling pulse at

the cursor position.

Invert Operation Results

Insert an operation result inversion at the

cursor position.

Edit Line

Input a line at the cursor position.

Delete Line

Delete the line at the cursor position.

Insert Inline Structured

Text Box

Insert an inline structured text box.

Device Comment

Edit device comments.

Statement

Edit statements.

Note

Edit notes.

Statement/Note Batch Edit

Batch-edit statements/notes.

Line Statement List

Display the list of line statements used in

the program.

Display Template

Insert a template corresponds to the

instruction/function/control syntax.

Mark Template (Left)

Set an argument of the template in the

selected status from the left by selecting
the menu each time.

Mark Template (Right)

Set an argument of the template in the

selected status from the right by
selecting the menu each time.

Read Mode

Switch the mode of the open window to

"Read Mode".

Write Mode

Switch the mode of the open window to

"Write Mode".

Monitor Mode

Switch the mode of the open window to

"Monitor Mode" during monitoring.

Monitor (Write Mode)

Switch the mode of the open window to

"Monitor (Write Mode)" during
monitoring.

Device Display

Display devices assigned by

compilation.

Zoom

Change the display magnification ratio of

the ladder.

Insert Row

Insert a row at the cursor position.

Delete Row

Delete the row at the cursor position.

Insert Column

Insert a column at the cursor position.

Delete Column

Delete the column at the cursor position.

+
+

+
+

+
+

+
+

Connect Line to Right-Side Connect a horizontal line to the ladder

Symbol
symbol at the right of the cursor position.

Connect Line to Left-Side

Symbol

Connect a horizontal line to the ladder

symbol at the left of the cursor position.

Enter/Delete HLine
Rightward

Enter/delete a line at the right of the

cursor position.

Enter/Delete HLine
Leftward

Enter/delete a line at the left of the

cursor position.

Appendix 1.7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors

18
(Simple)

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Rising Pulse Close Branch

19
Section
9.2.2

(Simple)

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

20

(Structured)

PRINTING

Reference

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Description

(Simple)

APPENDIX

Corresponding menu

INDEX

Shortcut key

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17
Toolbar
icon

App - 11

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Toolbar
icon

Shortcut key

Corresponding menu

Reference

Enter/Delete VLine
Downward

Enter/delete a line at the downward of

the cursor position.

Enter/Delete VLine
Upward

Enter/delete a line at the upward of the

cursor position.

Switch Open/Close
Contact

Switch a open contact to closed contact,

and vice versa.

Switch Statement/Note
Type

Change the type of a statement/note.

Instruction Partial Edit

Open the Enter Symbol screen in which

the first argument is in the selected
status.

Select a device/label on the Enter

Symbol screen. Switch the device/label

Increment/decrement a device/label on
the Enter Symbol screen.

Display options of instruction/label on the

Enter Symbol screen.

Move the cursor on the editing screen

while the Enter Symbol screen is
displayed.

Jump

+
+

to be selected using the

button.

Display the specified row.

Jump to Next Ladder Block Jump a cursor from the current position
Start
to the start of the next ladder block.

Jump to Previous Ladder

Block Start

Jump a cursor from the current position

to the start of the previous ladder block.

Comment

Display device comments.

Statement

Display statements.

Note

Display notes.

Non-Display Ladder Block

Hide a ladder block.

Display Ladder Block

Display hidden a ladder block.

Bigger

Change the display size of text larger on

the editing screen.

Smaller

Change the display size of text smaller

on the editing screen.

Tile FB Horizontally

Tile the ladder editor and the function

block program editor horizontally.

Back to Zoom SFC Block

Open the SFC diagram corresponds to

the program on the Zoom editor window.

Moves up/down/left/right

Move a cursor toward up/down/left/right

of the SFC diagram.

Open Instruction Help

Display the Instruction Help screen.

+ turn mouse scroll

wheel upward

+ turn mouse scroll

wheel downward
+

+
+

/
+

App - 12

Description

Instruction Help
+

(Simple)

Display the Find screen.

Display details of instructions.

Section
3.4.2

Enter an assignment operator (:=) when

(Structured)
editing the inline structured text program.

Appendix 1.7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors

Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys

The following table shows the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for the ST editor.

List Operands

Display the Label Registration/Selection

screen.

Display Template

Insert a template corresponds to the

instruction/function/control syntax.

Mark Template (Left)

Set an argument of the template in the

selected status from the left by selecting
the menu each time.

Mark Template (Right)

Set an argument of the template in the

selected status from the right by
selecting the menu each time.

Toggle Bookmark

Set a bookmark at the cursor line. If a

bookmark has already been set, delete
the set bookmark.

Bookmark List

Jump to the specified bookmark from the

bookmark list.

Next Bookmark

Display the next bookmark position.

Previous Bookmark

Display the previous bookmark position.

Delete All Bookmarks

Delete all bookmarks.

+
+

+
+ Num

*1

Increase Zoom

Zoom in the screen one level.

+ Num

*1

Decrease Zoom

Zoom out the screen one level.

Jump

Jump to the specified line.

Zoom Header/Body
Header

Open the label setting screen of the

selected POU.

Copy

Copy the selected data.

Cut

Cut the selected data.

Paste

Paste the cut/copied data at the cursor

position.

Instruction Help

Display details of instructions.

Enter an assignment operator (:=) when

editing the inline structured text program.

Reference

18

19

(Structured)

20

21

Section
3.4.2
(Structured)

A
APPENDIX

'Num' indicates keys in the numeric keypad.

INDEX

*1 :

Description

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Corresponding menu

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Shortcut key

PRINTING

Toolbar
icon

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

"ST" toolbar icons and shortcut keys

SETTING OPTIONS

Appendix 1.7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors

App - 13

GX Works2

APPENDIX

"Structured Ladder/FBD" toolbar icons and shortcut keys

The following table shows the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for the structured
ladder/FBD editor.
Toolbar
icon

Shortcut key

Description

Select Mode

Change the input format for positioning

contacts/coils.

Guided Mode/Guided
Editing

Change the input format for entry with

keyboard.

Interconnect Mode

Change the input mode for drawing

lines.

Guided Mode/Auto
Comment

Add a comment entry field at the start of

the ladder block added in Guided editing.

Insert Row

Insert a row in the ladder being edited.

Insert Column

Insert a column in the ladder being

edited.

+
+

+
+

New Ladder Block Before

Insert a new ladder block in front of the

ladder block being edited.

New Ladder Block After

Insert a new ladder block in back of the

ladder block being edited.

Input Instruction

Display the Input Instruction screen.

Left Power Rail

Display/hide the left power rail.

Open Contact

Insert an open contact at the cursor

position.

Close Contact

Insert a closed contact at the cursor

position.

Open Branch

Insert an open contact branch at the

cursor position.

Close Branch

Insert a closed contact branch at the

cursor position.

Vertical Line Segment

Insert a vertical line at the cursor

position.

Horizontal Line Segment

Insert a horizontal line at the cursor

position.

Coil

Insert a coil at the cursor position.

Function Block Selection

Window

Display the Function Block Selection

window.

Input Label

Insert an input variable at the cursor

position.

Output Label

Insert an output variable at the cursor

position.

Rising Pulse

Insert a rising pulse at the cursor

position.

Falling Pulse

Insert a falling pulse at the cursor

position.

Rising Pulse Close

Insert a rising pulse close at the cursor

position.

Falling Pulse Close

Insert a falling pulse close at the cursor

position.

Jump

Insert a jump at the cursor position.

Return

Insert a return at the cursor position.

Comment

Insert a comment entry field.

Ladder Block Label

Display the Ladder Block screen.

List Operands

Display the Label Registration/Selection

screen.

Increment Pins

Increment the number of arguments of

functions and function blocks.

Delete Pins

Delete the number of arguments of

functions and function blocks.

App - 14

Corresponding menu

Appendix 1.7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors

Reference

(Structured)

Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys

Increase Zoom

Zoom in the screen one level.

+ Num

*1

Decrease Zoom

Zoom out the screen one level.

Narrow and widen the width of ladder

block in the guided mode.

Signal Configuration/
Configure

Set the type of contact and coil.

Signal Configuration/
Toggle

Change the type of contact and coil in

the order shown below:
Contact: Open Contact Close
Contact
Coil: Normal Negation Set
Reset

Jump

Jump to the specified ladder block

number.

Change Label-DeviceAddress Mode

Switch the display format in order (label,

device address).

Change Label-Comment
Mode

Switch the display between label and

comment.

Zoom Header/Body/
Header

Open the label setting screen for the

selected POU.

Copy

Copy the selected data.

Cut

Cut the selected data.

Paste

Paste the cut/copied data at the cursor

position.

Auto Connect

Connect the start and end points to draw

a line.

Guided Mode
/Overwrite, Insert Mode

Switch the input mode between

Overwrite/Insert in the guided mode.

Guided Mode/Line Mode

Change the input mode for drawing lines

in Guided editing.

Instruction Help

Display details of instructions.

+
+
+

(Structured)

20

21
Section
3.4.2

'Num' indicates keys in the numeric keypad.

A
APPENDIX

19

INDEX

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

PRINTING

Reference

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

*1

*1 :

Description

+ Num

Corresponding menu

SETTING OPTIONS

Shortcut key

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17
Toolbar
icon

Appendix 1.7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors

App - 15

GX Works2

APPENDIX

"SFC" toolbar icons and shortcut keys

The following table shows the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for the SFC editor.
Toolbar
icon

Shortcut key

Description

[STEP] New Step

Insert

at the cursor position.

[B] Block Start Step (with

END check)

Insert

at the cursor position.

[BS] Block Start Step

(without END check)

Insert

at the cursor position.

[JUMP] Jump

Insert

at the cursor position.

[END] END Step

Insert

at the cursor position.

[DUMMY] Dummy Step

Insert

at the cursor position.

[TR] Transition

Insert

at the cursor position.

[--D] Selection Divergence

Insert a selection divergence.

[==D] Simultaneous
Divergence

Insert a simultaneous divergence.

[--C] Selection
Convergence

Insert a selection convergence.

[==C] Simultaneous
Convergence

Insert a simultaneous convergence.

[|] Vertical Line

Insert a vertical line.

No Attribute

Set the step attribute to No Attribute.

Stored Coil

Set the step attribute to Stored Coil.

Stored Operation (without

Transition Check)

Set the step attribute to Stored Operation

(SE).

Stored Operation (with

Transition Check)

Set the step attribute to Stored Operation

(ST).

Reset

Reset the step attribute.

Vertical Line (Draw Line)

Insert

at the cursor position.

Selection Divergence
(Draw Line)

Insert

at the cursor position.

Simultaneous Divergence
(Draw Line)

Insert

at the cursor position.

Selection Convergence
(Draw Line)

Insert

at the cursor position.

Simultaneous
Convergence (Draw Line)

Insert

at the cursor position.

Delete Line

Delete a line at the cursor position.

SFC Step/Transition
Comment

Edit the SFC step/transition comments.

Sort SFC Step No.

Sort the SFC block step numbers.

SFC All Block Batch

Monitoring

Batch monitor all blocks in the SFC

program.

App - 16

Corresponding menu

Appendix 1.7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors

Reference

(Simple)

Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys

Read Mode

Switch the mode of the open window to

"Read Mode".

Write Mode

Switch the mode of the open window to

"Write Mode".

Monitor Mode

Switch the mode of the open window to

"Monitor Mode" during monitoring.

Monitor (Write Mode)

Switch the mode of the open window to

"Monitor (Write Mode)" during
monitoring.

Zoom

Change the display magnification ratio of

the SFC diagram.

Insert Row

Insert a row at the cursor position.

Delete Row

Delete a row at the cursor position.

Insert Column

Insert a column at the cursor position.

Delete Column

Delete a column at the cursor position.

Jump

Move a cursor to the SFC step number/

transition number in the specified block.

Find Jump Step

Move a cursor to the step of the jump

source.

Numeric key
+
+
/
double-click

Display the SFC step/transition

comments.

Open Zoom/Start
Destination Block

Display the Zoom editor window or the

start destination block.

+
+

19

(Simple)

20

Move a cursor to the SFC step number/

transition number.

SFC Step/Transition
Comment

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Scroll the screen to display active steps

automatically when they are out of the
screen during monitoring.

PRINTING

SFC Auto Scroll

Reference

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Description

Display the start destination block.

Back to Start SFC Block

Display the start source block.

Program Display

Display programs on the SFC diagram

when editing in MELSAP-L.

SFC block list shortcut keys

The following table shows the shortcut keys for the SFC block list.

Shortcut key
+
Numeric key
+

Corresponding menu

Description

Reference

Jump to the specified block number/data

name.

Jump

SFC Block List Comment

Jump to the selected block number.

(Simple)

Display comments of the SFC block list.

INDEX

Toolbar
icon

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Corresponding menu

APPENDIX

Shortcut key

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17
Toolbar
icon

Appendix 1.7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors

App - 17

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Other shortcut keys

The following table shows other shortcut keys for program editors.
Toolbar
icon

Description

Move the cursor in the arrow direction.

Scroll up the screen.

Scroll down the screen.

Scroll the screen to the left.

Scroll the screen to the right.

Move the cursor to its leftmost position in

the row.

Move the cursor to its rightmost position

in the row.

Move the cursor to the start of the

program.

Move the cursor to the end of the

program.

Set a range.

Select the range from the current

position up to the start of the program.

Select the range from the current

position down to the end of the program.

Delete the selected target.

App - 18

Corresponding
menu

Shortcut key

/
+
+

Appendix 1.7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors

Reference

(Structured)

Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys

Reference

New

Create a new I/O system setting.

Section
19.8.1

Open

Open an existing I/O system setting.

Section
19.8.2

Save

Save the I/O system setting.

Cut

Cut the selected data.

18

19
Section
19.4.2

Copy

Copy the selected data.

Paste

Paste the cut/copied data at the cursor

position.

Execute I/O System

Setting

Execute the I/O system setting function

and starts simulation.

Section
19.6.1

Disable I/O System Setting

Disable the execution of the I/O system

setting function.

Section
19.6.2

Start Monitoring

Start monitoring the I/O System Setting

screen.

Stop Monitoring

Stop monitoring the I/O System Setting

screen.

Exit I/O System Settings

Exit the I/O system setting.

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Description

20

Section
19.7.1

PRINTING

Corresponding menu

SETTING OPTIONS

21

A
APPENDIX

Shortcut key

INDEX

Toolbar
icon

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

The following table shows the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for the I/O system
setting function.

17

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Appendix 1.8 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for I/O system setting
function

Appendix 1.8 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for I/O system setting function

App - 19

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 1.9 Shortcut keys for operating intelligent function module

The following explains the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for editing intelligent
function module data.

Toolbar icons for positioning monitor function

The following table shows the toolbar icons for the positioning monitor function.
Toolbar
icon

Shortcut key

Corresponding menu

Monitor the operating status of

positioning module.

Monitor the start history.

Monitor the error history.

Monitor the warning history.

Start the positioning monitor.

Stop the positioning monitor.

Description

Reference

(Intelligent)

Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for predefined protocol support function

The following table shows the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for the predefined
protocol support function.
Toolbar
icon

Shortcut key

Description

New

Create a new communication protocol.

Open

Open an existing communication

protocol.

Save

Save the protocol information.

Copy

Copy the selected data.

Paste

Paste the cut/copied data at the cursor

position.

Print

Print the protocol information.

Write to Module

Write data to the module.

Read from Module

Read data from the module.

App - 20

Corresponding menu

Appendix 1.9 Shortcut keys for operating intelligent function module

Reference

(Intelligent)

Appendix 2 Simulation Function

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head
FX

FX

The simulation function debugs sequence programs on the virtual programmable controller in the personal
computer.
The created sequence programs can be debugged without connecting the personal computer to the
programmable controller CPU.
This section explains the simulation function and the restrictions.

Appendix 2.1 Supported devices

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Simulation Function

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Appendix 2

This section explains the devices supported by the simulation function.

However, some devices may be restricted or not supported. No processing is performed for
unsupported devices (NOP processing).
Unsupported devices used in a program and their used locations can be checked by selecting [Debug]
[Instructions Unsupported by Simulation]. (
Section 15.3)
Device list (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

20

Devices SM/SD1000 and later are not supported by the simulation function.
: Supported : Not supported : Irrelevant

Input (X)

Actual outputs are invalid.

Internal relay (M)

SETTING OPTIONS

Bit device Annunciator (F)

*1

Step relay (S)

Link special relay (SB)

Link relay (B)

Applicable (within
29k words)

Timer (T)*1*2

Word
device

21

*1

Latch relay (L)

Internal user
device

Remarks
Actual inputs are invalid.

Output (Y)

Edge relay (V)

Support

PRINTING

Device name

No operation is performed in actual time.

The high-speed timer can be set in units of 0.1ms
(by parameter). (For Universal model QCPU and
LCPU, in units of 0.01ms)

Retentive timer (ST)

No operation is performed in actual time.

The high-speed retentive timer can be set in units
of 0.1ms (by parameter). (For Universal model
QCPU and LCPU, in units of 0.01ms)

Counter (C)*2

Data register (D) *1

Link register (W)

Link special register (SW)

*2

APPENDIX

Type

INDEX

Category

Range set by
parameter

Appendix 2.1 Supported devices

App - 21

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Category

Type

Bit device
Internal system
device

Bit device

Range set by
parameter

Support

Remarks

Function input (FX)

Function output (FY)

Special relay (SM)

Word
device

Link direct
device

Device name

For the supported special relays, refer to the

Special relay list.

Not applicable

Function register (FD)

Special register (SD)

For the supported special registers, refer to the

Special register list.

Link input (Jn\X)

Link output (Jn\Y)

Link relay (Jn\B)

Not applicable

Word
device

Link register (Jn\W)

Link special register (Jn\SW)

Intelligent
function
module device

Word
device

Intelligent function module

device (Un\G)

Not applicable

I/O assignment setting in PLC parameter is

required.

Index register

Word
device

Index register (Z)

Not applicable

File register

Word
device

File register (ZR)

0 to 1017k points
(in units of 1k)

Link special relay (Jn\SB)

Nesting

Pointer

Bit device

Nesting (N)
Pointer (P)

Not applicable
Not applicable

SFC transition device (TR)

Network number specifying

device (J)

Interrupt pointer (I)

SFC block device (BL)

I/O number specifying device

(U)

Others

File register setting in PLC parameter is required.

For Universal model QCPU and LCPU, 0 to
4086k points

Macro instruction argument

device (VD)

Not applicable

Memory for reading/writing data among CPU

modules in a multiple CPU system.
Enabled only when multiple CPU settings are
made.
Not supported by LCPU.

CPU shared memory (Un\G)

Constant

Decimal constant

K-2147483648 to
2147483647

Hexadecimal constant

H0 to FFFFFFFF

E1.17550-38 to
E3.40282+38

Real constant

String constant

E2.22507-308 to
E1.79770+308
"ABC", "123"

Up to 32 characters per instruction

*1 :

Devices that can be used for local devices

*2 :

Timer/Retentive timer/Counter: Contact and coil are bit devices and current value is a word device.

App - 22

Appendix 2.1 Supported devices

Appendix 2 Simulation Function

: Supported : Not supported : Irrelevant

Device name

Purpose

Support

Input (X)

Octal number. Actual inputs are invalid.

Output (Y)

Octal number. Actual outputs are invalid.

General type*1
(changeable)

State (S)

General type
(fixed)

Latched type*3
(fixed)

Special type

Initial state*1

Initial state (latched)

General type

*1

*2

Latched type

*3

Latched type
100ms

10ms

1ms*3

Retentive type for 100ms*3

1ms

*3

16-bit up-counter

16-bit general type*1

SETTING OPTIONS

16-bit latched type

*2

16-bit latched type

*3

*1

32-bit bidirectional counter

32-bit bidirectional counter*2

High-speed counter

Word
device

Data register (D)

(32 bits when
used in pairs)

21

*1

16-bit up-counter*2
Counter (C)

20

100ms/10ms
Retentive type for

19

Annunciator type*3

Timer (T)

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Bit device

PRINTING

Auxiliary relay (M)

Latched
(changeable)

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

type*2

Internal user
device

Remarks

16-bit special type

File type*1

RAM file type

16-bit latched type

(extension register [R])

16-bit latched type

(extension file register [ER])

APPENDIX

Type

Buffer memory

16-bit index type

INDEX

Category

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Device list (FXCPU)

Appendix 2.1 Supported devices

App - 23

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Category

Type

Device name

Purpose

Pointer

Remarks

Master control

JUMP or CALL branch

Nesting (N)
Pointer

Support

Interrupt pointer

Interruption
16 bits

Decimal constant
Hexadecimal constant

32 bits

16 bits

32 bits

Real number constant

Character string constant

*1 :

Non-latched area. It can be changed to the latched area by parameter setting.

*2 :

Latched area. It can be changed to the non-latched area by parameter setting.

*3 :

Fixed latched area. The characteristics of latch cannot be changed.

App - 24

Appendix 2.1 Supported devices

Appendix 2 Simulation Function

Name

Description

No.

Name

Description
OFF: Hold step output
turned OFF (cleared)
ON: Hold step output held

SM0

Diagnostic error

OFF: No error
ON: Error

SM327

Output during end step

execution

SM1

Self-diagnostic error

OFF: No self-diagnostic
error
ON: Self-diagnostic error

SM328

OFF: Clear processing is

Clear processing mode
performed.
when end step is reached ON: Clear processing is not
performed.

SM5

Error common
information

OFF: No error common

information
ON: Error common
information

SM400

Always ON

SM16

Error individual
information

OFF: No error individual

information
ON: Error individual
information

SM401

Always OFF

ON
OFF

SM50

Error reset

OFFON: Error reset

SM402

After RUN, ON for only 1

scan

ON
OFF

SM56

Operation error

OFF: Normal
ON: Operation error

SM403

After RUN, OFF for only

1 scan

ON

Low speed execution

type program After RUN,
OFF for 1 scan only

ON

SM405

1 scan

OFF

20

1 scan

OFF

SM165

Program memory batch

transfer execution status

OFF: Completed
ON: Not being executed or
not completed

SM409*1

0.01 second clock

SM202

LED OFF command

OFFON: LED OFF

SM410*1

0.1 second clock

0.05 sec

0.05 sec

SM203

STOP contact

STOP status

SM411*1

0.2 second clock

0.1 sec

0.1 sec

SM204

PAUSE contact

PAUSE status

SM412*1

1 second clock

0.5 sec

0.5 sec

SM206

PAUSE enable coil

OFF: PAUSE disabled

ON: PAUSE enabled

SM413*1

2 second clock

1 sec

SM213

Clock data read request

OFF: Ignored
ON: Read request

SM414*1

2n second clock

n sec

n sec

SM250

Max. loaded I/O read

OFF: Ignored
ON: Read

SM415*1

2n (ms) clock

n (ms)

n (ms)

SM320

Presence/absence of
SFC program

OFF: SFC program absent

ON: SFC program present

SM420

User timing clock No.0

SM321

Start/stop SFC program

OFF: SFC program not

executed (stop)
ON: SFC program executed
(start)

SM421

User timing clock No.1

SM322

SFC program start status

OFF: Initial start

ON: Resume start

SM422

User timing clock No.2

SM323

Presence/absence of
continuous transition for
entire block

OFF: Continuous transition

not effective
ON: Continuous transition
effective

SM423

User timing clock No.3

SM324

Continuous transition
prevention flag

OFF: When transition is

executed
ON: When no transition

SM424

User timing clock No.4

SM325

Output mode at block

stop

OFF: OFF
ON: Preserves

SM430

User timing clock No.5

SM326

SFC device clear mode

OFF: Clear device

ON: Preserves device

PRINTING

OFF: Not detected

ON: Detected

1 scan

0.005 sec 0.005 sec

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Annunciator detection

19

1 sec

APPENDIX

n2
scan

n2
scan

n1
scan

Appendix 2.1 Supported devices

INDEX

SM62

ON
OFF

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

No.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

For details of special relays

User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be
used

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Special relay list (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)

App - 25

GX Works2

APPENDIX

No.

Name

Description

No.

Name

Description

SM680

Program memory write

error

OFF: Write not executed/

normal
ON: Write error

SM681

Program memory writing

flag

OFF: Write not executed

ON: During writing

SM700

Carry flag

OFF: Carry OFF

ON: Carry ON

SM703

Sort order

OFF: Ascending order

ON: Descending order

SM704

Block comparison

OFF: Non-match found

ON: All match

OFF: Unusable
ON: Use enabled

SM722

BIN/DBIN instruction error

disabling flag

OFF: Error detection

performed
ON: Error detection not
performed

Drive 1 flag

OFF: No drive 1
ON: Drive 1 present

SM776

OFF: Local device

Enable/disable local device
disabled
at CALL
ON: Local device enabled

SM603

Drive 2 flag

OFF: No drive 2
ON: Drive 2 present

SM777

Enable/disable setting for

local devices in interrupt
program

OFF: Local device

disabled
ON: Local device enabled

SM604

Memory card in-use flag

OFF: Not used

ON: In use

SM800

Trace preparation

OFF: Not ready

ON: Ready

SM620

Drive 3/4 usable flags

OFF: Unusable
ON: Use enabled

SM801

Trace start

OFF: Suspend
ON: Start

SM621

Drive 3/4 protect flag

OFF: Not protected

ON: Protected

SM802

Trace execution in
progress

OFF: Suspend
ON: Start

SM622

Drive 3 flag

OFF: No drive 3
ON: Drive 3 present

SM803

Trace trigger

OFF ON: Start

SM623

Drive 4 flag

OFF: No drive 4
ON: Drive 4 present

SM804

After trace trigger

OFF: Not after trigger

ON: After trigger

SM624

Drive 3/4 in-use flag

OFF: Not used

ON: In use

SM805

Trace completed

OFF: Not completed

ON: End

SM640

File register use

OFF: File register

not used
ON: File register in use

SM826

Trance error

OFF: Normal
ON: Error

SM650

Comment use

OFF: Comment not used

ON: Comment in use

SM829

Forced registration
specification of trace
setting

OFF: Forced registration

disabled
ON: Forced registration
enabled

SM672

Memory card file register

access range flag

OFF: Within access range

ON: Outside access range

SM431

User timing clock No.6

SM432

User timing clock No.7

SM433

User timing clock No.8

SM434

User timing clock No.9

SM510

Low speed program

execution flag

OFF: Completed or not

executed
ON: Execution under way

SM600

Memory card usable

flags

SM602

*1 :

n2
scan

n2
scan
n1
scan

When the setting value of the constant scan is equal to the integral multiple of the clock time, the value of the special relay
is OFF every scan. For the setting to turn the clock of the special relay ON/OFF, refer to the Point in the next page.

App - 26

Appendix 2.1 Supported devices

Appendix 2 Simulation Function

0.05

0.1

0.15

0.2

0.25

0.3 (Second)

0.1-second clock
Clock ON/OFF
inversion and
value of special
relay

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

19

OFF

50ms
(Scan)
0

Example: Equal to integral multiple

The following figure shows the behavior of the 0.1-second clock when the constant scan is 100ms (default).
The value of the special relay is OFF every scan.
0

0.05

0.1

0.15

0.2

0.25

0.3 (Second)

20

OFF

PRINTING

0.1-second clock
Clock ON/OFF
inversion and
value of special
relay

OFF

OFF

100ms
(Scan)

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Turning clock of special relay ON/OFF

To turn the clock of the special relay ON/OFF, set the constant scan setting value avoiding the integral multiple of
the clock time, as described by the following example Not equal to integral multiple shown below.
Example: Not equal to integral multiple
The following figure shows the behavior of the 0.1-second clock when the constant scan is 50ms.
The special relay repeats ON/OFF.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

21

SETTING OPTIONS

Contact scan setting

To set the constant scan setting value, select [PLC Parameter] <<PLC RAS>> and set it.

APPENDIX

INDEX

Appendix 2.1 Supported devices

App - 27

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Special relay list (FXCPU)

For details of special relays
FXCPU Structured Programming Manual [Device & Common]
No.

Name

Description

No.

Name

Description

M8000

RUN monitor
NO contact

OFF: STOP
ON: RUN

M8038

RAM file clear command

OFF: Hold
ON: Clear

M8001

RUN monitor
NC contact

OFF: RUN
ON: STOP

M8039

Constant scan mode

OFF: Normal scan

ON: Constant mode

M8002

Initial pulse
NO contact

ON for only 1 scan after

RUN

M8040

Transfer disable

OFF: Enable transfer

ON: Disable transfer

M8003

Initial pulse
NC contact

OFF for only 1 scan after

RUN

M8041

Transfer start (for IST

instruction)

OFF: Stop transfer

ON: Start transfer

M8004

Error occurrence

ON while either one among

M8060 to M8067 is ON

M8042

Start pulse (for IST

instruction)

ON: IST instruction start

command

M8011

10ms clock

5ms

5ms

M8043

Zero point return

complete (for IST
instruction)

ON: IST instruction zero

point return complete
command

M8012

100ms clock

50ms

50ms

M8044

Zero point condition (for

IST instruction)

ON: Zero point

OFF: Zero point return is
undetermined

M8013

1 sec. clock

0.5s

0.5s

M8045

All output reset disable

(for IST instruction)

ON: Disable reset

OFF: Enable reset

M8014

1 min. clock

30s

30s

M8046

STL state ON

ON while either one among

S0 to S899 is ON

M8018

Installation detection for

real-time clock

Always ON

M8047

STL monitoring enable

ON: Enable M8040 to D8047

M8020

Zero

ON when the addition or

subtraction result is 0

M8048

Annunciator ON

ON while either one among

S900 to S999 is ON

M8021

Borrow

ON when the subtraction

result is less than the
maximum negative value

M8049

Annunciator enable

ON: Enable D8049

OFF: Disable D8049

M8022

Carry

ON when "carry" occurs in

the addition result

M8067

Operation error

ON: Operation error

OFF: No operation error

M8023

Floating-point calculation ON: Carry out floating-point

command
calculation

M8068

Operation error latch

Hold occurrence of M8067

M8024

BMOV instruction
execution direction

ON: Write
OFF: Read

M8074

RAM file register setting

ON: Use setting

OFF: Not use setting

M8026

RAMP mode

ON: Hold output value

OFF: Reset value at output

M8090

BKCMP instruction:
Block comparison signal

ON: Comparison result

matches
OFF: Comparison result
does not match

M8028

Timer switch command

OFF: 100ms timer

ON: 10ms timer

M8091

Output character quantity ON: Change nothing

OFF: Write 00H (NULL)
selector signal

M8029

Instruction execution
complete

OFF: During executing

ON: Execution completed

M8160

XCH instruction: SWAP

function

ON: 8-bit conversion

OFF: Normal mode

M8031

Non-latched memory all

clear

OFF: Hold
ON: Clear

M8161

8-bit processing mode

Processing mode in the

ASC, ASCI, and HEX
instructions

M8032

Latched memory all clear

OFF: Hold
ON: Clear

M8164

FROM and TO
instructions: Transfer
points variable mode

Transfer points switch

command

M8033

Memory holding against

STOP mode

OFF: Clear
ON: Hold

M8168

SMOV instruction:
Hexadecimal data
handling function

Data shift in 4-bit units

M8034

All output disable

OFF: Enable output

ON: Disable output

App - 28

Appendix 2.1 Supported devices

Appendix 2 Simulation Function

17
Description

M8200

M8218

ON: C218 is down-counting

Counter counting direction
OFF: C218 is up-counting

M8201

Counter counting direction

ON: C201 is down-counting

OFF: C201 is up-counting

M8219

Counter counting direction

ON: C219 is down-counting

OFF: C219 is up-counting

M8202

Counter counting direction

ON: C202 is down-counting

OFF: C202 is up-counting

M8220

Counter counting direction

ON: C220 is down-counting

OFF: C220 is up-counting

M8203

ON: C203 is down-counting

Counter counting direction
OFF: C203 is up-counting

M8221

ON: C221 is down-counting

Counter counting direction
OFF: C221 is up-counting

M8204

Counter counting direction

ON: C204 is down-counting

OFF: C204 is up-counting

M8222

Counter counting direction

ON: C222 is down-counting

OFF: C222 is up-counting

M8205

Counter counting direction

ON: C205 is down-counting

OFF: C205 is up-counting

M8223

Counter counting direction

ON: C223 is down-counting

OFF: C223 is up-counting

M8206

Counter counting direction

ON: C206 is down-counting

OFF: C206 is up-counting

M8224

Counter counting direction

ON: C224 is down-counting

OFF: C224 is up-counting

M8207

ON: C207 is down-counting

Counter counting direction
OFF: C207 is up-counting

M8225

ON: C225 is down-counting

Counter counting direction
OFF: C225 is up-counting

M8208

Counter counting direction

ON: C208 is down-counting

OFF: C208 is up-counting

M8226

Counter counting direction

ON: C226 is down-counting

OFF: C226 is up-counting

M8209

Counter counting direction

ON: C209 is down-counting

OFF: C209 is up-counting

M8227

Counter counting direction

ON: C227 is down-counting

OFF: C227 is up-counting

M8210

Counter counting direction

ON: C210 is down-counting

OFF: C210 is up-counting

M8228

Counter counting direction

ON: C228 is down-counting

OFF: C228 is up-counting

M8211

ON: C211 is down-counting

Counter counting direction
OFF: C211 is up-counting

M8229

ON: C229 is down-counting

Counter counting direction
OFF: C229 is up-counting

M8212

Counter counting direction

ON: C212 is down-counting

OFF: C212 is up-counting

M8230

Counter counting direction

ON: C230 is down-counting

OFF: C230 is up-counting

M8213

Counter counting direction

ON: C213 is down-counting

OFF: C213 is up-counting

M8231

Counter counting direction

ON: C231 is down-counting

OFF: C231 is up-counting

M8214

Counter counting direction

ON: C214 is down-counting

OFF: C214 is up-counting

M8232

Counter counting direction

ON: C232 is down-counting

OFF: C232 is up-counting

M8215

ON: C215 is down-counting

Counter counting direction
OFF: C215 is up-counting

M8233

ON: C233 is down-counting

Counter counting direction
OFF: C233 is up-counting

M8216

Counter counting direction

ON: C216 is down-counting

OFF: C216 is up-counting

M8234

Counter counting direction

M8217

Counter counting direction

ON: C217 is down-counting

OFF: C217 is up-counting

ON: C234 is down-counting

OFF: C234 is up-counting

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Name

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

No.

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Description

ON: C200 is down-counting

Counter counting direction
OFF: C200 is up-counting

20

PRINTING

Name

21
SETTING OPTIONS

No.

APPENDIX

INDEX

Appendix 2.1 Supported devices

App - 29

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Special register list (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)

For details of special registers
User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be
used
No.
SD0

Name

Description

Diagnostic error

Diagnostic error code

Clock time for diagnosis

error occurrence

Clock time for diagnosis

error occurrence

Error information
categories

Error information category

code

SD1
SD2

Name

Description

SD73

SD3
SD4

No.
SD72
SD74
SD75
SD76

SD5

SD77

SD6

SD78

Table of detected
annunciator numbers

Annunciator detection
number

Status of CPU switch

SD7

SD79

SD8

SD200

Status of switch

SD9

SD201

LED status

Status of CPU-LED

SD202

LED OFF command

Bit pattern of LED that is

turned OFF

SD11

SD203

Operating status of CPU

Operating status of CPU *3

SD12

SD204

LED display color

CPU-LED display color

LED display priority

ranking

Priorities 5 to 8

SD10

Error common
information

Error common information

SD13

SD207

SD14

SD208

SD15

SD209

SD16

SD210

Clock data

Clock data (year, month)

SD17

SD211

Clock data

Clock data (day, hour)

SD18

SD212

Clock data

Clock data
(minute, second)

SD19

SD213

Clock data

Clock data
(higher digits of year, day
of week)

LED display data

LED display data

SD20

Error individual
information

Error individual information

Priorities 1 to 4
Priorities 9 to 11

SD220

SD21

SD221

SD22

SD222

SD23

SD223

SD24

SD224

SD25

SD225

SD26

SD226

SD50

Error reset

Error code to be reset

SD227

SD62

Annunciator number

Annunciator number

SD240

Base mode

0: Automatic mode
1: Detail mode

SD63

Number of annunciators

Number of annunciators

SD241

Extension stage number

0: Main base only

1 to 7: Extension stage
number

SD64

SD242

A/Q base differentiation

0: QA**B is installed (A mode)

1: Q**B is installed (Q mode)

SD65

SD243

SD66

SD244

No. of base slots

(Operation status)

Number of base slots

SD250

Loaded maximum I/O

Loaded maximum I/O

number

SD67

Table of detected
annunciator numbers

Annunciator detection
number

SD68

SD286

SD69

SD287

SD70

SD288

SD71

SD289

App - 30

Appendix 2.1 Supported devices

Device assignment

Number of points assigned

for M (for extension)
Number of points assigned
for B (for extension)

Appendix 2 Simulation Function

17
Current scan time
(ms value)

SD290

Number of points
assigned for X

SD520*2

SD291

Number of points
assigned for Y

SD521*2

Current scan time

(s value)

SD292

Number of points
assigned for M

SD522*2

Initial scan time

(ms value)

SD293

Number of points
assigned for L

SD523*2

Initial scan time

(s value)

SD294

Number of points
assigned for B

SD524*2

Minimum scan time

(ms value)

SD295

Number of points
assigned for F

SD525*2

Minimum scan time

(s value)

SD296

Number of points
assigned for SB

SD526

Maximum scan time

(ms value)

Number of points
assigned for V

SD527

SD298

Number of points
assigned for S

SD528

SD299

Number of points
assigned for T

SD529

SD300

Number of points
assigned for ST

SD532

SD301

Number of points
assigned for C

SD533

SD302

Number of points
assigned for D

SD534

SD303

Number of points
assigned for W

SD535

SD304

Number of points
assigned for SW

SD600

Memory card type

Memory card type

SD602

Drive 1 (Memory card

RAM) capacity

Drive 1 capacity

SD603

Drive 2 (Memory card

ROM) capacity

Drive 2 capacity

SD604

Memory card use

conditions

Memory card use

conditions

SD620

Drive 3/4 type

Drive 3/4 type

SD622

Drive 3 (Standard RAM)

capacity

Drive 3 capacity

SD305
SD306
SD307
SD308
SD309
SD310
SD311
SD395
SD396

Device assignment

Device assignment (Index

register)

16-bit modification
Number of points
assigned for Z

Device assignment (Same

as parameter contents)

Number of points
assigned for ZR (for
extension)

Device assignment
(Assignment including the
number of points set to the
extended data register and
extended link register
setting)
Multiple CPU system
information

Number of points
assigned for D (for
inside + for extension)

Initial scan time

Minimum scan time

Maximum scan time

Current scan time for low

speed execution type
programs

18

Maximum scan time

(s value)
Current scan time
(ms value)
Current scan time
(s value)

Minimum scan time

Minimum scan time for
(ms value)
low speed execution type
Minimum
scan time
programs
(s value)
Maximum scan time
Maximum scan time for
(ms value)
low speed execution type
Maximum
scan time
programs
(s value)

SD623

Drive 4 (Standard ROM)

capacity

Drive 4 capacity

SD624

Drive 3/4 use conditions

Drive 3/4 use conditions

Multiple CPU number

SD640

File register drive

Drive number

No. 1 CPU operation

status

SD641
SD642

1 second counter

Number of counts in 1second units

SD414*1

2n second clock setting

2n second clock units

SD643

SD415*1

2n millisecond clock setting

2n millisecond clock
units

SD644

SD420

Scan counter

Number of counts in
each scan

SD645

SD430

Low speed scan counter

Number of counts in
each scan

SD646

SD500

Execution program No.

Program number in
execution

SD647

20

21

Number of points
assigned for W (for
inside + for extension)

SD412*1

19

I
File register file name

File register file name

File register capacity

File register capacity

INDEX

SD297

Current scan time

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Description

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Name

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

No.

PRINTING

Description

SETTING OPTIONS

Name

APPENDIX

No.

Appendix 2.1 Supported devices

App - 31

GX Works2

APPENDIX

No.

Name

Description

No.

SD648

File register block number

File register block

number

SD655

SD650

Comment drive

Comment drive number

SD656

SD651
SD652

Comment file name

Comment file name

SD653

Name
Comment file name

Comment file name

SD670

Parameter enable drive

information

Parameter enable drive

number

SD681

Program memory write

(transfer) status

Write (transfer) status

display (percentage)

SD840

Debug function usage

Debug function usage

SD654

*1 :

Values are derived from the constant scan setting value and the number of scans.

*2 :

All values are equal to the constant scan setting value.

*3 :

SD203 supports the operating status of CPU only. STOP/PAUSE cause is fixed to 0.

App - 32

Appendix 2.1 Supported devices

Description

Appendix 2 Simulation Function

D8000

Watchdog timer

D8001

PLC type and system

version

*2

D8002

Memory capacity

Maximum capacity based

on the programmable
controller type

D8004

Error M number

M8060 to M8068

D8006

Low battery voltage

detection level

30 (Unit: 0.1 V)

D8010

Current scan time

Unit: 0.1ms*3

D8011

Minimum scan time

Unit: 0.1ms*3

D8012

Maximum scan time

Unit: 0.1ms*3

D8013

Second data

Operate as 1-second timer

D8014

Minute data

Time data

No.

Name

Description

D8049

Smallest active state

relay number

Value of STL monitor

D8067

Error code for operation

error

Error code number

D8068

Latched step number

where operation error
has occurred

Hold step number where

operation error has
occurred

D8069

Step number where error

has occurred

Step number where error

has occurred

D8101

PLC type and system

version

FX3U and FX3UC only

Store 16200

D8102

Memory capacity

Maximum capacity based

on the programmable
controller type

D8164

FROM and TO
instructions: Transfer
points quantity
specification

Write transfer points

D8015

Hour data

Time data

D8016

Day data

Time data

D8182

Value of register Z1

Value of register Z1

D8017

Month data

Time data

D8183

Value of register V1

Value of register V1

D8018

Year data

Time data

D8184

Value of register Z2

Value of register Z2

D8019

Day-of-the-week data

Time data

D8185

Value of register V2

Value of register V2

D8028

Value of register Z

Value of register Z

D8186

Value of register Z3

Value of register Z3

D8029

Value of register V

Value of register V

D8030

Variable analog
potentiometer VR1

*4

D8031

Variable analog
potentiometer VR2

*4

D8191

Value of register V5

Value of register V5

D8039

Constant scan time

Initial value: 100ms

(Unit: 1ms)*5

D8192

Value of register Z6

Value of register Z6

D8193

Value of register V6

Value of register V6

D8040

ON state relay number 1

Value of STL monitor

D8194

Value of register Z7

Value of register Z7

D8041

ON state relay number 2

Value of STL monitor

D8195

Value of register V7

Value of register V7

D8042

ON state relay number 3

Value of STL monitor

D8043

ON state relay number 4

Value of STL monitor

D8312

Lower

D8044

ON state relay number 5

Value of STL monitor

Latched step number

where operation error
has occurred

D8045

ON state relay number 6

Value of STL monitor

D8046

ON state relay number 7

Value of STL monitor

D8047

ON state relay number 8

Value of STL monitor

Value of register V3

Value of register V3

Value of register Z4

Value of register Z4

D8189

Value of register V4

Value of register V4

D8190

Value of register Z5

Value of register Z5

D8314
D8315

Step number where error

has occurred 32 bits

20

21

Upper
APPENDIX

D8313

19

Lower
Upper

Initialized to 200ms on every programmable controller type. The watchdog timer time can be changed, but the WDT
check is never performed.

INDEX

*1 :

D8187
D8188

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Description
200ms*1

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Name

PRINTING

No.

SETTING OPTIONS

For details of special registers

FXCPU Structured Programming Manual [Device & Common]

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Special register list (FXCPU)

Appendix 2.1 Supported devices

App - 33

GX Works2

APPENDIX

*2 :

The value of D8001 differs depending on the programmable controller type.

Programmable controller CPU

Value

FX0, FX0S

20000

FX0N

20000

FX1

21000

FXU, FX2C

20000

FX1S

22000

FX1N, FX1NC

26000

FX2N, FX2NC

24000

FX3G

26000

FX3U, FX3UC

24000

*3 :

All values are equal to the constant scan setting value. The initial value is 100ms.

*4 :

Operates as a general data register. Write a value between 0 and 255 and test the operation using functions such as the
Modify Value function of GX Works2.

*5 :

One scan time becomes equal to the time set as the constant scan.

App - 34

Appendix 2.1 Supported devices

Appendix 2 Simulation Function

17

Devices supported by the I/O system setting function

The following table shows the list of devices which can be used for conditions, the device value input,
and timing chart input in the I/O system setting function.
Device list (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)
: Supported : Not supported
X

Output

Internal relay

Latch relay

Annunciator

Edge relay

Step relay

Link relay

Retentive timer

TN

Contact

TS

Coil

TC

Current value

CN

Contact

CS

Coil

CC

Current value

STN(SN)

Contact

STS(SS)

Coil

STC(SC)

Data register

Link register

21

Link special register

SW

Direct input

DX

Direct output

DY

Function input

FX

Function output

FY

Special relay

SM

Function register

FD

Special register

SD

Link input

\X

Link output

\Y

Link register

\W

Link special register

\SW

Link relay

\B

\SB

Intelligent function module device

\G

Index register

Index register

File register

File register

Nesting

Nesting

Pointer

Interrupt pointer

INDEX

Link special relay

Intelligent function module
device

Pointer

20

PRINTING

Counter

19

SB
Current value

18

SETTING OPTIONS

Timer
Internal user device

Link direct device

QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Input

Link special relay

Internal system device

Symbol

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Device name

APPENDIX

Category

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

R
ZR

Appendix 2.1 Supported devices

App - 35

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Category
Others

Constant

Device name

Symbol

QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU

SFC block device

BL

SFC transition device

TR

Decimal constant

Hexadecimal constant

Real constant

Device list (FXCPU)

: Supported : Not supported
Category

Device

Device name
X

Output

Auxiliary relay

State

Timer

Counter

Current value

TN

Contact

TS

Coil

TC

Current value

CN

Contact

CS

Coil

CC

Data register
Direct specification of buffer memory

Extension register

Extension register

Constant

\G

*1

Index register

Pointer

FXCPU

Index register

Nesting

App - 36

Symbol

Input

Z
*2

Nesting

JUMP or CALL branch

Interrupt pointer

Decimal constant

Hexadecimal constant

Real number constant

*1 :

Supported by FX3U and FX3UC only.

*2 :

Supported by FX3U, FX3UC, and FX3G only.

Appendix 2.1 Supported devices

Appendix 2 Simulation Function

When an unsupported instruction is used,

is displayed in the monitor status display.
(
Section 14.1.2)
Unsupported devices used in a program and their used locations can be checked by selecting [Debug]
[Instructions Unsupported by Simulation]. (
Section 15.3)

QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

Sequence instructions
Restrictions

Contact instruction

LD, LDI, AND, ANI, OR, ORI, LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF, LDPI,

LDFI, ANDPI, ANDFI, ORPI, and ORFI

Bond instruction

ANB, ORB, MPS, MRD, MPP, INV, MEP, MEF, EGP, and EGF

Output instruction

OUT, OUT T, OUT C, OUT F, OUTH T, SET, RST, SET F, RST F, PLS,
PLF, and FF

Shift instruction

SFT(P)

Master control instruction

MC and MCR

End instruction

FEND and END

Other instruction

STOP, NOP, NOPLF, and PAGE

20

PRINTING

Symbol

Basic instructions
Category
Comparison operation
instruction

Arithmetic operation
instruction

Symbol
=, <>, >,
, <,
, D=, D<>, D>, D
E
, E<, E
, and BKCMP(P)

21

Restrictions
, D<, D

, E=, E<>, E>,

$=, $<>, $>, $<=, $<, and $>=

Not supported by Basic model QCPU.

+(P), (P), D+(P), D(P), *(P), /(P), D*(P), D/(P), B+(P), B(P), DB+(P),
DB(P), B*(P), B/(P), DB*(P), DB/(P), E+(P), E(P), E*(P), E/(P),
BK+(P), BK(P), INC(P), DEC(P), DINC(P), and DDEC(P)

$+(P)

Not supported by Basic model QCPU.

Data conversion instruction

BCD(P), DBCD(P), BIN(P), DBIN(P), INT(P), DINT(P), FLT(P), DFLT(P),

DBL(P), WORD(P), GRY(P), DGRY(P), GBIN(P), DGBIN(P), NEG(P),

DNEG(P), ENEG(P), BKBCD(P), and BKBIN(P)

Data transfer instruction

MOV(P), DMOV(P), EMOV(P), $MOV(P), CML(P), DCML(P), BMOV(P),

FMOV(P), XCH(P), DXCH(P), BXCH(P), and SWAP(P)

Program branch instruction

CJ, SCJ, JMP, and GOEND

Other convenient instruction

MTR

Not supported by Basic model QCPU.

SETTING OPTIONS

Category

A
APPENDIX

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

This section explains the instructions supported by the simulation function.

Instructions/functions used in Structured projects can also be simulated.
However, some instructions may be restricted or not supported. No processing is performed for
unsupported instructions (NOP processing).

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Appendix 2.2 Supported instructions

INDEX

Appendix 2.2 Supported instructions

App - 37

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Application instructions
Category

Symbol

Restrictions

Logical operation
instruction

WAND(P), DAND(P), BKAND(P), WOR(P), DOR(P), BKOR(P),

WXOR(P), DXOR(P), BKXOR(P), WXNR(P), DXNR(P), and BKNXR(P)

Rotation instruction

ROR(P), RCR(P), ROL(P), RCL(P), DROR(P), DRCR(P), DROL(P), and

DRCL(P)

Shift instruction

SFR(P), SFL(P), BSFR(P), BSFL(P), DSFR(P), DSFL(P), SFTBR(P),

SFTBL(P), SFTWR(P), and SFTWL(P)

Bit processing instruction

BSET(P), BRST(P), TEST(P), DTEST(P), and BKRST(P)

Data processing instruction

SER(P), DSER(P), SUM(P), DSUM(P), DECO(P), ENCO(P), SEG(P),

DIS(P), UNI(P), NDIS(P), NUNI(P), WTOB(P), BTOW(P), MAX(P),
MIN(P), DMAX(P), DMIN(P), SORT, DSORT, WSUM(P), and
DWSUM(P)

The SORT and DSORT instructions

are executed in one scan.

FOR, NEXT, BREAK(P), CALL(P), RET, FCALL(P), and XCALL

Structured instruction

ECALL(P) and EFCALL(P)

Data table operation

instruction

FIFW(P), FIFR(P), FPOP(P), FINS(P), and FDEL(P)

Buffer memory access

instruction

FROM(P), DFRO(P), TO(P), and DTO(P)

STR(P), DSTR(P), VAL(P), DVAL(P), ESTR(P), and EVAL(P)

BINDA(P), DBINDA(P), BINHA(P), DBINHA(P), BCDDA(P),

DBCDDA(P), DABIN(P), DDABIN(P), HABIN(P), DHABIN(P),
DABCD(P), DDABCD(P), LEN(P), ASC(P), HEX(P), RIGHT(P),
LEFT(P), MIDR(P), MIDW(P), INSTR(P), EMOD(P), and EREXP(P)

Not supported by Basic model QCPU.

SIN(P), COS(P), TAN(P), RAD(P), DEG(P), SQR(P), EXP(P), LOG(P),

RND(P), and SRND(P)

ASIN(P), ACOS(P), ATAN(P), BSQR(P), BDSQR(P), BSIN(P),

BCOS(P), BTAN(P), BASIN(P), BACOS(P), and BATAN(P)

Not supported by Basic model QCPU.

Data control instruction

LIMIT(P), DLIMIT(P), BAND(P), DBAND(P), ZONE(P), and DZONE(P)

Switch instruction

RSET(P) and QDRSET(P)

The QDRSET(P) instruction is not

supported by Basic model QCPU/
LCPU.

Clock instruction

DATERD(P), DATE+(P), DATE(P), SECOND(P), and HOUR(P)

The DATERD(P) instruction reads the

personal computer clock data.

String processing
instruction

Special function instruction

Program control instruction

PSTOP(P), POFF(P), and PSCAN(P)

Not supported by Basic model QCPU.

Display instruction

LEDR

DUTY, ZRRDB(P), ZRWRB(P), ADRSET(P), ZPUSH(P), ZPOP(P),

TIMCHK, WDT(P), TRACE, TRACER, and RBMOV(P)

The RBMOV instruction operates as

the BMOV instruction.
The TRACE, TRACER, and
RBMOV(P) are not supported by
Basic model QCPU.
The RBMOV(P) instruction is not
supported by LCPU.

Other instruction

Multiple CPU dedicated instructions

Category
CPU shared memory
access instruction

App - 38

Symbol
FROM(P), DFRO(P), S(P), TO, TO(P), and DTO(P)

Appendix 2.2 Supported instructions

Restrictions
Not supported by LCPU.

Appendix 2 Simulation Function

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

FXCPU

For details of the instructions, refer to the following manual.

FXCPU Structured Programming Manual [Basic & Applied Instruction]
Sequence instructions
Contact instruction

Symbol

Restrictions

LD, LDI, AND, ANI, OR, ORI, LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, and ORF
ANB, ORB, MPS, MPP, and INV

Bond instruction

MEP and MEF

OUT, SET, RST, PLS, and PLF

Master control instruction

MC and MCR

Step ladder instruction

STL and RET

Other instruction

END and NOP

Output instruction

18

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Category

19

Application instructions
: Supported : Not supported
Category

Program flow

Symbol

32-bit instruction

Pulse instruction execution

CJ

CALL

SRET

FEND

FOR

NEXT

20

PRINTING

CMP
ZCP
MOV
SMOV

21

CML
BMOV

SETTING OPTIONS

Move and compare

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

FMOV
XCH
BCD
BIN

ADD
SUB
MUL
INC
DEC

WAND
WOR
WXOR
NEG

INDEX

Arithmetic and logical operation

APPENDIX

DIV

Appendix 2.2 Supported instructions

App - 39

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Category

Symbol

32-bit instruction

Pulse instruction execution

ROR
ROL
RCR
RCL
Rotation and shift operation

SFTR

SFTL

WSFR

WSFL

SFWR

SFRD

ZRST

DECO

ENCO

SUM
BON

Data operation

MEAN
ANS

ANR

SQR
FLT
IST

SER

ABSD
Handy instruction

INCD

TTMR

STMR

ALT

RAMP

SORT

ASC

FROM

External FX I/O device

TO
External Device (optional device)

Data transfer 2

ASCI

HEX

ZPUSH

ZPOP

ECMP
EZCP
EMOV
Floating point

ESTR
EVAL
EBCD
EBIN
EADD

App - 40

Appendix 2.2 Supported instructions

Appendix 2 Simulation Function

17
Symbol

32-bit instruction

Pulse instruction execution

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Category
ESUB
EMUL
EDIV
EXP

18

LOGE

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

LOG10
ESQR
ENEG
INT
SIN
COS
Floating point

19

TAN

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

ASIN
ACOS
ATAN
RAD
DEG

20

WTOB

BTOW

UNI

DIS

PRINTING

WSUM

SWAP

TZCP

TADD

TSUB

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Real time clock control

TCMP

HTOS
STOH
TRD

External device

HOUR
GRY
GBIN

APPENDIX

BK+
BKBKCMP=

BKCMP>
BKCMP<
BKCMP<>
BKCMP<=
BKCMP>=

INDEX

Block data operation

Appendix 2.2 Supported instructions

App - 41

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Category

Symbol

32-bit instruction

Pulse instruction execution

STR
VAL

Character string control

Data operation 3

Data comparison

$+

LEN

RIGHT

LEFT

MIDR

MIDW

INSTR

$MOV

FDEL

FINS

POP

SFR

SFL

LD=

LD>

LD<

LD<>

LD<=

LD>=

AND=

AND>

AND<

AND<>

AND<=

AND>=

OR=

OR>

OR<

OR<>

OR<=

OR>=

LIMIT
BAND
Data table operation

ZONE
DABIN
BINDA

Data transfer 3

App - 42

RBFM

WBFM

Appendix 2.2 Supported instructions

Appendix 2 Simulation Function

This section explains the programmable controller CPU functions that are supported by GX Works2
simulation function.
The following tables show the functions that are supported by the simulation function.

Function name

Function detail

Supported/Not
supported

Remarks

Programming

Program memory

Interrupt program

Multiple program execution

Boot operation

Programming language

Memory card (ROM)

Standard RAM

Standard ROM

I/O number assignment

(automatic)

I/O number assignment

(specified)

Number of points occupied by

empty slots

Number of base slots

QCPU (Q mode) only

Program executing order

setting

Initial execution type

Scan execution type

Standby type

Fixed scan execution type

Change (Set) by parameter

Change by instruction

Ladder

List
SFC (MELSAP3, MELSAP-L)

INDEX

21

ST
Communication with intelligent function module

20

*1

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Memory card (RAM)

PRINTING

I/O number

SETTING OPTIONS

Memory

APPENDIX

Program cache memory

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

: Supported U: Supported with restrictions : Not supported

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Appendix 2.3 Supported CPU functions

Appendix 2.3 Supported CPU functions

App - 43

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Function name

Function detail

Supported/
Not supported

Remarks

Programmable controller function

Constant scan

No operation is performed in
actual time.

Watch dog timer (WDT)

30,000,000 instructions per scan

Latch function

Supported by device backup

function.

Device initial value

Service processing setting

Output mode setting at STOP to RUN

Input response time selection

Error time output mode setting

CPU operation mode at hardware error

Switch setting of intelligent function module

Monitor function

Monitor condition setting

Monitoring/testing local devices

Remote password

CPU module system display

LED display

Interrupt from intelligent function module

Serial communication function

Remote RUN/STOP

Remote PAUSE

Remote RESET

Remote latch clear

Scan time measurement

Program list monitoring

No operation is performed in
actual time.

Interrupt program list monitoring

Monitoring/testing devices

Forced ON/OFF of external I/O

Device test with execution condition

Sampling trace

Online program change

SFC file batch online program

change is not supported.

Debugging by multiple programming tools

Self-diagnostic function

Breakdown history

System protection

Password registration

Error reset

LED control function

Module error history collection function

Local device batch read function

Backing up latch data to standard ROM

Writing/Reading device data to standard ROM

Supported by device backup

function.

Reading module name

App - 44

Appendix 2.3 Supported CPU functions

Appendix 2 Simulation Function

Function detail

Remarks

Programmable controller CPU function

Clock function

Clock setting is not supported.

Extended clock setting (1/1000
seconds) is not supported.

Battery long-life operation

Memory check function

LCPU data logging function

Only trigger logging is supported

by sampling trace function.

LCPU built-in I/O function

LCPU built-in Ethernet function

LCPU built-in CC-Link function

QCPU multiple CPU system

QCPU network

18

19

32-bit indexing

Pointer

Local/Common pointer

Local device

Floating point arithmetic processing

(Internal precision)

Device setting

Indirect specification

File register setting

Extended data register, extended link register

(Use file registers)

Extension of bit device points

Rounding error occurs.

PRINTING

20

21

The following functions are not supported.

Periodic execution program setting
Operation mode at block/step concurrent start
Step transition monitoring timer
Control SFC type program
Step/Transition comment read (instruction)

A
APPENDIX

INDEX

*1 :

16-bit indexing

SETTING OPTIONS

Device indexing

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Device, Constant
A series CPU compatibility setting
(Special relay, special register)

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Function name

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17
Supported/Not
supported

Appendix 2.3 Supported CPU functions

App - 45

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 2.4 Enable/disable setting of parameter items

Some parameter setting items of GX Works2 are not applicable to the simulation function.
The following table shows the parameter setting items applicable to the simulation function.
The remote password is not supported.

QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU

PLC parameter setting applicability

: Applicable : Not applicable
Parameter
PLC Name

Item

Applicability

Label

Comment

Timer Limit Setting

RUN-PAUSE Contacts
Latch Data Backup Operation Valid Contact
Remote Reset

Fixed to 'Allow'

Output Mode at STOP to RUN

Floating Point Arithmetic Processing

Fixed to 'Perform internal

arithmetic operations in double
precision'*1

PLC System

Intelligent Function Module Setting (Interrupt Pointer Setting)

Module Synchronization

Built-in CC-Link Setting

Common Pointer No.

Points Occupied by Empty Slot
System Interrupt Settings

High Speed Interrupt Settings

Interrupt Program/Fixed Scan Program Setting

A-PLC Compatibility Setting

Service Processing Setting

Fixed to 'Execute it while waiting

for contact scan setting'

PLC Module Change Setting

File Register
Transfer to Standard ROM at Latch data backup operation
PLC File

Comment File Used in a Command

Initial Device Value
File for Local Device
File used for SP.DEVST/S.DEVLD Instruction
WDT (Watchdog Timer) Setting
Error Check

PLC RAS

Operating Mode When There is an Error

WDT error occurs if 30,000,000 or

more instructions are executed
during one scan.

*2

Constant Scanning
Breakdown History
Low Speed Program Execution Time

Boot File

App - 46

Module Error History Collection

Boot Option

Boot File Setting

Appendix 2.4 Enable/disable setting of parameter items

Appendix 2 Simulation Function

17
Program

Item

Applicability
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Parameter

*3

Program
SFC Program Start Mode

SFC

Start Conditions
Output Mode When the Block is Stopped

18

Device

Latch Start/End (possible to clear with latch clear)

Latch Start/End (disabled to clear with latch clear)

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Device Points

Local Device Start/End

Extended Device Latch Start/End (possible to clear with latch clear)

Extended Device Latch Start/End (disabled to clear with latch clear)

I/O Assignment

19

Base Setting

Switch Setting

Detailed Setting

Error Time Output Mode

PLC Operation Mode at H/W Error

I/O Response Time

Control PLC

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

I/O Assignment
Setting

No. of PLC

Operation Mode

Multiple CPU Synchronous Startup Setting

Online Module Change

I/O Sharing When Using Multiple CPUs

Communication Area Setting (Refresh Setting)

20

PRINTING

Multiple CPU
Setting

Host Station

Multiple CPU High Speed Transmission Area Setting

Built-in I/O Function

Setting

Serial
Communication

IP Address Setting

Communication Data Code

Open Setting

FTP Setting

Time Setting

Positioning

High-speed Counter

Input Signal

Output Signal

Transmission Speed

Sum Check

Transmission Wait Time

Online Change

21
SETTING OPTIONS

A
APPENDIX

Built-in Ethernet
Port Setting

Auto Refresh Setting

Acknowledge XY Assignment

*1 :

Internal operations are performed with double precision. However, the processing speed does not change.

*2 :

Supports "Computation Error" and "Intelligent Module Program Execution Error".

*3 :

There are restrictions for "Low Speed" and "Fixed Scan" type programs. (

INDEX

Appendix 2.5)

Network parameter setting applicability

: Applicable : Not applicable
Parameter
Network Parameter

Item

Applicability

Ethernet / CC IE / MELSECNET

CC-Link

Appendix 2.4 Enable/disable setting of parameter items

App - 47

GX Works2

APPENDIX

FXCPU

PLC parameter setting applicability

: Applicable : Not supported
Parameter

Item

Applicability

Memory Capacity
Comments Capacity
Memory Capacity

File Register Capacity

Program Capacity
Special Function Memory Capacity

Device

Device

PLC Name

Title

Battery Less Mode

MODEM Initialized

PLC System (1)

PLC System (2)

Special Function
Block
(Built-in CC-Link/LT
Setting)

App - 48

RUN Terminal Input

Channel Setting

Operate Communication Setting

Protocol

Data Length

Parity

Stop Bit

Transmission Speed

Header

Terminator

Control Line

H/W Type

Control Mode

Sum Check

Transmission Control Procedure

Station Number Setting

Time Out Judge Time

Unit Name

Address

Value

Size/Type

Check the identification code before initializing

Identification Code

Transmission Speed

Point Mode

Station Type

I/O Points

Specify Reserved Station

Appendix 2.4 Enable/disable setting of parameter items

Appendix 2 Simulation Function

17

Max. Speed [Hz]

Creep Speed [Hz]

Zero Return Speed [Hz]

Acceleration Time [ms]

Deceleration Time [ms]

Interruption Input of DVIT Instruction

Rotation Direction Signal

Head Address

Positioning Instruction

Pulse

Frequency [Hz]

Positioning table settings will not be initialized when the PLC is

powered on

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Bias Speed [Hz]

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Applicability

19

PRINTING

20

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

Positioning

Item

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Parameter

Appendix 2.4 Enable/disable setting of parameter items

App - 49

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 2.5 Restrictions and precautions

This section explains the restrictions and precautions on debugging programs using the simulation
function.
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
No.

Item

Debugging using the simulation function

Time processing

Time processing of the timer instruction/function is performed by assuming that the scan time is 100ms.
If the constant scan time is set in parameter, the set constant scan time is used as the scan time.

Supported
instructions

Some instructions including the data refresh instruction are not supported by the simulation function.
Unsupported instructions are processed as NOP. (Supported instructions
Appendix 2.2)
The time set for constant scan is used for updating the timer current value.
Constant scan

SM400

Processing time

T0

Scan 1

Scan 2

Scan 3

Scan 4

Scan 5

100ms

Scan1
T0=1

Scan1
T0=2

Scan1
T0=3

Scan1
T0=4

Scan1
T0=5

300ms

Scan1
T0=3

Scan1
T0=6

Scan1
T0=9

T0=12
Scan1

T0=15
Scan1

K10

In the virtual programmable controller, the number of counts per scan of the timer instruction changes
depending on the constant scan setting. When the constant scan time is set to 100ms, the count of the
100ms timer is +1 per scan. The count of the same timer is +3 per scan when the constant scan time is set to
300ms.

Monitoring

App - 50

If [Local device not executed] is selected in the GX Works2 local device monitor, the simulation function
monitors the devices of the program executed at the end of each scan.
However, the function may monitor the devices of the low-speed execution type or fixed scan execution
type programs processed at the end of each scan if these types of program are included in the programs
for simulation. For details, refer to 6 and 7 in this table.
If a program for local device monitoring is specified in the GX Works2 local device monitor, the simulation
function monitors the local devices in the specified program regardless of the existence of a scan execution
type program.

Appendix 2.5 Restrictions and precautions

Appendix 2 Simulation Function

17
Debugging using the simulation function
In the virtual programmable controller, one low-speed execution type program is always executed after the
execution of scan execution type programs. This execution is not affected by the constant scan time and the
program execution time set for low-speed execution type programs.
The following shows the operation procedure of programs. (The procedure does not change in step
operation.)
Initial execution type

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

Scan execution type 1

(Assume that one scan takes 100ms, then five
scans takes 500ms. Changing reference time
is possible by changing the constant scan
setting value. (Refer to No.3.))

Scan execution type 2

Scan execution type N

19

Low-speed execution type i

Operation of lowspeed execution

type programs

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Item

All scan execution type programs are executed in each scan, whereas one low-speed execution type
program is executed. Therefore, when N number of low-speed execution type programs are set, the
execution of all programs completes in N scans.

Scan 1

Scan 2

Scan 3

Scan 4

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

No.

20

PRINTING

Scan execution type

program

Low-speed execution
type program A

In the virtual programmable controller, the monitor value of SM510 remains OFF since a low-speed
execution type program is always executed within one scan.
The simulation function measures the time at the end of scan execution type and low-speed execution type
programs and judges whether to execute fixed scan execution type programs. The following shows the
processing timing of the simulation function when the scan time is set to 100ms and the timing of fixed scan
execution type programs is set to 200ms.

Operation of fixed
scan execution type
programs

200ms
elapsed
END
from
reference processing
time

300ms
elapsed
END
from
reference processing
time

400ms
elapsed
END
from
reference processing
time

A
APPENDIX

100ms
elapsed
END
Reference from
reference processing
time

SETTING OPTIONS

21

Low-speed execution
type program B

Scan execution
type program

Low-speed execution
type program

Fixed scan execution

type program B
(200ms cycle)

Automatic write at
the start of
simulation

At the start of simulation, PLC parameters and programs registered in the program setting of PLC parameter
are written to the virtual programmable controller.
The file register specified in "Use the following file" in the PLC file setting of PLC parameter is automatically
created.

Interrupt programs

Not supported by the simulation function.

Even created, an interrupt program is not processed.

Appendix 2.5 Restrictions and precautions

App - 51

INDEX

Fixed scan execution

type program A
(200ms cycle)

GX Works2

APPENDIX

No.
9

Item
Floating point
numbers

Debugging using the simulation function

Since a rounding error always occurs in the operation result of an instruction using floating point numbers, the
result does not match with the result of the operation executed on the programmable controller CPU.
The simulation is performed in the following capacity depending on the programmable controller type.
High Performance model QCPU : 2M

10

Using memory card

11

I/O module

Not supported by the simulation function.

12

Network

Not supported by the simulation function.

13

Intelligent function
module (Intelligent
parameters)

The virtual programmable controller has a buffer memory area of 64k points for 64 modules to be used for
accessing intelligent function modules. This buffer memory can be used for saving and reading data.
To use intelligent function modules in the simulation function, the I/O assignment must be set on the <<I/O
Assignment>> tab of PLC parameter.

14

Double-precision
operation for the
floating-point
arithmetic
processing

The double-precision operation of the simulation function performs the internal operation with double
precision and converts the final result to the single precision.
The processing speed is not changed even if the double-precision operation is set not to be performed on the
<<PLC System>> tab of PLC parameter.

15

Clock data

Clock data can be read out to SD210-SD213 by the clock data read request (SM213).
However, the set clock function is not supported.

16

Intelligent function
module

Buffer memory for the intelligent function module is stored with the setting on the <<I/O Assignment>> tab of
PLC parameter. Buffer memory (U \G ) cannot be accessed when the I/O assignment setting is not set.
Select 'Intelligent' as the module type and specify the point to create buffer memory in compliance with the
specified points.
If the module type is not specified, it becomes an empty slot.
If the module type is specified but the point is not specified, the point of the specified module becomes
equivalent to one specified for "Point Occupied by Empty Slot" on the <<PLC System>> tab of PLC
parameter.

17

Watchdog timer

When the program loops endlessly (when 30,000,000 or more instructions are executed during one scan), a
WDT error may occur.

Universal model QCPU

: 8M
For LCPU, a memory card cannot be used.

SD393, SD365, and SD369 are only supported.

Name/Description

18

Device

Supported/
Not supported

Description

No. 1 CPU reset flag

SM240

Fixed to 'OFF'

No. 2 CPU reset flag

SM241

Fixed to 'OFF'

No. 3 CPU reset flag

SM242

Fixed to 'OFF'

No. 4 CPU reset flag

SM243

Fixed to 'OFF'

No. 1 CPU error flag

SM244

Fixed to 'OFF'

No. 2 CPU error flag

SM245

Fixed to 'OFF'

No. 3 CPU error flag

SM246

Fixed to 'OFF'

No. 4 CPU error flag

SM247

Fixed to 'OFF'

Fixed to '0'

Operating status
monitor

Multiple CPU system

information

Number of multiple CPUs

SD393

CPU mounting
information

SD394

Multiple CPU number

SD395

No. 1 CPU operation

status

SD396

No. 2 CPU operation

status

SD397

Fixed to '0'

No. 3 CPU operation

status

SD398

Fixed to '0'

No. 4 CPU operation

status

SD399

Fixed to '0'

Fixed to '1'

: Supported : Not supported

App - 52

Appendix 2.5 Restrictions and precautions

Appendix 2 Simulation Function

17

Available drive
volume

ROM*2

Drive 0

Drive 1

Drive 3

Drive 4

Basic model QCPU/

High Performance
model QCPU

Available volume
for users

1008k bytes

2034k bytes

256k bytes

1008k bytes

File size

2048 bytes

1024 bytes

1024 bytes

2048 bytes

Universal model
QCPU (not equal to
Q100UDEH)

Available volume
for users

1040k bytes

8172k bytes

1280k bytes

4096k bytes

File size

512 bytes

4096 bytes

512 bytes

2048 bytes

Universal model
QCPU (equal to
Q100UDEH)

Available volume
for users

4000k bytes

8172k bytes

1792k bytes

16384k bytes

LCPU

File size

512 bytes

4096 bytes

512 bytes

2048 bytes

Available volume
for users

1040k bytes

768k bytes

2048k bytes

File size

512 bytes

512 bytes

2048 bytes

*1 :

The file size unit of program memory of Universal model QCPU/LCPU is 4 bytes (equal
to Q26UDH).

*2 :

The value shown at 'Standard ROM' of Basic model QCPU/High Performance QCPU is
one after the writing to the ROM.

20

Precautions on
Online program
change

At Online program change, fall instructions are executed regardless of options.

Secured steps for Online program change are 500 steps by default at the start up of the simulation function.
Secured steps can be changed at "Allocate Memory for 'Online Change' (Write to PLC only)".

21

Line monitor

In ladder programs, line monitor is available even though the program written to the programmable controller
CPU and one being edited are different.

22

Initial start for SFC

programs

When 'Initial start' is selected for "SFC program start mode" and a set of operations 'STOPWrite to
PLCRUN' is performed, not 'Initial start' but 'Resume start' is adopted if programs written to the
programmable controller CPU have no change.

23

Precautions on file
batch online change

In the following cases, file batch online change cannot be performed.

Program memory does not have free space larger than the program to be written.
The maximum number of files has already been stored in program memory.

24

Operation error

Conditions of operation error occurrence is equal to ones with High Performance model QCPU.
(As 'D/ K-2147483648 K-1 D0' is operated, for example, an operation error does not occur with Universal
model QCPU but occurs with High Performance model QCPU and virtual programmable controller CPU.)
Operation errors are No. 4100 at any time.

25

When "-0" is
specified as the
floating-point type
real number

No error occurs. (Processed as '0' in operation.)

Monitoring local
devices

If [Local device not executed] is selected, the virtual programmable controller CPU monitors the devices of
the program executed at the end of each scan.
However, it may monitor the devices of the low-speed execution type or fixed scan execution type programs
processed at the end of each scan if these types of program are included in the programs for simulation. If a
program for local device monitoring is specified in the local device monitor, the virtual programmable
controller CPU monitors the local devices in the specified program regardless of the existence of a scan
execution type program.

26

Appendix 2.5 Restrictions and precautions

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Standard
RAM

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

Memory card
(RAM)

Standard

memory*1

20

PRINTING

Program

18

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Difference of the drive volume may originate, for the file format is different from the actual programmable
controller CPU. The following lists the available volume of each drive and the file size in the virtual
programmable controller CPU.
Available volume for users: Available space for users (free space after formatting)
File size: Minimum size of one file
For details, refer to the User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to
be used.
Memory card (ROM) on the drive 2 cannot be used because the available memory card is RAM only.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Debugging using the simulation function

A
APPENDIX

Item

App - 53

INDEX

No.

GX Works2

APPENDIX

FXCPU
No.

Item

Debugging using the simulation function

Selection of programmable
controller CPU and
operation of FX series CPU

In the simulation function of FXCPU, the CPU-specific functions and device range operate according
to the specifications of the selected FXCPU.
Application instructions can operate in the simulation function even they are not supported by the
selected FXCPU.
Since a program may contain unsupported instructions after changing its programmable controller
type from a top model to a low model, the program may cause a program error when it is written to
the FXCPU even it can be performed in the simulation function.
For example, even the pulse execution type application instructions are not supported by FX0, FX0S,
and FX0N they can be performed in the simulation function. However, a program error may occur due
to the unsupported instructions when the program is written to the FXCPU.

Program check at STOP to

RUN

The program check function at STOP to RUN detects a program error only when an MC/MCR exists
in the STL instruction or the RET instruction is not input in response to the STL instruction. Note that
other problems cannot be detected by the program check function at STOP to RUN, and check them
in advance using the program check function of GX Works2.
Some parameter setting items of GX Works2 become disabled in the simulation function even they
are set.
Parameter

Enable/disable setting of
parameter items
PLC parameter

Setting item

Memory Capacity

All items are enabled

Device

All items are enabled

PLC Name

All items are disabled

PLC System (1)

All items are disabled

PLC System (2)

All items are disabled

Special Function Block

All items are disabled

Positioning

All items are disabled

Program memory capacity

The simulation function is performed with the maximum step capacity of each model.

Watchdog timer

The watchdog timer (D8000) operates in 200ms with all CPUs. The setting value can be changed but
the change is not reflected to its operation.

Buffer memory monitor

In the simulation function, the buffer memory of a special extension device operates as a general
register which can be read/written by the FROM/TO instruction. It does not have functions specific to
the special extension device.

Variable analog
potentiometer

The data register (D8030/D8031), which stores the value of the variable analog potentiometer built in
FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, and FX3G, operates as a general data register. Write a value between 0
and 255 and test the operation using GX Works2.

High-speed counter

The high-speed counter is not supported by the simulation function.

SORT/SORT2 instruction

The SORT/SORT2 instruction is executed over multiple scans on FXCPU. In the simulation function,
however, its execution is always completed in one scan and M8029 (Instruction execution complete)
turns ON immediately.

10

Latched type device

A latched type device keeps holding its value when the simulation function is in STOP status.
It clears its value when the simulation function is ended.

11

Non-latch type device

A non-latched type device clears its value when the simulation function is in STOP status or ended.

Clear PLC Memory

Execute the Clear PLC Memory function to clear and initialize user data written with the simulation
function.
Execute it too when the operation of the simulation function is not stable.

Character string constant

Up to 16 characters can be processed as a character string constant in a program.

The 17th and later characters are ignored when the length of characters is 17 or more.
(Example) $+ "12345678901234567" "abcdefghijklmnopq" D0
When the operation shown above is processed, the following data are stored in the devices starting
from D0.
D0 to D15 = "1234567890123456abcdefghijklmnop"
(The 17th and later characters of each character string constant (7 and q) are ignored.)

14

Write to PLC of device

memory

The Write to PLC function does not support the device memory listed below.
Input (X)
Output (Y)
Special relay (M8000 and later)
Special register (D8000 and later)

15

Special Function Block

Only the buffer memory of the special function block is supported by the simulation function.

12

13

App - 54

Appendix 2.5 Restrictions and precautions

Appendix 3 ASCII Code Table

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

010

011

100

101

110

111

(SP)

0000

NUL

DLE

0001

SOH

DC1

0010

STX

DC2

"

0011

ETX

DC3

0100

EOT

DC4

0101

ENQ

NAK

0110

ACK

SYN

&

0111

BEL

ETB

1000

BS

CAN

1001

HT

EM

1010

LF

SUB

1011

VT

ESC

1100

FF

FS

<

\( )

1101

CR

GS

1110

SO

RS

>

1111

SI

US

DEL

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

1
001

20

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

LSD

0
000

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

MSD

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

ASCII Code Table

PRINTING

Appendix 3

App - 55

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 4

Precautions on GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section describes the precautions when using GX Works2 and the differences between GX Works2 and
GX Developer.

Appendix 4.1 Before using GX Works2

Compared with GX Developer, GX Works2 has some differences in supported CPU modules, features,
and operability. Please review the following precautions prior to use.
For (Intelligent) indicated in the Reference column, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
Item to be confirmed

Reference

Supported CPU modules

Appendix 4.2

Unsupported features

Appendix 4.3

Supported project types

Using project functions

Appendix 4.4

Programming languages supported by each project type

Using ladder language
Using SFC language

Appendix 4.5

Using labels
Using function blocks
Using device comments

Appendix 4.6

Using device memory

Appendix 4.7

Using device initial values

Appendix 4.8

Using search/replace function

Appendix 4.9

Using online function

Appendix 4.10

Using monitor/debug function

Appendix 4.11

Using printing function

Appendix 4.12

Copying saved project data

Appendix 4.13

Using change programmable controller type function

Appendix 4.14

Using program check function

Appendix 4.15

Compatibility with GX Developer

Appendix 4.16

Compatibility with GX IEC Developer

Appendix 4.17

Compatibility with GX Configurator-QP

(Intelligent)

Key operation

Appendix 4.18

App - 56

Appendix 4.1 Before using GX Works2

Appendix 4 Precautions on GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Appendix 4.2 Supported CPU modules

The following CPU modules are supported in GX Works2.
Programmable controller type
Basic model QCPU
(Q00J, Q00, Q01)

QCPU (Q mode)

Universal model QCPU

(Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q02U, Q03UD, Q03UDE, Q04UDH, Q04UDEH, Q06UDH,
Q06UDEH, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q13UDH, Q13UDEH, Q20UDH, Q20UDEH,
Q26UDH, Q26UDEH, Q50UDEH, Q100UDEH)
Remote I/O
(QJ72LP25, QJ72BR15)

19

LCPU

L02, L02-P, L26-BT, L26-PBT, LJ72GF15-T2

FXCPU

FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FXU, FX2C, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3U,
FX3UC

The following CPU modules are supported by starting GX Developer from GX Works2.
For details of using the following CPU modules, refer to Appendix 13.
Programmable controller series

20

Programmable controller type

Process CPU
(Q12PH, Q25PH)

QCPU (A mode)

All programmable controller types

QSCPU

All programmable controller types

QnACPU

All programmable controller types

ACPU

All programmable controller types

Motion controller (SCPU)

All programmable controller types

CNC (M6, M7)

All programmable controller types

PRINTING

Redundant CPU
(Q12PRH, Q25PRH)

21
SETTING OPTIONS

QCPU (Q mode)

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

High Performance model QCPU

(Q02, Q02H, Q06H, Q12H, Q25H)

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Programmable controller series

APPENDIX

INDEX

Appendix 4.2 Supported CPU modules

App - 57

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 4.3 Unsupported features

The following table shows the features that are not supported in GX Works2.
Use GX Developer, GX Simulator, or GX Configurator for the following features.
Unsupported feature
Monitor condition/Monitor stop condition setting
Debug function for ladder program

Alternate S/W
GX Developer
GX Simulator

Timing chart monitoring function

Serial communication function

GX Simulator

Device manager function

Intelligent function module
programming function

Protocol FB support

Device initial value

Device memory registration

Password

Password registration for data in project

Cooperation with GX Explorer

Boot by GX Explorer

Cooperation with PX Developer

Boot by PX Developer

Cooperation with GX Converter

Output using GX Converter

MEDOC print format import

Import in MEDOC print format

Online

Intelligent module diagnostics from system monitor

GX Developer
GX Configurator

Sampling trace

Sampling trace conditionally on step number

GX Developer

GX Configurator-SC

GX Developer

* In addition to the features mentioned above, the following features are not supported by FXCPU.
Configuration function
Sampling trace function

App - 58

Appendix 4.3 Unsupported features

Appendix 4 Precautions on GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Appendix 4.4 Supported project types

Description

Without labels

This is the equivalent of the "Do not use label" project of GX Developer.
(1) When a project created in the "Do not use label" of GX Developer is read with GX Works2, the
project becomes the Simple project (without labels).
(2) When a project created in the Simple project (without labels) of GX Works2 is read with GX
Developer, the project becomes the "Do not use label" project.

With labels*2

This is the equivalent of the "Use label" project of GX Developer.*1

(1) When a project created in the "Use label" of GX Developer is read with GX Works2, the project
becomes the Simple project (with labels).
(2) When a project created in the Simple project (with labels) of GX Works2 is read with GX
Developer, the project becomes the "Use label" project.

Structured project*3

In GX Works2, 'structured programming' is available. The structured programming proceeds while

creating POUs and combining them (registering tasks in the program file).
The projects created in 'Structured project' of GX Works2 cannot be read with GX Developer.

*1 :

"Use label" projects of GX Developer are not supported by FXCPU.

*2 :

Not supported by FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FXU, and FX2C.

*3 :

Not supported by FX1.

20

PRINTING

Using project functions

Before using the project functions in GX Works2, please review the following precautions.
Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)

Protect projects

Change project types

By setting projects as 'read-only' with the 'Security'

function, project-by-project protection is now available.

Project types cannot be changed from

"Do not use label" to "Use label".

The following project type changes are now available.

(1) Project type change from 'Simple project (without
labels)' to 'Simple project (with labels)'
(2) Project type change from 'Simple project (with labels)'
to 'Structured project'
Direct project type change from 'Simple project
(without labels)' to 'Structured project' is not available.

Selecting [Project] [Open Other Data] [Open Other

Project] enables GX Developer format projects to be read
out.
*GX Developer starts and a project is opened when a
project of the following CPU types is specified: ACPU,
QnACPU, QCPU (A mode), Motion Controller (SCPU),
CNC (M6/M7), Process CPU, Redundant CPU, and
Safety CPU.

Read GX Developer
format projects

Read GX Configurator-

*1

QP format projects

Copy data in a project to

different projects

21

GX Works2

By installing as 'monitoring only',

projects were protected on each
personal computer.

It was enabled on the project copy

dialog.

SETTING OPTIONS

GX Developer

A
APPENDIX

Function

*1 :

19

Selecting [Project] [Open Other Data] [Read GX

Configurator-QP Data] enables GX Configurator-QP
format data to be read out.
Copy and paste is now available in the Navigation
window.

Not supported by FXCPU.

Appendix 4.4 Supported project types

App - 59

INDEX

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Project type
Simple project

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

The following table shows the supported project types in GX Works2.

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 4.5

Programming languages supported by each project type

The following table shows the programming languages that are supported by each project type of GX
Works2.
Project type

Supported programming language

Simple project

Ladder, SFC (MELSAP3, MELSAP-L)*1, SFC (FXCPU)*2

Without labels

Ladder, SFC (MELSAP3, MELSAP-L)*1, ST*1

Supported program element

With labels

Label, structure, function block

Ladder*1, ST, SFC (MELSAP3, MELSAP-L)*1, structured ladder, FBD, ST
Supported program element

Structured project

Label, structure, function block, function, library

*1 :

Not supported by FXCPU.

*2 :

Not supported by QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU.

The following programming languages are not supported in GX Works2.

Use GX Developer for the following programming languages.
Unsupported programming
language
List

App - 60

Description

Alternate S/W

(1) If GX Works2 reads out a program created with lists in GX Developer,

it can be displayed or edited in ladder.
(2) If GX Developer reads out a program created with ladder in GX
Works2, it can be displayed or edited in list.

GX Developer

Appendix 4.5 Programming languages supported by each project type

Appendix 4 Precautions on GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Using ladder language

Before using the ladder language in GX Works2, please review the following precautions.

Please use 'Label'.

18

Segment a part of program It was enabled by the 'Macro definition/

Please use 'Function Block'.
into POUs (macros)
import' function.
Pressing the
the simple find.

key on the ladder editor allows

The mode can be switched to the "Read Mode" by setting

Find/Replace instructions/ Find was enabled by directly typing an the option.
devices/labels
instruction/device/label in 'Read mode'. Set the "Use the Switching Ladder Edit Mode (Read,
Write, Monitor, Monitor (Write))" item under "Program
Editor" "Ladder" "Ladder Diagram" in the option
setting.
Check use status of
device/label

It was enabled by the 'Cross Reference

List' function and 'Device List' function.

Please select [Find/Replace] [Cross Reference], or

[Find/Replace] [Device List].

Combine programs

It was enabled by the 'Merge data'

function.

Please use the 'copy and paste' function on the ladder

editor.

Select the range specified It was enabled by left-clicking the

by drag and drop
mouse while pressing the
key.
operation

Register to Watch window

The range can be selected using only the mouse without

pressing the

pressing the

key.

20

key.

The verify result window clearly shows the following:

'unmatched area of the programs', 'only verify source
contains the program' and 'only verify destination
contains the program'.

Devices/labels in the ladder block at the cursor position

are automatically registered to the watch window.
To use this function, set "Setting for Automatic
Registration to Watch Window" under "Monitor"
"Ladder" in the option setting.

21

A
APPENDIX

Verify

It was enabled using the mouse while

19

INDEX

Select the range starting

from the cursor specified
by mouse under read
status

Selecting the frame of the target range enables the drag

and drop operation.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

It was enabled by the 'Alias' function.

GX Works2

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Program giving devices an

alias

Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)

GX Developer

PRINTING

Function

SETTING OPTIONS

Appendix 4.5 Programming languages supported by each project type

App - 61

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Using SFC language

Before using the SFC (MELSAP3) language, SFC (MELSAP-L) language or SFC (FXCPU) language in
GX Works2, please review the following precautions.
Function

Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)

GX Developer

GX Works2

Change block number

It was enabled by the 'copy and paste'

function in block list.

Each block data is displayed in the Navigation window,

and the block number can be changed in the property of
each block data.
Selecting [View] [Open SFC Blocklist] can display
the block list equivalent to that of GX Developer.

Open a start source block

by block start

No corresponding function.

Selecting [View] [Back to Start SFC Block] can open it.

Online change using SFC

program

No corresponding function.

In SFC program, online change is possible in SFC block

unit. Please execute from the menu of "Online Change".

Monitor during MELSAP-L Device monitor was enabled by a split

display format
display.

Can monitor the device by registering to watch window.

Select the range specified It was enabled by left-clicking the

by drag and drop
mouse while pressing the
key.
operation

Selecting the frame of the target range enables the drag

and drop operation.

Select the range starting

from the cursor specified
by mouse under read
status
Open operation output/
transition condition
programs
Copy and paste ladder in
Zoom editor

App - 62

It was enabled using the mouse while

The range can be selected using only the mouse without

pressing the

pressing the

key.

Ladder could not be pasted.

key.

Multiple Zooms (operation output/transition condition

data) can be simultaneously displayed.
Changing the "Setting of Zoom Display" option can
switch the display in a window in the same way as GX
Developer.
Ladder can be pasted.
However, ladder block may not be displayed properly.

Appendix 4.5 Programming languages supported by each project type

Appendix 4 Precautions on GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer

Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)

GX Developer

GX Works2

It was enabled by the 'Show assigned

device' function of label editor.

Please check on the ladder editor by selecting [View]

[Device Display].

Import/Export device
comments to labels

It was enabled by the 'device comment

import' function and 'device comment
export' function.

Please use the copy and paste on the label editor and
device comment editor.

Local pointers were assigned.

Common pointers are now assigned.

For projects with labels, points are set by default in
"Common Pointer" in the "PLC Parameter" "PLC
System" setting.
(Points set by default vary according to the
programmable controller type.)

Unusable reserved words

for label name

The definition of reserved words are different between GX Developer and GX Works2.

Using function blocks

20

Before using function blocks in GX Works2, please review the following precautions.
Function

19

Description
Function blocks created with ladder can be used for ladder program, ST
program, and SFC program operation outputs.
For FXCPU, they can be used for ladder programs only.

Use function blocks created with ladder

*When using function blocks created with ladder language for ST programs,
select [Tool] [Options], and check "Enable to Call Function Block from
Ladder to ST, or from ST to Ladder" under "Compile" "Basic Setting".
Use function blocks created with structured
ladder/FBD

Function blocks created with structured ladder/FBD can be used for

structured ladder/FBD programs and ST programs.
Function blocks created with ST can be used for ladder programs,
structured ladder/FBD programs, and ST programs.
For FXCPU, they can be used for structured ladder/FBD programs and ST
programs.

Use function blocks created with ST

*When using function blocks created with ST language for ladder programs,
select [Tool] [Options], and check "Enable to Call Function Block from
Ladder to ST, or from ST to Ladder" under "Compile" "Basic Setting".
Check the "Enable function block call from
ladder to ST and from ST to ladder" option

When the VAR_IN_OUT input variable and output variable have different
label/device, the input variable value is always equal to the output variable
value.
This function is not supported by FXCPU.

PRINTING

Use pointer type labels

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Check devices
automatically assigned
labels

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Function

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Before using labels in GX Works2, please review the following precautions.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Using labels

A
APPENDIX

INDEX

Appendix 4.5 Programming languages supported by each project type

App - 63

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 4.6 Using device comments

Before using device comments in GX Works2, please review the following precautions.
Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)

Function

GX Developer

GX Works2

Delete unused device

comments

It was enabled by the 'Delete unused

comments' function.

The 'Delete unused comments' function is supported.

Sample comment

Sample comments of special relay/

special register were provided in
project format.

Comments of special relay/special register and intelligent

function module can be imported by the 'Import from
Sample Comment' function on the device comment
editor.

It was enabled from 'Count of

The number of characters
characters per comment' function in
per comment
Setup comment range.

The number of characters per comment is fixed to 32.

Appendix 4.7 Using device memory

Before using the device memory in GX Works2, please review the following precautions.
Function

Description
Multiple device ranges can be displayed in a window.

Device memory display

*By selecting "All Range" when entering a device, all the device range can be
displayed in one window in the same way as that of GX Developer.

Copy and past device memory data to

Excel

To copy and paste device memory data to Excel, please select [Tool] [Read
from Excel File] / [Write to Excel File].

Appendix 4.8 Using device initial values

Before using device initial values in GX Works2, please review the following precautions.
Function

Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)

GX Developer

GX Works2

Maximum amount of
device initial value data to
be created

Only 1 data was able to be created.

Up to 800 data can be created.

Restriction of device
number

It was able to create within the range of

maximum points for each
programmable controller of devices.

It now can be created within the range of PLC parameter

device setting.

PLC write/read
IC memory card write/
read

Only 1 data was able to be read and

written.

Selected multiple data can be read and written.

App - 64

Appendix 4.6 Using device comments

Appendix 4 Precautions on GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer

Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)

GX Developer

GX Works2

Find All

The batch search function was not

available.

Specified Range
Replacing

The replace function is enabled within a The replace function is enabled within the selected range
range of the specified step numbers.
in a ladder program.

The batch search function is enabled by "Find All".

The following were the search targets:

1. Statements
2. Notes

The search targets are added as follows:

1. Statements
2. Notes
3. Device/Label names
4. Device/Label comments
5. Instruction names
6. Data types

Replace Device
Device Batch Replace

The following devices could not be

specified for "Find Device" or "Replace
Device":
devices with digit, index setting, or
indirect specification.

The following devices can be specified for "Find Device"

or "Replace Device":
devices with digit, index setting, or indirect specification.
Note that, however, one of the specification needs to be a
label.

Device Batch Replace

The device batch replace function is

enabled by specifying a device for
"Find Device" and a label for "Replace
Device", and specifying more than two
points for the number of points to be
replaced.

1 is the only value that can be set for the number of points
to be replaced when a label is specified for "Replace
Device".

19

PRINTING

20

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

Find String

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Function

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Before using the search/replace function in GX Works2, please review the following precautions.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Appendix 4.9 Using search/replace function

Appendix 4.9 Using search/replace function

App - 65

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 4.10 Using online function

Before using the online function in GX Works2, please review the following precautions.
Function

Connection destination
setting

Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)

GX Developer
A project was able to contain only 1
'transfer setup' information.

GX Works2
A project can contain multiple pieces of 'connection
destination' information.
To change 'connection destination' information, select
'Connection Destination' in the Navigation window.

Data write/read was not able to be

Data write/read for
executed for CPU modules and
intelligent function module
intelligent function modules at once.

Selecting [Online] [Write to PLC], allows simultaneous

data write for CPU modules and intelligent function
modules.
Selecting [Online] [Read from PLC], allows
simultaneous data read for CPU modules and intelligent
function modules.

Flash ROM data write of

CPU module

The 'PLC write (Flash ROM)' function is now integrated in

the 'Write to PLC' function.
Please select [Online] [Write to PLC].

It was enabled by the 'PLC write (Flash

ROM)' function.

Remote operation
PLC diagnostics
System monitor

Selecting [Online] [Remote Operation] and

[Diagnostics] [System Monitor] / [PLC Diagnostics]
can display the module image and the programmable
controller CPU operation status is now easy to see.
The remote operation, memory operation, and clock
setup can be started from the PLC Diagnostics screen.

System Monitor

As the system monitor function was not The system monitor function has been supported by
LCPU and the module image can be displayed by
supported by LCPU, [Diagnostics]
[System Monitor] could not be selected. selecting [Diagnostics] [System Monitor].

PLC Diagnostics

The continuation error information

display function of "PLC Diagnostics"
was not supported by LCPU.

Continuation error information can be displayed using the

"PLC Diagnostics" function of LCPU.

Register/Cancel Display
Module Menu

Registration /cancellation function of

display module menus was not
supported by LCPU.

Registration/cancellation function of display module

menus has been supported by LCPU.
Select [Online] [Register/Cancel Display Module
Menu].
Symbolic information in GX Developer format does not
include SFC programs.
Please read on the 'Simple project (without labels)'.
If symbolic information of GX Developer or GX IEC
Developer is read out, the project becomes uncompiled.

Read from PLC

The Read from PLC function in Simple projects (with

labels) and Structured projects is supported by FXCPU of
the following models only.
For FX3U/FX3UC (Version 3.00 or later)
GX Developer starts and a new project is created with
data read from the programmable controller CPU when a
programmable controller series of the following CPU
types is specified: ACPU, QnACPU, QCPU (A mode),
Motion Controller (SCPU), CNC (M6/M7), Process CPU,
Redundant CPU, and Safety CPU.

Write to PLC

App - 66

Appendix 4.10 Using online function

Writing symbolic information to programmable controller

CPU is supported by FXCPU of the following models
only.
For FX3U/FX3UC (Version 3.00 or later)

Appendix 4 Precautions on GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer

Description
The 'entry data monitor' function is now a docking window as a 'watch' function so
that it can be displayed without overlapping with the program editor.
Device/label is now enabled to be entered by dragging and dropping from the
program editor and the ON/OFF status of bit device and current values of word
device can be modified on the monitoring window.
The 'device batch monitor' and 'buffer memory batch monitor' functions are now
integrated to realize the same operability.
ON/OFF status of bit device and current values of word device can be modified on
the monitoring window.
The debug function can be executed by starting the simulation function.
The break point setting and the break device setting functions become docking
windows, and they can be displayed without overlapping the program editor.
The debug function such as step execution can be executed from the debug
function toolbar.

Debug function*1

The STEP-RUN switch is not displayed on the GX Simulator2 screen. The

operating status of the simulation switches to STEP-RUN automatically by
executing the debug function from the debug function toolbar.

*1 :

20

Not supported by FXCPU.

PRINTING

Appendix 4.12 Using printing function

Before using the printing function in GX Works2, please review the following precautions.
Function

21

Description

Additional information print such as

statement or device comment

For the Print Window function, displayed image is subject to print/print window
preview.
To print with additional information such as statement or device comment, please
put the desired information on the screen and then select [Project] [Print
Window] / [Print Window Preview].

A
APPENDIX

Appendix 4.13 Copying saved project data

Before copying project data saved in GX Works2, please review the following precautions.
Function

Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)

GX Developer

GX Works2
Please copy all the workspace name folders and
"workspacelist.xml" created in the same hierarchy as the
workspace name folders.

Copy saved project data

19

Save project data was able to be

copied by copying files under the
project name folder.

SETTING OPTIONS

Device batch monitoring

Buffer batch monitoring

18

*When only workspace name folders or project name

folders are copied, it is enabled to open the project in the
copy destination.
However, if saving after editing, the workspace name and
the project name need to be specified again.
A project data can be copied by saving data as a single
project with the "Save as a Single File Format Project"
function on the Save As screen.

Appendix 4.11 Using monitor/debug function

App - 67

INDEX

Entry data monitor

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Function

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Before using the monitor/debug function in GX Works2, please review the following precautions.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Appendix 4.11 Using monitor/debug function

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 4.14 Using PLC type change function

Before using the PLC type change function in GX Works2, please review the following precautions.
Function
Use PLC type change
function

Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)

GX Developer
Intelligent function module data could
not be transmitted.

GX Works2
Intelligent function module data can be transmitted in
PLC type conversion of Q series PLC and L series PLC.

Appendix 4.15 Using program check function

Before using the program check function in GX Works2, please review the following precautions.
Function

Program check

App - 68

Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)

GX Developer
Programs which follow the END
instruction and do not affect sequence
control were checked.

Appendix 4.14 Using PLC type change function

GX Works2
Programs which affect sequence control up to the END
instruction are checked.
Programs which follow the END instruction and do not
affect sequence control are not checked.

Appendix 4 Precautions on GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer

Function names of ST language are different between GX Developer and

GX Works2. Please compile and correct errors.
For a program which contains a utilized FB, the compiled program is not
identical with the program compiled with GX Developer.
To conform the compiled program to that compiled with GX Developer,
select [Tool] [Options] "Compile" "Basic Setting" and uncheck
"Enable function block call from ladder to ST and from ST to ladder" in
"Function Block Call".
Open other project

For Q00UJ, Q00U, and Q01U projects, a compilation error may occur if the
string type is used for the boolean expression (conditional expression) in
the conditional syntax or iteration syntax of the ST program.
When an error occurs, create a ladder with a string comparison function
block whose operation result is a boolean value, and correct the program
by using this operation result for the failed boolean expression (conditional
expression) in the conditional syntax or iteration syntax.
The setting of 'steps secured for Online program change' which is set on
the [Read from PLC]/[Write to PLC] screen of GX Developer is not set.
Set the setting of 'steps secured for Online program change' on the [Read
from PLC]/[Write to PLC] screen after performing the Open Other Project
function in GX Works2.

(2) Compiled Simple project (with labels)*1

Note: Projects using labels in SFC language are executed.

Export to GX Developer format file

19

20

PRINTING

Target projects are:

(1) Simple project (without labels)

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Description
Before opening a GX Developer "Use label" project of which a program and
function block have the same name, please change the data name in GX
Developer.

To execute, the following requirements must NOT be satisfied in the global

label settings.
(1) No device is set.
(2) The lengths of label name exceeds 16 characters.
(3) Label name contains a device name or reserved word.
(4) An invalid character is used.
(5) Data type that is not supported by GX Developer is used.
(6) A value that is not constant is used in the constant.
Data registered to the global label is set as "Auto External" for all the local
labels.

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Function

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

For the compatibility between GX Developer and GX Works2, please review the following precautions.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Appendix 4.16 Compatibility with GX Developer

Projects which include inline structured text cannot be saved in GX

Developer format.
APPENDIX

Not supported by FXCPU.

INDEX

*1 :

Appendix 4.16 Compatibility with GX Developer

App - 69

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 4.17 Compatibility with GX IEC Developer

For the compatibility between GX IEC Developer and GX Works2, please review the following
precautions. Projects for FXCPU created with GX IEC Developer cannot be opened with GX Works2.
Function

Description

Open other project

Function names of ST language are different between GX IEC Developer and GX Works2.
Please compile and correct errors.

User library

Before using GX IEC Developer user libraries with passwords enabled, please disable the
passwords in GX IEC Developer.

Appendix 4.18 Key operation

This section explains the differences of key operation between GX Developer and GX Works2.
Function

Edit

Read mode

Change to the read mode.

Write mode

Change to the write mode.

Cross reference
Find/
Replace Device List

View

GX Works2

*1

Display the cross reference.

Display the device list.

Switch between project data list

and window

Switch the project data list and

each window.

Switch ladder/list

Switch the ladder window/list

window.

Start Monitor (all

windows)

Execute the ladder monitoring

for all the opened programs.

Monitor (write mode)

Change to the write mode

during ladder monitoring.

Stop monitor (all

windows)

Stop the ladder monitoring for

all the opened programs.

Device test

Execute the device forced

ON/OFF or the current value
modification.

Skip execution

Run selected sequence

programs in skip execution.

Partial execution

Run sequence programs

partially.

Step run

Run the programmable

controller CPU in step run.

Perform remote operations.

Debug

Remote operation

*1

Switch display/non-display of
project data list.

Online

App - 70

Shortcut key
GX Developer

Project data list

Monitor

*1 :

Description

+
+

+
+

*1

In GX Works2, set the "Use the Switching Ladder Edit Mode (Read, Write, Monitor, Monitor (Write))" item
under "Program Editor" "Ladder" "Ladder Diagram" in the option setting to switch the read mode/
write mode of the ladder editor and the SFC editor.

Appendix 4.17 Compatibility with GX IEC Developer

Appendix 5 Compatibility with Projects Created with Existing Applications

Compatibility with Projects Created with Existing Applications

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains the compatibility of GX Works2 projects with projects created with existing applications.

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Appendix 5

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18
Appendix 5.1 Application compatibility
Reading projects created with existing application to GX Works2

Basic model QCPU

High Performance model QCPU
Q03UD, Q04UDH, and Q06UDH

Application
GX Developer Version 8.00A or later

U*1

GX IEC Developer Version 7.00A or later

GX Developer Version 8.45X or later

U*1

GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D

GX Developer Version 8.48A or later

Q02U

Reading
applicability

U*1

GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D

Q13UDH and Q26UDH

Q03UDE, Q04UDEH, Q06UDEH, Q13UDEH, and
Q26UDEH

GX Developer Version 8.62Q or later

U*1

GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D

GX Developer Version 8.68W or later

U*1

GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D

Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH,

Q20UDH, and Q20UDEH

GX Developer Version 8.76E or later

U*1

L02, L26-BT

GX Developer Version 8.88S or later

U*1

FX3U and FX3UC

GX Developer Version 8.25B or later

FX3G

GX Developer Version 8.72A or later

FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FXU, FX2C, FX1S, FX1N,

FX1NC, FX2N, and FX2NC

GX Developer Version 8.00A or later

*1 :

21

When MELSAP-L format SFC programs are read with Version 1.24A or earlier, they are opened
in the MELSAP3 format.

Appendix 5.1 Application compatibility

App - 71

APPENDIX

Programmable controller type

PRINTING

: Applicable
U: Applicable with restrictions

20

SETTING OPTIONS

The following table shows the applicability of reading project files created with existing applications to
GX Works2.
Projects and data created with the CPU types or programming languages not supported by GX
Works2 cannot be read.
When ST programs created with GX Developer are read to GX Works2, they are opened as
Structured projects with Version 1.08J or earlier and opened as Simple projects with Version 1.12N or
later.
(For the method for reading projects created with existing applications, refer to the following section.
Section 4.7)

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

Reading projects created with GX Developer and IEC Developer

INDEX

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Reading projects created with GX Configurator

GX Configurator flash ROM setting saved files (*.UMD) cannot be read in GX Works2.
To use GX Configurator flash ROM setting saved files in GX Works2, write the data to the intelligent
function module with GX Configurator, and then read the data using GX Works2.
(Reading intelligent function module data
Section 12.1.4)

Reading projects created with GX Works2 to existing applications

Reading projects using GX Developer and IEC Developer

Projects created with GX Works2 can be read to GX Developer by saving them using "Export to GX
Developer Format File". (
Section 4.7)
Reading projects to GX IEC Developer or non-Windows applications such as GPPQ is not possible.
When reading projects with GX Developer, application versions that can read projects differ
depending on the programmable controller type of the project. The following table shows the relation
between the programmable controller types of project and the read-applicable versions.
: Applicable
U: Applicable with restrictions
Programmable controller type

Application

Reading
applicability

Basic model QCPU

High Performance model QCPU

GX Developer Version 8.00A or later

U*1

Q03UD, Q04UDH, and Q06UDH

GX Developer Version 8.45X or later

U*1

Q02U

GX Developer Version 8.48A or later

U*1

Q13UDH and Q26UDH

GX Developer Version 8.62Q or later

U*1

Q03UDE, Q04UDEH, Q06UDEH, Q13UDEH, and

Q26UDEH

GX Developer Version 8.68W or later

U*1

Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH,

Q20UDH, and Q20UDEH

GX Developer Version 8.76E or later

U*1

L02, L26-BT

GX Developer Version 8.88S or later

U*1

FX3U and FX3UC

GX Developer Version 8.25B or later

FX3G

GX Developer Version 8.72A or later

FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FXU, FX2C, FX1S, FX1N,

FX1NC, FX2N, and FX2NC

GX Developer Version 8.00A or later

*1 :

For the restrictions in reading, refer to "SW D5[ ]-GPPW Compatibility" of the GX Developer
Operating Manual.

Reading projects using GX Configurator

As projects cannot be saved in formats such as the GX Configurator-QP format or the GX
Configurator flash ROM setting saved file format (*.UMD) in GX Works2, data set in GX Works2
cannot be read using GX Configurator.
To use GX Works2 data in GX Configurator, write the data to the intelligent function module with GX
Works2, and then read the data using GX Configurator.
(Writing intelligent function module data
Section 12.1.4)

App - 72

Appendix 5.1 Application compatibility

Appendix 6 Compatibility of Data Read from Programmable Controller CPU

Head

FX

Appendix 6.1 Application compatibility

Reading data written in the programmable controller CPU using existing
applications to GX Works2

19

The following table shows the applicability of reading data written in the programmable controller CPU
using existing applications to GX Works2.
Data created with the CPU types or programming languages not supported by GX Works2 cannot be
read.
: Applicable
U: Applicable with restrictions
Programmable controller type
Basic model QCPU
High Performance model QCPU
Q03UD, Q04UDH, and Q06UDH

Application
GX Developer Version 8.00A or later

Q02U

U*1
U*1

21

GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D

GX Developer Version 8.48A or later

U*1

GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D

Q13UDH and Q26UDH

U*1

GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D

GX Developer Version 8.68W or later

U*1

GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D

Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH,

Q20UDH, and Q20UDEH

GX Developer Version 8.48A or later

L02, L26-BT

GX Developer Version 8.88S or later

U*1

FX3U and FX3UC

GX Developer Version 8.25B or later

FX3G

GX Developer Version 8.72A or later

FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC

GX Developer Version 6.00A or later

APPENDIX

Q03UDE, Q04UDEH, Q06UDEH, Q13UDEH, and

Q26UDEH

GX Developer Version 8.62Q or later

20

Reading
applicability

GX IEC Developer Version 7.00A or later

GX Developer Version 8.45X or later

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

This section explains the compatibility between the data written in the programmable controller CPU using GX
Developer or GX IEC Developer and the data read using GX Works2.

PRINTING

Q CPU L CPU Remote

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Compatibility of Data Read from Programmable Controller CPU

SETTING OPTIONS

Appendix 6

FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FXU, FX2C, FX2N, and

FX2NC

GX Developer Version 2.00A or later

When MELSAP-L format SFC programs are read with Version 1.24A or earlier, they are opened
in the MELSAP3 format.
INDEX

*1 :

*1

Appendix 6.1 Application compatibility

App - 73

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Reading data written in the programmable controller CPU using GX Works2 to

existing applications

The following table shows the applicability of reading data written in the programmable controller CPU
using GX Works2 to existing applications.
Data created with the CPU types or programming languages not supported in existing applications
cannot be read.
U: Applicable with restrictions
Programmable controller type
Basic model QCPU
High Performance model QCPU
Q03UD, Q04UDH, and Q06UDH

GX Developer Version 8.00A or later

GX IEC Developer Version 7.00A or later
GX Developer Version 8.45X or later
GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D
GX Developer Version 8.48A or later

Q02U

GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D

Q13UDH and Q26UDH

Q03UDE,Q04UDEH,Q06UDEH,Q13UDEH, and
Q26UDEH

App - 74

Application

GX Developer Version 8.62Q or later

GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D
GX Developer Version 8.68W or later
GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D

Reading
applicability
U*1, *2, *4
U*3
U*1, *2, *4
U*3
U*1, *2, *4
U*3
U*1, *2, *4
U*3
U*1, *2, *4
U*3

Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH,

Q20UDH, and Q20UDEH

GX Developer Version 8.48A or later

U*1, *2, *4

L02, L26-BT

GX Developer Version 8.88S or later

U*1, *2, *4

FX3U and FX3UC

GX Developer Version 8.25B or later

U*1, *5

FX3G

GX Developer Version 8.72A or later

U*1

FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC

GX Developer Version 6.00A or later

U*1

FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FXU, FX2C, FX2N, and

FX2NC

GX Developer Version 2.00A or later

U*1

*1 :

Only execution programs can be read when programs written in Simple project (with labels) or
Structured project are read from the programmable controller CPU.
They can be displayed/edited in ladder or list.

*2 :

Programs cannot be read to GX Developer Version 8.03D or later if projects are opened with the
setting of "Use label". To enable reading of programs to GX Developer Version 8.03D or later,
create projects without the "Use label" setting.

*3 :

Only execution programs can be read.

They can be displayed/edited as MELSEC-IL programs.

*4 :

When structured ladder/FBD or ST programs are read from a programmable controller CPU
using existing applications, there may be cases where ladders cannot be restored. Be sure to
check the programs after they have been read from the programmable controller CPU using
existing applications.
When programs are read from a programmable controller CPU using GX Developer, ladder
blocks which cannot be displayed as ladders are displayed in yellow.

*5 :

When a project in which a block password with the validated setting for "Read-protect the
execution program" exists is written, the execution program cannot be read.

Appendix 6.1 Application compatibility

Appendix 6 Compatibility of Data Read from Programmable Controller CPU

The following table shows the reading applicability depending on the label setting when reading data
written in the programmable controller CPU using GX Developer to GX Works2.
Data created with the CPU types or programming languages not supported by GX Works2 cannot be
read.
Reading data with labels

Project type of GX Works2

Data
Label program
(GX Developer format symbolic
information)
Ladder program
SFC program
ST Program
Parameter

Device comment

With labels

Structured
project

U*3,*5

U*3,*5

U*4

*5

*5

U*1,*2

*3

*3

U*4

*5

*5

PLC/Network/Remote password

21

Intelligent function module parameter

Common comment
(Global device comment)
Comment by program
(Local device comment)

Device memory

Device memory

Device initial value

Device initial value

*1 :

When MELSAP-L format SFC programs are read with Version 1.24A or earlier, they are opened in the
MELSAP3 format.

*2 :

Block statements written with GX Developer are read as SFC block comments in GX Works2.

*3 :

SFC programs are not included in label programs of GX Developer. Use 'Simple project (without labels)'
when reading programs in GX Works2.

*4 :

When a ladder program or ST program, in which labels of GX Developer are used, is read in Simple
program (without labels), it becomes a ladder program without labels. By editing this ladder program and
writing it to a programmable controller CPU again, this program becomes inconsistent with the label
program written to a programmable controller CPU using GX Developer.

Ladder programs and ST programs, in which labels of GX Developer are used, are included in label
programs. Read GX Developer format symbolic information when reading programs in GX Works2.
INDEX

*5 :

20

SETTING OPTIONS

Program

Simple project
Without labels

PRINTING

: Applicable
U: Applicable with restrictions
: Not applicable

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

This function is not supported by FXCPU.

Label program

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Reading data written in the programmable controller CPU using GX Developer to

GX Works2

APPENDIX

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Appendix 6.2 Data compatibility

Appendix 6.2 Data compatibility

App - 75

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Reading data without labels (QCPU (Q mode))

: Applicable
U: Applicable with restrictions
: Not applicable
Project type of GX Works2
Data

Simple project
Without labels

Program

Parameter

Device comment

With labels

Structured
project

Ladder program
SFC program

U*1, *2

PLC/Network/Remote password
Intelligent function module parameter
Common comment
(Global device comment)
Comment by program
(Local device comment)

Device memory

Device memory

Device initial value

Device initial value

*1 :

When MELSAP-L format SFC programs are read with Version 1.24A or earlier, they are opened in the
MELSAP3 format.

*2 :

Block statements written with GX Developer are read as SFC block comments in GX Works2.

Reading data without labels (FXCPU)

: Applicable
: Not applicable
Project type of GX Works2
Data

Simple project
Without labels

With labels

Structured
project

Parameter

PLC parameter

Program

Program

Common comment
(Global device comment)

Device comment

Device memory

App - 76

Comment by program
(Local device comment)
Device memory

Appendix 6.2 Data compatibility

Appendix 6 Compatibility of Data Read from Programmable Controller CPU

Project type of GX Works2

Data

Simple project
Without labels

With labels

Structured
project

U*2

PLC parameter
Parameter

Network parameter
Intelligent function module parameter

Program

Program file

Symbolic
information
(Symbolic data)

*1 :

Only actual programs are read.

*2 :

Programs which contain data not supported by GX Works2 cannot be read.

FXCPU
: Applicable
: Not applicable
Simple project
(Without labels)

Structured project

Parameter

PLC parameter

Program

Program file

Symbolic
information
(Symbolic data)

19

20

21

Project type of GX Works2

Data

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

: Applicable
U: Applicable with restrictions
: Not applicable

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

QCPU (Q mode)

PRINTING

The following table shows the applicability of reading data written in the programmable controller CPU
using GX IEC Developer to GX Works2.
Data created with the CPU types or programming languages not supported by GX Works2 cannot be
read.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Reading data written in the programmable controller CPU using GX IEC

Developer to GX Works2

SETTING OPTIONS

APPENDIX

INDEX

Appendix 6.2 Data compatibility

App - 77

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Reading data written in the programmable controller CPU using GX Works2 to

existing applications

The following table shows the applicability of reading data written in the programmable controller CPU
using GX Works2 to existing applications.
Data created with the CPU types or programming languages not supported by existing applications
cannot be read.
QCPU (Q mode)
: Applicable
U: Applicable with restrictions
: Not applicable
Data
Symbolic information
Program

Parameter

Device comment

Device memory

*1 :
*2 :
*3 :
*4 :

*5 :

Program/Program file
SFC program/ SFC program file

Existing applications
GX Developer

GX IEC Developer

U*1, *2, *4

U*3

U *2, *5

PLC/Network/Remote password
Intelligent function module parameter
Global device comment
(Common comment)

Local device comment

(Comment by program)

Device memory

Only execution programs can be read.

They can be displayed/edited in ladder or list.
Programs cannot be read to GX Developer Version 8.03D or later if projects are opened with the setting of
"Use label". To enable reading of programs to GX Developer Version 8.03D or later, create projects without
the "Use label" setting.
Only execution programs can be read.
They can be displayed/edited as MELSEC-IL programs.
When structured ladder/FBD or ST programs are read from a programmable controller CPU using existing
applications, they are read as ladders, but there may be cases where the ladders cannot be restored. Be
sure to check the programs after they have been read from the programmable controller CPU using
existing applications.
When programs are read from a programmable controller CPU using GX Developer, ladder blocks which
cannot be displayed as ladders are displayed in yellow.
SFC block titles set in "Simple project (with labels)" are not restored when programs are read from a
programmable controller CPU in GX Developer. They are restored when the device comments are read
using GX Developer, after they have been set to the BL device and written in GX Works2.

FXCPU
: Applicable
: Not applicable
Data
Symbolic information

Program

Program file

Parameter

PLC parameter

Device comment

Device memory

*1 :

App - 78

Existing applications
GX Developer

GX IEC Developer

*1

Global device comment

(Common comment)
Local device comment
(Comment by program)
Device memory

Only execution programs can be read.

They can be displayed/edited as MELSEC-IL programs.

Appendix 6.2 Data compatibility

Appendix 7 Compatibility with Existing Applications

Handling GX Works2 Version 1.08J projects in GX Works2 Version 1.05F or

earlier
Function

Precaution

Open

Projects for Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q20UDH, Q20UDEH, and FXCPU cannot
be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.05F.
Projects whose path includes a semicolon (;) cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.05F.
Before opening a project in GX Works2 Version 1.05F, perform 'Save As' with GX Works2 Version
1.08J or later so that its path does not include a semicolon (;).

Project Revision

The project revision function cannot be used when the length the full path of the project file
(Project.gd2) exceeds 256 bytes.
Before using the project revision function with GX Works2 Version 1.05F, perform 'Save As' in GX
Works2 Version 1.08J or later so that the length of the project file is 255 bytes or less.

Parameter

Projects cannot be handled in GX Works2 Version 1.05F when the following parameters are set.
When the duplicated network number is specified for 'Network No.' of the CC IE Control on the
Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET module configuration screen.
When any of 'Twist' is selected for MELSECNET/H in the baud rate setting on the Ethernet/CC IE/
MELSECNET module configuration screen.
When "Use serial communication" is checked in the serial communication setting with Q02U.
When the PLC module change setting in the PLC system setting is specified with Universal model
QCPU.
When index registers are specified as local devices in the device setting with Universal model
QCPU.
When "Socket Communication" is selected for 'Open System' in the open setting of the built-in
Ethernet port setting in projects with Built-in Ethernet port QCPU.
When an instruction added due to Universal model QCPU (the first five digits of the serial number is
'10102' or higher) compatible is used in a project, an instruction code error occurs as the project is
opened in GX Works2 Version 1.05F.

19

20

21

INDEX

Instruction

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

This section explains the precautions when handling GX Works2 projects in older version of GX
Works2.
Read the precautions in each following item to handle projects.
Note that, according to the combination of project-created version and project-handled version,
precautions for both versions need to be read.
For example, when handling the GX Works2 Version 1.08J project in GX Works2 Version 1.05F or
earlier, read the precautions of ' Handling GX Works2 Version 1.08J projects in GX Works2 Version
1.05F or earlier' and ' Handling GX Works2 Version 1.12N projects in GX Works2 Version 1.08J or
earlier'.

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

FX

PRINTING

Head

SETTING OPTIONS

Q CPU L CPU Remote

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Compatibility with Existing Applications

APPENDIX

Appendix 7

App - 79

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Handling GX Works2 Version 1.12N projects in GX Works2 Version 1.08J or

earlier
Function

Precaution

Open

Simple projects (with labels) written in ST language cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.08J
or earlier.
Projects that include inline structured text programs cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.08J
or earlier.
Simple projects (with labels) for FXCPU or projects for the FXCPU containing the SFC language
cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.08J or earlier.

Intelligent function module

data

Newly added items in data of Q62AD-DGH/Q66AD-DG module cannot be displayed and changed in
GX Works2 Version 1.08J or earlier. In addition, data of items newly added since Version 1.10L or
later may be lost when data are written to the module in GX Works2 Version 1.05F or earlier.

Write to PLC/Read from

PLC

Symbolic information of projects which include inline structured text programs and are created and
written to the programmable controller CPU in GX Works2 Version 1.12N or later cannot be read from
the programmable controller CPU.

Handling GX Works2 Version 1.15R projects in GX Works2 Version 1.12N or

earlier
Function

Precaution

Open

When a project is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.12N or earlier, system labels are read as global
labels.
If a project which is saved after rows of global label are moved or deleted in GX Works2 Version
1.12N or earlier, is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.15R or later, the relation with system labels is
disabled.
If a project which is saved after global labels are edited in GX Works2 Version 1.12N or earlier, is
opened in GX Works2 Version 1.15R or later, the relation with system labels can be resolved by
executing the verification synchronous function.
Contact instructions newly added for structured ladder and ST are not supported by GX Works2
Version 1.12N or earlier. A project which contains newly added contact instructions cannot be
opened in GX Works2 Version 1.12N or earlier even if they have already been deleted.

Connection destination
setting

When a project is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.12N or earlier, the connection destination setting
to use the GOT (Ethernet) transparent is changed. Reconfigure the connection destination setting
according to the actual communication route.

Write to PLC/Read from

PLC

Symbolic information of projects which contain contact instructions newly added for structured ladder
and ST cannot be read from the programmable controller CPU in GX Works2 Version 1.12N or
earlier.

Library

A user library which contains contact instructions newly added for structured ladder and ST cannot be
opened in GX Works2 Version 1.12N or earlier.

App - 80

Appendix 7 Compatibility with Existing Applications

Function

Precaution

Open

Projects for LCPU cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.15R or earlier.

Simple projects (with labels) for FXCPU that include inline structured text programs cannot be
opened in GX Works2 Version 1.15R or earlier.

Intelligent function module

data

When a project which contains the switch setting of Q62DA-FG/Q66DA-G module set to "4 to 20mA
(extended mode)" or "1 to 5V (extended mode)" is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.15R or earlier, the
setting is reset to default ("4 to 20mA").

Connection destination
setting

When a project for FX3U/FX3UC is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.15R or earlier, the connection
destination setting which is set for the Ethernet connection is reset to default.
Reconfigure the connection destination setting according to the actual communication route.

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Handling GX Works2 Version 1.24A projects in GX Works2 Version 1.15R or

earlier

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Function

Precaution

Parameter

Projects cannot be handled in GX Works2 Version 1.24A or earlier when "CC IE Field (Master
Station)" or "CC IE Field (Local Station)" is set in the network parameter.

Intelligent function module

data

When a project which contains LD62, LD62D, LD75D4, LD75P4, or LD77MH4 is opened in GX
Works2 Version 1.24A or earlier, these modules become reserved modules.
Projects cannot be handled in GX Works2 Version 1.24A or earlier when "Disconnection detection
mode setting" and "Disconnection detection setting value" are set in the parameter setting of
Q62DA-FG module.
Projects cannot be handled in GX Works2 Version 1.24A or earlier when the following parameters
are set in the parameter setting of QJ71C24N/QJ71C24N-R2.
The echo back permit/prohibit specification or execution history option specification in the
various control specification
The predefined protocol function error code, send data storage area or receive data storage area
in the auto refresh

20

21

A
APPENDIX

Open

Projects for Q50UDEH, Q100UDEH, and LJ72GF15-T2 cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version
1.24A or earlier.
Projects for LCPU in which system labels are set cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.24A or
earlier.
When "MELSAP-L (Instruction Format)" or "MELSAP-L (Start Conditions Format)" is selected as
the SFC display format, SFC is opened as MELSAP3 in GX Works2 Version 1.24A or earlier.

PRINTING

Handling GX Works2 Version 1.31H projects in GX Works2 Version 1.24A or

earlier

SETTING OPTIONS

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

INDEX

App - 81

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Handling GX Works2 Version 1.40S projects in GX Works2 Version 1.31H or

earlier
Function

Precaution

Open

Projects for remote I/O module cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.31H or earlier.
Projects for Universal model QCPU (except for Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, Q02U) in which "Act at Block
Multi-Activated" is set for SFC program property cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.31H or
earlier.
Be aware the following precautions when handling a project in which system labels are used for
FXCPU,
System labels are read as global labels when a project is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.12N or
earlier. If a project in which rows of global label are moved or deleted is saved in GX Works2
Version 1.12N or earlier, the relation with system labels is disabled.
If a project is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.15R - 1.40S, system label information is resolved,
but the operations related to system label functions cannot be performed.
If a project which is saved after global labels are edited in GX Works2 Version 1.31H or earlier, is
opened in GX Works2 Version 1.40S or later, the relation with system labels can be resolved by
executing the verification synchronous function.

Connection destination
setting

When a project in which the communication route via Ethernet adapter module is set is opened in GX
Works2 Version 1.31H or earlier, the communication route is changed to programmable controller
direct coupled setting.

Parameter

Projects cannot be handled in GX Works2 Version 1.31H or earlier when the number of points
between 1K (1024) and 7K (7168) or exceeds 8K (8192) is set for S device in the PLC parameter.
When a project in which "CC IE Control Ext. Mode (Control Station)" or "CC IE Control Ext. Mode
(Normal Station)" is set in the network parameter is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.31H or earlier,
the setting is deleted.

Device comment

For Universal model QCPU, when a project in which bit-specified word device comments are set is
opened in GX Works2 Version 1.31H or earlier, the bit-specified word device comments are deleted.

Build

When a project in which the same name is used for data name and label name is opened and
compiled in GX Works2 Version 1.31H or earlier, a C4110 error occurs. Compile the program after
changing the data name and label name.
When a project in which devices set for Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting are used is opened
and compiled in GX Works2 Version 1.31H or earlier, an error occurs. Compile the program after
changing the devices not to overlap with the ones set for Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting.

App - 82

Appendix 7 Compatibility with Existing Applications

Connection destination
setting

When a project in which the communication route via CC-Link IE Field Network board is set is
opened in GX Works2 Version 1.44W or earlier, the communication route is changed to
programmable controller direct coupled setting.
When a project in which the communication route via GOT from Ethernet board is set is opened in
GX Works2 Version 1.44W or earlier, the PLC side I/F of the connection destination setting is
changed to CPU module. "GOT Transparent" is displayed on the status bar. This change does not
affect the communication, however, correct the connection destination setting according to the
actual communication route.

Write to PLC/Read from

PLC

When a ladder program whose "Display Connection of Ladder Diagram" setting is set to more than
13 is read from a programmable controller CPU using GX Works2 Version 1.44W or earlier, the
program is displayed as an improper ladder program.
When a project which is written to a programmable controller CPU using the high-speed mode is
read from the programmable controller CPU using GX Works2 Version 1.44W or earlier, the
symbolic information cannot be read.

Language selection

When a project with a condition described as follows is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.44W or
earlier, the operation is not ensured.
A language other than Japanese is selected, and characters other than one-byte characters are
used.
More than two types of two-byte characters are mixed.

Handling GX Works2 Version 1.53F projects in GX Works2 Version 1.49B or

earlier
Function

Precaution

Open

A project in which multiple devices are selected in the device/label automatic-assign setting cannot
be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.49B or earlier.

Intelligent function module

data

When a project which contains QJ71MT91 or QJ71MB91 is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.49B or
earlier, the module becomes a reserved module.

Connection destination
setting

When a project in which the communication route via CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module
is set for LCPU is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.49B or earlier, the communication route is
changed to programmable controller direct coupled setting.

Parameter

When a project in which "CC IE Field (Master Station)" and "CC IE Field (Local Station)" are set in the
network parameter of LCPU is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.49B or earlier, the network
parameters are changed to default settings.

Write to PLC/Read from

PLC

A project in which multiple devices are selected in the device/label automatic-assign setting cannot
be read from a programmable controller CPU in GX Works2 Version 1.49B or earlier.

App - 83

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

When a project which contains QD65PD2 or LD77MH16 is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.44W or
earlier, the module becomes a reserved module.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Intelligent function module

data

18

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Open

When a ladder program whose "Display Connection of Ladder Diagram" setting is set to more than
13 is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.44W or earlier, the program is read with the 11 contacts as
the number of displayed contacts.
An FXCPU Simple project (with labels) which contains multiple programs cannot be opened in GX
Works2 Version 1.44W or earlier.
Even when an FXCPU Simple project (with labels) contains only a single program, if the program
data name is not "MAIN", the project cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.44W or earlier.

20

PRINTING

Precaution

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Function

17

A
APPENDIX

Handling GX Works2 Version 1.48A projects in GX Works2 Version 1.44W or

earlier

INDEX

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Handling GX Works2 Version 1.62Q projects in GX Works2 Version 1.55H or

earlier
Function

Precaution

Open

Structured projects in which the operation to display/hide the left power rail is performed on the
structured ladder/FBD editor cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.55H or earlier.
For FXCPU, a project in which a block password with the validated setting for "Read-protect the
execution program" exists cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.55H or earlier.

Intelligent function
module data

A project which contains Q64TCTTN, Q64TCTTBWN, Q64TCRTN, or Q64TCRTBWN opens as a

project of Q64TCTTN, Q64TCTTBWN, Q64TCRTN, Q64TCRTBWN respectively.
Added items cannot be displayed or changed in GX Works2 Version 1.55H or earlier.
When a project which contains L60TCTT4, L60TCTT4BW, L60TCRT4, or L60TCRT4BW is
opened in GX Works2 Version 1.55H or earlier, those modules become reserved modules.

Parameter

When the simple PLC communication setting is set in the PLC parameter of LCPU, the project
cannot be handled in GX Works2 Version 1.55H or earlier.
When the serial communication setting is set in the PLC parameter of QnUD(H)CPU, the project
cannot be handled in GX Works2 Version 1.55H or earlier.

Handling GX Works2 Version 1.64S projects in GX Works2 Version 1.62Q or

earlier
Function

Precaution

Parameter

Projects cannot be handled in GX Works2 Version 1.62Q or earlier when the following parameters
are set.
When "Hub Module" is set for the I/O assignment setting on PLC parameter of LCPU.

Intelligent function
module data

When a project which contains QD75P1N, QD75P2N, QD75P4N, QD75D1N, QD75D2N, or

QD75D4N is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.62Q or earlier, these modules become reserved
modules.

Device comment

For LCPU, when a project in which bit-specified word device comments are set is opened in GX
Works2 Version 1.62Q or earlier, the bit-specified word device comments are deleted.

Print

String patterns are printed as character strings when a project in which string pattern is set to the
header/footer is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.62Q or earlier. Delete the entered string patterns
and set the setting again.

Write to PLC/Read from

PLC

For projects of LCPU, device comment files which contain bit-specified comments cannot be read
from the programmable controller CPU in GX Works2 Version 1.62Q or earlier.

App - 84

Appendix 8 Restrictions When Saving Projects in GX Developer Format

Head
FX

FX

This section explains the restrictions applied when saving projects in GX Developer format.
In cases other than those listed below when data cannot be saved, a message is displayed, and saving is
canceled. In such cases, follow the instructions of the message.
GX Works2 data

Deleted.

Comment

Deleted.

Intelligent function module data

Data other than intelligent function module parameters (initial setting, auto
refresh) are deleted.
QD75P1N, QD75P2N, QD75P4N, QD75D1N, QD75D2N, and QD75D4N are
saved as QD75P1, QD75P2, QD75P4, QD75D1, QD75D2, and QD75D4
respectively.

Comment

Deleted.

Label

Data name

A fixed character string (label) is created to combine data into one unit.

Title

Deleted.

Comment

Deleted.
Comment

The 65th and later characters are deleted.

If a line feed is entered, delete anything following the line feed.

Remarks

Deleted.

FB instance

Deleted.

System label information

Deleted.

Comment

Deleted.

Label*1

Comment
FB instance

Comment

*1

SFC

block*1

Device Comment
Device Memory

21

The 65th and later characters are deleted.

If a line feed is entered, delete anything following the line feed.

*2

Deleted .
Deleted.

Comment

The 65th and later characters are deleted.

If a line feed is entered, delete anything following the line feed.

FB instance

Deleted*2.

Label

SFC program*1

20

The data are combined into one unit.

Label

Program

The 65th and later characters are deleted.

If a line feed is entered, delete anything following the line feed.

Number of data

Global Label*1

FB*1

Comment

19

PRINTING

Structured Data
Types*1

Comment

SETTING OPTIONS

Intelligent function
module

The 33rd and later characters are deleted.

Comment

Deleted.

Data name

Deleted.

Comment

Converted to a block statement.

(Characters exceeding 10 lines times 65 characters are deleted.)

Comment

Deleted.

Comment

Deleted.

Duplicated devices

Latter device is preferred.

APPENDIX

Parameter

Title

18

INDEX

Project

Restrictions

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Q CPU L CPU Remote

17

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Restrictions When Saving Projects in GX Developer Format

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Appendix 8

*1 :

Not supported by FXCPU.

*2 :

The function block instances created for global labels in GX Works2 are created as local labels in GX Developer. However,
in GX Developer, the function block instances are not displayed on the local label setting screen.

App - 85

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 8.1 ST instruction table for GX Works2 and GX Developer

Instructions that can be used in ST programs differ in between GX Works2 and GX Developer. As a
result, an error may occur when a project that includes an ST program and is saved in GX Developer
format is read and compiled with GX Developer. In such case, correct the ST program in accordance
with the following table.
GX Works2

GX Developer

GX Works2

GX Developer

GX Works2

GX Developer

BACOS

BACOS_MD

DGRY

DGRY_M

NDIS

NDIS_M

BAND

BAND_MD

DI

DI_M

NEG

NEG_M

BASIN

BASIN_MD

DINC

DINC_M

NUNI

NUNI_M

BATAN

BATAN_MD

DIS

DIS_M

OUT

OUT_M

BCD

BCD_M

DLIMIT

DLIMIT_MD

PLOW

PLOW_M

BCOS

BCOS_MD

DMAX

DMAX_M

POFF

POFF_M

BDSQR

BDSQR_MD

DMIN

DMIN_M

PSCAN

PSCAN_M

BIN

BIN_M

DNEG

DNEG_M

PSTOP

PSTOP_M

BKAND

BKAND_M

DOR

DOR_M

QCDSET

QCDSET_M

BKBCD

BKBCD_M

DRCL

DRCL_M

QDRSET

QDRSET_M

BKBIN

BKBIN_M

DRCR

DRCR_M

RCL

RCL_M

BKOR

BKOR_M

DROL

DROL_M

RCR

RCR_M

BKRST

BKRST_M

DROR

DROR_M

RFS

RFS_M

BKXNR

BKXNR_M

DSER

DSER_M

RND

RND_M

BKXOR

BKXOR_M

DSFL

DSFL_M

RSET

RSET_MD

BMOV

BMOV_M

DSFR

DSFR_M

RST

RST_M

BRST

BRST_M

DSORT

DSORT_M

SECOND

SECOND_M

BSET

BSET_M

DSUM

DSUM_M

SEG

SEG_M

BSFL

BSFL_M

DTEST

DTEST_MD

SER

SER_M

BSFR

BSFR_M

DTO

DTO_M

SET

SET_M

BSIN

BSIN_MD

DWSUM

DWSUM_M

SFL

SFL_M

BSQR

BSQR_MD

DXCH

DXCH_M

SFR

SFR_M
SFT_M

BTAN

BTAN_MD

DXNR

DXNR_M

SFT

BTOW

BTOW_MD

DXOR

DXOR_M

SORT

SORT_M

BXCH

BXCH_M

DZONE

DZONE_MD

SRND

SRND_M

CML

CML_M

EI

EI_M

STOP

STOP_M

COM

COM_M

EMOD

EMOD_M

SUM

SUM_M

DATERD

DATERD_MD

ENCO

ENCO_M

SWAP

SWAP_MD

DATEWR

DATEWR_MD

ENEG

ENEG_M

TEST

TEST_MD

DBAND

DBAND_MD

EREXP

EREXP_M

UNI

UNI_M

DBCD

DBCD_M

ESTR

ESTR_M

WAND

WAND_M

DBIN

DBIN_M

EVAL

EVAL_M

WDT

WDT_M

DBL

DBL_M

FLT

FLT_M

WOR

WOR_M

DCML

DCML_M

FMOV

FMOV_M

WSUM

WSUM_M

DDEC

DDEC_M

FROM

FROM_M

WTOB

WTOB_MD

DEC

DEC_M

GBIN

GBIN_M

WXNR

WXNR_M

DECO

DECO_M

GRY

GRY_M

WXOR

WXOR_M

DELTA

DELTA_M

HOUR

HOUR_M

XCH

XCH_M

DFLT

DFLT_M

INC

INC_M

ZONE

ZONE_MD

DFRO

DFRO_M

MIDR

MIDR_M

DGBIN

DGBIN_M

MIDW

MIDW_M

App - 86

Appendix 8.1 ST instruction table for GX Works2 and GX Developer

Appendix 9 Character Strings that cannot be Used for Label Names and Data Names

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

Character strings used for application function names, common instruction names, special instruction names,
instructions and so on are called reserved words.
These reserved words cannot be used for label names or data names. If the character string defined as a
reserved word is used for a label name or data name, an error occurs during registration or compilation.
The following tables shows character strings that cannot be used for label names or data names.
The numbers from 1 to 9 in the tables indicate the following label names and data names.
<Label name and data name>
1 Project file name

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Character Strings that cannot be Used for Label Names and Data Names

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Appendix 9

19

2 Program file name (Simple (without labels))

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

3 Program file name (Simple (with labels))

4 Program file name (structure)
5 Task name
6 Global label data name
7 Structure name
8 POU name

20

9 Label name

Data type hierarchy

Character string
recognized as device
(Device name +
Numeral)
ST operator

BOOL, BYTE, INT, SINT, DINT, LINT, UINT, USINT, UDINT,

ULINT, WORD, DWORD, LWORD, ARRAY, REAL, LREAL,
TIME, STRING, TIMER, COUNTER, RETENTIVETIMER,
POINTER, Bit, Word [Unsigned]/Bit String [16-bit], Double
Word [Unsigned]/Bit String [32-bit], Word [Signed], Double
Word [Signed], FLOAT (Single Precision), FLOAT (Double
Precision), String, Time, Timer, Counter, Retentive Timer,
Pointer

ANY, ANY_NUM, ANY_BIT, ANY_REAL, ANY_INT,

ANY_DATE

U*1

U*1

X, Y, D, M, T, B, C, F, L, P, V, Z, W, I, N, U, J, K, H, E, A, SD,
SM, SW, SB, FX, FY, DX, DY, FD, TR, BL, SG, VD, ZR, ZZ*2
Such as X0

U*3

NOT, MOD

U*1

(, ), -

SETTING OPTIONS

21

ANY_SIMPLE, ANY16, ANY32

Device name

App - 87

APPENDIX

Data type

VAR, VAR_RETAIN, VAR_ACCESS, VAR_CONSTANT,

VAR_CONSTANT_RETAIN, VAR_INPUT,
VAR_INPUT_RETAIN, VAR_OUTPUT,
VAR_OUTPUT_RETAIN, VAR_IN_OUT, VAR_IN_EXT,
VAR_EXTERNAL, VAR_EXTERNAL_CONSTANT,
VAR_EXTERNAL_CONSTANT_RETAIN,
VAR_EXTERNAL_RETAIN, VAR_GLOBAL,
VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT,
VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT_RETAIN,
VAR_GLOBAL_RETAIN

INDEX

Class identifier

Character string

PRINTING

: Applicable, U: With restrictions, : Not applicable

Category

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Character string

LD, LDN, ST, STN, S, S1, R, R1, AND, ANDN, OR, ORN,
XOR, XORN, ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, GT, GE, EQ, NE, LE, LT,
JMP, JMPC, JMPCN, CAL, CALC, CALCN, RET, RETC,
RETCN

LDI, LDP, LDF, ANI, ANDP, ANDF, ANB, ORI, ORP, ORF,
ORB, MPS, MRD, MPP, INV, MEP, MEF, EGP, EGF, OUT(H),
SET, RST, PLS, PLF, FF, DELTA(P), SFT(P), MC, MCR,
STOP, PAGE, NOP, NOPLF

U*1

Application instructions such as DMOD, PCHK, INC(P)

Application instruction
MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common
in GX Works2
Instructions), MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual
(Common Instructions)

U*1

U*1

IL operator

SFC instruction

ST code body

Function name in
application function

SFCP, SFCPEND, BLOCK, BEND, TRANL, TRANO,

TRANA, TRANC, TRANCA, TRANOA, SEND, TRANOC,
TRANOCA, TRANCO, TRANCOC, STEPN, STEPD,
STEPSC, STEPSE, STEPST, STEPR, STEPC, STEPG,
STEPI, STEPID, STEPISC, STEPISE, STEPIST, STEPIR,
TRANJ, TRANOJ, TRANOCJ, TRANCJ, TRANCOJ,
TRANCOCJ
RETURN, IF, THEN, ELSE, ELSIF, END_IF, CASE, OF,
END_CASE, FOR, TO, BY, DO, END_FOR, WHILE,
END_WHILE, REPEAT, UNTIL, END_REPEAT, EXIT, TYPE,
END_TYPE, STRUCT, END_STRUCT, RETAIN,
VAR_ACCESS, END_VAR, FUNCTION, END_FUNCTION,
FUNCTION_BLOCK, END_FUNCTION_BLOCK, STEP,
INITIAL_STEP, END_STEP, TRANSITION,
END_TRANSITION, FROM, UNTIL, WHILE

Function names in application functions such as AND_E,

NOT_E

Function block name Function block names in application functions such as CTD,
in application function CTU
/, \, *, ?, <, >, |, ", :, [, ], ,, =, +, %, ', ~, @, {, }, &, ^, ., ', tab
character
Symbol

DATE, DATE_AND_TIME, DT, TIME, TIME_OF_DAY, TOD

ACTION, END_ACTION, CONFIGURATION,

END_CONFIGURATION, CONSTANT, F_EDGE, R_EDGE,
AT, PROGRAM, WITH, END_PROGRAM, TRUE, FALSE,
READ_ONLY, READ_WRITE, RESOURCE,
END_RESOURCE, ON, TASK, EN, ENO, BODY_CCE,
BODY_FBD, BODY_IL, BODY_LD, BODY_SFC, BODY_ST,
END_BODY, END_PARAMETER_SECTION,
PARAM_FILE_PATH, PARAMETER_SECTION, SINGLE,
RETAIN, INTERVAL

U*1

!, #, $, `
Date and time literal

Others

String that starts with

K1 to K8

Such as K1AAA
Such as %IX0

Statement in ladder
language

;FB BLK START, ;FB START, ;FB END, ;FB BLK END, ;FB
IN, ;FB OUT, ;FB_NAME;,INSTANCE_NAME,
;FB, ;INSTANCE

Common instruction

Such as MOV

U*3

Address

Windows reserved
word

COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4, COM5, COM6, COM7,

COM8, COM9, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7,
LPT8, LPT9, AUX, CON, PRN, NUL

*1: Functions cannot be used.

*2: Whether to handle a device name indexed with ZZ device as a reserved word depends on the
parameter setting.
When Z device is specified for 32-bit index setting: Not handled as a reserved word
When ZZ device is specified for 32-bit index setting: Handled as a reserved word
*3: Applicable to Simple projects without labels only.

App - 88

Appendix 9 Character Strings that cannot be Used for Label Names and Data Names

A space cannot be used.

A numeral cannot be used at the beginning of label name.
A label name is not case-sensitive. An error may occur at compilation when the same label names
with different cases (example: 'AAA' and 'aaa') are declared.
In structured ladder/FBD and ST programs, the same label name can be used for a global label
and local label by setting the following option*1.
Check the "Use the same label name in global label and local label" item under [Tool] [Options]
"Compile" "Basic Setting".

19

An underscore (_) cannot be used at the beginning or end of label name.

Consecutive underscores (_) cannot be used for a data name or a label name.
For Simple projects, function names and function block names in common instructions and
application functions can be used.

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

*1 :

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

For label names and instance names, the same name as the one used for data name of task,
structure, POU and the like cannot be used.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Precautions on using labels

PRINTING

20

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

App - 89

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller

FX
Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

The following explains the restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller series or type.
For the restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller type between QCPU (Q mode) and
LCPU, refer to Appendix 10.1 and the following table.
For the restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller type between QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
and communication head module, refer to Appendix 10.8.
For the restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller type of FXCPU, refer to Appendix 10.9.
New programmable controller type
Old
programmable
controller type

Basic model
QCPU

High
Performance
model QCPU

QnUD(H)CPU

Q00U,
Q00UJ,
Q01U,
Q02U

Built-in
Ethernet port
QCPU

LCPU

Basic model
QCPU

Table App.10.6-1 Table App.10.5-2 Table App.10.2-4

Table App.10.7-1
Table App.10.3-1
Table App.10.4-3
Table App.10.7-6
Table App.10.3-5

High
Performance
model QCPU

Table App.10.6-1
Table App.10.6-2

Table App.10.7-1
Table App.10.3-1
Table App.10.4-1
Table App.10.7-2
Table App.10.3-2

QnUD(H)CPU

Table App.10.6-1
Table App.10.5-1
Table App.10.6-3

Q00U,
Q00UJ,
Q01U,
Q02U
Built-in
Ethernet port
QCPU
LCPU

App - 90

Table App.10.2-1

Table App.10.3-1
Table App.10.3-3

Table App.10.7-1
Table App.10.7-3

Table App.10.7-1
Table App.10.6-1
Table App.10.5-1 Table App.10.2-2 Table App.10.3-1 Table App.10.4-2
Table App.10.7-4
Table App.10.6-3
Table App.10.3-1
Table App.10.6-1
Table App.10.5-1 Table App.10.2-3
Table App.10.3-4
Table App.10.6-3

Table App.10.7-1
Table App.10.7-5

Table App.10.3-1
Table App.10.6-1
Table App.10.4-4 Table App.10.7-1
Table App.10.5-3 Table App.10.2-5
Table App.10.3-6
Table App.10.6-4

Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller

The following table shows the common restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller
series or type.

U: With restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without
labels

With
labels

Struct
ured
project

Compilation status

Programs are set in the uncompiled status.

Saved project status

Programs are changed in the project-unsaved status.

Password/Keyword status

Passwords returns to the registered status if unlocked.

Program

Devices with unsupported instructions and those outside

the range are changed to SM1255 or SD1255 (SM999 or
SD999).

If a program exceeds the program capacity of the

changed programmable controller type, the exceeding
ladder blocks are deleted.

A ladder block containing an unsupported instruction is

displayed in yellow.

An x mark is appended on a ladder symbol of an

unsupported instruction.

Common instructions/application functions are changed

to libraries appropriate for the changed programmable
controller type.

Devices not supported by the changed programmable

controller type and those outside the range are deleted.

PLC Parameter
Network Parameter

Settings are changed to those appropriate for the

changed programmable controller type.
The default values in the changed programmable
controller series/type are set to the data which cannot be
edited in the changed programmable controller series/
type.
Network types which cannot be set for the changed
programmable controller type are deleted.
When the module set as "Valid Module During Other
Station Access" is to be deleted at the programmable
controller type change (module not supported by the
changed programmable controller type), the first module
is set as the valid module.
If the number of device points set for the refresh device is
outside the range or the device is not available, the
setting for the refresh device is deleted.

Device/Label AutomaticAssign Setting

Settings are changed to those appropriate for the

changed programmable controller type.
The default values in the changed programmable
controller series/type are set to the data which cannot be
edited in the changed programmable controller series/
type.

Ladder language

Structured ladder/FBD
language
Library
Global Device Comment
Local Device Comment
Device Memory

20

PRINTING

Connection destination
setting

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

Connection destination data other than "Connection 1"

are deleted. Connection 1 is changed to the setting for
accessing the programmable controller CPU directly
coupled to a personal computer.
If the changed programmable controller type is Basic
model QCPU/FXCPU, 'RS-232' is set to "PC side IF".
If the changed programmable controller type is other
than Basic model QCPU/FXCPU, 'USB' is set for "PC
side IF".

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Restrictions

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

Table App.10.1-1

Item

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Appendix 10.1 Common restrictions when changing programmable

controller series/types

A
APPENDIX

Device Initial Value

INDEX

Appendix 10.1 Common restrictions when changing programmable controller series/types

App - 91

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 10.2 Restrictions when changing to QnUD(H)CPU

The following tables show the restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller series/
type to QnUD(H)CPU.

Changing from High Performance model QCPU

Table App.10.2-1
U: With restrictions
Project type
Item

Structured
project

Without
labels

With
labels

If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is checked,

S.instructions are converted to D.instructions.
(
Appendix 11)

The property settings "SFC Program Type Setting", "Periodic

Execution Block", "Act at Block Multi-Activated", and "Act at
Step Multi-Activated" are deleted.

PLC System

If the constant scan time is set in the PLC RAS setting,

"Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting" is set to the
service processing setting in the PLC System setting.

Program

If "Low Speed" is set to "Execute Type" in the Program setting, it

is changed to "Standby".

Boot File

If "Standard ROM" is set to "Transfer from", it is changed to

"Memory Card (ROM)".

Program

SFC language
PLC Parameter

Restrictions

Simple project

Changing from Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U

Table App.10.2-2
U: With restrictions
Project type
Item

Restrictions

Simple project

Structured
project

Without
labels

With
labels

Program

A series-compatible SM/SD devices (SM/SD1000 to SM/SD1255)

are changed to the corresponding devices for Q series.
If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is checked,
S.instructions are converted to D.instructions. (
Appendix 11)

Remote Password

Any existing settings are cleared.

App - 92

Appendix 10.2 Restrictions when changing to QnUD(H)CPU

Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller

U: With restrictions
Project type

Only the settings of Built-in Ethernet port QCPU are cleared. (The
settings of QJ71E71 and QJ71C24/CMO are not cleared.)

Simple project
Without
labels

With
labels

Structured
project
U

Changing from Basic model QCPU

19

Table App.10.2-4
U: With restrictions
Project type
Item

Restrictions

Simple project
Without
labels

With
labels

Structured
project

Program

If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is checked,

S.instructions are converted to D.instructions.
(Excluding Q00J.
Appendix 11)

PLC Parameter

PLC File

When changing from Q00 or Q01, "Use the following file" is

selected and "Corresponding Memory: Standard RAM", "File
Name: MAIN", and "Capacity: 64K Points" are set in the file register
setting.

Boot File

If "Do boot from standard ROM" is selected before changing the

programmable controller type, "Type: Sequence", "Data Name:
MAIN", "Transfer From: Memory Card (ROM)", and "Transfer To:
Program Memory" are set.

18

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Remote Password

Restrictions

20

PRINTING

Item

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Table App.10.2-3

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Changing from built-in Ethernet port QCPU

21
U

Changing from LCPU

SETTING OPTIONS

Table App.10.2-5
Project type
Restrictions

Structured
project

Without
labels

With
labels

Remote Password

When changing from L02/L02-P, any existing settings are cleared.

When changing from L26-BT/L26-PBT, the settings of the built-in
Ethernet are cleared. The settings of LJ71C24 are replaced to the
settings of QJ71C24/CMO.

Network Parameter

If the number of modules is one and "Start I/O No." is outside the
range, its maximum value is set. If the number of modules is two,
"Start I/O No." is set starting from 0000.

CC-Link IE Field
Network

Appendix 10.2 Restrictions when changing to QnUD(H)CPU

App - 93

INDEX

Item

Simple project

APPENDIX

U: With restrictions

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 10.3 Restrictions when changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or

Q02U
The following tables show the restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller series/
type to Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U.

Common restrictions when changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U

Table App.10.3-1
U: With restrictions
Project type
Item

Remote Password

Structured
project

Without
labels

With
labels

Any existing settings are cleared.

I/O Assignment

If a multiple CPU is set to "Type", it is deleted and closed up.

If a value which exceeds the maximum base number for the
changed programmable controller type is set, the exceeding base
settings are deleted.

Multiple CPU

If the number of multiple CPUs exceeds the allowable number, the

settings are set to default.

MELSECNET/
10(H), CC-Link IE
Controller
Network

When changing to Q02U, the third and later modules out of total of
MELSECNET/10(H) and CC-Link IE Controller Network modules
are deleted.
When changing to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U, the second and later
modules out of total of MELSECNET/10(H) and CC-Link IE
Controller Network modules are deleted.

CC-Link

When changing to Q02U, the fifth and later modules are deleted.
When changing to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U, the third and later modules
are deleted.

Ethernet

When changing to Q02U, the third and later Ethernet modules in the
module settings are deleted.
When changing to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U, the second and later
Ethernet modules in the module setting are deleted.

PLC Parameter

Network Parameter

App - 94

Restrictions

Simple project

Appendix 10.3 Restrictions when changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U

Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller

U: With restrictions
Project type
Item

Restrictions

Simple project

Structured
project

Without
labels

With
labels

The property settings "SFC Program Type Setting", "Periodic

Execution Block", "Act at Block Multi-Activated", and "Act at
Step Multi-Activated" are deleted.

PLC System

If the constant scan time is set in the PLC RAS setting,

"Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting" is set to the
service processing setting in the PLC System setting.

Program

If the number of programs exceeds the allowable number, the

exceeding settings are deleted.
If "Low Speed" is set to "Execute Type" in the Program setting,
it is changed to "Standby".

Boot File

If "Standard ROM" is set to "Transfer from", it is changed to

"Memory Card (ROM)". (Q02U only)

Program
SFC language
PLC Parameter

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Table App.10.3-2

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Changing from High Performance model QCPU

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

20

Table App.10.3-3
U: With restrictions

Item

Restrictions

Without
labels

With
labels

Structured
project

Program

If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is checked,

D.instructions are converted to S.instructions.
(Excluding Q00J.
Appendix 11)

PLC Parameter

PLC File

If "Capacity" exceeds 16K points in "File used for SP.DEVST/

S.DEVLD Instruction", the setting is set to 16K points for Q02U,
and 1K points for Q00U, Q00UJ, and Q01U.

Program

If the number of programs exceeds the allowable number, the

settings are set to default.

Device

If the points exceeding 8K points are specified for S device, the

setting is set to 8K points.

SETTING OPTIONS

21

Project type
Simple project

PRINTING

Changing from QnUD(H)CPU

A
APPENDIX

INDEX

Appendix 10.3 Restrictions when changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U

App - 95

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Changing from built-in Ethernet port QCPU

Table App.10.3-4
U: With restrictions
Project type
Item

Restrictions

Simple project
Without
labels

With
labels

Structured
project

Program

If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is checked,

D.instructions are converted to S.instructions.
(Excluding Q00UJ.
Appendix 11)

PLC Parameter

PLC System

If a device that exceed the range of the Device setting is set to

"Latch Data Backup Operation Valid Contact", the setting is
deleted.

PLC File

If the capacity exceeds 16K points in "File used for SP.DEVST/

S.DEVLD Instruction", the setting is set to 16K points for Q02U,
and 1K points for Q00U, Q00UJ, and Q01U.

Program

If the number of programs exceeds the allowable number, the

settings are set to default.

Device

If the points exceeding 8K points are specified for S device, the

setting is set to 8K points.

Changing from Basic model QCPU

Table App.10.3-5
U: With restrictions
Project type
Item

PLC Parameter

PLC File

Device/Label
Automatic-Assign
Setting

App - 96

Restrictions

Simple project

Structured
project

Without
labels

With
labels

When changing from Q00 or Q01 to other than Q00UJ, "Use the
following file" is selected and "Corresponding Memory: Standard
RAM", "File Name: MAIN", and "Capacity: 64K Points" are set in
the File Register setting.
When changing from Q00 or Q01 to Q00UJ, "Not Used" is selected
in the File Register setting

When changing from Q00 or Q01 to Q00UJ, the default value is

set.

Appendix 10.3 Restrictions when changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U

Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller

Item

Restrictions

Simple project

Structured
project

Without
labels

With
labels

Remote Password

When changing from L02/L02-P, the settings of the built-in Ethernet

are cleared. The settings of LJ71C24 are replaced to the settings
of QJ71C24/CMO.
When changing from the L26-BT/L26-PBT, any existing settings
are cleared.

PLC Parameter

PLC System

If "Start I/O No." in the interrupt point setting of the intelligent

function module setting is outside the range, the setting is deleted.

PLC File

When changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, or Q01U, if an item other than

"Program Memory" or "Standard ROM" is set to "Corresponding
Memory" in the initial device value setting, it is changed to
"Program Memory".

PLC RAS

When changing to Q00UJ, "System Memory" is set to

"Corresponding Memory".

CC-Link IE Field
Network

If the number of modules is one and "Start I/O No." is outside the
range, its maximum value is set. If the number of modules is two,
"Start I/O No." is set starting from 0000.

CC-Link

If "H/W Test" or "Loop Test" is set to "Mode", the setting is deleted.

If the number of modules is one and "Start I/O No." is outside the
range, its maximum value is set. If the number of modules is two,
"Start I/O No." is set starting from 0000.

19

20

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

Network Parameter

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

U: With restrictions
Project type

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Table App.10.3-6

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Changing from LCPU

PRINTING

Appendix 10.3 Restrictions when changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U

App - 97

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 10.4 Restrictions when changing to built-in Ethernet port

QCPU
The following tables show the restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller series/
type to built-in Ethernet port QCPU.

Changing from High Performance model QCPU

Table App.10.4-1
U: With restrictions
Project type
Item

Simple project

Structured
project

Without
labels

With
labels

If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is checked,

S.instructions are converted to D.instructions.
(
Appendix 11)

The property settings "SFC Program Type Setting", "Periodic

Execution Block", "Act at Block Multi-Activated" and "Act at Step
Multi-Activated" are deleted.

PLC System

If the constant scan time is set in the PLC RAS setting,

"Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting" is set to the
service processing setting in the PLC System setting.

Program

If "Low speed" is set to "Execute Type" in the Program setting, it

is changed to "Standby".

Boot File

If "Standard ROM" is set to "Transfer from", it is changed to

"Memory Card (ROM)".

Program

SFC language
PLC Parameter

Restrictions

Changing from Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U

Table App.10.4-2
U: With restrictions
Project type
Item

Restrictions

Simple project

Structured
project

Without
labels

With
labels

Program

A series-compatible SM/SD devices (SM/SD1000 to SM/SD1255)

are changed to the corresponding devices for Q series.
If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is checked,
S.instructions are converted to D.instructions. (
Appendix 11)

Remote Password

Any existing settings are cleared.

App - 98

Appendix 10.4 Restrictions when changing to built-in Ethernet port QCPU

Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller

Table App.10.4-3
U: With restrictions
Project type
Item

Restrictions

Simple project
Without
labels

With
labels

Structured
project

If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is checked,

S.instructions are converted to D.instructions.
(Excluding Q00J.
Appendix 11)

PLC Parameter

When changing from Q00 or Q01, "Use the following file" is

selected and "Corresponding Memory: Standard RAM", "File
Name: MAIN", and "Capacity: 64K Points" are set in the file
register setting.

PLC File

18

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Program

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Changing from Basic model QCPU

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Changing from LCPU

Table App.10.4-4
U: With restrictions

20

Remote Password

Restrictions

When changing from L02/L02-P, any existing settings are cleared.

When changing from L26-BT/L26-PBT, the settings of Ethernet
module are deleted. The settings of the built-in Ethernet are
replaced to the settings appropriate for the changed programmable
controller type. The settings of LJ71C24 are replaced to the
settings of QJ71C24/CMO.

Simple project
Without
labels

With
labels

Structured
project

CC-Link

If "H/W Test" or "Loop Test" is set to "Mode", the setting is deleted.

CC-Link IE Field
Network

If the number of modules is one and "Start I/O No." is outside the
range, its maximum value is set. If the number of modules is two,
"Start I/O No." is set starting from 0000.

APPENDIX

INDEX

Network Parameter

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Item

PRINTING

Project type

Appendix 10.4 Restrictions when changing to built-in Ethernet port QCPU

App - 99

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 10.5 Restrictions when changing to High Performance

model QCPU
The following tables show the restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller series/
type to High Performance model QCPU.

Changing from Universal model QCPU

Table App.10.5-1 (1/2)
U: With restrictions
Project type
Item

Restrictions

Simple project

Structured
project

Without
labels

With
labels

Program

If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is checked,

D.instructions are converted to S.instructions.
(Excluding Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, and Q02U.
Appendix 11)

Device comment

Bit-specified word device comments are deleted.

PLC Parameter

PLC System

The setting value of "High Speed" in the timer limit setting is

rounded up to the range 0.1 to 100ms.
(Example: 0.01ms 0.1ms)

PLC File

If the capacity of the file register exceeds 1019K points, the

setting is set to 1018K points.

Program

When changing to Q02, Q02H, or Q06H, the Program setting

and file usability setting for programs exceed the supported
program number are deleted.

Device

8K is specified for S device.

Network Parameter

App - 100

MELSECNET/10(H)

When '0800' or larger is specified for "Start" of SB/SW in the

PLC side device range in the refresh parameters setting, the
specified range is deleted. When '0800' or larger is specified for
"End" of SB/SW, it is replaced to '07FF'. Devices out of the
range are also deleted.

CC-Link IE Controller
Network

The third and later CC-Link IE Controller Network modules in

the module setting are deleted.
Modules whose station numbers are set in programs ("Specify
station No. by program") are deleted.
When "Total stations" is 65 or more, 64 is set.
The 65th and later settings are deleted in the network range
assignment setting.
The 65th and later I/O master stations are deleted in the LX/LY
setting in the network range assignment setting.
When '0800' or larger is specified for "Start" of SB/SW in the
PLC side device range in the refresh parameters setting, the
specified range is deleted. When '0800' or larger is specified for
"End" of SB/SW, it is replaced to '07FF'. Devices out of the
range are also deleted.

Ethernet

In the news setting in the E-mail setting, condition devices

outside the device range in the changed programmable
controller type are deleted.

Appendix 10.5 Restrictions when changing to High Performance model QCPU

Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller

Table App.10.5-2
U: With restrictions
Project type
Item

PLC Parameter
PLC File

Restrictions

Simple project

Structured
project

Without
labels

With
labels

When changing from Q00 or Q01, "Use the following file" is

selected and "Corresponding Memory: Standard RAM", "File
Name: MAIN", and "Capacity: 64K Points" are set in the file
register setting.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Changing from Basic model QCPU

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Changing from LCPU

Table App.10.5-3
U: With restrictions
Project type
Restrictions

Without
labels

With
labels

Structured
project

20

Bit-specified word device comments are deleted.

Remote Password

When changing from L02/L02-P, any existing settings are cleared.

When changing from L26-BT/L26-PBT, the settings of the built-in
Ethernet are cleared. The settings of LJ71C24 are replaced to the
settings of QJ71C24/CMO.

PLC Parameter

If "Standard ROM" is set to "Transfer To", it is changed to "Program

Memory".
If Symbolic Information is set to "Type", the setting is deleted.

21

CC-Link

If "H/W Test" or "Loop Test" is set to "Mode", the setting is deleted.

A
APPENDIX

Network Parameter

INDEX

Boot File

SETTING OPTIONS

Device comment

PRINTING

Item

Simple project

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

Appendix 10.5 Restrictions when changing to High Performance model QCPU

App - 101

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 10.6 Restrictions when changing to Basic model QCPU

The following tables show the restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller series/
type to Basic model QCPU.

Common restrictions when changing to Basic model QCPU

Table App.10.6-1
U: With restrictions
Project type
Item

Restrictions

Simple project
Without
labels

With
labels

Structured
project

Program

When changing to Q00J, file registers (R/ZR) are changed to

SD999.

Device Initial Value

If the name of the device initial value data is other than 'MAIN', the
file is deleted.
If the setting exceeds the editable range of device initial values in
the changed programmable controller type, the exceeding range is
deleted.

Global Device
Comment

Global device comments are deleted.

Remote Password

Any existing settings are cleared.

PLC Parameter
PLC File
Device/Label
Automatic-Assign
Setting

App - 102

If an item other than "Not Used" is set in the initial device value
setting, it is changed to "Used".

If the Device setting or the setting for the file register capacity in the
PLC File setting in the PLC parameter is changed, the default value
is set.

Appendix 10.6 Restrictions when changing to Basic model QCPU

Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller

Simple project

Structured
project

Without
labels

With
labels

If instructions not supported by the changed programmable

controller type are used, they are deleted and displayed in yellow.

The property settings "SFC Program Type Setting", "Periodic

Execution Block", "Act at Block Multi-Activated" and "Act at Step
Multi-Activated" are deleted.

The block title in the property setting is deleted.

If device points not supported by Q00J/Q00/Q01 are used for
"Block Information" in the property setting, the setting is deleted.

PLC System

The setting values of "Fixed Scan Interval" are rounded out to the
one in "System Interrupt Settings".

Boot File

If "Type: Sequence", "Data Name: MAIN", "Transfer From:

Standard ROM", and "Transfer To: Program Memory" are set
before changing the programmable controller type, "Do boot from
standard ROM" is selected.

Ladder language

SFC language

PLC Parameter

Table App.10.6-3
U: With restrictions
Project type
Item

Restrictions

Simple project

Structured
project

Without
labels

With
labels

If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is checked,

D.instructions are converted to S.instructions.
(Excluding Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, and Q02U.
Appendix 11)

If instructions not supported by the changed programmable

controller type are used, they are deleted and displayed in yellow.

The property setting "Act at Block Multi-Activated" is deleted.

The property setting "Block Setting" is deleted.

If device points not supported by Q00J/Q00/Q01 are used, the
setting is deleted.

Device comment

Bit-specified word device comments are deleted.

PLC Parameter

PLC System

The setting value is rounded out to the tenth in "Timer Limit

Setting (High Speed)".
The setting values of "Fixed Scan Interval" are rounded out to the
one in "System Interrupt Settings".

Boot File

Any specified settings are deleted.

Device

2K is set for S device.

Program
Ladder language

SFC language

19

20

PRINTING

Changing from Universal model QCPU

18

Appendix 10.6 Restrictions when changing to Basic model QCPU

App - 103

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Program

Restrictions

A
APPENDIX

Item

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

U: With restrictions
Project type

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Table App.10.6-2

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Changing from High Performance model QCPU

INDEX

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Changing from LCPU

Table App.10.6-4
U: With restrictions
Project type
Item

Restrictions

Simple project
Without
labels

With
labels

Structured
project

Device comment

Bit-specified word device comments are deleted.

PLC Parameter

If "Start I/O No." in the interrupt point setting of the intelligent

function module setting is outside the range, the setting is deleted.

If "H/W Test" or "Loop Test" is set to "Mode", the setting is deleted.

If the number of modules is one and "Start I/O No." is outside the
range, its maximum value is set. If the number of modules is two,
"Start I/O No." is set starting from 0000.

PLC System
Network Parameter
CC-Link

App - 104

Appendix 10.6 Restrictions when changing to Basic model QCPU

Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller

The following tables show the restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller series/
type to LCPU.

Common restrictions when changing to LCPU

Simple project

Structured
project

Without
labels

With
labels

PLC System

If "Start I/O No." in the interrupt point setting of the intelligent

function module setting is outside the range, the setting is deleted.
When changing to L02/L02-P, if "Backup Start Setup Contact" and
"Backup Start Contact" in the PLC module change setting are
outside the range, the device settings are deleted.

PLC File

If "Use the same file name as the program" is set in the file register
setting, it is changed to "Not Used".
If an item other than "Memory Card (ROM)" and "Standard ROM" is
set to "Corresponding Memory" in the comment file used in a
comment setting, it is changed to "Memory Card (SD)".
If "Memory Card (RAM)" is set to "Corresponding Memory" in the
initial device value setting, it is changed to "Memory Card (SD)".

Program

If "Low Speed" is set to "Execute Type" in the Program setting, it is

changed to "Standby".

Device

If the capacity of the file register setting is outside the range, the
Device setting is set to default. In this case, all extended device
points are assigned to file registers.

When changing to L02/L02-P, if the number of modules is one and

"Start I/O No." is outside the range, its maximum value is set. If the
number of modules is two, "Start I/O No." is set starting from 0000.

If the Device setting or the setting for the file register capacity in the
PLC File setting in the PLC parameter is changed, the default value
is set.

PLC Parameter

Network Parameter
CC-Link
Device/Label
Automatic-Assign
Setting

19

20

21

Changing from High Performance model QCPU

Table App.10.7-2
U: With restrictions
Project type
Item

Restrictions

Simple project
With
labels

Remote Password

When changing to L02/L02-P, any existing settings are cleared.

When changing to L26-BT/L26-PBT, the settings of Ethernet
module are deleted. The settings of QJ71C24/CMO are replaced to
the settings of LJ71C24.

PLC Parameter

The setting of "Transfer From" in the Boot File setting is changed to

"Memory Card (SD)".

Appendix 10.7 Restrictions when changing to LCPU

Structured
project

Without
labels

Boot File

APPENDIX

Restrictions

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Item

PRINTING

U: With restrictions
Project type

SETTING OPTIONS

Table App.10.7-1

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

App - 105

INDEX

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Appendix 10.7 Restrictions when changing to LCPU

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Changing from QnUD(H)CPU

Table App.10.7-3
U: With restrictions
Project type
Item

Restrictions

Simple project

Structured
project

Without
labels

With
labels

Remote Password

When changing to L02/L02-P, any existing settings are cleared.

When changing to L26-BT/L26-PBT, the settings of Ethernet
module are deleted. The settings of QJ71C24/CMO are replaced to
the settings of LJ71C24.

PLC Parameter

Boot File

The setting of "Transfer From" in the Boot File setting is changed to

"Memory Card (SD)".

Device

If the points between 1K and 7K or exceeding 8K points are

specified for S device, the setting is set to 8K points.

If the number of modules is one and "Start I/O No." is outside the
range, its maximum value is set. If the number of modules is two,
"Start I/O No." is set starting from 0000.

Network Parameter
CC-Link IE Field
Network

Changing from Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U

Table App.10.7-4
U: With restrictions
Project type
Item

Restrictions

Simple project

Structured
project

Without
labels

With
labels

Remote Password

When changing from Q00U or Q01U to L02/L02-P, the settings of

the Ethernet module are deleted. The settings of QJ71C24/CMO
are replaced to the settings of LJ71C24.
When changing from Q00UJ or Q02U to L02/L02-P, any existing
settings are cleared.
When changing to L26-BT/L26-PBT, any existing settings are
cleared.

PLC Parameter

Boot File

When changing from Q02U, the setting of "Transfer From" in the

Boot File setting is changed to "Memory Card (SD)".

Device

If the points between 1K and 8K are specified for S device, the

setting is set to 8K points.

If the number of modules is one and "Start I/O No." is outside the
range, its maximum value is set. If the number of modules is two,
"Start I/O No." is set starting from 0000.

Network Parameter
CC-Link IE Field
Network

App - 106

Appendix 10.7 Restrictions when changing to LCPU

Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller

Restrictions

Simple project

Structured
project

With
labels

Remote Password

When changing to L02/L02-P, any existing settings are cleared.

When changing to L26-BT/L26-PBT, the settings of Ethernet
module are deleted. The settings of the built-in Ethernet are
replaced to the settings appropriate for the changed programmable
controller type. The settings of QJ71C24/CMO are replaced to the
settings of LJ71C24.

PLC Parameter

PLC System

If a device that exceeds the range of the Device setting is set to

"Latch Data Backup Operation Valid Contact", the setting is
deleted.

Boot File

The setting of "Transfer From" in the Boot File setting is changed to

"Memory Card (SD)".

Device

If the points between 1K and 7K or exceeding 8K points are

specified for S device, the setting is set to 8K points.

If the number of modules is one and "Start I/O No." is outside the
range, its maximum value is set. If the number of modules is two,
"Start I/O No." is set starting from 0000.

Network Parameter
CC-Link IE Field
Network

Changing from Basic model QCPU

U: With restrictions
Project type
Restrictions

Simple project
Without
labels

With
labels

Structured
project

Remote Password

Any existing settings are cleared.

PLC Parameter

When changing from Q00 or Q01, "Use the following file" is

selected and "Corresponding Memory: Standard RAM" and "File
Name: MAIN" are set in the file register setting.
If "Used" is set in the initial device value setting, "Use the following
file" is selected and "Corresponding Memory: Program Memory"
and "File Name: MAIN" are set.

20

INDEX

PLC File

19

21

Table App.10.7-6

Item

18

PRINTING

Without
labels

SETTING OPTIONS

Item

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

U: With restrictions
Project type

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Table App.10.7-5

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Changing from built-in Ethernet port QCPU

APPENDIX

Appendix 10.7 Restrictions when changing to LCPU

App - 107

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 10.8 Restrictions when changing between QCPU (Q mode)/

LCPU and communication head module
The following tables show the restrictions applied when changing QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU to
communication head module and when changing communication head module to QCPU (Q mode)/
LCPU.

Changing from QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU to communication head module

Table App.10.8-1
U: With restrictions
Project type
Item

Restrictions

Simple project

Structured
project

Without
labels

With
labels

All data are deleted.

Remote Password

Any existing settings are cleared.

PLC Parameter,
Network Parameter

All parameters are set to default.

Program
Device Comment
Device Memory
Device Initial Value

Changing from communication head module to QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU

Table App.10.8-2
U: With restrictions
Project type
Item

Restrictions

Simple project
Without
labels

With
labels

Structured
project

Remote Password

Any existing settings are cleared.

PLC Parameter,
Network Parameter

All parameters are set to default.

App - 108

Appendix 10.8 Restrictions when changing between QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU and communication head module

Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Appendix 10.9 Restrictions when changing to FXCPU (FXCPU

FXCPU)

U: With restrictions
Project type
Restrictions

Simple project

Structured
project

Without
labels

With
labels

Programs which exceed the program capacity of the changed

programmable controller type are deleted.

Devices not supported and these outside the range are deleted.

PLC Parameter

If the program capacity set before changing the programmable

controller type is not supported by the changed programmable
controller type, it is changed to the maximum value of the
changed programmable controller type.

System label

FX3G, FX3U, and FX3UC whose projects contain system labels

cannot be changed to FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FXU, FX2C, FX1S,
FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, or FX2NC.

Block password

A project in which a block password with the validated setting

for "Read-protect the execution program" exists can be used in
FX3U and FX3UC only.

Program
Ladder language
Global Device Comment
Local Device Comment
Device Initial Value

19

20

PRINTING

Item

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Table App.10.9-1

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

The following tables show the restrictions applied when changing FXCPU to FXCPU.

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

Appendix 10.9 Restrictions when changing to FXCPU (FXCPU FXCPU)

App - 109

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 11 Instruction Conversion Lists

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section shows the lists of instructions which are converted based on checking/clearing the "Convert
motion dedicated sequence instruction" check box when the programmable controller type of a Simple project
(without label) is changed.

Instruction conversion list for conversion to Universal model QCPU

Basic model QCPU (Excluding Q00J),
High Performance model QCPU,
Universal model QCPU
(Q00U, Q01U, Q02U)
Before conversion
S(P).SFCS

Motion dedicated
instruction

App - 110

Universal model QCPU

(Excluding Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, Q02U)
After conversion
Checked

Cleared

D(P).SFCS

S(P).SFCS

S(P).SVST

D(P).SVST

S(P).SVST

S(P).CHGV

D(P).CHGV

S(P).CHGV

S(P).CHGT

D(P).CHGT

S(P).CHGT

S(P).CHGA

D(P).CHGA

S(P).CHGA

S(P).DDWR

D(P).DDWR

S(P).DDWR

S(P).DDRD

D(P).DDRD

S(P).DDRD

S(P).GINT

D(P).GINT

S(P).GINT

Appendix 11 Instruction Conversion Lists

Checked

Cleared

D(P).SFCS

S(P).SFCS

*1

SM1255

D(P).SVST

S(P).SVST*2

SM1255

D(P).CHGV

S(P).CHGV*2

SM1255

D(P).CHGT

*2

SM1255

S(P).CHGT

D(P).CHGA

*2

S(P).CHGA

SM1255

D(P).DDWR

S(P).DDWR*3

SM1255

D(P).DDRD

S(P).DDRD*3

SM1255

D(P).GINT

S(P).GINT*4

SM1255

*1 :

When the number of arguments is 2, correct the arguments after the programmable controller
type is changed.

*2 :

When the number of arguments is 3, correct the arguments after the programmable controller
type is changed.

*3 :

When a character string is used in an argument, correct the argument after the programmable
controller type is changed.

*4 :

When the number of arguments is 3 or more, correct the arguments after the programmable
controller type is changed.

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Motion dedicated
instruction

After conversion

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Before conversion

Basic model QCPU (Excluding Q00J),

High Performance model QCPU,
Universal model QCPU
(Q00U, Q01U Q02U)

20

PRINTING

Universal model QCPU

(Excluding Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, Q02U)

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Instruction conversion list for conversion from Universal model QCPU

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

App - 111

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 12 Functions Added Since Previous Versions

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section shows major functions added/changed with upgrade.

For (Simple), (Structured), and (Intelligent) described in the Reference column, refer to the following manuals
respectively.
(Simple).................GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
(Structured) ...........GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
(Intelligent) ............GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
Major function
added/changed

Version
Version 1.05F

Description

Reference

Label comment display

Label comments can be displayed in Structured projects.

Programmable controller
type

Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q20UDH,

Q20UDEH, and FX series are supported.

Intelligent function module

Q68TD-G-H02 is supported.

Change PLC Type

The programmable controller type can be changed from

Universal model QCPU to High Performance model QCPU.

Section 4.2.8

Verify

Unmatched parts can be searched.

Section 4.2.7
Section 4.6.5
Section 12.2

The following parameters are supported by Universal model

QCPU.
The CPU module can be replaces using a memory card.
Index registers can be specified as local devices.
The A-PLC compatibility Setting is supported.

Section 6.1.1

Twist-bus-compatible modules are supported by MELSECNET/H.

Section 6.2.1

Parameter

Ladder
Version 1.08J

With the easy edit function, the following functions can be

operated by a one-step operation (menu/shortcut key).
Draw line
Change open/close contact
Switch statement/note type
Instruction partial edit
Ladder blocks can be displayed/hidden in units of one ladder
block.

(Structured)

(Simple)

The ladder editor and function block can be displayed

horizontally.
The instruction help can be opened from the menu.
ST

Arguments of a template can be selected one-by-one by the

menu or shortcut key.

Structured ladder

The wrapping positions for printing can be checked on the

structured ladder editor.

Monitoring

Debugging

(Structured)

The program list can be monitored.

Section 14.4

The interrupt program list monitor can be monitored.

Section 14.5

The intelligent function modules can be monitored.

Section 14.7

The forced input/output can be registered/canceled.

Section 16.2

The device test with execution condition is supported by the

Universal model QCPU.

Section 16.3

The screen for the CC-Link / CC-Link/LT diagnostics is modified.

CC-Link /
CC-Link/LT Diagnostics

System monitor

App - 112

The CC-Link / CC-Link/LT diagnostics support the following

functions.
Obtain transmission speed setting
Status logging
Create check sheet
The error reset function can be performed on the Modules
Detailed Information screen.

Section 18.5

Section 18.7

Appendix 12 Functions Added Since Previous Versions

Section 3.2.8

Parameter

The socket communication through Ethernet is supported by

Built-in Ethernet port QCPU.

Section 6.1.1

Programmable controller
type

Q00J, Q00, and Q01 are supported.

Intelligent function module

Q64AD2DA and Q61LD are supported.

Programming language

ST language is supported by Simple projects (with labels) of

QCPU (Q mode).
SFC language is supported by Simple projects (without labels)
of FXCPU.

Project type

Simple projects (with labels) are supported by FXCPU.

Navigation window

The Project window is modified, and its name is changed to

Navigation window.

Change PLC Type

Motion dedicated instructions can be converted when the

programmable controller type of a Simple project (without label)
is changed.

(Simple)

Section 4.2.8

Print

Device initial value can be printed.

Saving projects

The project compression/unpacking function is supported.

Section 4.2.4

Chapter 20

Parameter

The module error history collection function for the intelligent

function module is supported by Universal model QCPU.

Section 6.1.1

Program editor

The default font color of labels is changed.

Version 1.12N

Ladder

Simplified edit of devices/labels is supported by the Enter

Symbol screen.
An undefined label can be registered following a ladder entry
operation.
A list of possible candidates of instructions/labels can be
displayed at entering ladders.
A toolhint for arguments of an instruction can be displayed at
entering instructions.

20

21
(Simple)

The line statement list function is supported.

A cursor can jump to the start of the next ladder block or the start
of the previous ladder block.

The change TC setting function is supported.

The Inline structured text function is supported.
SFC

The SFC editor window and the Zoom editor window can be
displayed vertically at opening the SFC window.
An SFC block can be displayed automatically at auto scroll
monitoring.

ST

The bookmark list function is supported.

Structured ladder

A list of possible candidates of instructions/labels can be

displayed at entering ladders.

All Device Display

In a ladder project or structured ladder project, the display of

labels on all program editors being opened can be switched to
the device display simultaneously.

Find/Replace

In all programming languages, Find String/Replace String, Find

Device/Replace Device, Find Instruction/Replace Instruction, and
Change Open/Close Contact are supported.

Section 10.3

A character string can be entered to device memory.

Section 7.2.3

The FILL function is supported.

Section 7.2.4

Write to PLC

In a project (with labels), file sizes can be displayed/hidden on

the Write to PLC screen.

Section 12.1

Confirm Memory Size

The memory size required when data is written to the

programmable controller CPU can be calculated.

Section 12.10

Device Memory

19

PRINTING

The following instructions are supported.

Rising pulse close instruction
Falling pulse close instruction
Rising pulse close branch instruction
Falling pulse close branch instruction

18

SETTING OPTIONS

Version 1.08J

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

With the shortcut key customize function, shortcut keys can be

registered arbitrarily.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Shortcut key customize

17

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Reference

(Structured)

APPENDIX

Description

(Simple)

App - 113

INDEX

Major function
added/changed

Version

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Major function
added/changed

Version

Monitoring

Simulation function

Description
Detailed information of an error etc. can be confirmed from the
Intelligent Function Module Monitor screen.

Section 14.7

The minimized display at start up of simulation is supported.

Section 15.2

The saving/reading device memory/buffer memory function is

supported.

Section 15.2.1
Section 15.2.2

The I/O system setting function is supported.

Version 1.12N

Reference

Chapter 19

Scan Time Measurement

The scan time measurement function is supported.

Section 16.5

CC-Link IE Control
Diagnostics

The Logging screen of another station can be displayed.

Section 18.3

CC-Link /
CC-Link/LT Diagnostics

Up to 64 modules can be displayed.

The system configuration can be output in a check sheet.

Section 18.5

System monitor

The module information at time of the error occurrence can be

displayed in the error history list.

Section 18.7

Shortcut key customize

User-created shortcut key settings can be registered to a

template.

Section 3.2.8

Intelligent function module

tool

The Q61LD two-point calibration setting of the analog module

is supported.
The auto tuning function of the temperature control module is
supported.
The preset function of the counter module is supported.
The positioning test, wave trace, location trace, offline
simulation, automatic command speed calculation, and
automatic sub arc calculation of QD75 positioning module are
supported.
The circuit trace function of the serial communication module
is supported.

(Intelligent)

Parameter

The parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator is

supported.

Section 6.1

Transfer setting

The GOT (Ethernet) transparent mode is supported.

ST

The following instructions are supported.

Negated rising edge instruction
Negated falling edge instruction

Version 1.15R
Structured ladder

The following contact symbols are added.

Rising edge
Falling edge
Negated rising edge
Negated falling edge

Section 11.8.1

(Structured)

The following instructions are supported.

Negated rising edge instruction
Negated falling edge instruction

Version 1.24A

App - 114

(Simple)
(Structured)

Global label

System labels are supported.

Programmable controller
type

L02 and L26-BT are supported.

Intelligent function module

L64AD4, L60DA4, LJ71C24, and LJ71C24-R2 are supported.

Ladder

The Inline structured text function is supported by FXCPU.

The following functions are supported by the Inline structured
text function.
Verifying projects
Verifying revisions
Replacing character strings

ST

The compilation result can be displayed in list format.

The ST control syntax templates are supported.

Structured ladder

The compilation result can be displayed in list format.

Function blocks can be dragged and dropped from the Project
view.

Saving projects

A title of the change history of the project can automatically be

set when it is overwritten.

Section 4.2.3

Device List

The number of uses of a coil which uses the device can be

displayed.
Devices which are used in the parameters can be indicated.

Section 10.2

(Intelligent)
Section 4.2.7
Section 4.6
Section 10.3.3

(Simple)
(Structured)

Appendix 12 Functions Added Since Previous Versions

A project can automatically be saved after it is written to the

programmable controller CPU.

Chapter 12

Simulation function

The simulation function is supported by FXCPU.

Chapter 15
Chapter 19
Appendix 2

Intelligent function module

tools

The offset/gain setting can be performed from the menu.

The predefined protocol support function of the serial
communication module is supported.

Help

The detailed explanation of instructions can be opened from the

program editor or the Function Block Selection window.

Programmable controller
type

Q50UDEH, Q100UDEH, and LJ72GF15-T2 are supported.

Intelligent function module

LD62, LD62D, LD75P4, LD75D4, and LD77MH4 are supported.

Ladder

In projects (with labels), the function which enables the device

display in uncompiled state is supported.

SFC

The display format "MELSAP-L (Instruction Format)" / "MELSAPL (Start Conditions Format)" are supported.

Global labels

System labels are supported by LCPU.

Change PLC Type

The programmable controller type of a project which contains

intelligent function modules can be changed between
programmable controller series.

Parameter

In the Network parameter, "CC IE Field (Master Station)" and "CC

IE Field (Local Station)" are supported by Universal model
QCPU.

Section 6.2

Intelligent function module

data

The disconnection detection mode setting and Disconnection

detection setting value setting are supported by Q62DA-FG.
The following settings are supported by QJ71C24N/
QJ71C24N-R2.
The echo back permit/prohibit specification and the
execution history option specification are supported by the
various control specification.
The predefined protocol function error code, the send data
storage area, and the receive data storage area are
supported by the auto refresh.

(Intelligent)

Cross Reference

In projects (with labels), the cross reference information can be

displayed in uncompiled state.

Section 10.1

Local Device Batch Read

The function which reads local device data from the

programmable controller CPU and saves the data to the personal
computer is supported by Universal model QCPU.

Section 12.12

CC IE Field Diagnostics

The CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics is supported by

Universal model QCPU.

Section 18.4

Options

The following option is added.

[Tool] [Options] "PLC Read/Write" "When writing to PLC
after a Rebuild All operation, clear the device ranges set in the
Device/Label Auto-Assign setting to 0."

Operating environment

Windows 7 is supported.

Programmable controller
type

Remote I/O module is supported.

Ethernet adapter module

configuration tool

Ethernet adapter module configuration tool is supported.

Section 17.7

Label

The Read from CSV File and Write to CSV File functions are
supported.

(Simple)
(Structured)

Device comment

Bit-specified word device comments are supported by Universal

model QCPU.

Ladder

The template function in the inline structured text program is

supported.
The drag-and-drop operation from the ladder editor is changed.

(Intelligent)
Section 3.4.2

(Intelligent)

(Simple)
(Simple)
(Structured)

18

19

20

PRINTING

Section 4.2.8

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Write to PLC

Section 12.1.6
Section 12.2
(Simple)
(Structured)

Section 9.2.1
Section 12.1.3
(Simple)
Section 14.6.2

App - 115

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Version 1.31H

Section 3.2.7

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

The color and font settings can be reset to default.

17

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Colors and fonts

Version 1.24A

Version 1.40S

Reference

A
APPENDIX

Description

INDEX

Major function
added/changed

Version

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Major function
added/changed

Version

Description

SFC

"Act at Block Multi-Activated" can be set for Universal model

QCPU.

ST

The menu title [Create Template] is changed to [Display

Template].

(Structured)

The line connection function in the "Select Mode" is supported.

(Structured)

The automatic line connection function when entering ladder

symbols is supported.

(Structured)

Structured ladder

A compilation error does not occur when the same name is used
for label name and data name.
Compile

Opening existing projects

Projects in the workspace folder/project folder which is copied or

moved using Windows Explorer can be forcibly opened.

Section 21.2

Section 4.2.2

GX Developer option setting "Copy source/display source of

reference during comment edit" is utilized to GX Works2 option
setting: "Program Editor" "Ladder/SFC" "Comment"
"Reference of Device Comment".

Section 4.7.1

Verification

Intelligent function module parameters (initial setting, auto

refresh), QD75/LD75 positioning module set data can be verified
in the following verification function.
Project verification
Revision verification
Programmable controller CPU data verification

Section 4.2.7
Section 4.6.5
Section 12.2

Parameter

Cross Reference

Find/Replace

App - 116

The option to check whether devices are used exceeding the

device range assigned to labels in the data transfer instruction
such as DMOV is added.

(Simple)

Opening projects in other

formats

Version 1.40S

Version 1.48A

Reference

The extended setting of step relay (S device) is supported by

Universal model QCPU.

"CC IE Control Ext. Mode (Control station)" and "CC IE Control

Ext. Mode (Normal Station)" are added.

The loopback function setting is added to the supplementary

setting of CC-Link IE Field.

The Cross Reference window can be displayed vertically.

Section 10.1

The focus is not moved to the editor side after executing the
search/replace function.

Section 10.3.1
Section 10.3.2
Section 10.3.3
Section 10.3.4

The device search/replace function can be executed for indexed

devices without canceling "Digit" or "Double Word" option.

Section 10.3.1

The search function can be executed on different items when the

devices are being displayed on the ladder editor.

Find Device, Replace Device, Find Instruction, Replace

Instruction, Change Open/Close Contact, and Device Batch
Replace functions are supported by the inline structured text
function.

Section 10.3

Online Program Change

SFC block Online program change is supported by Universal

model QCPU.

Section 12.9.1

Simulation function

Local device data can be read.

Section 12.12

Global label

System labels are supported by FX3G, FX3U, and FX3UC.

(Simple)
(Structured)

Intelligent function module

QD65PD2 and LD77MH16 are supported.

(Intelligent)

Navigation window

Titles set in the property are displayed on the Navigation

window.
The color of the characters on the title bar is displayed in red
when an uncompiled data exists.

Section 3.2.5

Open other project

The secured steps for Online program change and the writing
range of device comment set in GX Developer can be utilized.

Section 4.6.1

Appendix 12 Functions Added Since Previous Versions

Section 11.8.1
Section 11.8.2

Device comment

Sample comments of input/output signals can be utilized for

intelligent function module.

Section 9.4.2

Ladder

The number of displayed contacts in a ladder program can be

set to 13, 17, or 21 contacts.
For FXCPU Simple project (with labels), execution program
can be divided into multiple programs.

Verify

The following functions are supported on the Verify Result

screen.
Copy data
Write data to CSV file

Section 4.2.7

The following information can be added when printing a ladder

program.
Device comment
Statement/note
Contact/coil usage destination

Section 20.8.1

The print preview and the print functions are supported on the
Device List screen.

Section 20.9
Section 20.7

Cross reference

For project without labels, a device on which a cursor is placed in

the program editor can be searched automatically.

Section 10.1

Write to PLC/Online
program change

'High-speed mode' is supported when writing symbolic

information to a programmable controller CPU.
A default setting of target memory can be set in the option
setting for Online program change.

Section 12.1.5

Watch window

The automatic registration function is supported.

The list of devices/labels registered to Watch window can be
write to/read from CSV files.

Section 14.6.2
Section 14.6.4

PLC diagnostics

When the error jump is executed from the PLC Diagnostics

screen, the PLC Diagnostics screen is down sized to be able to
specify the error location in the program easily.

Section 18.1

Intelligent function module

tool

The monitoring function (positioning monitor) dedicated to

QD75/LD75 positioning module is supported.
The user protocol library function is supported for the
predefined protocol support function.

Language selection

Characters of the following languages are not corrupted by

selecting a project language.
English
Chinese (simplified characters)
Korean

19

20

21

(Intelligent)

Section 3.3
Appendix 17

A
APPENDIX

Version 1.48A

18

INDEX

Print

(Simple)

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Ethernet connection between personal computer and GOT is

supported.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Transfer setting

Section 2.2
Section 2.3
Section 11.1

17

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

CC-Link IE Field Network board is supported.

Reference

PRINTING

Description

SETTING OPTIONS

Major function
added/changed

Version

App - 117

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Major function
added/changed

Version

Incorporation with GX
Developer

Intelligent function module

Reference

GX Developer can be installed at the same time as installation of

GX Works2.

Appendix 13

GX Developer is used for the following functions when the

programmable controller type is not supported in GX Works2.
Creating a new project
Opening a project
Opening a project in other formats
Creating a new project with data read from programmable
controller CPU

Section 4.2.1
Section 4.2.2
Section 4.7.1

QJ71MT91 and QJ71MB91 are supported.

(Intelligent)

Changes of function block names and deletions of function

blocks are automatically reflected to the target program.

Changes of the function block label setting is reflected to the

target program at compilation.

SFC

When copying and pasting SFC block data, whether to overwrite

block data with the same block number, or to add data with
unused block number can be selected.

Structured ladder

Operability of the Label Registration/Selection screen is

improved.

(Structure)

The print function to batch print project data is supported.

Chapter 20

Ladder

Print
Version 1.53F

Description

Parameter

Search/Replace

The print preview and the print functions are supported on the
Cross Reference screen.

Section 10.1

In the Network parameter, "CC IE Field (Master Station)" and "CC

IE Field (Local Station)" are supported by LCPU.

Section 6.2

The search/replace function can be executed for digit-specified

bit devices, devices with index setting, and devices with indirect
specification.
Note that either a searched device or a replaced device needs to
be a label when replacing devices.

Section 10.3

Devices, instructions, strings, contacts, and coils can be

searched from the shortcut menu by right-clicking the ladder
editor or SFC (Zoom) editor.
The default setting for "Find In" is changed to "(Entire Project)".
Debug

The debugging function can be executed during the program

simulation.

Section 16.6

LJ71GF11-T2 is supported.
CC IE Field Diagnostics

"Selected Station Communication Status Monitor" function is

supported by Ethernet adapter module.

Device/label automaticassign setting

Multiple devices can be set in the device/label automatic assign

setting for QCPU (Q mode) and LCPU.

(Simple)
(Structure)

Language selection

The applicability of data names and label names to be used in a

language-changed project is checked when selecting the
language.
The applicability of language of the data name in a copy
destination is checked when data are copied between projects.

Project

A project can be overwritten when a project is saved with an

existing project name.

Change PLC Type

L02-P and L26-PBT are supported.

Intelligent function module

Q64TCTTN, Q64TCRTN, Q64TCTTBWN, Q64TCRTBWN,

L60TCTT4, L60TCTT4BW, L60TCRT4, and L60TCRT4BW are
supported.

(Intelligent)

Comment

The automatic start function which converts the language at the

entry of device comments, statements and notes is supported.

Section 21.2

Device comment

When a device comment is edited in a ladder or SFC program,

the edited information is reflected to the referred device
comment.

Section 9.2.2

A project can be saved in the single file format.

Version 1.62Q

App - 118

Section 18.4

Section 4.2.3
Section 4.2

Appendix 12 Functions Added Since Previous Versions

"Read Mode", "Write Mode", "Monitor Mode", and "Monitor (Write

Mode)" are supported.
Line statements can be displayed on the Navigation window.
(Simple)

An SFC diagram and a Zoom editor can be tiled horizontally.

(Simple)

The jump step search function is added.

The display of the program language name is changed from
"Structured Ladder" to "Structured Ladder/FBD".
Structured ladder/FBD

The function to display/hide the left power rail is added.

(Structure)

Labels and devices assigned to labels can be displayed

simultaneously.
Label

The program does not become in an uncompiled status even

when information in "Comment" and "Remark" is changed.
Cells can be selected and copied on the label editor.

Version 1.62Q

Print

The following data can be batch printed.

Cover
PLC parameter
Network parameter
Structured ladder/FBD
Device memory
Device initial value
TC setting value
Device list
Cross reference
Project content list
Product information list

(Simple)
(Structure)

20
Chapter 20

21

When printing ladder programs, blank device comment lines are

not printed in the default setting.
Parameter

The simple PLC communication setting is supported by LCPU.

The serial communication setting is supported by QnUD(H)CPU.

Section 6.1
Section 6.1.1

When searching for devices in a specified program, device

comments can be entered in the device list.
Device List

Search/Replace

When searching for devices in a specified program, device

comments of devices which are not used in the program can be
deleted.
The function to search/replace devices/labels/instructions
downward from the top of the editor is added.

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

SFC

"Read Mode", "Write Mode", "Monitor Mode", and "Monitor (Write

Mode)" are supported.

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

Entry or deletion of horizontal line can be stopped at the

instruction or vertical line.

PRINTING

The initial value for the Enter HLine screen and the Delete HLine
screen can be set to "1".

Section 10.2

SETTING OPTIONS

Ladder

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Reference

Section 10.3

Data can also be searched in other programs in the project with

the space key search function on the ladder editor.

(Simple)

Write to PLC/Read from

PLC

Symbolic information can be written to/read from a

programmable controller CPU with FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or
later.

Section 12.1

CC IE Field Diagnostics

The configuration including CC-Link IE Field Network

communication units can be diagnosed.

Section 18.4

Block password

Execution programs can be protected on FX3U/FX3UC version

3.00 or later.

Section 4.11

Intelligent Function Module

Tool

The sensor correction function of temperature control module is

supported.

(Intelligent)

Help

The MELSOFT help function is supported.

Section 3.4

App - 119

APPENDIX

Description

INDEX

Major function
added/changed

Version

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Major function
added/changed

Version

Version 1.64S

App - 120

Description

Reference

Product Makeup

Data are supplied with two CD-ROMs.

Operation Environment

Required HDD free space for the installation is changed to 2.5GB

or more.

GX Works2
Installation
Instructions

Intelligent Function Module

QD75P1N, QD75P2N, QD75P4N, QD75D1N, QD75D2N, and

QD75D4N are supported.

(Intelligent)

Print

Print job output can be selected.

Print conditions for device memory data are added.
Whether to print or not to print 'start destination block' can be
selected on the SFC block list.
Setting values of timer, retentive timer, and counter can be
printed according to devices when printing TC setting values.

Chapter 20

Parameter

For LCPU, "Hub Module" can be selected for the I/O

assignment setting on PLC parameter.

Intelligent Function Module

Data

QD75/LD75 positioning module data can be saved to/read from

the file.

(Intelligent)

Device comment

For LCPU, bit-specified word device comment is supported.

Device comments can be saved to/read from the file.

Section 9.2.1
Section 12.1.3

Transfer setting

A personal computer can be connected to a programmable

controller CPU via a phone line.

Section 11.9

Verify

Verification of device comments and device memory data is

supported by the project verification and revision verification.
Verification of device comments, device memory data, and file
registers is supported by the Verify with PLC function.

Section 4.2.7
Section 4.6.5
Section 12.2

System monitor

For LCPU, extension blocks can be monitored.

Section 18.7

Section 6.1.1

Appendix 13 Procedure to Use GX Works2 Unsupported Programmable Controller Type

Head

FX

For programmable controller types which are not supported in GX Works2 (CPUs such as ACPU, QnACPU,
Process CPU, Redundant CPU, and Safety CPU), use GX Developer.
When GX Developer Version 8.95Z or later is installed, and a new project is created in GX Works2 with a
selection of an unsupported programmable controller type, GX Developer starts automatically and a new
project is created. (
Section 4.2.1)

Appendix 13.1 Installing GX Developer

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Q CPU L CPU Remote

17

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Appendix 13 Procedure to Use GX Works2 Unsupported Programmable Controller Type

GX Developer can be installed at the same time as the installation of GX Works2.

Operating procedure

1.

Check "Install GX Developer" on the following screen displayed during the

installation of GX Works2.

20

PRINTING

Check the items under "Select Components" as necessary.

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

SETTING OPTIONS

21

Click the

button, and continue the installation.

GX Developer is installed after GX Works2 is installed.

Installing updated version of GX Works2

When installing GX Developer at the same time as the installation of updated version of GX Works2, the product
version of GX Developer needs to be installed in advance.
When the product version of GX Developer is not installed, install GX Developer from the product version CDROM, or install GX Developer included on the GX Works2 CD-ROM (Disc 1) before installing the updated version
of GX Works2.
For installing GX Developer included on the GX Works2 CD-ROM (Disc 1), refer to Appendix 13.2.

Appendix 13.1 Installing GX Developer

App - 121

INDEX

2.

APPENDIX

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 13.2 Installing GX Developer separately

Install GX Developer included on the GX Works2 CD-ROM (Disc 1) by the following procedure.

Operating procedure

Execute '\SUPPORT\GXD1\Setup.exe' on the CD-ROM (Disc 1).

The installation of GX Developer starts.
For details of the installation procedure, refer to the following manual.
Use the product ID of GX Works2 for the installation.
GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual (Startup)

Appendix 13.3 Utilizing programs of GX Works2 unsupported

programmable controller type in GX Works2
Programs of GX Works2 unsupported programmable controller type created with GX Developer can be
utilized in GX Works2 by the following procedure.
The following is an example of utilizing an ACPU program created with GX Developer in the QCPU (Q
mode) project of GX Works2.

Operating procedure

1.

Change the programmable controller type of the project from ACPU to QCPU (Q
mode) with GX Developer.
To change the programmable controller type, select [Project] [Change PLC type].

2.

Save the project with GX Developer.

To save the project, select [Project] [Save As].

3.

With GX Works2, read the project for QCPU (Q mode) created with GX Developer.
To read a GX Developer project with GX Works2, select [Project] [Open Other Data] [Open
Other Project]. (

App - 122

Section 4.7.1)

Appendix 13.2 Installing GX Developer separately

Appendix 14 Precautions on Installation

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains the precautions on installation.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Appendix 14 Precautions on Installation

Installing a MELSOFT product for the first time

At the first installation of a MELSOFT product, the following screen may be displayed during
installation. To continue the installation, click the
button on the Software Installation
screen. (We have checked the operation and assured that the system operates without any problems
by performing this procedure.)
+

PRINTING

20

SETTING OPTIONS

21

APPENDIX

INDEX

The Software Installation screen may be displayed behind another screen. Press the
keys to bring it to the front.

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

App - 123

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Procedure for continuing installation when it is not completed correctly

When the installation of a MELSOFT product or another software is not completed correctly, the
following screen is displayed and the installation cannot continue unless the personal computer is
restarted.
In this case, restart the personal computer and start the installation again.

App - 124

Appendix 14 Precautions on Installation

When installing on Windows Vista, the following screen may be displayed after the completion of the
installation. In this case, select "This program installed correctly" and restart the personal computer.

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Precautions when installing on Windows Vista

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

When "Reinstall using recommended settings" is erroneously selected, the Windows XP SP2
compatibility mode is automatically set. Disable the Windows XP SP2 compatibility mode by following
the procedure described below, and perform the reinstallation.

Operating procedure

1.

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

20

Right-click on the setup.exe icon of the installation

target in the Windows explorer.

2.

Click the
<<Compatibility>> tab.

3.

Clear the "Run this program in compatibility mode

PRINTING

The setup Properties screen is displayed.

button on the

SETTING OPTIONS

21

Click the

button.

INDEX

4.

button.
APPENDIX

for:" check box and click the

App - 125

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 15 USB driver installation

In order to communicate with a programmable controller CPU via USB, a USB driver needs to be installed.
The following explains the procedure of USB driver installation.

When using Windows 2000 Professional

Operating procedure

1.

Connect the personal computer and the programmable controller CPU with a USB
cable, and then turn on the programmable controller CPU.

2.

The Found New Hardware Wizard screen is displayed. Select "Specify a location".

3.

Click the
button and set "Easysocket\USBdrivers" in the folder where GX
Works2 has been installed to "Copy manufacturer's files from:", and then click the
button. If multiple MELSOFT products are installed previously, refer to
their installed location.

Precautions when installing USB driver

If the USB driver cannot be installed, confirm the following Windows settings.
If "Block - Prevent installation of unsigned files" is selected under [Control Panel] - [System] - [Hardware] [Driver Subscription], the USB driver may not be installed.
Select "Ignore - Install all files, regardless of file signature", or "Warn - Display a message before installing an
unsigned files" in [Driver Subscription], and execute the USB driver installation.

App - 126

Appendix 15 USB driver installation

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

When using Windows XP

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

Connect the personal computer and the programmable controller CPU with a USB
cable, and then turn on the programmable controller CPU.

2.

The Found New Hardware Wizard screen is displayed. Select "Install from a list or
specific location (Advanced)".

3.

Select "Search for the best driver in these locations" on the displayed screen.
Check "Include this location in the search", and then set "Easysocket\USBdrivers"
in the folder where GX Works2 has been installed. If multiple MELSOFT products
are installed previously, refer to their installed location.

20

PRINTING

1.

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

Operating procedure

Precautions when installing USB driver

A
APPENDIX

If the USB driver cannot be installed, confirm the following Windows settings.
If "Block - Never install unsigned driver software" is selected under [Control Panel] - [System] - [Hardware] [Driver Signing], the USB driver may not be installed.
Select "Ignore - Install the software anyway and don't ask for my approval", or "Warn - Prompt me each time to
choose an action" in [Driver Signing], and execute the USB driver installation.

SETTING OPTIONS

21

INDEX

App - 127

GX Works2

APPENDIX

When using Windows Vista

Operating procedure

1.

Connect the personal computer and the programmable controller CPU with a USB
cable, and then turn on the programmable controller CPU.

2.

The Found New Hardware screen is displayed. Select "Locate and install driver
software (recommended)".

3.

Select "Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)" on the Found New
Hardware screen.

4.

Specify "Easysocket\USBdrivers" in the folder where GX Works2 has been installed

on the displayed screen. If multiple MELSOFT products are installed previously,
refer to their installed location. Check "Include subfolders".

Precautions when installing USB driver

When the Windows cant verify the publisher of this driver software screen is displayed during the installation,
select "Install this driver software anyway".

App - 128

Appendix 15 USB driver installation

17
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

When using Windows 7

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

Connect the personal computer and the programmable controller CPU with a USB
cable, and then turn on the programmable controller CPU.

2.

From Windows Control Panel, select [System and Security] - [Device Manager].
Right-click "Unknown device" and click "Update Driver Software".

3.

The Update Driver Software screen is displayed. Select "Browse my computer for
driver software" and specify "Easysocket\USBdrivers" in the folder where GX
Works2 has been installed on the displayed screen. If multiple MELSOFT products
are installed previously, refer to their installed location.

20

21
SETTING OPTIONS

1.

PRINTING

Operating procedure

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

19

APPENDIX

INDEX

App - 129

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 16

Precautions When Using English Version of GX Works2

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

FX

This section explains the precautions when using project data, which is created in Japanese version of
GX Works2, in English version of GX Works2.
Refer to the precautions described in this section when using Japanese version of GX Works2 Version
1.42U or earlier, or English version of GX Works2 Version 1.44W or earlier.
Note that, however, project data created in Japanese version of GX Works2 Version 1.45X or later
which satisfy the following conditions can be used in English version of GX Works2 Version 1.48A or
later.
Data names listed in the section 'Section Appendix 16.1' match with the project language selected for
the "Language Selection" function.
The font of the project language selected for the "Language Selection" function is installed in the
operating system.
Use the programmable controller types applicable to English version of GX Works2 when using project
data created in Japanese version of GX Works2 in English version of GX Works2.

Appendix 16.1 Data to which double byte character and half-width

Japanese kana character are applicable
The following tables show all data to which double byte characters are applicable. When data described
in the following table contains a double byte character, any symptom described in Appendix 16.2 occur.
When using Japanese version of GX Works2 Version 1.42U or earlier, or English version of GX Works2
Version 1.44W or earlier, refer to the precautions in Appendix 16.2.
However, if a project data created in Japanese version of GX Works2 satisfies the following conditions,
the project can be used in English version of GX Works2 Version 1.48A or later without any symptom
described in Appendix 16.2.
When the language used for data with indicated in the 'Project language is unchangeable' column
of the following table matches with the project language set for "Language Selection".
When the font of the specified project language is installed to the operating system.
Note that; however, when data other than alphanumeric character is used for the data with indicated
in the 'Project language is unchangeable' column of the following table, an error occurs at the change of
project language for Japanese version of GX Works2 Version 1.45X or later. Change the project
language after correcting the data name to match the changed project language.
Data to which double byte character and half-width Japanese kana character are applicable
: Unchangeable -: Changeable
Item
Workspace

Project

Project revision

App - 130

Data name

Changeable/
unchangeable
project language

Workspace name

GX Works2 project name

GX Developer project name

Compressed project name

Property (Title/Comment)

Detailed information (Title/Comment)

Appendix 16.1 Data to which double byte character and half-width Japanese kana character are applicable

Appendix 16 Precautions When Using English Version of GX Works2

Changeable/
unchangeable
project language

Program name
Ladder, ST, Structured ladder/FBD, SFC (Zoom)

Statement/Note/Comment/Label name

FB instance name

SFC block name

SFC

SFC step/Transition comment

Property (Block information)

PLC parameter data

Network parameter data

Parameter

Property (Title/Comment)
Intelligent function module data
Device comment
Device memory
Device initial value

Intelligent function module data

Local device comment name

Device comment

Device memory name

Property (Title/Comment)

Device initial value name

Comment

Global label name/Structured data name

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

Program

Data name

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Item

17

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

: Unchangeable -: Changeable

20

Data type

Comment

Remark

Function block name/Function name

Property (Result Type)

Program file name/Task name

Program file/Task
(Structured project)

Program name
Comment

User library
(Structured project)
Intelligent function module tool
QD75/LD75 positioning module

Serial communication module

User library name

Library file name (*.SUL)

Property (Help path)

Wave trace file name

Location trace file name

Circuit trace data

Protocol setting file name

(Predefined protocol support function)

Manufacturer/Model/Protocol name/Packet
name/Element name
(Predefined protocol support function)

User data (Example: *.xls)

File name

Backup data for PLC Module Change Setting function

Title

Target memory for online operations

Title

IC memory card drive for IC memory card operation

Title

I/O system setting

I/O system setting file name

Appendix 16.1 Data to which double byte character and half-width Japanese kana character are applicable

21

App - 131

APPENDIX

FB/FUN

SETTING OPTIONS

Constant value

INDEX

Global label/Local label/Structure

PRINTING

Label name

GX Works2

APPENDIX

: Unchangeable -: Changeable
Item

CSV file that can be created in Diagnostic function

Shortcut key

App - 132

Data name

Changeable/
unchangeable
project language

Product information in System monitor

PLC diagnostics

Module error history

Template file name

Appendix 16.1 Data to which double byte character and half-width Japanese kana character are applicable

Appendix 16 Precautions When Using English Version of GX Works2

Item

Changeable/
unchangeable
project language

Data name
Label

Comment

PLC Module Change Setting

Title Setting

File Register

File Name

Comment File Used in a

Command

File Name

Initial Device Value

File Name

File for Local Device

File Name

PLC RAS

Breakdown History

File Name

Boot File

Data Name

PLC Name

PLC System

PLC File

Program

I/O Assignment

Program Name

I/O Assignment

Type

Base Setting

Model Name

Power Model Name

Extension Cable

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Tab name

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

: Unchangeable -: Changeable

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

PLC parameter data

20

Network parameter data

Parameter Name

Alias

Comment

Parameter Name

Station Inherent Parameters

Parameter Name

FTP Parameters

Login Name

SMTP Server Name

POP Server Name

Network Configuration Settings

Network Operation Settings
Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET

E-mail Setting
News Setting
CC-Link

Operation Setting

Attached File Name

Parameter Name

Intelligent function module data

: Unchangeable -: Changeable
Module type
Positioning module

Item
Positioning Data

Data name

Changeable/
unchangeable
project language

Positioning Comment

Initialization command

Telephone number

Serial communication module/

Modem interface module

Modem Function

User Register Frame Content

User registration frame

FL-net (OPCN-2) interface module

Parameter

Node name (Equipment name)

Message

Comment

Appendix 16.1 Data to which double byte character and half-width Japanese kana character are applicable

App - 133

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Network Range Assignment

Changeable/
unchangeable
project language

Data name

A
APPENDIX

Item

INDEX

Type

PRINTING

: Unchangeable -: Changeable

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 16.2 Precautions

The English version of GX Works2 (SW1DNC-GXW2-E) does not support double byte character and
half-width Japanese kana character. Therefore, when using the project data, which has been created in
the Japanese version of GX Works2 (SW1DNC-GXW2-J) using double byte character or half-width
Japanese kana character, in the English version of GX Works2, change all the double byte character
and half-width Japanese kana character to single byte alphanumeric character in the Japanese version
of GX Works2. After characters are changed, execute [Compile] [Rebuild All] or [Build] in the
Japanese version of GX Works2 and save the project in a condition without any errors.
The following are the precautions when reading project data, in which double byte character or halfwidth Japanese kana character is used, from the programmable controller CPU.
The symbolic information created in the Japanese version of GX Works2 and written to the
programmable controller CPU, cannot be read to the English version of GX Works2. In this case,
save the project created in the Japanese version of GX Works2 using the English version of GX
Works2, then write the symbolic information to the programmable controller CPU.

Symptom example

The following are examples when using the project data, which is created using double byte character
or half-width Japanese kana character, in the English version of GX Works2.

App - 134

Appendix 16.2 Precautions

Appendix 16 Precautions When Using English Version of GX Works2

When double byte character or half-width Japanese kana character is set in the statement or label,
they are displayed as garbled characters.

<Japanese version of GX Works2>

<English version of GX Works2>

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Displayed as garbled characters

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

When double byte character or half-width Japanese kana character is used in data names of user
library files, data names cannot be displayed and user library cannot be operated.

<Japanese version of GX Works2>

<English version of GX Works2>

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Data name is not displayed

PRINTING

20

When opening saved project data in which double byte character or half-width Japanese kana
character is used in workspace names or project names, the message shown below is displayed
and the workspace cannot be opened.

<English version of GX Works2>

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Data cannot be opened

APPENDIX

Compilation error
When compiling the project data in which double byte character or half-width Japanese kana
character is used in label names, compilation error occurs and compilation cannot be completed
normally.

Appendix 16.2 Precautions

INDEX

<English version of GX Works2>

App - 135

GX Works2

APPENDIX

Appendix 17 Precautions for Selecting Project Language

Q CPU L CPU Remote

Head

This section explains the precautions for selecting a project language.

'language of GX Works2' in the table indicates the language of installed GX Works2.
Category

Item
Windows 2000

Precautions
All characters of the selected language are corrupted
when the language package is not installed.
The operation is ensured for Japanese language only.

OS

Windows XP
Windows Vista
Windows 7

Programmable
File name
controller CPU

All characters of the selected language are corrupted

when the language package is not installed.
All characters of the selected language are corrupted
when the language package is not installed.
The language package is pre-installed.
When a file with a name using other than Japanese
characters or one-byte alphanumeric characters is written
to a programmable controller CPU, the file cannot be read
from the programmable controller CPU, and the
performance of the online function may not be normal.
When using GX Works2 in Japanese language, check the
following settings.
"Language for non-Unicode programs"*1 of Windows
operating system is set to Japanese.
The project language is set to Japanese under [Tool]
[Language Selection] in GX Works2.

Operation after Language of Windows operating

system and 'language of GX Works2' are
installation
different.

When using the following functions, use alphanumeric

characters or Japanese characters for folder names and
file names.
Open data in other format
Save project in GX Developer format
Read/write IC memory card
Local device batch read + save CSV
For "Language for non-Unicode programs"*1 setting, set
the same language as the one set for the 'language of GX
Works2' in advance. By this setting, error messages can
be displayed in the 'language of GX Works2'.

Mixing different languages

Entered
language

App - 136

Only one language with double-byte characters can be

used in a project. Japanese, Chinese (simplified
characters), and Korean cannot be mixed.
A language with one-byte characters and a language with
double byte characters can be mixed. For example,
English (one-byte alphanumeric characters) and
Japanese.

The operation is ensured only when the project language

which is set for the language selection is used. Do not use
When entering data in a language other characters of the language other than the one set for the
than the one set for the project language. project language.
Note that alphanumeric characters and one-byte symbols
can be used in all languages.

FX

Appendix 17 Precautions for Selecting Project Language

Function

Project
language
selection

[Verify]
Projects whose project languages are
different are verified.

When the same character strings with double-byte

character are verified, the result will be a match, however,
the character strings may not be displayed normally.
Select the same language for projects to be verified.

[Install]
User library which contains characters of
different language is imported to project.

The operation of user library import is ensured when the

project language set for the language selection is used for
user library file names and data in the user library.
User library which contains file names and data with
alphanumeric characters and one-byte symbol can be
used in a project in any language.

[Read from PLC], [Read IC Memory

Card]
Data contains characters in different
language is imported, and the Read from
PLC or Read IC Memory Card is
executed.

The operation of Read from PLC or Read IC Memory

Card function is ensured when the project language set
for the language selection is used for characters in a
target data.
Set the same language as the one used in a target data to
be read.
Target data of the data read function which contains
alphanumeric characters and one-byte symbol can be
used in a project in any language.

[Open Other Project]

The project language selected for
"Language Selection" and the operating
system language are different.

Other format projects which can be opened in GX Works2:

projects whose data name and label name are written in
alphanumeric code.

A language is selected while the project

is being displayed.

Screens which are opened from the Project view and the
User Library view are closed automatically when a
language is selected. Close all other open screens.
The selected language is applied by reopening the
screens.

Data names, label names

When characters other than alphanumeric characters are

used for data names and label names in a project before
selecting a project language, the operation is not ensured
after the language is selected.

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Displayed characters are different

depending on the font even when they
are the same character.

Displayed characters may be different between the ones

on the screen in which font can be changed and the ones
on the screen in which font cannot be changed. Change
the font on the Color and Font screen.
Example: With Korean is selected as the project
language, when "
" is entered in the label editor and a
" is displayed on the
compile error is performed, "
Output window.

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

Precautions
Including fixed characters such as menus, some of the
characters of Japanese and Chinese (simplified
characters) are displayed in smaller size.

20

PRINTING

Font

Item
Korean is selected for project language.
(Regarding the font 'BatangChe' which is
set automatically.)

21
SETTING OPTIONS

Category

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

Simulation function

Interaction with Ethernet adapter module

configuration tool

APPENDIX

Interaction with LCPU logging

configuration tool
Project language setting is invalidated.

Predefined protocol support function

*1 :

Set "Language for non-Unicode programs" by the following procedure.

[start] of Windows operating system [Control Panel] [Regional and Language Options]
<<Advanced>> "Language for non-Unicode programs".

App - 137

INDEX

Interaction with iQ Works

GX Works2

APPENDIX

MEMO

App - 138

INDEX

APPENDIX

SETTING OPTIONS

PRINTING

SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

INDEX
OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

17

18

19

20

21

Index - 1

GX Works2

INDEX
[A]
access authority .......................................................... 4-62
Access levels ............................................................... 4-54
accessing a programmable controller CPU ............ 11-2
accessing a programmable controller CPU via GOT
..................................................................................... 11-26
FXCPU ................................................................ 11-28
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU ......................... 11-27, 11-30

Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone

Line .............................................................................. 11-31
accessing the programmable controller CPU on the
host station ................................................................... 11-7
FXCPU .................................................................. 11-8
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU ....................................... 11-8
Acknowledge XY Assignment .........6-3, 6-14, 6-16, 6-18
Administrators .............................................................. 4-54
AJ65BT-R2N ................................................................ 2-11
All Find ........................................................................ 10-23
All Replace ................................................................. 10-23
Always ON ................................................................. 19-29
ASCII Code ............................................................. App-55
ATA card ......................................................... 12-27, 12-60
[B]
backup .......................................................................... 4-39
backup device memory .............................................. 15-6
block password .................................................. 4-64, 4-65
buffer memory ................................................... 14-6, 21-6
Build ................................................................................ 5-9
[C]
cable test .................................................................... 18-38
canceling keyword .................................................... 13-14
canceling password .......................................... 13-4, 13-9
CC-Link IE .................................................................... 6-16
change ........................................................................ 19-20
change open/closed contact ................................... 10-26
Change Project Type .................................................. 4-38
Changing colors .......................................................... 3-22
Changing fonts ............................................................ 3-22
Changing Modules Online ....................................... 18-94
Changing project data names ................................... 4-34
Characters for password ............................................ 6-25
Check Parameter ........................................................ 6-26
Clear All ........................................................................ 9-12
Closing projects ........................................................... 4-18
Comment verify type ................................................. 12-24
comments by program ................................................. 9-4
common comments ...................................................... 9-4
communication head module ............................ 6-9, 18-2
Communication test ........................... 18-19, 18-28, 18-37
compare destination ................................................. 19-11

Index - 2

compare source ........................................................ 19-11

Compatibility ................................ App-71, App-73, App-79
Compile .................................................................5-9, 21-8
Compile Condition ...................................................... 21-9
compression ................................................................ 4-15
condition ....................................................................... 19-4
Configurations for USB connection ............................ 2-4
connecting station information ................................ 18-45
Connection Channel List ............................................ 11-4
Connection Destination view ..................................... 3-18
Connection from an I/F Boards ................................. 2-12
Connection test ........................................................... 11-5
conventional debugging ............................................. 19-2
Copy .....................................................................4-33, 4-34
COS curve .................................................................. 19-20
Creating check sheets .............................................. 18-54
Creating projects ........................................................... 4-8
Cross Reference ......................................................... 10-2
Customizing shortcut keys ........................................ 3-24
cycle scan .................................................................. 19-20
[D]
data entry method for direct data entry ................. 19-13
Data Names .............................................................App-87
Data Paste ..........................................................4-33, 4-34
Data Security Setting .................................................. 4-62
debugging .................................................................... 15-2
debugging with I/O system setting function ............ 19-2
Delete ............................................................................ 4-34
Delete PLC Data ....................................................... 12-25
Delete PLC User Data .............................................. 12-27
Deleting Device Comments ..............................9-12, 9-15
Deleting projects ......................................................... 4-17
Deleting revision information ..................................... 4-43
Developers (Level1) ................................................... 4-54
Developers (Level2) ................................................... 4-54
Developers (Level3) ................................................... 4-54
device batch replace ................................................ 10-27
Device Comment .......................................................... 9-2
Device Comment Display Format ............................ 21-5
device comment editing mode .................................. 9-10
device comment to be referenced .............................. 9-5
Device Initial Values ..................................................... 8-2
device list .................................................................... 10-13
device memory .......................................................7-2, 8-5
device memory editor ................................................. 7-13
device of which a value is to be changed ............. 19-13
Device Specification screen .................................... 19-11
device test with execution condition ........................ 16-9
device value input ....................................................... 19-8
devices that can be replaced or batch replaced .. 10-19

........................................................................................17-5

English Version of GX Works2 ........................... App-130

Enter Device screen ..................................................19-16
Error History ...............................................................18-59
error history monitoring ............................................18-21
Error icons ..................................................................18-87
Error Information ..........................................................18-4
Ethernet adapter module ........................................... A-32
Ethernet Adapter Module Configuration Tool .......17-14
examples of device search ......................................10-18
examples of instruction search ................................10-22
execution type ........................................................ 4-5, 4-7
Export CSV Data .......................................................16-24
Export to GX Developer Format File .............. 4-52, 4-53
Export to ROM Format .............................................12-26
[F]
file under execution .....................................................19-8
Filtering condition ......................................................10-12
Filtering display ..........................................................10-11
Find ................................................................................7-14
Find All ........................................................................10-15
find option .....................................................................10-9
Format types ................................................................17-5
Formatting a memory card .........................................17-5
FX series ...................................................................... A-31
[G]
global device comment .................................................9-2
GOT transparent function ........................................11-26
GX Configurator-QP ....................................................4-51

[L]
L series ........................................................................ A-31
Label Names ........................................................... App-87
label programming ........................................................1-5
ladder editing mode ....................................................9-11
Latch Data Backup ....................................................12-31
LED status ..................................................................18-60
link memory ..................................................................21-6
Link start/stop .............................................................18-29
Local comments ............................................................9-4
local device comment ...................................................9-3
Logging .......................................................................18-31
Logging in projects ......................................................4-61
logs .................................................................. 10-29, 10-31
Loop test .....................................................................18-15
loop test/transmission speed test ...........................18-50
Loopback test .............................................................18-74
[M]
Managing block passwords .......................................4-65
MELSECNET Diagnostics .......................................18-11
module error history collection function ..... 18-84, 18-85
Monitoring Interrupt Program List ...........................14-13
Monitoring line (host station) ...................................18-44
Monitoring Program List ...........................................14-10
Monitoring Value .........................................................21-6
Multiple word ..............................................................10-16
[N]
Navigation window .............................................. 3-4, 3-18
Network .......................................................................18-22
network event history ................................................18-40
Network Parameter .....................................................6-16
CC-Link ..................................................................6-23
CC-Link IE .............................................................6-20
Ethernet .................................................................6-22
MELSECNET/10 ..................................................6-21
MELSECNET/H ....................................................6-21
Remote I/O ............................................................6-22
Network route ...............................................................11-4
Network test ...............................................................18-13
New ...............................................................................4-31

Index - 3

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

keep .............................................................................19-14

DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

18

[K]

20

PRINTING

........................................................................................17-5

enabling Online program change of multiple blocks

instruction conversion list .................................... App-110

intelligent function module ............................. 4-37, 12-12
I/O system setting file ................................... 19-26, 19-29

21
SETTING OPTIONS

edit timing chart format ................................. 19-14, 19-16

enabling high-speed monitoring from another station

[I]

17

A
APPENDIX

[E]

GX Simulator .........................................19-9, 19-22, 19-29

GX Simulator2 ............................................................ A-31

INDEX

diagnosing bridge modules ......................................18-47

Diagnosing CC-Link and CC-Link/LT .....................18-44
Diagnosing CC-Link IE Controller Network ...........18-24
Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network ....................18-33
Diagnosing Ethernet .................................................18-57
Diagnosing Programmable Controller CPU .. 18-2, 18-7
digit .................................................................. 10-16, 10-18
direct data entry .........................................................19-11
disabled scans ...........................................................19-21
Display Format .............................................................21-6
Display Lines of Monitored Current Value ...............21-6
display size ...................................................................7-12
docking windows .........................................................3-15
double word .................................................... 10-18, 10-22
duplicated coil ..............................................................21-4

GX Works2

INDEX
number of contacts ..................................................... 21-5
number of scans ........................................................ 19-16
number of scans of timing chart ............................. 19-21
[O]
obtain transmission speed setting .......................... 18-50
Online Program Change ....................... 5-9, 12-37, 12-38
ON/OFF cycle ............................................................ 19-19
Opening existing projects .......................................... 4-11
Opening projects in other formats ............................ 4-48
option (find/replace) ...................................... 10-16, 10-23
Options ......................................................................... 21-2
Other station ................................................................ 11-3
other station information .......................................... 18-23
Other Station (Co-existence Network) ..................... 11-3
Other Station (Single Network) ................................. 11-3
[P]
parameter status ........................................... 18-58, 18-64
Parameter Verify Level ............................................. 12-23
Password ................................................. 13-2, 13-6, 13-12
paste ................................................................... 4-33, 4-34
PC side I/F ................................................................... 11-3
Performing Online program change in units of files

Read PLC User Data ................................................ 12-27

Rebuild All ...................................................................... 5-9
receive e-mail information ....................................... 18-61
Registering ........................................................13-12, 16-6
Registering and Monitoring Devices ...................... 14-14
Registering Keyword ................................................ 13-12
Registering Password .......................................13-2, 13-6
registering/canceling forced input/output .......16-6, 16-8
Registering/changing keyword ................................ 13-12
Remote I/O module ....................................................A-32
remote I/O module ................................... 6-10, 16-8, 18-2
Remote Operation ...................................................... 17-2
Remote Password ...................................................... 6-24
remove memory card ................................................. 17-2
Replace All ................................................................. 10-15
reserved station function enable ............................ 18-42
Resetting security ....................................................... 4-58
Restoring projects ....................................................... 4-41
Restrictions when Changing Programmable Controller
Types ........................................................................App-90
Result .......................................................................... 10-29
RS-232 cables ............................................................... 2-6
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU ......................................... 2-6
RS-422 ............................................................................ 2-7

..................................................................................... 12-42

PING test .................................................................... 18-69

PLC Direct Coupled Setting ...................................... 11-4
PLC Memory Operation .......................... 17-4, 17-6, 17-9
PLC Parameter .............................................................. 6-2
FXCPU .................................................................. 6-12
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU ......................................... 6-5
PLC Status Information .............................................. 18-4
Precautions on replacing ......................................... 10-22
Print Preview .............................................................. 20-38
Print Window Preview .............................................. 20-43
Printing ................................................. 20-39, 20-44, 20-52
Program Memory Batch Download ........................ 12-29
programming languages ............................................ 2-19
Project view .................................................................. 3-18
properties ..................................................................... 4-35
Push Button ............................................................... 19-29
[Q]
Q series ....................................................................... A-31
QnH -> QnU Conversion Support Tool .................... 4-30
[R]
Read Device Memory from PLC ............................... 7-15
Read from CSV File .................................................... 9-16
Read from PLC ............................................................ 12-2
Read from PLC (trace data) .................................... 16-25
Read PLC Data ........................................................... 6-11

Index - 4

[S]
sample comment ......................................................... 9-13
Sampling Trace ......................................................... 16-13
Saving projects ............................................................ 4-14
Saving projects under the specified name .............. 4-13
Saving the selection status of the files .................... 12-5
secured steps for Online program change .............. 12-6
Security ................................................................4-47, 4-54
Select station network device status display
..........................................................................18-27, 18-36
selected station communication status monitor ... 18-36
selected station error information ........................... 18-45
selected station information .................................... 18-45
send e-mail information ............................................ 18-62
sequence action .......................................................... 19-4
Set Clock .................................................................... 17-10
Setting character strings ............................................ 7-10
Setting Connection Destinations .............................. 11-2
Setting device values by setting device range ......... 7-8
Setting device values in units of points ..................... 7-7
Setting Printer .....................................................20-4, 20-7
Setting verification test ............................................. 18-16
Setting/changing block passwords ........................... 4-66
shortcut keys ..............................................................App-2
Simple project ..............................................................A-33
simulation function ..................................................App-21

target simulator setting ...............................................19-9

template .............................................................. 3-25, 3-26
temporary error invalid station setting/restore ......18-43
timing chart .................................................................19-14
timing chart data file ..................................................19-22
timing chart input ............................................. 19-8, 19-14
timing setting ..............................................................19-19
timings of bit devices ................................................19-19
timings of word devices ............................................19-20
Tool hint ..........................................................................3-9
toolbars ...............................................................3-5, App-2
Trace Setting .................................................. 16-14, 16-15
trigonometric function ...............................................19-20

[W]
warning .........................................................................21-8
warning codes ..............................................................21-8
Watch ..........................................................................14-14
windows ........................................................................3-14
word .............................................................................10-22
Word Device Setting screen ....................................19-13
work window ...................................................................3-9
Write Device Memory to PLC ....................................7-15
Write PLC User Data ................................................12-27
Write to CSV File .........................................................9-15
Write to PLC .................................................................12-2
Write to PLC (trace data) ............................. 16-25, 16-28

OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER CPU

18
DIAGNOSING
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER STATUS

Verify with PLC ..........................................................12-20

Verifying project data ..................................................4-18
Verifying revisions .......................................................4-43

19
SIMULATING
OPERATIONS OF
EXTERNAL DEVICES

[V]

17

20

[Extension]
*.DAT ...........................................................................19-22
*.IOS ................................................................ 19-26, 19-29

PRINTING

[T]

Utilizing existing data to set parameters of multiple

CPU ...............................................................................6-11
Utilizing Projects ..........................................................4-45

21
SETTING OPTIONS

SIN curve ....................................................................19-20

Sorting data ..................................................................3-19
special debugging sequence program .....................19-2
Split into volumes of the following size ....................4-15
SRAM card .................................................................12-60
standard ROM ............................................................12-27
Start Monitoring ...........................................................14-5
Start Trace ..................................................................16-20
Station order check test ............................................18-18
status bar ......................................................................3-21
status logging .............................................................18-52
status of each connection ............................ 18-59, 18-65
status of each protocol .............................................18-60
Structured project ....................................................... A-33
Switch Chart/Detail ....................................................16-22
Switching display format ............................................7-12
Symbolic information ................................................12-15
System image(s) ..........................................................11-5
System Monitor .............................................. 18-78, 18-91

[U]
APPENDIX

Unlocking a remote password ...................................12-5

Unlocking block passwords .......................................4-67
unlocking keyword temporarily ................................13-15
unlocking password temporarily .................... 13-5, 13-10
unpacking ........................................................... 4-15, 4-16
unpacking divided compressed files ........................4-17
update ...........................................................................11-4
USB cables .....................................................................2-4
FX3U/FX3UC .............................................................2-5
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU .........................................2-4
USB/Serial Port ..............................................................2-2
User Library view .........................................................3-18
User Management ............................................. 4-57, 4-58
Users .............................................................................4-54
Utilizing Data ................................................................4-45

INDEX

Index - 5

Microsoft, Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.
All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies.